202 files changed, 12880 insertions, 6252 deletions
diff --git a/doc/Access.3 b/doc/Access.3
index cab6466..98d6635 100644
--- a/doc/Access.3
+++ b/doc/Access.3
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_Stat\fR(\fIpath\fR, \fIstatPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "struct stat" *statPtr in
+.AS "struct stat" *statPtr out
 .AP char *path in
 Native name of the file to check the attributes of.
 .AP int mode in
diff --git a/doc/AddErrInfo.3 b/doc/AddErrInfo.3
index 7351dce..45a0c41 100644
--- a/doc/AddErrInfo.3
+++ b/doc/AddErrInfo.3
@@ -6,17 +6,29 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH Tcl_AddErrorInfo 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_AddErrorInfo 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo, Tcl_AddErrorInfo, Tcl_SetObjErrorCode, Tcl_SetErrorCode, Tcl_SetErrorCodeVA, Tcl_PosixError, Tcl_LogCommandInfo \- record information about errors
+Tcl_GetReturnOptions, Tcl_SetReturnOptions, Tcl_AddErrorInfo, Tcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo, Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo, Tcl_SetObjErrorCode, Tcl_SetErrorCode, Tcl_SetErrorCodeVA, Tcl_PosixError, Tcl_LogCommandInfo \- retrieve or record information about errors and other return options
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.VS 8.5
 .sp
-\fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR(\fIinterp, message, length\fR)
+Tcl_Obj *
+\fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR(\fIinterp, code\fR)
+.sp
+int 
+\fBTcl_SetReturnOptions\fR(\fIinterp, options\fR)
+.VE 8.5
 .sp
 \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR(\fIinterp, message\fR)
+.VS 8.5
+.sp
+\fBTcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr\fR)
+.VE 8.5
+.sp
+\fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR(\fIinterp, message, length\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_SetObjErrorCode\fR(\fIinterp, errorObjPtr\fR)
 .sp
@@ -24,38 +36,47 @@ Tcl_AddObjErrorInfo, Tcl_AddErrorInfo, Tcl_SetObjErrorCode, Tcl_SetErrorCode, Tc
 .sp
 \fBTcl_SetErrorCodeVA\fR(\fIinterp, argList\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_PosixError\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_LogCommandInfo\fR(\fIinterp, script, command, commandLength\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *message
+.AS Tcl_Interp commandLength
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to record information.
+.AP int code 
+The code returned from script evaluation.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *options
+A dictionary of return options.
 .AP char *message in
+For \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR,
+this is a conventional C string to append to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR return option.
 For \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR,
-this points to the first byte of an array of bytes
-containing a string to record in the \fBerrorInfo\fR variable.
+this points to the first byte of an array of \fIlength\fR bytes
+containing a string to append to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR return option.
 This byte array may contain embedded null bytes
 unless \fIlength\fR is negative.
-For \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR,
-this is a conventional C string to record in the \fBerrorInfo\fR variable.
+.VS 8.5
+.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
+A message to be appended to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR return option
+in the form of a Tcl_Obj value.
+.VE 8.5
 .AP int length in
 The number of bytes to copy from \fImessage\fR when
-setting the \fBerrorInfo\fR variable.
+appending to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR return option.
 If negative, all bytes up to the first null byte are used.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *errorObjPtr in
-This variable \fBerrorCode\fR will be set to this value.
+The \fB\-errorcode\fR return option will be set to this value.
 .AP char *element in
-String to record as one element of \fBerrorCode\fR variable.
+String to record as one element of the \fB\-errorcode\fR return option.
 Last \fIelement\fR argument must be NULL.
 .AP va_list argList in
 An argument list which must have been initialized using
-\fBTCL_VARARGS_START\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" *script in
+\fBva_start\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
+.AP "const char" *script in
 Pointer to first character in script containing command (must be <= command)
-.AP "CONST char" *command in
+.AP "const char" *command in
 Pointer to first character in command that generated the error
 .AP int commandLength in
 Number of bytes in command; -1 means use all bytes up to first null byte
@@ -63,70 +84,156 @@ Number of bytes in command; -1 means use all bytes up to first null byte
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-These procedures are used to manipulate two Tcl global variables
-that hold information about errors.
-The variable \fBerrorInfo\fR holds a stack trace of the
+.VS 8.5
+The \fBTcl_SetReturnOptions\fR and \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR
+routines expose the same capabilities as the \fBreturn\fR and
+\fBcatch\fR commands, respectively, in the form of a C interface.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR retrieves the dictionary of return options
+from an interpreter following a script evaluation.
+Routines such as \fBTcl_Eval\fR are called to evaluate a
+script in an interpreter.  These routines return an integer
+completion code.  These routines also leave in the interpreter
+both a result and a dictionary of return options generated
+by script evaluation.  Just as \fBTcl_GetObjResult\fR retrieves
+the result, \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR retrieves the dictionary
+of return options.  The integer completion code should be
+passed as the \fIcode\fR argument to \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR
+so that all required options will be present in the dictionary.
+Specifically, a \fIcode\fR value of \fBTCL_ERROR\fR will
+ensure that entries for the keys \fB\-errorinfo\fR,
+\fB\-errorcode\fR, and \fB\-errorline\fR will appear in the
+dictionary.  Also, the entries for the keys \fB\-code\fR
+and \fB\-level\fR will be adjusted if necessary to agree
+with the value of \fIcode\fR.  The \fB(Tcl_Obj *)\fR returned
+by \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR points to an unshared
+\fBTcl_Obj\fR with reference count of zero.  The dictionary
+may be written to, either adding, removing, or overwriting
+any entries in it, with the need to check for a shared object.
+.PP
+A typical usage for \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR is to
+retrieve the stack trace when script evaluation returns
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR, like so:
+.CS
+int code = Tcl_Eval(interp, script);
+if (code == TCL_ERROR) {
+    Tcl_Obj *options = Tcl_GetReturnOptions(interp, code);  
+    Tcl_Obj *key = Tcl_NewStringObj("-errorinfo", -1);
+    Tcl_Obj *stackTrace;
+    Tcl_IncrRefCount(key);
+    Tcl_DictObjGet(NULL, options, key, &stackTrace);
+    Tcl_DecrRefCount(key);
+    /* Do something with stackTrace */
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetReturnOptions\fR sets the return options
+of \fIinterp\fR to be \fIoptions\fR.  If \fIoptions\fR
+contains any invalid value for any key, TCL_ERROR will
+be returned, and the interp result will be set to an
+appropriate error message.  Otherwise, a completion code
+in agreement with the \fB\-code\fR and \fB\-level\fR
+keys in \fIoptions\fR will be returned.
+.PP
+As an example, Tcl's \fBreturn\fR command itself could
+be implemented in terms of \fBTcl_SetReturnOptions\fR
+like so:
+.CS
+if ((objc % 2) == 0) { /* explicit result argument */
+    objc--;
+    Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, objv[objc]);
+}
+return Tcl_SetReturnOptions(interp, Tcl_NewListObj(objc-1, objv+1));
+.CE
+(It is not really implemented that way.  Internal access
+privileges allow for a more efficient alternative that meshes
+better with the bytecode compiler.)
+.PP
+Note that a newly created \fBTcl_Obj\fR may be passed
+in as the \fIoptions\fR argument without the need to tend
+to any reference counting.  This is analogous to
+\fBTcl_SetObjResult\fR.
+.PP
+While \fBTcl_SetReturnOptions\fR provides a general interface
+to set any collection of return options, there are a handful
+of return options that are very frequently used.  Most 
+notably the \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR return
+options should be set properly when the command procedure
+of a command returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  Tcl provides several
+simpler interfaces to more directly set these return options.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
+The \fB\-errorinfo\fR option holds a stack trace of the
 operations that were in progress when an error occurred,
 and is intended to be human-readable.
-The variable \fBerrorCode\fR holds a list of items that
+The \fB\-errorcode\fR option holds a list of items that
 are intended to be machine-readable.
-The first item in \fBerrorCode\fR identifies the class of
+The first item in the \fB\-errorcode\fR value identifies the class of
 error that occurred
 (e.g. POSIX means an error occurred in a POSIX system call)
-and additional elements in \fBerrorCode\fR hold additional pieces
+and additional elements hold additional pieces
 of information that depend on the class.
-See the Tcl overview manual entry for details on the various
-formats for \fBerrorCode\fR.
+See the tclvars manual entry for details on the various
+formats for the \fB\-errorcode\fR option used by
+Tcl's built-in commands.
 .PP
-The \fBerrorInfo\fR variable is gradually built up as an
+The \fB\-errorinfo\fR option value is gradually built up as an
 error unwinds through the nested operations.
-Each time an error code is returned to \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR
-(or \fBTcl_Eval\fR, which calls \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR)
-it calls the procedure \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR to add
-additional text to \fBerrorInfo\fR describing the
+Each time an error code is returned to \fBTcl_Eval\fR, or
+any of the routines that performs script evaluation,
+the procedure \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR is called to add
+additional text to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR value describing the
 command that was being executed when the error occurred.
 By the time the error has been passed all the way back
 to the application, it will contain a complete trace
 of the activity in progress when the error occurred.
 .PP
 It is sometimes useful to add additional information to
-\fBerrorInfo\fR beyond what can be supplied automatically
-by \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR.
-\fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR may be used for this purpose:
-its \fImessage\fR and \fIlength\fR arguments describe an additional
-string to be appended to \fBerrorInfo\fR.
-For example, the \fBsource\fR command calls \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR
-to record the name of the file being processed and the
-line number on which the error occurred;
-for Tcl procedures, the procedure name and line number
+the \fB\-errorinfo\fR value beyond what can be supplied automatically
+by the script evaluation routines.
+\fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR may be used for this purpose:
+its \fImessage\fR argument is an additional
+string to be appended to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR option.
+For example, when an error arises during the \fBsource\fR command,
+the procedure \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR is called to
+record the name of the file being processed and the
+line number on which the error occurred.
+Likewise, when an error arises during evaluation of a
+Tcl procedures, the procedure name and line number
 within the procedure are recorded, and so on.
-The best time to call \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR is just after
-\fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR has returned \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
-In calling \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR, you may find it useful to
-use the \fBerrorLine\fR field of the interpreter (see the
-\fBTcl_Interp\fR manual entry for details).
-.PP
-\fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR resembles \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR
-but differs in initializing \fBerrorInfo\fR from the string
-value of the interpreter's result
-if the error is just starting to be logged.
-It does not use the result as a Tcl object
-so any embedded null characters in the result
-will cause information to be lost.
-It also takes a conventional C string in \fImessage\fR
-instead of \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR's counted string.
+The best time to call \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR is just after
+a script evaluation routine has returned \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
+The value of the \fB\-errorline\fR return option (retrieved
+via a call to \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR) often makes up
+a useful part of the \fImessage\fR passed to \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR.
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo\fR is an alternative interface to the
+same functionality as \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR.  \fBTcl_AppendObjToErrorInfo\fR
+is called when the string value to be appended to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR option
+is available as a \fBTcl_Obj\fR instead of as a \fBchar\fR array.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
+\fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR is nearly identical
+to \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR, except that it has an additional \fIlength\fR
+argument.  This allows the \fImessage\fR string to contain 
+embedded null bytes.  This is essentially never a good idea.
+If the \fImessage\fR needs to contain the null character \fBU+0000\fR,
+Tcl's usual internal encoding rules should be used to avoid
+the need for a null byte.  If the \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR
+interface is used at all, it should be with a negative \fIlength\fR value.
 .PP
 The procedure \fBTcl_SetObjErrorCode\fR is used to set the
-\fBerrorCode\fR variable. \fIerrorObjPtr\fR contains a list object
-built up by the caller. \fBerrorCode\fR is set to this
-value. \fBTcl_SetObjErrorCode\fR is typically invoked just 
-before returning an error in an object command. If an error is
+\fB\-errorcode\fR return option to the list object \fIerrorObjPtr\fR 
+built up by the caller. 
+\fBTcl_SetObjErrorCode\fR is typically invoked just 
+before returning an error. If an error is
 returned without calling \fBTcl_SetObjErrorCode\fR or
 \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR the Tcl interpreter automatically sets
-\fBerrorCode\fR to \fBNONE\fR.
+the \fB\-errorcode\fR return option to \fBNONE\fR.
 .PP
 The procedure \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR is also used to set the
-\fBerrorCode\fR variable. However, it takes one or more strings to
+\fB\-errorcode\fR return option. However, it takes one or more strings to
 record instead of an object. Otherwise, it is similar to
 \fBTcl_SetObjErrorCode\fR in behavior.
 .PP
@@ -134,9 +241,10 @@ record instead of an object. Otherwise, it is similar to
 instead of taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_PosixError\fR
-sets the \fBerrorCode\fR variable after an error in a POSIX kernel call.
+sets the \fB\-errorcode\fR variable after an error in a POSIX kernel call.
 It reads the value of the \fBerrno\fR C variable and calls
-\fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR to set \fBerrorCode\fR in the \fBPOSIX\fR format.
+\fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR to set the \fB\-errorcode\fR return
+option in the \fBPOSIX\fR format.
 The caller must previously have called \fBTcl_SetErrno\fR to set
 \fBerrno\fR; this is necessary on some platforms (e.g. Windows) where Tcl
 is linked into an application as a shared library, or when the error
@@ -146,41 +254,44 @@ occurs in a dynamically loaded extension. See the manual entry for
 \fBTcl_PosixError\fR returns a human-readable diagnostic message
 for the error
 (this is the same value that will appear as the third element
-in \fBerrorCode\fR).
+in the \fB\-errorcode\fR value).
 It may be convenient to include this string as part of the
 error message returned to the application in
 the interpreter's result.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_LogCommandInfo\fR is invoked after an error occurs in an
 interpreter.  It adds information about the command that was being
-executed when the error occurred to the \fBerrorInfo\fR variable, and
-the line number stored internally in the interpreter is set.  On the
-first call to \fBTcl_LogCommandInfo\fR or \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR
-since an error occurred, the old information in \fBerrorInfo\fR is
-deleted.
+executed when the error occurred to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR value, and
+the line number stored internally in the interpreter is set.  
+.PP
+In older releases of Tcl, there was no \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR
+routine.  In its place, the global Tcl variables \fBerrorInfo\fR
+and \fBerrorCode\fR were the only place to retrieve the error
+information.  Much existing code written for older Tcl releases
+still access this information via those global variables.
 .PP
-It is important to call the procedures described here rather than
+It is important to realize that while reading from those
+global variables remains a supported way to access these
+return option values, it is important not to assume that
+writing to those global variables will properly set the
+corresponding return options.  It has long been emphasized
+in this manual page that it is important to 
+call the procedures described here rather than
 setting \fBerrorInfo\fR or \fBerrorCode\fR directly with
 \fBTcl_ObjSetVar2\fR.
-The reason for this is that the Tcl interpreter keeps information
-about whether these procedures have been called.
-For example, the first time \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR is called
-for an error, it clears the existing value of \fBerrorInfo\fR
-and adds the error message in the interpreter's result to the variable
-before appending \fImessage\fR;
-in subsequent calls, it just appends the new \fImessage\fR.
-When \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR is called, it sets a flag indicating
-that \fBerrorCode\fR has been set;
-this allows the Tcl interpreter to set \fBerrorCode\fR to \fBNONE\fR
-if it receives an error return
-when \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR hasn't been called.
 .PP
 If the procedure \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR is called,
-it clears all of the state associated with
-\fBerrorInfo\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR
-(but it doesn't actually modify the variables).
-If an error had occurred, this will clear the error state to
-make it appear as if no error had occurred after all.
+it clears all of the state of the interpreter associated with
+script evaluation, including the entire return options dictionary.
+In particular, the \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR options
+are reset.  
+If an error had occurred, the \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR call will
+clear the error state to make it appear as if no error had
+occurred after all.
+The global variables \fBerrorInfo\fR and
+\fBerrorCode\fR are not modified by \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR
+so they continue to hold a record of information about the
+most recent error seen in an interpreter.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_Interp, Tcl_ResetResult, Tcl_SetErrno
diff --git a/doc/Alloc.3 b/doc/Alloc.3
index e90114d..ca4f949 100644
--- a/doc/Alloc.3
+++ b/doc/Alloc.3
@@ -67,22 +67,24 @@ further allocation.
 \fBTcl_Realloc\fR changes the size of the block pointed to by
 \fIptr\fR to \fIsize\fR bytes and returns a pointer to the new block.
 The contents will be unchanged up to the lesser of the new and old
-sizes.  The returned location may be different from \fIptr\fR.
+sizes.  The returned location may be different from \fIptr\fR.  If
+\fIptr\fR is NULL, this is equivalent to calling \fBTcl_Alloc\fR with
+just the \fIsize\fR argument.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AttemptAlloc\fR and \fBTcl_AttemptRealloc\fR are identical in
 function to \fBTcl_Alloc\fR and \fBTcl_Realloc\fR, except that
 \fBTcl_AttemptAlloc\fR and \fBTcl_AttemptRealloc\fR will not cause the Tcl
 interpreter to \fBpanic\fR if the memory allocation fails.  If the
 allocation fails, these functions will return NULL.  Note that on some
-platforms, attempting to allocate a block of memory will also cause
-these functions to return NULL.
+platforms, but not all, attempting to allocate a zero-sized block of
+memory will also cause these functions to return NULL.
 .PP
 The procedures \fBckalloc\fR, \fBckfree\fR, \fBckrealloc\fR,
 \fBattemptckalloc\fR, and \fBattemptckrealloc\fR are implemented
 as macros.  Normally, they are synonyms for the corresponding
 procedures documented on this page.  When Tcl and all modules
 calling Tcl are compiled with \fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR defined, however,
-these macros are redefined to be special debugging versions of 
+these macros are redefined to be special debugging versions
 of these procedures.  To support Tcl's memory debugging within a
 module, use the macros rather than direct calls to \fBTcl_Alloc\fR, etc.
 
diff --git a/doc/AllowExc.3 b/doc/AllowExc.3
index 621ea47..ae595f1 100644
--- a/doc/AllowExc.3
+++ b/doc/AllowExc.3
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Tcl_AllowExceptions \- allow all exceptions in next script evaluation
 .sp
 \fBTcl_AllowExceptions\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *doublePtr
+.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which script will be evaluated.
 .BE
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ Interpreter in which script will be evaluated.
 .PP
 If a script is evaluated at top-level (i.e. no other scripts are
 pending evaluation when the script is invoked), and if the script
-terminates with a completion code other than TCL_OK, TCL_ERROR
-or TCL_RETURN, then Tcl normally converts this into a TCL_ERROR
+terminates with a completion code other than \fBTCL_OK\fR, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
+or \fBTCL_RETURN\fR, then Tcl normally converts this into a \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
 return with an appropriate message.  The particular script
 evaluation procedures of Tcl that act in the manner are
 \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR, \fBTcl_EvalObjv\fR, \fBTcl_Eval\fR, \fBTcl_EvalEx\fR,
@@ -38,7 +38,7 @@ calling one of those a procedures, then arbitrary completion
 codes are permitted from the script, and they are returned without
 modification.
 This is useful in cases where the caller can deal with exceptions
-such as TCL_BREAK or TCL_CONTINUE in a meaningful way.
+such as \fBTCL_BREAK\fR or \fBTCL_CONTINUE\fR in a meaningful way.
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 continue, break, exception, interpreter
diff --git a/doc/AppInit.3 b/doc/AppInit.3
index 14d30cf..0473090 100644
--- a/doc/AppInit.3
+++ b/doc/AppInit.3
@@ -24,7 +24,9 @@ Interpreter for the application.
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-\fBTcl_AppInit\fR is a ``hook'' procedure that is invoked by
+\fBTcl_AppInit\fR is a
+.QW hook
+procedure that is invoked by
 the main programs for Tcl applications such as \fBtclsh\fR and \fBwish\fR.
 Its purpose is to allow new Tcl applications to be created without
 modifying the main programs provided as part of Tcl and Tk.
@@ -47,8 +49,8 @@ Tcl variables \fBargv\fR and \fBargv0\fR in \fIinterp\fR.
 .IP [3]
 Invoke a startup script to initialize the application.
 .LP
-\fBTcl_AppInit\fR returns TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR.
-If it returns TCL_ERROR then it must leave an error message in
+\fBTcl_AppInit\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
+If it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR then it must leave an error message in
 for the interpreter's result;  otherwise the result is ignored.
 .PP
 In addition to \fBTcl_AppInit\fR, your application should also contain
@@ -58,7 +60,7 @@ Tcl_Main(argc, argv, Tcl_AppInit);
 .CE
 The third argument to \fBTcl_Main\fR gives the address of the
 application-specific initialization procedure to invoke.
-This means that you don't have to use the name \fBTcl_AppInit\fR
+This means that you do not have to use the name \fBTcl_AppInit\fR
 for the procedure, but in practice the name is nearly always
 \fBTcl_AppInit\fR (in versions before Tcl 7.4 the name \fBTcl_AppInit\fR
 was implicit;  there was no way to specify the procedure explicitly).
diff --git a/doc/AssocData.3 b/doc/AssocData.3
index 105ebd6..e4c7bab 100644
--- a/doc/AssocData.3
+++ b/doc/AssocData.3
@@ -8,9 +8,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_SetAssocData 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_GetAssocData, Tcl_SetAssocData, Tcl_DeleteAssocData \- manage
-associations of string keys and user specified data with Tcl
-interpreters.
+Tcl_GetAssocData, Tcl_SetAssocData, Tcl_DeleteAssocData \- manage associations of string keys and user specified data with Tcl interpreters
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -22,12 +20,10 @@ ClientData
 .sp
 \fBTcl_DeleteAssocData\fR(\fIinterp, key\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_InterpDeleteProc *delProcPtr
+.AS Tcl_InterpDeleteProc **delProcPtr
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to execute the specified command.
-.VS 8.4
-.AP "CONST char" *key in
-.VE
+.AP "const char" *key in
 Key for association with which to store data or from which to delete or
 retrieve data.  Typically the module prefix for a package.
 .AP Tcl_InterpDeleteProc *delProc in
@@ -67,8 +63,8 @@ is deleted.  \fIDeleteProc\fR should have arguments and result that match
 the type \fBTcl_InterpDeleteProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_InterpDeleteProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
 .CE
 When \fIdeleteProc\fR is invoked the \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR
 arguments will be the same as the corresponding arguments passed to
diff --git a/doc/Async.3 b/doc/Async.3
index cc3354b..c4439a4 100644
--- a/doc/Async.3
+++ b/doc/Async.3
@@ -48,9 +48,9 @@ or 0 if \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
 These procedures provide a safe mechanism for dealing with
 asynchronous events such as signals.
 If an event such as a signal occurs while a Tcl script is being
-evaluated then it isn't safe to take any substantive action to
+evaluated then it is not safe to take any substantive action to
 process the event.
-For example, it isn't safe to evaluate a Tcl script since the
+For example, it is not safe to evaluate a Tcl script since the
 interpreter may already be in the middle of evaluating a script;
 it may not even be safe to allocate memory, since a memory
 allocation could have been in progress when the event occurred.
@@ -140,7 +140,6 @@ If new handlers become ready while handlers are executing,
 \fBTcl_AsyncInvoke\fR will invoke them all;  at each point it
 invokes the highest-priority (oldest) ready handler, repeating
 this over and over until there are no longer any ready handlers.
-
 .SH WARNING
 .PP
 It is almost always a bad idea for an asynchronous event
@@ -150,12 +149,11 @@ This sort of behavior can disrupt the execution of scripts in
 subtle ways and result in bugs that are extremely difficult
 to track down.
 If an asynchronous event handler needs to evaluate Tcl scripts
-then it should first save the interpreter's result plus the values
-of the variables \fBerrorInfo\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR (this can
-be done, for example, by storing them in dynamic strings).
+then it should first save the interpreter's state by calling
+\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR, passing in the \fIcode\fR argument.
 When the asynchronous handler is finished it should restore
-the interpreter's result, \fBerrorInfo\fR, and \fBerrorCode\fR,
-and return the \fIcode\fR argument.
+the interpreter's state by calling \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR,
+and then returning the \fIcode\fR argument.
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
-asynchronous event, handler, signal
+asynchronous event, handler, signal, Tcl_SaveInterpState, thread
diff --git a/doc/BackgdErr.3 b/doc/BackgdErr.3
index 532bb44..1e46b03 100644
--- a/doc/BackgdErr.3
+++ b/doc/BackgdErr.3
@@ -24,7 +24,8 @@ Interpreter in which the error occurred.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This procedure is typically invoked when a Tcl error occurs during
-``background processing'' such as executing an event handler.
+.QW "background processing"
+such as executing an event handler.
 When such an error occurs, the error condition is reported to Tcl
 or to a widget or some other C code, and there is not usually any
 obvious way for that code to report the error to the user.
@@ -32,25 +33,29 @@ In these cases the code calls \fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR with an
 \fIinterp\fR argument identifying the interpreter in which the
 error occurred.  At the time \fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR is invoked,
 the interpreter's result is expected to contain an error message.
-\fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR will invoke the \fBbgerror\fR
-Tcl command to report the error in an application-specific fashion.
-If no \fBbgerror\fR command exists, or if it returns with an error condition,
-then \fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR reports the error itself by printing
-a message on the standard error file.
+\fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR will invoke the command registered
+in that interpreter to handle background errors by the
+\fBinterp bgerror\fR command.
+The registered handler command is meant to report the error
+in an application-specific fashion.  The handler command
+receives two arguments, the result of the interp, and the
+return options of the interp at the time the error occurred.
+If the application registers no handler command, the default
+handler command will attempt to call \fBbgerror\fR to report
+the error.  If an error condition arises while invoking the
+handler command, then \fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR reports the
+error itself by printing a message on the standard error file.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR does not invoke \fBbgerror\fR immediately
+\fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR does not invoke the handler command immediately
 because this could potentially interfere with scripts that are in process
 at the time the error occurred.
-Instead, it invokes \fBbgerror\fR later as an idle callback.
-\fBTcl_BackgroundError\fR saves the values of the \fBerrorInfo\fR and
-\fBerrorCode\fR variables and restores these values just before
-invoking \fBbgerror\fR.
+Instead, it invokes the handler command later as an idle callback.
 .PP
 It is possible for many background errors to accumulate before
-\fBbgerror\fR is invoked.  When this happens, each of the errors
-is processed in order.  However, if \fBbgerror\fR returns a
+the handler command is invoked.  When this happens, each of the errors
+is processed in order.  However, if the handle command returns a
 break exception, then all remaining error reports for the
 interpreter are skipped.
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
-background, bgerror, error
+background, bgerror, error, interp
diff --git a/doc/Backslash.3 b/doc/Backslash.3
index eb859d7..8b399fc 100644
--- a/doc/Backslash.3
+++ b/doc/Backslash.3
@@ -17,35 +17,31 @@ Tcl_Backslash \- parse a backslash sequence
 char
 \fBTcl_Backslash\fR(\fIsrc, countPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS char *countPtr
+.AS char *countPtr out
 .AP char *src in
 Pointer to a string starting with a backslash.
 .AP int *countPtr out
-If \fIcountPtr\fR isn't NULL, \fI*countPtr\fR gets filled
+If \fIcountPtr\fR is not NULL, \fI*countPtr\fR gets filled
 in with number of characters in the backslash sequence, including
 the backslash character.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 The use of \fBTcl_Backslash\fR is deprecated in favor of
 \fBTcl_UtfBackslash\fR.
 .PP
 This is a utility procedure provided for backwards compatibility with
 non-internationalized Tcl extensions.  It parses a backslash sequence and
 returns the low byte of the Unicode character corresponding to the sequence. 
-.VE
 \fBTcl_Backslash\fR modifies \fI*countPtr\fR to contain the number of
 characters in the backslash sequence.
 .PP
 See the Tcl manual entry for information on the valid backslash sequences.
 All of the sequences described in the Tcl manual entry are supported by
 \fBTcl_Backslash\fR.
-.VS 8.1 br
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl(n), Tcl_UtfBackslash(3)
-.VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 backslash, parse
diff --git a/doc/BoolObj.3 b/doc/BoolObj.3
index 2814e4e..395d159 100644
--- a/doc/BoolObj.3
+++ b/doc/BoolObj.3
@@ -1,14 +1,15 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1996-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2005.  (not subject to US copyright)
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH Tcl_BooleanObj 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_BooleanObj 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_NewBooleanObj, Tcl_SetBooleanObj, Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj \- manipulate Tcl objects as boolean values
+Tcl_NewBooleanObj, Tcl_SetBooleanObj, Tcl_GetBooleanFromObj \- store/retrieve boolean value in a Tcl_Obj
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -21,20 +22,14 @@ Tcl_Obj *
 int
 \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, boolPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
+.AS Tcl_Interp boolValue in/out
 .AP int boolValue in
-Integer value used to initialize or set a boolean object.
-If the integer is nonzero, the boolean object is set to 1;
-otherwise the boolean object is set to 0.
+Integer value to be stored as a boolean value in a Tcl_Obj.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-For \fBTcl_SetBooleanObj\fR, this points to the object to be converted
-to boolean type.
-For \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR, this refers to the object
-from which to get a boolean value; 
-if \fIobjPtr\fR does not already point to a boolean object,
-an attempt will be made to convert it to one.
+Points to the Tcl_Obj in which to store, or from which to
+retrieve a boolean value.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
-If an error occurs during conversion,
+If a boolean value cannot be retrieved,
 an error message is left in the interpreter's result object
 unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
 .AP int *boolPtr out
@@ -44,44 +39,57 @@ stores the boolean value (0 or 1) obtained from \fIobjPtr\fR.
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-These procedures are used to create, modify, and read
-boolean Tcl objects from C code.
-\fBTcl_NewBooleanObj\fR and \fBTcl_SetBooleanObj\fR
-will create a new object of boolean type
-or modify an existing object to have boolean type. 
-Both of these procedures set the object to have the
-boolean value (0 or 1) specified by \fIboolValue\fR;
-if \fIboolValue\fR is nonzero, the object is set to 1,
-otherwise to 0.
-\fBTcl_NewBooleanObj\fR returns a pointer to a newly created object
-with reference count zero.
-Both procedures set the object's type to be boolean
-and assign the boolean value to the object's internal representation
-\fIlongValue\fR member.
-\fBTcl_SetBooleanObj\fR invalidates any old string representation
-and, if the object is not already a boolean object,
-frees any old internal representation.
+These procedures are used to pass boolean values to and from
+Tcl as Tcl_Obj's.  When storing a boolean value into a Tcl_Obj,
+any non-zero integer value in \fIboolValue\fR is taken to be
+the boolean value \fB1\fR, and the integer value \fB0\fR is
+taken to be the boolean value \fB0\fR.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR attempts to return a boolean value
-from the Tcl object \fIobjPtr\fR.
-If the object is not already a boolean object,
-it will attempt to convert it to one.
-If an error occurs during conversion, it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
-and leaves an error message in the interpreter's result object
-unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
-Otherwise, \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR
-and stores the boolean value in the address given by \fIboolPtr\fR.
-If the object is not already a boolean object,
-the conversion will free any old internal representation.
-Objects having a string representation equal to any of \fB0\fR,
-\fBfalse\fR, \fBno\fR, or \fBoff\fR have a boolean value 0; if the
-string representation is any of \fB1\fR, \fBtrue\fR, \fByes\fR, or
-\fBon\fR the boolean value is 1.
-Any of these string values may be abbreviated, and upper-case spellings
-are also acceptable.
+\fBTcl_NewBooleanObj\fR creates a new Tcl_Obj, stores the boolean
+value \fIboolValue\fR in it, and returns a pointer to the new Tcl_Obj.
+The new Tcl_Obj has reference count of zero.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetBooleanObj\fR accepts \fIobjPtr\fR, a pointer to
+an existing Tcl_Obj, and stores in the Tcl_Obj \fI*objPtr\fR 
+the boolean value \fIboolValue\fR.  This is a write operation
+on \fI*objPtr\fR, so \fIobjPtr\fR must be unshared.  Attempts to
+write to a shared Tcl_Obj will panic.  A successful write
+of \fIboolValue\fR into \fI*objPtr\fR implies the freeing of
+any former value stored in \fI*objPtr\fR.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR attempts to retrieve a boolean value
+from the value stored in \fI*objPtr\fR.
+If \fIobjPtr\fR holds a string value recognized by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR,
+then the recognized boolean value is written at the address given
+by \fIboolPtr\fR.  
+If \fIobjPtr\fR holds any value recognized as
+a number by Tcl, then if that value is zero a 0 is written at
+the address given by \fIboolPtr\fR and if that
+value is non-zero a 1 is written at the address given by \fIboolPtr\fR.
+In all cases where a value is written at the address given
+by \fIboolPtr\fR, \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
+If the value of \fIobjPtr\fR does not meet any of the conditions
+above, then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is 
+left in the interpreter's result unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
+\fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR may also make changes to the internal
+fields of \fI*objPtr\fR so that future calls to 
+\fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR on the same \fIobjPtr\fR can be
+performed more efficiently.
+.PP
+Note that the routines \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR and
+\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR are not functional equivalents.
+The set of values for which \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR
+will return \fBTCL_OK\fR is strictly larger than
+the set of values for which \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR will do the same.
+For example, the value
+.QW 5
+passed to \fBTcl_GetBooleanFromObj\fR
+will lead to a \fBTCL_OK\fR return (and the boolean value 1),
+while the same value passed to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR will lead to
+a \fBTCL_ERROR\fR return.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_GetObjResult
+Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_IsShared, Tcl_GetBoolean
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
-boolean, boolean object, boolean type, internal representation, object, object type, string representation
+boolean, object
diff --git a/doc/ByteArrObj.3 b/doc/ByteArrObj.3
index 51c4363..738da32 100644
--- a/doc/ByteArrObj.3
+++ b/doc/ByteArrObj.3
@@ -25,8 +25,8 @@ unsigned char *
 unsigned char *
 \fBTcl_SetByteArrayLength\fR(\fIobjPtr, length\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "unsigned char" *lengthPtr in/out
-.AP "CONST unsigned char" *bytes in
+.AS "const unsigned char" *lengthPtr in/out
+.AP "const unsigned char" *bytes in
 The array of bytes used to initialize or set a byte-array object.
 .AP int length in
 The length of the array of bytes.  It must be >= 0.
@@ -48,7 +48,7 @@ results of binary IO operations or data structures created with the
 \fBbinary\fR command.  In Tcl, an array of bytes is not equivalent to a
 string.  Conceptually, a string is an array of Unicode characters, while a
 byte-array is an array of 8-bit quantities with no implicit meaning.
-Accesser functions are provided to get the string representation of a
+Accessor functions are provided to get the string representation of a
 byte-array or to convert an arbitrary object to a byte-array.  Obtaining the
 string representation of a byte-array object (by calling
 \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR) produces a properly formed UTF-8 sequence with a
diff --git a/doc/CallDel.3 b/doc/CallDel.3
index 02bb445..8e6445b 100644
--- a/doc/CallDel.3
+++ b/doc/CallDel.3
@@ -38,8 +38,8 @@ time of the call.
 type \fBTcl_InterpDeleteProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_InterpDeleteProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR parameters are
 copies of the \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR arguments given
@@ -51,7 +51,7 @@ interpreter is about to go away.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_DontCallWhenDeleted\fR cancels a previous call to
 \fBTcl_CallWhenDeleted\fR with the same arguments, so that
-\fIproc\fR won't be called after all when \fIinterp\fR is
+\fIproc\fR will not be called after all when \fIinterp\fR is
 deleted.
 If there is no deletion callback that matches \fIinterp\fR,
 \fIproc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR then the call to
diff --git a/doc/ChnlStack.3 b/doc/ChnlStack.3
index ebd8d63..8ac5a0d 100644
--- a/doc/ChnlStack.3
+++ b/doc/ChnlStack.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_StackChannel, Tcl_UnstackChannel, Tcl_GetStackedChannel, Tcl_GetTopChannel \- stack an I/O channel on top of another, and undo it
+Tcl_StackChannel, Tcl_UnstackChannel, Tcl_GetStackedChannel, Tcl_GetTopChannel \- manipulate stacked I/O channels
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 .nf
@@ -27,17 +27,17 @@ Tcl_Channel
 \fBTcl_GetTopChannel\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ChannelType
+.AS Tcl_ChannelType clientData
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter for error reporting.
 .AP Tcl_ChannelType *typePtr in
-The new channel I/O procedures to use for \fIchannel\fP.
+The new channel I/O procedures to use for \fIchannel\fR.
 .AP ClientData clientData in
 Arbitrary one-word value to pass to channel I/O procedures.
 .AP int mask in
 Conditions under which \fIchannel\fR will be used: OR-ed combination of
 \fBTCL_READABLE\fR, \fBTCL_WRITABLE\fR and \fBTCL_EXCEPTION\fR.
-This can be a subset of the operations currently allowed on \fIchannel\fP.
+This can be a subset of the operations currently allowed on \fIchannel\fR.
 .AP Tcl_Channel channel in
 An existing Tcl channel such as returned by \fBTcl_CreateChannel\fR.
 .BE
@@ -55,9 +55,9 @@ stacked channels.  Anyone using stacked channels or creating stacked
 channel drivers should update to the new \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_2\fR
 \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure.  See \fBTcl_CreateChannel\fR for details.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_StackChannel\fR stacks a new \fIchannel\fP on an existing channel
-with the same name that was registered for \fIchannel\fP by
-\fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fP.
+\fBTcl_StackChannel\fR stacks a new \fIchannel\fR on an existing channel
+with the same name that was registered for \fIchannel\fR by
+\fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_StackChannel\fR works by creating a new channel structure and
 placing itself on top of the channel stack.  EOL translation, encoding and
@@ -68,7 +68,7 @@ remain at the top of the channel stack.  A pointer to the new top channel
 structure is returned.  If an error occurs when stacking the channel, NULL
 is returned instead.
 .PP
-The \fImask\fP parameter specifies the operations that are allowed on the
+The \fImask\fR parameter specifies the operations that are allowed on the
 new channel.  These can be a subset of the operations allowed on the
 original channel.  For example, a read-write channel may become read-only
 after the \fBTcl_StackChannel\fR call.
@@ -77,10 +77,10 @@ Closing a channel closes the channels stacked below it.  The close of
 stacked channels is executed in a way that allows buffered data to be
 properly flushed.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_UnstackChannel\fP reverses the process.  The old channel is
+\fBTcl_UnstackChannel\fR reverses the process.  The old channel is
 associated with the channel name, and the processing module added by
 \fBTcl_StackChannel\fR is destroyed.  If there is no old channel, then
-\fBTcl_UnstackChannel\fP is equivalent to \fBTcl_Close\fP.  If an error
+\fBTcl_UnstackChannel\fR is equivalent to \fBTcl_Close\fR.  If an error
 occurs unstacking the channel, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, otherwise
 \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/CmdCmplt.3 b/doc/CmdCmplt.3
index e2a7064..eeae039 100644
--- a/doc/CmdCmplt.3
+++ b/doc/CmdCmplt.3
@@ -17,8 +17,8 @@ Tcl_CommandComplete \- Check for unmatched braces in a Tcl command
 int
 \fBTcl_CommandComplete\fR(\fIcmd\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "CONST char" *cmd
-.AP "CONST char" *cmd in
+.AS "const char" *cmd
+.AP "const char" *cmd in
 Command string to test for completeness.
 .BE
 
diff --git a/doc/Concat.3 b/doc/Concat.3
index fdb479e..c38bf82 100644
--- a/doc/Concat.3
+++ b/doc/Concat.3
@@ -14,12 +14,13 @@ Tcl_Concat \- concatenate a collection of strings
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_Concat\fR(\fIargc, argv\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS "const char *const" argv[]
 .AP int argc in
 Number of strings.
-.AP "CONST char * CONST" argv[] in
+.AP "const char *const" argv[] in
 Array of strings to concatenate.  Must have \fIargc\fR entries.
 .BE
 
@@ -41,12 +42,9 @@ copies strings from \fBargv\fR to the result.  If an element of
 is ignored entirely.  This white-space removal was added to make
 the output of the \fBconcat\fR command cleaner-looking.
 .PP
-.VS
 The result string is dynamically allocated
 using \fBTcl_Alloc\fR;  the caller must eventually release the space
 by calling \fBTcl_Free\fR.
-.VE
-.VS
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_ConcatObj
 .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/doc/CrtChannel.3 b/doc/CrtChannel.3
index fc034a0..212a239 100644
--- a/doc/CrtChannel.3
+++ b/doc/CrtChannel.3
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_CreateChannel, Tcl_GetChannelInstanceData, Tcl_GetChannelType, Tcl_GetChannelName, Tcl_GetChannelHandle, Tcl_GetChannelMode, Tcl_GetChannelBufferSize, Tcl_SetChannelBufferSize, Tcl_NotifyChannel, Tcl_BadChannelOption, Tcl_ChannelName, Tcl_ChannelVersion, Tcl_ChannelBlockModeProc, Tcl_ChannelCloseProc, Tcl_ChannelClose2Proc, Tcl_ChannelInputProc, Tcl_ChannelOutputProc, Tcl_ChannelSeekProc, Tcl_ChannelWideSeekProc, Tcl_ChannelSetOptionProc, Tcl_ChannelGetOptionProc, Tcl_ChannelWatchProc, Tcl_ChannelGetHandleProc, Tcl_ChannelFlushProc, Tcl_ChannelHandlerProc, Tcl_ChannelThreadActionProc, Tcl_IsChannelShared, Tcl_IsChannelRegistered, Tcl_CutChannel, Tcl_SpliceChannel, Tcl_IsChannelExisting, Tcl_ClearChannelHandlers, Tcl_GetChannelThread, Tcl_ChannelBuffered \- procedures for creating and manipulating channels
+Tcl_CreateChannel, Tcl_GetChannelInstanceData, Tcl_GetChannelType, Tcl_GetChannelName, Tcl_GetChannelHandle, Tcl_GetChannelMode, Tcl_GetChannelBufferSize, Tcl_SetChannelBufferSize, Tcl_NotifyChannel, Tcl_BadChannelOption, Tcl_ChannelName, Tcl_ChannelVersion, Tcl_ChannelBlockModeProc, Tcl_ChannelCloseProc, Tcl_ChannelClose2Proc, Tcl_ChannelInputProc, Tcl_ChannelOutputProc, Tcl_ChannelSeekProc, Tcl_ChannelWideSeekProc, Tcl_ChannelTruncateProc, Tcl_ChannelSetOptionProc, Tcl_ChannelGetOptionProc, Tcl_ChannelWatchProc, Tcl_ChannelGetHandleProc, Tcl_ChannelFlushProc, Tcl_ChannelHandlerProc, Tcl_ChannelThreadActionProc, Tcl_IsChannelShared, Tcl_IsChannelRegistered, Tcl_CutChannel, Tcl_SpliceChannel, Tcl_IsChannelExisting, Tcl_ClearChannelHandlers, Tcl_GetChannelThread, Tcl_ChannelBuffered \- procedures for creating and manipulating channels
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -23,16 +23,14 @@ ClientData
 Tcl_ChannelType *
 \fBTcl_GetChannelType\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetChannelName\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetChannelHandle\fR(\fIchannel, direction, handlePtr\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 Tcl_ThreadId
 \fBTcl_GetChannelThread\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
-.VE 8.4
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetChannelMode\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
@@ -46,7 +44,6 @@ int
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_BadChannelOption\fR(\fIinterp, optionName, optionList\fR)
-.VS 8.4
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_IsChannelShared\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
@@ -65,12 +62,11 @@ void
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_ClearChannelHandlers\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
-.VE 8.4
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_ChannelBuffered\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_ChannelName\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_ChannelTypeVersion
@@ -94,13 +90,16 @@ Tcl_DriverOutputProc *
 Tcl_DriverSeekProc *
 \fBTcl_ChannelSeekProc\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 Tcl_DriverWideSeekProc *
 \fBTcl_ChannelWideSeekProc\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_DriverThreadActionProc *
 \fBTcl_ChannelThreadActionProc\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
-.VE 8.4
+.sp
+.VS 8.5
+Tcl_DriverTruncateProc *
+\fBTcl_ChannelTruncateProc\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
+.VE 8.5
 .sp
 Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc *
 \fBTcl_ChannelSetOptionProc\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
@@ -121,11 +120,11 @@ Tcl_DriverHandlerProc *
 \fBTcl_ChannelHandlerProc\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ChannelType *channelName in
-.AP Tcl_ChannelType *typePtr in
+.AS "const Tcl_ChannelType" *channelName
+.AP "const Tcl_ChannelType" *typePtr in
 Points to a structure containing the addresses of procedures that
 can be called to perform I/O and other functions on the channel.
-.AP "CONST char" *channelName in
+.AP "const char" *channelName in
 The name of this channel, such as \fBfile3\fR; must not be in use
 by any other channel. Can be NULL, in which case the channel is
 created without a name.
@@ -151,10 +150,11 @@ and \fBTCL_EXCEPTION\fR that indicates events that have occurred on
 this channel.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Current interpreter. (can be NULL)
-.AP "CONST char" *optionName in
+.AP "const char" *optionName in
 Name of the invalid option.
-.AP "CONST char" *optionList in
-Specific options list (space separated words, without "-") 
+.AP "const char" *optionList in
+Specific options list (space separated words, without
+.QW \- )
 to append to the standard generic options list.
 Can be NULL for generic options error message only.
 
@@ -178,7 +178,7 @@ driver provides a \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure containing pointers to
 functions implementing the various operations used by the generic layer to
 communicate with the channel driver. The \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure
 and the functions referenced by it are described in the section
-TCL_CHANNELTYPE, below.
+\fBTCL_CHANNELTYPE\fR, below.
 .PP
 Second, channel drivers usually provide a Tcl command to create
 instances of that type of channel. For example, the Tcl \fBopen\fR
@@ -205,7 +205,7 @@ structure to perform operations on the channel.
 \fItypePtr\fR and \fIinstanceData\fR with it. The channel is opened in the
 mode indicated by \fImask\fR.
 For a discussion of channel drivers, their operations and the
-\fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure, see the section TCL_CHANNELTYPE, below.
+\fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure, see the section \fBTCL_CHANNELTYPE\fR, below.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_CreateChannel\fR interacts with the code managing the standard
 channels. Once a standard channel was initialized either through a
@@ -237,11 +237,9 @@ then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned instead.  Different channel drivers
 will return different types of handle.  Refer to the manual entries
 for each driver to determine what type of handle is returned.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 \fBTcl_GetChannelThread\fR returns the id of the thread currently managing
 the specified \fIchannel\fR. This allows channel drivers to send their file
 events to the correct event queue even for a multi-threaded core.
-.VE 8.4
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetChannelMode\fR returns an OR-ed combination of \fBTCL_READABLE\fR
 and \fBTCL_WRITABLE\fR, indicating whether the channel is open for input
@@ -265,15 +263,15 @@ occurred on the channel.  Channel drivers are responsible for invoking
 this function whenever the channel handlers need to be called for the
 channel.  See \fBWATCHPROC\fR below for more details.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_BadChannelOption\fR is called from driver specific set or get option
-procs to generate a complete error message.
+\fBTcl_BadChannelOption\fR is called from driver specific
+\fIsetOptionProc\fR or \fIgetOptionProc\fR to generate a complete
+error message.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ChannelBuffered\fR returns the number of bytes of input
 currently buffered in the internal buffer (push back area) of the
 channel itself. It does not report about the data in the overall
 buffers for the stack of channels the supplied channel is part of.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 \fBTcl_IsChannelShared\fR checks the refcount of the specified
 \fIchannel\fR and returns whether the \fIchannel\fR was shared among
 multiple interpreters (result == 1) or not (result == 0).
@@ -290,26 +288,24 @@ name is registered in the (thread)-global list of all channels (result
 (thread)global list of all channels (of the current thread).
 Application to a channel still registered in some interpreter
 is not allowed.
-.VS 8.4
+.VS 8.5
 Also notifies the driver if the \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR version is
 \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_4\fR (or higher), and
 \fBTcl_DriverThreadActionProc\fR is defined for it.
-.VE 8.4
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 \fBTcl_SpliceChannel\fR adds the specified \fIchannel\fR to the
 (thread)global list of all channels (of the current thread).
 Application to a channel registered in some interpreter is not allowed.
-.VS 8.4
+.VS 8.5
 Also notifies the driver if the \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR version is
 \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_4\fR (or higher), and
 \fBTcl_DriverThreadActionProc\fR is defined for it.
-.VE 8.4
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
-\fBTcl_ClearChannelHandlers\fR removes all channelhandlers and event
+\fBTcl_ClearChannelHandlers\fR removes all channel handlers and event
 scripts associated with the specified \fIchannel\fR, thus shutting
 down all event processing for this channel.
-.VE 8.4
-
 .SH TCL_CHANNELTYPE
 .PP
 A channel driver provides a \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure that contains
@@ -322,22 +318,25 @@ details about the old structure.
 The \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure contains the following fields:
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_ChannelType {
-	char *\fItypeName\fR;
-	Tcl_ChannelTypeVersion \fIversion\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverCloseProc *\fIcloseProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverInputProc *\fIinputProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverOutputProc *\fIoutputProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverSeekProc *\fIseekProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc *\fIsetOptionProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverGetOptionProc *\fIgetOptionProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverWatchProc *\fIwatchProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverGetHandleProc *\fIgetHandleProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverClose2Proc *\fIclose2Proc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverBlockModeProc *\fIblockModeProc\fR;	
-	Tcl_DriverFlushProc *\fIflushProc\fR;	
-	Tcl_DriverHandlerProc *\fIhandlerProc\fR;	
-	Tcl_DriverWideSeekProc *\fIwideSeekProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverThreadActionProc *\fIthreadActionProc\fR;
+        char *\fItypeName\fR;
+        Tcl_ChannelTypeVersion \fIversion\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverCloseProc *\fIcloseProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverInputProc *\fIinputProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverOutputProc *\fIoutputProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverSeekProc *\fIseekProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc *\fIsetOptionProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverGetOptionProc *\fIgetOptionProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverWatchProc *\fIwatchProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverGetHandleProc *\fIgetHandleProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverClose2Proc *\fIclose2Proc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverBlockModeProc *\fIblockModeProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverFlushProc *\fIflushProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverHandlerProc *\fIhandlerProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverWideSeekProc *\fIwideSeekProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverThreadActionProc *\fIthreadActionProc\fR;
+.VS 8.5
+        Tcl_DriverTruncateProc *\fItruncateProc\fR;
+.VE 8.5
 } Tcl_ChannelType;
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -345,11 +344,11 @@ It is not necessary to provide implementations for all channel
 operations.  Those which are not necessary may be set to NULL in the
 struct: \fIblockModeProc\fR, \fIseekProc\fR, \fIsetOptionProc\fR,
 \fIgetOptionProc\fR, and \fIclose2Proc\fR, in addition to
-\fIflushProc\fR, \fIhandlerProc\fR, and \fIthreadActionProc\fR.  Other
-functions that cannot be implemented in a meaningful way should return
-\fBEINVAL\fR when called, to indicate that the operations they
-represent are not available. Also note that \fIwideSeekProc\fR can be
-NULL if \fIseekProc\fR is.
+\fIflushProc\fR, \fIhandlerProc\fR, \fIthreadActionProc\fR, and
+\fItruncateProc\fR.  Other functions that cannot be implemented in a
+meaningful way should return \fBEINVAL\fR when called, to indicate
+that the operations they represent are not available. Also note that
+\fIwideSeekProc\fR can be NULL if \fIseekProc\fR is.
 .PP
 The user should only use the above structure for \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR
 instantiation.  When referencing fields in a \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR
@@ -358,20 +357,19 @@ structure, the following functions should be used to obtain the values:
 \fBTcl_ChannelBlockModeProc\fR, \fBTcl_ChannelCloseProc\fR,
 \fBTcl_ChannelClose2Proc\fR, \fBTcl_ChannelInputProc\fR,
 \fBTcl_ChannelOutputProc\fR, \fBTcl_ChannelSeekProc\fR,
-.VS 8.4
-\fBTcl_ChannelWideSeekProc\fR,
-\fBTcl_ChannelThreadActionProc\fR,
-.VE 8.4
+\fBTcl_ChannelWideSeekProc\fR, \fBTcl_ChannelThreadActionProc\fR,
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_ChannelTruncateProc\fR,
+.VE 8.5
 \fBTcl_ChannelSetOptionProc\fR, \fBTcl_ChannelGetOptionProc\fR,
 \fBTcl_ChannelWatchProc\fR, \fBTcl_ChannelGetHandleProc\fR,
 \fBTcl_ChannelFlushProc\fR, or \fBTcl_ChannelHandlerProc\fR.
 .PP
 The change to the structures was made in such a way that standard channel
 types are binary compatible.  However, channel types that use stacked
-channels (ie: TLS, Trf) have new versions to correspond to the above change
+channels (i.e. TLS, Trf) have new versions to correspond to the above change
 since the previous code for stacked channels had problems.
-
-.SH TYPENAME
+.SS TYPENAME
 .PP
 The \fItypeName\fR field contains a null-terminated string that
 identifies the type of the device implemented by this driver, e.g.
@@ -379,19 +377,19 @@ identifies the type of the device implemented by this driver, e.g.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelName\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the string.
-
-.SH VERSION
+.SS VERSION
 .PP
 
 The \fIversion\fR field should be set to the version of the structure
 that you require. \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_2\fR is the minimum recommended.
-.VS 8.4
-\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_3\fR must be set to specifiy the \fIwideSeekProc\fR member.
-.VE 8.4
-.VS 8.4
-\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_4\fR must be set to specifiy the
-\fIthreadActionProc\fR member (includes \fIwideSeekProc\fR).
-.VE 8.4
+\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_3\fR must be set to specify the \fIwideSeekProc\fR member.
+\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_4\fR must be set to specify the \fIthreadActionProc\fR member
+(includes \fIwideSeekProc\fR).
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_5\fR must be set to specify the
+\fItruncateProc\fR members (includes
+\fIwideSeekProc\fR and \fIthreadActionProc\fR).
+.VE 8.5
 If it is not set to any of these, then this
 \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR is assumed to have the original structure.  See
 \fBOLD CHANNEL TYPES\fR for more details.  While Tcl will recognize
@@ -399,12 +397,14 @@ and function with either structures, stacked channels must be of at
 least \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_2\fR to function correctly.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelVersion\fR, which returns
-.VS 8.4
-one of \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_4\fR, \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_3\fR,
-.VE 8.4
-\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_2\fR, or \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_1\fR.
-
-.SH BLOCKMODEPROC
+one of
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_5\fR,
+.VE 8.5
+\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_4\fR,
+\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_3\fR,
+\fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_2\fR or \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_1\fR.
+.SS BLOCKMODEPROC
 .PP
 The \fIblockModeProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by
 the generic layer to set blocking and nonblocking mode on the device.
@@ -412,8 +412,8 @@ the generic layer to set blocking and nonblocking mode on the device.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverBlockModeProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	int \fImode\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        int \fImode\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIinstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to
@@ -437,11 +437,9 @@ A channel driver \fBnot\fR supplying a \fIblockModeProc\fR has to be
 very, very careful. It has to tell the generic layer exactly which
 blocking mode is acceptable to it, and should this also document for
 the user so that the blocking mode of the channel is not changed to an
-inacceptable value. Any confusion here may lead the interpreter into a
+unacceptable value. Any confusion here may lead the interpreter into a
 (spurious and difficult to find) deadlock.
-
-
-.SH "CLOSEPROC AND CLOSE2PROC"
+.SS "CLOSEPROC AND CLOSE2PROC"
 .PP
 The \fIcloseProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by the
 generic layer to clean up driver-related information when the channel is
@@ -449,8 +447,8 @@ closed. \fICloseProc\fR must match the following prototype:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverCloseProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIinstanceData\fR argument is the same as the value provided to
@@ -471,9 +469,9 @@ following prototype:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverClose2Proc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	int \fIflags\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        int \fIflags\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIclose2Proc\fR will be called with \fIflags\fR set to an OR'ed
@@ -491,11 +489,10 @@ return a nonzero POSIX error code. In addition, if an error occurs and
 \fIinterp\fR is not NULL, the procedure should store an error message
 in the interpreter's result.
 .PP
-These value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelCloseProc\fR or
-\fBTcl_ChannelClose2Proc\fR, which returns a pointer to the respective
-function.
-
-.SH INPUTPROC
+The \fIcloseProc\fR and \fIclose2Proc\fR values can be retrieved with
+\fBTcl_ChannelCloseProc\fR or \fBTcl_ChannelClose2Proc\fR, which
+return a pointer to the respective function.
+.SS INPUTPROC
 .PP
 The \fIinputProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by the
 generic layer to read data from the file or device and store it in an
@@ -503,10 +500,10 @@ internal buffer. \fIInputProc\fR must match the following prototype:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverInputProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	char *\fIbuf\fR,
-	int \fIbufSize\fR,
-	int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        char *\fIbuf\fR,
+        int \fIbufSize\fR,
+        int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 \fIInstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to
@@ -539,8 +536,7 @@ blocking.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelInputProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
-
-.SH OUTPUTPROC
+.SS OUTPUTPROC
 .PP
 The \fIoutputProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by the
 generic layer to transfer data from an internal buffer to the output device.
@@ -548,10 +544,10 @@ generic layer to transfer data from an internal buffer to the output device.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverOutputProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	CONST char *\fIbuf\fR,
-	int \fItoWrite\fR,
-	int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        const char *\fIbuf\fR,
+        int \fItoWrite\fR,
+        int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 \fIInstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to
@@ -578,8 +574,7 @@ without writing any data.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelOutputProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
-
-.SH "SEEKPROC AND WIDESEEKPROC"
+.SS "SEEKPROC AND WIDESEEKPROC"
 .PP
 The \fIseekProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by the
 generic layer to move the access point at which subsequent input or output
@@ -588,10 +583,10 @@ prototype:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverSeekProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	long \fIoffset\fR,
-	int \fIseekMode\fR,
-	int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        long \fIoffset\fR,
+        int \fIseekMode\fR,
+        int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIinstanceData\fR argument is the same as the value given to
@@ -608,7 +603,6 @@ does not implement seeking.
 The return value is the new access point or -1 in case of error. If an
 error occurred, the function should not move the access point.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 If there is a non-NULL \fIseekProc\fR field, the \fIwideSeekProc\fR
 field may contain the address of an alternative function to use which
 handles wide (i.e. larger than 32-bit) offsets, so allowing seeks
@@ -619,10 +613,10 @@ following prototype:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_WideInt Tcl_DriverWideSeekProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	Tcl_WideInt \fIoffset\fR,
-	int \fIseekMode\fR,
-	int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        Tcl_WideInt \fIoffset\fR,
+        int \fIseekMode\fR,
+        int *\fIerrorCodePtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The arguments and return values mean the same thing as with
@@ -633,9 +627,7 @@ The \fIseekProc\fR value can be retrieved with
 \fBTcl_ChannelSeekProc\fR, which returns a pointer to the function,
 and similarly the \fIwideSeekProc\fR can be retrieved with
 \fBTcl_ChannelWideSeekProc\fR.
-.VE 8.4
-
-.SH SETOPTIONPROC
+.SS SETOPTIONPROC
 .PP
 The \fIsetOptionProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by
 the generic layer to set a channel type specific option on a channel.
@@ -643,10 +635,10 @@ the generic layer to set a channel type specific option on a channel.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	CONST char *\fIoptionName\fR,
-	CONST char *\fInewValue\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        const char *\fIoptionName\fR,
+        const char *\fInewValue\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 \fIoptionName\fR is the name of an option to set, and \fInewValue\fR is
@@ -656,7 +648,7 @@ created. The function should do whatever channel type specific action is
 required to implement the new value of the option.
 .PP
 Some options are handled by the generic code and this function is never
-called to set them, e.g. \fB-blockmode\fR. Other options are specific to
+called to set them, e.g. \fB\-blockmode\fR. Other options are specific to
 each channel type and the \fIsetOptionProc\fR procedure of the channel
 driver will get called to implement them. The \fIsetOptionProc\fR field can
 be NULL, which indicates that this channel type supports no type specific
@@ -676,8 +668,7 @@ error code.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelSetOptionProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
-
-.SH GETOPTIONPROC
+.SS GETOPTIONPROC
 .PP
 The \fIgetOptionProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by
 the generic layer to get the value of a channel type specific option on a
@@ -685,10 +676,10 @@ channel. \fIgetOptionProc\fR must match the following prototype:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverGetOptionProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	CONST char *\fIoptionName\fR,
-	Tcl_DString *\fIoptionValue\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        const char *\fIoptionName\fR,
+        Tcl_DString *\fIoptionValue\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 \fIOptionName\fR is the name of an option supported by this type of
@@ -706,7 +697,7 @@ function should also call \fBTcl_SetErrno\fR to store an appropriate POSIX
 error code.
 .PP
 Some options are handled by the generic code and this function is never
-called to retrieve their value, e.g. \fB-blockmode\fR. Other options are
+called to retrieve their value, e.g. \fB\-blockmode\fR. Other options are
 specific to each channel type and the \fIgetOptionProc\fR procedure of the
 channel driver will get called to implement them. The \fIgetOptionProc\fR
 field can be NULL, which indicates that this channel type supports no type
@@ -714,8 +705,7 @@ specific options.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelGetOptionProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
-
-.SH WATCHPROC
+.SS WATCHPROC
 .PP
 The \fIwatchProc\fR field contains the address of a function called
 by the generic layer to initialize the event notification mechanism to
@@ -724,8 +714,8 @@ notice events of interest on this channel.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_DriverWatchProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	int \fImask\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        int \fImask\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIinstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to
@@ -747,8 +737,7 @@ details on how to queue an event.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelWatchProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
-
-.SH GETHANDLEPROC
+.SS GETHANDLEPROC
 .PP
 The \fIgetHandleProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by
 the generic layer to retrieve a device-specific handle from the channel.
@@ -756,9 +745,9 @@ the generic layer to retrieve a device-specific handle from the channel.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverGetHandleProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	int \fIdirection\fR,
-	ClientData *\fIhandlePtr\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        int \fIdirection\fR,
+        ClientData *\fIhandlePtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 \fIInstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to
@@ -777,8 +766,7 @@ device handles, the function should return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelGetHandleProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
-
-.SH FLUSHPROC
+.SS FLUSHPROC
 .PP
 The \fIflushProc\fR field is currently reserved for future use.
 It should be set to NULL.
@@ -786,13 +774,12 @@ It should be set to NULL.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverFlushProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelFlushProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
-
-.SH HANDLERPROC
+.SS HANDLERPROC
 .PP
 The \fIhandlerProc\fR field contains the address of a function called by
 the generic layer to notify the channel that an event occurred.  It should
@@ -802,8 +789,8 @@ that occur on the underlying (stacked) channel.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_DriverHandlerProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-	int \fIinterestMask\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        int \fIinterestMask\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 \fIInstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to \fBTcl_CreateChannel\fR
@@ -814,8 +801,7 @@ type of event occurred on this channel.
 This value can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelHandlerProc\fR, which returns
 a pointer to the function.
 
-.VS 8.4
-.SH "THREADACTIONPROC"
+.SS "THREADACTIONPROC"
 .PP
 The \fIthreadActionProc\fR field contains the address of the function
 called by the generic layer when a channel is created, closed, or
@@ -832,8 +818,8 @@ might be maintaining using the calling thread as the associate. See
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_DriverThreadActionProc(
-	ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
-      int        \fIaction\fR);
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        int        \fIaction\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 \fIInstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to
@@ -841,53 +827,79 @@ typedef void Tcl_DriverThreadActionProc(
 .PP
 These values can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelThreadActionProc\fR,
 which returns a pointer to the function.
-.VE 8.4
-
+.SS "TRUNCATEPROC"
+.PP
+The \fItruncateProc\fR field contains the address of the function
+called by the generic layer when a channel is truncated to some
+length. It can be NULL.
+.PP
+.CS
+typedef int Tcl_DriverTruncateProc(
+        ClientData \fIinstanceData\fR,
+        Tcl_WideInt \fIlength\fR);
+.CE
+.PP
+\fIInstanceData\fR is the same as the value passed to
+\fBTcl_CreateChannel\fR when this channel was created, and
+\fIlength\fR is the new length of the underlying file, which should
+not be negative. The result should be 0 on success or an errno code
+(suitable for use with \fBTcl_SetErrno\fR) on failure.
+.PP
+These values can be retrieved with \fBTcl_ChannelTruncateProc\fR,
+which returns a pointer to the function.
 .SH TCL_BADCHANNELOPTION
 .PP
-This procedure generates a "bad option" error message in an
+This procedure generates a
+.QW "bad option"
+error message in an
 (optional) interpreter.  It is used by channel drivers when 
-a invalid Set/Get option is requested. Its purpose is to concatenate
+an invalid Set/Get option is requested. Its purpose is to concatenate
 the generic options list to the specific ones and factorize
 the generic options error message string.
 .PP
-It always return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
+It always returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
 .PP
 An error message is generated in \fIinterp\fR's result object to
-indicate that a command was invoked with the a bad option
+indicate that a command was invoked with a bad option.
 The message has the form
 .CS
     bad option "blah": should be one of 
     <...generic options...>+<...specific options...>
+.CE
 so you get for instance:
+.CS
     bad option "-blah": should be one of -blocking,
     -buffering, -buffersize, -eofchar, -translation,
     -peername, or -sockname
-when called with \fIoptionList\fR="peername sockname"
 .CE
-``blah'' is the \fIoptionName\fR argument and ``<specific options>''
+when called with \fIoptionList\fR equal to
+.QW "peername sockname"
+.PP
+.QW blah
+is the \fIoptionName\fR argument and
+.QW "<specific options>"
 is a space separated list of specific option words.
 The function takes good care of inserting minus signs before
-each option, commas after, and an ``or'' before the last option.
-
+each option, commas after, and an
+.QW or
+before the last option.
 .SH "OLD CHANNEL TYPES"
-
 The original (8.3.1 and below) \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure contains
 the following fields:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_ChannelType {
-	char *\fItypeName\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverBlockModeProc *\fIblockModeProc\fR;	
-	Tcl_DriverCloseProc *\fIcloseProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverInputProc *\fIinputProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverOutputProc *\fIoutputProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverSeekProc *\fIseekProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc *\fIsetOptionProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverGetOptionProc *\fIgetOptionProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverWatchProc *\fIwatchProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverGetHandleProc *\fIgetHandleProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverClose2Proc *\fIclose2Proc\fR;
+        char *\fItypeName\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverBlockModeProc *\fIblockModeProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverCloseProc *\fIcloseProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverInputProc *\fIinputProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverOutputProc *\fIoutputProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverSeekProc *\fIseekProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc *\fIsetOptionProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverGetOptionProc *\fIgetOptionProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverWatchProc *\fIwatchProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverGetHandleProc *\fIgetHandleProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverClose2Proc *\fIclose2Proc\fR;
 } Tcl_ChannelType;
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -897,33 +909,32 @@ the new \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure if you are creating a stacked
 channel driver, due to problems with the earlier stacked channel
 implementation (in 8.2.0 to 8.3.1).
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 Prior to 8.4.0 (i.e. during the later releases of 8.3 and early part
 of the 8.4 development cycle) the \fBTcl_ChannelType\fR structure
 contained the following fields:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_ChannelType {
-	char *\fItypeName\fR;
-	Tcl_ChannelTypeVersion \fIversion\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverCloseProc *\fIcloseProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverInputProc *\fIinputProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverOutputProc *\fIoutputProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverSeekProc *\fIseekProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc *\fIsetOptionProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverGetOptionProc *\fIgetOptionProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverWatchProc *\fIwatchProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverGetHandleProc *\fIgetHandleProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverClose2Proc *\fIclose2Proc\fR;
-	Tcl_DriverBlockModeProc *\fIblockModeProc\fR;	
-	Tcl_DriverFlushProc *\fIflushProc\fR;	
-	Tcl_DriverHandlerProc *\fIhandlerProc\fR;	
+        char *\fItypeName\fR;
+        Tcl_ChannelTypeVersion \fIversion\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverCloseProc *\fIcloseProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverInputProc *\fIinputProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverOutputProc *\fIoutputProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverSeekProc *\fIseekProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverSetOptionProc *\fIsetOptionProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverGetOptionProc *\fIgetOptionProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverWatchProc *\fIwatchProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverGetHandleProc *\fIgetHandleProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverClose2Proc *\fIclose2Proc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverBlockModeProc *\fIblockModeProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverFlushProc *\fIflushProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverHandlerProc *\fIhandlerProc\fR;
+        Tcl_DriverTruncateProc *\fItruncateProc\fR;
 } Tcl_ChannelType;
 .CE
 .PP
 When the above structure is registered as a channel type, the
 \fIversion\fR field should always be \fBTCL_CHANNEL_VERSION_2\fR.
-.VE 8.4
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_Close(3), Tcl_OpenFileChannel(3), Tcl_SetErrno(3), Tcl_QueueEvent(3), Tcl_StackChannel(3), Tcl_GetStdChannel(3)
diff --git a/doc/CrtChnlHdlr.3 b/doc/CrtChnlHdlr.3
index ea07ef2..fa7f46f 100644
--- a/doc/CrtChnlHdlr.3
+++ b/doc/CrtChnlHdlr.3
@@ -4,7 +4,6 @@
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
-.so man.macros
 .TH Tcl_CreateChannelHandler 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
@@ -48,8 +47,8 @@ what it means for a channel to be readable or writable.
 \fIProc\fR must conform to the following prototype:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_ChannelProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	int \fImask\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        int \fImask\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIclientData\fR argument is the same as the value passed to
@@ -62,7 +61,7 @@ contain a subset of the bits from the \fImask\fR argument to
 .PP
 Each channel handler is identified by a unique combination of \fIchannel\fR,
 \fIproc\fR and \fIclientData\fR.
-There may be many handlers for a given channel as long as they don't
+There may be many handlers for a given channel as long as they do not
 have the same \fIchannel\fR, \fIproc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR.
 If \fBTcl_CreateChannelHandler\fR is invoked when there is already a handler
 for \fIchannel\fR, \fIproc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR, then no new
diff --git a/doc/CrtCloseHdlr.3 b/doc/CrtCloseHdlr.3
index 35f8261..32cd7a5 100644
--- a/doc/CrtCloseHdlr.3
+++ b/doc/CrtCloseHdlr.3
@@ -4,7 +4,6 @@
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
-.so man.macros
 .TH Tcl_CreateCloseHandler 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
@@ -21,7 +20,7 @@ void
 \fBTcl_DeleteCloseHandler\fR(\fIchannel, proc, clientData\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_CloseProc callbackData in
+.AS Tcl_CloseProc clientData
 .AP Tcl_Channel channel in
 The channel for which to create or delete a close callback.
 .AP Tcl_CloseProc *proc in
@@ -39,7 +38,7 @@ Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_CloseProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIclientData\fR is the same as the value provided in the call to
diff --git a/doc/CrtCommand.3 b/doc/CrtCommand.3
index da0da22..fcc04d5 100644
--- a/doc/CrtCommand.3
+++ b/doc/CrtCommand.3
@@ -17,12 +17,10 @@ Tcl_CreateCommand \- implement new commands in C
 Tcl_Command
 \fBTcl_CreateCommand\fR(\fIinterp, cmdName, proc, clientData, deleteProc\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_CmdDeleteProc **deleteProcPtr
+.AS Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *deleteProc
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to create new command.
-.VS 8.4
-.AP "CONST char" *cmdName in
-.VE
+.AP "const char" *cmdName in
 Name of command.
 .AP Tcl_CmdProc *proc in
 Implementation of new command:  \fIproc\fR will be called whenever
@@ -79,10 +77,10 @@ and it returns NULL.
 \fBTcl_CmdProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_CmdProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	int \fIargc\fR,
-	CONST char *\fIargv\fR[]);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        int \fIargc\fR,
+        const char *\fIargv\fR[]);
 .CE
 When \fIproc\fR is invoked the \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR
 parameters will be copies of the \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR
@@ -95,26 +93,23 @@ the command name) and \fIargv\fR giving the values of the arguments
 as strings.  The \fIargv\fR array will contain \fIargc\fR+1 values;
 the first \fIargc\fR values point to the argument strings, and the
 last value is NULL.  
-.VS
 Note that the argument strings should not be modified as they may
 point to constant strings or may be shared with other parts of the
 interpreter.
-.VE
 .PP
-.VS
 Note that the argument strings are encoded in normalized UTF-8 since
 version 8.1 of Tcl.
-.VE
 .PP
-\fIProc\fR must return an integer code that is either \fBTCL_OK\fR, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR,
-\fBTCL_RETURN\fR, \fBTCL_BREAK\fR, or \fBTCL_CONTINUE\fR.  See the Tcl overview man page
+\fIProc\fR must return an integer code that is expected to be one of
+\fBTCL_OK\fR, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR, \fBTCL_RETURN\fR, \fBTCL_BREAK\fR, or
+\fBTCL_CONTINUE\fR.  See the Tcl overview man page
 for details on what these codes mean.  Most normal commands will only
 return \fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  In addition, \fIproc\fR must set
 the interpreter result to point to a string value;
 in the case of a \fBTCL_OK\fR return code this gives the result
 of the command, and in the case of \fBTCL_ERROR\fR it gives an error message.
 The \fBTcl_SetResult\fR procedure provides an easy interface for setting
-the return value;  for complete details on how the the interpreter result
+the return value;  for complete details on how the interpreter result
 field is managed, see the \fBTcl_Interp\fR man page.
 Before invoking a command procedure,
 \fBTcl_Eval\fR sets the interpreter result to point to an empty string,
@@ -135,11 +130,11 @@ application an opportunity to release any structures associated
 with the command.  \fIDeleteProc\fR should have arguments and
 result that match the type \fBTcl_CmdDeleteProc\fR:
 .CS
-typedef void Tcl_CmdDeleteProc(ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+typedef void Tcl_CmdDeleteProc(
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR argument will be the same as the \fIclientData\fR
 argument passed to \fBTcl_CreateCommand\fR.
-.PP
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_CreateObjCommand, Tcl_DeleteCommand, Tcl_GetCommandInfo, Tcl_SetCommandInfo, Tcl_GetCommandName, Tcl_SetObjResult
diff --git a/doc/CrtFileHdlr.3 b/doc/CrtFileHdlr.3
index af21f0b..5627bd4 100644
--- a/doc/CrtFileHdlr.3
+++ b/doc/CrtFileHdlr.3
@@ -13,18 +13,14 @@ Tcl_CreateFileHandler, Tcl_DeleteFileHandler \- associate procedure callbacks wi
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
-.VS
 .sp
 \fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR(\fIfd, mask, proc, clientData\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_DeleteFileHandler\fR(\fIfd\fR)
-.VE
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_FileProc clientData
-.VS
 .AP int fd in
 Unix file descriptor for an open file or device.
-.VE
 .AP int mask in
 Conditions under which \fIproc\fR should be called:
 OR-ed combination of \fBTCL_READABLE\fR, \fBTCL_WRITABLE\fR,
@@ -39,12 +35,10 @@ Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-.VS
 \fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be
 invoked in the future whenever I/O becomes possible on a file
 or an exceptional condition exists for the file.  The file
 is indicated by \fIfd\fR, and the conditions of interest
-.VE
 are indicated by \fImask\fR.  For example, if \fImask\fR
 is \fBTCL_READABLE\fR, \fIproc\fR will be called when
 the file is readable.
@@ -57,8 +51,8 @@ as \fBvwait\fR.
 type \fBTcl_FileProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_FileProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	int \fImask\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        int \fImask\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR parameter to \fIproc\fR is a copy
 of the \fIclientData\fR
@@ -85,14 +79,12 @@ events while waiting for files to become ready for I/O.  For this to work
 correctly, the application may need to use non-blocking I/O operations on
 the files for which handlers are declared.  Otherwise the application may
 block if it reads or writes too much data; while waiting for the I/O to
-complete the application won't be able to service other events. Use
+complete the application will not be able to service other events. Use
 \fBTcl_SetChannelOption\fR with \fB\-blocking\fR to set the channel into
 blocking or nonblocking mode as required.
 .PP
-.VS
 Note that these interfaces are only supported by the Unix
 implementation of the Tcl notifier.   
-.VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 callback, file, handler
diff --git a/doc/CrtMathFnc.3 b/doc/CrtMathFnc.3
index 43ba8fd..9629912 100644
--- a/doc/CrtMathFnc.3
+++ b/doc/CrtMathFnc.3
@@ -17,20 +17,17 @@ Tcl_CreateMathFunc, Tcl_GetMathFuncInfo, Tcl_ListMathFuncs \- Define, query and
 void
 \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR(\fIinterp, name, numArgs, argTypes, proc, clientData\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 int
-\fBTcl_GetMathFuncInfo\fR(\fIinterp, name, numArgsPtr, argTypesPtr, procPtr, clientDataPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_GetMathFuncInfo\fR(\fIinterp, name, numArgsPtr, argTypesPtr, procPtr,
+                    clientDataPtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_ListMathFuncs\fR(\fIinterp, pattern\fR)
-.VE
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ValueType *clientDataPtr
+.AS Tcl_ValueType *clientDataPtr out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which new function will be defined.
-.VS 8.4
-.AP "CONST char" *name in
-.VE
+.AP "const char" *name in
 Name for new function.
 .AP int numArgs in
 Number of arguments to new function;  also gives size of \fIargTypes\fR array.
@@ -51,12 +48,12 @@ will need to be freed up using \fITcl_Free\fR.
 .AP Tcl_MathProc **procPtr out
 Points to a variable that will be set to contain a pointer to the
 implementation code for the function (or NULL if the function is
-implemented directly in bytecode.)
+implemented directly in bytecode).
 .AP ClientData *clientDataPtr out
 Points to a variable that will be set to contain the clientData
 argument passed to \fITcl_CreateMathFunc\fR when the function was
 created if the function is not implemented directly in bytecode.
-.AP "CONST char" *pattern in
+.AP "const char" *pattern in
 Pattern to match against function names so as to filter them (by
 passing to \fITcl_StringMatch\fR), or NULL to not apply any filter.
 .BE
@@ -65,71 +62,70 @@ passing to \fITcl_StringMatch\fR), or NULL to not apply any filter.
 .PP
 Tcl allows a number of mathematical functions to be used in
 expressions, such as \fBsin\fR, \fBcos\fR, and \fBhypot\fR.
-\fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR allows applications to add additional functions
+These functions are represented by commands in the namespace,
+\fBtcl::mathfunc\fR.  The \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR function is
+an obsolete way for applications to add additional functions
 to those already provided by Tcl or to replace existing functions.
+It should not be used by new applications, which should create
+math functions using \fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR to create a command
+in the \fBtcl::mathfunc\fR namespace.
+.PP
+In the \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR interface,
 \fIName\fR is the name of the function as it will appear in expressions.
-If \fIname\fR doesn't already exist as a function then a new function
-is created.  If it does exist, then the existing function is replaced.
+If \fIname\fR does not already exist in the \fB::tcl::mathfunc\fR
+namespace, then a new command is created in that namespace.
+If \fIname\fR does exist, then the existing function is replaced.
 \fINumArgs\fR and \fIargTypes\fR describe the arguments to the function.
 Each entry in the \fIargTypes\fR array must be
-.VS 8.4
-one of TCL_INT, TCL_DOUBLE, TCL_WIDE_INT,
-or TCL_EITHER to indicate whether the corresponding argument must be an
+one of \fBTCL_INT\fR, \fBTCL_DOUBLE\fR, \fBTCL_WIDE_INT\fR,
+or \fBTCL_EITHER\fR to indicate whether the corresponding argument must be an
 integer, a double-precision floating value, a wide (64-bit) integer,
 or any, respectively.
-.VE 8.4
 .PP
 Whenever the function is invoked in an expression Tcl will invoke
 \fIproc\fR.  \fIProc\fR should have arguments and result that match
 the type \fBTcl_MathProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_MathProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	Tcl_Value *\fIargs\fR,
-	Tcl_Value *\fIresultPtr\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        Tcl_Value *\fIargs\fR,
+        Tcl_Value *\fIresultPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 When \fIproc\fR is invoked the \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR
 arguments will be the same as those passed to \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR.
 \fIArgs\fR will point to an array of \fInumArgs\fR Tcl_Value structures,
 which describe the actual arguments to the function:
-.VS 8.4
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_Value {
-	Tcl_ValueType \fItype\fR;
-	long \fIintValue\fR;
-	double \fIdoubleValue\fR;
-	Tcl_WideInt \fIwideValue\fR;
+        Tcl_ValueType \fItype\fR;
+        long \fIintValue\fR;
+        double \fIdoubleValue\fR;
+        Tcl_WideInt \fIwideValue\fR;
 } Tcl_Value;
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fItype\fR field indicates the type of the argument and is
-one of TCL_INT, TCL_DOUBLE or TCL_WIDE_INT.
-.VE 8.4
+one of \fBTCL_INT\fR, \fBTCL_DOUBLE\fR or \fBTCL_WIDE_INT\fR.
 It will match the \fIargTypes\fR value specified for the function unless
-the \fIargTypes\fR value was TCL_EITHER. Tcl converts
+the \fIargTypes\fR value was \fBTCL_EITHER\fR. Tcl converts
 the argument supplied in the expression to the type requested in
 \fIargTypes\fR, if that is necessary.
 Depending on the value of the \fItype\fR field, the \fIintValue\fR,
-.VS 8.4
 \fIdoubleValue\fR or \fIwideValue\fR
-.VE 8.4
 field will contain the actual value of the argument.
 .PP
 \fIProc\fR should compute its result and store it either as an integer
 in \fIresultPtr->intValue\fR or as a floating value in
 \fIresultPtr->doubleValue\fR.
 It should set also \fIresultPtr->type\fR to one of
-.VS 8.4
-TCL_INT, TCL_DOUBLE or TCL_WIDE_INT
-.VE 8.4
+\fBTCL_INT\fR, \fBTCL_DOUBLE\fR or \fBTCL_WIDE_INT\fR
 to indicate which value was set.
-Under normal circumstances \fIproc\fR should return TCL_OK.
+Under normal circumstances \fIproc\fR should return \fBTCL_OK\fR.
 If an error occurs while executing the function, \fIproc\fR should
-return TCL_ERROR and leave an error message in the interpreter's result.
+return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leave an error message in the interpreter's result.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 \fBTcl_GetMathFuncInfo\fR retrieves the values associated with
 function \fIname\fR that were passed to a preceding
 \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR call.  Normally, the return code is
@@ -140,20 +136,21 @@ result.
 If an error did not occur, the array reference placed in the variable
 pointed to by \fIargTypesPtr\fR is newly allocated, and should be
 released by passing it to \fBTcl_Free\fR.  Some functions (the
-standard set implemented in the core) are implemented directly at the
-bytecode level; attempting to retrieve values for them causes a NULL
-to be stored in the variable pointed to by \fIprocPtr\fR and the
-variable pointed to by \fIclientDataPtr\fR will not be modified.
+standard set implemented in the core, and those defined by placing
+commands in the \fBtcl::mathfunc\fR namespace) do not have
+argument type information; attempting to retrieve values for
+them causes a NULL to be stored in the variable pointed to by 
+\fIprocPtr\fR and the variable pointed to by \fIclientDataPtr\fR
+will not be modified.  The variable pointed to by \fInumArgsPointer\fR
+will contain -1, and no argument types will be stored in the variable
+pointed to by \fIargTypesPointer\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ListMathFuncs\fR returns a Tcl object containing a list of all
 the math functions defined in the interpreter whose name matches
-\fIpattern\fR.  In the case of an error, NULL is returned and an error
-message is left in the interpreter result, and otherwise the returned
-object will have a reference count of zero.
-.VE
+\fIpattern\fR.  The returned object has a reference count of zero.
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+expr(n), info(n), Tcl_CreateObjCommand(3), Tcl_Free(3), Tcl_NewListObj(3)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 expression, mathematical function
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-expr(n), info(n), Tcl_Free(3), Tcl_NewListObj(3)
diff --git a/doc/CrtObjCmd.3 b/doc/CrtObjCmd.3
index bcb57f3..a05efc2 100644
--- a/doc/CrtObjCmd.3
+++ b/doc/CrtObjCmd.3
@@ -28,17 +28,13 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_SetCommandInfo\fR(\fIinterp, cmdName, infoPtr\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 int
 \fBTcl_GetCommandInfoFromToken\fR(\fItoken, infoPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_SetCommandInfoFromToken\fR(\fItoken, infoPtr\fR)
-.VE
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
-CONST char *
-.VE
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetCommandName\fR(\fIinterp, token\fR)
 .sp
 void
@@ -47,12 +43,10 @@ void
 Tcl_Command
 \fBTcl_GetCommandFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ObjCmdProc *deleteProc in/out
+.AS Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *deleteProc in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to create a new command or that contains a command.
-.VS 8.4
 .AP char *cmdName in
-.VE
 Name of command.
 .AP Tcl_ObjCmdProc *proc in
 Implementation of the new command: \fIproc\fR will be called whenever
@@ -96,11 +90,10 @@ and it returns NULL.
 \fBTcl_ObjCmdProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_ObjCmdProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	int \fIobjc\fR,
-.VS
-	Tcl_Obj *CONST \fIobjv\fR[]);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        int \fIobjc\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *const \fIobjv\fR[]);
 .CE
 When \fIproc\fR is invoked, the \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR parameters
 will be copies of the \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR arguments given to
@@ -117,7 +110,7 @@ Additionally, when \fIproc\fR is invoked, it must not modify the contents
 of the \fIobjv\fR array by assigning new pointer values to any element of the
 array (for example, \fIobjv\fR[\fB2\fR] = \fBNULL\fR) because this will
 cause memory to be lost and the runtime stack to be corrupted.  The
-\fBCONST\fR in the declaration of \fIobjv\fR will cause ANSI-compliant
+\fBconst\fR in the declaration of \fIobjv\fR will cause ANSI-compliant
 compilers to report any such attempted assignment as an error.  However,
 it is acceptable to modify the internal representation of any individual
 object argument.  For instance, the user may call
@@ -125,7 +118,6 @@ object argument.  For instance, the user may call
 representation of that object; that call may change the type of the object
 that \fIobjv\fR[\fB2\fR] points at, but will not change where
 \fIobjv\fR[\fB2\fR] points.
-.VE
 .PP
 \fIproc\fR must return an integer code that is either \fBTCL_OK\fR,
 \fBTCL_ERROR\fR, \fBTCL_RETURN\fR, \fBTCL_BREAK\fR, or \fBTCL_CONTINUE\fR.
@@ -168,7 +160,8 @@ application an opportunity to release any structures associated
 with the command.  \fIDeleteProc\fR should have arguments and
 result that match the type \fBTcl_CmdDeleteProc\fR:
 .CS
-typedef void Tcl_CmdDeleteProc(ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+typedef void Tcl_CmdDeleteProc(
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR argument will be the same as the \fIclientData\fR
 argument passed to \fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR.
@@ -176,7 +169,7 @@ argument passed to \fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR.
 \fBTcl_DeleteCommand\fR deletes a command from a command interpreter.
 Once the call completes, attempts to invoke \fIcmdName\fR in
 \fIinterp\fR will result in errors.
-If \fIcmdName\fR isn't bound as a command in \fIinterp\fR then
+If \fIcmdName\fR is not bound as a command in \fIinterp\fR then
 \fBTcl_DeleteCommand\fR does nothing and returns -1;  otherwise
 it returns 0.
 There are no restrictions on \fIcmdName\fR:  it may refer to
@@ -206,14 +199,14 @@ pointed to by \fIinfoPtr\fR and returns 1.
 A \fBTcl_CmdInfo\fR structure has the following fields:
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_CmdInfo {
-    int isNativeObjectProc;
-    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *objProc;
-    ClientData objClientData;
-    Tcl_CmdProc *proc;
-    ClientData clientData;
-    Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *deleteProc;
-    ClientData deleteData;
-    Tcl_Namespace *namespacePtr;
+    int \fIisNativeObjectProc\fR;
+    Tcl_ObjCmdProc *\fIobjProc\fR;
+    ClientData \fIobjClientData\fR;
+    Tcl_CmdProc *\fIproc\fR;
+    ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
+    Tcl_CmdDeleteProc *\fIdeleteProc\fR;
+    ClientData \fIdeleteData\fR;
+    Tcl_Namespace *\fInamespacePtr\fR;
 } Tcl_CmdInfo;
 .CE
 The \fIisNativeObjectProc\fR field has the value 1
@@ -285,16 +278,16 @@ This name does not include any \fB::\fR namespace qualifiers.
 The command corresponding to \fItoken\fR must not have been deleted.
 The string returned by \fBTcl_GetCommandName\fR is in dynamic memory
 owned by Tcl and is only guaranteed to retain its value as long as the
-command isn't deleted or renamed;  callers should copy the string if
+command is not deleted or renamed;  callers should copy the string if
 they need to keep it for a long time.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetCommandFullName\fR produces the fully-qualified name
+\fBTcl_GetCommandFullName\fR produces the fully qualified name
 of a command from a command token.  
 The name, including all namespace prefixes,
-is appended to the object specified by \fIobjPtr\fP.
+is appended to the object specified by \fIobjPtr\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetCommandFromObj\fR returns a token for the command
-specified by the name in a \fBTcl_Obj\fP.
+specified by the name in a \fBTcl_Obj\fR.
 The command name is resolved relative to the current namespace.
 Returns NULL if the command is not found.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/CrtSlave.3 b/doc/CrtSlave.3
index f87a4e0..3863373 100644
--- a/doc/CrtSlave.3
+++ b/doc/CrtSlave.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_CreateSlave 3 7.6 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_IsSafe, Tcl_MakeSafe, Tcl_CreateSlave, Tcl_GetSlave, Tcl_GetMaster, Tcl_GetInterpPath, Tcl_CreateAlias, Tcl_CreateAliasObj, Tcl_GetAlias, Tcl_GetAliasObj, Tcl_ExposeCommand, Tcl_HideCommand \- manage multiple Tcl interpreters, aliases and hidden commands.
+Tcl_IsSafe, Tcl_MakeSafe, Tcl_CreateSlave, Tcl_GetSlave, Tcl_GetMaster, Tcl_GetInterpPath, Tcl_CreateAlias, Tcl_CreateAliasObj, Tcl_GetAlias, Tcl_GetAliasObj, Tcl_ExposeCommand, Tcl_HideCommand \- manage multiple Tcl interpreters, aliases and hidden commands
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -31,20 +31,21 @@ Tcl_Interp *
 int
 \fBTcl_GetInterpPath\fR(\fIaskingInterp, slaveInterp\fR)
 .sp
-.VS
 int
-\fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR(\fIslaveInterp, slaveCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd, argc, argv\fR)
+\fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR(\fIslaveInterp, slaveCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd,
+                argc, argv\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_CreateAliasObj\fR(\fIslaveInterp, slaveCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd, objc, objv\fR)
-.VE
+\fBTcl_CreateAliasObj\fR(\fIslaveInterp, slaveCmd, targetInterp, targetCmd,
+                   objc, objv\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_GetAlias\fR(\fIinterp, slaveCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr, argcPtr, argvPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_GetAlias\fR(\fIinterp, slaveCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr,
+             argcPtr, argvPtr\fR)
 .sp
-.VS
 int
-\fBTcl_GetAliasObj\fR(\fIinterp, slaveCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr, objcPtr, objvPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_GetAliasObj\fR(\fIinterp, slaveCmd, targetInterpPtr, targetCmdPtr,
+                objcPtr, objvPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_ExposeCommand\fR(\fIinterp, hiddenCmdName, cmdName\fR)
@@ -52,44 +53,46 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_HideCommand\fR(\fIinterp, cmdName, hiddenCmdName\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_InterpDeleteProc **hiddenCmdName
+.AS "const char *const" **targetInterpPtr out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to execute the specified command.
-.AP "CONST char" *slaveName in
+.AP "const char" *slaveName in
 Name of slave interpreter to create or manipulate.
 .AP int isSafe in
-If non-zero, a ``safe'' slave that is suitable for running untrusted code
+If non-zero, a
+.QW safe
+slave that is suitable for running untrusted code
 is created, otherwise a trusted slave is created.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *slaveInterp in
 Interpreter to use for creating the source command for an alias (see
 below).
-.AP "CONST char" *slaveCmd in
+.AP "const char" *slaveCmd in
 Name of source command for alias.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *targetInterp in
 Interpreter that contains the target command for an alias.
-.AP "CONST char" *targetCmd in
+.AP "const char" *targetCmd in
 Name of target command for alias in \fItargetInterp\fR.
 .AP int argc in
 Count of additional arguments to pass to the alias command.
-.AP "CONST char * CONST" *argv in
+.AP "const char *const" *argv in
 Vector of strings, the additional arguments to pass to the alias command.
 This storage is owned by the caller.
 .AP int objc in
 Count of additional object arguments to pass to the alias object command.
-.AP Tcl_Object **objv in
+.AP Tcl_Obj **objv in
 Vector of Tcl_Obj structures, the additional object arguments to pass to
 the alias object command.
 This storage is owned by the caller.
 .AP Tcl_Interp **targetInterpPtr in
 Pointer to location to store the address of the interpreter where a target
 command is defined for an alias.
-.AP "CONST char" **targetCmdPtr out
+.AP "const char" **targetCmdPtr out
 Pointer to location to store the address of the name of the target command
 for an alias.
 .AP int *argcPtr out
 Pointer to location to store count of additional arguments to be passed to
 the alias. The location is in storage owned by the caller.
-.AP "CONST char" ***argvPtr out
+.AP "const char" ***argvPtr out
 Pointer to location to store a vector of strings, the additional arguments
 to pass to an alias. The location is in storage owned by the caller, the
 vector of strings is owned by the called function.
@@ -101,17 +104,11 @@ Pointer to location to store a vector of Tcl_Obj structures, the additional
 arguments to pass to an object alias command. The location is in storage
 owned by the caller, the vector of Tcl_Obj structures is owned by the
 called function.
-.VS
-.VS 8.4
-.AP "CONST char" *cmdName in
-.VE
+.AP "const char" *cmdName in
 Name of an exposed command to hide or create.
-.VS 8.4
-.AP "CONST char" *hiddenCmdName in
-.VE
+.AP "const char" *hiddenCmdName in
 Name under which a hidden command is stored and with which it can be
 exposed or invoked.
-.VE
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -129,16 +126,21 @@ It also creates a slave command named \fIslaveName\fR in \fIinterp\fR which
 allows \fIinterp\fR to manipulate the new slave. 
 If \fIisSafe\fR is zero, the command creates a trusted slave in which Tcl
 code has access to all the Tcl commands.
-If it is \fB1\fR, the command creates a ``safe'' slave in which Tcl code
-has access only to set of Tcl commands defined as ``Safe Tcl''; see the
-manual entry for the Tcl \fBinterp\fR command for details.
+If it is \fB1\fR, the command creates a
+.QW safe
+slave in which Tcl code has access only to set of Tcl commands defined as
+.QW "Safe Tcl" ;
+see the manual entry for the Tcl \fBinterp\fR command for details.
 If the creation of the new slave interpreter failed, \fBNULL\fR is returned.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_IsSafe\fR returns \fB1\fR if \fIinterp\fR is ``safe'' (was created
-with the \fBTCL_SAFE_INTERPRETER\fR flag specified),
+\fBTcl_IsSafe\fR returns \fB1\fR if \fIinterp\fR is
+.QW safe
+(was created with the \fBTCL_SAFE_INTERPRETER\fR flag specified),
 \fB0\fR otherwise.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_MakeSafe\fR marks \fIinterp\fR as ``safe'', so that future
+\fBTcl_MakeSafe\fR marks \fIinterp\fR as
+.QW safe ,
+so that future
 calls to \fBTcl_IsSafe\fR will return 1.  It also removes all known
 potentially-unsafe core functionality (both commands and variables)
 from \fIinterp\fR.  However, it cannot know what parts of an extension
@@ -163,7 +165,6 @@ of the relative path succeeds, \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned, else
 \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and the \fIresult\fR field in
 \fIaskingInterp\fR contains the error message.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR creates an object command named \fIslaveCmd\fR in
 \fIslaveInterp\fR that when invoked, will cause the command \fItargetCmd\fR
 to be invoked in \fItargetInterp\fR. The arguments specified by the strings
@@ -180,7 +181,6 @@ restrictions on how they are related.
 \fBTcl_CreateAliasObj\fR is similar to \fBTcl_CreateAlias\fR except 
 that it takes a vector of objects to pass as additional arguments instead
 of a vector of strings.
-.VE
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetAlias\fR returns information about an alias \fIaliasName\fR
 in \fIinterp\fR. Any of the result fields can be \fBNULL\fR, in
@@ -188,7 +188,6 @@ which case the corresponding datum is not returned. If a result field is
 non\-\fBNULL\fR, the address indicated is set to the corresponding datum.
 For example, if \fItargetNamePtr\fR is non\-\fBNULL\fR it is set to a
 pointer to the string containing the name of the target command.
-.VS
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetAliasObj\fR is similar to \fBTcl_GetAlias\fR except that it
 returns a pointer to a vector of Tcl_Obj structures instead of a vector of
diff --git a/doc/CrtTimerHdlr.3 b/doc/CrtTimerHdlr.3
index 9018ae2..e948728 100644
--- a/doc/CrtTimerHdlr.3
+++ b/doc/CrtTimerHdlr.3
@@ -9,8 +9,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_CreateTimerHandler 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_CreateTimerHandler, Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler \- call a procedure at a
-given time
+Tcl_CreateTimerHandler, Tcl_DeleteTimerHandler \- call a procedure at a given time
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -28,7 +27,7 @@ Procedure to invoke after \fImilliseconds\fR have elapsed.
 .AP ClientData clientData in
 Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
 .AP Tcl_TimerToken token in
-Token for previously-created timer handler (the return value
+Token for previously created timer handler (the return value
 from some previous call to \fBTcl_CreateTimerHandler\fR).
 .BE
 
@@ -43,7 +42,7 @@ dispatch events through \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR or through Tcl commands
 such as \fBvwait\fR.
 The call to \fIproc\fR may not be made at the exact time given by
 \fImilliseconds\fR:  it will be made at the next opportunity
-after that time.  For example, if \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR isn't
+after that time.  For example, if \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR is not
 called until long after the time has elapsed, or if there
 are other pending events to process before the call to
 \fIproc\fR, then the call to \fIproc\fR will be delayed.
@@ -61,7 +60,7 @@ structure containing application-specific information about
 what to do in \fIproc\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_DeleteTimerHandler\fR may be called to delete a
-previously-created timer handler.  It deletes the handler
+previously created timer handler.  It deletes the handler
 indicated by \fItoken\fR so that no call to \fIproc\fR
 will be made;  if that handler no longer exists
 (e.g. because the time period has already elapsed and \fIproc\fR
diff --git a/doc/CrtTrace.3 b/doc/CrtTrace.3
index e11bd55..076f47b 100644
--- a/doc/CrtTrace.3
+++ b/doc/CrtTrace.3
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1989-1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2002 by Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2002 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ Tcl_Trace
 .sp
 \fBTcl_DeleteTrace\fR(\fIinterp, trace\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_CmdObjTraceDeleteProc (clientData)()
+.AS Tcl_CmdObjTraceDeleteProc *deleteProc
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter containing command to be traced or untraced.
 .AP int level in
@@ -36,14 +36,14 @@ A value of 0 means that commands at any level are traced.
 .AP int flags in
 Flags governing the trace execution.  See below for details.
 .AP Tcl_CmdObjTraceProc *objProc in
-Procedure to call for each command that's executed.  See below for
+Procedure to call for each command that is executed.  See below for
 details of the calling sequence.
 .AP Tcl_CmdTraceProc *proc in
-Procedure to call for each command that's executed.  See below for
+Procedure to call for each command that is executed.  See below for
 details on the calling sequence.
 .AP ClientData clientData in
 Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIobjProc\fR or \fIproc\fR.
-.AP Tcl_CmdObjTraceDeleteProc *deleteProc
+.AP Tcl_CmdObjTraceDeleteProc *deleteProc in
 Procedure to call when the trace is deleted.  See below for details of
 the calling sequence.  A NULL pointer is permissible and results in no
 callback when the trace is deleted.
@@ -65,13 +65,13 @@ interpreter.
 \fBTcl_CmdObjTraceProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef int \fBTcl_CmdObjTraceProc\fR( 
-    \fBClientData\fR \fIclientData\fR,
-    \fBTcl_Interp\fR* \fIinterp\fR,
-    int \fIlevel\fR,
-    CONST char* \fIcommand\fR,
-    \fBTcl_Command\fR \fIcommandToken\fR,
-    int \fIobjc\fR,
-    \fBTcl_Obj\fR *CONST \fIobjv\fR[] );
+        \fBClientData\fR \fIclientData\fR,
+        \fBTcl_Interp\fR* \fIinterp\fR,
+        int \fIlevel\fR,
+        const char *\fIcommand\fR,
+        \fBTcl_Command\fR \fIcommandToken\fR,
+        int \fIobjc\fR,
+        \fBTcl_Obj\fR *const \fIobjv\fR[] );
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR parameters are copies of the
 corresponding arguments given to \fBTcl_CreateTrace\fR.
@@ -141,8 +141,7 @@ When \fBTcl_DeleteTrace\fR is called, the interpreter invokes the
 \fBTcl_CmdObjTraceDeleteProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef void \fBTcl_CmdObjTraceDeleteProc\fR( 
-    \fBClientData\fR \fIclientData\fR
-);
+        \fBClientData\fR \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR parameter will be the same as the
 \fIclientData\fR parameter that was originally passed to
@@ -156,14 +155,14 @@ that its \fIproc\fR parameter should have arguments and result that
 match the type \fBTcl_CmdTraceProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_CmdTraceProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	int \fIlevel\fR,
-	char *\fIcommand\fR,
-	Tcl_CmdProc *\fIcmdProc\fR,
-	ClientData \fIcmdClientData\fR,
-	int \fIargc\fR,
-	CONST char *\fIargv\fR[]);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        int \fIlevel\fR,
+        char *\fIcommand\fR,
+        Tcl_CmdProc *\fIcmdProc\fR,
+        ClientData \fIcmdClientData\fR,
+        int \fIargc\fR,
+        const char *\fIargv\fR[]);
 .CE
 The parameters to the \fIproc\fR callback are similar to those of the
 \fIobjProc\fR callback above. The \fIcommandToken\fR is
diff --git a/doc/DString.3 b/doc/DString.3
index 8c6f516..a85b1cf 100644
--- a/doc/DString.3
+++ b/doc/DString.3
@@ -17,10 +17,10 @@ Tcl_DStringInit, Tcl_DStringAppend, Tcl_DStringAppendElement, Tcl_DStringStartSu
 \fBTcl_DStringInit\fR(\fIdsPtr\fR)
 .sp
 char *
-\fBTcl_DStringAppend\fR(\fIdsPtr, string, length\fR)
+\fBTcl_DStringAppend\fR(\fIdsPtr, bytes, length\fR)
 .sp
 char *
-\fBTcl_DStringAppendElement\fR(\fIdsPtr, string\fR)
+\fBTcl_DStringAppendElement\fR(\fIdsPtr, element\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_DStringStartSublist\fR(\fIdsPtr\fR)
 .sp
@@ -42,13 +42,15 @@ char *
 .sp
 \fBTcl_DStringGetResult\fR(\fIinterp, dsPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_DString newLength
+.AS Tcl_DString newLength in/out
 .AP Tcl_DString *dsPtr in/out
 Pointer to structure that is used to manage a dynamic string.
-.AP "CONST char" *string in
-Pointer to characters to add to dynamic string.
+.AP "const char" *bytes in
+Pointer to characters to append to dynamic string.
+.AP "const char" *element in
+Pointer to characters to append as list element to dynamic string.
 .AP int length in
-Number of characters from string to add to dynamic string.  If -1,
+Number of bytes from \fIbytes\fR to add to dynamic string.  If -1,
 add all characters up to null terminating character.
 .AP int newLength in
 New length for dynamic string, not including null terminating
@@ -75,7 +77,7 @@ string.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_DStringAppend\fR adds new information to a dynamic string,
 allocating more memory for the string if needed.
-If \fIlength\fR is less than zero then everything in \fIstring\fR
+If \fIlength\fR is less than zero then everything in \fIbytes\fR
 is appended to the dynamic string;  otherwise \fIlength\fR
 specifies the number of bytes to append.
 \fBTcl_DStringAppend\fR returns a pointer to the characters of
@@ -83,14 +85,16 @@ the new string.  The string can also be retrieved from the
 \fIstring\fR field of the Tcl_DString structure.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_DStringAppendElement\fR is similar to \fBTcl_DStringAppend\fR
-except that it doesn't take a \fIlength\fR argument (it appends
-all of \fIstring\fR) and it converts the string to a proper list element
+except that it does not take a \fIlength\fR argument (it appends
+all of \fIelement\fR) and it converts the string to a proper list element
 before appending.
 \fBTcl_DStringAppendElement\fR adds a separator space before the
 new list element unless the new list element is the first in a
 list or sub-list (i.e. either the current string is empty, or it
-contains the single character ``{'', or the last two characters of
-the current string are `` {'').
+contains the single character
+.QW { ,
+or the last two characters of the current string are
+.QW " {" ).
 \fBTcl_DStringAppendElement\fR returns a pointer to the
 characters of the new string.
 .PP
@@ -128,7 +132,7 @@ will still need to be called.
 This procedure is now deprecated.  \fBTcl_DStringSetLength\fR  should
 be used instead.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_DStringFree\fR should be called when you're finished using
+\fBTcl_DStringFree\fR should be called when you are finished using
 the string.  It frees up any memory that was allocated for the string
 and reinitializes the string's value to an empty string.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/DetachPids.3 b/doc/DetachPids.3
index 17b57eb..0535cd8 100644
--- a/doc/DetachPids.3
+++ b/doc/DetachPids.3
@@ -19,18 +19,18 @@ Tcl_DetachPids, Tcl_ReapDetachedProcs, Tcl_WaitPid \- manage child processes in
 \fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR()
 .sp
 Tcl_Pid
-\fBTcl_WaitPid\fR(\fIpid, statPtr, options\fR)
+\fBTcl_WaitPid\fR(\fIpid, statusPtr, options\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS int *statusPtr
+.AS Tcl_Pid *statusPtr out
 .AP int numPids in
 Number of process ids contained in the array pointed to by \fIpidPtr\fR.
 .AP int *pidPtr in
 Address of array containing \fInumPids\fR process ids.
 .AP Tcl_Pid pid in
 The id of the process (pipe) to wait for.
-.AP int* statPtr out
+.AP int *statusPtr out
 The result of waiting on a process (pipe). Either 0 or ECHILD.
-.AP int options
+.AP int options in
 The options controlling the wait. WNOHANG specifies not to wait when
 checking the process.
 .BE
@@ -49,16 +49,16 @@ overflow, even if all the children have exited.
 \fBTcl_DetachPids\fR may be called to ask Tcl to take responsibility
 for one or more processes whose process ids are contained in the
 \fIpidPtr\fR array passed as argument.  The caller presumably
-has started these processes running in background and doesn't
+has started these processes running in background and does not
 want to have to deal with them again.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR invokes the \fBwaitpid\fR kernel call
 on each of the background processes so that its state can be cleaned
-up if it has exited.  If the process hasn't exited yet,
-\fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR doesn't wait for it to exit;  it will check again
+up if it has exited.  If the process has not exited yet,
+\fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR does not wait for it to exit;  it will check again
 the next time it is invoked.
 Tcl automatically calls \fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR each time the
-\fBexec\fR command is executed, so in most cases it isn't necessary
+\fBexec\fR command is executed, so in most cases it is not necessary
 for any code outside of Tcl to invoke \fBTcl_ReapDetachedProcs\fR.
 However, if you call \fBTcl_DetachPids\fR in situations where the
 \fBexec\fR command may never get executed, you may wish to call
diff --git a/doc/DictObj.3 b/doc/DictObj.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..74b8dd1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/DictObj.3
@@ -0,0 +1,234 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2003 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH Tcl_DictObj 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+Tcl_NewDictObj, Tcl_DictObjPut, Tcl_DictObjGet, Tcl_DictObjRemove, Tcl_DictObjSize, Tcl_DictObjFirst, Tcl_DictObjNext, Tcl_DictObjDone, Tcl_DictObjPutKeyList, Tcl_DictObjRemoveKeyList \- manipulate Tcl objects as dictionaries
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.sp
+Tcl_Obj *
+\fBTcl_NewDictObj\fR()
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_DictObjGet\fR(\fIinterp, dictPtr, keyPtr, valuePtrPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_DictObjPut\fR(\fIinterp, dictPtr, keyPtr, valuePtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_DictObjRemove\fR(\fIinterp, dictPtr, keyPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_DictObjSize\fR(\fIinterp, dictPtr, sizePtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR(\fIinterp, dictPtr, searchPtr,
+                 keyPtrPtr, valuePtrPtr, donePtr\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_DictObjNext\fR(\fIsearchPtr, keyPtrPtr, valuePtrPtr, donePtr\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_DictObjDone\fR(\fIsearchPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_DictObjPutKeyList\fR(\fIinterp, dictPtr, keyc, keyv, valuePtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_DictObjRemoveKeyList\fR(\fIinterp, dictPtr, keyc, keyv\fR)
+.SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_DictSearch "**valuePtrPtr" in/out
+.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
+If an error occurs while converting an object to be a dictionary object,
+an error message is left in the interpreter's result object
+unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *dictPtr in/out
+Points to the dictionary object to be manipulated.
+If \fIdictPtr\fR does not already point to a dictionary object,
+an attempt will be made to convert it to one.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *keyPtr in
+Points to the key for the key/value pair being manipulated within the
+dictionary object.
+.AP Tcl_Obj **keyPtrPtr out
+Points to a variable that will have the key from a key/value pair
+placed within it.  May be NULL to indicate that the caller is not
+interested in the key.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *valuePtr in
+Points to the value for the key/value pair being manipulate within the
+dictionary object (or sub-object, in the case of
+\fBTcl_DictObjPutKeyList\fR.)
+.AP Tcl_Obj **valuePtrPtr out
+Points to a variable that will have the value from a key/value pair
+placed within it.  For \fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR and
+\fBTcl_DictObjNext\fR, this may be NULL to indicate that the caller is
+not interested in the value.
+.AP int *sizePtr out
+Points to a variable that will have the number of key/value pairs
+contained within the dictionary placed within it.
+.AP Tcl_DictSearch *searchPtr in/out
+Pointer to record to use to keep track of progress in enumerating all
+key/value pairs in a dictionary.  The contents of the record will be
+initialized by the call to \fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR.  If the enumerating
+is to be terminated before all values in the dictionary have been
+returned, the search record \fImust\fR be passed to
+\fBTcl_DictObjDone\fR to enable the internal locks to be released.
+.AP int *donePtr out
+Points to a variable that will have a non-zero value written into it
+when the enumeration of the key/value pairs in a dictionary has
+completed, and a zero otherwise.
+.AP int keyc in
+Indicates the number of keys that will be supplied in the \fIkeyv\fR
+array.
+.AP "Tcl_Obj *const" *keyv in
+Array of \fIkeyc\fR pointers to objects that
+\fBTcl_DictObjPutKeyList\fR and \fBTcl_DictObjRemoveKeyList\fR will
+use to locate the key/value pair to manipulate within the
+sub-dictionaries of the main dictionary object passed to them.
+.BE
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+Tcl dictionary objects have an internal representation that supports
+efficient mapping from keys to values and which guarantees that the
+particular ordering of keys within the dictionary remains the same
+modulo any keys being deleted (which removes them from the order) or
+added (which adds them to the end of the order). If reinterpreted as a
+list, the values at the even-valued indices in the list will be the
+keys of the dictionary, and each will be followed (in the odd-valued
+index) by the value associated with that key.
+.PP
+The procedures described in this man page are used to
+create, modify, index, and iterate over dictionary objects from C code.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_NewDictObj\fR creates a new, empty dictionary object.  The
+string representation of the object will be invalid, and the reference
+count of the object will be zero.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_DictObjGet\fR looks up the given key within the given
+dictionary and writes a pointer to the value associated with that key
+into the variable pointed to by \fIvaluePtrPtr\fR, or a NULL if the
+key has no mapping within the dictionary.  The result of this
+procedure is \fBTCL_OK\fR, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR if the \fIdictPtr\fR cannot be
+converted to a dictionary.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_DictObjPut\fR updates the given dictionary so that the given
+key maps to the given value; any key may exist at most once in any
+particular dictionary.  The dictionary must not be shared, but the key
+and value may be.  This procedure may increase the reference count of
+both key and value if it proves necessary to store them.  Neither key
+nor value should be NULL.  The result of this procedure is \fBTCL_OK\fR, or
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR if the \fIdictPtr\fR cannot be converted to a dictionary.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_DictObjRemove\fR updates the given dictionary so that the given
+key has no mapping to any value.  The dictionary must not be shared,
+but the key may be.  The key actually stored in the dictionary will
+have its reference count decremented if it was present.  It is not an
+error if the key did not previously exist.  The result of this
+procedure is \fBTCL_OK\fR, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR if the \fIdictPtr\fR cannot be
+converted to a dictionary.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_DictObjSize\fR updates the given variable with the number of
+key/value pairs currently in the given dictionary. The result of this
+procedure is \fBTCL_OK\fR, or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR if the \fIdictPtr\fR cannot be
+converted to a dictionary.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR commences an iteration across all the key/value
+pairs in the given dictionary, placing the key and value in the
+variables pointed to by the \fIkeyPtrPtr\fR and \fIvaluePtrPtr\fR
+arguments (which may be NULL to indicate that the caller is
+uninterested in they key or variable respectively.)  The next
+key/value pair in the dictionary may be retrieved with
+\fBTcl_DictObjNext\fR.  Concurrent updates of the dictionary's
+internal representation will not modify the iteration processing
+unless the dictionary is unshared, when this will trigger premature
+termination of the iteration instead (which Tcl scripts cannot trigger
+via the \fBdict\fR command.)  The \fIsearchPtr\fR argument points to a
+piece of context that is used to identify which particular iteration
+is being performed, and is initialized by the call to
+\fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR.  The \fIdonePtr\fR argument points to a
+variable that is updated to be zero of there are further key/value
+pairs to be iterated over, or non-zero if the iteration is complete.
+The order of iteration is implementation-defined.  If the
+\fIdictPtr\fR argument cannot be converted to a dictionary,
+\fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and the iteration is not
+commenced, and otherwise it returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
+.PP
+When \fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR is called upon a dictionary, a lock is placed on
+the dictionary to enable that dictionary to be iterated over safely without
+regard for whether the dictionary is modified during the iteration. Because of
+this, once the iteration over a dictionary's keys has finished (whether
+because all values have been iterated over as indicated by the variable
+indicated by the \fIdonePtr\fR argument being set to one, or because no
+further values are required) the \fBTcl_DictObjDone\fR function must be called
+with the same \fIsearchPtr\fR as was passed to \fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR so that
+the internal locks can be released. Once a particular \fIsearchPtr\fR is
+passed to \fBTcl_DictObjDone\fR, passing it to \fBTcl_DictObjNext\fR (without
+first initializing it with \fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR) will result in no values
+being produced and the variable pointed to by \fIdonePtr\fR being set to one.
+It is safe to call \fBTcl_DictObjDone\fR multiple times on the same
+\fIsearchPtr\fR for each call to \fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR.
+.PP
+The procedures \fBTcl_DictObjPutKeyList\fR and
+\fBTcl_DictObjRemoveKeyList\fR are the close analogues of
+\fBTcl_DictObjPut\fR and \fBTcl_DictObjRemove\fR respectively, except
+that instead of working with a single dictionary, they are designed to
+operate on a nested tree of dictionaries, with inner dictionaries
+stored as values inside outer dictionaries.  The \fIkeyc\fR and
+\fIkeyv\fR arguments specify a list of keys (with outermost keys
+first) that acts as a path to the key/value pair to be affected.  Note
+that there is no corresponding operation for reading a value for a
+path as this is easy to construct from repeated use of
+\fBTcl_DictObjGet\fR. With \fBTcl_DictObjPutKeyList\fR, nested
+dictionaries are created for non-terminal keys where they do not
+already exist. With \fBTcl_DictObjRemoveKeyList\fR, all non-terminal
+keys must exist and have dictionaries as their values.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+Using the dictionary iteration interface to search determine if there
+is a key that maps to itself:
+.PP
+.CS
+Tcl_DictSearch search;
+Tcl_Obj *key, *value;
+int done;
+
+/*
+ * Assume interp and objPtr are parameters.  This is the
+ * idiomatic way to start an iteration over the dictionary; it
+ * sets a lock on the internal representation that ensures that
+ * there are no concurrent modification issues when normal
+ * reference count management is also used.  The lock is
+ * released automatically when the loop is finished, but must
+ * be released manually when an exceptional exit from the loop
+ * is performed. However it is safe to try to release the lock
+ * even if we've finished iterating over the loop.
+ */
+if (\fBTcl_DictObjFirst\fR(interp, objPtr, &search,
+        &key, &value, &done) != TCL_OK) {
+    return TCL_ERROR;
+}
+for (; !done ; \fBTcl_DictObjNext\fR(&search, &key, &value, &done)) {
+    /*
+     * Note that strcmp() is not a good way of comparing
+     * objects and is just used here for demonstration
+     * purposes.
+     */
+    if (!strcmp(Tcl_GetString(key), Tcl_GetString(value))) {
+        break;
+    }
+}
+\fBTcl_DictObjDone\fR(&search);
+Tcl_SetObjResult(interp, Tcl_NewBooleanObj(!done));
+return TCL_OK;
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_InitObjHashTable
+.SH KEYWORDS
+dict, dict object, dictionary, dictionary object, hash table, iteration, object
diff --git a/doc/DoOneEvent.3 b/doc/DoOneEvent.3
index 058307d..9bdf926 100644
--- a/doc/DoOneEvent.3
+++ b/doc/DoOneEvent.3
@@ -21,9 +21,9 @@ int
 .AP int flags in
 This parameter is normally zero.  It may be an OR-ed combination
 of any of the following flag bits:  
-TCL_WINDOW_EVENTS,
-TCL_FILE_EVENTS, TCL_TIMER_EVENTS, TCL_IDLE_EVENTS, TCL_ALL_EVENTS, or
-TCL_DONT_WAIT.
+\fBTCL_WINDOW_EVENTS\fR, \fBTCL_FILE_EVENTS\fR,
+\fBTCL_TIMER_EVENTS\fR, \fBTCL_IDLE_EVENTS\fR, \fBTCL_ALL_EVENTS\fR,
+or \fBTCL_DONT_WAIT\fR.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -71,7 +71,7 @@ Process all kinds of events:  equivalent to OR-ing together all of the
 above flags or specifying none of them.
 .TP 27
 \fBTCL_DONT_WAIT\fR \-
-Don't sleep:  process only events that are ready at the time of the
+Do not sleep:  process only events that are ready at the time of the
 call.
 .LP
 If any of the flags \fBTCL_WINDOW_EVENTS\fR, \fBTCL_FILE_EVENTS\fR,
diff --git a/doc/DoWhenIdle.3 b/doc/DoWhenIdle.3
index a15f1cb..bfc19fb 100644
--- a/doc/DoWhenIdle.3
+++ b/doc/DoWhenIdle.3
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
 \fBTcl_DoWhenIdle\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked
 when the application becomes idle.  The application is
 considered to be idle when \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR has been
-called, couldn't find any events to handle, and is about
+called, could not find any events to handle, and is about
 to go to sleep waiting for an event to occur.  At this
 point all pending \fBTcl_DoWhenIdle\fR handlers are
 invoked.  For each call to \fBTcl_DoWhenIdle\fR there will
@@ -59,7 +59,7 @@ all of the handlers are removed.  If no existing handlers match
 \fIproc\fR and \fIclientData\fR then nothing happens.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_DoWhenIdle\fR is most useful in situations where
-(a) a piece of work will have to be done but (b) it's
+(a) a piece of work will have to be done but (b) it is
 possible that something will happen in the near future
 that will change what has to be done or require something
 different to be done.  \fBTcl_DoWhenIdle\fR allows the
diff --git a/doc/DoubleObj.3 b/doc/DoubleObj.3
index b65af58..12818b0 100644
--- a/doc/DoubleObj.3
+++ b/doc/DoubleObj.3
@@ -23,55 +23,42 @@ int
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_Interp doubleValue in/out
 .AP double doubleValue in
-A double-precision floating point value used to initialize or set a double object.
+A double-precision floating-point value used to initialize or set a Tcl object.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-For \fBTcl_SetDoubleObj\fR, this points to the object to be converted
-to double type.
+For \fBTcl_SetDoubleObj\fR, this points to the object in which to store a
+double value.
 For \fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR, this refers to the object
-from which to get a double value; 
-if \fIobjPtr\fR does not already point to a double object,
-an attempt will be made to convert it to one.
+from which to retrieve a double value. 
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
-If an error occurs during conversion,
-an error message is left in the interpreter's result object
-unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
+When non-NULL, an error message is left here when double value retrieval fails.
 .AP double *doublePtr out
-Points to place to store the double value
-obtained from \fIobjPtr\fR.
+Points to place to store the double value obtained from \fIobjPtr\fR.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-These procedures are used to create, modify, and read
-double Tcl objects from C code.
-\fBTcl_NewDoubleObj\fR and \fBTcl_SetDoubleObj\fR
-will create a new object of double type
-or modify an existing object to have double type. 
-Both of these procedures set the object to have the
-double-precision floating point value given by \fIdoubleValue\fR;
-\fBTcl_NewDoubleObj\fR returns a pointer to a newly created object
-with reference count zero.
-Both procedures set the object's type to be double
-and assign the double value to the object's internal representation
-\fIdoubleValue\fR member.
-\fBTcl_SetDoubleObj\fR invalidates any old string representation
-and, if the object is not already a double object,
-frees any old internal representation.
+These procedures are used to create, modify, and read Tcl objects that
+hold double-precision floating-point values.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR attempts to return a double value
-from the Tcl object \fIobjPtr\fR.
-If the object is not already a double object,
-it will attempt to convert it to one.
-If an error occurs during conversion, it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
-and leaves an error message in the interpreter's result object
-unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
-Otherwise, it returns \fBTCL_OK\fR and stores the double value
-in the address given by \fIdoublePtr\fR.
-If the object is not already a double object,
-the conversion will free any old internal representation.
-
+\fBTcl_NewDoubleObj\fR creates and returns a new Tcl object initialized to
+the double value \fIdoubleValue\fR.  The returned Tcl object is unshared.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetDoubleObj\fR sets the value of an existing Tcl object pointed to
+by \fIobjPtr\fR to the double value \fIdoubleValue\fR.  The \fIobjPtr\fR
+argument must point to an unshared Tcl object.  Any attempt to set the value
+of a shared Tcl object violates Tcl's copy-on-write policy.  Any existing
+string representation or internal representation in the unshared Tcl object
+will be freed as a consequence of setting the new value.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR attempts to retrieve a double value from the
+Tcl object \fIobjPtr\fR.  If the attempt succeeds, then \fBTCL_OK\fR is
+returned, and the double value is written to the storage pointed to by
+\fIdoublePtr\fR.  If the attempt fails, then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned,
+and if \fIinterp\fR is non-NULL, an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR.
+The \fBTcl_ObjType\fR of \fIobjPtr\fR may be changed to make subsequent
+calls to \fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR more efficient. 
+'\" TODO: add discussion of treatment of NaN value
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_GetObjResult
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 double, double object, double type, internal representation, object, object type, string representation
diff --git a/doc/DumpActiveMemory.3 b/doc/DumpActiveMemory.3
index 6e00eb3..1f6cb46 100644
--- a/doc/DumpActiveMemory.3
+++ b/doc/DumpActiveMemory.3
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 .TH "Tcl_DumpActiveMemory" 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_DumpActiveMemory, Tcl_InitMemory, Tcl_ValidateAllMemory \- Validated memory allocation interface.
+Tcl_DumpActiveMemory, Tcl_InitMemory, Tcl_ValidateAllMemory \- Validated memory allocation interface
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -22,9 +22,10 @@ void
 \fBTcl_ValidateAllMemory\fR(\fIfileName, line\fR)
 
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_Interp *fileName
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter in which to add commands.
-.AP "CONST char" *fileName in
+.AP "const char" *fileName in
 For \fBTcl_DumpActiveMemory\fR, name of the file to which memory
 information will be written.  For \fBTcl_ValidateAllMemory\fR, name of
 the file from which the call is being made (normally \fB__FILE__\fR).
diff --git a/doc/Encoding.3 b/doc/Encoding.3
index 913d4fa..a940a5b 100644
--- a/doc/Encoding.3
+++ b/doc/Encoding.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_GetEncoding 3 "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_GetEncoding, Tcl_FreeEncoding, Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString, Tcl_ExternalToUtf, Tcl_UtfToExternalDString, Tcl_UtfToExternal, Tcl_WinTCharToUtf, Tcl_WinUtfToTChar, Tcl_GetEncodingName, Tcl_SetSystemEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingNames, Tcl_CreateEncoding, Tcl_GetDefaultEncodingDir, Tcl_SetDefaultEncodingDir \- procedures for creating and using encodings.
+Tcl_GetEncoding, Tcl_FreeEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingFromObj, Tcl_ExternalToUtfDString, Tcl_ExternalToUtf, Tcl_UtfToExternalDString, Tcl_UtfToExternal, Tcl_WinTCharToUtf, Tcl_WinUtfToTChar, Tcl_GetEncodingName, Tcl_SetSystemEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingNameFromEnvironment, Tcl_GetEncodingNames, Tcl_CreateEncoding, Tcl_GetEncodingSearchPath, Tcl_SetEncodingSearchPath, Tcl_GetDefaultEncodingDir, Tcl_SetDefaultEncodingDir \- procedures for creating and using encodings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -19,19 +19,24 @@ Tcl_Encoding
 void
 \fBTcl_FreeEncoding\fR(\fIencoding\fR)
 .sp
+.VS 8.5
+int
+\fBTcl_GetEncodingFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, encodingPtr\fR)
+.VE 8.5
+.sp
 char *
 \fBTcl_ExternalToUtfDString\fR(\fIencoding, src, srcLen, dstPtr\fR)
 .sp
-int
-\fBTcl_ExternalToUtf\fR(\fIinterp, encoding, src, srcLen, flags, statePtr, dst, dstLen, srcReadPtr, dstWrotePtr, 
-	dstCharsPtr\fR)
-.sp
-char * 
+char *
 \fBTcl_UtfToExternalDString\fR(\fIencoding, src, srcLen, dstPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_UtfToExternal\fR(\fIinterp, encoding, src, srcLen, flags, statePtr, dst, dstLen, srcReadPtr, dstWrotePtr, 
-	dstCharsPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ExternalToUtf\fR(\fIinterp, encoding, src, srcLen, flags, statePtr,
+                  dst, dstLen, srcReadPtr, dstWrotePtr, dstCharsPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_UtfToExternal\fR(\fIinterp, encoding, src, srcLen, flags, statePtr,
+                  dst, dstLen, srcReadPtr, dstWrotePtr, dstCharsPtr\fR)
 .sp
 char *
 \fBTcl_WinTCharToUtf\fR(\fItsrc, srcLen, dstPtr\fR)
@@ -39,41 +44,60 @@ char *
 TCHAR *
 \fBTcl_WinUtfToTChar\fR(\fIsrc, srcLen, dstPtr\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetEncodingName\fR(\fIencoding\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_SetSystemEncoding\fR(\fIinterp, name\fR)
 .sp
+.VS 8.5
+const char *
+\fBTcl_GetEncodingNameFromEnvironment\fR(\fIbufPtr\fR)
+.VE 8.5
+.sp
 void
 \fBTcl_GetEncodingNames\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Encoding
 \fBTcl_CreateEncoding\fR(\fItypePtr\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+.VS 8.5
+Tcl_Obj *
+\fBTcl_GetEncodingSearchPath\fR()
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_SetEncodingSearchPath\fR(\fIsearchPath\fR)
+.VE 8.5
+.sp
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetDefaultEncodingDir\fR(\fIvoid\fR)
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_SetDefaultEncodingDir\fR(\fIpath\fR)
-
-
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_EncodingState *dstWrotePtr
+.AS "const Tcl_EncodingType" *dstWrotePtr in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL if no error reporting is
 desired.
-.AP "CONST char" *name in
+.AP "const char" *name in
 Name of encoding to load.
 .AP Tcl_Encoding encoding in
 The encoding to query, free, or use for converting text.  If \fIencoding\fR is 
 NULL, the current system encoding is used.
-.AP "CONST char" *src in
+.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
+.VS 8.5
+Name of encoding to get token for.
+.VE 8.5
+.AP Tcl_Encoding *encodingPtr out
+.VS 8.5
+Points to storage where encoding token is to be written.
+.VE 8.5
+.AP "const char" *src in
 For the \fBTcl_ExternalToUtf\fR functions, an array of bytes in the
 specified encoding that are to be converted to UTF-8.  For the
 \fBTcl_UtfToExternal\fR and \fBTcl_WinUtfToTChar\fR functions, an array of
 UTF-8 characters to be converted to the specified encoding.  
-.AP "CONST TCHAR" *tsrc in
+.AP "const TCHAR" *tsrc in
 An array of Windows TCHAR characters to convert to UTF-8.
 .AP int srcLen in 
 Length of \fIsrc\fR or \fItsrc\fR in bytes.  If the length is negative, the 
@@ -83,21 +107,21 @@ Pointer to an uninitialized or free \fBTcl_DString\fR in which the converted
 result will be stored.
 .AP int flags in
 Various flag bits OR-ed together.  
-TCL_ENCODING_START signifies that the
+\fBTCL_ENCODING_START\fR signifies that the
 source buffer is the first block in a (potentially multi-block) input
 stream, telling the conversion routine to reset to an initial state and
 perform any initialization that needs to occur before the first byte is
-converted.  TCL_ENCODING_END signifies that the source buffer is the last
+converted. \fBTCL_ENCODING_END\fR signifies that the source buffer is the last
 block in a (potentially multi-block) input stream, telling the conversion
 routine to perform any finalization that needs to occur after the last
 byte is converted and then to reset to an initial state.
-TCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR signifies that the conversion routine should
-return immediately upon reading a source character that doesn't exist in
+\fBTCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR\fR signifies that the conversion routine should
+return immediately upon reading a source character that does not exist in
 the target encoding; otherwise a default fallback character will
 automatically be substituted.  
 .AP Tcl_EncodingState *statePtr in/out
 Used when converting a (generally long or indefinite length) byte stream
-in a piece by piece fashion.  The conversion routine stores its current
+in a piece-by-piece fashion.  The conversion routine stores its current
 state in \fI*statePtr\fR after \fIsrc\fR (the buffer containing the
 current piece) has been converted; that state information must be passed
 back when converting the next piece of the stream so the conversion
@@ -120,9 +144,17 @@ buffer as a result of the conversion.  May be NULL.
 .AP int *dstCharsPtr out
 Filled with the number of characters that correspond to the number of bytes
 stored in the output buffer.  May be NULL.
-.AP Tcl_EncodingType *typePtr in
+.AP Tcl_DString *bufPtr out
+.VS 8.5
+Storage for the prescribed system encoding name.
+.VE 8.5
+.AP "const Tcl_EncodingType" *typePtr in
 Structure that defines a new type of encoding.  
-.AP "CONST char" *path in
+.AP Tcl_Obj *searchPath in
+.VS 8.5
+List of filesystem directories in which to search for encoding data files.
+.VE 8.5
+.AP "const char" *path in
 A path to the location of the encoding file.  
 .BE
 .SH INTRODUCTION
@@ -149,7 +181,7 @@ platform-independent manner.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetEncoding\fR finds an encoding given its \fIname\fR.  The name may
-refer to a builtin Tcl encoding, a user-defined encoding registered by
+refer to a built-in Tcl encoding, a user-defined encoding registered by
 calling \fBTcl_CreateEncoding\fR, or a dynamically-loadable encoding
 file.  The return value is a token that represents the encoding and can be
 used in subsequent calls to procedures such as \fBTcl_GetEncodingName\fR,
@@ -170,6 +202,20 @@ anywhere (i.e., it has been freed as many times as it has been gotten)
 \fBTcl_FreeEncoding\fR will release all storage the encoding was using
 and delete it from the database. 
 .PP
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_GetEncodingFromObj\fR treats the string representation of
+\fIobjPtr\fR as an encoding name, and finds an encoding with that
+name, just as \fBTcl_GetEncoding\fR does. When an encoding is found,
+it is cached within the \fBobjPtr\fR value for future reference, the
+\fBTcl_Encoding\fR token is written to the storage pointed to by
+\fIencodingPtr\fR, and the value \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned. If no such
+encoding is found, the value \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and no
+writing to \fB*\fR\fIencodingPtr\fR takes place. Just as with
+\fBTcl_GetEncoding\fR, the caller should call \fBTcl_FreeEncoding\fR
+on the resulting encoding token when that token will no longer be
+used.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
 \fBTcl_ExternalToUtfDString\fR converts a source buffer \fIsrc\fR from the
 specified \fIencoding\fR into UTF-8.  The converted bytes are stored in 
 \fIdstPtr\fR, which is then null-terminated.  The caller should eventually
@@ -192,7 +238,7 @@ All bytes of \fIsrc\fR were converted.
 The destination buffer was not large enough for all of the converted data; as
 many characters as could fit were converted though.
 .IP \fBTCL_CONVERT_MULTIBYTE\fR 29
-The last fews bytes in the source buffer were the beginning of a multibyte
+The last few bytes in the source buffer were the beginning of a multibyte
 sequence, but more bytes were needed to complete this sequence.  A
 subsequent call to the conversion routine should pass a buffer containing
 the unconverted bytes that remained in \fIsrc\fR plus some further bytes
@@ -204,7 +250,7 @@ if the input stream has been damaged or if the input encoding method was
 misidentified.
 .IP \fBTCL_CONVERT_UNKNOWN\fR 29
 The source buffer contained a character that could not be represented in
-the target encoding and TCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR was specified.  
+the target encoding and \fBTCL_ENCODING_STOPONERROR\fR was specified.  
 .RE
 .LP
 \fBTcl_UtfToExternalDString\fR converts a source buffer \fIsrc\fR from UTF-8 
@@ -228,19 +274,26 @@ is filled with the corresponding number of bytes that were stored in
 \fBTcl_WinUtfToTChar\fR and \fBTcl_WinTCharToUtf\fR are
 Windows-only convenience
 functions for converting between UTF-8 and Windows strings.  On Windows 95
-(as with the Macintosh and Unix operating systems),
-all strings exchanged between Tcl and the operating system are "char"
+(as with the Unix operating system),
+all strings exchanged between Tcl and the operating system are
+.QW "char"
 based.  On Windows NT, some strings exchanged between Tcl and the
-operating system are "char" oriented while others are in Unicode.  By
+operating system are
+.QW "char"
+oriented while others are in Unicode.  By
 convention, in Windows a TCHAR is a character in the ANSI code page
 on Windows 95 and a Unicode character on Windows NT.
 .PP
-If you planned to use the same "char" based interfaces on both Windows
+If you planned to use the same
+.QW "char"
+based interfaces on both Windows
 95 and Windows NT, you could use \fBTcl_UtfToExternal\fR and
 \fBTcl_ExternalToUtf\fR (or their \fBTcl_DString\fR equivalents) with an
 encoding of NULL (the current system encoding).  On the other hand,
 if you planned to use the Unicode interface when running on Windows NT
-and the "char" interfaces when running on Windows 95, you would have
+and the
+.QW "char"
+interfaces when running on Windows 95, you would have
 to perform the following type of test over and over in your program
 (as represented in pseudo-code):
 .CS
@@ -250,6 +303,7 @@ if (running NT) {
     Tcl_FreeEncoding(encoding);
 } else {
     nativeBuffer <- Tcl_UtfToExternal(NULL, utfBuffer);
+}
 .CE
 \fBTcl_WinUtfToTChar\fR and \fBTcl_WinTCharToUtf\fR automatically
 handle this test and use the proper encoding based on the current
@@ -269,11 +323,20 @@ was used to create the encoding.  The string returned by
 whenever the user passes a NULL value for the \fIencoding\fR argument to
 any of the other encoding functions.  If \fIname\fR is NULL, the system
 encoding is reset to the default system encoding, \fBbinary\fR.  If the
-name did not refer to any known or loadable encoding, TCL_ERROR is
+name did not refer to any known or loadable encoding, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is
 returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR.  Otherwise, this
 procedure increments the reference count of the new system encoding,
 decrements the reference count of the old system encoding, and returns
-TCL_OK.
+\fBTCL_OK\fR.
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_GetEncodingNameFromEnvironment\fR provides a means for the Tcl
+library to report the encoding name it believes to be the correct one
+to use as the system encoding, based on system calls and examination of
+the environment suitable for the platform.  It accepts \fIbufPtr\fR,
+a pointer to an uninitialized or freed \fBTcl_DString\fR and writes
+the encoding name to it.  The \fBTcl_DStringValue\fR is returned.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetEncodingNames\fR sets the \fIinterp\fR result to a list
 consisting of the names of all the encodings that are currently defined
@@ -301,12 +364,12 @@ convert between this encoding and UTF-8.  It is defined as follows:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_EncodingType {
-	CONST char *\fIencodingName\fR;
-	Tcl_EncodingConvertProc *\fItoUtfProc\fR;
-	Tcl_EncodingConvertProc *\fIfromUtfProc\fR;
-	Tcl_EncodingFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
-	int \fInullSize\fR;
+        const char *\fIencodingName\fR;
+        Tcl_EncodingConvertProc *\fItoUtfProc\fR;
+        Tcl_EncodingConvertProc *\fIfromUtfProc\fR;
+        Tcl_EncodingFreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR;
+        int \fInullSize\fR;
 } Tcl_EncodingType;  
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -336,16 +399,16 @@ type \fBTcl_EncodingConvertProc\fR:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_EncodingConvertProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	CONST char *\fIsrc\fR, 
-	int \fIsrcLen\fR, 
-	int \fIflags\fR, 
-	Tcl_Encoding *\fIstatePtr\fR,
-	char *\fIdst\fR, 
-	int \fIdstLen\fR, 
-	int *\fIsrcReadPtr\fR,
-	int *\fIdstWrotePtr\fR,
-	int *\fIdstCharsPtr\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        const char *\fIsrc\fR, 
+        int \fIsrcLen\fR, 
+        int \fIflags\fR, 
+        Tcl_EncodingState *\fIstatePtr\fR,
+        char *\fIdst\fR, 
+        int \fIdstLen\fR, 
+        int *\fIsrcReadPtr\fR,
+        int *\fIdstWrotePtr\fR,
+        int *\fIdstCharsPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fItoUtfProc\fR and \fIfromUtfProc\fR procedures are called by the
@@ -367,20 +430,42 @@ The callback procedure \fIfreeProc\fR, if non-NULL, should match the type
 \fBTcl_EncodingFreeProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_EncodingFreeProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 This \fIfreeProc\fR function is called when the encoding is deleted.  The
 \fIclientData\fR parameter is the same as the \fIclientData\fR field
 specified to \fBTcl_CreateEncoding\fR when the encoding was created.  
 .PP
-
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_GetEncodingSearchPath\fR and \fBTcl_SetEncodingSearchPath\fR
+are called to access and set the list of filesystem directories searched
+for encoding data files.  
+.PP
+The value returned by \fBTcl_GetEncodingSearchPath\fR
+is the value stored by the last successful call to
+\fBTcl_SetEncodingSearchPath\fR.  If no calls to
+\fBTcl_SetEncodingSearchPath\fR have occurred, Tcl will compute an initial
+value based on the environment.  There is one encoding search path for the
+entire process, shared by all threads in the process.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetEncodingSearchPath\fR stores \fIsearchPath\fR and returns
+\fBTCL_OK\fR, unless \fIsearchPath\fR is not a valid Tcl list, which
+causes \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to be returned.  The elements of \fIsearchPath\fR
+are not verified as existing readable filesystem directories.  When
+searching for encoding data files takes place, and non-existent or
+non-readable filesystem directories on the \fIsearchPath\fR are silently
+ignored.
+.PP
 \fBTcl_GetDefaultEncodingDir\fR and \fBTcl_SetDefaultEncodingDir\fR
-access and set the directory to use when locating the default encoding
-files.  If this value is not NULL, the \fBTclpInitLibraryPath\fR routine
-appends the path to the head of the search path, and uses this path as
-the first place to look into when trying to locate the encoding file.
-
+are obsolete interfaces best replaced with calls to
+\fBTcl_GetEncodingSearchPath\fR and \fBTcl_SetEncodingSearchPath\fR.
+They are called to access and set the first element of the \fIsearchPath\fR
+list.  Since Tcl searches \fIsearchPath\fR for encoding data files in
+list order, these routines establish the
+.QW default
+directory in which to find encoding data files.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "ENCODING FILES"
 Space would prohibit precompiling into Tcl every possible encoding
 algorithm, so many encodings are stored on disk as dynamically-loadable
@@ -392,23 +477,25 @@ external encoding may consist of single-byte, multi-byte, or double-byte
 characters.  
 .PP
 Each dynamically-loadable encoding is represented as a text file.  The
-initial line of the file, beginning with a ``#'' symbol, is a comment
+initial line of the file, beginning with a
+.QW #
+symbol, is a comment
 that provides a human-readable description of the file.  The next line
 identifies the type of encoding file.  It can be one of the following
 letters:
-.IP "[1]   \fBS\fR"
+.IP "[1] \fBS\fR"
 A single-byte encoding, where one character is always one byte long in the
 encoding.  An example is \fBiso8859-1\fR, used by many European languages.
-.IP "[2]   \fBD\fR"
+.IP "[2] \fBD\fR"
 A double-byte encoding, where one character is always two bytes long in the
 encoding.  An example is \fBbig5\fR, used for Chinese text.
-.IP "[3]   \fBM\fR"
+.IP "[3] \fBM\fR"
 A multi-byte encoding, where one character may be either one or two bytes long.
-Certain bytes are a lead bytes, indicating that another byte must follow
+Certain bytes are lead bytes, indicating that another byte must follow
 and that together the two bytes represent one character.  Other bytes are not
 lead bytes and represent themselves.  An example is \fBshiftjis\fR, used by
 many Japanese computers.
-.IP "[4]   \fBE\fR"
+.IP "[4] \fBE\fR"
 An escape-sequence encoding, specifying that certain sequences of bytes
 do not represent characters, but commands that describe how following bytes
 should be interpreted.  
@@ -478,7 +565,7 @@ and 0x8163 in \fBshiftjis\fR map to 203E and 2026 in Unicode, respectively.
 Following the first page will be all the other pages, each in the same
 format as the first: one number identifying the page followed by 256
 double-byte Unicode characters.  If a character in the encoding maps to the
-Unicode character 0000, it means that the character doesn't actually exist.
+Unicode character 0000, it means that the character does not actually exist.
 If all characters on a page would map to 0000, that page can be omitted.
 .PP
 Case [4] is the escape-sequence encoding file.  The lines in an this type of
@@ -490,13 +577,13 @@ encoding:
 E
 init		{}
 final		{}
-iso8859-1	\\x1b(B
-jis0201		\\x1b(J
-jis0208		\\x1b$@
-jis0208		\\x1b$B
-jis0212		\\x1b$(D
-gb2312		\\x1b$A
-ksc5601		\\x1b$(C
+iso8859-1	\ex1b(B
+jis0201		\ex1b(J
+jis0208		\ex1b$@
+jis0208		\ex1b$B
+jis0212		\ex1b$(D
+gb2312		\ex1b$A
+ksc5601		\ex1b$(C
 .CE
 .PP
 In the file, the first column represents an option and the second column
@@ -505,16 +592,16 @@ the first character is converted, while \fBfinal\fR is a string to emit
 or expect after the last character.  All other options are names of
 table-based encodings; the associated value is the escape-sequence that
 marks that encoding.  Tcl syntax is used for the values; in the above
-example, for instance, ``\fB{}\fR'' represents the empty string and
-``\fB\\x1b\fR'' represents character 27.
+example, for instance,
+.QW \fB{}\fR
+represents the empty string and
+.QW \fB\ex1b\fR
+represents character 27.
 .PP
 When \fBTcl_GetEncoding\fR encounters an encoding \fIname\fR that has not
 been loaded, it attempts to load an encoding file called \fIname\fB.enc\fR
-from the \fBencoding\fR subdirectory of each directory specified in the
-library path \fB$tcl_libPath\fR.  If the encoding file exists, but is
+from the \fBencoding\fR subdirectory of each directory that Tcl searches
+for its script library.  If the encoding file exists, but is
 malformed, an error message will be left in \fIinterp\fR.
 .SH KEYWORDS
 utf, encoding, convert
-
-
-
diff --git a/doc/Ensemble.3 b/doc/Ensemble.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a5842d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/Ensemble.3
@@ -0,0 +1,186 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2005 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+'\" This documents the C API introduced in TIP#235
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH Tcl_Ensemble 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+Tcl_CreateEnsemble, Tcl_FindEnsemble, Tcl_GetEnsembleFlags, Tcl_GetEnsembleMappingDict, Tcl_GetEnsembleNamespace, Tcl_GetEnsembleUnknownHandler, Tcl_GetEnsembleSubcommandList, Tcl_IsEnsemble, Tcl_SetEnsembleFlags, Tcl_SetEnsembleMappingDict, Tcl_SetEnsembleSubcommandList, Tcl_SetEnsembleUnknownHandler \- manipulate ensemble commands
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.sp
+Tcl_Command
+\fBTcl_CreateEnsemble\fR(\fIinterp, name, namespacePtr, ensFlags\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Command
+\fBTcl_FindEnsemble\fR(\fIinterp, cmdNameObj, flags\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_IsEnsemble\fR(\fItoken\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleFlags\fR(\fIinterp, token, ensFlagsPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_SetEnsembleFlags\fR(\fIinterp, token, ensFlags\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleMappingDict\fR(\fIinterp, token, dictObjPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_SetEnsembleMappingDict\fR(\fIinterp, token, dictObj\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleSubcommandList\fR(\fIinterp, token, listObjPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_SetEnsembleSubcommandList\fR(\fIinterp, token, listObj\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleUnknownHandler\fR(\fIinterp, token, listObjPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_SetEnsembleUnknownHandler\fR(\fIinterp, token, listObj\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleNamespace\fR(\fIinterp, token, namespacePtrPtr\fR)
+.SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_Namespace **namespacePtrPtr in/out
+.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
+The interpreter in which the ensemble is to be created or found. Also
+where error result messages are written. The functions whose names
+start with \fBTcl_GetEnsemble\fR may have a NULL for the \fIinterp\fR,
+but all other functions must not.
+.AP "const char" *name in
+The name of the ensemble command to be created.
+.AP Tcl_Namespace *namespacePtr in
+The namespace to which the ensemble command is to be bound, or NULL
+for the current namespace.
+.AP int ensFlags in
+An ORed set of flag bits describing the basic configuration of the
+ensemble. Currently only one bit has meaning, TCL_ENSEMBLE_PREFIX,
+which is present when the ensemble command should also match
+unambiguous prefixes of subcommands.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *cmdNameObj in
+A value holding the name of the ensemble command to look up.
+.AP int flags in
+An ORed set of flag bits controlling the behavior of
+\fBTcl_FindEnsemble\fR. Currently only TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG is supported.
+.AP Tcl_Command token in
+A normal command token that refers to an ensemble command, or which
+you wish to use for testing as an ensemble command in \fBTcl_IsEnsemble\fR.
+.AP int *ensFlagsPtr out
+Pointer to a variable into which to write the current ensemble flag
+bits; currently only the bit TCL_ENSEMBLE_PREFIX is defined.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *dictObj in
+A dictionary value to use for the subcommand to implementation command
+prefix mapping dictionary in the ensemble. May be NULL if the mapping
+dictionary is to be removed.
+.AP Tcl_Obj **dictObjPtr out
+Pointer to a variable into which to write the current ensemble mapping
+dictionary.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *listObj in
+A list value to use for the defined list of subcommands in the
+dictionary or the unknown subcommmand handler command prefix. May be
+NULL if the subcommand list or unknown handler are to be removed.
+.AP Tcl_Obj **listObjPtr out
+Pointer to a variable into which to write the current defiend list of
+subcommands or the current unknown handler prefix.
+.AP Tcl_Namespace **namespacePtrPtr out
+Pointer to a variable into which to write the handle of the namespace
+to which the ensemble is bound.
+.BE
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+An ensemble is a command, bound to some namespace, which consists of a
+collection of subcommands implemented by other Tcl commands. The first
+argument to the ensemble command is always interpreted as a selector
+that states what subcommand to execute.
+.PP
+Ensembles are created using \fBTcl_CreateEnsemble\fR, which takes four
+arguments: the interpreter to work within, the name of the ensemble to
+create, the namespace within the interpreter to bind the ensemble to,
+and the default set of ensemble flags. The result of the function is
+the command token for the ensemble, which may be used to further
+configure the ensemble using the API described below in \fBENSEMBLE
+PROPERTIES\fR.
+.PP
+Given the name of an ensemble command, the token for that command may
+be retrieved using \fBTcl_FindEnsemble\fR. If the given command name
+(in \fIcmdNameObj\fR) does not refer to an ensemble command, the
+result of the function is NULL and (if the TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG bit is
+set in \fIflags\fR) an error message is left in the interpreter
+result.
+.PP
+A command token may be checked to see if it refers to an ensemble
+using \fBTcl_IsEnsemble\fR. This returns 1 if the token refers to an
+ensemble, or 0 otherwise.
+.SS "ENSEMBLE PROPERTIES"
+Every ensemble has four read-write properties and a read-only
+property. The properties are:
+.TP
+\fBflags\fR (read-write)
+The set of flags for the ensemble, expressed as a
+bit-field. Currently, the only public flag is TCL_ENSEMBLE_PREFIX
+which is set when unambiguous prefixes of subcommands are permitted to
+be resolved to implementations as well as exact matches. The flags may
+be read and written using \fBTcl_GetEnsembleFlags\fR and
+\fBTcl_SetEnsembleFlags\fR respectively. The result of both of those
+functions is a Tcl result code (TCL_OK, or TCL_ERROR if the token does
+not refer to an ensemble).
+.TP
+\fBmapping dictionary\fR (read-write)
+A dictionary containing a mapping from subcommand names to lists of
+words to use as a command prefix (replacing the first two words of the
+command which are the ensemble command itself and the subcommand
+name), or NULL if every subcommand is to be mapped to the command with
+the same unqualified name in the ensemble's bound namespace. Defaults
+to NULL. May be read and written using
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleMappingDict\fR and \fBTcl_SetEnsembleMappingDict\fR
+respectively. The result of both of those functions is a Tcl result
+code (TCL_OK, or TCL_ERROR if the token does not refer to an
+ensemble) and the dictionary obtained from
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleMappingDict\fR should always be treated as immutable
+even if it is unshared.
+.TP
+\fBsubcommand list\fR (read-write)
+A list of all the subcommand names for the ensemble, or NULL if this
+is to be derived from either the keys of the mapping dictionary (see
+above) or (if that is also NULL) from the set of commands exported by
+the bound namespace. May be read and written using
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleSubcommandList\fR and
+\fBTcl_SetEnsembleSubcommandList\fR respectively. The result of both
+of those functions is a Tcl result code (TCL_OK, or TCL_ERROR if the
+token does not refer to an ensemble) and the list obtained from
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleSubcommandList\fR should always be treated as
+immutable even if it is unshared.
+.TP
+\fBunknown subcommand handler command prefix\fR (read-write)
+A list of words to prepend on the front of any subcommand when the
+subcommand is unknown to the ensemble (according to the current prefix
+handling rule); see the \fBnamespace ensemble\fR command for more
+details. If NULL, the default behavior \- generate a suitable error
+message \- will be used when an unknown subcommand is encountered. May
+be read and written using \fBTcl_GetEnsembleUnknownHandler\fR and
+\fBTcl_SetEnsembleUnknownHandler\fR respectively. The result of both
+functions is a Tcl result code (TCL_OK, or TCL_ERROR if the token does
+not refer to an ensemble) and the list obtained from
+\fBTcl_GetEnsembleUnknownHandler\fR should always be treated as
+immutable even if it is unshared.
+.TP
+\fBbound namespace\fR (read-only)
+The namespace to which the ensemble is bound; when the namespace is
+deleted, so too will the ensemble, and this namespace is also the
+namespace whose list of exported commands is used if both the mapping
+dictionary and the subcommand list properties are NULL. May be read
+using \fBTcl_GetEnsembleNamespace\fR which returns a Tcl result code
+(TCL_OK, or TCL_ERROR if the token does not refer to an ensemble).
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+namespace(n), Tcl_DeleteCommandFromToken(3)
diff --git a/doc/Environment.3 b/doc/Environment.3
index 7f92d48..3753f43 100644
--- a/doc/Environment.3
+++ b/doc/Environment.3
@@ -14,21 +14,25 @@ Tcl_PutEnv \- procedures to manipulate the environment
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_PutEnv\fR(\fIstring\fR)
+\fBTcl_PutEnv\fR(\fIassignment\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP "CONST char" *string in
-Info about environment variable in the form NAME=value.
-The \fIstring\fR argument is in the system encoding.
+.AS "const char" *assignment
+.AP "const char" *assignment in
+Info about environment variable in the format
+.QW \fINAME\fB=\fIvalue\fR .
+The \fIassignment\fR argument is in the system encoding.
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBTcl_PutEnv\fR sets an environment variable. The information is
-passed in a single string of the form NAME=value.  This procedure is
+passed in a single string of the form
+.QW \fINAME\fB=\fIvalue\fR .
+This procedure is
 intended to be a stand-in for the UNIX \fBputenv\fR system call. All
-tcl-based applications using \fBputenv\fR should redefine it to
+Tcl-based applications using \fBputenv\fR should redefine it to
 \fBTcl_PutEnv\fR so that they will interface properly to the Tcl
 runtime.
-
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+tclvars(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 environment, variable
diff --git a/doc/Eval.3 b/doc/Eval.3
index 1efe270..f232cad 100644
--- a/doc/Eval.3
+++ b/doc/Eval.3
@@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ Tcl_EvalObjEx, Tcl_EvalFile, Tcl_EvalObjv, Tcl_Eval, Tcl_EvalEx, Tcl_GlobalEval,
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-.VS
 int
 \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, flags\fR)
 .sp
@@ -38,12 +37,12 @@ int
 \fBTcl_GlobalEvalObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_VarEval\fR(\fIinterp, string, string, ... \fB(char *) NULL\fR)
+\fBTcl_VarEval\fR(\fIinterp, part, part, ... \fB(char *) NULL\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_VarEvalVA\fR(\fIinterp, argList\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp **termPtr;
+.AS Tcl_Interp **termPtr
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to execute the script.  The interpreter's result is
 modified to hold the result or error message from the script.
@@ -52,7 +51,7 @@ A Tcl object containing the script to execute.
 .AP int flags in
 ORed combination of flag bits that specify additional options.
 \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR and \fBTCL_EVAL_DIRECT\fR are currently supported.
-.AP "CONST char" *fileName in
+.AP "const char" *fileName in
 Name of a file containing a Tcl script.
 .AP int objc in
 The number of objects in the array pointed to by \fIobjPtr\fR;
@@ -64,13 +63,13 @@ value of a single word in the command to execute.
 The number of bytes in \fIscript\fR, not including any
 null terminating character.  If \-1, then all characters up to the
 first null byte are used.
-.AP "CONST char" *script in
+.AP "const char" *script in
 Points to first byte of script to execute (null-terminated and UTF-8).
-.AP char *string in
+.AP char *part in
 String forming part of a Tcl script.
 .AP va_list argList in
-An argument list which must have been initialised using
-\fBTCL_VARARGS_START\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
+An argument list which must have been initialized using
+\fBva_start\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -97,26 +96,33 @@ result; it can be retrieved using \fBTcl_GetObjResult\fR.
 \fBTcl_EvalFile\fR reads the file given by \fIfileName\fR and evaluates
 its contents as a Tcl script.  It returns the same information as
 \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR.
-If the file couldn't be read then a Tcl error is returned to describe
-why the file couldn't be read.
-.VS 8.4
-The eofchar for files is '\\32' (^Z) for all platforms.
-If you require a ``^Z'' in code for string comparison, you can use
-``\\032'' or ``\\u001a'', which will be safely substituted by the Tcl
-interpreter into ``^Z''.
-.VE 8.4
+If the file could not be read then a Tcl error is returned to describe
+why the file could not be read.
+The eofchar for files is
+.QW \e32
+(^Z) for all platforms. If you require a
+.QW ^Z
+in code for string comparison, you can use
+.QW \e032
+or
+.QW \eu001a ,
+which will be safely substituted by the Tcl interpreter into
+.QW ^Z .
 .PP
 \fBTcl_EvalObjv\fR executes a single pre-parsed command instead of a
 script.  The \fIobjc\fR and \fIobjv\fR arguments contain the values
 of the words for the Tcl command, one word in each object in
 \fIobjv\fR.  \fBTcl_EvalObjv\fR evaluates the command and returns
 a completion code and result just like \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR.
+The caller of \fBTcl_EvalObjv\fR has to manage the reference count of the
+elements of \fIobjv\fR, insuring that the objects are valid until
+\fBTcl_EvalObjv\fR returns.  
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Eval\fR is similar to \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR except that the script to
 be executed is supplied as a string instead of an object and no compilation
 occurs.  The string should be a proper UTF-8 string as converted by
 \fBTcl_ExternalToUtfDString\fR or \fBTcl_ExternalToUtf\fR when it is known
-to possibly contain upper ASCII characters who's possible combinations
+to possibly contain upper ASCII characters whose possible combinations
 might be a UTF-8 special code.  The string is parsed and executed directly
 (using \fBTcl_EvalObjv\fR) instead of compiling it and executing the
 bytecodes.  In situations where it is known that the script will never be
@@ -126,7 +132,7 @@ executed again, \fBTcl_Eval\fR may be faster than \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR.
 Tcl 8.0, \fBTcl_Eval\fR copies the object result in \fIinterp\fR to
 \fIinterp->result\fR (use is deprecated) where it can be accessed directly.
  This makes \fBTcl_Eval\fR somewhat slower than \fBTcl_EvalEx\fR, which
-doesn't do the copy.
+does not do the copy.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_EvalEx\fR is an extended version of \fBTcl_Eval\fR that takes
 additional arguments \fInumBytes\fR and \fIflags\fR.  For the
@@ -163,8 +169,8 @@ compiled to bytecodes; instead it is executed directly
 as is done by \fBTcl_EvalEx\fR.  The
 \fBTCL_EVAL_DIRECT\fR flag is useful in situations where the
 contents of an object are going to change immediately, so the
-bytecodes won't be reused in a future execution.  In this case,
-it's faster to execute the script directly.
+bytecodes will not be reused in a future execution.  In this case,
+it is faster to execute the script directly.
 .TP 23
 \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR
 If this flag is set, the script is processed at global level.  This
@@ -197,7 +203,6 @@ the \fBreturn\fR, \fBbreak\fR, or \fBcontinue\fR command was
 invoked in an inappropriate place.
 This means that top-level applications should never see a return code
 from \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR other then \fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
-.VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 execute, file, global, object, result, script
diff --git a/doc/Exit.3 b/doc/Exit.3
index a281829..aa69b47 100644
--- a/doc/Exit.3
+++ b/doc/Exit.3
@@ -5,10 +5,10 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH Tcl_Exit 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_Exit 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_Exit, Tcl_Finalize, Tcl_CreateExitHandler, Tcl_DeleteExitHandler, Tcl_ExitThread, Tcl_FinalizeThread, Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler, Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler \- end the application or thread (and invoke exit handlers)
+Tcl_Exit, Tcl_Finalize, Tcl_CreateExitHandler, Tcl_DeleteExitHandler, Tcl_ExitThread, Tcl_FinalizeThread, Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler, Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler, Tcl_SetExitProc \- end the application or thread (and invoke exit handlers)
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -28,6 +28,11 @@ Tcl_Exit, Tcl_Finalize, Tcl_CreateExitHandler, Tcl_DeleteExitHandler, Tcl_ExitTh
 \fBTcl_CreateThreadExitHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler\fR(\fIproc, clientData\fR)
+.sp
+.VS 8.5
+Tcl_ExitProc *
+\fBTcl_SetExitProc\fR(\fIproc\fR)
+.VE 8.5
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_ExitProc clientData
 .AP int status  in
@@ -36,7 +41,9 @@ Exact meaning may
 be platform-specific.  0 usually means a normal exit, any nonzero value
 usually means that an error occurred.
 .AP Tcl_ExitProc *proc in
-Procedure to invoke before exiting application.
+Procedure to invoke before exiting application, or (for
+\fBTcl_SetExitProc\fR) NULL to uninstall the current application exit
+procedure.
 .AP ClientData clientData in
 Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
 .BE
@@ -57,6 +64,12 @@ otherwise causes the application to terminate without calling
 \fBTcl_Exit\fR, the exit handlers will not be run.
 \fBTcl_Exit\fR internally invokes the \fBexit\fR system call, thus it never
 returns control to its caller.
+.VS 8.5
+If an application exit handler has been installed (see
+\fBTcl_SetExitProc\fR), that handler is invoked with an argument
+consisting of the exit status (cast to ClientData); the application
+exit handler should not return control to Tcl.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Finalize\fR is similar to \fBTcl_Exit\fR except that it does not
 exit from the current process.
@@ -71,14 +84,12 @@ However, to ensure portability, your code should always invoke
 code will work on all platforms. \fBTcl_Finalize\fR can be safely called
 more than once.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fBTcl_ExitThread\fR is used to terminate the current thread and invoke
 per-thread exit handlers.  This finalization is done by
 \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR, which you can call if you just want to clean
 up per-thread state and invoke the thread exit handlers.
 \fBTcl_Finalize\fR calls \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR for the current
 thread automatically.
-.VE
 .PP
 \fBTcl_CreateExitHandler\fR arranges for \fIproc\fR to be invoked
 by \fBTcl_Finalize\fR and \fBTcl_Exit\fR.
@@ -105,7 +116,6 @@ indicated by \fIproc\fR and \fIclientData\fR so that no call
 to \fIproc\fR will be made.  If no such handler exists then
 \fBTcl_DeleteExitHandler\fR or \fBTcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler\fR does nothing.
 .PP
-.VS
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Finalize\fR and \fBTcl_Exit\fR execute all registered exit handlers,
 in reverse order from the order in which they were registered.
@@ -115,15 +125,23 @@ unloads \fBB\fR before it itself is unloaded.
 If extension \fBA\fR registers its exit handlers before loading extension
 \fBB\fR, this ensures that any exit handlers for \fBB\fR will be executed
 before the exit handlers for \fBA\fR.
-.VE
-.VS
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Finalize\fR and \fBTcl_Exit\fR call \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR 
 and the thread exit handlers \fIafter\fR
 the process-wide exit handlers.  This is because thread finalization shuts
 down the I/O channel system, so any attempt at I/O by the global exit
 handlers will vanish into the bitbucket.
-.VE
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_SetExitProc\fR installs an application exit handler, returning
+the previously-installed application exit handler or NULL if no
+application handler was installed.  If an application exit handler is
+installed, that exit handler takes over complete responsibility for
+finalization of Tcl's subsystems via \fBTcl_Finalize\fR at an
+appropriate time.  The argument passed to \fIproc\fR when it is
+invoked will be the exit status code (as passed to \fBTcl_Exit\fR)
+cast to a ClientData value.
+.VE 8.5
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 callback, cleanup, dynamic loading, end application, exit, unloading, thread
diff --git a/doc/ExprLong.3 b/doc/ExprLong.3
index ead98f5..ef93284 100644
--- a/doc/ExprLong.3
+++ b/doc/ExprLong.3
@@ -15,23 +15,21 @@ Tcl_ExprLong, Tcl_ExprDouble, Tcl_ExprBoolean, Tcl_ExprString \- evaluate an exp
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ExprLong\fR(\fIinterp, string, longPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ExprLong\fR(\fIinterp, expr, longPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ExprDouble\fR(\fIinterp, string, doublePtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ExprDouble\fR(\fIinterp, expr, doublePtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ExprBoolean\fR(\fIinterp, string, booleanPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ExprBoolean\fR(\fIinterp, expr, booleanPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ExprString\fR(\fIinterp, string\fR)
+\fBTcl_ExprString\fR(\fIinterp, expr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *booleanPtr
+.AS Tcl_Interp *booleanPtr out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter in whose context to evaluate \fIstring\fR.
-.VS 8.4
-.AP "CONST char" *string in
-.VE
+Interpreter in whose context to evaluate \fIexpr\fR.
+.AP "const char" *expr in
 Expression to be evaluated.  
 .AP long *longPtr out
 Pointer to location in which to store the integer value of the
@@ -47,7 +45,7 @@ expression.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 These four procedures all evaluate the expression
-given by the \fIstring\fR argument
+given by the \fIexpr\fR argument
 and return the result in one of four different forms.
 The expression can have any of the forms accepted by the \fBexpr\fR command.
 Note that these procedures have been largely replaced by the
@@ -92,7 +90,11 @@ number, then they store 0 at \fI*booleanPtr\fR if
 the value was zero and 1 otherwise.
 If the expression's actual value is a non-numeric string then
 it must be one of the values accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR
-such as ``yes'' or ``no'', or else an error occurs.
+such as
+.QW yes
+or
+.QW no ,
+or else an error occurs.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ExprString\fR returns the value of the expression as a
 string stored in the interpreter's result.
diff --git a/doc/ExprLongObj.3 b/doc/ExprLongObj.3
index c3e9697..c8a564d 100644
--- a/doc/ExprLongObj.3
+++ b/doc/ExprLongObj.3
@@ -86,7 +86,11 @@ number, then they store 0 at \fI*booleanPtr\fR if
 the value was zero and 1 otherwise.
 If the expression's actual value is a non-numeric string then
 it must be one of the values accepted by \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR
-such as ``yes'' or ``no'', or else an error occurs.
+such as
+.QW yes
+or
+.QW no ,
+or else an error occurs.
 .PP
 If \fBTcl_ExprObj\fR successfully evaluates the expression,
 it stores a pointer to the Tcl object
diff --git a/doc/FileSystem.3 b/doc/FileSystem.3
index 82c3ca7..9c3f088 100644
--- a/doc/FileSystem.3
+++ b/doc/FileSystem.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .TH Filesystem 3 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_FSRegister, Tcl_FSUnregister, Tcl_FSData, Tcl_FSMountsChanged, Tcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath, Tcl_FSGetPathType, Tcl_FSCopyFile, Tcl_FSCopyDirectory, Tcl_FSCreateDirectory, Tcl_FSDeleteFile, Tcl_FSRemoveDirectory, Tcl_FSRenameFile, Tcl_FSListVolumes, Tcl_FSEvalFile, Tcl_FSLoadFile, Tcl_FSMatchInDirectory, Tcl_FSLink, Tcl_FSLstat, Tcl_FSUtime, Tcl_FSFileAttrsGet, Tcl_FSFileAttrsSet, Tcl_FSFileAttrStrings, Tcl_FSStat, Tcl_FSAccess, Tcl_FSOpenFileChannel, Tcl_FSGetCwd, Tcl_FSChdir, Tcl_FSPathSeparator, Tcl_FSJoinPath, Tcl_FSSplitPath, Tcl_FSEqualPaths, Tcl_FSGetNormalizedPath, Tcl_FSJoinToPath, Tcl_FSConvertToPathType, Tcl_FSGetInternalRep, Tcl_FSGetTranslatedPath, Tcl_FSGetTranslatedStringPath, Tcl_FSNewNativePath, Tcl_FSGetNativePath, Tcl_FSFileSystemInfo, Tcl_AllocStatBuf \- procedures to interact with any filesystem
+Tcl_FSRegister, Tcl_FSUnregister, Tcl_FSData, Tcl_FSMountsChanged, Tcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath, Tcl_FSGetPathType, Tcl_FSCopyFile, Tcl_FSCopyDirectory, Tcl_FSCreateDirectory, Tcl_FSDeleteFile, Tcl_FSRemoveDirectory, Tcl_FSRenameFile, Tcl_FSListVolumes, Tcl_FSEvalFile, Tcl_FSEvalFileEx, Tcl_FSLoadFile, Tcl_FSMatchInDirectory, Tcl_FSLink, Tcl_FSLstat, Tcl_FSUtime, Tcl_FSFileAttrsGet, Tcl_FSFileAttrsSet, Tcl_FSFileAttrStrings, Tcl_FSStat, Tcl_FSAccess, Tcl_FSOpenFileChannel, Tcl_FSGetCwd, Tcl_FSChdir, Tcl_FSPathSeparator, Tcl_FSJoinPath, Tcl_FSSplitPath, Tcl_FSEqualPaths, Tcl_FSGetNormalizedPath, Tcl_FSJoinToPath, Tcl_FSConvertToPathType, Tcl_FSGetInternalRep, Tcl_FSGetTranslatedPath, Tcl_FSGetTranslatedStringPath, Tcl_FSNewNativePath, Tcl_FSGetNativePath, Tcl_FSFileSystemInfo, Tcl_AllocStatBuf \- procedures to interact with any filesystem
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -26,10 +26,10 @@ void
 \fBTcl_FSMountsChanged\fR(\fIfsPtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Filesystem*
-\fBTcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath\fR(\fIpathObjPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath\fR(\fIpathPtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_PathType
-\fBTcl_FSGetPathType\fR(\fIpathObjPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_FSGetPathType\fR(\fIpathPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_FSCopyFile\fR(\fIsrcPathPtr, destPathPtr\fR)
@@ -52,6 +52,11 @@ int
 Tcl_Obj*
 \fBTcl_FSListVolumes\fR(\fIvoid\fR)
 .sp
+.VS 8.5
+int
+\fBTcl_FSEvalFileEx\fR(\fIinterp, pathPtr, encodingName\fR)
+.VE 8.5
+.sp
 int
 \fBTcl_FSEvalFile\fR(\fIinterp, pathPtr\fR)
 .sp
@@ -60,7 +65,7 @@ int
                handlePtr, unloadProcPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR(\fIinterp, result, pathPtr, pattern, types\fR)
+\fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR(\fIinterp, resultPtr, pathPtr, pattern, types\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Obj*
 \fBTcl_FSLink\fR(\fIlinkNamePtr, toPtr, linkAction\fR)
@@ -77,7 +82,7 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_FSFileAttrsSet\fR(\fIinterp, int index, pathPtr, Tcl_Obj *objPtr\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char**      
+const char**
 \fBTcl_FSFileAttrStrings\fR(\fIpathPtr, objPtrRef\fR)
 .sp
 int
@@ -86,7 +91,7 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_FSAccess\fR(\fIpathPtr, mode\fR)
 .sp
-Tcl_Channel 
+Tcl_Channel
 \fBTcl_FSOpenFileChannel\fR(\fIinterp, pathPtr, modeString, permissions\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Obj*
@@ -116,19 +121,19 @@ Tcl_Obj*
 int
 \fBTcl_FSConvertToPathType\fR(\fIinterp, pathPtr\fR)
 .sp
-ClientData 
+ClientData
 \fBTcl_FSGetInternalRep\fR(\fIpathPtr, fsPtr\fR)
 .sp
-Tcl_Obj* 
+Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_FSGetTranslatedPath\fR(\fIinterp, pathPtr\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char* 
+const char *
 \fBTcl_FSGetTranslatedStringPath\fR(\fIinterp, pathPtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Obj*
 \fBTcl_FSNewNativePath\fR(\fIfsPtr, clientData\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char* 
+const char *
 \fBTcl_FSGetNativePath\fR(\fIpathPtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Obj*
@@ -137,7 +142,7 @@ Tcl_Obj*
 Tcl_StatBuf*
 \fBTcl_AllocStatBuf\fR()
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Filesystem *fsPtr in
+.AS Tcl_FSUnloadFileProc **unloadProcPtr out
 .AP Tcl_Filesystem *fsPtr in
 Points to a structure containing the addresses of procedures that
 can be called to perform the various filesystem operations.
@@ -146,21 +151,21 @@ The path represented by this object is used for the operation in
 question.  If the object does not already have an internal \fBpath\fR
 representation, it will be converted to have one.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *srcPathPtr in
-As for \fBpathPtr\fR, but used for the source file for a copy or
+As for \fIpathPtr\fR, but used for the source file for a copy or
 rename operation.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *destPathPtr in
-As for \fBpathPtr\fR, but used for the destination filename for a copy or
+As for \fIpathPtr\fR, but used for the destination filename for a copy or
 rename operation.
-.AP "CONST char" *pattern in
-Only files or directories matching this pattern will be returned by
-\fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR.
-.AP GlobTypeData *types in
+.AP "const char" *encodingName in
+The encoding of the data stored in the
+file identified by \fIpathPtr\fR and to be evaluated.
+.AP "const char" *pattern in
+Only files or directories matching this pattern will be returned.
+.AP Tcl_GlobTypeData *types in
 Only files or directories matching the type descriptions contained in
-this structure will be returned by \fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR.  It
-is very important that the 'directory' flag is properly handled.
-This parameter may be NULL.
+this structure will be returned.  This parameter may be NULL.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use either for results, evaluation, or reporting error 
+Interpreter to use either for results, evaluation, or reporting error
 messages.
 .AP ClientData clientData in
 The native description of the path object to create.
@@ -173,17 +178,17 @@ to \fBpath\fR type.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *listObj in
 The list of path elements to operate on with a \fBjoin\fR operation.
 .AP int elements in
-If non-negative, the number of elements in the listObj which should
+If non-negative, the number of elements in the \fIlistObj\fR which should
 be joined together.  If negative, then all elements are joined.
 .AP Tcl_Obj **errorPtr out
 In the case of an error, filled with an object containing the name of
 the file which caused an error in the various copy/rename operations.
 .AP Tcl_Obj **objPtrRef out
 Filled with an object containing the result of the operation.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *result out
-Pre-allocated object in which to store (by lappending) the list of
-files or directories which are successfully matched in
-\fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *resultPtr out
+Pre-allocated object in which to store (using
+\fBTcl_ListObjAppendElement\fR) the list of
+files or directories which are successfully matched.
 .AP int mode in
 Mask consisting of one or more of R_OK, W_OK, X_OK and F_OK.  R_OK,
 W_OK and X_OK request checking whether the file exists and  has  read,
@@ -191,25 +196,25 @@ write and  execute  permissions, respectively.  F_OK just requests
 checking for the existence of the file.
 .AP Tcl_StatBuf *statPtr out
 The structure that contains the result of a stat or lstat operation.
-.AP "CONST char" *sym1 in
+.AP "const char" *sym1 in
 Name of a procedure to look up in the file's symbol table
-.AP "CONST char" *sym2 in
+.AP "const char" *sym2 in
 Name of a procedure to look up in the file's symbol table
 .AP Tcl_PackageInitProc **proc1Ptr out
 Filled with the init function for this code.
 .AP Tcl_PackageInitProc **proc2Ptr out
 Filled with the safe-init function for this code.
-.AP Tcl_LoadHandle *handlePtr out
-Filled with an abstract token representing the loaded file.
 .AP ClientData *clientDataPtr out
 Filled with the clientData value to pass to this code's unload
 function when it is called.
-.AP TclfsUnloadFileProc_ **unloadProcPtr out
+.AP Tcl_LoadHandle *handlePtr out
+Filled with an abstract token representing the loaded file.
+.AP Tcl_FSUnloadFileProc **unloadProcPtr out
 Filled with the function to use to unload this piece of code.
 .AP utimbuf *tval in
-The access and modification times in this structure are read and 
+The access and modification times in this structure are read and
 used to set those values for a given file.
-.AP "CONST char" *modeString in
+.AP "const char" *modeString in
 Specifies how the file is to be accessed.  May have any of the values
 allowed for the \fImode\fR argument to the Tcl \fBopen\fR command.
 .AP int permissions in
@@ -221,151 +226,215 @@ If non-NULL, filled with the number of elements in the split path.
 The base path on to which to join the given elements.  May be NULL.
 .AP int objc in
 The number of elements in \fIobjv\fR.
-.AP "Tcl_Obj *CONST" objv[] in
+.AP "Tcl_Obj *const" objv[] in
 The elements to join to the given base path.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *linkNamePtr in
+The name of the link to be created or read.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *toPtr in
+What the link called \fIlinkNamePtr\fR should be linked to, or NULL if
+the symbolic link specified by \fIlinkNamePtr\fR is to be read.
+.AP int linkAction in
+OR-ed combination of flags indicating what kind of link should be
+created (will be ignored if \fItoPtr\fR is NULL). Valid bits to set
+are \fBTCL_CREATE_SYMBOLIC_LINK\fR and \fBTCL_CREATE_HARD_LINK\fR.
+When both flags are set and the underlying filesystem can do either,
+symbolic links are preferred.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-There are several reasons for calling the \fBTcl_FS...\fR functions
+There are several reasons for calling the \fBTcl_FS\fR API functions
+(e.g. \fBTcl_FSAccess\fR and \fBTcl_FSStat\fR)
 rather than calling system level functions like \fBaccess\fR and
 \fBstat\fR directly.  First, they will work cross-platform, so an
-extension which calls them should work unmodified on Unix, MacOS and
+extension which calls them should work unmodified on Unix and
 Windows.  Second, the Windows implementation of some of these functions
 fixes some bugs in the system level calls.  Third, these function calls
-deal with any 'Utf to platform-native' path conversions which may be
+deal with any
+.QW "Utf to platform-native"
+path conversions which may be
 required (and may cache the results of such conversions for greater
 efficiency on subsequent calls).  Fourth, and perhaps most importantly,
-all of these functions are 'virtual filesystem aware'.  Any virtual
-filesystem which has been registered (through
+all of these functions are
+.QW "virtual filesystem aware" .
+Any virtual filesystem (VFS for short) which has been registered (through
 \fBTcl_FSRegister\fR) may reroute file access to alternative
 media or access methods.  This means that all of these functions (and
 therefore the corresponding \fBfile\fR, \fBglob\fR, \fBpwd\fR, \fBcd\fR,
-\fBopen\fR, etc.  Tcl commands) may be operate on 'files' which are not
+\fBopen\fR, etc.  Tcl commands) may be operate on
+.QW files
+which are not
 native files in the native filesystem.  This also means that any Tcl
-extension which accesses the filesystem through this API is
-automatically 'virtual filesystem aware'.  Of course, if an extension
+extension which accesses the filesystem (FS for short) through this API is
+automatically
+.QW "virtual filesystem aware" .
+Of course, if an extension
 accesses the native filesystem directly (through platform-specific
-APIs, for example), then Tcl cannot intercept such calls.  
+APIs, for example), then Tcl cannot intercept such calls.
 .PP
-If appropriate vfs's have been registered, the 'files' may, to give two
+If appropriate VFSes have been registered, the
+.QW files
+may, to give two
 examples, be remote (e.g. situated on a remote ftp server) or archived
 (e.g. lying inside a .zip archive).  Such registered filesystems provide
 a lookup table of functions to implement all or some of the functionality
 listed here.  Finally, the \fBTcl_FSStat\fR and \fBTcl_FSLstat\fR calls
-abstract away from what the 'struct stat' buffer buffer is actually
+abstract away from what the
+.QW "struct stat"
+buffer is actually
 declared to be, allowing the same code to be used both on systems with
 and systems without support for files larger than 2GB in size.
 .PP
-The \fBTcl_FS...\fR are objectified and may cache internal
+The \fBTcl_FS\fR API is objectified and may cache internal
 representations and other path-related strings (e.g. the current working
 directory).  One side-effect of this is that one must not pass in objects
-with a refCount of zero to any of these functions.  If such calls were 
+with a reference count of zero to any of these functions.  If such calls were
 handled, they might result
 in memory leaks (under some circumstances, the filesystem code may wish
 to retain a reference to the passed in object, and so one must not assume
-that after any of these calls return, the object still has a refCount of
-zero - it may have been incremented), or in a direct segfault
+that after any of these calls return, the object still has a reference count of
+zero - it may have been incremented) or in a direct segmentation fault
+(or other memory access error)
 due to the object being freed part way through the complex object
 manipulation required to ensure that the path is fully normalized and
 absolute for filesystem determination.  The practical lesson to learn
-from this is that \fBTcl_Obj *path = Tcl_NewStringObj(...)  ;
-Tcl_FS...(path) ; Tcl_DecrRefCount(path)\fR is wrong, and may segfault.
-The 'path' must have its refCount incremented before passing it in, or
-decrementing it.  For this reason, objects with a refCount of zero are
+from this is that
+.CS
+Tcl_Obj *path = Tcl_NewStringObj(...);
+Tcl_FS\fIWhatever\fR(path);
+Tcl_DecrRefCount(path);
+.CE
+is wrong, and may cause memory errors. The \fIpath\fR must have its
+reference count incremented before passing it in, or
+decrementing it.  For this reason, objects with a reference count of zero are
 considered not to be valid filesystem paths and calling any Tcl_FS API
-with such an object will result in no action being taken.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_FSCopyFile\fR attempts to copy the file given by srcPathPtr to the
-path name given by destPathPtr.  If the two paths given lie in the same
+function with such an object will result in no action being taken.
+.SS "FS API FUNCTIONS"
+\fBTcl_FSCopyFile\fR attempts to copy the file given by \fIsrcPathPtr\fR to the
+path name given by \fIdestPathPtr\fR.  If the two paths given lie in the same
 filesystem (according to \fBTcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath\fR) then that
-filesystem's 'copy file' function is called (if it is non-NULL).
-Otherwise the function returns -1 and sets Tcl's errno to the 'EXDEV'
-posix error code (which signifies a 'cross-domain link').
-.PP
-\fBTcl_FSCopyDirectory\fR attempts to copy the directory given by srcPathPtr to the
-path name given by destPathPtr.  If the two paths given lie in the same
+filesystem's
+.QW "copy file"
+function is called (if it is non-NULL).
+Otherwise the function returns -1 and sets the \fBerrno\fR global C
+variable to the
+.QW EXDEV
+POSIX error code (which signifies a
+.QW "cross-domain link" ).
+.PP
+\fBTcl_FSCopyDirectory\fR attempts to copy the directory given by \fIsrcPathPtr\fR to the
+path name given by \fIdestPathPtr\fR.  If the two paths given lie in the same
 filesystem (according to \fBTcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath\fR) then that
-filesystem's 'copy file' function is called (if it is non-NULL).
-Otherwise the function returns -1 and sets Tcl's errno to the 'EXDEV'
-posix error code (which signifies a 'cross-domain link').
+filesystem's
+.QW "copy file"
+function is called (if it is non-NULL).
+Otherwise the function returns -1 and sets the \fBerrno\fR global C
+variable to the
+.QW EXDEV
+POSIX error code (which signifies a
+.QW "cross-domain link" ).
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSCreateDirectory\fR attempts to create the directory given by
-pathPtr by calling the owning filesystem's 'create directory'
+\fIpathPtr\fR by calling the owning filesystem's
+.QW "create directory"
 function.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSDeleteFile\fR attempts to delete the file given by
-pathPtr by calling the owning filesystem's 'delete file'
+\fIpathPtr\fR by calling the owning filesystem's
+.QW "delete file"
 function.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSRemoveDirectory\fR attempts to remove the directory given by
-pathPtr by calling the owning filesystem's 'remove directory'
+\fIpathPtr\fR by calling the owning filesystem's
+.QW "remove directory"
 function.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSRenameFile\fR attempts to rename the file or directory given by
-srcPathPtr to the path name given by destPathPtr.  If the two paths
+\fIsrcPathPtr\fR to the path name given by \fIdestPathPtr\fR.  If the two paths
 given lie in the same filesystem (according to
-\fBTcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath\fR) then that filesystem's 'rename file'
+\fBTcl_FSGetFileSystemForPath\fR) then that filesystem's
+.QW "rename file"
 function is called (if it is non-NULL).  Otherwise the function returns -1
-and sets Tcl's errno to the 'EXDEV' posix error code (which signifies
-a ``cross-domain link'').
-.PP
-\fBTcl_FSListVolumes\fR calls each filesystem which has a non-NULL 'list
-volumes' function and asks them to return their list of root volumes.  It
+and sets the \fBerrno\fR global C variable to the
+.QW EXDEV
+POSIX error code (which signifies a
+.QW "cross-domain link" ).
+.PP
+\fBTcl_FSListVolumes\fR calls each filesystem which has a non-NULL
+.QW "list volumes"
+function and asks them to return their list of root volumes.  It
 accumulates the return values in a list which is returned to the
-caller (with a refCount of 0).
+caller (with a reference count of 0).
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSEvalFile\fR reads the file given by \fIpathPtr\fR and evaluates
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_FSEvalFileEx\fR reads the file given by \fIpathPtr\fR using
+the encoding identified by \fIencodingName\fR and evaluates
 its contents as a Tcl script.  It returns the same information as
 \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR.
-If the file couldn't be read then a Tcl error is returned to describe
-why the file couldn't be read.
-The eofchar for files is '\\32' (^Z) for all platforms.
-If you require a ``^Z'' in code for string comparison, you can use
-``\\032'' or ``\\u001a'', which will be safely substituted by the Tcl
-interpreter into ``^Z''.
+If \fIencodingName\fR is NULL, the system encoding is used for
+reading the file contents.
+If the file could not be read then a Tcl error is returned to describe
+why the file could not be read.
+The eofchar for files is
+.QW \e32
+(^Z) for all platforms.
+If you require a
+.QW ^Z
+in code for string comparison, you can use
+.QW \e032
+or
+.QW \eu001a ,
+which will be safely substituted by the Tcl interpreter into
+.QW ^Z .
+\fBTcl_FSEvalFile\fR is a simpler version of
+\fBTcl_FSEvalFileEx\fR that always uses the system encoding
+when reading the file.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSLoadFile\fR dynamically loads a binary code file into memory and
 returns the addresses of two procedures within that file, if they are
-defined.  The appropriate function for the filesystem to which pathPtr
+defined.  The appropriate function for the filesystem to which \fIpathPtr\fR
 belongs will be called.  If that filesystem does not implement this
 function (most virtual filesystems will not, because of OS limitations
 in dynamically loading binary code), Tcl will attempt to copy the file
 to a temporary directory and load that temporary file.
 .PP
 Returns a standard Tcl completion code.  If an error occurs, an error
-message is left in the interp's result.
+message is left in the \fIinterp\fR's result.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR is used by the globbing code to search a
 directory for all files which match a given pattern.  The appropriate
-function for the filesystem to which pathPtr belongs will be called.
+function for the filesystem to which \fIpathPtr\fR belongs will be called.
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
-occurred in globbing.  Error messages are placed in interp, but good
-results are placed in the resultPtr given.
- 	
-Note that the 'glob' code implements recursive patterns internally, so
+occurred in globbing.  Error messages are placed in interp (unless 
+interp is NULL, which is allowed), but good results are placed in the 
+resultPtr given.
+.PP
+Note that the \fBglob\fR code implements recursive patterns internally, so
 this function will only ever be passed simple patterns, which can be
-matched using the logic of 'string match'.  To handle recursion, Tcl
+matched using the logic of \fBstring match\fR.  To handle recursion, Tcl
 will call this function frequently asking only for directories to be
-returned.
+returned.  A special case of being called with a NULL pattern indicates
+that the path needs to be checked only for the correct type.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSLink\fR replaces the library version of readlink(), and
-extends it to support the creation of links.  The appropriate function 
-for the filesystem to which linkNamePtr belongs will be called.
+\fBTcl_FSLink\fR replaces the library version of \fBreadlink\fR, and
+extends it to support the creation of links.  The appropriate function
+for the filesystem to which \fIlinkNamePtr\fR belongs will be called.
 .PP
-If the \fItoPtr\fR is NULL, a readlink action is performed.  The result
+If the \fItoPtr\fR is NULL, a
+.QW "read link"
+action is performed.  The result
 is a Tcl_Obj specifying the contents of the symbolic link given by
 \fIlinkNamePtr\fR, or NULL if the link could not be read.  The result is owned
 by the caller, which should call Tcl_DecrRefCount when the result is no
 longer needed.  If the \fItoPtr\fR is not NULL, Tcl should create a link
 of one of the types passed in in the \fIlinkAction\fR flag.  This flag is
-an or'd combination of TCL_CREATE_SYMBOLIC_LINK and TCL_CREATE_HARD_LINK.
+an ORed combination of \fBTCL_CREATE_SYMBOLIC_LINK\fR and \fBTCL_CREATE_HARD_LINK\fR.
 Where a choice exists (i.e. more than one flag is passed in), the Tcl
 convention is to prefer symbolic links.  When a link is successfully
 created, the return value should be \fItoPtr\fR (which is therefore
-already owned by the caller).  If unsuccessful, NULL should be
-returned.
+already owned by the caller).  If unsuccessful, NULL is returned.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSLstat\fR fills the stat structure \fIstatPtr\fR with information
 about the specified file.  You do not need any access rights to the
@@ -381,43 +450,49 @@ If \fIpath\fR exists, \fBTcl_FSLstat\fR returns 0 and the stat structure
 is filled with data.  Otherwise, -1 is returned, and no stat info is
 given.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSUtime\fR replaces the library version of utime.  
+\fBTcl_FSUtime\fR replaces the library version of utime.
+.PP
+This returns 0 on success and -1 on error (as per the \fButime\fR
+documentation).  If successful, the function
+will update the
+.QW atime
+and
+.QW mtime
+values of the file given.
 .PP
-For results see 'utime' documentation.  If successful, the function
-will update the 'atime' and 'mtime' values of the file given.
+\fBTcl_FSFileAttrsGet\fR implements read access for the hookable \fBfile
+attributes\fR subcommand.  The appropriate function for the filesystem to
+which \fIpathPtr\fR belongs will be called.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSFileAttrsGet\fR implements read access for the hookable 'file
-attributes' subcommand.  The appropriate function for the filesystem to
-which pathPtr belongs will be called.
+If the result is \fBTCL_OK\fR, then an object was placed in
+\fIobjPtrRef\fR, which
+will only be temporarily valid (unless \fBTcl_IncrRefCount\fR is called).
 .PP
-If the result is TCL_OK, then an object was placed in objPtrRef, which
-will only be temporarily valid (unless Tcl_IncrRefCount is called).
+\fBTcl_FSFileAttrsSet\fR implements write access for the hookable \fBfile
+attributes\fR subcommand.  The appropriate function for the filesystem to
+which \fIpathPtr\fR belongs will be called.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSFileAttrsSet\fR implements write access for the hookable 'file
-attributes' subcommand.  The appropriate function for the filesystem to
-which pathPtr belongs will be called.
+\fBTcl_FSFileAttrStrings\fR implements part of the hookable \fBfile
+attributes\fR subcommand.  The appropriate function for the filesystem
+to which \fIpathPtr\fR belongs will be called.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSFileAttrStrings\fR implements part of the hookable 'file attributes'
-subcommand.  The appropriate function for the filesystem to which
-pathPtr belongs will be called.
-.PP 
 The called procedure may either return an array of strings, or may
-instead return NULL and place a Tcl list into the given objPtrRef.  Tcl
-will take that list and first increment its refCount before using it.
-On completion of that use, Tcl will decrement its refCount.  Hence if
+instead return NULL and place a Tcl list into the given \fIobjPtrRef\fR.  Tcl
+will take that list and first increment its reference count before using it.
+On completion of that use, Tcl will decrement its reference count.  Hence if
 the list should be disposed of by Tcl when done, it should have a
-refCount of zero, and if the list should not be disposed of, the
-filesystem should ensure it retains a refCount on the object.
+reference count of zero, and if the list should not be disposed of, the
+filesystem should ensure it retains a reference count to the object.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSAccess\fR checks whether the process would be allowed to read,
-write or test for existence of the file (or other file system object)
-whose name is pathname.   If pathname is a symbolic link on Unix,
+write or test for existence of the file (or other filesystem object)
+whose name is \fIpathname\fR.   If \fIpathname\fR is a symbolic link on Unix,
 then permissions of the file referred by this symbolic link are
 tested.
 .PP
 On success (all requested permissions granted), zero is returned.  On
 error (at least one bit in mode asked for a permission that is denied,
-or some other  error occurred), -1 is returned.
+or some other error occurred), -1 is returned.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSStat\fR fills the stat structure \fIstatPtr\fR with information
 about the specified file.  You do not need any access rights to the
@@ -451,87 +526,110 @@ If one of the standard channels, \fBstdin, stdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR was
 previously closed, the act of creating the new channel also assigns it as a
 replacement for the standard channel.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSGetCwd\fR replaces the library version of getcwd().
+\fBTcl_FSGetCwd\fR replaces the library version of \fBgetcwd\fR.
 .PP
 It returns the Tcl library's current working directory.  This may be
-different to the native platform's working directory, in the case for 
-which the cwd is not in the native filesystem.
+different to the native platform's working directory, which happens when
+the current working directory is not in the native filesystem.
 .PP
 The result is a pointer to a Tcl_Obj specifying the current directory,
 or NULL if the current directory could not be determined.  If NULL is
-returned, an error message is left in the interp's result.
-	
-The result already has its refCount incremented for the caller.  When
-it is no longer needed, that refCount should be decremented.  This is
+returned, an error message is left in the \fIinterp\fR's result.
+.PP
+The result already has its reference count incremented for the caller.  When
+it is no longer needed, that reference count should be decremented.  This is
 needed for thread-safety purposes, to allow multiple threads to access
 this and related functions, while ensuring the results are always
 valid.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSChdir\fR replaces the library version of chdir().  The path is
+\fBTcl_FSChdir\fR replaces the library version of \fBchdir\fR.  The path is
 normalized and then passed to the filesystem which claims it.  If that
-filesystem does not implement this function, Tcl will fallback to a 
-combination of stat and access to check whether the directory exists
-and has appropriate permissions.
-.PP 
-For results, see chdir() documentation.  If successful, we keep a
-record of the successful path in cwdPathPtr for subsequent calls to
-getcwd.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_FSPathSeparator\fR returns the separator character to be used for 
-most specific element of the path specified by pathPtr (i.e. the last 
+filesystem does not implement this function, Tcl will fallback to a
+combination of \fBstat\fR and \fBaccess\fR to check whether the directory
+exists and has appropriate permissions.
+.PP
+For results, see \fBchdir\fR documentation.  If successful, we keep a
+record of the successful path in \fIcwdPathPtr\fR for subsequent calls to
+\fBTcl_FSGetCwd\fR.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_FSPathSeparator\fR returns the separator character to be used for
+most specific element of the path specified by \fIpathPtr\fR (i.e. the last
 part of the path).
 .PP
 The separator is returned as a Tcl_Obj containing a string of length
 1.  If the path is invalid, NULL is returned.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSJoinPath\fR takes the given Tcl_Obj, which should be a valid list,
-and returns the path object given by considering the first 'elements'
-elements as valid path segments.  If elements < 0, we use the entire
-list.
-.PP
-Returns object with refCount of zero, containing the joined path.
+\fBTcl_FSJoinPath\fR takes the given Tcl_Obj, which must be a valid
+list (which is allowed to have a reference count of zero), and returns the path
+object given by considering the first \fIelements\fR elements as valid path
+segments (each path segment may be a complete path, a partial path or
+just a single possible directory or file name).  If any path segment is
+actually an absolute path, then all prior path segments are discarded.
+If \fIelements\fR is less than 0, we use the entire list.
+.PP
+It is possible that the returned object is actually an element
+of the given list, so the caller should be careful to increment the
+reference count of the result before freeing the list.
+.PP
+The returned object, typically with a reference count of zero (but it
+could be shared
+under some conditions), contains the joined path.  The caller must
+add a reference count to the object before using it.  In particular, the
+returned object could be an element of the given list, so freeing the
+list might free the object prematurely if no reference count has been taken.
+If the number of elements is zero, then the returned object will be
+an empty-string Tcl_Obj.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSSplitPath\fR takes the given Tcl_Obj, which should be a valid path,
-and returns a Tcl List object containing each segment of that path as
+and returns a Tcl list object containing each segment of that path as
 an element.
-.PP
-Returns list object with refCount of zero.  If the passed in lenPtr is
-non-NULL, we use it to return the number of elements in the returned
-list.
+It returns a list object with a reference count of zero.  If the
+passed in \fIlenPtr\fR is non-NULL, the variable it points to will be
+updated to contain the number of elements in the returned list.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSEqualPaths\fR tests whether the two paths given represent the same
 filesystem object
 .PP
-It returns 1 if the paths are equal, and 0 if they are different.  If 
+It returns 1 if the paths are equal, and 0 if they are different.  If
 either path is NULL, 0 is always returned.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSGetNormalizedPath\fR this important function attempts to extract
 from the given Tcl_Obj a unique normalized path representation, whose
 string value can be used as a unique identifier for the file.
 .PP
-It returns the normalized path object, with refCount of zero, or NULL 
-if the path was invalid or could otherwise not be successfully
-converted.  Extraction of absolute, normalized paths is very
-efficient (because the filesystem operates on these representations
-internally), although the result when the filesystem contains
-numerous symbolic links may not be the most user-friendly
-version of a path.
+It returns the normalized path object, owned by Tcl, or NULL if the path
+was invalid or could otherwise not be successfully converted.
+Extraction of absolute, normalized paths is very efficient (because the
+filesystem operates on these representations internally), although the
+result when the filesystem contains numerous symbolic links may not be
+the most user-friendly version of a path.  The return value is owned by
+Tcl and has a lifetime equivalent to that of the \fIpathPtr\fR passed in
+(unless that is a relative path, in which case the normalized path
+object may be freed any time the cwd changes) - the caller can of
+course increment the refCount if it wishes to maintain a copy for longer.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSJoinToPath\fR takes the given object, which should usually be a
 valid path or NULL, and joins onto it the array of paths segments
 given.
 .PP
-Returns object with refCount of zero, containing the joined path.
+Returns object, typically with refCount of zero (but it could be shared
+under some conditions), containing the joined path.  The caller must
+add a refCount to the object before using it.  If any of the objects
+passed into this function (pathPtr or path elements) have a refCount
+of zero, they will be freed when this function returns.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSConvertToPathType\fR tries to convert the given Tcl_Obj to a valid
 Tcl path type, taking account of the fact that the cwd may have changed
 even if this object is already supposedly of the correct type.
-The filename may begin with "~" (to indicate current user's home
-directory) or "~<user>" (to indicate any user's home directory).
-.PP
-If the conversion succeeds (i.e. the object is a valid path in one of 
-the current filesystems), then TCL_OK is returned.  Otherwise
-TCL_ERROR is returned, and an error message may
+The filename may begin with
+.QW ~
+(to indicate current user's home directory) or
+.QW ~<user>
+(to indicate any user's home directory).
+.PP
+If the conversion succeeds (i.e. the object is a valid path in one of
+the current filesystems), then \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned.  Otherwise
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and an error message may
 be left in the interpreter.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSGetInternalRep\fR extracts the internal representation of a given
@@ -545,12 +643,17 @@ representation is cached, so that repeated calls to this function will
 not require additional conversions.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSGetTranslatedPath\fR attempts to extract the translated path
-from the given Tcl_Obj.  
+from the given Tcl_Obj.
 .PP
 If the translation succeeds (i.e. the object is a valid path), then it is
 returned.  Otherwise NULL will be returned, and an error message may be
-left in the interpreter.  A "translated" path is one which contains no
-"~" or "~user" sequences (these have been expanded to their current
+left in the interpreter.  A
+.QW translated
+path is one which contains no
+.QW ~
+or
+.QW ~user
+sequences (these have been expanded to their current
 representation in the filesystem).  The object returned is owned by the
 caller, which must store it or call Tcl_DecrRefCount to ensure memory is
 freed.  This function is of little practical use, and
@@ -560,37 +663,53 @@ better functions to use for most purposes.
 \fBTcl_FSGetTranslatedStringPath\fR does the same as
 \fBTcl_FSGetTranslatedPath\fR, but returns a character string or NULL.
 The string returned is dynamically allocated and owned by the caller,
-which must store it or call ckfree to ensure it is freed.  Again,
+which must store it or call \fBckfree\fR to ensure it is freed.  Again,
 \fBTcl_FSGetNormalizedPath\fR or \fBTcl_GetNativePath\fR are usually
 better functions to use for most purposes.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSNewNativePath\fR performs something like that reverse of the
+\fBTcl_FSNewNativePath\fR performs something like the reverse of the
 usual obj->path->nativerep conversions.  If some code retrieves a path
-in native form (from, e.g. readlink or a native dialog), and that path
+in native form (from, e.g. \fBreadlink\fR or a native dialog), and that path
 is to be used at the Tcl level, then calling this function is an
 efficient way of creating the appropriate path object type.
 .PP
-The resulting object is a pure 'path' object, which will only receive 
-a Utf-8 string representation if that is required by some Tcl code.
+The resulting object is a pure
+.QW path
+object, which will only receive
+a UTF-8 string representation if that is required by some Tcl code.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSGetNativePath\fR is for use by the Win/Unix/MacOS native
+\fBTcl_FSGetNativePath\fR is for use by the Win/Unix native
 filesystems, so that they can easily retrieve the native (char* or
 TCHAR*) representation of a path.  This function is a convenience
 wrapper around \fBTcl_FSGetInternalRep\fR, and assumes the native
-representation is string-based.  It may be desirable in the future
-to have non-string-based native representations (for example, on
-MacOS, a representation using a fileSpec of FSRef structure would
-probably be more efficient).  On Windows a full Unicode
-representation would allow for paths of unlimited length.  Currently
-the representation is simply a character string containing the
-complete, absolute path in the native encoding.
+representation is string-based.  It may be desirable in the future to
+have non-string-based native representations (for example, on MacOSX, a
+representation using a fileSpec of FSRef structure would probably be
+more efficient).  On Windows a full Unicode representation would allow
+for paths of unlimited length.  Currently the representation is simply a
+character string which may contain either the relative path or a
+complete, absolute normalized path in the native encoding (complex
+conditions dictate which of these will be provided, so neither can be
+relied upon, unless the path is known to be absolute).  If you need a
+native path which must be absolute, then you should ask for the native
+version of a normalized path.  If for some reason a non-absolute,
+non-normalized version of the path is needed, that must be constructed
+separately (e.g. using \fBTcl_FSGetTranslatedPath\fR).
 .PP
 The native representation is cached so that repeated calls to this
-function will not require additional conversions.
+function will not require additional conversions.  The return value is
+owned by Tcl and has a lifetime equivalent to that of the \fIpathPtr\fR
+passed in (unless that is a relative path, in which case the native
+representation may be freed any time the cwd changes).
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSFileSystemInfo\fR returns a list of two elements.  The first
-element is the name of the filesystem (e.g. "native" or "vfs" or "zip"
-or "prowrap", perhaps), and the second is the particular type of the
+element is the name of the filesystem (e.g.
+.QW native ,
+.QW vfs ,
+.QW zip ,
+or
+.QW prowrap ,
+perhaps), and the second is the particular type of the
 given path within that filesystem (which is filesystem dependent).  The
 second element may be empty if the filesystem does not provide a
 further categorization of files.
@@ -603,25 +722,24 @@ recognized, when NULL will be returned.
 .PP
 If no filesystem will accept the path, NULL is returned.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSGetPathType\fR determines whether the given path is relative 
+\fBTcl_FSGetPathType\fR determines whether the given path is relative
 to the current directory, relative to the current volume, or
 absolute.
 .PP
-It returns one of TCL_PATH_ABSOLUTE, TCL_PATH_RELATIVE, or
-TCL_PATH_VOLUME_RELATIVE
+It returns one of \fBTCL_PATH_ABSOLUTE\fR, \fBTCL_PATH_RELATIVE\fR, or
+\fBTCL_PATH_VOLUME_RELATIVE\fR
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AllocStatBuf\fR allocates a \fITcl_StatBuf\fR on the system
 heap (which may be deallocated by being passed to \fBckfree\fR.)  This
 allows extensions to invoke \fBTcl_FSStat\fR and \fBTcl_FSLStat\fR
 without being dependent on the size of the buffer.  That in turn
 depends on the flags used to build Tcl.
-.PP
-.SH TCL_FILESYSTEM
+.SH "THE VIRTUAL FILESYSTEM API"
 .PP
 A filesystem provides a \fBTcl_Filesystem\fR structure that contains
 pointers to functions that implement the various operations on a
 filesystem; these operations are invoked as needed by the generic
-layer, which generally occurs through the functions listed above.  
+layer, which generally occurs through the functions listed above.
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_Filesystem\fR structures are manipulated using the following
 methods.
@@ -631,13 +749,13 @@ optional piece of data to associated with that filesystem.  On calling
 this function, Tcl will attach the filesystem to the list of known
 filesystems, and it will become fully functional immediately.  Tcl does
 not check if the same filesystem is registered multiple times (and in
-general that is not a good thing to do).  TCL_OK will be returned.
+general that is not a good thing to do).  \fBTCL_OK\fR will be returned.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FSUnregister\fR removes the given filesystem structure from
-the list of known filesystems, if it is known, and returns TCL_OK.  If
-the filesystem is not currently registered, TCL_ERROR is returned.
+the list of known filesystems, if it is known, and returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.  If
+the filesystem is not currently registered, \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_FSData\fR will return the ClientData associated with the given 
+\fBTcl_FSData\fR will return the ClientData associated with the given
 filesystem, if that filesystem is registered.  Otherwise it will
 return NULL.
 .PP
@@ -645,41 +763,42 @@ return NULL.
 the set of mount points for the given (already registered) filesystem
 have changed, and that cached file representations may therefore no
 longer be correct.
+.SS "THE TCL_FILESYSTEM STRUCTURE"
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_Filesystem\fR structure contains the following fields:
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_Filesystem {
-    CONST char *\fItypeName\fR;  
-    int \fIstructureLength\fR;   
-    Tcl_FSVersion \fIversion\fR;  
+    const char *\fItypeName\fR;
+    int \fIstructureLength\fR;
+    Tcl_FSVersion \fIversion\fR;
     Tcl_FSPathInFilesystemProc *\fIpathInFilesystemProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSDupInternalRepProc *\fIdupInternalRepProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSFreeInternalRepProc *\fIfreeInternalRepProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSInternalToNormalizedProc *\fIinternalToNormalizedProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSCreateInternalRepProc *\fIcreateInternalRepProc\fR;
-    Tcl_FSNormalizePathProc *\fInormalizePathProc\fR;       
+    Tcl_FSNormalizePathProc *\fInormalizePathProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSFilesystemPathTypeProc *\fIfilesystemPathTypeProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSFilesystemSeparatorProc *\fIfilesystemSeparatorProc\fR;
-    Tcl_FSStatProc *\fIstatProc\fR; 
-    Tcl_FSAccessProc *\fIaccessProc\fR;	    
-    Tcl_FSOpenFileChannelProc *\fIopenFileChannelProc\fR; 
-    Tcl_FSMatchInDirectoryProc *\fImatchInDirectoryProc\fR;  
-    Tcl_FSUtimeProc *\fIutimeProc\fR;       
-    Tcl_FSLinkProc *\fIlinkProc\fR; 
-    Tcl_FSListVolumesProc *\fIlistVolumesProc\fR;	    
+    Tcl_FSStatProc *\fIstatProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSAccessProc *\fIaccessProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSOpenFileChannelProc *\fIopenFileChannelProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSMatchInDirectoryProc *\fImatchInDirectoryProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSUtimeProc *\fIutimeProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSLinkProc *\fIlinkProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSListVolumesProc *\fIlistVolumesProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSFileAttrStringsProc *\fIfileAttrStringsProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSFileAttrsGetProc *\fIfileAttrsGetProc\fR;
     Tcl_FSFileAttrsSetProc *\fIfileAttrsSetProc\fR;
-    Tcl_FSCreateDirectoryProc *\fIcreateDirectoryProc\fR;	    
-    Tcl_FSRemoveDirectoryProc *\fIremoveDirectoryProc\fR;	    
-    Tcl_FSDeleteFileProc *\fIdeleteFileProc\fR;	    
-    Tcl_FSCopyFileProc *\fIcopyFileProc\fR; 
-    Tcl_FSRenameFileProc *\fIrenameFileProc\fR;	    
-    Tcl_FSCopyDirectoryProc *\fIcopyDirectoryProc\fR;	    
-    Tcl_FSLstatProc *\fIlstatProc\fR;	    
-    Tcl_FSLoadFileProc *\fIloadFileProc\fR; 
-    Tcl_FSGetCwdProc *\fIgetCwdProc\fR;     
-    Tcl_FSChdirProc *\fIchdirProc\fR;	    
+    Tcl_FSCreateDirectoryProc *\fIcreateDirectoryProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSRemoveDirectoryProc *\fIremoveDirectoryProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSDeleteFileProc *\fIdeleteFileProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSCopyFileProc *\fIcopyFileProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSRenameFileProc *\fIrenameFileProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSCopyDirectoryProc *\fIcopyDirectoryProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSLstatProc *\fIlstatProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSLoadFileProc *\fIloadFileProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSGetCwdProc *\fIgetCwdProc\fR;
+    Tcl_FSChdirProc *\fIchdirProc\fR;
 } Tcl_Filesystem;
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -697,20 +816,26 @@ side-effects which are required by the filesystem; Tcl has less
 efficient emulations it can fall back on).  It is important to note
 that, in the current version of Tcl, most of these fallbacks are only
 used to handle commands initiated in Tcl, not in C. What this means is,
-that if a 'file rename' command is issued in Tcl, and the relevant
+that if a \fBfile rename\fR command is issued in Tcl, and the relevant
 filesystem(s) do not implement their \fITcl_FSRenameFileProc\fR, Tcl's
 core will instead fallback on a combination of other filesystem
 functions (it will use \fITcl_FSCopyFileProc\fR followed by
 \fITcl_FSDeleteFileProc\fR, and if \fITcl_FSCopyFileProc\fR is not
 implemented there is a further fallback).  However, if a
-\fITcl_FSRenameFile\fR command is issued at the C level, no such
+\fITcl_FSRenameFileProc\fR command is issued at the C level, no such
 fallbacks occur.  This is true except for the last four entries in the
-filesystem table (lstat, load, getcwd and chdir)
+filesystem table (\fBlstat\fR, \fBload\fR, \fBgetcwd\fR and \fBchdir\fR)
 for which fallbacks do in fact occur at the C level.
 .PP
-As an example, here is the filesystem lookup table used by the
-"vfs" extension which allows filesystem actions to be implemented
-in Tcl.
+Any functions which take path names in Tcl_Obj form take
+those names in UTF\-8 form.  The filesystem infrastructure API is
+designed to support efficient, cached conversion of these UTF\-8 paths
+to other native representations.
+.SS "EXAMPLE FILESYSTEM DEFINITION"
+.PP
+Here is the filesystem lookup table used by the
+.QW vfs
+extension which allows filesystem actions to be implemented in Tcl.
 .CS
 static Tcl_Filesystem vfsFilesystem = {
     "tclvfs",
@@ -719,14 +844,15 @@ static Tcl_Filesystem vfsFilesystem = {
     &VfsPathInFilesystem,
     &VfsDupInternalRep,
     &VfsFreeInternalRep,
-    /* No internal to normalized, since we don't create any
-     * pure 'internal' Tcl_Obj path representations */
+    /* No internal to normalized, since we don't create
+     * any pure 'internal' Tcl_Obj path representations */
     NULL,
-    /* No create native rep function, since we don't use it
-     * and don't choose to support uses of 'Tcl_FSNewNativePath' */
+    /* No create native rep function, since we don't use
+     * it and don't choose to support uses of
+     * Tcl_FSNewNativePath */
     NULL,
-    /* Normalize path isn't needed - we assume paths only have
-     * one representation */
+    /* Normalize path isn't needed - we assume paths only
+     * have one representation */
     NULL,
     &VfsFilesystemPathType,
     &VfsFilesystemSeparator,
@@ -735,57 +861,57 @@ static Tcl_Filesystem vfsFilesystem = {
     &VfsOpenFileChannel,
     &VfsMatchInDirectory,
     &VfsUtime,
-    /* We choose not to support symbolic links inside our vfs's */
+    /* We choose not to support symbolic links inside our
+     * VFS's */
     NULL,
     &VfsListVolumes,
     &VfsFileAttrStrings,
     &VfsFileAttrsGet,
     &VfsFileAttrsSet,
     &VfsCreateDirectory,
-    &VfsRemoveDirectory, 
+    &VfsRemoveDirectory,
     &VfsDeleteFile,
-    /* No copy file - fallback will occur at Tcl level */
+    /* No copy file; use the core fallback mechanism */
     NULL,
-    /* No rename file - fallback will occur at Tcl level */
+    /* No rename file; use the core fallback mechanism */
+    NULL,
+    /* No copy directory; use the core fallback mechanism */
     NULL,
-    /* No copy directory - fallback will occur at Tcl level */
-    NULL, 
     /* Core will use stat for lstat */
     NULL,
-    /* No load - fallback on core implementation */
+    /* No load; use the core fallback mechanism */
     NULL,
-    /* We don't need a getcwd or chdir - fallback on Tcl's versions */
+    /* We don't need a getcwd or chdir; the core's own
+     * internal value is suitable */
     NULL,
     NULL
 };
 .CE
+.SH "FILESYSTEM INFRASTRUCTURE"
 .PP
-Any functions which take path names in Tcl_Obj form take
-those names in UTF\-8 form.  The filesystem infrastructure API is
-designed to support efficient, cached conversion of these UTF\-8 paths
-to other native representations.
-.SH TYPENAME
+These fields contain basic information about the filesystem structure
+and addresses of functions which are used to associate
+a particular filesystem with a file path, and deal with the internal
+handling of path representations, for example copying and freeing such
+representations.
+.SS TYPENAME
 .PP
 The \fItypeName\fR field contains a null-terminated string that
 identifies the type of the filesystem implemented, e.g.
-\fBnative\fR or \fBzip\fR or \fBvfs\fR.
-.PP
-.SH "STRUCTURE LENGTH"
+.QW native ,
+.QW zip
+or
+.QW vfs .
+.SS "STRUCTURE LENGTH"
 .PP
 The \fIstructureLength\fR field is generally implemented as
 \fIsizeof(Tcl_Filesystem)\fR, and is there to allow easier
 binary backwards compatibility if the size of the structure
 changes in a future Tcl release.
-.SH VERSION
+.SS VERSION
 .PP
 The \fIversion\fR field should be set to \fBTCL_FILESYSTEM_VERSION_1\fR.
-.SH "FILESYSTEM INFRASTRUCTURE"
-.PP
-These fields contain addresses of functions which are used to associate
-a particular filesystem with a file path, and deal with the internal
-handling of path representations, for example copying and freeing such
-representations.
-.SH PATHINFILESYSTEMPROC
+.SS PATHINFILESYSTEMPROC
 .PP
 The \fIpathInFilesystemProc\fR field contains the address of a function
 which is called to determine whether a given path object belongs to this
@@ -793,7 +919,7 @@ filesystem or not.  Tcl will only call the rest of the filesystem
 functions with a path for which this function has returned \fBTCL_OK\fR.
 If the path does not belong, -1 should be returned (the behaviour of Tcl
 for any other return value is not defined).  If \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned,
-then the optional \fBclientDataPtr\fR output parameter can be used to
+then the optional \fIclientDataPtr\fR output parameter can be used to
 return an internal (filesystem specific) representation of the path,
 which will be cached inside the path object, and may be retrieved
 efficiently by the other filesystem functions.  Tcl will simultaneously
@@ -803,10 +929,10 @@ Tcl's internal list of known filesystems.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSPathInFilesystemProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR, 
-	ClientData *\fIclientDataPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        ClientData *\fIclientDataPtr\fR);
 .CE
-.SH DUPINTERNALREPPROC
+.SS DUPINTERNALREPPROC
 .PP
 This function makes a copy of a path's internal representation, and is
 called when Tcl needs to duplicate a path object.  If NULL, Tcl will
@@ -815,18 +941,18 @@ regenerated later.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef ClientData Tcl_FSDupInternalRepProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
-.SH FREEINTERNALREPPROC
+.SS FREEINTERNALREPPROC
 Free the internal representation.  This must be implemented if internal
 representations need freeing (i.e. if some memory is allocated when an
 internal representation is generated), but may otherwise be NULL.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_FSFreeInternalRepProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
-.SH INTERNALTONORMALIZEDPROC
+.SS INTERNALTONORMALIZEDPROC
 .PP
 Function to convert internal representation to a normalized path.  Only
 required if the filesystem creates pure path objects with no string/path
@@ -835,9 +961,9 @@ representation is the normalized path.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_Obj* Tcl_FSInternalToNormalizedProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
-.SH CREATEINTERNALREPPROC
+.SS CREATEINTERNALREPPROC
 .PP
 Function to take a path object, and calculate an internal
 representation for it, and store that native representation in the
@@ -847,36 +973,41 @@ immediately creates an internal representation for paths it accepts.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef ClientData Tcl_FSCreateInternalRepProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
 .CE
-.SH NORMALIZEPATHPROC       
+.SS NORMALIZEPATHPROC
 .PP
 Function to normalize a path.  Should be implemented for all
 filesystems which can have multiple string representations for the same
-path object.  In Tcl, every 'path' must have a single unique 'normalized'
+path object.  In Tcl, every
+.QW path
+must have a single unique
+.QW normalized
 string representation.  Depending on the filesystem,
 there may be more than one unnormalized string representation which
 refers to that path (e.g. a relative path, a path with different
 character case if the filesystem is case insensitive, a path contain a
-reference to a home directory such as '~', a path containing symbolic
+reference to a home directory such as
+.QW ~ ,
+a path containing symbolic
 links, etc).  If the very last component in the path is a symbolic
 link, it should not be converted into the object it points to (but
 its case or other aspects should be made unique).  All other path
 components should be converted from symbolic links.  This one
-exception is required to agree with Tcl's semantics with 'file
-delete', 'file rename', 'file copy' operating on symbolic links.
-This function may be called with 'nextCheckpoint' either
+exception is required to agree with Tcl's semantics with \fBfile
+delete\fR, \fBfile rename\fR, \fBfile copy\fR operating on symbolic links.
+This function may be called with \fInextCheckpoint\fR either
 at the beginning of the path (i.e. zero), at the end of the path, or
 at any intermediate file separator in the path.  It will never
 point to any other arbitrary position in the path. In the last of
-the three valid cases, the implementation can assume that the path 
+the three valid cases, the implementation can assume that the path
 up to and including the file separator is known and normalized.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSNormalizePathProc(
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR, 
-	int \fInextCheckpoint\fR);
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        int \fInextCheckpoint\fR);
 .CE
 .SH "FILESYSTEM OPERATIONS"
 .PP
@@ -890,43 +1021,52 @@ this may be desirable (for example, a read-only filesystem should not
 implement the last four functions, and a filesystem which does not
 support symbolic links need not implement the \fBreadlink\fR function,
 etc.  The Tcl core expects filesystems to behave in this way).
-.SH FILESYSTEMPATHTYPEPROC
+.SS FILESYSTEMPATHTYPEPROC
 .PP
 Function to determine the type of a path in this filesystem.  May be
 NULL, in which case no type information will be available to users of
-the filesystem.  The 'type' is used only for informational purposes,
+the filesystem.  The
+.QW type
+is used only for informational purposes,
 and should be returned as the string representation of the Tcl_Obj
-which is returned.  A typical return value might be "networked", "zip"
-or "ftp".  The Tcl_Obj result is owned by the filesystem and so Tcl will 
-increment the refCount of that object if it wishes to retain a reference 
+which is returned.  A typical return value might be
+.QW networked ,
+.QW zip
+or
+.QW ftp .
+The Tcl_Obj result is owned by the filesystem and so Tcl will
+increment the refCount of that object if it wishes to retain a reference
 to it.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_Obj* Tcl_FSFilesystemPathTypeProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
 .CE
-.SH FILESYSTEMSEPARATORPROC
+.SS FILESYSTEMSEPARATORPROC
 .PP
 Function to return the separator character(s) for this filesystem.
-Must be implemented, otherwise the \fBfile separator\fR command will not
-function correctly.  The usual return value will be a Tcl_Obj
-containing the string "/".
+This need only be implemented if the filesystem wishes to use a
+different separator than the standard string
+.QW / .
+Amongst other
+uses, it is returned by the \fBfile separator\fR command.  The
+return value should be an object with refCount of zero.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_Obj* Tcl_FSFilesystemSeparatorProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
 .CE
-.SH STATPROC 
+.SS STATPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSStat()\fR call.  Must be implemented for any
-reasonable filesystem, since many Tcl level commands depend crucially 
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSStat\fR call.  Must be implemented for any
+reasonable filesystem, since many Tcl level commands depend crucially
 upon it (e.g. \fBfile atime\fR, \fBfile isdirectory\fR, \fBfile size\fR,
 \fBglob\fR).
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSStatProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
-	Tcl_StatBuf *\fIstatPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_StatBuf *\fIstatPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_FSStatProc\fR fills the stat structure \fIstatPtr\fR with
@@ -942,40 +1082,40 @@ time.
 If the file represented by \fIpathPtr\fR exists, the
 \fBTcl_FSStatProc\fR returns 0 and the stat structure is filled with
 data.  Otherwise, -1 is returned, and no stat info is given.
-.SH ACCESSPROC	    
+.SS ACCESSPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSAccess()\fR call.  Must be implemented for
-any reasonable filesystem, since many Tcl level commands depend crucially 
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSAccess\fR call.  Must be implemented for
+any reasonable filesystem, since many Tcl level commands depend crucially
 upon it (e.g. \fBfile exists\fR, \fBfile readable\fR).
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSAccessProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
-	int \fImode\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        int \fImode\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_FSAccessProc\fR checks whether the process would be allowed
-to read, write or test for existence of the file (or other file system
-object) whose name is pathname.  If pathname is a symbolic link, then
+to read, write or test for existence of the file (or other filesystem
+object) whose name is in \fIpathPtr\fR.  If the pathname refers to a
+symbolic link, then the
 permissions of the file referred by this symbolic link should be tested.
 .PP
 On success (all requested permissions granted), zero is returned.  On
 error (at least one bit in mode asked for a permission that is denied,
 or some other  error occurred), -1 is returned.
+.SS OPENFILECHANNELPROC
 .PP
-.SH OPENFILECHANNELPROC 
-.PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSOpenFileChannel()\fR call.  Must be
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSOpenFileChannel\fR call.  Must be
 implemented for any reasonable filesystem, since any operations
-which require open or accessing a file's contents will use it 
+which require open or accessing a file's contents will use it
 (e.g. \fBopen\fR, \fBencoding\fR, and many Tk commands).
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_Channel Tcl_FSOpenFileChannelProc(
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
-	int \fImode\fR,
-	int \fIpermissions\fR);
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        int \fImode\fR,
+        int \fIpermissions\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_FSOpenFileChannelProc\fR opens a file specified by
@@ -996,20 +1136,20 @@ interpreter; to register it, use \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR. If one of
 the standard channels, \fBstdin, stdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR was
 previously closed, the act of creating the new channel also assigns it
 as a replacement for the standard channel.
-.SH MATCHINDIRECTORYPROC  
+.SS MATCHINDIRECTORYPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory()\fR call.  If not
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSMatchInDirectory\fR call.  If not
 implemented, then glob and recursive copy functionality will be lacking
-in the filesystem (and this may impact commands like 'encoding names' 
+in the filesystem (and this may impact commands like \fBencoding names\fR
 which use glob functionality internally).
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSMatchInDirectoryProc(
-	Tcl_Interp* \fIinterp\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIresult\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR, 
-	CONST char *\fIpattern\fR, 
-	Tcl_GlobTypeData * \fItypes\fR);
+        Tcl_Interp* \fIinterp\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIresultPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        const char *\fIpattern\fR,
+        Tcl_GlobTypeData *\fItypes\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The function should return all files or directories (or other filesystem
@@ -1026,12 +1166,13 @@ not, so code should be flexible to both possibilities.
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
 occurred in the matching process.  Error messages are placed in
-\fIinterp\fR; on a \fBTCL_OK\fR result, results should be added to the
-\fIresult\fR object given (which can be assumed to be a valid
-unshared Tcl list).  The matches added
-to \fIresult\fR should include any path prefix given in \fIpathPtr\fR 
-(this usually means they will be absolute path specifications). 
-Note that if no matches are found, that simply leads to an empty 
+\fIinterp\fR, unless \fIinterp\fR in NULL in which case no error
+message need be generated; on a \fBTCL_OK\fR result, results should be 
+added to the \fIresultPtr\fR object given (which can be assumed to be a 
+valid unshared Tcl list).  The matches added
+to \fIresultPtr\fR should include any path prefix given in \fIpathPtr\fR
+(this usually means they will be absolute path specifications).
+Note that if no matches are found, that simply leads to an empty
 result; errors are only signaled for actual file or filesystem
 problems which may occur during the matching process.
 .PP
@@ -1039,14 +1180,14 @@ The \fBTcl_GlobTypeData\fR structure passed in the \fItypes\fR
 parameter contains the following fields:
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_GlobTypeData {
-      /* Corresponds to bcdpfls as in 'find -t' */
-      int \fItype\fR;
-      /* Corresponds to file permissions */
-      int \fIperm\fR;
-      /* Acceptable mac type */
-      Tcl_Obj *\fImacType\fR;
-      /* Acceptable mac creator */
-      Tcl_Obj *\fImacCreator\fR;
+        /* Corresponds to bcdpfls as in 'find -t' */
+        int \fItype\fR;
+        /* Corresponds to file permissions */
+        int \fIperm\fR;
+        /* Acceptable mac type */
+        Tcl_Obj *\fImacType\fR;
+        /* Acceptable mac creator */
+        Tcl_Obj *\fImacCreator\fR;
 } Tcl_GlobTypeData;
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -1062,50 +1203,52 @@ which lie within the given \fIpathPtr\fR (and in this case, \fIpathPtr\fR
 need not lie within the same filesystem - different to all other cases in
 which this function is called).  Support for this is critical if Tcl is
 to have seamless transitions between from one filesystem to another.
-.SH UTIMEPROC       
+.SS UTIMEPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSUtime()\fR call.  Required to allow setting
-(not reading) of times with 'file mtime', 'file atime' and the
-open-r/open-w/fcopy implementation of 'file copy'.
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSUtime\fR call.  Required to allow setting
+(not reading) of times with \fBfile mtime\fR, \fBfile atime\fR and the
+open-r/open-w/fcopy implementation of \fBfile copy\fR.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSUtimeProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR, 
-	struct utimbuf *\fItval\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        struct utimbuf *\fItval\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The access and modification times of the file specified by \fIpathPtr\fR
 should be changed to the values given in the \fItval\fR structure.
 .PP
-The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
-occurred in the process.
-.SH LINKPROC 
+The return value should be 0 on success and -1 on an error, as
+with the system \fButime\fR.
+.SS LINKPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSLink()\fR call.  Should be implemented
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSLink\fR call.  Should be implemented
 only if the filesystem supports links, and may otherwise be NULL.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_Obj* Tcl_FSLinkProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIlinkNamePtr\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj *\fItoPtr\fR,
-	int \fIlinkAction\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIlinkNamePtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fItoPtr\fR,
+        int \fIlinkAction\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 If \fItoPtr\fR is NULL, the function is being asked to read the
 contents of a link.  The result is a Tcl_Obj specifying the contents of
 the link given by \fIlinkNamePtr\fR, or NULL if the link could
-not be read.  The result is owned by the caller, which should call
-Tcl_DecrRefCount when the result is no longer needed.  If \fItoPtr\fR 
-is not NULL, the function should attempt to create a link.  The result
-in this case should be \fItoPtr\fR if the link was successful and NULL
-otherwise.  In this case the result is not owned by the caller. See
+not be read.  The result is owned by the caller (and should therefore
+have its ref count incremented before being returned).  Any callers
+should call Tcl_DecrRefCount on this result when it is no longer needed.
+If \fItoPtr\fR is not NULL, the function should attempt to create a link.
+The result in this case should be \fItoPtr\fR if the link was successful
+and NULL otherwise.  In this case the result is not owned by the caller
+(i.e. no ref count manipulation on either end is needed). See
 the documentation for \fBTcl_FSLink\fR for the correct interpretation
 of the \fIlinkAction\fR flags.
-.SH LISTVOLUMESPROC	    
+.SS LISTVOLUMESPROC
 .PP
 Function to list any filesystem volumes added by this filesystem.
 Should be implemented only if the filesystem adds volumes at the head
-of the filesystem, so that they can be returned by 'file volumes'.
+of the filesystem, so that they can be returned by \fBfile volumes\fR.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_Obj* Tcl_FSListVolumesProc(void);
@@ -1116,7 +1259,9 @@ NULL (or an empty list) if no volumes are provided.  The result object
 is considered to be owned by the filesystem (not by Tcl's core), but
 should be given a refCount for Tcl.  Tcl will use the contents of the
 list and then decrement that refCount.  This allows filesystems to
-choose whether they actually want to retain a 'master list' of volumes
+choose whether they actually want to retain a
+.QW "master list"
+of volumes
 or not (if not, they generate the list on the fly and pass it to Tcl
 with a refCount of 1 and then forget about the list, if yes, then
 they simply increment the refCount of their master list and pass it
@@ -1124,8 +1269,7 @@ to Tcl which will copy the contents and then decrement the count back
 to where it was).
 .PP
 Therefore, Tcl considers return values from this proc to be read-only.
-.PP
-.SH FILEATTRSTRINGSPROC
+.SS FILEATTRSTRINGSPROC
 .PP
 Function to list all attribute strings which are valid for this
 filesystem.  If not implemented the filesystem will not support
@@ -1135,94 +1279,98 @@ not implemented, there is no need to implement the \fBget\fR and \fBset\fR
 methods.
 .PP
 .CS
-typedef CONST char** Tcl_FSFileAttrStringsProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj** \fIobjPtrRef\fR);
+typedef const char** Tcl_FSFileAttrStringsProc(
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj** \fIobjPtrRef\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The called function may either return an array of strings, or may
-instead return NULL and place a Tcl list into the given objPtrRef.  Tcl
-will take that list and first increment its refCount before using it.
-On completion of that use, Tcl will decrement its refCount.  Hence if
+instead return NULL and place a Tcl list into the given \fIobjPtrRef\fR.  Tcl
+will take that list and first increment its reference count before using it.
+On completion of that use, Tcl will decrement its reference count.  Hence if
 the list should be disposed of by Tcl when done, it should have a
-refCount of zero, and if the list should not be disposed of, the
-filesystem should ensure it retains a refCount on the object.
-.SH FILEATTRSGETPROC
+reference count of zero, and if the list should not be disposed of, the
+filesystem should ensure it returns an object with a reference count
+of at least one.
+.SS FILEATTRSGETPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSFileAttrsGet()\fR call, used by 'file
-attributes'.
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSFileAttrsGet\fR call, used by \fBfile
+attributes\fR.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSFileAttrsGetProc(
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	int \fIindex\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj **\fIobjPtrRef\fR);
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        int \fIindex\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj **\fIobjPtrRef\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 Returns a standard Tcl return code.  The attribute value retrieved,
 which corresponds to the \fIindex\fR'th element in the list returned by
-the Tcl_FSFileAttrStringsProc, is a Tcl_Obj placed in objPtrRef (if
-TCL_OK was returned) and is likely to have a refCount of zero.  Either
+the \fBTcl_FSFileAttrStringsProc\fR, is a Tcl_Obj placed in \fIobjPtrRef\fR (if
+\fBTCL_OK\fR was returned) and is likely to have a reference count of zero.  Either
 way we must either store it somewhere (e.g. the Tcl result), or
-Incr/Decr its refCount to ensure it is properly freed.
-.SH FILEATTRSSETPROC
+Incr/Decr its reference count to ensure it is properly freed.
+.SS FILEATTRSSETPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSFileAttrsSet()\fR call, used by 'file
-attributes'.  If the filesystem is read-only, there is no need
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSFileAttrsSet\fR call, used by \fBfile
+attributes\fR.  If the filesystem is read-only, there is no need
 to implement this.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSFileAttrsSetProc(
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	int \fIindex\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        int \fIindex\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The attribute value of the \fIindex\fR'th element in the list returned by
 the Tcl_FSFileAttrStringsProc should be set to the \fIobjPtr\fR given.
-.SH CREATEDIRECTORYPROC	    
+.SS CREATEDIRECTORYPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSCreateDirectory()\fR call.  Should be
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSCreateDirectory\fR call.  Should be
 implemented unless the FS is read-only.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSCreateDirectoryProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
 occurred in the process.  If successful, a new directory should have
 been added to the filesystem in the location specified by
 \fIpathPtr\fR.
-.SH REMOVEDIRECTORYPROC	    
+.SS REMOVEDIRECTORYPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a 'Tcl_FSRemoveDirectory()' call.  Should be
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSRemoveDirectory\fR call.  Should be
 implemented unless the FS is read-only.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSRemoveDirectoryProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
-	int \fIrecursive\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj **\fIerrorPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        int \fIrecursive\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj **\fIerrorPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
 occurred in the process.  If successful, the directory specified by
 \fIpathPtr\fR should have been removed from the filesystem.  If the
-\fIrecursive\fR flag is given, then a non-empty directory should
-be deleted without error.  If an error does occur, the name of
-the file or directory which caused the error should be placed in
-\fIerrorPtr\fR.
-.SH DELETEFILEPROC	    
-.PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSDeleteFile()\fR call.  Should be implemented
+\fIrecursive\fR flag is given, then a non-empty directory should be
+deleted without error.  If this flag is not given, then and the
+directory is non-empty a POSIX
+.QW EEXIST
+error should be signaled.  If an
+error does occur, the name of the file or directory which caused the
+error should be placed in \fIerrorPtr\fR.
+.SS DELETEFILEPROC
+.PP
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSDeleteFile\fR call.  Should be implemented
 unless the FS is read-only.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSDeleteFileProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
@@ -1233,73 +1381,82 @@ function and not Tcl_FSRemoveDirectoryProc when needed to delete them
 (even if they are symbolic links to directories).
 .SH "FILESYSTEM EFFICIENCY"
 .PP
-.SH LSTATPROC	    
+These functions need not be implemented for a particular filesystem
+because the core has a fallback implementation available. See each
+individual description for the consequences of leaving the field NULL.
+.SS LSTATPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSLstat()\fR call.  If not implemented, Tcl
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSLstat\fR call.  If not implemented, Tcl
 will attempt to use the \fIstatProc\fR defined above instead.  Therefore
 it need only be implemented if a filesystem can differentiate between
 \fBstat\fR and \fBlstat\fR calls.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSLstatProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR, 
-	Tcl_StatBuf *\fIstatPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_StatBuf *\fIstatPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
-The behavior of this function is very similar to that of the 
-Tcl_FSStatProc defined above, except that if it is applied
+The behavior of this function is very similar to that of the
+\fBTcl_FSStatProc\fR defined above, except that if it is applied
 to a symbolic link, it returns information about the link, not
 about the target file.
+.SS COPYFILEPROC
 .PP
-.SH COPYFILEPROC 
-.PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSCopyFile()\fR call.  If not implemented Tcl
-will fall back on open-r, open-w and fcopy as a copying mechanism.
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSCopyFile\fR call.  If not implemented Tcl
+will fall back on \fBopen\fR-r, \fBopen\fR-w and \fBfcopy\fR as a
+copying mechanism.
 Therefore it need only be implemented if the filesystem can perform
 that action more efficiently.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSCopyFileProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPathPtr\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIdestPathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIdestPathPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
 occurred in the copying process.  Note that, \fIdestPathPtr\fR is the
 name of the file which should become the copy of \fIsrcPathPtr\fR. It
 is never the name of a directory into which \fIsrcPathPtr\fR could be
-copied (i.e. the function is much simpler than the Tcl level 'file
-copy' subcommand).  Note that,
+copied (i.e. the function is much simpler than the Tcl level \fBfile
+copy\fR subcommand).  Note that,
 if the filesystem supports symbolic links, Tcl will always call this
-function and not Tcl_FSCopyDirectoryProc when needed to copy them
-(even if they are symbolic links to directories).
-.SH RENAMEFILEPROC	    
-.PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSRenameFile()\fR call.  If not implemented,
+function and not \fIcopyDirectoryProc\fR when needed to copy them
+(even if they are symbolic links to directories).  Finally, if the
+filesystem determines it cannot support the \fBfile copy\fR action,
+calling \fBTcl_SetErrno(EXDEV)\fR and returning a non-\fBTCL_OK\fR
+result will tell Tcl to use its standard fallback mechanisms.
+.SS RENAMEFILEPROC
+.PP
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSRenameFile\fR call.  If not implemented,
 Tcl will fall back on a copy and delete mechanism.  Therefore it need
 only be implemented if the filesystem can perform that action more
 efficiently.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSRenameFileProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPathPtr\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIdestPathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIdestPathPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
-occurred in the renaming process.
-.SH COPYDIRECTORYPROC	    
-.PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSCopyDirectory()\fR call.  If not
-implemented, Tcl will fall back on a recursive create-dir, file copy
+occurred in the renaming process.  If the
+filesystem determines it cannot support the \fBfile rename\fR action,
+calling \fBTcl_SetErrno(EXDEV)\fR and returning a non-\fBTCL_OK\fR
+result will tell Tcl to use its standard fallback mechanisms.
+.SS COPYDIRECTORYPROC
+.PP
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSCopyDirectory\fR call.  If not
+implemented, Tcl will fall back on a recursive \fBfile mkdir\fR, \fBfile copy\fR
 mechanism.  Therefore it need only be implemented if the filesystem can
 perform that action more efficiently.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSCopyDirectoryProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPathPtr\fR,
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIdestPathPtr\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj **\fIerrorPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIdestPathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj **\fIerrorPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The return value is a standard Tcl result indicating whether an error
@@ -1309,33 +1466,42 @@ the file or directory which caused the error should be placed in
 directory-name which should become the mirror-image of
 \fIsrcPathPtr\fR. It is not the name of a directory into which
 \fIsrcPathPtr\fR should be copied (i.e. the function is much simpler
-than the Tcl level 'file copy' subcommand).
-.SH LOADFILEPROC 
-.PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSLoadFile()\fR call.  If not implemented, Tcl
-will fall back on a copy to native-temp followed by a Tcl_FSLoadFile on
+than the Tcl level \fBfile copy\fR subcommand).  Finally, if the
+filesystem determines it cannot support the directory copy action,
+calling \fBTcl_SetErrno(EXDEV)\fR and returning a non-\fBTCL_OK\fR
+result will tell Tcl to use its standard fallback mechanisms.
+.SS LOADFILEPROC
+.PP
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSLoadFile\fR call.  If not implemented, Tcl
+will fall back on a copy to native-temp followed by a \fBTcl_FSLoadFile\fR on
 that temporary copy.  Therefore it need only be implemented if the
 filesystem can load code directly, or it can be implemented simply to
-return TCL_ERROR to disable load functionality in this filesystem
+return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to disable load functionality in this filesystem
 entirely.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSLoadFileProc(
-	Tcl_Interp * \fIinterp\fR, 
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR, 
-	Tcl_LoadHandle * \fIhandlePtr\fR,
-	Tcl_FSUnloadFileProc * \fIunloadProcPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_LoadHandle *\fIhandlePtr\fR,
+        Tcl_FSUnloadFileProc *\fIunloadProcPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 Returns a standard Tcl completion code.  If an error occurs, an error
-message is left in the interp's result.  The function dynamically loads
-a binary code file into memory.  On a successful
-load, the \fIhandlePtr\fR should be filled with a token for 
-the dynamically loaded file, and the \fIunloadProcPtr\fR should be
-filled in with the address of a procedure.  The procedure will be
-called with the given Tcl_LoadHandle as its only parameter when Tcl 
-needs to unload the file.
-.SH UNLOADFILEPROC	    
+message is left in the \fIinterp\fR's result.  The function dynamically loads a
+binary code file into memory.  On a successful load, the \fIhandlePtr\fR
+should be filled with a token for the dynamically loaded file, and the
+\fIunloadProcPtr\fR should be filled in with the address of a procedure.
+The unload procedure will be called with the given \fBTcl_LoadHandle\fR as its
+only parameter when Tcl needs to unload the file.  For example, for the
+native filesystem, the \fBTcl_LoadHandle\fR returned is currently a token
+which can be used in the private \fBTclpFindSymbol\fR to access functions
+in the new code.  Each filesystem is free to define the
+\fBTcl_LoadHandle\fR as it requires.  Finally, if the
+filesystem determines it cannot support the file load action,
+calling \fBTcl_SetErrno(EXDEV)\fR and returning a non-\fBTCL_OK\fR
+result will tell Tcl to use its standard fallback mechanisms.
+.SS UNLOADFILEPROC
 .PP
 Function to unload a previously successfully loaded file.  If load was
 implemented, then this should also be implemented, if there is any
@@ -1343,17 +1509,17 @@ cleanup action required.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_FSUnloadFileProc(
-	Tcl_LoadHandle \fIloadHandle\fR);
+        Tcl_LoadHandle \fIloadHandle\fR);
 .CE
-.SH GETCWDPROC     
+.SS GETCWDPROC     
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSGetCwd()\fR call.  Most filesystems need not
-implement this.  It will usually only be called once, if 'getcwd' is
-called before 'chdir'.  May be NULL.
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSGetCwd\fR call.  Most filesystems need not
+implement this.  It will usually only be called once, if \fBgetcwd\fR is
+called before \fBchdir\fR.  May be NULL.
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_Obj* Tcl_FSGetCwdProc(
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 If the filesystem supports a native notion of a current working
@@ -1361,26 +1527,28 @@ directory (which might perhaps change independent of Tcl), this
 function should return that cwd as the result, or NULL if the current
 directory could not be determined (e.g. the user does not have
 appropriate permissions on the cwd directory).  If NULL is returned, an
-error message is left in the interp's result.
-.PP
-.SH CHDIRPROC	    
+error message is left in the \fIinterp\fR's result.
+.SS CHDIRPROC
 .PP
-Function to process a \fBTcl_FSChdir()\fR call.  If filesystems do not
+Function to process a \fBTcl_FSChdir\fR call.  If filesystems do not
 implement this, it will be emulated by a series of directory access
 checks.  Otherwise, virtual filesystems which do implement it need only
-respond with a positive return result if the dirName is a valid,
+respond with a positive return result if the \fIpathPtr\fR is a valid,
 accessible directory in their filesystem.  They need not remember the
-result, since that will be automatically remembered for use by GetCwd.
+result, since that will be automatically remembered for use by
+\fBTcl_FSGetCwd\fR.
 Real filesystems should carry out the correct action (i.e. call the
-correct system 'chdir' api).
+correct system \fBchdir\fR API).
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_FSChdirProc(
-	Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIpathPtr\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_FSChdirProc\fR changes the applications current working
 directory to the value specified in \fIpathPtr\fR. The function returns
 -1 on error or 0 on success.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+cd(n), file(n), load(n), open(n), pwd(n), unload(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
-stat access filesystem vfs
+stat, access, filesystem, vfs, virtual
diff --git a/doc/FindExec.3 b/doc/FindExec.3
index 9c42f9a..0e225e9 100644
--- a/doc/FindExec.3
+++ b/doc/FindExec.3
@@ -16,10 +16,10 @@ Tcl_FindExecutable, Tcl_GetNameOfExecutable \- identify or return the name of th
 void
 \fBTcl_FindExecutable\fR(\fIargv0\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetNameOfExecutable\fR()
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS char *argv0 in
+.AS char *argv0
 .AP char *argv0 in
 The first command-line argument to the program, which gives the
 application's name.
diff --git a/doc/GetCwd.3 b/doc/GetCwd.3
index f8fce52..964e237 100755..100644
--- a/doc/GetCwd.3
+++ b/doc/GetCwd.3
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ char *
 int
 \fBTcl_Chdir\fR(\fIpath\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_DString *bufferPtr
+.AS Tcl_DString *bufferPtr in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to report an error, if any.
 .AP Tcl_DString *bufferPtr in/out
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ the same functionality as the Tcl \fBpwd\fR command.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetCwd\fR returns a pointer to a string specifying the current
 directory, or NULL if the current directory could not be determined.
-If NULL is returned, an error message is left in the interp's result.
+If NULL is returned, an error message is left in the \fIinterp\fR's result.
 Storage for the result string is allocated in bufferPtr; the caller
 must call \fBTcl_DStringFree()\fR when the result is no longer needed.
 The format of the path is UTF\-8.
diff --git a/doc/GetHostName.3 b/doc/GetHostName.3
index 694ac4a..28f3a4f 100644
--- a/doc/GetHostName.3
+++ b/doc/GetHostName.3
@@ -11,7 +11,7 @@ Tcl_GetHostName \- get the name of the local host
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetHostName\fR()
 .BE
 
diff --git a/doc/GetIndex.3 b/doc/GetIndex.3
index e47f89b..82590fb 100644
--- a/doc/GetIndex.3
+++ b/doc/GetIndex.3
@@ -16,14 +16,12 @@ Tcl_GetIndexFromObj, Tcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct \- lookup string in table of keyw
 int
 \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, tablePtr, msg, flags,
 indexPtr\fR)
-.VS
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, structTablePtr, offset,
-msg, flags, indexPtr\fR)
-.VE
+                          msg, flags, indexPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "CONST char" **tablePtr
+.AS "const char" *structTablePtr in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter to use for error reporting; if NULL, then no message is
 provided on errors.
@@ -31,19 +29,17 @@ provided on errors.
 The string value of this object is used to search through \fItablePtr\fR.
 The internal representation is modified to hold the index of the matching
 table entry.
-.AP "CONST char" **tablePtr in
+.AP "const char" **tablePtr in
 An array of null-terminated strings.  The end of the array is marked
 by a NULL string pointer.
-.AP "CONST VOID" *structTablePtr in
-An array of arbitrary type, typically some \fBstruct\fP type.
+.AP "const void" *structTablePtr in
+An array of arbitrary type, typically some \fBstruct\fR type.
 The first member of the structure must be a null-terminated string.
-The size of the structure is given by \fIoffset\fP.
-.VS
+The size of the structure is given by \fIoffset\fR.
 .AP int offset in
 The offset to add to structTablePtr to get to the next entry.
 The end of the array is marked by a NULL string pointer.
-.VE
-.AP "CONST char" *msg in
+.AP "const char" *msg in
 Null-terminated string describing what is being looked up, such as
 \fBoption\fR.  This string is included in error messages.
 .AP int flags in
@@ -66,14 +62,14 @@ the strings in \fItablePtr\fR to find a match.  A match occurs if
 for exactly one of the strings in \fItablePtr\fR and the
 \fBTCL_EXACT\fR flag was not specified; in either case
 the index of the matching entry is stored at \fI*indexPtr\fR
-and TCL_OK is returned.
+and \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned.
 .PP
 If there is no matching entry,
-TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's
-result if \fIinterp\fR isn't NULL.  \fIMsg\fR is included in the
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's
+result if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL.  \fIMsg\fR is included in the
 error message to indicate what was being looked up.  For example,
 if \fImsg\fR is \fBoption\fR the error message will have a form like
-\fBbad option "firt": must be first, second, or third\fR.
+.QW "\fBbad option \N'34'firt\N'34': must be first, second, or third\fR" .
 .PP
 If \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR completes successfully it modifies the
 internal representation of \fIobjPtr\fR to hold the address of
@@ -85,17 +81,18 @@ operation.  Note: \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR assumes that the entries
 in \fItablePtr\fR are static: they must not change between
 invocations.  If the value of \fIobjPtr\fR is the empty string,
 \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR will treat it as a non-matching value
-and return TCL_ERROR.
-.VS
+and return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObjStruct\fR works just like
 \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR, except that instead of treating
-\fItablePtr\fR as an array of string pointers, it treats it as the
-first in a series of string ptrs that are spaced apart by \fIoffset\fR
-bytes. This is particularly useful when processing things like
+\fItablePtr\fR as an array of string pointers, it treats it as a
+pointer to the first string in a series of strings that have
+\fIoffset\fR bytes between them (i.e. that there is a pointer to the
+first array of characters at \fItablePtr\fR, a pointer to the second
+array of characters at \fItablePtr\fR+\fIoffset\fR bytes, etc.)
+This is particularly useful when processing things like
 \fBTk_ConfigurationSpec\fR, whose string keys are in the same place in
 each of several array elements.
-.VE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_WrongNumArgs
diff --git a/doc/GetInt.3 b/doc/GetInt.3
index 677527a..f77d337 100644
--- a/doc/GetInt.3
+++ b/doc/GetInt.3
@@ -15,62 +15,69 @@ Tcl_GetInt, Tcl_GetDouble, Tcl_GetBoolean \- convert from string to integer, dou
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_GetInt\fR(\fIinterp, string, intPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_GetInt\fR(\fIinterp, src, intPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_GetDouble\fR(\fIinterp, string, doublePtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_GetDouble\fR(\fIinterp, src, doublePtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR(\fIinterp, string, boolPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR(\fIinterp, src, boolPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *doublePtr
+.AS Tcl_Interp *doublePtr out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter to use for error reporting.
-.AP "CONST char" *string in
+.AP "const char" *src in
 Textual value to be converted.
 .AP int *intPtr out
-Points to place to store integer value converted from \fIstring\fR.
+Points to place to store integer value converted from \fIsrc\fR.
 .AP double *doublePtr out
 Points to place to store double-precision floating-point
-value converted from \fIstring\fR.
+value converted from \fIsrc\fR.
 .AP int *boolPtr out
-Points to place to store boolean value (0 or 1) converted from \fIstring\fR.
+Points to place to store boolean value (0 or 1) converted from \fIsrc\fR.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 These procedures convert from strings to integers or double-precision
 floating-point values or booleans (represented as 0- or 1-valued
-integers).  Each of the procedures takes a \fIstring\fR argument,
+integers).  Each of the procedures takes a \fIsrc\fR argument,
 converts it to an internal form of a particular type, and stores
 the converted value at the location indicated by the procedure's
 third argument.  If all goes well, each of the procedures returns
-TCL_OK.  If \fIstring\fR doesn't have the proper syntax for the
-desired type then TCL_ERROR is returned, an error message is left
+\fBTCL_OK\fR.  If \fIsrc\fR does not have the proper syntax for the
+desired type then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, an error message is left
 in the interpreter's result, and nothing is stored at *\fIintPtr\fR
 or *\fIdoublePtr\fR or *\fIboolPtr\fR.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetInt\fR expects \fIstring\fR to consist of a collection
+\fBTcl_GetInt\fR expects \fIsrc\fR to consist of a collection
 of integer digits, optionally signed and optionally preceded by
-white space.  If the first two characters of \fIstring\fR are ``0x''
-then \fIstring\fR is expected to be in hexadecimal form;  otherwise,
-if the first character of \fIstring\fR is ``0'' then \fIstring\fR
-is expected to be in octal form;  otherwise, \fIstring\fR is
+white space.  If the first two characters of \fIsrc\fR
+after the optional white space and sign are
+.QW 0x
+then \fIsrc\fR is expected to be in hexadecimal form;  otherwise,
+if the first such character is
+.QW 0
+then \fIsrc\fR
+is expected to be in octal form;  otherwise, \fIsrc\fR is
 expected to be in decimal form.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetDouble\fR expects \fIstring\fR to consist of a floating-point
+\fBTcl_GetDouble\fR expects \fIsrc\fR to consist of a floating-point
 number, which is:  white space;  a sign; a sequence of digits;  a
-decimal point;  a sequence of digits;  the letter ``e'';  and a
-signed decimal exponent.  Any of the fields may be omitted, except that
+decimal point;  a sequence of digits;  the letter
+.QW e ;
+a signed decimal exponent;  and more white space.
+Any of the fields may be omitted, except that
 the digits either before or after the decimal point must be present
-and if the ``e'' is present then it must be followed by the
-exponent number.
+and if the
+.QW e
+is present then it must be followed by the exponent number.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR expects \fIstring\fR to specify a boolean
-value.  If \fIstring\fR is any of \fB0\fR, \fBfalse\fR,
+\fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR expects \fIsrc\fR to specify a boolean
+value.  If \fIsrc\fR is any of \fB0\fR, \fBfalse\fR,
 \fBno\fR, or \fBoff\fR, then \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR stores a zero
 value at \fI*boolPtr\fR.
-If \fIstring\fR is any of \fB1\fR, \fBtrue\fR, \fByes\fR, or \fBon\fR,
+If \fIsrc\fR is any of \fB1\fR, \fBtrue\fR, \fByes\fR, or \fBon\fR,
 then 1 is stored at \fI*boolPtr\fR.
 Any of these values may be abbreviated, and upper-case spellings
 are also acceptable.
diff --git a/doc/GetOpnFl.3 b/doc/GetOpnFl.3
index e914b8f..38aa976 100644
--- a/doc/GetOpnFl.3
+++ b/doc/GetOpnFl.3
@@ -8,29 +8,29 @@
 .TH Tcl_GetOpenFile 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_GetOpenFile \- Get a standard IO File * handle from a channel. (Unix only)
+Tcl_GetOpenFile \- Return a FILE* for a channel registered in the given interpreter (Unix only)
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_GetOpenFile\fR(\fIinterp, string, write, checkUsage, filePtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_GetOpenFile\fR(\fIinterp, chanID, write, checkUsage, filePtr\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp checkUsage
+.AS Tcl_Interp checkUsage out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter from which file handle is to be obtained.
-.AP "CONST char" *string in
+.AP "const char" *chanID in
 String identifying channel, such as \fBstdin\fR or \fBfile4\fR.
 .AP int write in
 Non-zero means the file will be used for writing, zero means it will
 be used for reading.
 .AP int checkUsage in
-If non-zero, then an error will be generated if the file wasn't opened
+If non-zero, then an error will be generated if the file was not opened
 for the access indicated by \fIwrite\fR.
 .AP ClientData *filePtr out
 Points to word in which to store pointer to FILE structure for
-the file given by \fIstring\fR.
+the file given by \fIchanID\fR.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -44,17 +44,15 @@ be used for reading or writing.
 In some cases, such as a channel that connects to a pipeline of
 subprocesses, different FILE pointers will be returned for reading
 and writing.
-\fBTcl_GetOpenFile\fR normally returns TCL_OK.
-If an error occurs in \fBTcl_GetOpenFile\fR (e.g. \fIstring\fR didn't
-make any sense or \fIcheckUsage\fR was set and the file wasn't opened
-for the access specified by \fIwrite\fR) then TCL_ERROR is returned
+\fBTcl_GetOpenFile\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
+If an error occurs in \fBTcl_GetOpenFile\fR (e.g. \fIchanID\fR did not
+make any sense or \fIcheckUsage\fR was set and the file was not opened
+for the access specified by \fIwrite\fR) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned
 and the interpreter's result will contain an error message.
 In the current implementation \fIcheckUsage\fR is ignored and consistency
 checks are always performed.
-.VS
 .PP
 Note that this interface is only supported on the Unix platform.
-.VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 channel, file handle, permissions, pipeline, read, write
diff --git a/doc/GetStdChan.3 b/doc/GetStdChan.3
index e0f754a..045d15a 100644
--- a/doc/GetStdChan.3
+++ b/doc/GetStdChan.3
@@ -20,7 +20,7 @@ Tcl_Channel
 \fBTcl_SetStdChannel\fR(\fIchannel, type\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Channel channel in
+.AS Tcl_Channel channel
 .AP int type in
 The identifier for the standard channel to retrieve or modify.  Must be one of
 \fBTCL_STDIN\fR, \fBTCL_STDOUT\fR, or \fBTCL_STDERR\fR.
@@ -76,7 +76,6 @@ standard error being last.
 .PP
 See \fBTcl_StandardChannels\fR for a general treatise about standard
 channels and the behaviour of the Tcl library with regard to them.
-.PP
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_Close(3), Tcl_CreateChannel(3), Tcl_Main(3), tclsh(1)
diff --git a/doc/GetTime.3 b/doc/GetTime.3
index 92457bd..14a9e8c 100644
--- a/doc/GetTime.3
+++ b/doc/GetTime.3
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 by Kevin B. Kenny.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -8,16 +8,39 @@
 .TH Tcl_GetTime 3 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_GetTime \- get date and time
+Tcl_GetTime, Tcl_SetTimeProc, Tcl_QueryTimeProc \- get date and time
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-\fBTcl_GetTime\fR(\fI timePtr \fR)
+\fBTcl_GetTime\fR(\fItimePtr\fR)
+.sp
+\fBTcl_SetTimeProc\fR(\fIgetProc, scaleProc, clientData\fR)
+.sp
+\fBTcl_QueryTimeProc\fR(\fIgetProcPtr, scaleProcPtr, clientDataPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "Tcl_Time *" timePtr
+.AS "Tcl_Time *" timePtr out
 .AP "Tcl_Time *" timePtr out
 Points to memory in which to store the date and time information.
+.AS "Tcl_GetTimeProc *" getProc in
+.AP "Tcl_GetTimeProc *" getProc in
+Pointer to handler function replacing \fBTcl_GetTime\fR's access to the OS.
+.AS "Tcl_ScaleTimeProc *" scaleProc in
+.AP "Tcl_ScaleTimeProc *" scaleProc in
+Pointer to handler function for the conversion of time delays in the
+virtual domain to real-time.
+.AS "ClientData *" clientData in
+.AP "ClientData *" clientData in
+Value passed through to the two handler functions.
+.AS "Tcl_GetTimeProc **" getProcPtr inout
+.AP "Tcl_GetTimeProc **" getProcPtr inout
+Pointer to place the currently registered get handler function into.
+.AS "Tcl_ScaleTimeProc **" scaleProcPtr inout
+.AP "Tcl_ScaleTimeProc **" scaleProcPtr inout
+Pointer to place the currently registered scale handler function into.
+.AS "ClientData **" clientDataPtr inout
+.AP "ClientData **" clientDataPtr inout
+Pointer to place the currently registered pass-through value into.
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
@@ -45,6 +68,32 @@ computer system.  On multiprocessor variants of Windows, this number
 may be limited to the 10- or 20-ms granularity of the system clock.
 (On single-processor Windows systems, the \fIusec\fR field is derived
 from a performance counter and is highly precise.)
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_SetTime\fR function registers two related handler functions
+with the core. The first handler function is a replacement for
+\fBTcl_GetTime\fR, or rather the OS access made by
+\fBTcl_GetTime\fR. The other handler function is used by the Tcl
+notifier to convert wait/block times from the virtual domain into real
+time.
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_QueryTime\fR function returns the currently registered
+handler functions. If no external handlers were set then this will
+return the standard handlers accessing and processing the native time
+of the OS. The arguments to the function are allowed to be NULL; and
+any argument which is NULL is ignored and not set.
+.PP
+Any handler pair specified has to return data which is consistent
+between them. In other words, setting one handler of the pair to
+something assuming a 10-times slowdown, and the other handler of the
+pair to something assuming a two-times slowdown is wrong and not
+allowed.
+.PP
+The set handler functions are allowed to run the delivered time
+backwards, however this should be avoided. We have to allow it as the
+native time can run backwards as the user can fiddle with the system
+time one way or other. Note that the insertion of the hooks will not
+change the behaviour of the Tcl core with regard to this situation,
+i.e. the existing behaviour is retained.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 clock
 .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/doc/GetVersion.3 b/doc/GetVersion.3
index 4fa26f4..47034d0 100755..100644
--- a/doc/GetVersion.3
+++ b/doc/GetVersion.3
@@ -15,6 +15,7 @@ Tcl_GetVersion \- get the version of the library at runtime
 .sp
 \fBTcl_GetVersion\fR(\fImajor, minor, patchLevel, type\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_ReleaseType *patchLevel out
 .AP int *major out
 Major version number of the Tcl library.
 .AP int *minor out
diff --git a/doc/Hash.3 b/doc/Hash.3
index 1f6040a..78b8459 100644
--- a/doc/Hash.3
+++ b/doc/Hash.3
@@ -44,21 +44,21 @@ Tcl_HashEntry *
 Tcl_HashEntry *
 \fBTcl_NextHashEntry\fR(\fIsearchPtr\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+char *
 \fBTcl_HashStats\fR(\fItablePtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_HashSearch *searchPtr
+.AS Tcl_HashKeyType *searchPtr out
 .AP Tcl_HashTable *tablePtr in
 Address of hash table structure (for all procedures but
 \fBTcl_InitHashTable\fR, this must have been initialized by
 previous call to \fBTcl_InitHashTable\fR).
 .AP int keyType in
 Kind of keys to use for new hash table.  Must be either
-TCL_STRING_KEYS, TCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS, TCL_CUSTOM_TYPE_KEYS,
-TCL_CUSTOM_PTR_KEYS, or an integer value greater than 1.
+\fBTCL_STRING_KEYS\fR, \fBTCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS\fR, \fBTCL_CUSTOM_TYPE_KEYS\fR,
+\fBTCL_CUSTOM_PTR_KEYS\fR, or an integer value greater than 1.
 .AP Tcl_HashKeyType *typePtr in
 Address of structure which defines the behaviour of the hash table.
-.AP "CONST char" *key in
+.AP "const char" *key in
 Key to use for probe into table.  Exact form depends on
 \fIkeyType\fR used to create table.
 .AP int *newPtr out
@@ -86,7 +86,9 @@ STRUCTURE\fR below). All of the keys in a given table have the same
 form, which is specified when the table is initialized.
 .PP
 The value of a hash table entry can be anything that fits in the same
-space as a ``char *'' pointer.  Values for hash table entries are
+space as a
+.QW "char *"
+pointer.  Values for hash table entries are
 managed entirely by clients, not by the hash module itself.  Typically
 each entry's value is a pointer to a data structure managed by client
 code.
@@ -122,8 +124,10 @@ They are passed to hashing routines using the address of the
 first character of the string.
 .IP \fBTCL_ONE_WORD_KEYS\fR 25
 Keys are single-word values;  they are passed to hashing routines
-and stored in hash table entries as ``char *'' values.
-The pointer value is the key;  it need not (and usually doesn't)
+and stored in hash table entries as
+.QW "char *"
+values.
+The pointer value is the key;  it need not (and usually does not)
 actually point to a string.
 .IP \fBTCL_CUSTOM_TYPE_KEYS\fR 25
 Keys are of arbitrary type, and are stored in the entry. Hashing
@@ -138,7 +142,9 @@ structure is described in the section
 .IP \fIother\fR 25
 If \fIkeyType\fR is not one of the above,
 then it must be an integer value greater than 1.
-In this case the keys will be arrays of ``int'' values, where
+In this case the keys will be arrays of
+.QW int
+values, where
 \fIkeyType\fR gives the number of ints in each key.
 This allows structures to be used as keys.
 All keys must have the same size.
@@ -159,7 +165,7 @@ before deleting the table.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_CreateHashEntry\fR locates the entry corresponding to a
 particular key, creating a new entry in the table if there
-wasn't already one with the given key.
+was not already one with the given key.
 If an entry already existed with the given key then \fI*newPtr\fR
 is set to zero.
 If a new entry was created, then \fI*newPtr\fR is set to a non-zero
@@ -175,28 +181,34 @@ the client is responsible for any cleanup associated with the
 entry's value, such as freeing a structure that it points to.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FindHashEntry\fR is similar to \fBTcl_CreateHashEntry\fR
-except that it doesn't create a new entry if the key doesn't exist;
+except that it does not create a new entry if the key doesn't exist;
 instead, it returns NULL as result.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetHashValue\fR and \fBTcl_SetHashValue\fR are used to
 read and write an entry's value, respectively.
-Values are stored and retrieved as type ``ClientData'', which is
+Values are stored and retrieved as type
+.QW ClientData ,
+which is
 large enough to hold a pointer value.  On almost all machines this is
 large enough to hold an integer value too.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetHashKey\fR returns the key for a given hash table entry,
-either as a pointer to a string, a one-word (``char *'') key, or
+either as a pointer to a string, a one-word
+.PQ "char *"
+key, or
 as a pointer to the first word of an array of integers, depending
 on the \fIkeyType\fR used to create a hash table.
 In all cases \fBTcl_GetHashKey\fR returns a result with type
-``char *''.
+.QW "char *" .
 When the key is a string or array, the result of \fBTcl_GetHashKey\fR
 points to information in the table entry;  this information will
 remain valid until the entry is deleted or its table is deleted.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FirstHashEntry\fR and \fBTcl_NextHashEntry\fR may be used
 to scan all of the entries in a hash table.
-A structure of type ``Tcl_HashSearch'', provided by the client,
+A structure of type
+.QW Tcl_HashSearch ,
+provided by the client,
 is used to keep track of progress through the table.
 \fBTcl_FirstHashEntry\fR initializes the search record and
 returns the first entry in the table (or NULL if the table is
@@ -207,9 +219,10 @@ NULL if the end of the table has been reached.
 A call to \fBTcl_FirstHashEntry\fR followed by calls to
 \fBTcl_NextHashEntry\fR will return each of the entries in
 the table exactly once, in an arbitrary order.
-It is unadvisable to modify the structure of the table, e.g.
-by creating or deleting entries, while the search is in
-progress.
+It is inadvisable to modify the structure of the table, e.g.
+by creating or deleting entries, while the search is in progress,
+with the exception of deleting the entry returned by
+\fBTcl_FirstHashEntry\fR or \fBTcl_NextHashEntry\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_HashStats\fR returns a dynamically-allocated string with
 overall information about a hash table, such as the number of
@@ -228,10 +241,10 @@ to any of the fields of any of the hash-related data structures;
 use the procedures and macros defined here.
 .SH "THE TCL_HASHKEYTYPE STRUCTURE"
 .PP
-Extension writers can define new hash key types by defining four
-procedures, initializing a Tcl_HashKeyType structure to describe
-the type, and calling \fBTcl_InitCustomHashTable\fR.
-The \fBTcl_HashKeyType\fR structure is defined as follows:
+Extension writers can define new hash key types by defining four procedures,
+initializing a \fBTcl_HashKeyType\fR structure to describe the type, and
+calling \fBTcl_InitCustomHashTable\fR. The \fBTcl_HashKeyType\fR structure is
+defined as follows:
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_HashKeyType {
     int \fIversion\fR;
@@ -243,61 +256,71 @@ typedef struct Tcl_HashKeyType {
 } Tcl_HashKeyType;
 .CE
 .PP
-The \fIversion\fR member is the version of the table. If this
-structure is extended in future then the version can be used
-to distinguish between different structures. It should be set
-to \fBTCL_HASH_KEY_TYPE_VERSION\fR.
+The \fIversion\fR member is the version of the table. If this structure is
+extended in future then the version can be used to distinguish between
+different structures. It should be set to \fBTCL_HASH_KEY_TYPE_VERSION\fR.
 .PP
-The \fIflags\fR member is one or more of the following values OR'ed together:
+The \fIflags\fR member is 0 or one or more of the following values OR'ed
+together:
 .IP \fBTCL_HASH_KEY_RANDOMIZE_HASH\fR 25
-There are some things, pointers for example which don't hash well 
-because they do not use the lower bits. If this flag is set then the
-hash table will attempt to rectify this by randomising the bits and 
-then using the upper N bits as the index into the table.
+There are some things, pointers for example which do not hash well because
+they do not use the lower bits. If this flag is set then the hash table will
+attempt to rectify this by randomizing the bits and then using the upper N
+bits as the index into the table.
+.IP \fBTCL_HASH_KEY_SYSTEM_HASH\fR 25
+.VS 8.5
+This flag forces Tcl to use the memory allocation procedures provided by the
+operating system when allocating and freeing memory used to store the hash
+table data structures, and not any of Tcl's own customized memory allocation
+routines. This is important if the hash table is to be used in the
+implementation of a custom set of allocation routines, or something that a
+custom set of allocation routines might depend on, in order to avoid any
+circular dependency.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
-The \fIhashKeyProc\fR member contains the address of a function 
-called to calculate a hash value for the key.
+The \fIhashKeyProc\fR member contains the address of a function called to
+calculate a hash value for the key.
 .CS
 typedef unsigned int (Tcl_HashKeyProc) (
-    Tcl_HashTable *\fItablePtr\fR,
-    VOID *\fIkeyPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_HashTable *\fItablePtr\fR,
+        void *\fIkeyPtr\fR);
 .CE
-If this is NULL then \fIkeyPtr\fR is used and 
+If this is NULL then \fIkeyPtr\fR is used and
 \fBTCL_HASH_KEY_RANDOMIZE_HASH\fR is assumed.
 .PP
-The \fIcompareKeysProc\fR member contains the address of a function 
-called to compare two keys.
+The \fIcompareKeysProc\fR member contains the address of a function called to
+compare two keys.
 .CS
-typedef int (Tcl_CompareHashKeysProc) (VOID *\fIkeyPtr\fR,
-    Tcl_HashEntry *\fIhPtr\fR);
+typedef int (Tcl_CompareHashKeysProc) (
+        void *\fIkeyPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_HashEntry *\fIhPtr\fR);
 .CE
-If this is NULL then the \fIkeyPtr\fR pointers are compared.
-If the keys don't match then the function returns 0, otherwise
-it returns 1.
+If this is NULL then the \fIkeyPtr\fR pointers are compared. If the keys do
+not match then the function returns 0, otherwise it returns 1.
 .PP
-The \fIallocEntryProc\fR member contains the address of a function 
-called to allocate space for an entry and initialise the key.
+The \fIallocEntryProc\fR member contains the address of a function called to
+allocate space for an entry and initialize the key and clientData.
 .CS
 typedef Tcl_HashEntry *(Tcl_AllocHashEntryProc) (
-    Tcl_HashTable *\fItablePtr\fR, VOID *\fIkeyPtr\fR);
+        Tcl_HashTable *\fItablePtr\fR,
+        void *\fIkeyPtr\fR);
 .CE
 If this is NULL then Tcl_Alloc is used to allocate enough space for a
-Tcl_HashEntry and the key pointer is assigned to key.oneWordValue.
-String keys and array keys use this function to allocate enough 
-space for the entry and the key in one block, rather than doing
-it in two blocks. This saves space for a pointer to the key from
-the entry and another memory allocation. Tcl_Obj * keys use this 
-function to allocate enough space for an entry and increment the 
-reference count on the object.
-If 
+Tcl_HashEntry, the key pointer is assigned to key.oneWordValue and the
+clientData is set to NULL. String keys and array keys use this function to
+allocate enough space for the entry and the key in one block, rather than
+doing it in two blocks. This saves space for a pointer to the key from the
+entry and another memory allocation. Tcl_Obj* keys use this function to
+allocate enough space for an entry and increment the reference count on the
+object.
 .PP
-The \fIfreeEntryProc\fR member contains the address of a function 
-called to free space for an entry.
+The \fIfreeEntryProc\fR member contains the address of a function called to
+free space for an entry.
 .CS
 typedef void (Tcl_FreeHashEntryProc) (Tcl_HashEntry *\fIhPtr\fR);
 .CE
-If this is NULL then Tcl_Free is used to free the space for the 
-entry. Tcl_Obj * keys use this function to decrement the
-reference count on the object.
+If this is NULL then Tcl_Free is used to free the space for the entry.
+Tcl_Obj* keys use this function to decrement the reference count on the
+object.
 .SH KEYWORDS
 hash table, key, lookup, search, value
diff --git a/doc/Init.3 b/doc/Init.3
index e78423e..f421479 100644
--- a/doc/Init.3
+++ b/doc/Init.3
@@ -14,17 +14,16 @@ Tcl_Init \- find and source initialization script
 int
 \fBTcl_Init\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter to initialize.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-\fBTcl_Init\fR is a helper procedure that finds and \fBsource\fR's the
+\fBTcl_Init\fR is a helper procedure that finds and \fBsource\fRs the
 \fBinit.tcl\fR script, which should exist somewhere on the Tcl library
-path.  On Macintosh systems, it additionally checks for an \fBInit\fR
-resource and sources the contents of that resource if \fBinit.tcl\fR
-cannot be found.
+path.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Init\fR is typically called from \fBTcl_AppInit\fR procedures.
 
diff --git a/doc/InitStubs.3 b/doc/InitStubs.3
index 2cfbb70..318c564 100644
--- a/doc/InitStubs.3
+++ b/doc/InitStubs.3
@@ -13,13 +13,13 @@ Tcl_InitStubs \- initialize the Tcl stubs mechanism
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR(\fIinterp, version, exact\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp in
+.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter handle.
-.AP "CONST char" *version in
+.AP "const char" *version in
 A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers
 separated by dots.
 .AP int exact in
@@ -59,8 +59,8 @@ steps:
 Call \fBTcl_InitStubs\fR in the extension before calling any other
 Tcl functions.
 .IP 2) 5
-Define the USE_TCL_STUBS symbol.  Typically, you would include the
--DUSE_TCL_STUBS flag when compiling the extension.
+Define the \fBUSE_TCL_STUBS\fR symbol.  Typically, you would include the
+\fB\-DUSE_TCL_STUBS\fR flag when compiling the extension.
 .IP 3) 5
 Link the extension with the Tcl stubs library instead of the standard
 Tcl library.  On Unix platforms, the library name is
diff --git a/doc/IntObj.3 b/doc/IntObj.3
index 15b6bd9..5cf677d 100644
--- a/doc/IntObj.3
+++ b/doc/IntObj.3
@@ -5,10 +5,10 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH Tcl_IntObj 3 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_IntObj 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_NewIntObj, Tcl_NewLongObj, Tcl_NewWideIntObj, Tcl_SetIntObj, Tcl_SetLongObj, Tcl_SetWideIntObj, Tcl_GetIntFromObj, Tcl_GetLongFromObj, Tcl_GetWideIntFromObj \- manipulate Tcl objects as integers and wide integers
+Tcl_NewIntObj, Tcl_NewLongObj, Tcl_NewWideIntObj, Tcl_SetIntObj, Tcl_SetLongObj, Tcl_SetWideIntObj, Tcl_GetIntFromObj, Tcl_GetLongFromObj, Tcl_GetWideIntFromObj, Tcl_NewBignumObj, Tcl_SetBignumObj, Tcl_GetBignumFromObj, Tcl_TakeBignumFromObj \- manipulate Tcl objects as integer values
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -19,18 +19,14 @@ Tcl_Obj *
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_NewLongObj\fR(\fIlongValue\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_NewWideIntObj\fR(\fIwideValue\fR)
-.VE 8.4
 .sp
 \fBTcl_SetIntObj\fR(\fIobjPtr, intValue\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_SetLongObj\fR(\fIobjPtr, longValue\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 \fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR(\fIobjPtr, wideValue\fR)
-.VE 8.4
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, intPtr\fR)
@@ -38,110 +34,127 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, longPtr\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 int
 \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, widePtr\fR)
-.VE 8.4
+.sp
+.sp
+.VS 8.5
+\fB#include <tclTomMath.h>\fR
+.sp
+Tcl_Obj *
+\fBTcl_NewBignumObj\fR(\fIbigValue\fR)
+.sp
+\fBTcl_SetBignumObj\fR(\fIobjPtr, bigValue\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_GetBignumFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, bigValue\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_TakeBignumFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, bigValue\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_InitBignumFromDouble\fR(\fIinterp, doubleValue, bigValue\fR)
+.VE 8.5
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_WideInt *interp
+.AS Tcl_WideInt doubleValue in/out
 .AP int intValue in
-Integer value used to initialize or set an integer object.
+Integer value used to initialize or set a Tcl object.
 .AP long longValue in
-Long integer value used to initialize or set an integer object.
+Long integer value used to initialize or set a Tcl object.
 .AP Tcl_WideInt wideValue in
-.VS 8.4
-Wide integer value (minimum 64-bits wide where supported by the
-compiler) used to initialize or set a wide integer object.
-.VE 8.4
+Wide integer value used to initialize or set a Tcl object.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-For \fBTcl_SetIntObj\fR, \fBTcl_SetLongObj\fR, and
-.VS 8.4
-\fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR, this points to the object to be converted to
-integer type.  For \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR,
-and \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR, this refers to the object from which
-to get an integer or long integer value; if \fIobjPtr\fR does not
-already point to an integer object (or a wide integer object in the
-case of \fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR and \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR,) an
-.VE 8.4
-attempt will be made to convert it to one.
+For \fBTcl_SetIntObj\fR, \fBTcl_SetLongObj\fR, \fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR,
+and \fBTcl_SetBignumObj\fR, this points to the object in which to store an
+integral value.  For \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR,
+\fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_GetBignumFromObj\fR, and
+\fBTcl_TakeBignumFromObj\fR, this refers to the object from which
+to retrieve an integral value.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
-If an error occurs during conversion,
-an error message is left in the interpreter's result object
-unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
+When non-NULL, an error message is left here when integral value
+retrieval fails.
 .AP int *intPtr out
-Points to place to store the integer value
-obtained by \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR from \fIobjPtr\fR.
+Points to place to store the integer value retrieved from \fIobjPtr\fR.
 .AP long *longPtr out
-Points to place to store the long integer value
-obtained by \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR from \fIobjPtr\fR.
+Points to place to store the long integer value retrieved from \fIobjPtr\fR.
 .AP Tcl_WideInt *widePtr out
-.VS 8.4
-Points to place to store the wide integer value
-obtained by \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR from \fIobjPtr\fR.
-.VE 8.4
+Points to place to store the wide integer value retrieved from \fIobjPtr\fR.
+.AP mp_int *bigValue in/out
+.VS 8.5
+Points to a multi-precision integer structure declared by the LibTomMath
+library.
+.VE 8.5
+.AP double doubleValue in
+.VS 8.5
+Double value from which the integer part is determined and
+used to initialize a multi-precision integer value.
+.VE 8.5
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-These procedures are used to create, modify, and read
-integer and wide integer Tcl objects from C code.
-\fBTcl_NewIntObj\fR, \fBTcl_NewLongObj\fR,
-\fBTcl_SetIntObj\fR, and \fBTcl_SetLongObj\fR
-create a new object of integer type
-or modify an existing object to have integer type,
-.VS 8.4
-and \fBTcl_NewWideIntObj\fR and \fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR create a new
-object of wide integer type or modify an existing object to have wide
-integer type. 
-.VE 8.4
-\fBTcl_NewIntObj\fR and \fBTcl_SetIntObj\fR set the object to have the
-integer value given by \fIintValue\fR,
-\fBTcl_NewLongObj\fR and \fBTcl_SetLongObj\fR
-set the object to have the
-long integer value given by \fIlongValue\fR,
-.VS 8.4
-and \fBTcl_NewWideIntObj\fR and \fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR set the object
-to have the wide integer value given by \fIwideValue\fR.
-\fBTcl_NewIntObj\fR, \fBTcl_NewLongObj\fR and \fBTcl_NewWideIntObj\fR
-return a pointer to a newly created object with reference count zero.
-These procedures set the object's type to be integer
-and assign the integer value to the object's internal representation
-\fIlongValue\fR or \fIwideValue\fR member (as appropriate).
-\fBTcl_SetIntObj\fR, \fBTcl_SetLongObj\fR
-and \fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR
-.VE 8.4
-invalidate any old string representation and,
-if the object is not already an integer object,
-free any old internal representation.
+.VS 8.5
+These procedures are used to create, modify, and read Tcl objects
+that hold integral values.  
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR
-attempt to return an integer value from the Tcl object \fIobjPtr\fR,
-.VS 8.4
-and \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR attempts to return a wide integer
-value from the Tcl object \fIobjPtr\fR.
-If the object is not already an integer object,
-or a wide integer object in the case of \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR
-.VE 8.4
-they will attempt to convert it to one.
-If an error occurs during conversion, they return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
-and leave an error message in the interpreter's result object
-unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
-Also, if the long integer held in the object's internal representation
-\fIlongValue\fR member can not be represented in a (non-long) integer,
-\fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
-and leaves an error message in the interpreter's result object
-unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
-Otherwise, all three procedures return \fBTCL_OK\fR and
-store the integer, long integer value
-.VS 8.4
-or wide integer in the address given by \fIintPtr\fR, \fIlongPtr\fR
-and \fIwidePtr\fR
-.VE 8.4
-respectively.  If the object is not already an integer or wide integer
-object, the conversion will free any old internal representation.
-
+The different routines exist to accommodate different integral types in C
+with which values might be exchanged.  The C integral types for which Tcl
+provides value exchange routines are \fBint\fR, \fBlong int\fR,
+\fBTcl_WideInt\fR, and \fBmp_int\fR.  The \fBint\fR and \fBlong int\fR types
+are provided by the C language standard.  The \fBTcl_WideInt\fR type is a
+typedef defined to be whatever signed integral type covers at least the
+64-bit integer range (-9223372036854775808 to 9223372036854775807).  Depending
+on the platform and the C compiler, the actual type might be
+\fBlong int\fR, \fBlong long int\fR, \fBint64\fR, or something else.
+The \fBmp_int\fR type is a multiple-precision integer type defined
+by the LibTomMath multiple-precision integer library.  
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_NewIntObj\fR, \fBTcl_NewLongObj\fR, \fBTcl_NewWideIntObj\fR,
+and \fBTcl_NewBignumObj\fR routines each create and return a new
+Tcl object initialized to the integral value of the argument.  The
+returned Tcl object is unshared.
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_SetIntObj\fR, \fBTcl_SetLongObj\fR, \fBTcl_SetWideIntObj\fR,
+and \fBTcl_SetBignumObj\fR routines each set the value of an existing
+Tcl object pointed to by \fIobjPtr\fR to the integral value provided
+by the other argument.  The \fIobjPtr\fR argument must point to an
+unshared Tcl object.  Any attempt to set the value of a shared Tcl object
+violates Tcl's copy-on-write policy.  Any existing string representation
+or internal representation in the unshared Tcl object will be freed
+as a consequence of setting the new value.
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR,
+\fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_GetBignumFromObj\fR, and
+\fBTcl_TakeBignumFromObj\fR routines attempt to retrieve an integral
+value of the appropriate type from the Tcl object \fIobjPtr\fR.  If the
+attempt succeeds, then \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned, and the value is
+written to the storage provided by the caller.  The attempt might
+fail if \fIobjPtr\fR does not hold an integral value, or if the
+value exceeds the range of the target type.  If the attempt fails,
+then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, and if \fIinterp\fR is non-NULL,
+an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR.  The \fBTcl_ObjType\fR
+of \fIobjPtr\fR may be changed to make subsequent calls to the
+same routine more efficient. Unlike the other functions,
+\fBTcl_TakeBignumFromObj\fR may set the content of the Tcl object
+\fIobjPtr\fR to an empty string in the process of retrieving the
+multiple-precision integer value.
+.PP
+The choice between \fBTcl_GetBignumFromObj\fR and
+\fBTcl_TakeBignumFromObj\fR is governed by how the caller will
+continue to use \fIobjPtr\fR.  If after the \fBmp_int\fR value
+is retrieved from \fIobjPtr\fR, the caller will make no more
+use of \fIobjPtr\fR, then using \fBTcl_TakeBignumFromObj\fR
+permits Tcl to detect when an unshared \fIobjPtr\fR permits the
+value to be moved instead of copied, which should be more efficient.
+If anything later in the caller requires
+\fIobjPtr\fR to continue to hold the same value, then
+\fBTcl_GetBignumFromObj\fR must be chosen.
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_InitBignumFromDouble\fR routine is a utility procedure
+that extracts the integer part of \fIdoubleValue\fR and stores that
+integer value in the \fBmp_int\fR value \fIbigValue\fR.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_GetObjResult
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 integer, integer object, integer type, internal representation, object, object type, string representation
diff --git a/doc/Interp.3 b/doc/Interp.3
index 7d1f515..0b1de03 100644
--- a/doc/Interp.3
+++ b/doc/Interp.3
@@ -15,9 +15,9 @@ Tcl_Interp \- client-visible fields of interpreter structures
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 typedef struct {
-	char *\fIresult\fR;
-	Tcl_FreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
-	int \fIerrorLine\fR;
+        char *\fIresult\fR;
+        Tcl_FreeProc *\fIfreeProc\fR;
+        int \fIerrorLine\fR;
 } Tcl_Interp;
 
 typedef void Tcl_FreeProc(char *\fIblockPtr\fR);
@@ -28,17 +28,23 @@ typedef void Tcl_FreeProc(char *\fIblockPtr\fR);
 The \fBTcl_CreateInterp\fR procedure returns a pointer to a Tcl_Interp
 structure.  This pointer is then passed into other Tcl procedures
 to process commands in the interpreter and perform other operations
-on the interpreter.  Interpreter structures contain many many fields
+on the interpreter.  Interpreter structures contain many fields
 that are used by Tcl, but only three that may be accessed by
 clients:  \fIresult\fR, \fIfreeProc\fR, and \fIerrorLine\fR.
 .PP
+.VS 8.5
+\fBNote that access to all three fields, \fIresult\fB, \fIfreeProc\fB and
+\fIerrorLine\fB is deprecated.\fR  Use \fBTcl_SetResult\fR,
+\fBTcl_GetResult\fR, and \fBTcl_GetReturnOptions\fR instead.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
 The \fIresult\fR and \fIfreeProc\fR fields are used to return
 results or error messages from commands.
 This information is returned by command procedures back to \fBTcl_Eval\fR,
 and by \fBTcl_Eval\fR back to its callers.
 The \fIresult\fR field points to the string that represents the
 result or error message, and the \fIfreeProc\fR field tells how
-to dispose of the storage for the string when it isn't needed anymore.
+to dispose of the storage for the string when it is not needed anymore.
 The easiest way for command procedures to manipulate these
 fields is to call procedures like \fBTcl_SetResult\fR
 or \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR;  they
@@ -55,7 +61,6 @@ should point to an empty string.
 Normally, results are assumed to be statically allocated,
 which means that the contents will not change before the next time
 \fBTcl_Eval\fR is called or some other command procedure is invoked.
-.VS
 In this case, the \fIfreeProc\fR field must be zero.
 Alternatively, a command procedure may dynamically
 allocate its return value (e.g. using \fBTcl_Alloc\fR)
@@ -64,7 +69,6 @@ In this case, the command procedure must also set \fIinterp->freeProc\fR
 to the address of a procedure that can free the value, or \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR
 if the storage was allocated directly by Tcl or by a call to
 \fBTcl_Alloc\fR. 
-.VE
 If \fIinterp->freeProc\fR is non-zero, then Tcl will call \fIfreeProc\fR
 to free the space pointed to by \fIinterp->result\fR before it
 invokes the next command.
@@ -76,10 +80,8 @@ macro should be used for this purpose).
 \fIFreeProc\fR should have arguments and result that match the
 \fBTcl_FreeProc\fR declaration above:  it receives a single
 argument which is a pointer to the result value to free.
-.VS
 In most applications \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR is the only non-zero value ever
 used for \fIfreeProc\fR.
-.VE
 However, an application may store a different procedure address
 in \fIfreeProc\fR in order to use an alternate memory allocator
 or in order to do other cleanup when the result memory is freed.
diff --git a/doc/Limit.3 b/doc/Limit.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..928ebe1
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/Limit.3
@@ -0,0 +1,194 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH Tcl_LimitCheck 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+Tcl_LimitAddHandler, Tcl_LimitCheck, Tcl_LimitExceeded, Tcl_LimitGetCommands, Tcl_LimitGetGranularity, Tcl_LimitGetTime, Tcl_LimitReady, Tcl_LimitRemoveHandler, Tcl_LimitSetCommands, Tcl_LimitSetGranularity, Tcl_LimitSetTime, Tcl_LimitTypeEnabled, Tcl_LimitTypeExceeded, Tcl_LimitTypeReset, Tcl_LimitTypeSet \- manage and check resource limits on interpreters
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_LimitCheck\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_LimitReady\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_LimitExceeded\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_LimitTypeExceeded\fR(\fIinterp, type\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_LimitTypeEnabled\fR(\fIinterp, type\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitTypeSet\fR(\fIinterp, type\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitTypeReset\fR(\fIinterp, type\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_LimitGetCommands\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitSetCommands\fR(\fIinterp, commandLimit\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitGetTime\fR(\fIinterp, timeLimitPtr\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitSetTime\fR(\fIinterp, timeLimitPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_LimitGetGranularity\fR(\fIinterp, type\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitSetGranularity\fR(\fIinterp, type, granularity\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitAddHandler\fR(\fIinterp, type, handlerProc, clientData, deleteProc\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_LimitRemoveHandler\fR(\fIinterp, type, handlerProc, clientData\fR)
+.SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_LimitHandlerDeleteProc commandLimit in/out
+.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
+Interpreter that the limit being managed applies to or that will have
+its limits checked.
+.AP int type in
+The type of limit that the operation refers to.  This must be either
+\fBTCL_LIMIT_COMMANDS\fR or \fBTCL_LIMIT_TIME\fR.
+.AP int commandLimit in
+The maximum number of commands (as reported by \fBinfo cmdcount\fR)
+that may be executed in the interpreter.
+.AP Tcl_Time *timeLimitPtr in/out
+A pointer to a structure that will either have the new time limit read
+from (\fBTcl_LimitSetTime\fR) or the current time limit written to
+(\fBTcl_LimitGetTime\fR).
+.AP int granularity in
+Divisor that indicates how often a particular limit should really be
+checked.  Must be at least 1.
+.AP Tcl_LimitHandlerProc *handlerProc in
+Function to call when a particular limit is exceeded.  If the
+\fIhandlerProc\fR removes or raises the limit during its processing,
+the limited interpreter will be permitted to continue to process after
+the handler returns.  Many handlers may be attached to the same
+interpreter limit; their order of execution is not defined, and they
+must be identified by \fIhandlerProc\fR and \fIclientData\fR when they
+are deleted.
+.AP ClientData clientData in
+Arbitrary pointer-sized word used to pass some context to the
+\fIhandlerProc\fR function.
+.AP Tcl_LimitHandlerDeleteProc *deleteProc in
+Function to call whenever a handler is deleted.  May be NULL if the
+\fIclientData\fR requires no deletion.
+.BE
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+Tcl's interpreter resource limit subsystem allows for close control
+over how much computation time a script may use, and is useful for
+cases where a program is divided into multiple pieces where some parts
+are more trusted than others (e.g. web application servers).
+.PP
+Every interpreter may have a limit on the wall-time for execution, and
+a limit on the number of commands that the interpreter may execute.
+Since checking of these limits is potentially expensive (especially
+the time limit), each limit also has a checking granularity, which is
+a divisor for an internal count of the number of points in the core
+where a check may be performed (which is immediately before executing
+a command and at an unspecified frequency between running commands,
+which can happen in empty-bodied \fBwhile\fR loops).
+.PP
+The final component of the limit engine is a callback scheme which
+allows for notifications of when a limit has been exceeded.  These
+callbacks can just provide logging, or may allocate more resources to
+the interpreter to permit it to continue processing longer.
+.PP
+When a limit is exceeded (and the callbacks have run; the order of
+execution of the callbacks is unspecified) execution in the limited
+interpreter is stopped by raising an error and setting a flag that
+prevents the \fBcatch\fR command in that interpreter from trapping
+that error.  It is up to the context that started execution in that
+interpreter (typically a master interpreter) to handle the error.
+.SH "LIMIT CHECKING API"
+.PP
+To check the resource limits for an interpreter, call
+\fBTcl_LimitCheck\fR, which returns \fBTCL_OK\fR if the limit was not
+exceeded (after processing callbacks) and \fBTCL_ERROR\fR if the limit was
+exceeded (in which case an error message is also placed in the
+interpreter result).  That function should only be called when
+\fBTcl_LimitReady\fR returns non-zero so that granularity policy is
+enforced.  This API is designed to be similar in usage to
+\fBTcl_AsyncReady\fR and \fBTcl_AsyncInvoke\fR.
+.PP
+When writing code that may behave like \fBcatch\fR in respect of
+errors, you should only trap an error if \fBTcl_LimitExceeded\fR
+returns zero.  If it returns non-zero, the interpreter is in a
+limit-exceeded state and errors should be allowed to propagate to the
+calling context.  You can also check whether a particular type of
+limit has been exceeded using \fBTcl_LimitTypeExceeded\fR.
+.SH "LIMIT CONFIGURATION"
+.PP
+To check whether a limit has been set (but not whether it has actually
+been exceeded) on an interpreter, call \fBTcl_LimitTypeEnabled\fR with
+the type of limit you want to check.  To enable a particular limit
+call \fBTcl_LimitTypeSet\fR, and to disable a limit call
+\fBTcl_LimitTypeReset\fR.
+.PP
+The level of a command limit may be set using
+\fBTcl_LimitSetCommands\fR, and retrieved using
+\fBTcl_LimitGetCommands\fR.  Similarly for a time limit with
+\fBTcl_LimitSetTime\fR and \fBTcl_LimitGetTime\fR respectively, but
+with that API the time limit is copied from and to the Tcl_Time
+structure that the \fItimeLimitPtr\fR argument points to.
+.PP
+The checking granularity for a particular limit may be set using
+\fBTcl_LimitSetGranularity\fR and retrieved using
+\fBTcl_LimitGetGranularity\fR.  Note that granularities must always be
+positive.
+.SS "LIMIT CALLBACKS"
+.PP
+To add a handler callback to be invoked when a limit is exceeded, call
+\fBTcl_LimitAddHandler\fR.  The \fIhandlerProc\fR argument describes
+the function that will actually be called; it should have the
+following prototype:
+.PP
+.CS
+typedef void Tcl_LimitHandlerProc(
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR);
+.CE
+.PP
+The \fIclientData\fR argument to the handler will be whatever is
+passed to the \fIclientData\fR argument to \fBTcl_LimitAddHandler\fR,
+and the \fIinterp\fR is the interpreter that had its limit exceeded.
+.PP
+The \fIdeleteProc\fR argument to \fBTcl_LimitAddHandler\fR is a
+function to call to delete the \fIclientData\fR value.  It may be
+\fBTCL_STATIC\fR or NULL if no deletion action is necessary, or
+\fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR if all that is necessary is to free the structure with
+\fBTcl_Free\fR.  Otherwise, it should refer to a function with the
+following prototype:
+.PP
+.CS
+typedef void Tcl_LimitHandlerDeleteProc(
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+.CE
+.PP
+A limit handler may be deleted using \fBTcl_LimitRemoveHandler\fR; the
+handler removed will be the first one found (out of the handlers added
+with \fBTcl_LimitAddHandler\fR) with exactly matching \fItype\fR,
+\fIhandlerProc\fR and \fIclientData\fR arguments.  This function
+always invokes the \fIdeleteProc\fR on the \fIclientData\fR (unless
+the \fIdeleteProc\fR was NULL or \fBTCL_STATIC\fR).
+
+.SH KEYWORDS
+interpreter, resource, limit, commands, time, callback
diff --git a/doc/LinkVar.3 b/doc/LinkVar.3
index a1dfcca..6361fb4 100644
--- a/doc/LinkVar.3
+++ b/doc/LinkVar.3
@@ -25,17 +25,24 @@ int
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter that contains \fIvarName\fR.
 Also used by \fBTcl_LinkVar\fR to return error messages.
-.AP "CONST char" *varName in
-Name of global variable.  
+.AP "const char" *varName in
+Name of global variable.
 .AP char *addr in
 Address of C variable that is to be linked to \fIvarName\fR.
 .AP int type in
-Type of C variable.  Must be one of TCL_LINK_INT, TCL_LINK_DOUBLE,
-.VS 8.4
-TCL_LINK_WIDE_INT,
-.VE 8.4
-TCL_LINK_BOOLEAN, or TCL_LINK_STRING, optionally OR'ed with
-TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY to make Tcl variable read-only.
+Type of C variable.  Must be one of \fBTCL_LINK_INT\fR,
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTCL_LINK_UINT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_CHAR\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_UCHAR\fR,
+\fBTCL_LINK_SHORT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_USHORT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_LONG\fR,
+\fBTCL_LINK_ULONG\fR,
+.VE 8.5
+\fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_INT\fR,
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_UINT\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_FLOAT\fR,
+.VE 8.5
+\fBTCL_LINK_DOUBLE\fR, \fBTCL_LINK_BOOLEAN\fR, or
+\fBTCL_LINK_STRING\fR, optionally OR'ed with \fBTCL_LINK_READ_ONLY\fR
+to make Tcl variable read-only.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -46,14 +53,14 @@ given by \fIaddr\fR.
 Whenever the Tcl variable is read the value of the C variable will
 be returned, and whenever the Tcl variable is written the C
 variable will be updated to have the same value.
-\fBTcl_LinkVar\fR normally returns TCL_OK;  if an error occurs
+\fBTcl_LinkVar\fR normally returns \fBTCL_OK\fR;  if an error occurs
 while setting up the link (e.g. because \fIvarName\fR is the
-name of array) then TCL_ERROR is returned and the interpreter's result
+name of array) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and the interpreter's result
 contains an error message.
 .PP
 The \fItype\fR argument specifies the type of the C variable,
 and must have one of the following values, optionally OR'ed with
-TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY:
+\fBTCL_LINK_READ_ONLY\fR:
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_INT\fR
 The C variable is of type \fBint\fR.
@@ -61,6 +68,61 @@ Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR;  attempts to write
 non-integer values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with
 Tcl errors.
+.VS 8.5
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_UINT\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBunsigned int\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
+integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR and in the
+platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned int\fR type; attempts to
+write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
+\fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_CHAR\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBchar\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
+form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and be in the range of the
+\fBchar\fR datatype; attempts to write non-integer or out-of-range
+values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_UCHAR\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBunsigned char\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
+integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and in the
+platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned char\fR type; attempts to
+write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
+\fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_SHORT\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBshort\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
+form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and be in the range of the
+\fBshort\fR datatype; attempts to write non-integer or out-of-range
+values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_USHORT\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBunsigned short\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
+integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetIntFromObj\fR and in the
+platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned short\fR type; attempts to
+write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
+\fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_LONG\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBlong\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
+form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetLongFromObj\fR; attempts to write
+non-integer or out-of-range
+values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_ULONG\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBunsigned long\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
+integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR and in the
+platform's defined range for the \fBunsigned long\fR type; attempts to
+write non-integer values (or values outside the range) into
+\fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_DOUBLE\fR
 The C variable is of type \fBdouble\fR.
@@ -68,21 +130,44 @@ Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper real
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR;  attempts to write
 non-real values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with
 Tcl errors.
+.VS 8.5
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_FLOAT\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBfloat\fR.
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper real
+form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetDoubleFromObj\fR and must be within the
+range acceptable for a \fBfloat\fR; attempts to
+write non-real values (or values outside the range) into
+\fIvarName\fR will be rejected with Tcl errors.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_INT\fR
-.VS 8.4
 The C variable is of type \fBTcl_WideInt\fR (which is an integer type
 at least 64-bits wide on all platforms that can support it.)
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper integer
 form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR;  attempts to write
 non-integer values into \fIvarName\fR will be rejected with
 Tcl errors.
-.VE 8.4
+.VS 8.5
+.TP
+\fBTCL_LINK_WIDE_UINT\fR
+The C variable is of type \fBTcl_WideUInt\fR (which is an unsigned
+integer type at least 64-bits wide on all platforms that can support
+it.)
+Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper unsigned
+integer form acceptable to \fBTcl_GetWideIntFromObj\fR (it will be
+cast to unsigned);
+.\" FIXME! Use bignums instead.
+attempts to write non-integer values into \fIvarName\fR will be
+rejected with Tcl errors.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_BOOLEAN\fR
 The C variable is of type \fBint\fR.
-If its value is zero then it will read from Tcl as ``0'';
-otherwise it will read from Tcl as ``1''.
+If its value is zero then it will read from Tcl as
+.QW 0 ;
+otherwise it will read from Tcl as
+.QW 1 .
 Whenever \fIvarName\fR is
 modified, the C variable will be set to a 0 or 1 value.
 Any value written into the Tcl variable must have a proper boolean
@@ -92,17 +177,16 @@ Tcl errors.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_LINK_STRING\fR
 The C variable is of type \fBchar *\fR.
-.VS
 If its value is not NULL then it must be a pointer to a string
 allocated with \fBTcl_Alloc\fR or \fBckalloc\fR.
-.VE
 Whenever the Tcl variable is modified the current C string will be
 freed and new memory will be allocated to hold a copy of the variable's
 new value.
 If the C variable contains a NULL pointer then the Tcl variable
-will read as ``NULL''.
+will read as
+.QW NULL .
 .PP
-If the TCL_LINK_READ_ONLY flag is present in \fItype\fR then the
+If the \fBTCL_LINK_READ_ONLY\fR flag is present in \fItype\fR then the
 variable will be read-only from Tcl, so that its value can only be
 changed by modifying the C variable.
 Attempts to write the variable from Tcl will be rejected with errors.
diff --git a/doc/ListObj.3 b/doc/ListObj.3
index 2adea4e..443eafe 100644
--- a/doc/ListObj.3
+++ b/doc/ListObj.3
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_ListObjReplace\fR(\fIinterp, listPtr, first, count, objc, objv\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp "*CONST objv[]" out
+.AS "Tcl_Obj *const" *elemListPtr in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 If an error occurs while converting an object to be a list object,
 an error message is left in the interpreter's result object
@@ -71,13 +71,11 @@ will insert into a new list object,
 and \fBTcl_ListObjReplace\fR will insert into \fIlistPtr\fR.
 For \fBTcl_SetListObj\fR,
 the number of Tcl objects to insert into \fIobjPtr\fR.
-.VS
-.AP Tcl_Obj	"*CONST\ objv[]" in
+.AP "Tcl_Obj *const" objv[] in
 An array of pointers to objects.
 \fBTcl_NewListObj\fR will insert these objects into a new list object
 and \fBTcl_ListObjReplace\fR will insert them into an existing \fIlistPtr\fR.
 Each object will become a separate list element.  
-.VE
 .AP int *intPtr out
 Points to location where \fBTcl_ListObjLength\fR
 stores the length of the list.
@@ -151,8 +149,9 @@ has reference count zero.
 the elements in a list object.  It returns the count by storing it in the
 address \fIobjcPtr\fR.  Similarly, it returns the array pointer by storing
 it in the address \fIobjvPtr\fR.
-The memory pointed to is managed by Tcl and should not be freed by the
-caller.
+The memory pointed to is managed by Tcl and should not be freed or written
+to by the caller. If the list is empty, 0 is stored at \fIobjcPtr\fR
+and NULL at \fIobjvPtr\fR.
 If \fIlistPtr\fR is not already a list object, \fBTcl_ListObjGetElements\fR
 will attempt to convert it to one; if the conversion fails, it returns
 \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error message in the interpreter's result
@@ -219,27 +218,33 @@ it can be used to implement a number of list operations.
 For example, the following code inserts the \fIobjc\fR objects
 referenced by the array of object pointers \fIobjv\fR
 just before the element \fIindex\fR of the list referenced by \fIlistPtr\fR:
+.PP
 .CS
-result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, index, 0, objc, objv);
+result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, index, 0,
+        objc, objv);
 .CE
+.PP
 Similarly, the following code appends the \fIobjc\fR objects
 referenced by the array \fIobjv\fR
 to the end of the list \fIlistPtr\fR:
+.PP
 .CS
 result = Tcl_ListObjLength(interp, listPtr, &length);
 if (result == TCL_OK) {
-	result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, length, 0, objc, objv);
+    result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, length, 0,
+            objc, objv);
 }
 .CE
+.PP
 The \fIcount\fR list elements starting at \fIfirst\fR can be deleted
 by simply calling \fBTcl_ListObjReplace\fR
 with a NULL \fIobjvPtr\fR:
+.PP
 .CS
-result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, first, count, 0, NULL);
+result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, first, count,
+        0, NULL);
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_GetObjResult
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 append, index, insert, internal representation, length, list, list object, list type, object, object type, replace, string representation
diff --git a/doc/Macintosh.3 b/doc/Macintosh.3
deleted file mode 100644
index cd97578..0000000
--- a/doc/Macintosh.3
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,109 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997-1998 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.so man.macros
-.TH Tcl_MacSetEventProc 3 "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
-.BS
-.SH NAME
-Tcl_MacSetEventProc, Tcl_MacConvertTextResource, Tcl_MacEvalResource, Tcl_MacFindResource, Tcl_GetOSTypeFromObj, Tcl_SetOSTypeObj, Tcl_NewOSTypeObj \- procedures to handle Macintosh resources and other Macintosh specifics
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-.nf
-\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
-.sp
-int
-\fBTcl_MacEvalResource\fR(\fIinterp, resourceName, resourceNumber, fileName\fR)
-.sp
-char*
-\fBTcl_MacConvertTextResource\fR(\fIresource\fR)
-.sp
-Handle
-\fBTcl_MacFindResource\fR(\fIinterp, resourceType, resourceName, resourceNumber, resFileRef, releaseIt\fR)
-.sp
-Tcl_Obj*
-\fBTcl_NewOSTypeObj\fR(\fInewOSType\fR)
-.sp
-void
-\fBTcl_SetOSTypeObj\fR(\fIobjPtr, newOSType\fR)
-.sp
-int
-\fBTcl_GetOSTypeFromObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, osTypePtr\fR)
-.sp
-void
-\fBTcl_MacSetEventProc\fR(\fIprocPtr\fR)
-.SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-Interpreter to use for error reporting, or NULL if no error reporting is
-desired.
-.AP "CONST char" *resourceName in
-Name of TEXT resource to source, NULL if number should be used.
-.AP int resourceNumber in
-Resource id of source.
-.AP "CONST char" *fileName in
-Name of file to process. NULL if application resource.
-.AP Handle resource in
-Handle to TEXT resource.
-.AP long resourceType in
-Type of resource to load.
-.AP "CONST char" *resFileRef in
-Registered resource file reference, NULL if searching all open resource files.
-.AP int *releaseIt out
-Should we release this resource when done.
-.AP int newOSType in
-Int used to initialize the new object or set the object's value.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
-Object whose internal representation is to be set or retrieved.
-.AP osTypePtr out
-Place to store the resulting integer.
-.AP Tcl_MacConvertEventPtr procPtr in
-Reference to the new function to handle all incoming Mac events.
-
-.BE
-.SH INTRODUCTION
-.PP
-The described routines are used to implement the Macintosh specific
-\fBresource\fR command and the Mac specific notifier.. They manipulate
-or use Macintosh resources and provide administration for open
-resource file references.
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-\fBTcl_MacEvalResource\fR extends the \fBsource\fR command to
-Macintosh resources.  It sources Tcl code from a Text resource.
-Currently only sources the resource by name, file IDs may be supported
-at a later date.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_MacConvertTextResource\fR converts a TEXT resource into a Tcl
-suitable string. It mallocs the returned memory, converts ``\\r'' to
-``\\n'', and appends a null. The caller has the responsibility for
-freeing the memory.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_MacFindResource\fR provides a higher level interface for
-loading resources. It is used by \fBresource read\fR.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_NewOSTypeObj\fR is used to create a new resource name type
-object. The object type is "ostype".
-.PP
-\fBTcl_SetOSTypeObj\fR modifies an object to be a resource type and to
-have the specified long value.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_GetOSTypeFromObj\fR attempts to return an int from the Tcl
-object "objPtr". If the object is not already an int, an attempt will
-be made to convert it to one.
-.PP
-\fBTcl_MacSetEventProc\fR sets the event handling procedure for the
-application. This function will be passed all incoming Mac events.
-This function usually controls the console or some other entity like
-Tk.
-
-.SH RESOURCE TYPES
-.PP
-Resource types are 4-byte values used by the macintosh resource
-facility to tag parts of the resource fork in a file so that the OS
-knows how to handle them. As all 4 bytes are restricted to printable
-characters such a type can be interpreted as a 4 character string too.
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-macintosh, mac, resource, notifier
diff --git a/doc/Namespace.3 b/doc/Namespace.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5477329
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/Namespace.3
@@ -0,0 +1,165 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2003 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+'\" Note that some of these functions do not seem to belong, but they
+'\" were all introduced with the same TIP (#139)
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH Tcl_Namespace 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.BS
+.SH NAME
+Tcl_AppendExportList, Tcl_CreateNamespace, Tcl_DeleteNamespace, Tcl_Export, Tcl_FindCommand, Tcl_FindNamespace, Tcl_ForgetImport, Tcl_GetCurrentNamespace, Tcl_GetGlobalNamespace, Tcl_GetNamespaceUnknownHandler, Tcl_Import, Tcl_SetNamespaceUnknownHandler \- manipulate namespaces
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.sp
+Tcl_Namespace *
+\fBTcl_CreateNamespace\fR(\fIinterp, name, clientData, deleteProc\fR)
+.sp
+\fBTcl_DeleteNamespace\fR(\fInsPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_AppendExportList\fR(\fIinterp, nsPtr, objPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_Export\fR(\fIinterp, nsPtr, pattern, resetListFirst\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_Import\fR(\fIinterp, nsPtr, pattern, allowOverwrite\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_ForgetImport\fR(\fIinterp, nsPtr, pattern\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Namespace *
+\fBTcl_GetCurrentNamespace\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Namespace *
+\fBTcl_GetGlobalNamespace\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Namespace *
+\fBTcl_FindNamespace\fR(\fIinterp, name, contextNsPtr, flags\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Command
+\fBTcl_FindCommand\fR(\fIinterp, name, contextNsPtr, flags\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Obj *
+\fBTcl_GetNamespaceUnknownHandler(\fIinterp, nsPtr\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_SetNamespaceUnknownHandler(\fIinterp, nsPtr, handlerPtr\fR)
+.SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_NamespaceDeleteProc allowOverwrite in/out
+.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in/out
+The interpreter in which the namespace exists and where name lookups
+are performed. Also where error result messages are written.
+.AP "const char" *name in
+The name of the namespace or command to be created or accessed.
+.AP ClientData clientData in
+A context pointer by the creator of the namespace.  Not interpreted by
+Tcl at all.
+.AP Tcl_NamespaceDeleteProc *deleteProc in
+A pointer to function to call when the namespace is deleted, or NULL
+if no such callback is to be performed.
+.AP Tcl_Namespace *nsPtr in
+The namespace to be manipulated, or NULL (for other than
+\fBTcl_DeleteNamespace\fR) to manipulate the current namespace.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr out
+A reference to an unshared object to which the function output will be
+written.
+.AP "const char" *pattern in
+The glob-style pattern (see \fBTcl_StringMatch\fR) that describes the
+commands to be imported or exported.
+.AP int resetListFirst in
+Whether the list of export patterns should be reset before adding the
+current pattern to it.
+.AP int allowOverwrite in
+Whether new commands created by this import action can overwrite
+existing commands.
+.AP Tcl_Namespace *contextNsPtr in
+The location in the namespace hierarchy where the search for a
+namespace or command should be conducted relative to when the search
+term is not rooted at the global namespace.  NULL indicates the
+current namespace.
+.AP int flags in
+OR-ed combination of bits controlling how the search is to be
+performed.  The following flags are supported: \fBTCL_GLOBAL_ONLY\fR
+(indicates that the search is always to be conducted relative to the
+global namespace), \fBTCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY\fR (just for \fBTcl_FindCommand\fR;
+indicates that the search is always to be conducted relative to the
+context namespace), and \fBTCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG\fR (indicates that an error
+message should be left in the interpreter if the search fails.)
+.AP Tcl_Obj *handlerPtr in
+A script fragment to be installed as the unknown command handler for the
+namespace, or NULL to reset the handler to its default.
+.BE
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+Namespaces are hierarchic naming contexts that can contain commands
+and variables.  They also maintain a list of patterns that describes
+what commands are exported, and can import commands that have been
+exported by other namespaces.  Namespaces can also be manipulated
+through the Tcl command \fBnamespace\fR.
+.PP
+The \fITcl_Namespace\fR structure encapsulates a namespace, and is
+guaranteed to have the following fields in it: \fIname\fR (the local
+name of the namespace, with no namespace separator characters in it,
+with empty denoting the global namespace), \fIfullName\fR (the fully
+specified name of the namespace), \fIclientData\fR, \fIdeleteProc\fR
+(the values specified in the call to \fBTcl_CreateNamespace\fR), and
+\fIparentPtr\fR (a pointer to the containing namespace, or NULL for
+the global namespace.)
+.PP
+\fBTcl_CreateNamespace\fR creates a new namespace.  The
+\fIdeleteProc\fR will have the following type signature:
+.CS
+typedef void (Tcl_NamespaceDeleteProc) (ClientData clientData);
+.CE
+.PP
+\fBTcl_DeleteNamespace\fR deletes a namespace.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_AppendExportList\fR retrieves the export patterns for a
+namespace given namespace and appends them (as list items) to
+\fIobjPtr\fR.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_Export\fR sets and appends to the export patterns for a
+namespace.  Patterns are appended unless the \fIresetListFirst\fR flag
+is true.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_Import\fR imports commands matching a pattern into a
+namespace.  Note that the pattern must include the name of the
+namespace to import from.  This function returns an error if
+an attempt to import a command over an existing command is made,
+unless the \fIallowOverwrite\fR flag has been set.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_ForgetImport\fR removes imports matching a pattern.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetCurrentNamespace\fR returns the current namespace for an
+interpreter.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetGlobalNamespace\fR returns the global namespace for an
+interpreter.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_FindNamespace\fR searches for a namespace named \fIname\fR
+within the context of the namespace \fIcontextNsPtr\fR.  If the
+namespace cannot be found, NULL is returned.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_FindCommand\fR searches for a command named \fIname\fR within
+the context of the namespace \fIcontextNsPtr\fR.  If the command
+cannot be found, NULL is returned.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetNamespaceUnknownHandler\fR returns the unknown command handler
+for the namespace, or NULL if none is set.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetNamespaceUnknownHandler\fR sets the unknown command handler for
+the namespace. If \fIhandlerPtr\fR is NULL, then the handler is reset to
+its default.
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+Tcl_CreateCommand, Tcl_ListObjAppendElements, Tcl_SetVar
+
+.SH KEYWORDS
+namespace, command
diff --git a/doc/Notifier.3 b/doc/Notifier.3
index bb2fef4..7858a8c 100644
--- a/doc/Notifier.3
+++ b/doc/Notifier.3
@@ -25,7 +25,6 @@ void
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR(\fIevPtr, position\fR)
-.VS 8.1
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_ThreadQueueEvent\fR(\fIthreadId, evPtr, position\fR)
@@ -63,12 +62,16 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_GetServiceMode\fR()
 .sp
-int		
+int
 \fBTcl_SetServiceMode\fR(\fImode\fR)
-.VE
-
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_ServiceModeHook\fR(\fImode\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_SetNotifier\fR(\fInotifierProcPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_EventDeleteProc milliseconds
+.AS Tcl_EventDeleteProc *notifierProcPtr
 .AP Tcl_EventSetupProc *setupProc in
 Procedure to invoke to prepare for event wait in \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR.
 .AP Tcl_EventCheckProc *checkProc in
@@ -97,11 +100,13 @@ Procedure to invoke for each queued event in \fBTcl_DeleteEvents\fR.
 .AP int flags in
 What types of events to service.  These flags are the same as those
 passed to \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR.
-.VS 8.1
 .AP int mode in
 Indicates whether events should be serviced by \fBTcl_ServiceAll\fR.
 Must be one of \fBTCL_SERVICE_NONE\fR or \fBTCL_SERVICE_ALL\fR.
-.VE
+.AP Tcl_NotifierProcs* notifierProcPtr in
+Structure of function pointers describing notifier procedures that are
+to replace the ones installed in the executable.  See
+\fBREPLACING THE NOTIFIER\fR for details.
 .BE
 
 .SH INTRODUCTION
@@ -135,9 +140,7 @@ sources place events onto the queue so that they may be processed in
 order at appropriate times during the event loop. The event queue
 guarantees a fair discipline of event handling, so that no event
 source can starve the others.  It also allows events to be saved for
-servicing at a future time.
-.VS 8.1
-Threaded applications work in a
+servicing at a future time.  Threaded applications work in a
 similar manner, except that there is a separate event queue for
 each thread containing a Tcl interpreter.
 \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR is used (primarily
@@ -169,7 +172,6 @@ The procedures \fBTcl_ServiceAll\fR, \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR,
 to help connect Tcl's event loop to an external event loop such as
 Motif's.
 .SH "NOTIFIER BASICS"
-.VE
 .PP
 The easiest way to understand how the notifier works is to consider
 what happens when \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR is called.
@@ -180,17 +182,13 @@ things:
 .IP [1]
 Check the event queue to see if it contains any events that can
 be serviced.  If so, service the first possible event, remove it
-.VS 8.1
 from the queue, and return.  It does this by calling
 \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR and passing in the \fIflags\fR argument.
-.VE
 .IP [2]
 Prepare to block for an event.  To do this, \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR
 invokes a \fIsetup procedure\fR in each event source.
 The event source will perform event-source specific initialization and
-.VS 8.1
 possibly call \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR to limit how long
-.VE
 \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR will block if no new events occur.
 .IP [3]
 Call \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR.  This procedure is implemented differently
@@ -233,8 +231,8 @@ the event source.
 \fISetupProc\fR should match the following prototype:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_EventSetupProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	int \fIflags\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        int \fIflags\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR argument will be the same as the \fIclientData\fR
 argument to \fBTcl_CreateEventSource\fR;  it is typically used to
@@ -243,7 +241,7 @@ The \fIflags\fR argument will be the same as the \fIflags\fR
 argument passed to \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR except that it will never
 be 0 (\fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR replaces 0 with \fBTCL_ALL_EVENTS\fR).
 \fIFlags\fR indicates what kinds of events should be considered;
-if the bit corresponding to this event source isn't set, the event
+if the bit corresponding to this event source is not set, the event
 source should return immediately without doing anything.  For
 example, the file event source checks for the \fBTCL_FILE_EVENTS\fR
 bit.
@@ -256,7 +254,6 @@ request notification with a Windows event.  For timer-driven event
 sources such as timer events or any polled event, the event source
 can call \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR to force the application to wake
 up after a specified time even if no events have occurred.
-.VS 8.1
 If no event source calls \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR
 then \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR will wait as long as necessary for an
 event to occur; otherwise, it will only wait as long as the shortest
@@ -268,28 +265,24 @@ events already queued.  If there are, it calls
 \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR with a 0 block time so that
 \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR does not block if there is no new data on the X
 connection.
-.VE
 The \fItimePtr\fR argument to \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR points to
 a structure that describes a time interval in seconds and
 microseconds:
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_Time {
-	long \fIsec\fR;
-	long \fIusec\fR;
+        long \fIsec\fR;
+        long \fIusec\fR;
 } Tcl_Time;
 .CE
 The \fIusec\fR field should be less than 1000000.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 Information provided to \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR
 is only used for the next call to \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR; it is
 discarded after \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR returns.
-.VE
 The next time an event wait is done each of the event sources'
 setup procedures will be called again, and they can specify new
 information for that event wait.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 If the application uses an external event loop rather than
 \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR, the event sources may need to call
 \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR at other times.  For example, if a new event
@@ -305,7 +298,6 @@ platform-specific procedures may also be available for
 \fIsetupProc\fR, if there is additional information needed by
 \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR on that platform.  For example, on Unix systems
 the \fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR interface can be used to wait for file events.
-.VE
 .PP
 The second procedure provided by each event source is its check
 procedure, indicated by the \fIcheckProc\fR argument to
@@ -313,8 +305,8 @@ procedure, indicated by the \fIcheckProc\fR argument to
 following prototype:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_EventCheckProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	int \fIflags\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        int \fIflags\fR);
 .CE
 The arguments to this procedure are the same as those for \fIsetupProc\fR.
 \fBCheckProc\fR is invoked by \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR after it has waited
@@ -363,24 +355,20 @@ events at the front of the queue, such as a series of
 Enter and Leave events synthesized during a grab or ungrab operation
 in Tk.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 When it is time to handle an event from the queue (steps 1 and 4
 above) \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR will invoke the \fIproc\fR specified
-.VE
 in the first queued \fBTcl_Event\fR structure.
 \fIProc\fR must match the following prototype:
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_EventProc(
-	Tcl_Event *\fIevPtr\fR,
-	int \fIflags\fR);
+        Tcl_Event *\fIevPtr\fR,
+        int \fIflags\fR);
 .CE
 The first argument to \fIproc\fR is a pointer to the event, which will
 be the same as the first argument to the \fBTcl_QueueEvent\fR call that
 added the event to the queue.
 The second argument to \fIproc\fR is the \fIflags\fR argument for the
-.VS 8.1
 current call to \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR;  this is used by the event source
-.VE
 to return immediately if its events are not relevant.
 .PP
 It is up to \fIproc\fR to handle the event, typically by invoking
@@ -389,20 +377,17 @@ Once the event source has finished handling the event it returns 1
 to indicate that the event can be removed from the queue.
 If for some reason the event source decides that the event cannot
 be handled at this time, it may return 0 to indicate that the event
-.VS 8.1
 should be deferred for processing later;  in this case \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR
-.VE
 will go on to the next event in the queue and attempt to service it.
 There are several reasons why an event source might defer an event.
 One possibility is that events of this type are excluded by the
 \fIflags\fR argument.
 For example, the file event source will always return 0 if the
-\fBTCL_FILE_EVENTS\fR bit isn't set in \fIflags\fR.
+\fBTCL_FILE_EVENTS\fR bit is not set in \fIflags\fR.
 Another example of deferring events happens in Tk if
 \fBTk_RestrictEvents\fR has been invoked to defer certain kinds
 of window events.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 When \fIproc\fR returns 1, \fBTcl_ServiceEvent\fR will remove the
 event from the event queue and free its storage.
 Note that the storage for an event must be allocated by
@@ -422,8 +407,9 @@ Tcl_ThreadID for the current thread, use the \fBTcl_GetCurrentThread\fR
 procedure.  (A thread would then need to pass this identifier to other
 threads for those threads to be able to add events to its queue.)
 After adding an event to another thread's queue, you then typically
-need to call \fBTcl_ThreadAlert\fR to "wake up" that thread's notifier to
-alert it to the new event.
+need to call \fBTcl_ThreadAlert\fR to
+.QW "wake up"
+that thread's notifier to alert it to the new event.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_DeleteEvents\fR can be used to explicitly remove one or more
 events from the event queue.  \fBTcl_DeleteEvents\fR calls \fIproc\fR
@@ -432,8 +418,8 @@ returns 1.  Events for which the procedure returns 0 are left in the
 queue.  \fIProc\fR should match the following prototype:
 .CS
 typedef int Tcl_EventDeleteProc(
-	Tcl_Event *\fIevPtr\fR,
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
+        Tcl_Event *\fIevPtr\fR,
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR argument will be the same as the \fIclientData\fR
 argument to \fBTcl_DeleteEvents\fR; it is typically used to point to
@@ -444,23 +430,21 @@ point to the next event in the queue.
 \fIcheckProc\fR, and \fIclientData\fR arguments must exactly match those
 provided to the \fBTcl_CreateEventSource\fR for the event source to be deleted.
 If no such source exists, \fBTcl_DeleteEventSource\fR has no effect.
-.VE
 
 .SH "CREATING A NEW NOTIFIER"
 .PP
 The notifier consists of all the procedures described in this manual
 entry, plus \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR and \fBTcl_Sleep\fR, which are
-.VS 8.1
 available on all platforms, and \fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR and
 \fBTcl_DeleteFileHandler\fR, which are Unix-specific.  Most of these
 procedures are generic, in that they are the same for all notifiers.
-However, eight of the procedures are notifier-dependent:
-\fBTcl_InitNotifier\fR, \fBTcl_AlertNotifier\fR, \fBTcl_FinalizeNotifier\fR, 
-\fBTcl_SetTimer\fR, \fBTcl_Sleep\fR, \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR,
-\fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR and \fBTcl_DeleteFileHandler\fR.  To
-support a new platform or to integrate Tcl with an
-application-specific event loop, you must write new versions of these
-procedures.
+However, none of the procedures are notifier-dependent:
+\fBTcl_InitNotifier\fR, \fBTcl_AlertNotifier\fR,
+\fBTcl_FinalizeNotifier\fR, \fBTcl_SetTimer\fR, \fBTcl_Sleep\fR,
+\fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR, \fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR,
+\fBTcl_DeleteFileHandler\fR and \fBTcl_ServiceModeHook\fR.  To support a
+new platform or to integrate Tcl with an application-specific event loop,
+you must write new versions of these procedures.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_InitNotifier\fR initializes the notifier state and returns
 a handle to the notifier state.  Tcl calls this
@@ -469,7 +453,9 @@ procedure when initializing a Tcl interpreter.  Similarly,
 called by \fBTcl_Finalize\fR when shutting down a Tcl interpreter.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR is the lowest-level procedure in the notifier;
-it is responsible for waiting for an ``interesting'' event to occur or
+it is responsible for waiting for an
+.QW interesting
+event to occur or
 for a given time to elapse.  Before \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR is invoked,
 each of the event sources' setup procedure will have been invoked.
 The \fItimePtr\fR argument to
@@ -483,13 +469,13 @@ to occur; it should not actually process the event in any way.
 Later on, the
 event sources will process the raw events and create Tcl_Events on
 the event queue in their \fIcheckProc\fR procedures.
-However, on some platforms (such as Windows) this isn't possible;
+However, on some platforms (such as Windows) this is not possible;
 events may be processed in \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR, including queuing
 Tcl_Events and more (for example, callbacks for native widgets may be
 invoked).  The return value from \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR must be either
 0, 1, or \-1.  On platforms such as Windows where events get processed in
 \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR, a return value of 1 means that there may be more
-events still pending that haven't been processed.  This is a sign to the
+events still pending that have not been processed.  This is a sign to the
 caller that it must call \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR again if it wants all
 pending events to be processed. A 0 return value means that calling
 \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR again will not have any effect: either this is a
@@ -504,7 +490,9 @@ forever because there were no active event sources and the timeout was
 infinite.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AlertNotifier\fR is used in multithreaded applications to allow
-any thread to "wake up" the notifier to alert it to new events on its
+any thread to
+.QW "wake up"
+the notifier to alert it to new events on its
 queue.  \fBTcl_AlertNotifier\fR requires as an argument the notifier
 handle returned by \fBTcl_InitNotifier\fR.
 .PP
@@ -514,11 +502,18 @@ invoked by \fBTcl_SetMaxBlockTime\fR whenever the maximum blocking
 time has been reduced.  \fBTcl_SetTimer\fR should arrange for the
 external event loop to invoke \fBTcl_ServiceAll\fR after the specified
 interval even if no events have occurred.  This interface is needed
-because \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR isn't invoked when there is an external
+because \fBTcl_WaitForEvent\fR is not invoked when there is an external
 event loop.  If the
 notifier will only be used from \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR, then
 \fBTcl_SetTimer\fR need not do anything.
 .PP
+\fBTcl_ServiceModeHook\fR is called by the platform-independent portion
+of the notifier when client code makes a call to
+\fBTcl_SetServiceMode\fR. This hook is provided to support operating
+systems that require special event handling when the application is in
+a modal loop (the Windows notifier, for instance, uses this hook to
+create a communication window).
+.PP
 On Unix systems, the file event source also needs support from the
 notifier.  The file event source consists of the
 \fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR and \fBTcl_DeleteFileHandler\fR
@@ -532,6 +527,38 @@ The easiest way to create a new notifier is to look at the code
 for an existing notifier, such as the files \fBunix/tclUnixNotfy.c\fR
 or \fBwin/tclWinNotify.c\fR in the Tcl source distribution.
 
+.SH "REPLACING THE NOTIFIER"
+.PP
+A notifier that has been written according to the conventions above
+can also be installed in a running process in place of the standard
+notifier.  This mechanism is used so that a single executable can be
+used (with the standard notifier) as a stand-alone program and reused
+(with a replacement notifier in a loadable extension) as an extension
+to another program, such as a Web browser plugin.
+.PP
+To do this, the extension makes a call to \fBTcl_SetNotifier\fR
+passing a pointer to a \fBTcl_NotifierProcs\fR data structure.  The
+structure has the following layout:
+.CS
+typedef struct Tcl_NotifierProcs {
+    Tcl_SetTimerProc *setTimerProc;
+    Tcl_WaitForEventProc *waitForEventProc;
+    Tcl_CreateFileHandlerProc *createFileHandlerProc;
+    Tcl_DeleteFileHandlerProc *deleteFileHandlerProc;
+    Tcl_InitNotifierProc *initNotifierProc;
+    Tcl_FinalizeNotifierProc *finalizeNotifierProc;
+    Tcl_AlertNotifierProc *alertNotifierProc;
+    Tcl_ServiceModeHookProc *serviceModeHookProc;
+} Tcl_NotifierProcs;
+.CE
+Following the call to \fBTcl_SetNotifier\fR, the pointers given in
+the \fBTcl_NotifierProcs\fR structure replace whatever notifier had
+been installed in the process.
+.PP
+It is extraordinarily unwise to replace a running notifier. Normally,
+\fBTcl_SetNotifier\fR should be called at process initialization time
+before the first call to \fBTcl_InitNotifier\fR.
+
 .SH "EXTERNAL EVENT LOOPS"
 .PP
 The notifier interfaces are designed so that Tcl can be embedded into
@@ -592,7 +619,7 @@ then calls to \fBTcl_ServiceAll\fR will behave normally.
 mode, which should be restored when the recursive loop exits.
 \fBTcl_GetServiceMode\fR returns the current value of the service
 mode.
-.VE
+
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 \fBTcl_CreateFileHandler\fR, \fBTcl_DeleteFileHandler\fR, \fBTcl_Sleep\fR,
 \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR, \fBThread(3)\fR
diff --git a/doc/Object.3 b/doc/Object.3
index 4e8fa6f..4817b9b 100644
--- a/doc/Object.3
+++ b/doc/Object.3
@@ -5,7 +5,7 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH Tcl_Obj 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_Obj 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
 Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DuplicateObj, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IsShared, Tcl_InvalidateStringRep \- manipulate Tcl objects
@@ -28,7 +28,7 @@ int
 .sp
 \fBTcl_InvalidateStringRep\fR(\fIobjPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
+.AS Tcl_Obj *objPtr
 .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
 Points to an object;
 must have been the result of a previous call to \fBTcl_NewObj\fR.
@@ -100,34 +100,37 @@ reclaim an object's storage.
 .PP
 Tcl objects are typed.
 An object's internal representation is controlled by its type.
-Seven types are predefined in the Tcl core
+Several types are predefined in the Tcl core
 including integer, double, list, and bytecode.
 Extension writers can extend the set of types
-by using the procedure \fBTcl_RegisterObjType\fR .
-
+by defining their own \fBTcl_ObjType\fR structs.
 .SH "THE TCL_OBJ STRUCTURE"
 .PP
 Each Tcl object is represented by a \fBTcl_Obj\fR structure
 which is defined as follows.
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_Obj {
-	int \fIrefCount\fR;
-	char *\fIbytes\fR;
-	int \fIlength\fR;
-	Tcl_ObjType *\fItypePtr\fR;
-	union {
-		long \fIlongValue\fR;
-		double \fIdoubleValue\fR;
-		VOID *\fIotherValuePtr\fR;
-		struct {
-			VOID *\fIptr1\fR;
-			VOID *\fIptr2\fR;
-		} \fItwoPtrValue\fR;
-	} \fIinternalRep\fR;
+        int \fIrefCount\fR;
+        char *\fIbytes\fR;
+        int \fIlength\fR;
+        Tcl_ObjType *\fItypePtr\fR;
+        union {
+                long \fIlongValue\fR;
+                double \fIdoubleValue\fR;
+                void *\fIotherValuePtr\fR;
+                Tcl_WideInt \fIwideValue\fR;
+                struct {
+                        void *\fIptr1\fR;
+                        void *\fIptr2\fR;
+                } \fItwoPtrValue\fR;
+                struct {
+                        void *\fIptr\fR;
+                        unsigned long \fIvalue\fR;
+                } \fIptrAndLongRep\fR;
+        } \fIinternalRep\fR;
 } Tcl_Obj;
 .CE
 The \fIbytes\fR and the \fIlength\fR members together hold
-.VS 8.1
 an object's UTF-8 string representation,
 which is a \fIcounted string\fR not containing null bytes (UTF-8 null
 characters should be encoded as a two byte sequence: 192, 128.)
@@ -137,7 +140,6 @@ The byte array must always have a null byte after the last data byte,
 at offset \fIlength\fR;
 this allows string representations
 to be treated as conventional null-terminated C strings.
-.VE 8.1
 C programs use \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR and \fBTcl_GetString\fR to get
 an object's string representation.
 If \fIbytes\fR is NULL,
@@ -151,10 +153,11 @@ the internal representation is invalid.
 .PP
 The \fIinternalRep\fR union member holds
 an object's internal representation.
-This is either a (long) integer, a double-precision floating point number,
+This is either a (long) integer, a double-precision floating-point number,
 a pointer to a value containing additional information
-needed by the object's type to represent the object,
-or two arbitrary pointers.
+needed by the object's type to represent the object, a Tcl_WideInt
+integer, two arbitrary pointers, or a pair made up of an unsigned long
+integer and a pointer.
 .PP
 The \fIrefCount\fR member is used to tell when it is safe to free
 an object's storage.
@@ -224,7 +227,6 @@ creates a new internal representation for an object
 and changes its \fItypePtr\fR.
 See the man page for \fBTcl_RegisterObjType\fR
 to see how to create a new object type.
-
 .SH "EXAMPLE OF THE LIFETIME OF AN OBJECT"
 .PP
 As an example of the lifetime of an object,
@@ -262,9 +264,8 @@ no longer corresponds to the internal representation.
 .CE
 The string representation of \fIx\fR's object is needed
 and is recomputed.
-The string representation is now \fB124\fR.
+The string representation is now \fB124\fR
 and both representations are again valid.
-
 .SH "STORAGE MANAGEMENT OF OBJECTS"
 .PP
 Tcl objects are allocated on the heap and are shared as much as possible
@@ -281,7 +282,7 @@ if the object's reference count drops to zero, frees its storage.
 An object shared by different code or data structures has
 \fIrefCount\fR greater than 1.
 Incrementing an object's reference count ensures that
-it won't be freed too early or have its value change accidently.
+it will not be freed too early or have its value change accidentally.
 .PP
 As an example, the bytecode interpreter shares argument objects
 between calling and called Tcl procedures to avoid having to copy objects.
@@ -297,7 +298,7 @@ When an object's reference count drops less than or equal to zero,
 \fBTcl_DecrRefCount\fR reclaims its storage.
 Most command procedures do not have to be concerned about
 reference counting since they use an object's value immediately
-and don't retain a pointer to the object after they return.
+and do not retain a pointer to the object after they return.
 However, if they do retain a pointer to an object in a data structure,
 they must be careful to increment its reference count
 since the retained pointer is a new reference.
@@ -312,26 +313,29 @@ by using \fBTcl_DuplicateObj\fR;
 this returns a new duplicate of the original object
 that has \fIrefCount\fR 0.
 If the object is not shared,
-the command procedure "owns" the object and can safely modify it directly.
+the command procedure
+.QW "owns"
+the object and can safely modify it directly.
 For example, the following code appears in the command procedure
 that implements \fBlinsert\fR.
 This procedure modifies the list object passed to it in \fIobjv[1]\fR
 by inserting \fIobjc-3\fR new elements before \fIindex\fR.
+.PP
 .CS
 listPtr = objv[1];
 if (Tcl_IsShared(listPtr)) {
-	listPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(listPtr);
+    listPtr = Tcl_DuplicateObj(listPtr);
 }
-result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, index, 0, (objc-3), &(objv[3]));
+result = Tcl_ListObjReplace(interp, listPtr, index, 0,
+        (objc-3), &(objv[3]));
 .CE
+.PP
 As another example, \fBincr\fR's command procedure
 must check whether the variable's object is shared before
 incrementing the integer in its internal representation.
 If it is shared, it needs to duplicate the object
-in order to avoid accidently changing values in other data structures.
-
+in order to avoid accidentally changing values in other data structures.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tcl_ConvertToType, Tcl_GetIntFromObj, Tcl_ListObjAppendElement, Tcl_ListObjIndex, Tcl_ListObjReplace, Tcl_RegisterObjType
-
+Tcl_ConvertToType(3), Tcl_GetIntFromObj(3), Tcl_ListObjAppendElement(3), Tcl_ListObjIndex(3), Tcl_ListObjReplace(3), Tcl_RegisterObjType(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 internal representation, object, object creation, object type, reference counting, string representation, type conversion
diff --git a/doc/ObjectType.3 b/doc/ObjectType.3
index cc84fd1..974ea6c 100644
--- a/doc/ObjectType.3
+++ b/doc/ObjectType.3
@@ -24,12 +24,12 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_ConvertToType\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, typePtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ObjType *typeName in
+.AS "const char" *typeName
 .AP Tcl_ObjType *typePtr in
 Points to the structure containing information about the Tcl object type.
 This storage must live forever,
 typically by being statically allocated.
-.AP "CONST char" *typeName in
+.AP "const char" *typeName in
 The name of a Tcl object type that \fBTcl_GetObjType\fR should look up.
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter to use for error reporting.
@@ -43,12 +43,14 @@ must have been the result of a previous call to \fBTcl_NewObj\fR.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The procedures in this man page manage Tcl object types.
-The are used to register new object types,
-look up types,
+They are used to register new object types, look up types,
 and force conversions from one type to another.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RegisterObjType\fR registers a new Tcl object type
-in the table of all object types supported by Tcl.
+in the table of all object types that \fBTcl_GetObjType\fR
+can look up by name.  There are other object types supported by Tcl
+as well, which Tcl chooses not to register.  Extensions can likewise
+choose to register the object types they create or not.
 The argument \fItypePtr\fR points to a Tcl_ObjType structure that
 describes the new type by giving its name
 and by supplying pointers to four procedures
@@ -59,11 +61,11 @@ it is replaced with the new type.
 The Tcl_ObjType structure is described
 in the section \fBTHE TCL_OBJTYPE STRUCTURE\fR below.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetObjType\fR returns a pointer to the Tcl_ObjType
+\fBTcl_GetObjType\fR returns a pointer to the registered Tcl_ObjType
 with name \fItypeName\fR.
 It returns NULL if no type with that name is registered.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_AppendAllObjTypes\fR appends the name of each object type
+\fBTcl_AppendAllObjTypes\fR appends the name of each registered object type
 as a list element onto the Tcl object referenced by \fIobjPtr\fR.
 The return value is \fBTCL_OK\fR unless there was an error
 converting \fIobjPtr\fR to a list object;
@@ -73,7 +75,8 @@ in that case \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned.
 if possible.
 It creates a new internal representation for \fIobjPtr\fR
 appropriate for the target type \fItypePtr\fR
-and sets its \fItypePtr\fR member to that type.
+and sets its \fItypePtr\fR member as determined by calling the 
+\fItypePtr->setFromAnyProc\fR routine.  
 Any internal representation for \fIobjPtr\fR's old type is freed.
 If an error occurs during conversion, it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
 and leaves an error message in the result object for \fIinterp\fR
@@ -81,118 +84,168 @@ unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
 Otherwise, it returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
 Passing a NULL \fIinterp\fR allows this procedure to be used
 as a test whether the conversion can be done (and in fact was done).
-
+.VS 8.5
+.PP
+In many cases, the \fItypePtr->setFromAnyProc\fR routine will
+set \fIobjPtr->typePtr\fR to the argument value \fItypePtr\fR,
+but that is no longer guaranteed.  The \fIsetFromAnyProc\fR is
+free to set the internal representation for \fIobjPtr\fR to make
+use of another related Tcl_ObjType, if it sees fit.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "THE TCL_OBJTYPE STRUCTURE"
 .PP
 Extension writers can define new object types by defining four
-procedures,
-initializing a Tcl_ObjType structure to describe the type,
-and calling \fBTcl_RegisterObjType\fR.
+procedures and
+initializing a Tcl_ObjType structure to describe the type.
+Extension writers may also pass a pointer to their Tcl_ObjType
+structure to \fBTcl_RegisterObjType\fR if they wish to permit
+other extensions to look up their Tcl_ObjType by name with
+the \fBTcl_GetObjType\fR routine.
 The \fBTcl_ObjType\fR structure is defined as follows:
+.PP
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_ObjType {
-	char *\fIname\fR;
-	Tcl_FreeInternalRepProc *\fIfreeIntRepProc\fR;
-	Tcl_DupInternalRepProc *\fIdupIntRepProc\fR;
-	Tcl_UpdateStringProc *\fIupdateStringProc\fR;
-	Tcl_SetFromAnyProc *\fIsetFromAnyProc\fR;
+    char *\fIname\fR;
+    Tcl_FreeInternalRepProc *\fIfreeIntRepProc\fR;
+    Tcl_DupInternalRepProc *\fIdupIntRepProc\fR;
+    Tcl_UpdateStringProc *\fIupdateStringProc\fR;
+    Tcl_SetFromAnyProc *\fIsetFromAnyProc\fR;
 } Tcl_ObjType;
 .CE
+.SS "THE NAME FIELD"
 .PP
 The \fIname\fR member describes the name of the type, e.g. \fBint\fR.
-Extension writers can look up an object type using its name
-with the \fBTcl_GetObjType\fR procedure.
+When a type is registered, this is the name used by callers
+of \fBTcl_GetObjType\fR to lookup the type.  For unregistered
+types, the \fIname\fR field is primarily of value for debugging.
 The remaining four members are pointers to procedures
 called by the generic Tcl object code:
+.SS "THE SETFROMANYPROC FIELD"
 .PP
 The \fIsetFromAnyProc\fR member contains the address of a function
 called to create a valid internal representation
 from an object's string representation.
+.PP
 .CS
-typedef int (Tcl_SetFromAnyProc) (Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR);
+typedef int (Tcl_SetFromAnyProc) (Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR);
 .CE
-If an internal representation can't be created from the string,
+.PP
+If an internal representation cannot be created from the string,
 it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and puts a message
 describing the error in the result object for \fIinterp\fR
 unless \fIinterp\fR is NULL.
 If \fIsetFromAnyProc\fR is successful,
 it stores the new internal representation,
 sets \fIobjPtr\fR's \fItypePtr\fR member to point to
-\fIsetFromAnyProc\fR's \fBTcl_ObjType\fR, and returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
+the \fBTcl_ObjType\fR struct corresponding to the new
+internal representation, and returns \fBTCL_OK\fR.
 Before setting the new internal representation,
 the \fIsetFromAnyProc\fR must free any internal representation
 of \fIobjPtr\fR's old type;
 it does this by calling the old type's \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR
 if it is not NULL.
-As an example, the \fIsetFromAnyProc\fR for the builtin Tcl integer type
+.PP
+As an example, the \fIsetFromAnyProc\fR for the built-in Tcl list type
 gets an up-to-date string representation for \fIobjPtr\fR
 by calling \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR.
-It parses the string to obtain an integer and,
-if this succeeds,
-stores the integer in \fIobjPtr\fR's internal representation
-and sets \fIobjPtr\fR's \fItypePtr\fR member to point to the integer type's
+It parses the string to verify it is in a valid list format and
+to obtain each element value in the list, and, if this succeeds,
+stores the list elements in \fIobjPtr\fR's internal representation
+and sets \fIobjPtr\fR's \fItypePtr\fR member to point to the list type's
 Tcl_ObjType structure.
+.PP
 Do not release \fIobjPtr\fR's old internal representation unless you
 replace it with a new one or reset the \fItypePtr\fR member to NULL.
 .PP
+The \fIsetFromAnyProc\fR member may be set to NULL, if the routines
+making use of the internal representation have no need to derive that
+internal representation from an arbitrary string value.  However, in
+this case, passing a pointer to the type to Tcl_ConvertToType() will
+lead to a panic, so to avoid this possibility, the type
+should \fInot\fR be registered.
+.SS "THE UPDATESTRINGPROC FIELD"
+.PP
 The \fIupdateStringProc\fR member contains the address of a function
 called to create a valid string representation
 from an object's internal representation.
+.PP
 .CS
 typedef void (Tcl_UpdateStringProc) (Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR);
 .CE
+.PP
 \fIobjPtr\fR's \fIbytes\fR member is always NULL when it is called.
 It must always set \fIbytes\fR non-NULL before returning.
 We require the string representation's byte array
-to have a null after the last byte, at offset \fIlength\fR;
-this allows string representations that do not contain null bytes
+to have a null after the last byte, at offset \fIlength\fR,
+and to have no null bytes before that; this allows string representations 
 to be treated as conventional null character-terminated C strings.
+These restrictions are easily met by using Tcl's internal UTF encoding
+for the string representation, same as one would do for other
+Tcl routines accepting string values as arguments.
 Storage for the byte array must be allocated in the heap by \fBTcl_Alloc\fR
 or \fBckalloc\fR.  Note that \fIupdateStringProc\fRs must allocate
 enough storage for the string's bytes and the terminating null byte.
-The \fIupdateStringProc\fR for Tcl's builtin list type, for example,
-builds an array of strings for each element object
-and then calls \fBTcl_Merge\fR
-to construct a string with proper Tcl list structure.
-It stores this string as the list object's string representation.
+.PP
+The \fIupdateStringProc\fR for Tcl's built-in double type, for example,
+calls Tcl_PrintDouble to write to a buffer of size TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE,
+then allocates and copies the string representation to just enough
+space to hold it.  A pointer to the allocated space is stored in
+the \fIbytes\fR member.
+.PP
+The \fIupdateStringProc\fR member may be set to NULL, if the routines
+making use of the internal representation are written so that the
+string representation is never invalidated.  Failure to meet this
+obligation will lead to panics or crashes when \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR
+or other similar routines ask for the string representation.
+.SS "THE DUPINTREPPROC FIELD"
 .PP
 The \fIdupIntRepProc\fR member contains the address of a function
 called to copy an internal representation from one object to another.
+.PP
 .CS
-typedef void (Tcl_DupInternalRepProc) (Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPtr\fR, Tcl_Obj *\fIdupPtr\fR);
+typedef void (Tcl_DupInternalRepProc) (Tcl_Obj *\fIsrcPtr\fR,
+        Tcl_Obj *\fIdupPtr\fR);
 .CE
+.PP
 \fIdupPtr\fR's internal representation is made a copy of \fIsrcPtr\fR's
 internal representation.
 Before the call,
 \fIsrcPtr\fR's internal representation is valid and \fIdupPtr\fR's is not.
 \fIsrcPtr\fR's object type determines what
 copying its internal representation means.
+.PP
 For example, the \fIdupIntRepProc\fR for the Tcl integer type
 simply copies an integer.
-The builtin list type's \fIdupIntRepProc\fR
-allocates a new array that points at the original element objects;
-the elements are shared between the two lists
-(and their reference counts are incremented to reflect the new references).
+The built-in list type's \fIdupIntRepProc\fR uses a far more
+sophisticated scheme to continue sharing storage as much as it
+reasonably can.
+.SS "THE FREEINTREPPROC FIELD"
 .PP
 The \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR member contains the address of a function
 that is called when an object is freed.
+.PP
 .CS
 typedef void (Tcl_FreeInternalRepProc) (Tcl_Obj *\fIobjPtr\fR);
 .CE
+.PP
 The \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR function can deallocate the storage
 for the object's internal representation
 and do other type-specific processing necessary when an object is freed.
-For example, Tcl list objects have an \fIinternalRep.otherValuePtr\fR
-that points to an array of pointers to each element in the list.
-The list type's \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR decrements
-the reference count for each element object
-(since the list will no longer refer to those objects),
-then deallocates the storage for the array of pointers.
+.PP
+For example, the list type's \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR respects
+the storage sharing scheme established by the \fIdupIntRepProc\fR
+so that it only frees storage when the last object sharing it
+is being freed.
+.PP
 The \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR member can be set to NULL
 to indicate that the internal representation does not require freeing.
-
+The \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR implementation must not access the
+\fIbytes\fR member of the object, since Tcl makes its own internal
+uses of that field during object deletion.  The defined tasks for
+the \fIfreeIntRepProc\fR have no need to consult the \fIbytes\fR
+member.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_DecrRefCount, Tcl_IncrRefCount
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 internal representation, object, object type, string representation, type conversion
diff --git a/doc/OpenFileChnl.3 b/doc/OpenFileChnl.3
index 80596d7..0d722f6 100644
--- a/doc/OpenFileChnl.3
+++ b/doc/OpenFileChnl.3
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_OpenFileChannel, Tcl_OpenCommandChannel, Tcl_MakeFileChannel, Tcl_GetChannel, Tcl_GetChannelNames, Tcl_GetChannelNamesEx, Tcl_RegisterChannel, Tcl_UnregisterChannel, Tcl_DetachChannel, Tcl_IsStandardChannel, Tcl_Close, Tcl_ReadChars, Tcl_Read, Tcl_GetsObj, Tcl_Gets, Tcl_WriteObj, Tcl_WriteChars, Tcl_Write, Tcl_Flush, Tcl_Seek, Tcl_Tell, Tcl_GetChannelOption, Tcl_SetChannelOption, Tcl_Eof, Tcl_InputBlocked, Tcl_InputBuffered, Tcl_OutputBuffered, Tcl_Ungets, Tcl_ReadRaw, Tcl_WriteRaw \- buffered I/O facilities using channels
+Tcl_OpenFileChannel, Tcl_OpenCommandChannel, Tcl_MakeFileChannel, Tcl_GetChannel, Tcl_GetChannelNames, Tcl_GetChannelNamesEx, Tcl_RegisterChannel, Tcl_UnregisterChannel, Tcl_DetachChannel, Tcl_IsStandardChannel, Tcl_Close, Tcl_ReadChars, Tcl_Read, Tcl_GetsObj, Tcl_Gets, Tcl_WriteObj, Tcl_WriteChars, Tcl_Write, Tcl_Flush, Tcl_Seek, Tcl_Tell, Tcl_TruncateChannel, Tcl_GetChannelOption, Tcl_SetChannelOption, Tcl_Eof, Tcl_InputBlocked, Tcl_InputBuffered, Tcl_OutputBuffered, Tcl_Ungets, Tcl_ReadRaw, Tcl_WriteRaw \- buffered I/O facilities using channels
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -25,14 +25,12 @@ Tcl_Channel
 .sp
 Tcl_Channel
 \fBTcl_GetChannel\fR(\fIinterp, channelName, modePtr\fR)
-.VS 8.3
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetChannelNames\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetChannelNamesEx\fR(\fIinterp, pattern\fR)
-.VE
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR(\fIinterp, channel\fR)
@@ -49,7 +47,6 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_Close\fR(\fIinterp, channel\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.1
 int
 \fBTcl_ReadChars\fR(\fIchannel, readObjPtr, charsToRead, appendFlag\fR)
 .sp
@@ -73,15 +70,12 @@ int
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_Write\fR(\fIchannel, byteBuf, bytesToWrite\fR)
-.VE
-.VS 8.3.2
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_ReadRaw\fR(\fIchannel, readBuf, bytesToRead\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_WriteRaw\fR(\fIchannel, byteBuf, bytesToWrite\fR)
-.VE
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_Eof\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
@@ -94,19 +88,20 @@ int
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_InputBuffered\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
-.VS 8.4
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_OutputBuffered\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
-.VE
 .sp
-.VS 8.4
 Tcl_WideInt
 \fBTcl_Seek\fR(\fIchannel, offset, seekMode\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_WideInt
 \fBTcl_Tell\fR(\fIchannel\fR)
-.VE 8.4
+.sp
+.VS 8.5
+int
+\fBTcl_TruncateChannel\fR(\fIchannel, length\fR)
+.VE 8.5
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_GetChannelOption\fR(\fIinterp, channel, optionName, optionValue\fR)
@@ -115,12 +110,12 @@ int
 \fBTcl_SetChannelOption\fR(\fIinterp, channel, optionName, newValue\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ChannelType newClientProcPtr in
+.AS Tcl_DString *channelName in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Used for error reporting and to look up a channel registered in it.
-.AP "CONST char" *fileName in
+.AP "const char" *fileName in
 The name of a local or network file.
-.AP "CONST char" *mode in
+.AP "const char" *mode in
 Specifies how the file is to be accessed.  May have any of the values
 allowed for the \fImode\fR argument to the Tcl \fBopen\fR command.  
 .AP int permissions in
@@ -128,7 +123,7 @@ POSIX-style permission flags such as 0644.  If a new file is created, these
 permissions will be set on the created file.
 .AP int argc in
 The number of elements in \fIargv\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" **argv in
+.AP "const char" **argv in
 Arguments for constructing a command pipeline.  These values have the same
 meaning as the non-switch arguments to the Tcl \fBexec\fR command.
 .AP int flags in
@@ -147,20 +142,17 @@ file descriptor, for Windows it is a HANDLE.
 .AP int readOrWrite in
 OR-ed combination of \fBTCL_READABLE\fR and \fBTCL_WRITABLE\fR to indicate
 what operations are valid on \fIhandle\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" *channelName in
+.AP "const char" *channelName in
 The name of the channel. 
 .AP int *modePtr out
 Points at an integer variable that will receive an OR-ed combination of
 \fBTCL_READABLE\fR and \fBTCL_WRITABLE\fR denoting whether the channel is
 open for reading and writing.
-.VS 8.3
-.AP "CONST char" *pattern in
+.AP "const char" *pattern in
 The pattern to match on, passed to Tcl_StringMatch, or NULL.
-.VE
 .AP Tcl_Channel channel in
 A Tcl channel for input or output.  Must have been the return value
 from a procedure such as \fBTcl_OpenFileChannel\fR.
-.VS 8.1 br
 .AP Tcl_Obj *readObjPtr in/out
 A pointer to a Tcl Object in which to store the characters read from the
 channel.
@@ -184,25 +176,22 @@ object.
 A pointer to a Tcl dynamic string in which to store the line read from the
 channel.  Must have been initialized by the caller.  The line read will be
 appended to any data already in the dynamic string.
-.VS 8.3
-.AP "CONST char" *input in
+.AP "const char" *input in
 The input to add to a channel buffer.
 .AP int inputLen in
 Length of the input
 .AP int addAtEnd in
 Flag indicating whether the input should be added to the end or
 beginning of the channel buffer.
-.VE
 .AP Tcl_Obj *writeObjPtr in
 A pointer to a Tcl Object whose contents will be output to the channel.
-.AP "CONST char" *charBuf in
+.AP "const char" *charBuf in
 A buffer containing the characters to output to the channel.
-.AP "CONST char" *byteBuf in
+.AP "const char" *byteBuf in
 A buffer containing the bytes to output to the channel.
 .AP int bytesToWrite in
 The number of bytes to consume from \fIcharBuf\fR or \fIbyteBuf\fR and
 output to the channel.
-.VE
 .AP Tcl_WideInt offset in
 How far to move the access point in the channel at which the next input or
 output operation will be applied, measured in bytes from the position
@@ -211,13 +200,15 @@ given by \fIseekMode\fR.  May be either positive or negative.
 Relative to which point to seek; used with \fIoffset\fR to calculate the new
 access point for the channel. Legal values are \fBSEEK_SET\fR,
 \fBSEEK_CUR\fR, and \fBSEEK_END\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" *optionName in
+.AP Tcl_WideInt length in
+The (non-negative) length to truncate the channel the channel to.
+.AP "const char" *optionName in
 The name of an option applicable to this channel, such as \fB\-blocking\fR.
 May have any of the values accepted by the \fBfconfigure\fR command.
 .AP Tcl_DString *optionValue in
 Where to store the value of an option or a list of all options and their
 values. Must have been initialized by the caller.
-.AP "CONST char" *newValue in
+.AP "const char" *newValue in
 New value for the option given by \fIoptionName\fR.
 .BE
 
@@ -228,7 +219,7 @@ platform-independent mechanism for performing buffered input
 and output operations on a variety of file, socket, and device
 types.
 The channel mechanism is extensible to new channel types, by
-providing a low level channel driver for the new type; the channel driver
+providing a low-level channel driver for the new type; the channel driver
 interface is described in the manual entry for \fBTcl_CreateChannel\fR. The
 channel mechanism provides a buffering scheme modeled after
 Unix's standard I/O, and it also allows for nonblocking I/O on
@@ -255,8 +246,6 @@ leaves an error message in \fIinterp\fR's result after any error.
 As of Tcl 8.4, the object-based API \fBTcl_FSOpenFileChannel\fR should 
 be used in preference to \fBTcl_OpenFileChannel\fR wherever possible.
 .PP
-
-.PP
 The newly created channel is not registered in the supplied interpreter; to
 register it, use \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR, described below.
 If one of the standard channels, \fBstdin, stdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR was
@@ -349,7 +338,7 @@ reference to a channel that is also registered in a Tcl interpreter.
 .PP
 This procedure interacts with the code managing the standard
 channels. If no standard channels were initialized before the first
-call to \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR they will get initialized by that
+call to \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR, they will get initialized by that
 call. See \fBTcl_StandardChannels\fR for a general treatise about
 standard channels and the behaviour of the Tcl library with regard to
 them.
@@ -376,7 +365,7 @@ accessible in \fIinterp\fR. After this call, Tcl programs will no longer be
 able to use the channel's name to refer to the channel in that interpreter.
 Beyond that, this command has no further effect.  It cannot be used on
 the standard channels (stdout, stderr, stdin), and will return
-TCL_ERROR if passed one of those channels.
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR if passed one of those channels.
 .PP
 Code not associated with a Tcl interpreter can call
 \fBTcl_DetachChannel\fR with \fIinterp\fR as NULL, to indicate to Tcl
@@ -423,7 +412,6 @@ been given as the \fBchan\fR argument in a call to
 when all calls to \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR have been matched by
 corresponding calls to \fBTcl_UnregisterChannel\fR.
 
-.VS 8.1 br
 .SH "TCL_READCHARS AND TCL_READ"
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ReadChars\fR consumes bytes from \fIchannel\fR, converting the bytes
@@ -434,7 +422,7 @@ that were stored in \fIreadObjPtr\fR.  If an error occurs while reading, the
 return value is \-1 and \fBTcl_ReadChars\fR records a POSIX error code that
 can be retrieved with \fBTcl_GetErrno\fR.
 .PP
-Setting \fIcharsToRead\fR to \fB-1\fR will cause the command to read
+Setting \fIcharsToRead\fR to \fB\-1\fR will cause the command to read
 all characters currently available (non-blocking) or everything until
 eof (blocking mode).
 .PP
@@ -467,7 +455,7 @@ from a channel, manipulated by calling \fBTcl_GetByteArrayFromObj\fR and
 related functions, and then written to a channel without the expense of ever
 converting to or from UTF-8.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_Read\fR is similar to \fBTcl_ReadChars\fR, except that it doesn't do
+\fBTcl_Read\fR is similar to \fBTcl_ReadChars\fR, except that it does not do
 encoding conversions, regardless of the channel's encoding.  It is deprecated
 and exists for backwards compatibility with non-internationalized Tcl
 extensions.  It consumes bytes from \fIchannel\fR and stores them in
@@ -519,9 +507,11 @@ at either the head or tail of the queue.  The pointer \fIinput\fR points
 to the data that is to be added.  The length of the input to add is given
 by \fIinputLen\fR.  A non-zero value of \fIaddAtEnd\fR indicates that the
 data is to be added at the end of queue; otherwise it will be added at the
-head of the queue.  If \fIchannel\fR has a "sticky" EOF set, no data will be
+head of the queue.  If \fIchannel\fR has a
+.QW sticky
+EOF set, no data will be
 added to the input queue.  \fBTcl_Ungets\fR returns \fIinputLen\fR or
--1 if an error occurs.
+\-1 if an error occurs.
 
 .SH "TCL_WRITECHARS, TCL_WRITEOBJ, AND TCL_WRITE"
 .PP
@@ -561,7 +551,7 @@ byte-oriented data can be read from a channel, manipulated by calling
 \fBTcl_GetByteArrayFromObj\fR and related functions, and then written to a
 channel without the expense of ever converting to or from UTF-8.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_Write\fR is similar to \fBTcl_WriteChars\fR except that it doesn't do
+\fBTcl_Write\fR is similar to \fBTcl_WriteChars\fR except that it does not do
 encoding conversions, regardless of the channel's encoding.  It is
 deprecated and exists for backwards compatibility with non-internationalized
 Tcl extensions.  It accepts \fIbytesToWrite\fR bytes of data at
@@ -577,7 +567,6 @@ not. Thus this function is \fBonly\fR usable for transformational
 channel drivers, i.e. drivers used in the middle of a stack of
 channels, to move data from the transformation into the channel below
 it.
-.VE
 
 .SH TCL_FLUSH
 .PP
@@ -609,6 +598,14 @@ After an error, the access point may or may not have been moved.
 \fBTcl_Tell\fR returns the current access point for a channel. The returned
 value is \-1 if the channel does not support seeking.
 
+.SH TCL_TRUNCATECHANNEL
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_TruncateChannel\fR truncates the file underlying \fIchannel\fR
+to a given \fIlength\fR of bytes. It returns \fBTCL_OK\fR if the
+operation succeeded, and \fBTCL_ERROR\fR otherwise.
+.VE 8.5
+
 .SH TCL_GETCHANNELOPTION
 .PP
 \fBTcl_GetChannelOption\fR retrieves, in \fIoptionValue\fR, the value of one of
@@ -658,11 +655,9 @@ buffered in the internal buffers for a channel. If the channel is not open
 for reading, this function always returns zero.
 
 .SH TCL_OUTPUTBUFFERED
-.VS 8.4
 \fBTcl_OutputBuffered\fR returns the number of bytes of output
 currently buffered in the internal buffers for a channel. If the
 channel is not open for writing, this function always returns zero.
-.VE
 
 .SH "PLATFORM ISSUES"
 .PP
@@ -673,8 +668,7 @@ call.  On Windows platforms, the handle is a file \fBHANDLE\fR when
 the channel was created with \fBTcl_OpenFileChannel\fR,
 \fBTcl_OpenCommandChannel\fR, or \fBTcl_MakeFileChannel\fR.  Other
 channel types may return a different type of handle on Windows
-platforms.  On the Macintosh platform, the handle is a file reference
-number as returned from \fBHOpenDF\fR.
+platforms.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 DString(3), fconfigure(n), filename(n), fopen(3), Tcl_CreateChannel(3)
diff --git a/doc/OpenTcp.3 b/doc/OpenTcp.3
index 4ddb8a7..98d8cb0 100644
--- a/doc/OpenTcp.3
+++ b/doc/OpenTcp.3
@@ -24,18 +24,18 @@ Tcl_Channel
 \fBTcl_OpenTcpServer\fR(\fIinterp, port, myaddr, proc, clientData\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ChannelType newClientProcPtr in
+.AS Tcl_TcpAcceptProc clientData
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting.  If non-NULL and an
 error occurs, an error message is left in the interpreter's result.
 .AP int port in
 A port number to connect to as a client or to listen on as a server.
-.AP "CONST char" *host in
+.AP "const char" *host in
 A string specifying a host name or address for the remote end of the connection.
 .AP int myport in
 A port number for the client's end of the socket.  If 0, a port number
 is allocated at random.
-.AP "CONST char" *myaddr in
+.AP "const char" *myaddr in
 A string specifying the host name or address for network interface to use
 for the local end of the connection.  If NULL, a default interface is
 chosen.
@@ -113,24 +113,24 @@ replacement for the standard channel.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_OpenTcpServer\fR opens a TCP socket on the local host on a specified
 \fIport\fR and uses the Tcl event mechanism to accept requests from clients
-to connect to it.  The \fImyaddr\fP argument specifies the network interface.
-If \fImyaddr\fP is NULL the special address INADDR_ANY should be used to
+to connect to it. The \fImyaddr\fR argument specifies the network interface.
+If \fImyaddr\fR is NULL the special address INADDR_ANY should be used to
 allow connections from any network interface.
 Each time a client connects to this socket, Tcl creates a channel
 for the new connection and invokes \fIproc\fR with information about
-the channel.  \fIProc\fR must match the following prototype:
+the channel. \fIProc\fR must match the following prototype:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_TcpAcceptProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Channel \fIchannel\fR,
-	char *\fIhostName\fR,
-	int \fIport\fP);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Channel \fIchannel\fR,
+        char *\fIhostName\fR,
+        int \fIport\fR);
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fIclientData\fR argument will be the same as the \fIclientData\fR
 argument to \fBTcl_OpenTcpServer\fR, \fIchannel\fR will be the handle
 for the new channel, \fIhostName\fR points to a string containing
-the name of the client host making the connection, and \fIport\fP
+the name of the client host making the connection, and \fIport\fR
 will contain the client's port number.
 The new channel
 is opened for both input and output. 
@@ -162,14 +162,11 @@ If one of the standard channels, \fBstdin, stdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR was
 previously closed, the act of creating the new channel also assigns it as a
 replacement for the standard channel.
 
-.VS
 .SH "PLATFORM ISSUES"
 .PP
 On Unix platforms, the socket handle is a Unix file descriptor as
 returned by the \fBsocket\fR system call.  On the Windows platform, the
-socket handle is a \fBSOCKET\fR as defined in the WinSock API.  On the
-Macintosh platform, the socket handle is a \fBStreamPtr\fR.
-.VE
+socket handle is a \fBSOCKET\fR as defined in the WinSock API.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_OpenFileChannel(3), Tcl_RegisterChannel(3), vwait(n)
diff --git a/doc/Panic.3 b/doc/Panic.3
index 3fb0c83..b53ca11 100644
--- a/doc/Panic.3
+++ b/doc/Panic.3
@@ -7,7 +7,7 @@
 .BS
 '\"  Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_Panic, Tcl_PanicVA, Tcl_SetPanicProc, panic, panicVA \- report fatal error and abort
+Tcl_Panic, Tcl_PanicVA, Tcl_SetPanicProc \- report fatal error and abort
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -21,21 +21,15 @@ void
 void
 \fBTcl_SetPanicProc\fR(\fIpanicProc\fR)
 .sp
-void
-\fBpanic\fR(\fIformat\fR, \fIarg\fR, \fIarg\fR, \fI...\fR)
-.sp
-void
-\fBpanicVA\fR(\fIformat\fR, \fIargList\fR)
-.sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
 .AS Tcl_PanicProc *panicProc
-.AP "CONST char*" format in
+.AP "const char*" format in
 A printf-style format string.
 .AP "" arg in
 Arguments matching the format string.
 .AP va_list argList in
 An argument list of arguments matching the format string.
-Must have been initialized using \fBTCL_VARARGS_START\fR,
+Must have been initialized using \fBva_start\fR,
 and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
 .AP Tcl_PanicProc *panicProc in
 Procedure to report fatal error message and abort.
@@ -51,7 +45,7 @@ to display a message describing the error and abort the process.  The
 \fIformat\fR argument is a format string describing how to format the
 remaining arguments \fIarg\fR into an error message, according to the
 same formatting rules used by the \fBprintf\fR family of functions.  The
-same formatting rules are also used by the builtin Tcl command
+same formatting rules are also used by the built-in Tcl command
 \fBformat\fR.
 .PP
 In a freshly loaded Tcl library, \fBTcl_Panic\fR prints the formatted
@@ -65,8 +59,8 @@ type \fBTcl_PanicProc\fR:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_PanicProc(
-	CONST char *\fBformat\fR,
-	\fBarg\fR, \fBarg\fR,...);
+        const char *\fBformat\fR,
+        \fBarg\fR, \fBarg\fR,...);
 .CE
 .PP
 After \fBTcl_SetPanicProc\fR returns, any future calls to
@@ -92,11 +86,7 @@ have a panic message displayed the same way that panic messages from Tcl
 will be displayed.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_PanicVA\fR is the same as \fBTcl_Panic\fR except that instead of
-taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list.  The
-procedures \fBpanic\fR and \fBpanicVA\fR are synonyms (implemented as
-macros) for \fBTcl_Panic\fR and \fBTcl_PanicVA\fR, respectively.  They
-exist to support old code; new code should use direct calls to
-\fBTcl_Panic\fR or \fBTcl_PanicVA\fR.
+taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 abort(3), printf(3), exec(n), format(n)
diff --git a/doc/ParseCmd.3 b/doc/ParseCmd.3
index af6b02e..b5fc6d0 100644
--- a/doc/ParseCmd.3
+++ b/doc/ParseCmd.3
@@ -14,22 +14,22 @@ Tcl_ParseCommand, Tcl_ParseExpr, Tcl_ParseBraces, Tcl_ParseQuotedString, Tcl_Par
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ParseCommand\fR(\fIinterp, string, numBytes, nested, parsePtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ParseCommand\fR(\fIinterp, start, numBytes, nested, parsePtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ParseExpr\fR(\fIinterp, string, numBytes, parsePtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ParseExpr\fR(\fIinterp, start, numBytes, parsePtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ParseBraces\fR(\fIinterp, string, numBytes, parsePtr, append, termPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ParseBraces\fR(\fIinterp, start, numBytes, parsePtr, append, termPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ParseQuotedString\fR(\fIinterp, string, numBytes, parsePtr, append, termPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_ParseQuotedString\fR(\fIinterp, start, numBytes, parsePtr, append, termPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_ParseVarName\fR(\fIinterp, string, numBytes, parsePtr, append\fR)
+\fBTcl_ParseVarName\fR(\fIinterp, start, numBytes, parsePtr, append\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
-\fBTcl_ParseVar\fR(\fIinterp, string, termPtr\fR)
+const char *
+\fBTcl_ParseVar\fR(\fIinterp, start, termPtr\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_FreeParse\fR(\fIusedParsePtr\fR)
 .sp
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ Tcl_Obj *
 int
 \fBTcl_EvalTokensStandard\fR(\fIinterp, tokenPtr, numTokens\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *usedParsePtr
+.AS Tcl_Interp *usedParsePtr out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
 For procedures other than \fBTcl_FreeParse\fR, \fBTcl_EvalTokens\fR
 and \fBTcl_EvalTokensStandard\fR, used only for error reporting;
@@ -47,12 +47,12 @@ if NULL, then no error messages are left after errors.
 For \fBTcl_EvalTokens\fR and \fBTcl_EvalTokensStandard\fR,
 determines the context for evaluating the
 script and also is used for error reporting; must not be NULL.
-.AP "CONST char" *string in
+.AP "const char" *start in
 Pointer to first character in string to parse.
 .AP int numBytes in
-Number of bytes in \fIstring\fR, not including any terminating null
+Number of bytes in string to parse, not including any terminating null
 character.  If less than 0 then the script consists of all characters
-in \fIstring\fR up to the first null character.
+following \fIstart\fR up to the first null character.
 .AP int nested in
 Non-zero means that the script is part of a command substitution so an
 unquoted close bracket should be treated as a command terminator.  If zero,
@@ -69,7 +69,7 @@ Any previous information in this structure
 is ignored, unless \fIappend\fR is non-zero in a call to
 \fBTcl_ParseBraces\fR, \fBTcl_ParseQuotedString\fR,
 or \fBTcl_ParseVarName\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" **termPtr out
+.AP "const char" **termPtr out
 If not NULL, points to a location where
 \fBTcl_ParseBraces\fR, \fBTcl_ParseQuotedString\fR, and
 \fBTcl_ParseVar\fR will store a pointer to the character
@@ -90,7 +90,7 @@ and fills in the structure pointed to by \fIparsePtr\fR
 with a collection of tokens describing the information that was parsed.
 The procedures normally return \fBTCL_OK\fR.
 However, if an error occurs then they return \fBTCL_ERROR\fR,
-leave an error message in \fIinterp's\fR result
+leave an error message in \fIinterp\fR's result
 (if \fIinterp\fR is not NULL),
 and leave nothing in \fIparsePtr\fR.
 .PP
@@ -117,9 +117,9 @@ result, and no information is left at \fI*parsePtr\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ParseBraces\fR parses a string or command argument
 enclosed in braces such as
-\fB{hello}\fR or \fB{string \\t with \\t tabs}\fR
-from the beginning of its argument \fIstring\fR.
-The first character of \fIstring\fR must be \fB{\fR. 
+\fB{hello}\fR or \fB{string \et with \et tabs}\fR
+from the beginning of its argument \fIstart\fR.
+The first character of \fIstart\fR must be \fB{\fR. 
 If the braced string was parsed successfully,
 \fBTcl_ParseBraces\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR,
 fills in the structure pointed to by \fIparsePtr\fR
@@ -133,15 +133,15 @@ an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result,
 and no information is left at \fI*parsePtr\fR or \fI*termPtr\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ParseQuotedString\fR parses a double-quoted string such as
-\fB"sum is [expr $a+$b]"\fR
-from the beginning of the argument \fIstring\fR.
-The first character of \fIstring\fR must be \fB"\fR. 
+\fB"sum is [expr {$a+$b}]"\fR
+from the beginning of the argument \fIstart\fR.
+The first character of \fIstart\fR must be \fB\N'34'\fR. 
 If the double-quoted string was parsed successfully,
 \fBTcl_ParseQuotedString\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR,
 fills in the structure pointed to by \fIparsePtr\fR
 with information about the structure of the string
 (see below for details),
-and stores a pointer to the character just after the terminating \fB"\fR
+and stores a pointer to the character just after the terminating \fB\N'34'\fR
 in the location given by \fI*termPtr\fR.
 If an error occurs while parsing the string
 then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned,
@@ -149,20 +149,20 @@ an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result,
 and no information is left at \fI*parsePtr\fR or \fI*termPtr\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ParseVarName\fR parses a Tcl variable reference such as
-\fB$abc\fR or \fB$x([expr $index + 1])\fR from the beginning of its
-\fIstring\fR argument.
-The first character of \fIstring\fR must be \fB$\fR. 
+\fB$abc\fR or \fB$x([expr {$index + 1}])\fR from the beginning of its
+\fIstart\fR argument.
+The first character of \fIstart\fR must be \fB$\fR. 
 If a variable name was parsed successfully, \fBTcl_ParseVarName\fR
 returns \fBTCL_OK\fR and fills in the structure pointed to by
 \fIparsePtr\fR with information about the structure of the variable name
 (see below for details).  If an error
 occurs while parsing the command then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned, an
-error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result (if \fIinterp\fR isn't
+error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's result (if \fIinterp\fR is not
 NULL), and no information is left at \fI*parsePtr\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_ParseVar\fR parse a Tcl variable reference such as \fB$abc\fR
-or \fB$x([expr $index + 1])\fR from the beginning of its \fIstring\fR
-argument.  The first character of \fIstring\fR must be \fB$\fR.  If
+or \fB$x([expr {$index + 1}])\fR from the beginning of its \fIstart\fR
+argument.  The first character of \fIstart\fR must be \fB$\fR.  If
 the variable name is parsed successfully, \fBTcl_ParseVar\fR returns a
 pointer to the string value of the variable.  If an error occurs while
 parsing, then NULL is returned and an error message is left in
@@ -210,21 +210,21 @@ of \fBTcl_EvalTokens\fR is deprecated.
 return parse information in two data structures, Tcl_Parse and Tcl_Token:
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_Parse {
-	CONST char *\fIcommentStart\fR;
-	int \fIcommentSize\fR;
-	CONST char *\fIcommandStart\fR;
-	int \fIcommandSize\fR;
-	int \fInumWords\fR;
-	Tcl_Token *\fItokenPtr\fR;
-	int \fInumTokens\fR;
-	...
+        const char *\fIcommentStart\fR;
+        int \fIcommentSize\fR;
+        const char *\fIcommandStart\fR;
+        int \fIcommandSize\fR;
+        int \fInumWords\fR;
+        Tcl_Token *\fItokenPtr\fR;
+        int \fInumTokens\fR;
+        ...
 } Tcl_Parse;
 
 typedef struct Tcl_Token {
-    int \fItype\fR;
-    CONST char *\fIstart\fR;
-    int \fIsize\fR;
-    int \fInumComponents\fR;
+        int \fItype\fR;
+        const char *\fIstart\fR;
+        int \fIsize\fR;
+        int \fInumComponents\fR;
 } Tcl_Token;
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -285,6 +285,16 @@ This token has the same meaning as \fBTCL_TOKEN_WORD\fR, except that
 the word is guaranteed to consist of a single \fBTCL_TOKEN_TEXT\fR
 sub-token.  The \fInumComponents\fR field is always 1.
 .TP
+\fBTCL_TOKEN_EXPAND_WORD\fR
+.VS 8.5
+This token has the same meaning as \fBTCL_TOKEN_WORD\fR, except that
+the command parser notes this word began with the expansion
+prefix \fB{*}\fR, indicating that after substitution,
+the list value of this word should be expanded to form multiple
+arguments in command evaluation.  This
+token type can only be created by Tcl_ParseCommand.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
 \fBTCL_TOKEN_TEXT\fR
 The token describes a range of literal text that is part of a word.
 The \fInumComponents\fR field is always 0.
@@ -294,7 +304,7 @@ The token describes a backslash sequence such as \fB\en\fR or \fB\e0xa3\fR.
 The \fInumComponents\fR field is always 0.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_TOKEN_COMMAND\fR
-The token describes a command whose result result must be substituted into
+The token describes a command whose result must be substituted into
 the word.  The token includes the square brackets that surround the
 command.  The \fInumComponents\fR field is always 0 (the nested command
 is not parsed; call \fBTcl_ParseCommand\fR recursively if you want to
@@ -344,7 +354,7 @@ this includes the sub-tokens for any nested \fBTCL_TOKEN_SUB_EXPR\fR tokens.
 \fBTCL_TOKEN_OPERATOR\fR
 The token describes one operator of an expression
 such as \fB&&\fR or \fBhypot\fR.
-An \fBTCL_TOKEN_OPERATOR\fR token is always preceded by a
+A \fBTCL_TOKEN_OPERATOR\fR token is always preceded by a
 \fBTCL_TOKEN_SUB_EXPR\fR token
 that describes the operator and its operands;
 the \fBTCL_TOKEN_SUB_EXPR\fR token's \fInumComponents\fR field
@@ -352,7 +362,7 @@ can be used to determine the number of operands.
 A binary operator such as \fB*\fR
 is followed by two \fBTCL_TOKEN_SUB_EXPR\fR tokens
 that describe its operands.
-A unary operator like \fB-\fR
+A unary operator like \fB\-\fR
 is followed by a single \fBTCL_TOKEN_SUB_EXPR\fR token
 for its operand.
 If the operator is a math function such as \fBlog10\fR,
@@ -373,12 +383,16 @@ is always 0.
 After \fBTcl_ParseCommand\fR returns, the first token pointed to by
 the \fItokenPtr\fR field of the
 Tcl_Parse structure always has type \fBTCL_TOKEN_WORD\fR or
-\fBTCL_TOKEN_SIMPLE_WORD\fR.  It is followed by the sub-tokens
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTCL_TOKEN_SIMPLE_WORD\fR or \fBTCL_TOKEN_EXPAND_WORD\fR.  
+It is followed by the sub-tokens
 that must be concatenated to produce the value of that word.
 The next token is the \fBTCL_TOKEN_WORD\fR or \fBTCL_TOKEN_SIMPLE_WORD\fR
-token for the second word, followed by sub-tokens for that
+of \fBTCL_TOKEN_EXPAND_WORD\fR token for the second word,
+followed by sub-tokens for that
 word, and so on until all \fInumWords\fR have been accounted
 for.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 After \fBTcl_ParseExpr\fR returns, the first token pointed to by
 the \fItokenPtr\fR field of the
@@ -415,7 +429,7 @@ Tcl_Parse structure depends on the contents of the quoted string.
 It will consist of one or more \fBTCL_TOKEN_TEXT\fR, \fBTCL_TOKEN_BS\fR,
 \fBTCL_TOKEN_COMMAND\fR, and \fBTCL_TOKEN_VARIABLE\fR sub-tokens.
 The array always contains at least one token;
-for example, if the argument \fIstring\fR is empty,
+for example, if the argument \fIstart\fR is empty,
 the array returned consists of a single \fBTCL_TOKEN_TEXT\fR token
 with a zero \fIsize\fR field.
 Only the token information in the Tcl_Parse structure
@@ -436,7 +450,7 @@ the \fIcommentStart\fR, \fIcommentSize\fR,
 .PP
 All of the character pointers in the
 Tcl_Parse and Tcl_Token structures refer
-to characters in the \fIstring\fR argument passed to
+to characters in the \fIstart\fR argument passed to
 \fBTcl_ParseCommand\fR, \fBTcl_ParseExpr\fR, \fBTcl_ParseBraces\fR,
 \fBTcl_ParseQuotedString\fR, and \fBTcl_ParseVarName\fR.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/PkgRequire.3 b/doc/PkgRequire.3
index fcccd58..810947d 100644
--- a/doc/PkgRequire.3
+++ b/doc/PkgRequire.3
@@ -8,21 +8,24 @@
 .TH Tcl_PkgRequire 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_PkgRequire, Tcl_PkgRequireEx, Tcl_PkgPresent, Tcl_PkgPresentEx, Tcl_PkgProvide, Tcl_PkgProvideEx \- package version control
+Tcl_PkgRequire, Tcl_PkgRequireEx, Tcl_PkgRequireProc, Tcl_PkgPresent, Tcl_PkgPresentEx, Tcl_PkgProvide, Tcl_PkgProvideEx \- package version control
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fR(\fIinterp, name, version, exact\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_PkgRequireEx\fR(\fIinterp, name, version, exact, clientDataPtr\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+int
+\fBTcl_PkgRequireProc\fR(\fIinterp, name, objc, objv, clientDataPtr\fR)
+.sp
+const char *
 \fBTcl_PkgPresent\fR(\fIinterp, name, version, exact\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_PkgPresentEx\fR(\fIinterp, name, version, exact, clientDataPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
@@ -31,12 +34,12 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_PkgProvideEx\fR(\fIinterp, name, version, clientData\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS ClientData clientDataPtr
+.AS ClientData clientDataPtr out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter where package is needed or available.
-.AP "CONST char" *name in
+.AP "const char" *name in
 Name of package.
-.AP "CONST char" *version in
+.AP "const char" *version in
 A version string consisting of one or more decimal numbers
 separated by dots.
 .AP int exact in
@@ -51,7 +54,12 @@ Arbitrary value to be associated with the package.
 Pointer to place to store the value associated with the matching
 package. It is only changed if the pointer is not NULL and the
 function completed successfully.
+.AP int objc in
+Number of requirements.
+.AP Tcl_Obj* objv[] in
+Array of requirements.
 .BE
+
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 These procedures provide C-level interfaces to Tcl's package and
@@ -71,13 +79,18 @@ that is provided in the interpreter (which may be different than
 \fIversion\fR); if an error occurs they return NULL and leave an error 
 message in the interpreter's result.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_PkgProvide\fR returns TCL_OK if it completes successfully;
-if an error occurs it returns TCL_ERROR and leaves an error message
+\fBTcl_PkgProvide\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR if it completes successfully;
+if an error occurs it returns \fBTCL_ERROR\fR and leaves an error message
 in the interpreter's result.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_PkgProvideEx\fR, \fBTcl_PkgPresentEx\fR and \fBTcl_PkgRequireEx\fR
 allow the setting and retrieving of the client data associated with
 the package. In all other respects they are equivalent to the matching
 functions.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_PkgRequireProc\fR is the form of \fBpackage require\fR handling
+multiple requirements. The other forms are present for backward
+compatibility and translate their invocations to this form.
+
 .SH KEYWORDS
 package, present, provide, require, version
diff --git a/doc/Preserve.3 b/doc/Preserve.3
index b5d608e..2b3edc0 100644
--- a/doc/Preserve.3
+++ b/doc/Preserve.3
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_Preserve 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_Preserve, Tcl_Release, Tcl_EventuallyFree \- avoid freeing storage while it's being used
+Tcl_Preserve, Tcl_Release, Tcl_EventuallyFree \- avoid freeing storage while it is being used
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -36,7 +36,7 @@ having to do with widget deletion, but are also useful in many other
 situations.  When a widget is deleted, its
 widget record (the structure holding information specific to the
 widget) must be returned to the storage allocator.
-However, it's possible that the widget record is in active use
+However, it is possible that the widget record is in active use
 by one of the procedures on the stack at the time of the deletion.
 This can happen, for example, if the command associated with a button
 widget causes the button to be destroyed:  an X event causes an
diff --git a/doc/PrintDbl.3 b/doc/PrintDbl.3
index 75e7663..279b4d5 100644
--- a/doc/PrintDbl.3
+++ b/doc/PrintDbl.3
@@ -16,19 +16,17 @@ Tcl_PrintDouble \- Convert floating value to string
 .sp
 \fBTcl_PrintDouble\fR(\fIinterp, value, dst\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
+.AS Tcl_Interp *interp out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
-.VS
 Before Tcl 8.0, the \fBtcl_precision\fR variable in this interpreter
 controlled the conversion.  As of Tcl 8.0, this argument is ignored and
 the conversion is controlled by the \fBtcl_precision\fR variable
 that is now shared by all interpreters.
-.VE
 .AP double value in
 Floating-point value to be converted.
 .AP char *dst out
-Where to store string representing \fIvalue\fR.  Must have at
-least TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE characters of storage.
+Where to store the string representing \fIvalue\fR.  Must have at
+least \fBTCL_DOUBLE_SPACE\fR characters of storage.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -36,10 +34,22 @@ least TCL_DOUBLE_SPACE characters of storage.
 \fBTcl_PrintDouble\fR generates a string that represents the value
 of \fIvalue\fR and stores it in memory at the location given by
 \fIdst\fR.  It uses \fB%g\fR format to generate the string, with one
-special twist: the string is guaranteed to contain either
-a ``.'' or an ``e'' so that it doesn't look like an integer.  Where
-\fB%g\fR would generate an integer with no decimal point, \fBTcl_PrintDouble\fR
-adds ``.0''.
+special twist: the string is guaranteed to contain either a
+.QW .
+or an
+.QW e
+so that it does not look like an integer.  Where \fB%g\fR would
+generate an integer with no decimal point, \fBTcl_PrintDouble\fR adds
+.QW .0 .
+.VS 8.5
+.PP
+If the \fBtcl_precision\fR value is non-zero, the result will have
+precisely that many digits of significance.  If the value is zero
+(the default), the result will have the fewest digits needed to
+represent the number in such a way that \fBTcl_NewDoubleObj\fR
+will generate the same number when presented with the given string.
+IEEE semantics of rounding to even apply to the conversion.
+.VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 conversion, double-precision, floating-point, string
diff --git a/doc/RecEvalObj.3 b/doc/RecEvalObj.3
index 25982c8..2eed471 100644
--- a/doc/RecEvalObj.3
+++ b/doc/RecEvalObj.3
@@ -16,15 +16,15 @@ Tcl_RecordAndEvalObj \- save command on history list before evaluating
 int
 \fBTcl_RecordAndEvalObj\fR(\fIinterp, cmdPtr, flags\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp;
+.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter in which to evaluate command.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *cmdPtr in
 Points to a Tcl object containing a command (or sequence of commands)
 to execute.
 .AP int flags in
-An OR'ed combination of flag bits.  TCL_NO_EVAL means record the
-command but don't evaluate it.  TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL means evaluate
+An OR'ed combination of flag bits.  \fBTCL_NO_EVAL\fR means record the
+command but do not evaluate it.  \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR means evaluate
 the command at global level instead of the current stack level.
 .BE
 
@@ -32,18 +32,18 @@ the command at global level instead of the current stack level.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RecordAndEvalObj\fR is invoked to record a command as an event
 on the history list and then execute it using \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR
-(or \fBTcl_GlobalEvalObj\fR if the TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL bit is set
+(or \fBTcl_GlobalEvalObj\fR if the \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR bit is set
 in \fIflags\fR).
-It returns a completion code such as TCL_OK just like \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR,
+It returns a completion code such as \fBTCL_OK\fR just like \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR,
 as well as a result object containing additional information
 (a result value or error message)
 that can be retrieved using \fBTcl_GetObjResult\fR.
-If you don't want the command recorded on the history list then
+If you do not want the command recorded on the history list then
 you should invoke \fBTcl_EvalObjEx\fR instead of \fBTcl_RecordAndEvalObj\fR.
 Normally \fBTcl_RecordAndEvalObj\fR is only called with top-level
 commands typed by the user, since the purpose of history is to
-allow the user to re-issue recently-invoked commands.
-If the \fIflags\fR argument contains the TCL_NO_EVAL bit then
+allow the user to re-issue recently invoked commands.
+If the \fIflags\fR argument contains the \fBTCL_NO_EVAL\fR bit then
 the command is recorded without being evaluated.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/RecordEval.3 b/doc/RecordEval.3
index 4ca030d..a8f3087 100644
--- a/doc/RecordEval.3
+++ b/doc/RecordEval.3
@@ -17,14 +17,14 @@ Tcl_RecordAndEval \- save command on history list before evaluating
 int
 \fBTcl_RecordAndEval\fR(\fIinterp, cmd, flags\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp;
+.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter in which to evaluate command.
-.AP "CONST char" *cmd in
+.AP "const char" *cmd in
 Command (or sequence of commands) to execute.
 .AP int flags in
-An OR'ed combination of flag bits.  TCL_NO_EVAL means record the
-command but don't evaluate it.  TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL means evaluate
+An OR'ed combination of flag bits.  \fBTCL_NO_EVAL\fR means record the
+command but do not evaluate it.  \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR means evaluate
 the command at global level instead of the current stack level.
 .BE
 
@@ -32,15 +32,15 @@ the command at global level instead of the current stack level.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RecordAndEval\fR is invoked to record a command as an event
 on the history list and then execute it using \fBTcl_Eval\fR
-(or \fBTcl_GlobalEval\fR if the TCL_EVAL_GLOBAL bit is set in \fIflags\fR).
-It returns a completion code such as TCL_OK just like \fBTcl_Eval\fR
+(or \fBTcl_GlobalEval\fR if the \fBTCL_EVAL_GLOBAL\fR bit is set in \fIflags\fR).
+It returns a completion code such as \fBTCL_OK\fR just like \fBTcl_Eval\fR
 and it leaves information in the interpreter's result.
-If you don't want the command recorded on the history list then
+If you do not want the command recorded on the history list then
 you should invoke \fBTcl_Eval\fR instead of \fBTcl_RecordAndEval\fR.
 Normally \fBTcl_RecordAndEval\fR is only called with top-level
 commands typed by the user, since the purpose of history is to
 allow the user to re-issue recently-invoked commands.
-If the \fIflags\fR argument contains the TCL_NO_EVAL bit then
+If the \fIflags\fR argument contains the \fBTCL_NO_EVAL\fR bit then
 the command is recorded without being evaluated.
 .PP
 Note that \fBTcl_RecordAndEval\fR has been largely replaced by the
diff --git a/doc/RegConfig.3 b/doc/RegConfig.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..19c0bb0
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/RegConfig.3
@@ -0,0 +1,112 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2002 Andreas Kupries <andreas_kupries@users.sourceforge.net>
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.so man.macros
+.TH Tcl_RegisterConfig 3 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+Tcl_RegisterConfig \- procedures to register embedded configuration information
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_RegisterConfig\fR(\fIinterp, pkgName, configuration, valEncoding\fR)
+.sp
+.SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_Interp *configuration
+.AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
+Refers to the interpreter the embedded configuration information is
+registered for. Must not be NULL.
+.AP "const char" *pkgName in
+Contains the name of the package registering the embedded
+configuration as ASCII string. This means that this information is in
+UTF-8 too. Must not be NULL.
+.AP Tcl_Config *configuration in
+Refers to an array of Tcl_Config entries containing the information
+embedded in the binary library. Must not be NULL. The end of the array
+is signaled by either a key identical to NULL, or a key referring to
+the empty string.
+.AP "const char" *valEncoding in
+Contains the name of the encoding used to store the configuration
+values as ASCII string. This means that this information is in UTF-8
+too. Must not be NULL.
+.BE
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The function described here has its base in TIP 59 and provides
+extensions with support for the embedding of configuration
+information into their binary library and the generation of a
+Tcl-level interface for querying this information.
+.PP
+To embed configuration information into their binary library an
+extension has to define a non-volatile array of Tcl_Config entries in
+one if its source files and then call \fBTcl_RegisterConfig\fR to
+register that information.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_RegisterConfig\fR takes four arguments; first, a reference to
+the interpreter we are registering the information with, second, the
+name of the package registering its configuration information, third,
+a pointer to an array of structures, and fourth a string declaring the
+encoding used by the configuration values.
+.PP
+The string \fIvalEncoding\fR contains the name of an encoding known to
+Tcl.  All these names are use only characters in the ASCII subset of
+UTF-8 and are thus implicitly in the UTF-8 encoding. It is expected
+that keys are legible English text and therefore using the ASCII
+subset of UTF-8. In other words, they are expected to be in UTF-8
+too. The values associated with the keys can be any string
+however. For these the contents of \fIvalEncoding\fR define which
+encoding was used to represent the characters of the strings.
+.PP
+Each element of the \fIconfiguration\fR array refers to two strings
+containing the key and the value associated with that key. The end of
+the array is signaled by either an empty key or a key identical to
+NULL. The function makes \fBno\fR copy of the \fIconfiguration\fR
+array. This means that the caller has to make sure that the memory
+holding this array is never released. This is the meaning behind the
+word \fBnon-volatile\fR used earlier. The easiest way to accomplish
+this is to define a global static array of Tcl_Config entries. See the file
+.QW generic/tclPkgConfig.c
+in the sources of the Tcl core for an example.
+.PP
+When called \fBTcl_RegisterConfig\fR will
+.IP (1)
+create a namespace having the provided \fIpkgName\fR, if not yet
+existing.
+.IP (2)
+create the command \fBpkgconfig\fR in that namespace and link it to
+the provided information so that the keys from _configuration_ and
+their associated values can be retrieved through calls to
+\fBpkgconfig\fR.
+.PP
+The command \fBpkgconfig\fR will provide two subcommands, \fBlist\fR
+and \fBget\fR:
+.RS
+.TP
+::\fIpkgName\fR::\fBpkgconfig\fR list
+Returns a list containing the names of all defined keys.
+.TP
+::\fIpkgName\fR::\fBpkgconfig\fR get \fIkey\fR
+Returns the configuration value associated with the specified
+\fIkey\fR.
+.RE
+.SH TCL_CONFIG
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_Config\fR structure contains the following fields:
+.PP
+.CS
+typedef struct Tcl_Config {
+    const char* key;
+    const char* value;
+} Tcl_Config;
+.CE
+.\" No cross references yet.
+.\" .SH "SEE ALSO"
+.SH KEYWORDS
+embedding, configuration, binary library
diff --git a/doc/RegExp.3 b/doc/RegExp.3
index d2163f2..0ac091c 100644
--- a/doc/RegExp.3
+++ b/doc/RegExp.3
@@ -16,93 +16,88 @@ Tcl_RegExpMatch, Tcl_RegExpCompile, Tcl_RegExpExec, Tcl_RegExpRange, Tcl_GetRegE
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_RegExpMatchObj\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIstrObj\fR, \fIpatObj\fR)
+\fBTcl_RegExpMatchObj\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fItextObj\fR, \fIpatObj\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_RegExpMatch\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIstring\fR, \fIpattern\fR)
+\fBTcl_RegExpMatch\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fItext\fR, \fIpattern\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_RegExp
 \fBTcl_RegExpCompile\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIpattern\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_RegExpExec\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIregexp\fR, \fIstring\fR, \fIstart\fR)
+\fBTcl_RegExpExec\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIregexp\fR, \fItext\fR, \fIstart\fR)
 .sp
+void
 \fBTcl_RegExpRange\fR(\fIregexp\fR, \fIindex\fR, \fIstartPtr\fR, \fIendPtr\fR)
-.VS 8.1
 .sp
 Tcl_RegExp
 \fBTcl_GetRegExpFromObj\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIpatObj\fR, \fIcflags\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_RegExpExecObj\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIregexp\fR, \fIobjPtr\fR, \fIoffset\fR, \fInmatches\fR, \fIeflags\fR)
+\fBTcl_RegExpExecObj\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIregexp\fR, \fItextObj\fR, \fIoffset\fR, \fInmatches\fR, \fIeflags\fR)
 .sp
+void
 \fBTcl_RegExpGetInfo\fR(\fIregexp\fR, \fIinfoPtr\fR)
-.VE 8.1
-
+.fi
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
+.AS Tcl_RegExpInfo *interp in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter to use for error reporting.  The interpreter may be
 NULL if no error reporting is desired.
-.VS 8.1
-.AP Tcl_Obj *strObj in/out
-Refers to the object from which to get the string to search.  The
+.AP Tcl_Obj *textObj in/out
+Refers to the object from which to get the text to search.  The
 internal representation of the object may be converted to a form that
 can be efficiently searched.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *patObj in/out
 Refers to the object from which to get a regular expression. The
 compiled regular expression is cached in the object.
-.VE 8.1
-.AP char *string in
-String to check for a match with a regular expression.
-.AP "CONST char" *pattern in
+.AP char *text in
+Text to search for a match with a regular expression.
+.AP "const char" *pattern in
 String in the form of a regular expression pattern.
 .AP Tcl_RegExp regexp in
 Compiled regular expression.  Must have been returned previously
 by \fBTcl_GetRegExpFromObj\fR or \fBTcl_RegExpCompile\fR.
 .AP char *start in
-If \fIstring\fR is just a portion of some other string, this argument
+If \fItext\fR is just a portion of some other string, this argument
 identifies the beginning of the larger string.
-If it isn't the same as \fIstring\fR, then no \fB^\fR matches
-will be allowed.
+If it is not the same as \fItext\fR, then no
+.QW \fB^\fR
+matches will be allowed.
 .AP int index in
 Specifies which range is desired:  0 means the range of the entire
 match, 1 or greater means the range that matched a parenthesized
 sub-expression.
-.VS 8.4
-.AP "CONST char" **startPtr out
+.AP "const char" **startPtr out
 The address of the first character in the range is stored here, or
 NULL if there is no such range.
-.AP "CONST char" **endPtr out
+.AP "const char" **endPtr out
 The address of the character just after the last one in the range
 is stored here, or NULL if there is no such range.
-.VE 8.4
-.VS 8.1
 .AP int cflags in
-OR-ed combination of compilation flags. See below for more information.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in/out
-An object which contains the string to check for a match with a
-regular expression.
+OR-ed combination of the compilation flags \fBTCL_REG_ADVANCED\fR,
+\fBTCL_REG_EXTENDED\fR, \fBTCL_REG_BASIC\fR, \fBTCL_REG_EXPANDED\fR,
+\fBTCL_REG_QUOTE\fR, \fBTCL_REG_NOCASE\fR, \fBTCL_REG_NEWLINE\fR,
+\fBTCL_REG_NLSTOP\fR, \fBTCL_REG_NLANCH\fR, \fBTCL_REG_NOSUB\fR, and
+\fBTCL_REG_CANMATCH\fR. See below for more information.
 .AP int offset in
-The character offset into the string where matching should begin.
+The character offset into the text where matching should begin.
 The value of the offset has no impact on \fB^\fR matches.  This
 behavior is controlled by \fIeflags\fR.
 .AP int nmatches in
 The number of matching subexpressions that should be remembered for
 later use.  If this value is 0, then no subexpression match
-information will be computed.  If the value is -1, then
+information will be computed.  If the value is \-1, then
 all of the matching subexpressions will be remembered.  Any other
 value will be taken as the maximum number of subexpressions to
 remember.
 .AP int eflags in
-OR-ed combination of the values TCL_REG_NOTBOL and TCL_REG_NOTEOL.
-See below for more information.
+OR-ed combination of the execution flags \fBTCL_REG_NOTBOL\fR and
+\fBTCL_REG_NOTEOL\fR. See below for more information.
 .AP Tcl_RegExpInfo *infoPtr out
 The address of the location where information about a previous match
 should be stored by \fBTcl_RegExpGetInfo\fR.
-.VE 8.1
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RegExpMatch\fR determines whether its \fIpattern\fR argument
@@ -114,13 +109,11 @@ If there is no match then \fBTcl_RegExpMatch\fR returns 0.
 If an error occurs in the matching process (e.g. \fIpattern\fR
 is not a valid regular expression) then \fBTcl_RegExpMatch\fR
 returns \-1 and leaves an error message in the interpreter result.
-.VS 8.1.2
 \fBTcl_RegExpMatchObj\fR is similar to \fBTcl_RegExpMatch\fR except it
-operates on the Tcl objects \fIstrObj\fR and \fIpatObj\fR instead of
+operates on the Tcl objects \fItextObj\fR and \fIpatObj\fR instead of
 UTF strings. 
 \fBTcl_RegExpMatchObj\fR is generally more efficient than
 \fBTcl_RegExpMatch\fR, so it is the preferred interface.
-.VE 8.1.2
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RegExpCompile\fR, \fBTcl_RegExpExec\fR, and \fBTcl_RegExpRange\fR
 provide lower-level access to the regular expression pattern matcher.
@@ -136,7 +129,7 @@ up to the next call to \fBTcl_RegExpCompile\fR;  it is not safe to
 retain these values for long periods of time.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RegExpExec\fR executes the regular expression pattern matcher.
-It returns 1 if \fIstring\fR contains a range of characters that
+It returns 1 if \fItext\fR contains a range of characters that
 match \fIregexp\fR, 0 if no match is found, and
 \-1 if an error occurs.
 In the case of an error, \fBTcl_RegExpExec\fR leaves an error
@@ -145,14 +138,16 @@ When searching a string for multiple matches of a pattern,
 it is important to distinguish between the start of the original
 string and the start of the current search.
 For example, when searching for the second occurrence of a
-match, the \fIstring\fR argument might point to the character
+match, the \fItext\fR argument might point to the character
 just after the first match;  however, it is important for the
 pattern matcher to know that this is not the start of the entire string,
-so that it doesn't allow \fB^\fR atoms in the pattern to match.
+so that it does not allow
+.QW \fB^\fR
+atoms in the pattern to match.
 The \fIstart\fR argument provides this information by pointing
-to the start of the overall string containing \fIstring\fR.
-\fIStart\fR will be less than or equal to \fIstring\fR;  if it
-is less than \fIstring\fR then no \fB^\fR matches will be allowed.
+to the start of the overall string containing \fItext\fR.
+\fIStart\fR will be less than or equal to \fItext\fR;  if it
+is less than \fItext\fR then no \fB^\fR matches will be allowed.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RegExpRange\fR may be invoked after \fBTcl_RegExpExec\fR
 returns;  it provides detailed information about what ranges of
@@ -168,7 +163,6 @@ information is returned about the range of characters that matched the
 If there is no range corresponding to \fIindex\fR then NULL
 is stored in \fI*startPtr\fR and \fI*endPtr\fR.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 \fBTcl_GetRegExpFromObj\fR, \fBTcl_RegExpExecObj\fR, and
 \fBTcl_RegExpGetInfo\fR are object interfaces that provide the most
 direct control of Henry Spencer's regular expression library.  For
@@ -190,23 +184,29 @@ occurs while compiling the regular expression then
 \fBTcl_GetRegExpFromObj\fR returns NULL and leaves an error message in
 the interpreter result.  The regular expression token can be used as
 long as the internal representation of \fIpatObj\fR refers to the
-compiled form.  The \fIeflags\fR argument is a bitwise OR of
+compiled form.  The \fIcflags\fR argument is a bit-wise OR of
 zero or more of the following flags that control the compilation of
 \fIpatObj\fR:
 .RS 2
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_ADVANCED\fR
-Compile advanced regular expressions (`AREs').  This mode corresponds to
-the normal regular expression syntax accepted by the Tcl regexp and
-regsub commands.
+Compile advanced regular expressions
+.PQ ARE s .
+This mode corresponds to
+the normal regular expression syntax accepted by the Tcl \fBregexp\fR and
+\fBregsub\fR commands.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_EXTENDED\fR
-Compile extended regular expressions (`EREs').  This mode corresponds
+Compile extended regular expressions
+.PQ ERE s .
+This mode corresponds
 to the regular expression syntax recognized by Tcl 8.0 and earlier
 versions. 
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_BASIC\fR
-Compile basic regular expressions (`BREs').  This mode corresponds
+Compile basic regular expressions
+.PQ BRE s .
+This mode corresponds
 to the regular expression syntax recognized by common Unix utilities
 like \fBsed\fR and \fBgrep\fR.  This is the default if no flags are
 specified.
@@ -226,26 +226,54 @@ Compile for matching that ignores upper/lower case distinctions.
 \fBTCL_REG_NEWLINE\fR
 Compile for newline-sensitive matching.  By default, newline is a
 completely ordinary character with no special meaning in either
-regular expressions or strings.  With this flag, `[^' bracket
-expressions and `.' never match newline, `^' matches an empty string
-after any newline in addition to its normal function, and `$' matches
+regular expressions or strings.  With this flag,
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW .
+never match newline,
+.QW ^
+matches an empty string
+after any newline in addition to its normal function, and
+.QW $
+matches
 an empty string before any newline in addition to its normal function.
-\fBREG_NEWLINE\fR is the bitwise OR of \fBREG_NLSTOP\fR and
+\fBREG_NEWLINE\fR is the bit-wise OR of \fBREG_NLSTOP\fR and
 \fBREG_NLANCH\fR.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_NLSTOP\fR
 Compile for partial newline-sensitive matching,
 with the behavior of
-`[^' bracket expressions and `.' affected,
-but not the behavior of `^' and `$'.  In this mode, `[^' bracket
-expressions and `.' never match newline.
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW .
+affected, but not the behavior of
+.QW ^
+and
+.QW $ .
+In this mode,
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW .
+never match newline.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_NLANCH\fR
 Compile for inverse partial newline-sensitive matching,
 with the behavior of
-of `^' and `$' (the ``anchors'') affected, but not the behavior of
-`[^' bracket expressions and `.'.  In this mode `^' matches an empty string
-after any newline in addition to its normal function, and `$' matches
+.QW ^
+and
+.QW $
+(the
+.QW anchors )
+affected, but not the behavior of
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW . .
+In this mode
+.QW ^
+matches an empty string
+after any newline in addition to its normal function, and
+.QW $
+matches
 an empty string before any newline in addition to its normal function.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_NOSUB\fR
@@ -273,25 +301,33 @@ error message in the interpreter result.  The \fInmatches\fR value
 indicates to the matcher how many subexpressions are of interest.  If
 \fInmatches\fR is 0, then no subexpression match information is
 recorded, which may allow the matcher to make various optimizations.
-If the value is -1, then all of the subexpressions in the pattern are
+If the value is \-1, then all of the subexpressions in the pattern are
 remembered.  If the value is a positive integer, then only that number
 of subexpressions will be remembered.  Matching begins at the
 specified Unicode character index given by \fIoffset\fR.  Unlike
 \fBTcl_RegExpExec\fR, the behavior of anchors is not affected by the
 offset value.  Instead the behavior of the anchors is explicitly
-controlled by the \fIeflags\fR argument, which is a bitwise OR of
+controlled by the \fIeflags\fR argument, which is a bit-wise OR of
 zero or more of the following flags:
 .RS 2
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_NOTBOL\fR
 The starting character will not be treated as the beginning of a
-line or the beginning of the string, so `^' will not match there.
-Note that this flag has no effect on how `\fB\eA\fR' matches.
+line or the beginning of the string, so
+.QW ^
+will not match there.
+Note that this flag has no effect on how
+.QW \fB\eA\fR
+matches.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_REG_NOTEOL\fR
 The last character in the string will not be treated as the end of a
-line or the end of the string, so '$' will not match there.
-Note that this flag has no effect on how `\fB\eZ\fR' matches.
+line or the end of the string, so
+.QW $
+will not match there.
+Note that this flag has no effect on how
+.QW \fB\eZ\fR
+matches.
 .RE
 .PP
 \fBTcl_RegExpGetInfo\fR retrieves information about the last match
@@ -301,16 +337,16 @@ defined as follows:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_RegExpInfo {
-	int \fInsubs\fR;
-	Tcl_RegExpIndices *\fImatches\fR;
-	long \fIextendStart\fR;
+        int \fInsubs\fR;
+        Tcl_RegExpIndices *\fImatches\fR;
+        long \fIextendStart\fR;
 } Tcl_RegExpInfo;
 .CE
 .PP
 The \fInsubs\fR field contains a count of the number of parenthesized
 subexpressions within the regular expression.  If the \fBTCL_REG_NOSUB\fR
 was used, then this value will be zero.  The \fImatches\fR field
-points to an array of \fInsubs\fR values that indicate the bounds of each
+points to an array of \fInsubs\fR+1 values that indicate the bounds of each
 subexpression matched.  The first element in the array refers to the
 range matched by the entire regular expression, and subsequent elements
 refer to the parenthesized subexpressions in the order that they
@@ -319,8 +355,8 @@ follows:
 .PP
 .CS
 typedef struct Tcl_RegExpIndices {
-	long \fIstart\fR;
-	long \fIend\fR;
+        long \fIstart\fR;
+        long \fIend\fR;
 } Tcl_RegExpIndices;
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -331,7 +367,7 @@ subexpression.  The \fIend\fR index identifies the first character
 after the matched subexpression.  If the subexpression matched the
 empty string, then \fIstart\fR and \fIend\fR will be equal.  If the
 subexpression did not participate in the match, then \fIstart\fR and
-\fIend\fR will be set to -1.
+\fIend\fR will be set to \-1.
 .PP
 The \fIextendStart\fR field in \fBTcl_RegExpInfo\fR is only set if the
 \fBTCL_REG_CANMATCH\fR flag was used.  It indicates the first
@@ -340,8 +376,7 @@ found, this will be the same as the beginning of the current match.
 If no match was found, then it indicates the earliest point at which a
 match might occur if additional text is appended to the string.  If it
 is no match is possible even with further text, this field will be set 
-to -1.
-.VE 8.1
+to \-1.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 re_syntax(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/doc/SaveResult.3 b/doc/SaveResult.3
index 8eb9b46..f47500e 100644
--- a/doc/SaveResult.3
+++ b/doc/SaveResult.3
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1997 by Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2004. (not subject to US copyright)
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -8,35 +9,95 @@
 .TH Tcl_SaveResult 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_SaveResult, Tcl_RestoreResult, Tcl_DiscardResult \- save and restore an interpreter's result
+Tcl_SaveInterpState, Tcl_RestoreInterpState, Tcl_DiscardInterpState, Tcl_SaveResult, Tcl_RestoreResult, Tcl_DiscardResult \- save and restore an interpreter's state
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-\fBTcl_SaveResult(\fIinterp, statePtr\fB)\fR
+Tcl_InterpState
+\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR(\fIinterp, status\fR)
 .sp
-\fBTcl_RestoreResult(\fIinterp, statePtr\fB)\fR
+int
+\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR(\fIinterp, state\fR)
 .sp
-\fBTcl_DiscardResult(\fIstatePtr\fB)\fR
+\fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR(\fIstate\fR)
+.sp
+\fBTcl_SaveResult\fR(\fIinterp, savedPtr\fR)
+.sp
+\fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR(\fIinterp, savedPtr\fR)
+.sp
+\fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR(\fIsavedPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_SavedResult statePtr
+.AS Tcl_InterpState savedPtr
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter for which state should be saved.
-.AP Tcl_SavedResult *statePtr in
+.AP int status in
+Return code value to save as part of interpreter state.
+.AP Tcl_InterpState state in
+Saved state token to be restored or discarded.
+.AP Tcl_SavedResult *savedPtr in
 Pointer to location where interpreter result should be saved or restored.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
+.VS 8.5
 These routines allows a C procedure to take a snapshot of the current
-interpreter result so that it can be restored after a call
+state of an interpreter so that it can be restored after a call
 to \fBTcl_Eval\fR or some other routine that modifies the interpreter
-result.  These routines are passed a pointer to a structure that is
-used to store enough information to restore the interpreter result
-state.  This structure can be allocated on the stack of the calling
+state.  There are two triplets of routines meant to work together.
+.PP
+The first triplet stores the snapshot of interpreter state in
+an opaque token returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR.  That token
+value may then be passed back to one of \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR
+or \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR, depending on whether the interp
+state is to be restored.  So long as one of the latter two routines
+is called, Tcl will take care of memory management.
+.PP
+The second triplet stores the snapshot of only the interpreter
+result (not its complete state) in memory allocated by the caller.
+These routines are passed a pointer to a \fBTcl_SavedResult\fR structure
+that is used to store enough information to restore the interpreter result.
+This structure can be allocated on the stack of the calling
 procedure.  These routines do not save the state of any error
-information in the interpreter (e.g. the \fBerrorCode\fR or
-\fBerrorInfo\fR variables).
+information in the interpreter (e.g. the \fB\-errorcode\fR or
+\fB\-errorinfo\fR return options, when an error is in progress).
+.PP
+Because the routines \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR,
+\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR, and \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR perform
+a superset of the functions provided by the other routines,
+any new code should only make use of the more powerful routines.
+The older, weaker routines \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, \fBTcl_RestoreResult\fR,
+and \fBTcl_DiscardResult\fR continue to exist only for the sake
+of existing programs that may already be using them.  
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR takes a snapshot of those portions of
+interpreter state that make up the full result of script evaluation.
+This include the interpreter result, the return code (passed in
+as the \fIstatus\fR argument, and any return options, including
+\fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR when an error is in progress.
+This snapshot is returned as an opaque token of type \fBTcl_InterpState\fR.
+The call to \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR does not itself change the
+state of the interpreter.  Unlike \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR, it does
+not reset the interpreter.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR accepts a \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token
+previously returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR and restores the
+state of the interp to the state held in that snapshot.  The return
+value of \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR is the status value originally
+passed to \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR when the snapshot token was
+created.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR is called to release a \fBTcl_InterpState\fR
+token previously returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR when that
+snapshot is not to be restored to an interp.
+.PP
+The \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token returned by \fBTcl_SaveInterpState\fR
+must eventually be passed to either \fBTcl_RestoreInterpState\fR
+or \fBTcl_DiscardInterpState\fR to avoid a memory leak.  Once
+the \fBTcl_InterpState\fR token is passed to one of them, the
+token is no longer valid and should not be used anymore.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 \fBTcl_SaveResult\fR moves the string and object results
 of \fIinterp\fR into the location specified by \fIstatePtr\fR.
diff --git a/doc/SetChanErr.3 b/doc/SetChanErr.3
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..13bd94a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/SetChanErr.3
@@ -0,0 +1,153 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2005 Andreas Kupries <andreas_kupries@users.sourceforge.net>
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.so man.macros
+.TH Tcl_SetChannelError 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+Tcl_SetChannelError, Tcl_SetChannelErrorInterp, Tcl_GetChannelError, Tcl_GetChannelErrorInterp \- functions to create/intercept Tcl errors by channel drivers.
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR(\fIchan, msg\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_SetChannelErrorInterp\fR(\fIinterp, msg\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_GetChannelError\fR(\fIchan, msgPtr\fR)
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_GetChannelErrorInterp\fR(\fIinterp, msgPtr\fR)
+.sp
+.SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_Channel chan
+.AP Tcl_Channel chan in
+Refers to the Tcl channel whose bypass area is accessed.
+.AP Tcl_Interp* interp in
+Refers to the Tcl interpreter whose bypass area is accessed.
+.AP Tcl_Obj* msg in
+Error message put into a bypass area.  A list of return options and
+values, followed by a string message.  Both message and the
+option/value information are optional.
+.AP Tcl_Obj** msgPtr out
+Reference to a place where the message stored in the accessed bypass
+area can be stored in.
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The current definition of a Tcl channel driver does not permit the
+direct return of arbitrary error messages, except for the setting and
+retrieval of channel options. All other functions are restricted to
+POSIX error codes.
+.PP
+The functions described here overcome this limitation. Channel drivers
+are allowed to use \fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR and
+\fBTcl_SetChannelErrorInterp\fR to place arbitrary error messages in
+\fBbypass areas\fI defined for channels and interpreters. And the
+generic I/O layer uses \fBTcl_GetChannelError\fR and
+\fBTcl_GetChannelErrorInterp\fR to look for messages in the bypass
+areas and arrange for their return as errors. The posix error codes
+set by a driver are used now if and only if no messages are present.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR stores error information in the bypass area
+of the specified channel. The number of references to the \fBmsg\fR
+object goes up by one. Previously stored information will be
+discarded, by releasing the reference held by the channel. The channel
+reference must not be NULL.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_SetChannelErrorInterp\fR stores error information in the bypass
+area of the specified interpreter. The number of references to the
+\fBmsg\fR object goes up by one. Previously stored information will be
+discarded, by releasing the reference held by the interpreter. The
+interpreter reference must not be NULL.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetChannelError\fR places either the error message held in the
+bypass area of the specified channel into \fImsgPtr\fR, or NULL; and
+resets the bypass. I.e. after an invocation all following invocations
+will return NULL, until an intervening invocation of
+\fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR with a non-NULL message. The \fImsgPtr\fR
+must not be NULL. The reference count of the message is not touched.
+The reference previously held by the channel is now held by the caller
+of the function and it is its responsibility to release that reference
+when it is done with the object.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_GetChannelErrorInterp\fR places either the error message held
+in the bypass area of the specified interpreter into \fImsgPtr\fR, or
+NULL; and resets the bypass. I.e. after an invocation all following
+invocations will return NULL, until an intervening invocation of
+\fBTcl_SetChannelErrorInterp\fR with a non-NULL message. The
+\fImsgPtr\fR must not be NULL. The reference count of the message is
+not touched.  The reference previously held by the interpreter is now
+held by the caller of the function and it is its responsibility to
+release that reference when it is done with the object.
+.PP
+Which functions of a channel driver are allowed to use which bypass
+function is listed below, as is which functions of the public channel
+API may leave a messages in the bypass areas.
+.PP
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverCloseProc\fR
+May use \fBTcl_SetChannelErrorInterp\fR, and only this function.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverInputProc\fR
+May use \fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR, and only this function.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverOutputProc\fR
+May use \fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR, and only this function.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverSeekProc\fR
+May use \fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR, and only this function.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverWideSeekProc\fR
+May use \fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR, and only this function.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverSetOptionProc\fR
+Has already the ability to pass arbitrary error messages. Must
+\fBnot\fR use any of the new functions.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverGetOptionProc\fR
+Has already the ability to pass arbitrary error messages. Must
+\fBnot\fR use any of the new functions.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverWatchProc\fR
+Must \fBnot\fR use any of the new functions. Is internally called and
+has no ability to return any type of error whatsoever.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverBlockModeProc\fR
+May use \fBTcl_SetChannelError\fR, and only this function.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverGetHandleProc\fR
+Must \fBnot\fR use any of the new functions. It is only a low-level
+function, and not used by Tcl commands.
+.IP \fBTcl_DriverHandlerProc\fR
+Must \fBnot\fR use any of the new functions. Is internally called and
+has no ability to return any type of error whatsoever.
+.PP
+Given the information above the following public functions of the Tcl
+C API are affected by these changes. I.e. when these functions are
+called the channel may now contain a stored arbitrary error message
+requiring processing by the caller.
+.PP
+.IP \fBTcl_StackChannel\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_Seek\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_Tell\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_ReadRaw\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_Read\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_ReadChars\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_Gets\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_GetsObj\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_Flush\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_WriteRaw\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_WriteObj\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_Write\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_WriteChars\fR
+.PP
+All other API functions are unchanged. Especially the functions below
+leave all their error information in the interpreter result.
+.PP
+.IP \fBTcl_Close\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_UnregisterChannel\fR
+.IP \fBTcl_UnstackChannel\fR
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+Tcl_Close(3), Tcl_OpenFileChannel(3), Tcl_SetErrno(3)
+
+.SH KEYWORDS
+channel driver, error messages, channel type
diff --git a/doc/SetErrno.3 b/doc/SetErrno.3
index f29345a..1735952 100644
--- a/doc/SetErrno.3
+++ b/doc/SetErrno.3
@@ -19,14 +19,14 @@ void
 int
 \fBTcl_GetErrno\fR()
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_ErrnoId\fR()
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_ErrnoMsg\fR(\fIerrorCode\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS int errorCode in
+.AS int errorCode
 .AP int errorCode in
 A POSIX error code such as \fBENOENT\fR.
 .BE
@@ -52,9 +52,11 @@ instead of accessing \fBerrno\fR directly.
 \fBTcl_ErrnoId\fR and \fBTcl_ErrnoMsg\fR return string
 representations of \fBerrno\fR values.  \fBTcl_ErrnoId\fR
 returns a machine-readable textual identifier such as
-"EACCES" that corresponds to the current value of \fBerrno\fR.
+.QW EACCES
+that corresponds to the current value of \fBerrno\fR.
 \fBTcl_ErrnoMsg\fR returns a human-readable string such as
-"permission denied" that corresponds to the value of its
+.QW "permission denied"
+that corresponds to the value of its
 \fIerrorCode\fR argument.  The \fIerrorCode\fR argument is
 typically the value returned by \fBTcl_GetErrno\fR.
 The strings returned by these functions are
diff --git a/doc/SetResult.3 b/doc/SetResult.3
index 9844251..2245794 100644
--- a/doc/SetResult.3
+++ b/doc/SetResult.3
@@ -19,38 +19,40 @@ Tcl_SetObjResult, Tcl_GetObjResult, Tcl_SetResult, Tcl_GetStringResult, Tcl_Appe
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_GetObjResult\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
-\fBTcl_SetResult\fR(\fIinterp, string, freeProc\fR)
+\fBTcl_SetResult\fR(\fIinterp, result, freeProc\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetStringResult\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
-\fBTcl_AppendResult\fR(\fIinterp, string, string, ... , \fB(char *) NULL\fR)
+\fBTcl_AppendResult\fR(\fIinterp, result, result, ... , \fB(char *) NULL\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_AppendResultVA\fR(\fIinterp, argList\fR)
 .sp
-\fBTcl_AppendElement\fR(\fIinterp, string\fR)
+\fBTcl_AppendElement\fR(\fIinterp, element\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .sp
 \fBTcl_FreeResult\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_FreeProc freeProc
+.AS Tcl_FreeProc freeProc out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
 Interpreter whose result is to be modified or read.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *objPtr in
 Object value to become result for \fIinterp\fR.
-.AP char *string in
+.AP char *result in
 String value to become result for \fIinterp\fR or to be
 appended to the existing result.
+.AP char *element in
+String value to append as a list element
+to the existing result of \fIinterp\fR.
 .AP Tcl_FreeProc *freeProc in
 Address of procedure to call to release storage at
-\fIstring\fR, or \fBTCL_STATIC\fR, \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR, or
+\fIresult\fR, or \fBTCL_STATIC\fR, \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR, or
 \fBTCL_VOLATILE\fR.
 .AP va_list argList in
-An argument list which must have been initialised using
-\fBTCL_VARARGS_START\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
+An argument list which must have been initialized using
+\fBva_start\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The procedures described here are utilities for manipulating the
@@ -82,20 +84,20 @@ references to it remain.
 The object's reference count is not incremented;
 if the caller needs to retain a long-term pointer to the object
 they should use \fBTcl_IncrRefCount\fR to increment its reference count
-in order to keep it from being freed too early or accidently changed.
+in order to keep it from being freed too early or accidentally changed.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_SetResult\fR
-arranges for \fIstring\fR to be the result for the current Tcl
+arranges for \fIresult\fR to be the result for the current Tcl
 command in \fIinterp\fR, replacing any existing result.
 The \fIfreeProc\fR argument specifies how to manage the storage
-for the \fIstring\fR argument;
+for the \fIresult\fR argument;
 it is discussed in the section
 \fBTHE TCL_FREEPROC ARGUMENT TO TCL_SETRESULT\fR below.
-If \fIstring\fR is \fBNULL\fR, then \fIfreeProc\fR is ignored
+If \fIresult\fR is \fBNULL\fR, then \fIfreeProc\fR is ignored
 and \fBTcl_SetResult\fR
 re-initializes \fIinterp\fR's result to point to an empty string.
 .PP
-\fBTcl_GetStringResult\fR returns the result for \fIinterp\fR as an string.
+\fBTcl_GetStringResult\fR returns the result for \fIinterp\fR as a string.
 If the result was set to an object by a \fBTcl_SetObjResult\fR call,
 the object form will be converted to a string and returned.
 If the object's string representation contains null bytes,
@@ -114,60 +116,62 @@ and the result is left as a empty string.
 \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR also clears the error state managed by
 \fBTcl_AddErrorInfo\fR, \fBTcl_AddObjErrorInfo\fR,
 and \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR.
-
-.SH "OLD STRING PROCEDURES"
-.PP
-Use of the following procedures is deprecated
-since they manipulate the Tcl result as a string.
-Procedures such as \fBTcl_SetObjResult\fR
-that manipulate the result as an object
-can be significantly more efficient.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR makes it easy to build up Tcl results in pieces.
-It takes each of its \fIstring\fR arguments and appends them in order
+It takes each of its \fIresult\fR arguments and appends them in order
 to the current result associated with \fIinterp\fR.
 If the result is in its initialized empty state (e.g. a command procedure
 was just invoked or \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR was just called),
 then \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR sets the result to the concatenation of
-its \fIstring\fR arguments.
+its \fIresult\fR arguments.
 \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR may be called repeatedly as additional pieces
 of the result are produced.
 \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR takes care of all the
 storage management issues associated with managing \fIinterp\fR's
 result, such as allocating a larger result area if necessary.
-It also converts the current interpreter result from an object
-to a string, if necessary, before appending the argument strings.
-Any number of \fIstring\fR arguments may be passed in a single
+It also manages conversion to and from the \fIresult\fR field of the
+\fIinterp\fR so as to handle backward-compatibility with old-style
+extensions.
+Any number of \fIresult\fR arguments may be passed in a single
 call; the last argument in the list must be a NULL pointer.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AppendResultVA\fR is the same as \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR except that
 instead of taking a variable number of arguments it takes an argument list.
+.SH "OLD STRING PROCEDURES"
+.PP
+Use of the following procedures (is deprecated
+since they manipulate the Tcl result as a string.
+Procedures such as \fBTcl_SetObjResult\fR
+that manipulate the result as an object
+can be significantly more efficient.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_AppendElement\fR is similar to \fBTcl_AppendResult\fR in
 that it allows results to be built up in pieces.
-However, \fBTcl_AppendElement\fR takes only a single \fIstring\fR
+However, \fBTcl_AppendElement\fR takes only a single \fIelement\fR
 argument and it appends that argument to the current result
 as a proper Tcl list element.
 \fBTcl_AppendElement\fR adds backslashes or braces if necessary
 to ensure that \fIinterp\fR's result can be parsed as a list and that
-\fIstring\fR will be extracted as a single element.
+\fIelement\fR will be extracted as a single element.
 Under normal conditions, \fBTcl_AppendElement\fR will add a space
 character to \fIinterp\fR's result just before adding the new
 list element, so that the list elements in the result are properly
 separated.
 However if the new list element is the first in a list or sub-list
 (i.e. \fIinterp\fR's current result is empty, or consists of the
-single character ``{'', or ends in the characters `` {'') then no
-space is added.
+single character
+.QW { ,
+or ends in the characters
+.QW " {" )
+then no space is added.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_FreeResult\fR performs part of the work
 of \fBTcl_ResetResult\fR.
 It frees up the memory associated with \fIinterp\fR's result.
-It also sets \fIinterp->freeProc\fR to zero, but doesn't
+It also sets \fIinterp->freeProc\fR to zero, but does not
 change \fIinterp->result\fR or clear error state.
 \fBTcl_FreeResult\fR is most commonly used when a procedure
 is about to replace one result value with another.
-
 .SH "DIRECT ACCESS TO INTERP->RESULT IS DEPRECATED"
 .PP
 It used to be legal for programs to
@@ -178,32 +182,31 @@ because it can make the result's string and object forms inconsistent.
 Programs should always read the result
 using the procedures \fBTcl_GetObjResult\fR or \fBTcl_GetStringResult\fR,
 and write the result using \fBTcl_SetObjResult\fR or \fBTcl_SetResult\fR.
-
 .SH "THE TCL_FREEPROC ARGUMENT TO TCL_SETRESULT"
 .PP
 \fBTcl_SetResult\fR's \fIfreeProc\fR argument specifies how 
-the Tcl system is to manage the storage for the \fIstring\fR argument.
+the Tcl system is to manage the storage for the \fIresult\fR argument.
 If \fBTcl_SetResult\fR or \fBTcl_SetObjResult\fR are called
 at a time when \fIinterp\fR holds a string result,
 they do whatever is necessary to dispose of the old string result
 (see the \fBTcl_Interp\fR manual entry for details on this).
 .PP
-If \fIfreeProc\fR is \fBTCL_STATIC\fR it means that \fIstring\fR
+If \fIfreeProc\fR is \fBTCL_STATIC\fR it means that \fIresult\fR
 refers to an area of static storage that is guaranteed not to be
 modified until at least the next call to \fBTcl_Eval\fR.
 If \fIfreeProc\fR
-is \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR it means that \fIstring\fR was allocated with a call
+is \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR it means that \fIresult\fR was allocated with a call
 to \fBTcl_Alloc\fR and is now the property of the Tcl system.
 \fBTcl_SetResult\fR will arrange for the string's storage to be
 released by calling \fBTcl_Free\fR when it is no longer needed.
-If \fIfreeProc\fR is \fBTCL_VOLATILE\fR it means that \fIstring\fR
+If \fIfreeProc\fR is \fBTCL_VOLATILE\fR it means that \fIresult\fR
 points to an area of memory that is likely to be overwritten when
 \fBTcl_SetResult\fR returns (e.g. it points to something in a stack frame).
 In this case \fBTcl_SetResult\fR will make a copy of the string in
 dynamically allocated storage and arrange for the copy to be the
 result for the current Tcl command.
 .PP
-If \fIfreeProc\fR isn't one of the values \fBTCL_STATIC\fR,
+If \fIfreeProc\fR is not one of the values \fBTCL_STATIC\fR,
 \fBTCL_DYNAMIC\fR, and \fBTCL_VOLATILE\fR, then it is the address
 of a procedure that Tcl should call to free the string.
 This allows applications to use non-standard storage allocators.
@@ -214,10 +217,8 @@ result that match the type \fBTcl_FreeProc\fR:
 typedef void Tcl_FreeProc(char *\fIblockPtr\fR);
 .CE
 When \fIfreeProc\fR is called, its \fIblockPtr\fR will be set to
-the value of \fIstring\fR passed to \fBTcl_SetResult\fR.
-
+the value of \fIresult\fR passed to \fBTcl_SetResult\fR.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_AddErrorInfo, Tcl_CreateObjCommand, Tcl_SetErrorCode, Tcl_Interp
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 append, command, element, list, object, result, return value, interpreter
diff --git a/doc/SetVar.3 b/doc/SetVar.3
index 9391e3e..ce47a73 100644
--- a/doc/SetVar.3
+++ b/doc/SetVar.3
@@ -14,29 +14,25 @@ Tcl_SetVar2Ex, Tcl_SetVar, Tcl_SetVar2, Tcl_ObjSetVar2, Tcl_GetVar2Ex, Tcl_GetVa
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-.VS 8.1
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_SetVar2Ex\fR(\fIinterp, name1, name2, newValuePtr, flags\fR)
-.VE
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_SetVar\fR(\fIinterp, varName, newValue, flags\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_SetVar2\fR(\fIinterp, name1, name2, newValue, flags\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_ObjSetVar2\fR(\fIinterp, part1Ptr, part2Ptr, newValuePtr, flags\fR)
 .sp
-.VS 8.1
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_GetVar2Ex\fR(\fIinterp, name1, name2, flags\fR)
-.VE
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetVar\fR(\fIinterp, varName, flags\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_GetVar2\fR(\fIinterp, name1, name2, flags\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_Obj *
@@ -51,29 +47,27 @@ int
 .AS Tcl_Interp *newValuePtr
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter containing variable.
-.AP "CONST char" *name1 in
+.AP "const char" *name1 in
 Contains the name of an array variable (if \fIname2\fR is non-NULL)
 or (if \fIname2\fR is NULL) either the name of a scalar variable
 or a complete name including both variable name and index.
 May include \fB::\fR namespace qualifiers
 to specify a variable in a particular namespace.
-.AP "CONST char" *name2 in
+.AP "const char" *name2 in
 If non-NULL, gives name of element within array; in this
 case \fIname1\fR must refer to an array variable.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *newValuePtr in
-.VS 8.1
 Points to a Tcl object containing the new value for the variable.
-.VE
 .AP int flags in
 OR-ed combination of bits providing additional information. See below
 for valid values.
-.AP "CONST char" *varName in
+.AP "const char" *varName in
 Name of variable.
 May include \fB::\fR namespace qualifiers
 to specify a variable in a particular namespace.
 May refer to a scalar variable or an element of
 an array.
-.AP "CONST char" *newValue in
+.AP "const char" *newValue in
 New value for variable, specified as a null-terminated string.
 A copy of this value is stored in the variable.
 .AP Tcl_Obj *part1Ptr in
@@ -91,7 +85,6 @@ within an array and \fIpart1Ptr\fR must refer to an array variable.
 These procedures are used to create, modify, read, and delete
 Tcl variables from C code.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 \fBTcl_SetVar2Ex\fR, \fBTcl_SetVar\fR, \fBTcl_SetVar2\fR, and
 \fBTcl_ObjSetVar2\fR 
 will create a new variable or modify an existing one.
@@ -105,14 +98,12 @@ a pointer to a Tcl_Obj.  \fBTcl_SetVar\fR and \fBTcl_SetVar2\fR
 take the new value as a string and return a string; they are
 usually less efficient than \fBTcl_ObjSetVar2\fR.  Note that the
 return value may be different than the \fInewValuePtr\fR or
-.VE
 \fInewValue\fR argument, due to modifications made by write traces.
 If an error occurs in setting the variable (e.g. an array
 variable is referenced without giving an index into the array)
 NULL is returned and an error message is left in \fIinterp\fR's
 result if the \fBTCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG\fR \fIflag\fR bit is set.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 \fBTcl_GetVar2Ex\fR, \fBTcl_GetVar\fR, \fBTcl_GetVar2\fR, and
 \fBTcl_ObjGetVar2\fR
 return the current value of a variable.
@@ -125,9 +116,8 @@ returned as a pointer to a Tcl_Obj.  For \fBTcl_GetVar\fR and
 \fBTcl_GetVar2\fR the value is returned as a string; this is
 usually less efficient, so \fBTcl_GetVar2Ex\fR or \fBTcl_ObjGetVar2\fR
 are preferred.
-.VE
 If an error occurs while reading the variable (e.g. the variable
-doesn't exist or an array element is specified for a scalar
+does not exist or an array element is specified for a scalar
 variable), then NULL is returned and an error message is left
 in \fIinterp\fR's result if the \fBTCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG\fR \fIflag\fR
 bit is set.
@@ -137,9 +127,9 @@ a variable, so that future attempts to read the variable will return
 an error.
 The arguments to these procedures are treated in the same way
 as the arguments to the procedures above.
-If the variable is successfully removed then TCL_OK is returned.
-If the variable cannot be removed because it doesn't exist then
-TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left
+If the variable is successfully removed then \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned.
+If the variable cannot be removed because it does not exist then
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left
 in \fIinterp\fR's result if the \fBTCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG\fR \fIflag\fR
 bit is set.
 If an array element is specified, the given element is removed
@@ -158,23 +148,20 @@ close parenthesis, then the value between the parentheses is
 treated as an index (which can have any string value) and
 the characters before the first open
 parenthesis are treated as the name of an array variable.
-If \fIvarName\fR doesn't have parentheses as described above, then
+If \fIvarName\fR does not have parentheses as described above, then
 the entire string is treated as the name of a scalar variable.
 .IP [2]
 If the \fIname1\fR and \fIname2\fR arguments are provided and
 \fIname2\fR is non-NULL, then an array element is specified and
 the array name and index have
 already been separated by the caller: \fIname1\fR contains the
-name and \fIname2\fR contains the index.
-.VS 8.1
-An error is generated
+name and \fIname2\fR contains the index.  An error is generated
 if \fIname1\fR  contains an open parenthesis and ends with a
 close parenthesis (array element) and \fIname2\fR is non-NULL.
 .IP [3]
 If \fIname2\fR is NULL, \fIname1\fR is treated just like
 \fIvarName\fR in case [1] above (it can be either a scalar or an array
 element variable name).
-.VE
 .PP
 The \fIflags\fR argument may be used to specify any of several
 options to the procedures.
@@ -203,7 +190,7 @@ If an error is returned and this bit is set in \fIflags\fR, then
 an error message will be left in the interpreter's result,
 where it can be retrieved with \fBTcl_GetObjResult\fR
 or \fBTcl_GetStringResult\fR.
-If this flag bit isn't set then no error message is left
+If this flag bit is not set then no error message is left
 and the interpreter's result will not be modified.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_APPEND_VALUE\fR
@@ -218,7 +205,10 @@ Tcl list element before setting (or appending to) the variable.
 A separator space is appended before the new list element unless
 the list element is going to be the first element in a list or
 sublist (i.e. the variable's current value is empty, or contains
-the single character ``{'', or ends in `` }'').
+the single character
+.QW { ,
+or ends in
+.QW " }" ).
 When appending, the original value of the variable must also be
 a valid list, so that the operation is the appending of a new
 list element onto a list.
@@ -231,12 +221,12 @@ Under normal circumstances, the return value is a pointer
 to the variable's value (which is stored in Tcl's variable
 structure and will not change before the next call to \fBTcl_SetVar\fR
 or \fBTcl_SetVar2\fR).
-\fBTcl_GetVar\fR and \fBTcl_GetVar2\fR use the flag bits TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY
-and TCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG, both of
+\fBTcl_GetVar\fR and \fBTcl_GetVar2\fR use the flag bits \fBTCL_GLOBAL_ONLY\fR
+and \fBTCL_LEAVE_ERR_MSG\fR, both of
 which have
 the same meaning as for \fBTcl_SetVar\fR.
 If an error occurs in reading the variable (e.g. the variable
-doesn't exist or an array element is specified for a scalar
+does not exist or an array element is specified for a scalar
 variable), then NULL is returned.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UnsetVar\fR and \fBTcl_UnsetVar2\fR may be used to remove
@@ -244,9 +234,9 @@ a variable, so that future calls to \fBTcl_GetVar\fR or \fBTcl_GetVar2\fR
 for the variable will return an error.
 The arguments to these procedures are treated in the same way
 as the arguments to \fBTcl_GetVar\fR and \fBTcl_GetVar2\fR.
-If the variable is successfully removed then TCL_OK is returned.
-If the variable cannot be removed because it doesn't exist then
-TCL_ERROR is returned.
+If the variable is successfully removed then \fBTCL_OK\fR is returned.
+If the variable cannot be removed because it does not exist then
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned.
 If an array element is specified, the given element is removed
 but the array remains.
 If an array name is specified without an index, then the entire
diff --git a/doc/Signal.3 b/doc/Signal.3
index f8eafd0..5b12654 100644
--- a/doc/Signal.3
+++ b/doc/Signal.3
@@ -13,13 +13,14 @@ Tcl_SignalId, Tcl_SignalMsg \- Convert signal codes
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_SignalId\fR(\fIsig\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_SignalMsg\fR(\fIsig\fR)
 .sp
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS int sig
 .AP int sig in
 A POSIX signal number such as \fBSIGPIPE\fR.
 .BE
@@ -29,8 +30,11 @@ A POSIX signal number such as \fBSIGPIPE\fR.
 \fBTcl_SignalId\fR and \fBTcl_SignalMsg\fR return a string
 representation of the provided signal number (\fIsig\fR).
 \fBTcl_SignalId\fR returns a machine-readable textual identifier such
-as "SIGPIPE". \fBTcl_SignalMsg\fR returns a human-readable string such
-as "bus error".  The strings returned by these functions are
+as
+.QW SIGPIPE .
+\fBTcl_SignalMsg\fR returns a human-readable string such as
+.QW "bus error" .
+The strings returned by these functions are
 statically allocated and the caller must not free or modify them.
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/doc/Sleep.3 b/doc/Sleep.3
index 1abd2e6..2423ba1 100644
--- a/doc/Sleep.3
+++ b/doc/Sleep.3
@@ -16,20 +16,19 @@ Tcl_Sleep \- delay execution for a given number of milliseconds
 .sp
 \fBTcl_Sleep\fR(\fIms\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS int ms
 .AP int ms in
 Number of milliseconds to sleep.
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This procedure delays the calling process by the number of
 milliseconds given by the \fIms\fR parameter and returns
 after that time has elapsed.  It is typically used for things
 like flashing a button, where the delay is short and the
-application needn't do anything while it waits.  For longer
+application need not do anything while it waits.  For longer
 delays where the application needs to respond to other events
 during the delay, the procedure \fBTcl_CreateTimerHandler\fR
 should be used instead of \fBTcl_Sleep\fR.
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 sleep, time, wait
diff --git a/doc/SourceRCFile.3 b/doc/SourceRCFile.3
index ed949cd..eabc47c 100644
--- a/doc/SourceRCFile.3
+++ b/doc/SourceRCFile.3
@@ -14,6 +14,7 @@ Tcl_SourceRCFile \- source the Tcl rc file
 void
 \fBTcl_SourceRCFile\fR(\fIinterp\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS Tcl_Interp *interp
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Tcl interpreter to source rc file into.
 .BE
@@ -26,10 +27,6 @@ sourced is obtained from the global variable \fBtcl_rcFileName\fR in
 the interpreter given by \fIinterp\fR.  If this variable is not
 defined, or if the file it indicates cannot be found, no action is
 taken.
-.PP
-On the Macintosh, after sourcing the rc file, this function will
-additionally source the TEXT resource indicated by the global variable
-\fBtcl_rcRsrcName\fR in \fIinterp\fR.
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 application-specific initialization, main program, rc file
diff --git a/doc/SplitList.3 b/doc/SplitList.3
index b1a298d..fd6ec8b 100644
--- a/doc/SplitList.3
+++ b/doc/SplitList.3
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_ConvertCountedElement\fR(\fIsrc, length, dst, flags\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "CONST char * CONST" ***argvPtr
+.AS "const char *const" ***argvPtr out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp out
 Interpreter to use for error reporting.  If NULL, then no error message
 is left.
@@ -40,17 +40,17 @@ is left.
 Pointer to a string with proper list structure.
 .AP int *argcPtr out
 Filled in with number of elements in \fIlist\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" ***argvPtr out
+.AP "const char" ***argvPtr out
 \fI*argvPtr\fR will be filled in with the address of an array of
 pointers to the strings that are the extracted elements of \fIlist\fR.
 There will be \fI*argcPtr\fR valid entries in the array, followed by
 a NULL entry.
 .AP int argc in
 Number of elements in \fIargv\fR.
-.AP "CONST char * CONST" *argv in
+.AP "const char *const" *argv in
 Array of strings to merge together into a single list.
 Each string will become a separate element of the list.
-.AP "CONST char" *src in
+.AP "const char" *src in
 String that is to become an element of a list.
 .AP int *flagsPtr in
 Pointer to word to fill in with information about \fIsrc\fR.
@@ -151,7 +151,7 @@ include spaces between adjacent list elements.
 \fBTcl_ConvertElement\fR uses one of two different approaches to
 handle the special characters in \fIsrc\fR.  Wherever possible, it
 handles special characters by surrounding the string with braces.
-This produces clean-looking output, but can't be used in some situations,
+This produces clean-looking output, but cannot be used in some situations,
 such as when \fIsrc\fR contains unmatched braces.
 In these situations, \fBTcl_ConvertElement\fR handles special
 characters by generating backslash sequences for them.
@@ -164,6 +164,20 @@ used to generate a portion of an argument for a Tcl command.
 In this case, surrounding \fIsrc\fR with curly braces would cause
 the command not to be parsed correctly.
 .PP
+.VS 8.5
+By default, \fBTcl_ConvertElement\fR will use quoting in its output
+to be sure the first character of an element is not the hash
+character
+.PQ # .
+This is to be sure the first element of any list
+passed to \fBeval\fR is not mis-parsed as the beginning of a comment.
+When a list element is not the first element of a list, this quoting
+is not necessary.  When the caller can be sure that the element is
+not the first element of a list, it can disable quoting of the leading
+hash character by OR-ing the flag value returned by \fBTcl_ScanElement\fR
+with \fBTCL_DONT_QUOTE_HASH\fR.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
 \fBTcl_ScanCountedElement\fR and \fBTcl_ConvertCountedElement\fR are
 the same as \fBTcl_ScanElement\fR and \fBTcl_ConvertElement\fR, except
 the length of string \fIsrc\fR is specified by the \fIlength\fR
diff --git a/doc/SplitPath.3 b/doc/SplitPath.3
index 9bc6acb..6578e3d 100644
--- a/doc/SplitPath.3
+++ b/doc/SplitPath.3
@@ -21,20 +21,20 @@ char *
 Tcl_PathType
 \fBTcl_GetPathType\fR(\fIpath\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_DString ***argvPtr
-.AP "CONST char * CONST" *argvPtr in
+.AS "const char *const" ***argvPtr in/out
+.AP "const char" *path in
 File path in a form appropriate for the current platform (see the
 \fBfilename\fR manual entry for acceptable forms for path names).
 .AP int *argcPtr out
 Filled in with number of path elements in \fIpath\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" ***argvPtr out
+.AP "const char" ***argvPtr out
 \fI*argvPtr\fR will be filled in with the address of an array of
 pointers to the strings that are the extracted elements of \fIpath\fR.
 There will be \fI*argcPtr\fR valid entries in the array, followed by
 a NULL entry.
 .AP int argc in
 Number of elements in \fIargv\fR.
-.AP "CONST char * CONST" *argv in
+.AP "const char *const" *argv in
 Array of path elements to merge together into a single path.
 .AP Tcl_DString *resultPtr in/out
 A pointer to an initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR to which the result of
diff --git a/doc/StaticPkg.3 b/doc/StaticPkg.3
index f4c279c..0dd67d1 100644
--- a/doc/StaticPkg.3
+++ b/doc/StaticPkg.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_StaticPackage 3 7.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_StaticPackage \- make a statically linked package available via the \fBload\fR command
+Tcl_StaticPackage \- make a statically linked package available via the 'load' command
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -20,8 +20,8 @@ Tcl_StaticPackage \- make a statically linked package available via the \fBload\
 If not NULL, points to an interpreter into which the package has
 already been loaded (i.e., the caller has already invoked the
 appropriate initialization procedure).  NULL means the package
-hasn't yet been incorporated into any interpreter.
-.AP "CONST char" *pkgName in
+has not yet been incorporated into any interpreter.
+.AP "const char" *pkgName in
 Name of the package;  should be properly capitalized (first letter
 upper-case, all others lower-case).
 .AP Tcl_PackageInitProc *initProc in
@@ -30,7 +30,7 @@ interpreter.
 .AP Tcl_PackageInitProc *safeInitProc in
 Procedure to call to incorporate this package into a safe interpreter
 (one that will execute untrusted scripts).   NULL means the package
-can't be used in safe interpreters.
+cannot be used in safe interpreters.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
diff --git a/doc/StdChannels.3 b/doc/StdChannels.3
index 2a7dd05..b5b020e 100644
--- a/doc/StdChannels.3
+++ b/doc/StdChannels.3
@@ -26,8 +26,7 @@ output and the other for error messages.
 .PP
 Tcl generalizes this concept in a cross-platform way and
 exposes standard channels to the script level.
-
-.SH APIs
+.SS "APPLICATION PROGRAMMING INTERFACES"
 .PP
 The public API procedures dealing directly with standard channels are
 \fBTcl_GetStdChannel\fR and \fBTcl_SetStdChannel\fR. Additional public
@@ -41,17 +40,21 @@ channel information, or when implicitly required during registration
 of a new channel.
 .PP
 These cases differ in how they handle unavailable platform- specific
-standard channels.  (A channel is not ``available'' if it could not be
+standard channels.  (A channel is not
+.QW available
+if it could not be
 successfully opened; for example, in a Tcl application run as a
 Windows NT service.)
 .TP
 1)
 A single standard channel is initialized when it is explicitly
-specified in a call to \fBTcl_SetStdChannel\fR.  The state of the
+specified in a call to \fBTcl_SetStdChannel\fR.  The states of the
 other standard channels are unaffected.
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 Missing platform-specific standard channels do not matter here. This
 approach is not available at the script level.
+.RE
 .TP
 2)
 All uninitialized standard channels are initialized to
@@ -67,9 +70,7 @@ when information about any standard channel is requested with a call
 to \fBTcl_GetStdChannel\fR, or with a call to \fBTcl_GetChannel\fR
 which specifies one of the standard names (\fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR
 and \fBstderr\fR).
-.RE
-.sp
-.RS
+.PP
 In case of missing platform-specific standard channels, the Tcl
 standard channels are considered as initialized and then immediately
 closed. This means that the first three Tcl channels then opened by
@@ -80,14 +81,13 @@ the application are designated as the Tcl standard channels.
 All uninitialized standard channels are initialized to
 platform-specific default values when a user-requested channel is
 registered with \fBTcl_RegisterChannel\fR.
-.sp
+.PP
 In case of unavailable platform-specific standard channels the channel
 whose creation caused the initialization of the Tcl standard channels
 is made a normal channel.  The next three Tcl channels opened by the
 application are designated as the Tcl standard channels.  In other
 words, of the first four Tcl channels opened by the application the
 second to fourth are designated as the Tcl standard channels.
-.PP
 .SH "RE-INITIALIZATION OF TCL STANDARD CHANNELS"
 .PP
 Once a Tcl standard channel is initialized through one of the methods
@@ -101,21 +101,20 @@ channel, too. If more than one Tcl standard channel was closed
 that slot was not initialized before. It is this behavior which
 enables an application to employ method 1 of initialization, i.e. to
 create and designate their own Tcl standard channels.
-
-.SH tclsh
+.SH "SHELL-SPECIFIC DETAILS"
+.SS tclsh
 .PP
-The Tcl shell (or rather \fBTcl_Main\fR) uses method 2 to initialize
+The Tcl shell (or rather the function \fBTcl_Main\fR, which forms the
+core of the shell's implementation) uses method 2 to initialize
 the standard channels.
-
-.SH wish
+.SS wish
 .PP
-The windowing shell (or rather \fBTk_MainEx\fR) uses method 1 to
+The windowing shell (or rather the function \fBTk_MainEx\fR, which
+forms the core of the shell's implementation) uses method 1 to
 initialize the standard channels (See \fBTk_InitConsoleChannels\fR)
 on non-Unix platforms.  On Unix platforms, \fBTk_MainEx\fR implicitly
 uses method 2 to initialize the standard channels.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_CreateChannel(3), Tcl_RegisterChannel(3), Tcl_GetChannel(3), Tcl_GetStdChannel(3), Tcl_SetStdChannel(3), Tk_InitConsoleChannels(3), tclsh(1), wish(1), Tcl_Main(3), Tk_MainEx(3)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 standard channels
diff --git a/doc/StrMatch.3 b/doc/StrMatch.3
index f490c19..5adaf6e 100644
--- a/doc/StrMatch.3
+++ b/doc/StrMatch.3
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH Tcl_StringMatch 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
+.TH Tcl_StringMatch 3 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
 Tcl_StringMatch, Tcl_StringCaseMatch \- test whether a string matches a pattern
@@ -15,19 +15,20 @@ Tcl_StringMatch, Tcl_StringCaseMatch \- test whether a string matches a pattern
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_StringMatch\fR(\fIstring\fR, \fIpattern\fR)
+\fBTcl_StringMatch\fR(\fIstr\fR, \fIpattern\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_StringCaseMatch\fR(\fIstring\fR, \fIpattern\fR, \fInocase\fR)
+\fBTcl_StringCaseMatch\fR(\fIstr\fR, \fIpattern\fR, \fIflags\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AP char *string in
+.AS "const char" *pattern
+.AP "const char" *str in
 String to test.
-.AP char *pattern in
+.AP "const char" *pattern in
 Pattern to match against string.  May contain special
 characters from the set *?\e[].
-.AP int nocase in
-Specifies whether the match should be done case-sensitive (0) or
-case-insensitive (1).
+.AP int flags in
+OR-ed combination of match flags, currently only \fBTCL_MATCH_NOCASE\fR.
+0 specifies a case-sensitive search.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -35,16 +36,14 @@ case-insensitive (1).
 This utility procedure determines whether a string matches
 a given pattern.  If it does, then \fBTcl_StringMatch\fR returns
 1.  Otherwise \fBTcl_StringMatch\fR returns 0.  The algorithm
-used for matching is the same algorithm used in the ``string match''
+used for matching is the same algorithm used in the \fBstring match\fR
 Tcl command and is similar to the algorithm used by the C-shell
 for file name matching;  see the Tcl manual entry for details.
-.VS 8.1
 .PP
-In \fBTcl_StringCaseMatch\fR, the algorithm is the same, but you have
-the option to make the matching case-insensitive.  If you choose this
-(by passing \fBnocase\fR as 1), then the string and pattern are
-essentially matched in the lower case.
-.VE 8.1
+In \fBTcl_StringCaseMatch\fR, the algorithm is
+the same, but you have the option to make the matching case-insensitive.
+If you choose this (by passing \fBTCL_MATCH_NOCASE\fR), then the string and
+pattern are essentially matched in the lower case.
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 match, pattern, string
diff --git a/doc/StringObj.3 b/doc/StringObj.3
index 6a624db..e451c61 100644
--- a/doc/StringObj.3
+++ b/doc/StringObj.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_StringObj 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_NewStringObj, Tcl_NewUnicodeObj, Tcl_SetStringObj, Tcl_SetUnicodeObj, Tcl_GetStringFromObj, Tcl_GetString, Tcl_GetUnicodeFromObj, Tcl_GetUnicode, Tcl_GetUniChar, Tcl_GetCharLength, Tcl_GetRange, Tcl_AppendToObj, Tcl_AppendUnicodeToObj, Tcl_AppendStringsToObj, Tcl_AppendStringsToObjVA, Tcl_AppendObjToObj, Tcl_SetObjLength, Tcl_ConcatObj, Tcl_AttemptSetObjLength \- manipulate Tcl objects as strings
+Tcl_NewStringObj, Tcl_NewUnicodeObj, Tcl_SetStringObj, Tcl_SetUnicodeObj, Tcl_GetStringFromObj, Tcl_GetString, Tcl_GetUnicodeFromObj, Tcl_GetUnicode, Tcl_GetUniChar, Tcl_GetCharLength, Tcl_GetRange, Tcl_AppendToObj, Tcl_AppendUnicodeToObj, Tcl_AppendObjToObj, Tcl_AppendStringsToObj, Tcl_AppendStringsToObjVA, Tcl_AppendLimitedToObj, Tcl_Format, Tcl_AppendFormatToObj, Tcl_ObjPrintf, Tcl_AppendPrintfToObj, Tcl_SetObjLength, Tcl_AttemptSetObjLength, Tcl_ConcatObj \- manipulate Tcl objects as strings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -60,6 +60,23 @@ void
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_AppendStringsToObjVA\fR(\fIobjPtr, argList\fR)
+.VS 8.5
+.sp
+void
+\fBTcl_AppendLimitedToObj\fR(\fIobjPtr, bytes, length, limit, ellipsis\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Obj *
+\fBTcl_Format\fR(\fIinterp, format, objc, objv\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_AppendFormatToObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, format, objc, objv\fR)
+.sp
+Tcl_Obj *
+\fBTcl_ObjPrintf\fR(\fIformat, ...\fR)
+.sp
+int
+\fBTcl_AppendPrintfToObj\fR(\fIobjPtr, format, ...\fR)
+.VE 8.5
 .sp
 void
 \fBTcl_SetObjLength\fR(\fIobjPtr, newLength\fR)
@@ -70,22 +87,20 @@ int
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_ConcatObj\fR(\fIobjc, objv\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "CONST Tcl_UniChar" *appendObjPtr in/out
-.AP "CONST char" *bytes in
-.VS 8.1
+.AS "const Tcl_UniChar" *appendObjPtr in/out
+.AP "const char" *bytes in
 Points to the first byte of an array of UTF-8-encoded bytes
 used to set or append to a string object.
-This byte array should not contain embedded null bytes
-unless \fIlength\fR is negative.  (Applications needing null bytes
-should represent them as the two-byte sequence \fI\\700\\600\fR, use
+This byte array may contain embedded null characters
+unless \fInumChars\fR is negative.  (Applications needing null bytes
+should represent them as the two-byte sequence \fI\e700\e600\fR, use
 \fBTcl_ExternalToUtf\fR to convert, or \fBTcl_NewByteArrayObj\fR if
 the string is a collection of uninterpreted bytes.)
-.VE 8.1
 .AP int length in
 The number of bytes to copy from \fIbytes\fR when
 initializing, setting, or appending to a string object.
 If negative, all bytes up to the first null are used.
-.AP "CONST Tcl_UniChar" *unicode in
+.AP "const Tcl_UniChar" *unicode in
 Points to the first byte of an array of Unicode characters
 used to set or append to a string object.
 This byte array may contain embedded null characters
@@ -108,19 +123,26 @@ Points to an object to manipulate.
 The object to append to \fIobjPtr\fR in \fBTcl_AppendObjToObj\fR.
 .AP int *lengthPtr out
 If non-NULL, the location where \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR will store
-the the length of an object's string representation.
-.AP "CONST char" *string in
+the length of an object's string representation.
+.AP "const char" *string in
 Null-terminated string value to append to \fIobjPtr\fR.
 .AP va_list argList in
 An argument list which must have been initialised using
-\fBTCL_VARARGS_START\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
+\fBva_start\fR, and cleared using \fBva_end\fR.
+.AP int limit in
+Maximum number of bytes to be appended.
+.AP "const char" *ellipsis in
+Suffix to append when the limit leads to string truncation.
+If NULL is passed then the suffix "..." is used.
+.AP "const char" *format in
+Format control string including % conversion specifiers.
+.AP int objc in
+The number of elements to format or concatenate.
+.AP Tcl_Obj *objv[] in
+The array of objects to format or concatenate.
 .AP int newLength in
 New length for the string value of \fIobjPtr\fR, not including the
 final null character.
-.AP int objc in
-The number of elements to concatenate.
-.AP Tcl_Obj *objv[] in
-The array of objects to concatenate.
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -130,7 +152,7 @@ be manipulated as string values.  They use the internal representation
 of the object to store additional information to make the string
 manipulations more efficient.  In particular, they make a series of
 append operations efficient by allocating extra storage space for the
-string so that it doesn't have to be copied for each append.
+string so that it does not have to be copied for each append.
 Also, indexing and length computations are optimized because the
 Unicode string representation is calculated and cached as needed.
 When using the \fBTcl_Append*\fR family of functions where the
@@ -163,7 +185,7 @@ will be able to modify the string representation within the
 \fBTcl_UpdateStringProc\fR of their \fBTcl_ObjType\fR.  Except for that
 limited purpose, the pointer returned by \fBTcl_GetStringFromObj\fR
 or \fBTcl_GetString\fR should be treated as read-only.  It is
-recommended that this pointer be assigned to a (CONST char *) variable.
+recommended that this pointer be assigned to a (const char *) variable.
 Even in the limited situations where writing to this pointer is
 acceptable, one should take care to respect the copy-on-write
 semantics required by \fBTcl_Obj\fR's, with appropriate calls
@@ -229,6 +251,88 @@ must be a NULL pointer to indicate the end of the list.
 except that instead of taking a variable number of arguments it takes an
 argument list.
 .PP
+.VS 8.5
+\fBTcl_AppendLimitedToObj\fR is similar to \fBTcl_AppendToObj\fR
+except that it imposes a limit on how many bytes are appended.
+This can be handy when the string to be appended might be
+very large, but the value being constructed should not be allowed to grow
+without bound. A common usage is when constructing an error message, where the
+end result should be kept short enough to be read.
+Bytes from \fIbytes\fR are appended to \fIobjPtr\fR, but no more
+than \fIlimit\fR bytes total are to be appended. If the limit prevents
+all \fIlength\fR bytes that are available from being appended, then the
+appending is done so that the last bytes appended are from the
+string \fIellipsis\fR. This allows for an indication of the truncation
+to be left in the string.
+When \fIlength\fR is \fB-1\fR, all bytes up to the first zero byte are appended,
+subject to the limit. When \fIellipsis\fR is NULL, the default
+string \fB...\fR is used. When \fIellipsis\fR is non-NULL, it must point
+to a zero-byte-terminated string in Tcl's internal UTF encoding.
+The number of bytes appended can be less than the lesser
+of \fIlength\fR and \fIlimit\fR when appending fewer
+bytes is necessary to append only whole multi-byte characters.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_Format\fR is the C-level interface to the engine of the \fBformat\fR
+command.  The actual command procedure for \fBformat\fR is little more
+than
+.CS
+Tcl_Format(interp, Tcl_GetString(objv[1]), objc-2, objv+2);
+.CE
+The \fIobjc\fR Tcl_Obj values in \fIobjv\fR are formatted into a string
+according to the conversion specification in \fIformat\fR argument, following
+the documentation for the \fBformat\fR command.  The resulting formatted
+string is converted to a new Tcl_Obj with refcount of zero and returned.
+If some error happens during production of the formatted string, NULL is
+returned, and an error message is recorded in \fIinterp\fR, if \fIinterp\fR
+is non-NULL.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_AppendFormatToObj\fR is an appending alternative form
+of \fBTcl_Format\fR with functionality equivalent to
+.CS
+Tcl_Obj *newPtr = Tcl_Format(interp, format, objc, objv);
+if (newPtr == NULL) return TCL_ERROR;
+Tcl_AppendObjToObj(objPtr, newPtr);
+return TCL_OK;
+.CE
+but with greater convenience and efficiency when the appending
+functionality is needed.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_ObjPrintf\fR serves as a replacement for the common sequence
+.CS
+char buf[SOME_SUITABLE_LENGTH];
+sprintf(buf, format, ...);
+Tcl_NewStringObj(buf, -1);
+.CE
+but with greater convenience and no need to 
+determine \fBSOME_SUITABLE_LENGTH\fR. The formatting is done with the same
+core formatting engine used by \fBTcl_Format\fR.  This means the set of
+supported conversion specifiers is that of the \fBformat\fR command and
+not that of the \fBsprintf\fR routine where the two sets differ. When a
+conversion specifier passed to \fBTcl_ObjPrintf\fR includes a precision,
+the value is taken as a number of bytes, as \fBsprintf\fR does, and not
+as a number of characters, as \fBformat\fR does.  This is done on the
+assumption that C code is more likely to know how many bytes it is
+passing around than the number of encoded characters those bytes happen
+to represent.  The variable number of arguments passed in should be of
+the types that would be suitable for passing to \fBsprintf\fR.  Note in
+this example usage, \fIx\fR is of type \fBlong\fR.
+.CS
+long x = 5;
+Tcl_Obj *objPtr = Tcl_ObjPrintf("Value is %d", x);
+.CE
+If the value of \fIformat\fR contains internal inconsistencies or invalid
+specifier formats, the formatted string result produced by
+\fBTcl_ObjPrintf\fR will be an error message describing the error.
+.PP
+\fBTcl_AppendPrintfToObj\fR is an appending alternative form
+of \fBTcl_ObjPrintf\fR with functionality equivalent to
+.CS
+Tcl_AppendObjToObj(objPtr, Tcl_ObjPrintf(format, ...));
+.CE
+but with greater convenience and efficiency when the appending
+functionality is needed.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
 The \fBTcl_SetObjLength\fR procedure changes the length of the
 string value of its \fIobjPtr\fR argument.  If the \fInewLength\fR
 argument is greater than the space allocated for the object's
@@ -265,7 +369,7 @@ cleaner-looking. \fBTcl_ConcatObj\fR returns a pointer to a
 newly-created object whose ref count is zero.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_DecrRefCount
+Tcl_NewObj, Tcl_IncrRefCount, Tcl_DecrRefCount, format, sprintf
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 append, internal representation, object, object type, string object,
diff --git a/doc/SubstObj.3 b/doc/SubstObj.3
index 9f016c0..786b595 100644
--- a/doc/SubstObj.3
+++ b/doc/SubstObj.3
@@ -16,7 +16,7 @@ Tcl_SubstObj \- perform substitutions on Tcl objects
 Tcl_Obj *
 \fBTcl_SubstObj\fR(\fIinterp, objPtr, flags\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp **termPtr;
+.AS Tcl_Interp **termPtr
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to execute Tcl scripts and lookup variables.  If
 an error occurs, the interpreter's result is modified to hold an error
@@ -30,7 +30,6 @@ perform.  The flags \fBTCL_SUBST_COMMANDS\fR,
 currently supported, and \fBTCL_SUBST_ALL\fR is provided as a
 convenience for the common case where all substitutions are desired.
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_SubstObj\fR function is used to perform substitutions on
@@ -51,19 +50,19 @@ When the \fBTCL_SUBST_VARIABLES\fR bit is set in \fIflags\fR,
 sequences that look like variable substitutions for Tcl commands are
 replaced by the contents of the named variable.
 .PP
-When th \fBTCL_SUBST_COMMANDS\fR bit is set in \fIflags\fR, sequences
+When the \fBTCL_SUBST_COMMANDS\fR bit is set in \fIflags\fR, sequences
 that look like command substitutions for Tcl commands are replaced by
-the result of evaluating that script.  Where an uncaught continue
-exception occurs during the evaluation of a command substitution, an
-empty string is substituted for the command.  Where an uncaught break
-exception occurs during the evaluation of a command substitution, the
+the result of evaluating that script.  Where an uncaught
+.QW "continue exception"
+occurs during the evaluation of a command substitution, an
+empty string is substituted for the command.  Where an uncaught
+.QW "break exception"
+occurs during the evaluation of a command substitution, the
 result of the whole substitution on \fIobjPtr\fR will be truncated at
 the point immediately before the start of the command substitution,
 and no characters will be added to the result or substitutions
 performed after that point.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 subst(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 backslash substitution, command substitution, variable substitution
diff --git a/doc/TCL_MEM_DEBUG.3 b/doc/TCL_MEM_DEBUG.3
index c531ac6..05d4564 100644
--- a/doc/TCL_MEM_DEBUG.3
+++ b/doc/TCL_MEM_DEBUG.3
@@ -7,53 +7,56 @@
 .TH TCL_MEM_DEBUG 3 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-TCL_MEM_DEBUG \- Compile-time flag to enable Tcl memory debugging.
+TCL_MEM_DEBUG \- Compile-time flag to enable Tcl memory debugging
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 When Tcl is compiled with \fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR defined, a powerful set
-of memory debugging aids are included in the compiled binary.  This
+of memory debugging aids is included in the compiled binary.  This
 includes C and Tcl functions which can aid with debugging
 memory leaks, memory allocation overruns, and other memory related
 errors.
-
 .SH "ENABLING MEMORY DEBUGGING"
 .PP
 To enable memory debugging, Tcl should be recompiled from scratch with
-\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR defined.  This will also compile in a non-stub
+\fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR defined (e.g. by passing the
+\fI\-\-enable\-symbols=mem\fR flag to the \fIconfigure\fR script when
+building).  This will also compile in a non-stub
 version of \fBTcl_InitMemory\fR to add the \fBmemory\fR command to Tcl.
 .PP
 \fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR must be either left defined for all modules or undefined
 for all modules that are going to be linked together.  If they are not, link
-errors will occur, with either \fBTclDbCkfree\fR and \fBTcl_DbCkalloc\fR or
+errors will occur, with either \fBTcl_DbCkfree\fR and \fBTcl_DbCkalloc\fR or
 \fBTcl_Ckalloc\fR and \fBTcl_Ckfree\fR being undefined.
 .PP
 Once memory debugging support has been compiled into Tcl, the C
 functions \fBTcl_ValidateAllMemory\fR, and \fBTcl_DumpActiveMemory\fR,
 and the Tcl \fBmemory\fR command can be used to validate and examine
 memory usage.
-
 .SH "GUARD ZONES"
 .PP
 When memory debugging is enabled, whenever a call to \fBckalloc\fR is
-made, slightly more memory than requested is allocated so the memory debugging
-code can keep track of the allocated memory, and eight-byte ``guard
-zones'' are placed in front of and behind the space that will be
+made, slightly more memory than requested is allocated so the memory
+debugging code can keep track of the allocated memory, and eight-byte
+.QW "guard zones"
+are placed in front of and behind the space that will be
 returned to the caller.  (The sizes of the guard zones are defined by the
 C #define \fBLOW_GUARD_SIZE\fR and #define \fBHIGH_GUARD_SIZE\fR
-in the file \fIgeneric/tclCkalloc.c\fR -- it can
+in the file \fIgeneric/tclCkalloc.c\fR \(em it can
 be extended if you suspect large overwrite problems, at some cost in
 performance.)  A known pattern is written into the guard zones and, on
 a call to \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones of the space being freed are
 checked to see if either zone has been modified in any way.  If one
 has been, the guard bytes and their new contents are identified, and a
-``low guard failed'' or ``high guard failed'' message is issued.  The
-``guard failed'' message includes the address of the memory packet and
+.QW "low guard failed"
+or
+.QW "high guard failed"
+message is issued.  The
+.QW "guard failed"
+message includes the address of the memory packet and
 the file name and line number of the code that called \fBckfree\fR.
 This allows you to detect the common sorts of one-off problems, where
 not enough space was allocated to contain the data written, for
 example.
-
 .SH "DEBUGGING DIFFICULT MEMORY CORRUPTION PROBLEMS"
 .PP
 Normally, Tcl compiled with memory debugging enabled will make it easy
@@ -66,16 +69,12 @@ This will enable memory validation from the first call to
 \fBckalloc\fR, again, at a large performance impact.
 .PP
 If you are desperate and validating memory on every call to
-\fBckalloc\fR and \fBckfree\fR isn't enough, you can explicitly call
+\fBckalloc\fR and \fBckfree\fR is not enough, you can explicitly call
 \fBTcl_ValidateAllMemory\fR directly at any point.  It takes a \fIchar
 *\fR and an \fIint\fR which are normally the filename and line number
 of the caller, but they can actually be anything you want.  Remember
 to remove the calls after you find the problem.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 ckalloc, memory, Tcl_ValidateAllMemory, Tcl_DumpActiveMemory
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 memory, debug
-
-
diff --git a/doc/Tcl.n b/doc/Tcl.n
index d329bb9..8b5b501 100644
--- a/doc/Tcl.n
+++ b/doc/Tcl.n
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
 .so man.macros
-.TH Tcl n "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH Tcl n "8.5" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
 Tcl \- Tool Command Language
@@ -39,17 +39,37 @@ Different commands interpret their words differently.
 Words of a command are separated by white space (except for
 newlines, which are command separators).
 .IP "[4] \fBDouble quotes.\fR"
-If the first character of a word is double-quote (``"'') then
-the word is terminated by the next double-quote character.
+If the first character of a word is double-quote
+.PQ \N'34'
+then the word is terminated by the next double-quote character.
 If semi-colons, close brackets, or white space characters
 (including newlines) appear between the quotes then they are treated
 as ordinary characters and included in the word.
 Command substitution, variable substitution, and backslash substitution
 are performed on the characters between the quotes as described below.
 The double-quotes are not retained as part of the word.
-.IP "[5] \fBBraces.\fR"
-If the first character of a word is an open brace (``{'') then
-the word is terminated by the matching close brace (``}'').
+.VS 8.5 br
+.IP "[5] \fBArgument expansion.\fR"
+If a word starts with the string
+.QW {*}
+followed by a non-whitespace character, then the leading
+.QW {*}
+is removed and the rest of the word is parsed and substituted as any other
+word. After substitution, the word is parsed as a list (without command or
+variable substitutions; backslash substitutions are performed as is normal for
+a list and individual internal words may be surrounded by either braces or
+double-quote characters), and its words are added to the command being
+substituted. For instance,
+.QW "cmd a {*}{b [c]} d {*}{$e f \N'34'g h\N'34'}"
+is equivalent to
+.QW "cmd a b {[c]} d {$e} f \N'34'g h\N'34'" .
+.VE 8.5
+.IP "[6] \fBBraces.\fR"
+If the first character of a word is an open brace
+.PQ {
+and rule [5] does not apply, then
+the word is terminated by the matching close brace
+.PQ } "" .
 Braces nest within the word: for each additional open
 brace there must be an additional close brace (however,
 if an open brace or close brace within the word is
@@ -61,20 +81,24 @@ below, nor do semi-colons, newlines, close brackets,
 or white space receive any special interpretation.
 The word will consist of exactly the characters between the
 outer braces, not including the braces themselves.
-.IP "[6] \fBCommand substitution.\fR"
-If a word contains an open bracket (``['') then Tcl performs
-\fIcommand substitution\fR.
+.IP "[7] \fBCommand substitution.\fR"
+If a word contains an open bracket
+.PQ [
+then Tcl performs \fIcommand substitution\fR.
 To do this it invokes the Tcl interpreter recursively to process
 the characters following the open bracket as a Tcl script.
 The script may contain any number of commands and must be terminated
-by a close bracket (``]'').
+by a close bracket
+.PQ ] "" .
 The result of the script (i.e. the result of its last command) is
 substituted into the word in place of the brackets and all of the
 characters between them.
 There may be any number of command substitutions in a single word.
 Command substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces.
-.IP "[7] \fBVariable substitution.\fR"
-If a word contains a dollar-sign (``$'') followed by one of the forms
+.IP "[8] \fBVariable substitution.\fR"
+If a word contains a dollar-sign
+.PQ $
+followed by one of the forms
 described below, then Tcl performs \fIvariable
 substitution\fR:  the dollar-sign and the following characters are
 replaced in the word by the value of a variable.
@@ -101,9 +125,10 @@ characters whatsoever except for close braces.
 There may be any number of variable substitutions in a single word.
 Variable substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces.
 .RE
-.IP "[8] \fBBackslash substitution.\fR"
-If a backslash (``\e'') appears within a word then
-\fIbackslash substitution\fR occurs.
+.IP "[9] \fBBackslash substitution.\fR"
+If a backslash
+.PQ \e
+appears within a word then \fIbackslash substitution\fR occurs.
 In all cases but those described below the backslash is dropped and
 the following character is treated as an ordinary
 character and included in the word.
@@ -141,12 +166,12 @@ A single space character replaces the backslash, newline, and all spaces
 and tabs after the newline.  This backslash sequence is unique in that it
 is replaced in a separate pre-pass before the command is actually parsed.
 This means that it will be replaced even when it occurs between braces,
-and the resulting space will be treated as a word separator if it isn't
+and the resulting space will be treated as a word separator if it is not
 in braces or quotes.
 .TP 7
 \e\e
-Backslash (``\e'').
-.VS 8.1 br
+Backslash
+.PQ \e "" .
 .TP 7
 \e\fIooo\fR 
 .
@@ -167,19 +192,20 @@ be 0.
 The hexadecimal digits \fIhhhh\fR (one, two, three, or four of them) give a
 sixteen-bit hexadecimal value for the Unicode character that will be
 inserted.
-.VE
 .LP
 Backslash substitution is not performed on words enclosed in braces,
 except for backslash-newline as described above.
 .RE
-.IP "[9] \fBComments.\fR"
-If a hash character (``#'') appears at a point where Tcl is
+.IP "[10] \fBComments.\fR"
+If a hash character
+.PQ #
+appears at a point where Tcl is
 expecting the first character of the first word of a command,
 then the hash character and the characters that follow it, up
 through the next newline, are treated as a comment and ignored.
 The comment character only has significance when it appears
 at the beginning of a command.
-.IP "[10] \fBOrder of substitution.\fR"
+.IP "[11] \fBOrder of substitution.\fR"
 Each character is processed exactly once by the Tcl interpreter
 as part of creating the words of a command.
 For example, if variable substitution occurs then no further
@@ -200,8 +226,9 @@ set y [set x 0][incr x][incr x]
 .CE
 will always set the variable \fIy\fR to the value, \fI012\fR.
 .RE
-.IP "[11] \fBSubstitution and word boundaries.\fR"
-Substitutions do not affect the word boundaries of a command.
+.IP "[12] \fBSubstitution and word boundaries.\fR"
+Substitutions do not affect the word boundaries of a command,
+except for argument expansion as specified in rule [5].
 For example, during variable substitution the entire value of
 the variable becomes part of a single word, even if the variable's
 value contains spaces.
diff --git a/doc/Tcl_Main.3 b/doc/Tcl_Main.3
index 4f29c82..54b2e84 100644
--- a/doc/Tcl_Main.3
+++ b/doc/Tcl_Main.3
@@ -19,7 +19,7 @@ Tcl_Main, Tcl_SetMainLoop \- main program and event loop definition for Tcl-base
 .sp
 \fBTcl_SetMainLoop\fR(\fImainLoopProc\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_AppInitProc *appInitProc
+.AS Tcl_MainLoopProc *mainLoopProc
 .AP int argc in
 Number of elements in \fIargv\fR.
 .AP char *argv[] in
@@ -34,7 +34,9 @@ Address of an application-specific event loop procedure.
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Main\fR can serve as the main program for Tcl-based shell
-applications.  A ``shell application'' is a program
+applications.  A
+.QW "shell application"
+is a program
 like tclsh or wish that supports both interactive interpretation
 of Tcl and evaluation of a script contained in a file given as
 a command line argument.  \fBTcl_Main\fR is offered as a convenience
@@ -74,9 +76,12 @@ channels to their default values. See \fBTcl_StandardChannels\fR for
 more information.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Main\fR supports two modes of operation, depending on the
-values of \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR.  If \fIargv[1]\fR exists and
-does not begin with the character \fI-\fR, it is taken to be the
-name of a file containing a \fIstartup script\fR, which \fBTcl_Main\fR
+values of \fIargc\fR and \fIargv\fR.  If the first few arguments
+in \fIargv\fR match ?\fB\-encoding \fIname\fR? \fIfileName\fR,
+where \fIfileName\fR does not begin with the character \fI\-\fR,
+then \fIfileName\fR is taken to be the name of a file containing
+a \fIstartup script\fR, and \fIname\fR is taken to be the name
+of the encoding of the contents of that file, which \fBTcl_Main\fR
 will attempt to evaluate.  Otherwise, \fBTcl_Main\fR will enter an
 interactive mode.
 .PP
@@ -86,8 +91,9 @@ the Tcl variables \fIargc\fR, \fIargv\fR, \fIargv0\fR, and
 .PP
 When it has finished its own initialization, but before it processes
 commands, \fBTcl_Main\fR calls the procedure given by the
-\fIappInitProc\fR argument.  This procedure provides a ``hook'' for
-the application to perform its own initialization of the interpreter
+\fIappInitProc\fR argument.  This procedure provides a
+.QW hook
+for the application to perform its own initialization of the interpreter
 created by \fBTcl_Main\fR, such as defining application-specific
 commands.  The procedure must have an interface that matches the
 type \fBTcl_AppInitProc\fR:
@@ -114,7 +120,6 @@ The prompts and command evaluation results are written to the standard
 output channel only if the Tcl variable \fItcl_interactive\fR in the
 master interpreter holds a non-zero integer value.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 \fBTcl_SetMainLoop\fR allows setting an event loop procedure to be run.
 This allows, for example, Tk to be dynamically loaded and set its event
 loop.  The event loop will run following the startup script.  If you
@@ -127,7 +132,6 @@ The main loop procedure must have an interface that matches the type
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_MainLoopProc(void);
 .CE
-.VE 8.4
 .PP
 \fBTcl_Main\fR does not return.  Normally a program based on
 \fBTcl_Main\fR will terminate when the \fBexit\fR command is
diff --git a/doc/Thread.3 b/doc/Thread.3
index 2ffd6ef..80d34ad 100644
--- a/doc/Thread.3
+++ b/doc/Thread.3
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .TH Threads 3 "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_ConditionNotify, Tcl_ConditionWait, Tcl_ConditionFinalize, Tcl_GetThreadData, Tcl_MutexLock, Tcl_MutexUnlock, Tcl_MutexFinalize, Tcl_CreateThread, Tcl_JoinThread \- Tcl thread support.
+Tcl_ConditionNotify, Tcl_ConditionWait, Tcl_ConditionFinalize, Tcl_GetThreadData, Tcl_MutexLock, Tcl_MutexUnlock, Tcl_MutexFinalize, Tcl_CreateThread, Tcl_JoinThread \- Tcl thread support
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -41,14 +41,14 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_JoinThread\fR(\fIid, result\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_ThreadDataKey *keyPtr
+.AS Tcl_CreateThreadProc threadProc out
 .AP Tcl_Condition *condPtr in
 A condition variable, which must be associated with a mutex lock.
 .AP Tcl_Mutex *mutexPtr in
 A mutex lock.
 .AP Tcl_Time *timePtr in
 A time limit on the condition wait.  NULL to wait forever.
-Note that a polling value of 0 seconds doesn't make much sense.
+Note that a polling value of 0 seconds does not make much sense.
 .AP Tcl_ThreadDataKey *keyPtr in
 This identifies a block of thread local storage.  The key should be
 static and process-wide, yet each thread will end up associating
@@ -80,42 +80,38 @@ waited upon into it.
 Beginning with the 8.1 release, the Tcl core is thread safe, which
 allows you to incorporate Tcl into multithreaded applications without
 customizing the Tcl core.  To enable Tcl multithreading support,
-you must include the \fB--enable-threads\fR option to \fBconfigure\fR
+you must include the \fB\-\|\-enable-threads\fR option to \fBconfigure\fR
 when you configure and compile your Tcl core.
 .PP
 An important constraint of the Tcl threads implementation is that
 \fIonly the thread that created a Tcl interpreter can use that
 interpreter\fR.  In other words, multiple threads can not access
-the same Tcl interpreter.  (However, as was the case in previous
-releases, a single thread can safely create and use multiple
-interpreters.)
-.PP
-.VS 8.3.1
-Tcl does provide \fBTcl_CreateThread\fR for creating threads. The
+the same Tcl interpreter.  (However, a single thread can safely create
+and use multiple interpreters.)
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+Tcl provides \fBTcl_CreateThread\fR for creating threads. The
 caller can determine the size of the stack given to the new thread and
 modify the behaviour through the supplied \fIflags\fR. The value
 \fBTCL_THREAD_STACK_DEFAULT\fR for the \fIstackSize\fR indicates that
 the default size as specified by the operating system is to be used
-for the new thread. As for the flags, currently are only the values
-\fBTCL_THREAD_NOFLAGS\fR and \fBTCL_THREAD_JOINABLE\fR defined. The
+for the new thread. As for the flags, currently only the values
+\fBTCL_THREAD_NOFLAGS\fR and \fBTCL_THREAD_JOINABLE\fR are defined. The
 first of them invokes the default behaviour with no
 specialties. Using the second value marks the new thread as
 \fIjoinable\fR. This means that another thread can wait for the such
 marked thread to exit and join it.
 .PP
-Restrictions: On some unix systems the pthread-library does not
-contain the functionality to specify the stacksize of a thread. The
-specified value for the stacksize is ignored on these systems. Both
-Windows and Macintosh currently do not support joinable threads. This
-flag value is therefore ignored on these platforms.
-.VE
+Restrictions: On some UNIX systems the pthread-library does not
+contain the functionality to specify the stack size of a thread. The
+specified value for the stack size is ignored on these systems.
+Windows currently does not support joinable threads. This
+flag value is therefore ignored on this platform.
 .PP
-Tcl does provide \fBTcl_ExitThread\fR and \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR
+Tcl provides the \fBTcl_ExitThread\fR and \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR functions
 for terminating threads and invoking optional per-thread exit
 handlers.  See the \fBTcl_Exit\fR page for more information on these
 procedures.
 .PP
-.VS
 The \fBTcl_JoinThread\fR function is provided to allow threads to wait
 upon the exit of another thread, which must have been marked as
 joinable through usage of the \fBTCL_THREAD_JOINABLE\fR-flag during
@@ -127,36 +123,29 @@ thread which already exited is possible, the system will retain the
 necessary information until after the call to \fBTcl_JoinThread\fR.
 This means that not calling \fBTcl_JoinThread\fR for a joinable thread
 will cause a memory leak.
-.VE
 .PP
+The \fBTcl_GetThreadData\fR call returns a pointer to a block of
+thread-private data.  Its argument is a key that is shared by all threads
+and a size for the block of storage.  The storage is automatically 
+allocated and initialized to all zeros the first time each thread asks for it.
+The storage is automatically deallocated by \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR.
+.SS "SYNCHRONIZATION AND COMMUNICATION"
 Tcl provides \fBTcl_ThreadQueueEvent\fR and \fBTcl_ThreadAlert\fR
-for handling event queueing in multithreaded applications.  See
+for handling event queuing in multithreaded applications.  See
 the \fBNotifier\fR manual page for more information on these procedures.
 .PP
-In this release, the Tcl language itself provides no support for
-creating multithreaded scripts (for example, scripts that could spawn
-a Tcl interpreter in a separate thread).  If you need to add this
-feature at this time, see the \fItclThreadTest.c\fR
-file in the Tcl source distribution for an experimental implementation
-or use the Tcl "Threading Extension" package implementing thread creation
-and management commands at the script level.
-
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
 A mutex is a lock that is used to serialize all threads through a piece
 of code by calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR.
 If one thread holds a mutex, any other thread calling \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR will
 block until \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR is called.
-.VS
 A mutex can be destroyed after its use by calling \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR.
 The result of locking a mutex twice from the same thread is undefined.
 On some platforms it will result in a deadlock.
-.VE
 The \fBTcl_MutexLock\fR, \fBTcl_MutexUnlock\fR and \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR
 procedures are defined as empty macros if not compiling with threads enabled.
 For declaration of mutexes the \fBTCL_DECLARE_MUTEX\fR macro should be used.
 This macro assures correct mutex handling even when the core is compiled
-without threads enabled. 
+without threads enabled.
 .PP
 A condition variable is used as a signaling mechanism:
 a thread can lock a mutex and then wait on a condition variable
@@ -174,40 +163,33 @@ The caller of \fBTcl_ConditionWait\fR should be prepared for spurious
 notifications by calling \fBTcl_ConditionWait\fR within a while loop
 that tests some invariant.
 .PP
-.VS
 A condition variable can be destroyed after its use by calling
 \fBTcl_ConditionFinalize\fR.
 .PP
 The \fBTcl_ConditionNotify\fR, \fBTcl_ConditionWait\fR and
 \fBTcl_ConditionFinalize\fR procedures are defined as empty macros if
 not compiling with threads enabled.
-.VE
-.PP
-The \fBTcl_GetThreadData\fR call returns a pointer to a block of
-thread-private data.  Its argument is a key that is shared by all threads
-and a size for the block of storage.  The storage is automatically 
-allocated and initialized to all zeros the first time each thread asks for it.
-The storage is automatically deallocated by \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR.
-.SH INITIALIZATION
+.SS INITIALIZATION
 .PP
-All of these synchronization objects are self initializing.
+All of these synchronization objects are self-initializing.
 They are implemented as opaque pointers that should be NULL
 upon first use.
 The mutexes and condition variables are
-.VS
 either cleaned up by process exit handlers (if living that long) or
 explicitly by calls to \fBTcl_MutexFinalize\fR or
 \fBTcl_ConditionFinalize\fR.
-.VE
 Thread local storage is reclaimed during \fBTcl_FinalizeThread\fR.
-.SH "CREATING THREADS"
-The API to create threads is not finalized at this time.
-There are private facilities to create threads that contain a new
-Tcl interpreter, and to send scripts among threads.
-Dive into tclThreadTest.c and tclThread.c for examples.
+.SH "SCRIPT-LEVEL ACCESS TO THREADS"
+.VS 8.5
+Tcl provides no built-in commands for scripts to use to create,
+manage, or join threads, nor any script-level access to mutex or
+condition variables.  It provides such facilities only via C
+interfaces, and leaves it up to packages to expose these matters to
+the script level.  One such package is the \fBThread\fR package.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-Tcl_GetCurrentThread, Tcl_ThreadQueueEvent, Tcl_ThreadAlert,
-Tcl_ExitThread, Tcl_FinalizeThread,
-Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler, Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler
+Tcl_GetCurrentThread(3), Tcl_ThreadQueueEvent(3), Tcl_ThreadAlert(3),
+Tcl_ExitThread(3), Tcl_FinalizeThread(3), Tcl_CreateThreadExitHandler(3),
+Tcl_DeleteThreadExitHandler(3), Thread
 .SH KEYWORDS
 thread, mutex, condition variable, thread local storage
diff --git a/doc/ToUpper.3 b/doc/ToUpper.3
index ece0fb2..d6b3006 100644
--- a/doc/ToUpper.3
+++ b/doc/ToUpper.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .TH Tcl_UtfToUpper 3 "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_UniCharToUpper, Tcl_UniCharToLower, Tcl_UniCharToTitle, Tcl_UtfToUpper, Tcl_UtfToLower, Tcl_UtfToTitle \- routines for manipulating the case of Unicode characters and UTF-8 strings.
+Tcl_UniCharToUpper, Tcl_UniCharToLower, Tcl_UniCharToTitle, Tcl_UtfToUpper, Tcl_UtfToLower, Tcl_UtfToTitle \- routines for manipulating the case of Unicode characters and UTF-8 strings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
diff --git a/doc/TraceCmd.3 b/doc/TraceCmd.3
index 5c84249..020f1ca 100644
--- a/doc/TraceCmd.3
+++ b/doc/TraceCmd.3
@@ -25,10 +25,11 @@ void
 .AS Tcl_CommandTraceProc prevClientData
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter containing the command.
-.AP "CONST char" *cmdName in
+.AP "const char" *cmdName in
 Name of command.
 .AP int flags in
-OR-ed collection of the value TCL_TRACE_RENAME and TCL_TRACE_DELETE.
+OR'ed collection of the values \fBTCL_TRACE_RENAME\fR and
+\fBTCL_TRACE_DELETE\fR.
 .AP Tcl_CommandTraceProc *proc in
 Procedure to call when specified operations occur to \fIcmdName\fR.
 .AP ClientData clientData in
@@ -38,19 +39,18 @@ If non-NULL, gives last value returned by \fBTcl_CommandTraceInfo\fR,
 so this call will return information about next trace.  If NULL, this
 call will return information about first trace.
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBTcl_TraceCommand\fR allows a C procedure to monitor operations
 performed on a Tcl command, so that the C procedure is invoked
 whenever the command is renamed or deleted.  If the trace is created
-successfully then \fBTcl_TraceCommand\fR returns TCL_OK.  If an error
+successfully then \fBTcl_TraceCommand\fR returns \fBTCL_OK\fR. If an error
 occurred (e.g. \fIcmdName\fR specifies a non-existent command) then
-TCL_ERROR is returned and an error message is left in the
+\fBTCL_ERROR\fR is returned and an error message is left in the
 interpreter's result.
 .PP
 The \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTcl_TraceCommand\fR indicates when the
-trace procedure is to be invoked.  It consists of an OR-ed combination
+trace procedure is to be invoked.  It consists of an OR'ed combination
 of any of the following values:
 .TP
 \fBTCL_TRACE_RENAME\fR
@@ -64,10 +64,10 @@ Whenever one of the specified operations occurs to the command,
 match the type \fBTcl_CommandTraceProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef void Tcl_CommandTraceProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
         Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	CONST char *\fIoldName\fR,
-	CONST char *\fInewName\fR,
+        const char *\fIoldName\fR,
+        const char *\fInewName\fR,
         int \fIflags\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR parameters will have the same
@@ -77,17 +77,17 @@ data structure that describes what to do when \fIproc\fR is invoked.
 \fIOldName\fR gives the name of the command being renamed, and
 \fInewName\fR gives the name that the command is being renamed to (or
 an empty string or NULL when the command is being deleted.)
-\fIFlags\fR is an OR-ed combination of bits potentially providing
-several pieces of information.  One of the bits TCL_TRACE_RENAME and
-TCL_TRACE_DELETE will be set in \fIflags\fR to indicate which
+\fIFlags\fR is an OR'ed combination of bits potentially providing
+several pieces of information.  One of the bits \fBTCL_TRACE_RENAME\fR and
+\fBTCL_TRACE_DELETE\fR will be set in \fIflags\fR to indicate which
 operation is being performed on the command.  The bit
-TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED will be set in \fIflags\fR if the trace is about
+\fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR will be set in \fIflags\fR if the trace is about
 to be destroyed; this information may be useful to \fIproc\fR so that
 it can clean up its own internal data structures (see the section
-TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED below for more details).  Lastly, the bit
-TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED will be set if the entire interpreter is being
+\fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR below for more details).  Lastly, the bit
+\fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR will be set if the entire interpreter is being
 destroyed.  When this bit is set, \fIproc\fR must be especially
-careful in the things it does (see the section TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED
+careful in the things it does (see the section \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR
 below).
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UntraceCommand\fR may be used to remove a trace.  If the
@@ -109,7 +109,7 @@ argument.
 If the \fIprevClientData\fR argument is NULL then the return
 value corresponds to the first (most recently created) matching
 trace, or NULL if there are no matching traces.
-If the \fIprevClientData\fR argument isn't NULL, then it should
+If the \fIprevClientData\fR argument is not NULL, then it should
 be the return value from a previous call to \fBTcl_CommandTraceInfo\fR.
 In this case, the new return value will correspond to the next
 matching trace after the one whose \fIclientData\fR matches
@@ -117,15 +117,13 @@ matching trace after the one whose \fIclientData\fR matches
 or if there are no more matching traces after it.
 This mechanism makes it possible to step through all of the
 traces for a given command that have the same \fIproc\fR.
-
 .SH "CALLING COMMANDS DURING TRACES"
 .PP
 During rename traces, the command being renamed is visible with both
 names simultaneously, and the command still exists during delete
-traces (if TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED is not set).  However, there is no
+traces (if \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR is not set).  However, there is no
 mechanism for signaling that an error occurred in a trace procedure,
 so great care should be taken that errors do not get silently lost.
-
 .SH "MULTIPLE TRACES"
 .PP
 It is possible for multiple traces to exist on the same command.
@@ -137,32 +135,27 @@ If the command being renamed is renamed by one of its rename traces,
 that renaming takes precedence over the one that triggered the trace
 and the collection of traces will not be reexecuted; if several traces
 rename the command, the last renaming takes precedence.
-
 .SH "TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED FLAG"
 .PP
-In a delete callback to \fIproc\fR, the TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED bit
+In a delete callback to \fIproc\fR, the \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR bit
 is set in \fIflags\fR.
-
-'\" Perhaps need some more comments here? - DKF
-
+.\" Perhaps need some more comments here? - DKF
 .SH "TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED"
 .PP
 When an interpreter is destroyed, unset traces are called for
 all of its commands.
-The TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED bit will be set in the \fIflags\fR
+The \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR bit will be set in the \fIflags\fR
 argument passed to the trace procedures.
 Trace procedures must be extremely careful in what they do if
-the TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED bit is set.
+the \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR bit is set.
 It is not safe for the procedures to invoke any Tcl procedures
 on the interpreter, since its state is partially deleted.
 All that trace procedures should do under these circumstances is
 to clean up and free their own internal data structures.
-
 .SH BUGS
 .PP
-Tcl doesn't do any error checking to prevent trace procedures
-from misusing the interpreter during traces with TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED
+Tcl does not do any error checking to prevent trace procedures
+from misusing the interpreter during traces with \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR
 set.
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 clientData, trace, command
diff --git a/doc/TraceVar.3 b/doc/TraceVar.3
index 98b242e..f80d86f 100644
--- a/doc/TraceVar.3
+++ b/doc/TraceVar.3
@@ -33,23 +33,24 @@ ClientData
 .AS Tcl_VarTraceProc prevClientData
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter containing variable.
-.AP "CONST char" *varName in
+.AP "const char" *varName in
 Name of variable.  May refer to a scalar variable, to
 an array variable with no index, or to an array variable
 with a parenthesized index.
 .AP int flags in
-OR-ed combination of the values TCL_TRACE_READS, TCL_TRACE_WRITES, 
-TCL_TRACE_UNSETS, TCL_TRACE_ARRAY, TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY, TCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY,
-TCL_TRACE_RESULT_DYNAMIC and TCL_TRACE_RESULT_OBJECT.  
+OR-ed combination of the values \fBTCL_TRACE_READS\fR,
+\fBTCL_TRACE_WRITES\fR, \fBTCL_TRACE_UNSETS\fR, \fBTCL_TRACE_ARRAY\fR,
+\fBTCL_GLOBAL_ONLY\fR, \fBTCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY\fR,
+\fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_DYNAMIC\fR and \fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_OBJECT\fR.
 Not all flags are used by all
 procedures.  See below for more information.
 .AP Tcl_VarTraceProc *proc in
 Procedure to invoke whenever one of the traced operations occurs.
 .AP ClientData clientData in
 Arbitrary one-word value to pass to \fIproc\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" *name1 in
+.AP "const char" *name1 in
 Name of scalar or array variable (without array index).
-.AP "CONST char" *name2 in
+.AP "const char" *name2 in
 For a trace on an element of an array, gives the index of the
 element.  For traces on scalar variables or on whole arrays,
 is NULL.
@@ -59,15 +60,14 @@ If non-NULL, gives last value returned by \fBTcl_VarTraceInfo\fR or
 next trace.  If NULL, this call will return information about first
 trace.
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBTcl_TraceVar\fR allows a C procedure to monitor and control
 access to a Tcl variable, so that the C procedure is invoked
 whenever the variable is read or written or unset.
 If the trace is created successfully then \fBTcl_TraceVar\fR returns
-TCL_OK.  If an error occurred (e.g. \fIvarName\fR specifies an element
-of an array, but the actual variable isn't an array) then TCL_ERROR
+\fBTCL_OK\fR.  If an error occurred (e.g. \fIvarName\fR specifies an element
+of an array, but the actual variable is not an array) then \fBTCL_ERROR\fR
 is returned and an error message is left in the interpreter's result.
 .PP
 The \fIflags\fR argument to \fBTcl_TraceVar\fR indicates when the
@@ -103,21 +103,19 @@ Invoke \fIproc\fR whenever the array command is invoked.
 This gives the trace procedure a chance to update the array before
 array names or array get is called.  Note that this is called
 before an array set, but that will trigger write traces.
-.VS 8.4
 .TP
 \fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_DYNAMIC\fR
 The result of invoking the \fIproc\fR is a dynamically allocated
 string that will be released by the Tcl library via a call to
 \fBckfree\fR.  Must not be specified at the same time as
-TCL_TRACE_RESULT_OBJECT.
+\fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_OBJECT\fR.
 .TP
 \fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_OBJECT\fR
 The result of invoking the \fIproc\fR is a Tcl_Obj* (cast to a char*)
 with a reference count of at least one.  The ownership of that
 reference will be transferred to the Tcl core for release (when the
 core has finished with it) via a call to \fBTcl_DecrRefCount\fR.  Must
-not be specified at the same time as TCL_TRACE_RESULT_DYNAMIC.
-.VE 8.4
+not be specified at the same time as \fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_DYNAMIC\fR.
 .PP
 Whenever one of the specified operations occurs on the variable,
 \fIproc\fR will be invoked.
@@ -125,11 +123,11 @@ It should have arguments and result that match the type
 \fBTcl_VarTraceProc\fR:
 .CS
 typedef char *Tcl_VarTraceProc(
-	ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
-	Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
-	char *\fIname1\fR,
-	char *\fIname2\fR,
-	int \fIflags\fR);
+        ClientData \fIclientData\fR,
+        Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR,
+        char *\fIname1\fR,
+        char *\fIname2\fR,
+        int \fIflags\fR);
 .CE
 The \fIclientData\fR and \fIinterp\fR parameters will
 have the same values as those passed to \fBTcl_TraceVar\fR when the
@@ -142,30 +140,30 @@ in the normal two-part form (see the description of \fBTcl_TraceVar2\fR
 below for details).
 \fIFlags\fR is an OR-ed combination of bits providing several
 pieces of information.
-One of the bits TCL_TRACE_READS, TCL_TRACE_WRITES, TCL_TRACE_ARRAY,
-or TCL_TRACE_UNSETS
+One of the bits \fBTCL_TRACE_READS\fR, \fBTCL_TRACE_WRITES\fR,
+\fBTCL_TRACE_ARRAY\fR, or \fBTCL_TRACE_UNSETS\fR
 will be set in \fIflags\fR to indicate which operation is being performed
 on the variable.
-The bit TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY will be set whenever the variable being
+The bit \fBTCL_GLOBAL_ONLY\fR will be set whenever the variable being
 accessed is a global one not accessible from the current level of
 procedure call:  the trace procedure will need to pass this flag
 back to variable-related procedures like \fBTcl_GetVar\fR if it
 attempts to access the variable.
-The bit TCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY will be set whenever the variable being
+The bit \fBTCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY\fR will be set whenever the variable being
 accessed is a namespace one not accessible from the current level of
 procedure call:  the trace procedure will need to pass this flag
 back to variable-related procedures like \fBTcl_GetVar\fR if it
 attempts to access the variable.
-The bit TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED will be set in \fIflags\fR if the trace is
+The bit \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR will be set in \fIflags\fR if the trace is
 about to be destroyed;  this information may be useful to \fIproc\fR
 so that it can clean up its own internal data structures (see
-the section TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED below for more details).
-Lastly, the bit TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED will be set if the entire
+the section \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR below for more details).
+Lastly, the bit \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR will be set if the entire
 interpreter is being destroyed.
 When this bit is set, \fIproc\fR must be especially careful in
-the things it does (see the section TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED below).
+the things it does (see the section \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR below).
 The trace procedure's return value should normally be NULL;  see
-ERROR RETURNS below for information on other possibilities.
+\fBERROR RETURNS\fR below for information on other possibilities.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UntraceVar\fR may be used to remove a trace.
 If the variable specified by \fIinterp\fR, \fIvarName\fR, and \fIflags\fR
@@ -180,14 +178,14 @@ traces set on a given variable.
 The return value from \fBTcl_VarTraceInfo\fR is the \fIclientData\fR
 associated with a particular trace.
 The trace must be on the variable specified by the \fIinterp\fR,
-\fIvarName\fR, and \fIflags\fR arguments (only the TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY and
-TCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY bits from \fIflags\fR is used;  other bits are
+\fIvarName\fR, and \fIflags\fR arguments (only the \fBTCL_GLOBAL_ONLY\fR and
+\fBTCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY\fR bits from \fIflags\fR is used;  other bits are
 ignored) and its trace procedure must the same as the \fIproc\fR
 argument.
 If the \fIprevClientData\fR argument is NULL then the return
 value corresponds to the first (most recently created) matching
 trace, or NULL if there are no matching traces.
-If the \fIprevClientData\fR argument isn't NULL, then it should
+If the \fIprevClientData\fR argument is not NULL, then it should
 be the return value from a previous call to \fBTcl_VarTraceInfo\fR.
 In this case, the new return value will correspond to the next
 matching trace after the one whose \fIclientData\fR matches
@@ -195,7 +193,6 @@ matching trace after the one whose \fIclientData\fR matches
 or if there are no more matching traces after it.
 This mechanism makes it possible to step through all of the
 traces for a given variable that have the same \fIproc\fR.
-
 .SH "TWO-PART NAMES"
 .PP
 The procedures \fBTcl_TraceVar2\fR, \fBTcl_UntraceVar2\fR, and
@@ -204,7 +201,6 @@ The procedures \fBTcl_TraceVar2\fR, \fBTcl_UntraceVar2\fR, and
 except that the name of the variable consists of two parts.
 \fIName1\fR gives the name of a scalar variable or array,
 and \fIname2\fR gives the name of an element within an array.
-.VS 8.1
 When \fIname2\fR is NULL, 
 \fIname1\fR may contain both an array and an element name:
 if the name contains an open parenthesis and ends with a
@@ -213,14 +209,10 @@ treated as an element name (which can have any string value) and
 the characters before the first open
 parenthesis are treated as the name of an array variable.
 If \fIname2\fR is NULL and \fIname1\fR does not refer
-to an array element 
-.VE
-it means that either the variable is
+to an array element it means that either the variable is
 a scalar or the trace is to be set on the entire array rather
 than an individual element (see WHOLE-ARRAY TRACES below for
 more information). 
-
-
 .SH "ACCESSING VARIABLES DURING TRACES"
 .PP
 During read, write, and array traces, the
@@ -246,7 +238,6 @@ from the variable before any trace procedures are invoked.
 If new traces are set by unset trace procedures, these traces
 will be invoked on accesses to the variable by the trace
 procedures.
-
 .SH "CALLBACK TIMING"
 .PP
 When read tracing has been specified for a variable, the trace
@@ -286,7 +277,6 @@ When unset tracing has been specified, the trace procedure
 will be invoked whenever the variable is destroyed.
 The traces will be called after the variable has been
 completely unset.
-
 .SH "WHOLE-ARRAY TRACES"
 .PP
 If a call to \fBTcl_TraceVar\fR or \fBTcl_TraceVar2\fR specifies
@@ -299,7 +289,6 @@ When an array is unset, a whole-array trace will be invoked
 just once, with \fIname1\fR equal to the name of the array
 and \fIname2\fR NULL;  it will not be invoked once for each
 element.
-
 .SH "MULTIPLE TRACES"
 .PP
 It is possible for multiple traces to exist on the same variable.
@@ -311,7 +300,6 @@ before the individual-element traces.
 If a read or write trace unsets the variable then all of the unset
 traces will be invoked but the remainder of the read and write traces
 will be skipped.
-
 .SH "ERROR RETURNS"
 .PP
 Under normal conditions trace procedures should return NULL, indicating
@@ -320,13 +308,11 @@ If \fIproc\fR returns a non-NULL value it signifies that an
 error occurred.
 The return value must be a pointer to a static character string
 containing an error message,
-.VS 8.4
-unless (\fIexactly\fR one of) the TCL_TRACE_RESULT_DYNAMIC and
-TCL_TRACE_RESULT_OBJECT flags is set, which specify that the result is
+unless (\fIexactly\fR one of) the \fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_DYNAMIC\fR and
+\fBTCL_TRACE_RESULT_OBJECT\fR flags is set, which specify that the result is
 either a dynamic string (to be released with \fBckfree\fR) or a
 Tcl_Obj* (cast to char* and to be released with
 \fBTcl_DecrRefCount\fR) containing the error message.
-.VE 8.4
 If a trace procedure returns an error, no further traces are
 invoked for the access and the traced access aborts with the
 given message.
@@ -340,56 +326,51 @@ The return value from \fIproc\fR is only used during read and
 write tracing.
 During unset traces, the return value is ignored and all relevant
 trace procedures will always be invoked.
-
 .SH "RESTRICTIONS"
 .PP
 A trace procedure can be called at any time, even when there
-is a partially-formed result in the interpreter's result area.  If
+is a partially formed result in the interpreter's result area.  If
 the trace procedure does anything that could damage this result (such
 as calling \fBTcl_Eval\fR) then it must save the original values of
 the interpreter's \fBresult\fR and \fBfreeProc\fR fields and restore
 them before it returns.
-
 .SH "UNDEFINED VARIABLES"
 .PP
 It is legal to set a trace on an undefined variable.
 The variable will still appear to be undefined until the
 first time its value is set.
 If an undefined variable is traced and then unset, the unset will fail
-with an error (``no such variable''), but the trace
-procedure will still be invoked.
-
+with an error
+.PQ "no such variable" "" ,
+but the trace procedure will still be invoked.
 .SH "TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED FLAG"
 .PP
-In an unset callback to \fIproc\fR, the TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED bit
+In an unset callback to \fIproc\fR, the \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR bit
 is set in \fIflags\fR if the trace is being removed as part
 of the deletion.
 Traces on a variable are always removed whenever the variable
-is deleted;  the only time TCL_TRACE_DESTROYED isn't set is for
+is deleted;  the only time \fBTCL_TRACE_DESTROYED\fR is not set is for
 a whole-array trace invoked when only a single element of an
 array is unset.
-
 .SH "TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED"
 .PP
 When an interpreter is destroyed, unset traces are called for
 all of its variables.
-The TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED bit will be set in the \fIflags\fR
+The \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR bit will be set in the \fIflags\fR
 argument passed to the trace procedures.
 Trace procedures must be extremely careful in what they do if
-the TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED bit is set.
+the \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR bit is set.
 It is not safe for the procedures to invoke any Tcl procedures
 on the interpreter, since its state is partially deleted.
 All that trace procedures should do under these circumstances is
 to clean up and free their own internal data structures.
-
 .SH BUGS
 .PP
-Tcl doesn't do any error checking to prevent trace procedures
-from misusing the interpreter during traces with TCL_INTERP_DESTROYED
+Tcl does not do any error checking to prevent trace procedures
+from misusing the interpreter during traces with \fBTCL_INTERP_DESTROYED\fR
 set.
 .PP
-Array traces are not yet integrated with the Tcl "info exists" command,
+Array traces are not yet integrated with the Tcl \fBinfo exists\fR command,
 nor is there Tcl-level access to array traces.
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 clientData, trace, variable
diff --git a/doc/Translate.3 b/doc/Translate.3
index 59a64ea..d434cda 100644
--- a/doc/Translate.3
+++ b/doc/Translate.3
@@ -17,11 +17,12 @@ Tcl_TranslateFileName \- convert file name to native form and replace tilde with
 char *
 \fBTcl_TranslateFileName\fR(\fIinterp\fR, \fIname\fR, \fIbufferPtr\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_DString *bufferPtr
+.AS Tcl_DString *bufferPtr in/out
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter in which to report an error, if any.
-.AP "CONST char" *name in
-File name, which may start with a ``~''.
+.AP "const char" *name in
+File name, which may start with a
+.QW ~ .
 .AP Tcl_DString *bufferPtr in/out
 If needed, this dynamic string is used to store the new file name.
 At the time of the call it should be uninitialized or free.  The
@@ -31,9 +32,18 @@ anything stored here.
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-This utility procedure translates a file name to a form suitable for
-passing to the local operating system.  It converts network names into
-native form and does tilde substitution.
+This utility procedure translates a file name to a platform-specific form
+which, after being converted to the appropriate encoding, is suitable for
+passing to the local operating system.  In particular, it converts
+network names into native form and does tilde substitution.  
+.PP
+However, with the advent of the newer \fBTcl_FSGetNormalizedPath\fR and
+\fBTcl_GetNativePath\fR, there is no longer any need to use this
+procedure.  In particular, \fBTcl_GetNativePath\fR performs all the
+necessary translation and encoding conversion, is virtual-filesystem
+aware, and caches the native result for faster repeated calls.
+Finally \fBTcl_GetNativePath\fR does not require you to free anything
+afterwards.
 .PP
 If
 \fBTcl_TranslateFileName\fR has to do tilde substitution or translate
@@ -44,7 +54,7 @@ After \fBTcl_TranslateFileName\fR returns a non-NULL result, the caller must
 eventually invoke \fBTcl_DStringFree\fR to free any information
 placed in \fI*bufferPtr\fR.  The caller need not know whether or
 not \fBTcl_TranslateFileName\fR actually used the string;  \fBTcl_TranslateFileName\fR
-initializes \fI*bufferPtr\fR even if it doesn't use it, so the call to
+initializes \fI*bufferPtr\fR even if it does not use it, so the call to
 \fBTcl_DStringFree\fR will be safe in either case.
 .PP
 If an error occurs (e.g. because there was no user by the given
diff --git a/doc/UniCharIsAlpha.3 b/doc/UniCharIsAlpha.3
index 22b81c1..6029b2d 100644
--- a/doc/UniCharIsAlpha.3
+++ b/doc/UniCharIsAlpha.3
@@ -46,6 +46,7 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_UniCharIsWordChar\fR(\fIch\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
+.AS int ch
 .AP int ch in
 The Tcl_UniChar to be examined.
 .BE
@@ -61,7 +62,7 @@ with the various routines.
 Note: A Tcl_UniChar is a Unicode character represented as an unsigned,
 fixed-size quantity.
 
-.SH CHARACTER CLASSES
+.SH "CHARACTER CLASSES"
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UniCharIsAlnum\fR tests if the character is an alphanumeric Unicode character.
 .PP
diff --git a/doc/UpVar.3 b/doc/UpVar.3
index 95c4a9a..f1e6fe4 100644
--- a/doc/UpVar.3
+++ b/doc/UpVar.3
@@ -20,30 +20,31 @@ int
 int
 \fBTcl_UpVar2(\fIinterp, frameName, name1, name2, destName, flags\fB)\fR
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_VarTraceProc prevClientData
+.AS "const char" *sourceName
 .AP Tcl_Interp *interp in
 Interpreter containing variables;  also used for error reporting.
-.AP "CONST char" *frameName in
+.AP "const char" *frameName in
 Identifies the stack frame containing source variable.
 May have any of the forms accepted by
 the \fBupvar\fR command, such as \fB#0\fR or \fB1\fR.
-.AP "CONST char" *sourceName in
+.AP "const char" *sourceName in
 Name of source variable, in the frame given by \fIframeName\fR.
 May refer to a scalar variable or to an array variable with a
 parenthesized index.
-.AP "CONST char" *destName in
+.AP "const char" *destName in
 Name of destination variable, which is to be linked to source
 variable so that references to \fIdestName\fR
 refer to the other variable.  Must not currently exist except as
 an upvar-ed variable.
 .AP int flags in
-Either TCL_GLOBAL_ONLY or 0;  if non-zero, then \fIdestName\fR is
-a global variable;  otherwise it is a local to the current procedure
-(or global if no procedure is active).
-.AP "CONST char" *name1 in
+One of \fBTCL_GLOBAL_ONLY\fR, \fBTCL_NAMESPACE_ONLY\fR or 0;  if non-zero,
+then \fIdestName\fR is a global or namespace variable;  otherwise it is
+local to the current procedure (or current namespace if no procedure is
+active). 
+.AP "const char" *name1 in
 First part of source variable's name (scalar name, or name of array
 without array index).
-.AP "CONST char" *name2 in
+.AP "const char" *name2 in
 If source variable is an element of an array, gives the index of the element.
 For scalar source variables, is NULL.
 .BE
@@ -61,7 +62,7 @@ element name (by calling \fBTcl_UpVar2\fR).
 The destination variable name is specified in a single string;  it
 may not be an array element.
 .PP
-Both procedures return either TCL_OK or TCL_ERROR, and they
+Both procedures return either \fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR, and they
 leave an error message in the interpreter's result if an error occurs.
 .PP
 As with the \fBupvar\fR command, the source variable need not exist;
diff --git a/doc/Utf.3 b/doc/Utf.3
index af472ae..8e39fef 100644
--- a/doc/Utf.3
+++ b/doc/Utf.3
@@ -8,7 +8,7 @@
 .TH Utf 3 "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Library Procedures"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-Tcl_UniChar, Tcl_UniCharCaseMatch, Tcl_UniCharNcasecmp, Tcl_UniCharToUtf, Tcl_UtfToUniChar, Tcl_UniCharToUtfDString, Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString, Tcl_UniCharLen, Tcl_UniCharNcmp, Tcl_UtfCharComplete, Tcl_NumUtfChars, Tcl_UtfFindFirst, Tcl_UtfFindLast, Tcl_UtfNext, Tcl_UtfPrev, Tcl_UniCharAtIndex, Tcl_UtfAtIndex, Tcl_UtfBackslash \- routines for manipulating UTF-8 strings.
+Tcl_UniChar, Tcl_UniCharCaseMatch, Tcl_UniCharNcasecmp, Tcl_UniCharToUtf, Tcl_UtfToUniChar, Tcl_UniCharToUtfDString, Tcl_UtfToUniCharDString, Tcl_UniCharLen, Tcl_UniCharNcmp, Tcl_UtfCharComplete, Tcl_NumUtfChars, Tcl_UtfFindFirst, Tcl_UtfFindLast, Tcl_UtfNext, Tcl_UtfPrev, Tcl_UniCharAtIndex, Tcl_UtfAtIndex, Tcl_UtfBackslash \- routines for manipulating UTF-8 strings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
 \fB#include <tcl.h>\fR
@@ -20,91 +20,91 @@ int
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR(\fIsrc, chPtr\fR)
-.VS 8.4
 .sp
 char *
-\fBTcl_UniCharToUtfDString\fR(\fIuniStr, numChars, dstPtr\fR)
+\fBTcl_UniCharToUtfDString\fR(\fIuniStr, uniLength, dsPtr\fR)
 .sp
 Tcl_UniChar *
-\fBTcl_UtfToUniCharDString\fR(\fIsrc, len, dstPtr\fR)
-.VE 8.4
+\fBTcl_UtfToUniCharDString\fR(\fIsrc, length, dsPtr\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_UniCharLen\fR(\fIuniStr\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_UniCharNcmp\fR(\fIuniStr, uniStr, num\fR)
-.VS 8.4
+\fBTcl_UniCharNcmp\fR(\fIucs, uct, numChars\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_UniCharNcasecmp\fR(\fIuniStr, uniStr, num\fR)
+\fBTcl_UniCharNcasecmp\fR(\fIucs, uct, numChars\fR)
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_UniCharCaseMatch\fR(\fIuniStr, uniPattern, nocase\fR)
-.VE 8.4
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_UtfNcmp\fR(\fIsrc, src, num\fR)
+\fBTcl_UtfNcmp\fR(\fIcs, ct, numChars\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_UtfNcasecmp\fR(\fIsrc, src, num\fR)
+\fBTcl_UtfNcasecmp\fR(\fIcs, ct, numChars\fR)
 .sp
 int
-\fBTcl_UtfCharComplete\fR(\fIsrc, len\fR)
+\fBTcl_UtfCharComplete\fR(\fIsrc, length\fR)
 .sp
 int 
-\fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR(\fIsrc, len\fR)
-.VS 8.4
+\fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR(\fIsrc, length\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_UtfFindFirst\fR(\fIsrc, ch\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_UtfFindLast\fR(\fIsrc, ch\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_UtfNext\fR(\fIsrc\fR)
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_UtfPrev\fR(\fIsrc, start\fR)
-.VE 8.4
 .sp
 Tcl_UniChar
 \fBTcl_UniCharAtIndex\fR(\fIsrc, index\fR)
-.VS 8.4
 .sp
-CONST char *
+const char *
 \fBTcl_UtfAtIndex\fR(\fIsrc, index\fR)
-.VE 8.4
 .sp
 int
 \fBTcl_UtfBackslash\fR(\fIsrc, readPtr, dst\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS "CONST Tcl_UniChar" numChars in/out
+.AS "const Tcl_UniChar" *uniPattern in/out
 .AP char *buf out
 Buffer in which the UTF-8 representation of the Tcl_UniChar is stored.  At most
-TCL_UTF_MAX bytes are stored in the buffer.
+\fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes are stored in the buffer.
 .AP int ch in
 The Tcl_UniChar to be converted or examined.
 .AP Tcl_UniChar *chPtr out
 Filled with the Tcl_UniChar represented by the head of the UTF-8 string.
-.AP "CONST char" *src in
+.AP "const char" *src in
 Pointer to a UTF-8 string.
-.AP "CONST Tcl_UniChar" *uniStr in
+.AP "const char" *cs in
+Pointer to a UTF-8 string.
+.AP "const char" *ct in
+Pointer to a UTF-8 string.
+.AP "const Tcl_UniChar" *uniStr in
+A null-terminated Unicode string.
+.AP "const Tcl_UniChar" *ucs in
+A null-terminated Unicode string.
+.AP "const Tcl_UniChar" *uct in
 A null-terminated Unicode string.
-.AP "CONST Tcl_UniChar" *uniPattern in
+.AP "const Tcl_UniChar" *uniPattern in
 A null-terminated Unicode string.
-.AP int len in
+.AP int length in
 The length of the UTF-8 string in bytes (not UTF-8 characters).  If
 negative, all bytes up to the first null byte are used.
-.AP int numChars in
+.AP int uniLength in
 The length of the Unicode string in characters.  Must be greater than or
 equal to 0.
-.AP "Tcl_DString" *dstPtr in/out
-A pointer to a previously-initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
-.AP "unsigned long" num in
+.AP "Tcl_DString" *dsPtr in/out
+A pointer to a previously initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
+.AP "unsigned long" numChars in
 The number of characters to compare.
-.AP "CONST char" *start in
+.AP "const char" *start in
 Pointer to the beginning of a UTF-8 string.
 .AP int index in
 The index of a character (not byte) in the UTF-8 string.
@@ -113,12 +113,10 @@ If non-NULL, filled with the number of bytes in the backslash sequence,
 including the backslash character.
 .AP char *dst out
 Buffer in which the bytes represented by the backslash sequence are stored.
-At most TCL_UTF_MAX bytes are stored in the buffer.
-.VS 8.4
+At most \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes are stored in the buffer.
 .AP int nocase in
 Specifies whether the match should be done case-sensitive (0) or
 case-insensitive (1).
-.VE 8.4
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -126,7 +124,7 @@ case-insensitive (1).
 These routines convert between UTF-8 strings and Tcl_UniChars.  A
 Tcl_UniChar is a Unicode character represented as an unsigned, fixed-size
 quantity.  A UTF-8 character is a Unicode character represented as
-a varying-length sequence of up to TCL_UTF_MAX bytes.  A multibyte UTF-8
+a varying-length sequence of up to \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes.  A multibyte UTF-8
 sequence consists of a lead byte followed by some number of trail bytes.
 .PP
 \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR is the maximum number of bytes that it takes to
@@ -138,7 +136,7 @@ in \fIbuf\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR reads one UTF-8 character starting at \fIsrc\fR
 and stores it as a Tcl_UniChar in \fI*chPtr\fR.  The return value is the
-number of bytes read from \fIsrc\fR..  The caller must ensure that the
+number of bytes read from \fIsrc\fR.  The caller must ensure that the
 source buffer is long enough such that this routine does not run off the
 end and dereference non-existent or random memory; if the source buffer
 is known to be null-terminated, this will not happen.  If the input is
@@ -147,15 +145,17 @@ byte of \fIsrc\fR in \fI*chPtr\fR as a Tcl_UniChar between 0x0000 and
 0x00ff and return 1.  
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UniCharToUtfDString\fR converts the given Unicode string
-to UTF-8, storing the result in a previously-initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
-You must specify the length of the given Unicode string.
+to UTF-8, storing the result in a previously initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
+You must specify \fIuniLength\fR, the length of the given Unicode string.
 The return value is a pointer to the UTF-8 representation of the
 Unicode string.  Storage for the return value is appended to the
 end of the \fBTcl_DString\fR.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniCharDString\fR converts the given UTF-8 string to Unicode,
-storing the result in the previously-initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
-you may either specify the length of the given UTF-8 string or "-1",
+storing the result in the previously initialized \fBTcl_DString\fR.
+In the argument \fIlength\fR, you may either specify the length of
+the given UTF-8 string in bytes or
+.QW \-1 ,
 in which case \fBTcl_UtfToUniCharDString\fR uses \fBstrlen\fR to
 calculate the length.  The return value is a pointer to the Unicode
 representation of the UTF-8 string.  Storage for the return value
@@ -168,24 +168,22 @@ the number of Unicode characters (not bytes) in that string.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UniCharNcmp\fR and \fBTcl_UniCharNcasecmp\fR correspond to
 \fBstrncmp\fR and \fBstrncasecmp\fR, respectively, for Unicode characters.
-They accepts two null-terminated Unicode strings and the number of characters
-to compare.  Both strings are assumed to be at least \fIlen\fR characters
+They accept two null-terminated Unicode strings and the number of characters
+to compare.  Both strings are assumed to be at least \fInumChars\fR characters
 long. \fBTcl_UniCharNcmp\fR  compares the two strings character-by-character
 according to the Unicode character ordering.  It returns an integer greater
 than, equal to, or less than 0 if the first string is greater than, equal
 to, or less than the second string respectively.  \fBTcl_UniCharNcasecmp\fR
 is the Unicode case insensitive version.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 \fBTcl_UniCharCaseMatch\fR is the Unicode equivalent to
 \fBTcl_StringCaseMatch\fR.  It accepts a null-terminated Unicode string,
 a Unicode pattern, and a boolean value specifying whether the match should
 be case sensitive and returns whether the string matches the pattern.
-.VE 8.4
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfNcmp\fR corresponds to \fBstrncmp\fR for UTF-8 strings. It
 accepts two null-terminated UTF-8 strings and the number of characters
-to compare.  (Both strings are assumed to be at least \fIlen\fR
+to compare.  (Both strings are assumed to be at least \fInumChars\fR
 characters long.)  \fBTcl_UtfNcmp\fR compares the two strings
 character-by-character according to the Unicode character ordering.
 It returns an integer greater than, equal to, or less than 0 if the
@@ -198,7 +196,7 @@ differences in case when comparing upper, lower or title case
 characters.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfCharComplete\fR returns 1 if the source UTF-8 string \fIsrc\fR
-of length \fIlen\fR bytes is long enough to be decoded by
+of \fIlength\fR bytes is long enough to be decoded by
 \fBTcl_UtfToUniChar\fR, or 0 otherwise.  This function does not guarantee
 that the UTF-8 string is properly formed.  This routine is used by
 procedures that are operating on a byte at a time and need to know if a
@@ -206,7 +204,7 @@ full Tcl_UniChar has been seen.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_NumUtfChars\fR corresponds to \fBstrlen\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
 returns the number of Tcl_UniChars that are represented by the UTF-8 string
-\fIsrc\fR.  The length of the source string is \fIlen\fR bytes.  If the
+\fIsrc\fR.  The length of the source string is \fIlength\fR bytes.  If the
 length is negative, all bytes up to the first null byte are used.
 .PP
 \fBTcl_UtfFindFirst\fR corresponds to \fBstrchr\fR for UTF-8 strings.  It
@@ -248,7 +246,7 @@ the return pointer points to the first character in the source string.
 \fBTcl_UtfBackslash\fR is a utility procedure used by several of the Tcl
 commands.  It parses a backslash sequence and stores the properly formed
 UTF-8 character represented by the backslash sequence in the output
-buffer \fIdst\fR.  At most TCL_UTF_MAX bytes are stored in the buffer.
+buffer \fIdst\fR.  At most \fBTCL_UTF_MAX\fR bytes are stored in the buffer.
 \fBTcl_UtfBackslash\fR modifies \fI*readPtr\fR to contain the number
 of bytes in the backslash sequence, including the backslash character.
 The return value is the number of bytes stored in the output buffer.
diff --git a/doc/WrongNumArgs.3 b/doc/WrongNumArgs.3
index 00aa653..2175858 100644
--- a/doc/WrongNumArgs.3
+++ b/doc/WrongNumArgs.3
@@ -15,16 +15,16 @@ Tcl_WrongNumArgs \- generate standard error message for wrong number of argument
 .sp
 \fBTcl_WrongNumArgs\fR(\fIinterp, objc, objv, message\fR)
 .SH ARGUMENTS
-.AS Tcl_Interp "*CONST objv[]"
+.AS "Tcl_Obj *const" *message
 .AP Tcl_Interp interp in
 Interpreter in which error will be reported: error message gets stored
 in its result object.
 .AP int objc in
 Number of leading arguments from \fIobjv\fR to include in error
 message.
-.AP Tcl_Obj "*CONST\ objv[]" in
+.AP "Tcl_Obj *const" objv[] in
 Arguments to command that had the wrong number of arguments.
-.AP "CONST char" *message in
+.AP "const char" *message in
 Additional error information to print after leading arguments
 from \fIobjv\fR.  This typically gives the acceptable syntax
 of the command.  This argument may be NULL.
@@ -39,7 +39,8 @@ standard error message and stores it in the result object of
 \fIinterp\fR.  The message includes the \fIobjc\fR initial
 elements of \fIobjv\fR plus \fImessage\fR.  For example, if
 \fIobjv\fR consists of the values \fBfoo\fR and \fBbar\fR,
-\fIobjc\fR is 1, and \fImessage\fR is ``\fBfileName count\fR''
+\fIobjc\fR is 1, and \fImessage\fR is
+.QW "\fBfileName count\fR"
 then \fIinterp\fR's result object will be set to the following
 string:
 .CS
@@ -61,7 +62,7 @@ subcommand we would like to use the full subcommand name rather than
 the abbreviation.  If the \fBTcl_WrongNumArgs\fR command finds any
 \fIindexObjects\fR in the \fIobjv\fR array it will use the full subcommand
 name in the error message instead of the abbreviated name that was
-originally passed in.  Using the above example, lets assume that
+originally passed in.  Using the above example, let us assume that
 \fIbar\fR is actually an abbreviation for \fIbarfly\fR and the object
 is now an indexObject because it was passed to
 \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR.  In this case the error message would be:
diff --git a/doc/after.n b/doc/after.n
index dbe0783..21961d3 100644
--- a/doc/after.n
+++ b/doc/after.n
@@ -46,8 +46,9 @@ The delayed command is formed by concatenating all the \fIscript\fR
 arguments in the same fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command.
 The command will be executed at global level (outside the context
 of any Tcl procedure).
-If an error occurs while executing the delayed command then the
-\fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error.
+If an error occurs while executing the delayed command then 
+the background error will be reported by the command
+registered with \fB interp bgerror\fR.
 The \fBafter\fR command returns an identifier that can be used
 to cancel the delayed command using \fBafter cancel\fR.
 .TP
@@ -76,7 +77,8 @@ loop is entered and there are no events to process.
 The command returns an identifier that can be used
 to cancel the delayed command using \fBafter cancel\fR.
 If an error occurs while executing the script then the
-\fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error.
+background error will be reported by the command
+registered with \fB interp bgerror\fR.
 .TP
 \fBafter info \fR?\fIid\fR?
 This command returns information about existing event handlers.
@@ -134,7 +136,7 @@ doOneStep
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-bgerror(n), concat(n), update(n), vwait(n)
+concat(n), interp(n), update(n), vwait(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 cancel, delay, idle callback, sleep, time
diff --git a/doc/append.n b/doc/append.n
index 1ff43ee..dc9adbe 100644
--- a/doc/append.n
+++ b/doc/append.n
@@ -18,15 +18,18 @@ append \- Append to variable
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 Append all of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to the current value
-of variable \fIvarName\fR.  If \fIvarName\fR doesn't exist,
+of variable \fIvarName\fR.  If \fIvarName\fR does not exist,
 it is given a value equal to the concatenation of all the
 \fIvalue\fR arguments.
 The result of this command is the new value stored in variable
 \fIvarName\fR.
 This command provides an efficient way to build up long
 variables incrementally.
-For example, ``\fBappend a $b\fR'' is much more efficient than
-``\fBset a $a$b\fR'' if \fB$a\fR is long.
+For example,
+.QW "\fBappend a $b\fR"
+is much more efficient than
+.QW "\fBset a $a$b\fR"
+if \fB$a\fR is long.
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Building a string of comma-separated numbers piecemeal using a loop.
 .CS
diff --git a/doc/apply.n b/doc/apply.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..8a38aac
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/apply.n
@@ -0,0 +1,96 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2006 Miguel Sofer
+'\" Copyright (c) 2006 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+.so man.macros
+.TH apply n "" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+apply \- Apply an anonymous function
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBapply \fIfunc\fR ?\fIarg1 arg2 ...\fR?
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The command \fBapply\fR applies the function \fIfunc\fR to the arguments
+\fIarg1 arg2 ...\fR and returns the result. 
+.PP
+The function \fIfunc\fR is a two element list \fI{args body}\fR or a three
+element list \fI{args body namespace}\fR (as if the
+\fBlist\fR command had been used). 
+The first element \fIargs\fR specifies the formal arguments to
+\fIfunc\fR. The specification of the formal arguments \fIargs\fR
+is shared with the \fBproc\fR command, and is described in detail in the
+corresponding manual page.
+.PP
+The contents of \fIbody\fR are executed by the Tcl interpreter
+after the local variables corresponding to the formal arguments are given
+the values of the actual parameters \fIarg1 arg2 ...\fR.
+When \fIbody\fR is being executed, variable names normally refer to
+local variables, which are created automatically when referenced and
+deleted when \fBapply\fR returns.  One local variable is automatically
+created for each of the function's arguments.
+Global variables can only be accessed by invoking
+the \fBglobal\fR command or the \fBupvar\fR command.
+Namespace variables can only be accessed by invoking
+the \fBvariable\fR command or the \fBupvar\fR command.
+.PP
+The invocation of \fBapply\fR adds a call frame to Tcl's evaluation stack
+(the stack of frames accessed via \fBuplevel\fR). The execution of \fIbody\fR
+proceeds in this call frame, in the namespace given by \fInamespace\fR or
+in the global namespace if none was specified. If given, \fInamespace\fR is
+interpreted relative to the global namespace even if its name does not start
+with
+.QW :: .
+.PP
+The semantics of \fBapply\fR can also be described by:
+.PP
+.CS
+proc apply {fun args} {
+   set len [llength $fun]
+   if {($len < 2) || ($len > 3)} {
+      error "can't interpret \e"$fun\e" as anonymous function"
+   }
+   lassign $fun argList body ns
+   set name ::$ns::[getGloballyUniqueName]
+   set body0 {
+      rename [lindex [info level 0] 0] {}
+   }
+   proc $name $argList ${body0}$body
+   set code [catch {uplevel 1 $name $args} res opt]
+   return -options $opt $res
+}
+.CE
+.SH EXAMPLES
+This shows how to make a simple general command that applies a transformation
+to each element of a list.
+.CS
+proc map {lambda list} {
+   set result {}
+   foreach item $list {
+      lappend result [\fBapply\fR $lambda $item]
+   }
+   return $result
+}
+map {x {return [string length $x]:$x}} {a bb ccc dddd}
+      \fI\(-> 1:a 2:bb 3:ccc 4:dddd\fR
+map {x {expr {$x**2 + 3*$x - 2}}} {-4 -3 -2 -1 0 1 2 3 4}
+      \fI\(-> 2 -2 -4 -4 -2 2 8 16 26\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+The \fBapply\fR command is also useful for defining callbacks for use in the
+\fBtrace\fR command:
+.CS
+set vbl "123abc"
+trace add variable vbl write {\fBapply\fR {{v1 v2 op} {
+   upvar 1 $v1 v
+   puts "updated variable to \e"$v\e""
+}}}
+set vbl 123
+set vbl abc
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+proc(n), uplevel(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+argument, procedure, anonymous function
diff --git a/doc/array.n b/doc/array.n
index 7713f8c..e112c23 100644
--- a/doc/array.n
+++ b/doc/array.n
@@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ array \- Manipulate array variables
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBarray \fIoption arrayName\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command performs one of several operations on the
@@ -34,7 +33,7 @@ check, and must have been the return value from a previous
 invocation of \fBarray startsearch\fR.
 This option is particularly useful if an array has an element
 with an empty name, since the return value from
-\fBarray nextelement\fR won't indicate whether the search
+\fBarray nextelement\fR will not indicate whether the search
 has been completed.
 .TP
 \fBarray donesearch \fIarrayName searchId\fR
@@ -58,21 +57,24 @@ array are included in the result.
 If \fIpattern\fR is specified, then only those elements whose names
 match \fIpattern\fR (using the matching rules of
 \fBstring match\fR) are included.
-If \fIarrayName\fR isn't the name of an array variable, or if
+If \fIarrayName\fR is not the name of an array variable, or if
 the array contains no elements, then an empty list is returned.
+If traces on the array modify the list of elements, the elements
+returned are those that exist both before and after the call to
+\fBarray get\fR.
 .TP
 \fBarray names \fIarrayName\fR ?\fImode\fR? ?\fIpattern\fR?
 Returns a list containing the names of all of the elements in
 the array that match \fIpattern\fR.  \fIMode\fR may be one of
-\fB-exact\fR, \fB-glob\fR, or \fB-regexp\fR.  If specified, \fImode\fR
+\fB\-exact\fR, \fB\-glob\fR, or \fB\-regexp\fR.  If specified, \fImode\fR
 designates which matching rules to use to match \fIpattern\fR against
 the names of the elements in the array.  If not specified, \fImode\fR
-defaults to \fB-glob\fR.  See the documentation for \fBstring match\fR
+defaults to \fB\-glob\fR.  See the documentation for \fBstring match\fR
 for information on glob style matching, and the documentation for
 \fBregexp\fR for information on regexp matching.
 If \fIpattern\fR is omitted then the command returns all of
 the element names in the array.  If there are no (matching) elements
-in the array, or if \fIarrayName\fR isn't the name of an array
+in the array, or if \fIarrayName\fR is not the name of an array
 variable, then an empty string is returned.
 .TP
 \fBarray nextelement \fIarrayName searchId\fR
@@ -100,7 +102,7 @@ and \fIlist\fR is empty,
 \fBarray size \fIarrayName\fR
 Returns a decimal string giving the number of elements in the
 array.
-If \fIarrayName\fR isn't the name of an array then 0 is returned.
+If \fIarrayName\fR is not the name of an array then 0 is returned.
 .TP
 \fBarray startsearch \fIarrayName\fR
 This command initializes an element-by-element search through the
@@ -117,59 +119,55 @@ It is currently more efficient and easier to use either the \fBarray
 get\fR or \fBarray names\fR, together with \fBforeach\fR, to iterate
 over all but very large arrays.  See the examples below for how to do
 this.
-.VS 8.4
 .TP
 \fBarray statistics \fIarrayName\fR
 Returns statistics about the distribution of data within the hashtable
 that represents the array.  This information includes the number of
 entries in the table, the number of buckets, and the utilization of
 the buckets.
-.VE 8.4
-.VS 8.3
 .TP
 \fBarray unset \fIarrayName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
 Unsets all of the elements in the array that match \fIpattern\fR (using the
-matching rules of \fBstring match\fR).  If \fIarrayName\fR isn't the name
+matching rules of \fBstring match\fR).  If \fIarrayName\fR is not the name
 of an array variable or there are no matching elements in the array, no
 error will be raised.  If \fIpattern\fR is omitted and \fIarrayName\fR is
 an array variable, then the command unsets the entire array.
 The command always returns an empty string.
-.VE 8.3
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .CS
 \fBarray set\fR colorcount {
-    red   1
-    green 5
-    blue  4
-    white 9
+   red   1
+   green 5
+   blue  4
+   white 9
 }
 
 foreach {color count} [\fBarray get\fR colorcount] {
-   puts "Color: $color Count: $count" 
+   puts "Color: $color Count: $count"
 }
- => Color: blue Count: 4
+  \fB\(->\fR Color: blue Count: 4
     Color: white Count: 9
     Color: green Count: 5
     Color: red Count: 1
 
 foreach color [\fBarray names\fR colorcount] {
-   puts "Color: $color Count: $colorcount($color)" 
+   puts "Color: $color Count: $colorcount($color)"
 }
- => Color: blue Count: 4
+  \fB\(->\fR Color: blue Count: 4
     Color: white Count: 9
     Color: green Count: 5
     Color: red Count: 1
 
-foreach color [lsort [array names colorcount]] {
-    puts "Color: $color Count: $colorcount($color)" 
+foreach color [lsort [\fBarray names\fR colorcount]] {
+   puts "Color: $color Count: $colorcount($color)"
 }
- => Color: blue Count: 4
+  \fB\(->\fR Color: blue Count: 4
     Color: green Count: 5
     Color: red Count: 1
     Color: white Count: 9
 
 \fBarray statistics\fR colorcount
- => 4 entries in table, 4 buckets
+  \fB\(->\fR 4 entries in table, 4 buckets
     number of buckets with 0 entries: 1
     number of buckets with 1 entries: 2
     number of buckets with 2 entries: 1
@@ -183,9 +181,7 @@ foreach color [lsort [array names colorcount]] {
     number of buckets with 10 or more entries: 0
     average search distance for entry: 1.2
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 list(n), string(n), variable(n), trace(n), foreach(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 array, element names, search
diff --git a/doc/bgerror.n b/doc/bgerror.n
index 5b42766..cb91351 100644
--- a/doc/bgerror.n
+++ b/doc/bgerror.n
@@ -16,14 +16,27 @@ bgerror \- Command invoked to process background errors
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
+.VS 8.5
+Release 8.5 of Tcl supports the \fBinterp bgerror\fR command,
+which allows applications to register in an interpreter the command
+that will handle background errors in that interpreter.  In older
+releases of Tcl, this level of control was not available, and applications
+could control the handling of background errors only by creating
+a command with the particular command name \fBbgerror\fR in the
+global namespace of an interpreter.  The following documentation
+describes the interface requirements of the \fBbgerror\fR command
+an application might define to retain compatibility with pre-8.5
+releases of Tcl.  Applications intending to support only
+Tcl releases 8.5 and later should simply make use of \fBinterp bgerror\fR.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
-The \fBbgerror\fR command doesn't exist as built-in part of Tcl.  Instead,
+The \fBbgerror\fR command does not exist as built-in part of Tcl.  Instead,
 individual applications or users can define a \fBbgerror\fR
 command (e.g. as a Tcl procedure) if they wish to handle background
 errors.
 .PP
 A background error is one that occurs in an event handler or some
-other command that didn't originate with the application.
+other command that did not originate with the application.
 For example, if an error occurs while executing a command specified
 with the \fBafter\fR command, then it is a background error.
 For a non-background error, the error can simply be returned up
@@ -34,8 +47,10 @@ unwinding ends in the Tcl library and there is no obvious way for Tcl
 to report the error.
 .PP
 When Tcl detects a background error, it saves information about the
-error and invokes the \fBbgerror\fR command later as an idle event
-handler. Before invoking \fBbgerror\fR, Tcl restores the
+error and invokes a handler command registered by \fBinterp bgerror\fR
+later as an idle event handler.  The default handler command in turn
+calls the \fBbgerror\fR command .
+Before invoking \fBbgerror\fR, Tcl restores the
 \fBerrorInfo\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR variables to their values at the
 time the error occurred, then it invokes \fBbgerror\fR with the error
 message as its only argument.  Tcl assumes that the application has
@@ -54,22 +69,6 @@ error, in the order they occurred.  However, if \fBbgerror\fR returns
 with a break exception, then any remaining errors are skipped without
 calling \fBbgerror\fR.
 .PP
-Tcl has no default implementation for \fBbgerror\fR. However, in
-applications using Tk there is a default \fBbgerror\fR procedure which
-posts a dialog box containing the error message and offers the user a
-chance to see a stack trace showing where the error occurred.  In
-addition to allowing the user to view the stack trace, the dialog
-provides an additional application configurable button which may be
-used, for example, to save the stack trace to a file.  By default,
-this is the behavior associated with that button.  This behavior can
-be redefined by setting the option database values
-\fB*ErrorDialog.function.text\fR, to specify the caption for the
-function button, and \fB*ErrorDialog.function.command\fR, to specify
-the command to be run.  The text of the stack trace is appended to the
-command when it is evaluated.  If either of these options is set to
-the empty string, then the additional button will not be displayed in
-the dialog.
-.PP
 If you are writing code that will be used by others as part of a
 package or other kind of library, consider avoiding \fBbgerror\fR.
 The reason for this is that the application programmer may also want
@@ -87,7 +86,7 @@ proc bgerror {message} {
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-after(n), tclvars(n)
+after(n), interp(n), tclvars(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 background error, reporting
diff --git a/doc/binary.n b/doc/binary.n
index fbe1a8c..6b2150e 100644
--- a/doc/binary.n
+++ b/doc/binary.n
@@ -15,17 +15,15 @@ binary \- Insert and extract fields from binary strings
 .br
 \fBbinary scan \fIstring formatString \fR?\fIvarName varName ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command provides facilities for manipulating binary data.  The
 first form, \fBbinary format\fR, creates a binary string from normal
-Tcl values.  For example, given the values 16 and 22, on a 32 bit
+Tcl values.  For example, given the values 16 and 22, on a 32-bit
 architecture, it might produce an 8-byte binary string consisting of
 two 4-byte integers, one for each of the numbers.  The second form of
 the command, \fBbinary scan\fR, does the opposite: it extracts data
 from a binary string and returns it as ordinary Tcl string values.
-
 .SH "BINARY FORMAT"
 .PP
 The \fBbinary format\fR command generates a binary string whose layout
@@ -34,7 +32,8 @@ the additional arguments.  The resulting binary value is returned.
 .PP
 The \fIformatString\fR consists of a sequence of zero or more field
 specifiers separated by zero or more spaces.  Each field specifier is
-a single type character followed by an optional numeric \fIcount\fR.
+a single type character followed by an optional flag character followed
+by an optional numeric \fIcount\fR.
 Most field specifiers consume one argument to obtain the value to be
 formatted.  The type character specifies how the value is to be
 formatted.  The \fIcount\fR typically indicates how many items of the
@@ -42,12 +41,13 @@ specified type are taken from the value.  If present, the \fIcount\fR
 is a non-negative decimal integer or \fB*\fR, which normally indicates
 that all of the items in the value are to be used.  If the number of
 arguments does not match the number of fields in the format string
-that consume arguments, then an error is generated.
+that consume arguments, then an error is generated. The flag character
+is ignored for for \fBbinary format\fR.
 .PP
 Here is a small example to clarify the relation between the field
 specifiers and the arguments:
 .CS
-\fBbinary format d3d {1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0} 0.1\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR d3d {1.0 2.0 3.0 4.0} 0.1
 .CE
 .PP
 The first argument is a list of four numbers, but because of the count
@@ -62,13 +62,14 @@ to just after the last byte stored.  The cursor is initially at
 position 0 at the beginning of the data.  The type may be any one of
 the following characters:
 .IP \fBa\fR 5
-Stores a character string of length \fIcount\fR in the output string.
+Stores a byte string of length \fIcount\fR in the output string.
 Every character is taken as modulo 256 (i.e. the low byte of every
 character is used, and the high byte discarded) so when storing
-character strings not wholly expressible using the characters \\u0000-\\u00ff,
-the \fBencoding convertto\fR command should be used
-first if this truncation is not desired (i.e. if the characters are
-not part of the ISO 8859-1 character set.)
+character strings not wholly expressible using the characters \eu0000-\eu00ff,
+the \fBencoding convertto\fR command should be used first to change
+the string into an external representation
+if this truncation is not desired (i.e. if the characters are
+not part of the ISO 8859\-1 character set.)
 If \fIarg\fR has fewer than \fIcount\fR bytes, then additional zero
 bytes are used to pad out the field.  If \fIarg\fR is longer than the
 specified length, the extra characters will be ignored.  If
@@ -77,16 +78,33 @@ formatted.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one character will be
 formatted.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format a7a*a alpha bravo charlie\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR a7a*a alpha bravo charlie
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fBalpha\\000\\000bravoc\fR.
+will return a string equivalent to \fBalpha\e000\e000bravoc\fR,
+.CS
+\fBbinary format\fR a* [encoding convertto utf-8 \eu20ac]
+.CE
+will return a string equivalent to \fB\e342\e202\e254\fR (which is the
+UTF-8 byte sequence for a Euro-currency character) and
+.CS
+\fBbinary format\fR a* [encoding convertto iso8859-15 \eu20ac]
+.CE
+will return a string equivalent to \fB\e244\fR (which is the ISO
+8859\-15 byte sequence for a Euro-currency character). Contrast these
+last two with:
+.CS
+\fBbinary format\fR a* \eu20ac
+.CE
+which returns a string equivalent to \fB\e254\fR (i.e. \fB\exac\fR) by
+truncating the high-bits of the character, and which is probably not
+what is desired.
 .RE
 .IP \fBA\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBa\fR except that spaces are used for
 padding instead of nulls.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format A6A*A alpha bravo charlie\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR A6A*A alpha bravo charlie
 .CE
 will return \fBalpha bravoc\fR.
 .RE
@@ -105,25 +123,26 @@ does not end at a byte boundary, the remaining bits of the last byte
 will be zeros.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format b5b* 11100 111000011010\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR b5b* 11100 111000011010
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\x07\\x87\\x05\fR.
+will return a string equivalent to \fB\ex07\ex87\ex05\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBB\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBb\fR except that the bits are stored in
 high-to-low order within each byte.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format B5B* 11100 111000011010\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR B5B* 11100 111000011010
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\xe0\\xe1\\xa0\fR.
+will return a string equivalent to \fB\exe0\exe1\exa0\fR.
 .RE
-.IP \fBh\fR 5
-Stores a string of \fIcount\fR hexadecimal digits in low-to-high
+.IP \fBH\fR 5
+Stores a string of \fIcount\fR hexadecimal digits in high-to-low
 within each byte in the output string.  \fIArg\fR must contain a
-sequence of characters in the set ``0123456789abcdefABCDEF''.  The
-resulting bytes are emitted in first to last order with the hex digits
-being formatted in low-to-high order within each byte.  If \fIarg\fR
+sequence of characters in the set
+.QW 0123456789abcdefABCDEF .
+The resulting bytes are emitted in first to last order with the hex digits
+being formatted in high-to-low order within each byte.  If \fIarg\fR
 has fewer than \fIcount\fR digits, then zeros will be used for the
 remaining digits.  If \fIarg\fR has more than the specified number of
 digits, the extra digits will be ignored.  If \fIcount\fR is
@@ -133,37 +152,36 @@ number of digits formatted does not end at a byte boundary, the
 remaining bits of the last byte will be zeros.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format h3h* AB def\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR H3H*H2 ab DEF 987
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\xba\\x00\\xed\\x0f\fR.
+will return a string equivalent to \fB\exab\ex00\exde\exf0\ex98\fR.
 .RE
-.IP \fBH\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBh\fR except that the digits are stored in
-high-to-low order within each byte.  For example,
+.IP \fBh\fR 5
+This form is the same as \fBH\fR except that the digits are stored in
+low-to-high order within each byte. This is seldom required. For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format H3H* ab DEF\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR h3h*h2 AB def 987
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fB\\xab\\x00\\xde\\xf0\fR.
+will return a string equivalent to \fB\exba\ex00\exed\ex0f\ex89\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBc\fR 5
 Stores one or more 8-bit integer values in the output string.  If no
 \fIcount\fR is specified, then \fIarg\fR must consist of an integer
-value; otherwise \fIarg\fR must consist of a list containing at least
-\fIcount\fR integer elements.  The low-order 8 bits of each integer
+value. If \fIcount\fR is specified, \fIarg\fR must consist of a list
+containing at least that many integers. The low-order 8 bits of each integer
 are stored as a one-byte value at the cursor position.  If \fIcount\fR
-is \fB*\fR, then all of the integers in the list are formatted.  If
-the number of elements in the list is fewer than \fIcount\fR, then an
-error is generated.  If the number of elements in the list is greater
+is \fB*\fR, then all of the integers in the list are formatted. If the
+number of elements in the list is greater
 than \fIcount\fR, then the extra elements are ignored.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format c3cc* {3 -3 128 1} 260 {2 5}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR c3cc* {3 -3 128 1} 260 {2 5}
 .CE
 will return a string equivalent to
-\fB\\x03\\xfd\\x80\\x04\\x02\\x05\fR, whereas
+\fB\ex03\exfd\ex80\ex04\ex02\ex05\fR, whereas
 .CS
-\fBbinary format c {2 5}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR c {2 5}
 .CE
 will generate an error.
 .RE
@@ -175,10 +193,10 @@ the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format s3 {3 -3 258 1}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR s3 {3 -3 258 1}
 .CE
 will return a string equivalent to 
-\fB\\x03\\x00\\xfd\\xff\\x02\\x01\fR.
+\fB\ex03\ex00\exfd\exff\ex02\ex01\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBS\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBs\fR except that it stores one or more
@@ -186,11 +204,19 @@ This form is the same as \fBs\fR except that it stores one or more
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format S3 {3 -3 258 1}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR S3 {3 -3 258 1}
 .CE
 will return a string equivalent to 
-\fB\\x00\\x03\\xff\\xfd\\x01\\x02\fR.
-.RE
+\fB\ex00\ex03\exff\exfd\ex01\ex02\fR.
+.RE
+.IP \fBt\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form (mnemonically \fItiny\fR) is the same as \fBs\fR and \fBS\fR
+except that it stores the 16-bit integers in the output string in the
+native byte order of the machine where the Tcl script is running.
+To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
+the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBi\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBc\fR except that it stores one or more
 32-bit integers in little-endian byte order in the output string.  The
@@ -199,10 +225,10 @@ the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format i3 {3 -3 65536 1}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR i3 {3 -3 65536 1}
 .CE
 will return a string equivalent to 
-\fB\\x03\\x00\\x00\\x00\\xfd\\xff\\xff\\xff\\x00\\x00\\x01\\x00\fR
+\fB\ex03\ex00\ex00\ex00\exfd\exff\exff\exff\ex00\ex00\ex01\ex00\fR
 .RE
 .IP \fBI\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBi\fR except that it stores one or more one
@@ -210,13 +236,21 @@ or more 32-bit integers in big-endian byte order in the output string.
 For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format I3 {3 -3 65536 1}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR I3 {3 -3 65536 1}
 .CE
 will return a string equivalent to 
-\fB\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x03\\xff\\xff\\xff\\xfd\\x00\\x01\\x00\\x00\fR
-.RE
+\fB\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex03\exff\exff\exff\exfd\ex00\ex01\ex00\ex00\fR
+.RE
+.IP \fBn\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form (mnemonically \fInumber\fR or \fInormal\fR) is the same as
+\fBi\fR and \fBI\fR except that it stores the 32-bit integers in the
+output string in the native byte order of the machine where the Tcl
+script is running.
+To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
+the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBw\fR 5
-.VS 8.4
 This form is the same as \fBc\fR except that it stores one or more
 64-bit integers in little-endian byte order in the output string.  The
 low-order 64-bits of each integer are stored as an eight-byte value at
@@ -224,7 +258,7 @@ the cursor position with the least significant byte stored first.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format w 7810179016327718216\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR w 7810179016327718216
 .CE
 will return the string \fBHelloTcl\fR
 .RE
@@ -234,14 +268,22 @@ or more 64-bit integers in big-endian byte order in the output string.
 For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format Wc 4785469626960341345 110\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR Wc 4785469626960341345 110
 .CE
 will return the string \fBBigEndian\fR
-.VE
 .RE
+.IP \fBm\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form (mnemonically the mirror of \fBw\fR) is the same as \fBw\fR
+and \fBW\fR except that it stores the 64-bit integers in the output
+string in the native byte order of the machine where the Tcl script is
+running.
+To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
+the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBf\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBc\fR except that it stores one or more one
-or more single-precision floating in the machine's native
+or more single-precision floating point numbers in the machine's native
 representation in the output string.  This representation is not
 portable across architectures, so it should not be used to communicate
 floating point numbers across the network.  The size of a floating
@@ -249,28 +291,54 @@ point number may vary across architectures, so the number of bytes
 that are generated may vary.  If the value overflows the
 machine's native representation, then the value of FLT_MAX
 as defined by the system will be used instead.  Because Tcl uses
-double-precision floating-point numbers internally, there may be some
+double-precision floating point numbers internally, there may be some
 loss of precision in the conversion to single-precision.  For example,
 on a Windows system running on an Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format f2 {1.6 3.4}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR f2 {1.6 3.4}
 .CE
 will return a string equivalent to 
-\fB\\xcd\\xcc\\xcc\\x3f\\x9a\\x99\\x59\\x40\fR.
-.RE
+\fB\excd\excc\excc\ex3f\ex9a\ex99\ex59\ex40\fR.
+.RE
+.IP \fBr\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form (mnemonically \fIreal\fR) is the same as \fBf\fR except that
+it stores the single-precision floating point numbers in little-endian
+order.  This conversion only produces meaningful output when used on
+machines which use the IEEE floating point representation (very
+common, but not universal.)
+.VE 8.5
+.IP \fBR\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form is the same as \fBr\fR except that it stores the
+single-precision floating point numbers in big-endian order.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBd\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBf\fR except that it stores one or more one
-or more double-precision floating in the machine's native
+or more double-precision floating point numbers in the machine's native
 representation in the output string.  For example, on a
 Windows system running on an Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format d1 {1.6}\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR d1 {1.6}
 .CE
 will return a string equivalent to 
-\fB\\x9a\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\xf9\\x3f\fR.
-.RE
+\fB\ex9a\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\exf9\ex3f\fR.
+.RE
+.IP \fBq\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form (mnemonically the mirror of \fBd\fR) is the same as \fBd\fR
+except that it stores the double-precision floating point numbers in
+little-endian order.  This conversion only produces meaningful output
+when used on machines which use the IEEE floating point representation
+(very common, but not universal.)
+.VE 8.5
+.IP \fBQ\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form is the same as \fBq\fR except that it stores the
+double-precision floating point numbers in big-endian order.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBx\fR 5
 Stores \fIcount\fR null bytes in the output string.  If \fIcount\fR is
 not specified, stores one null byte.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR,
@@ -278,9 +346,9 @@ generates an error.  This type does not consume an argument.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format a3xa3x2a3 abc def ghi\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR a3xa3x2a3 abc def ghi
 .CE
-will return a string equivalent to \fBabc\\000def\\000\\000ghi\fR.
+will return a string equivalent to \fBabc\e000def\e000\e000ghi\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBX\fR 5
 Moves the cursor back \fIcount\fR bytes in the output string.  If
@@ -291,7 +359,7 @@ omitted then the cursor is moved back one byte.  This type does not
 consume an argument.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format a3X*a3X2a3 abc def ghi\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR a3X*a3X2a3 abc def ghi
 .CE
 will return \fBdghi\fR.
 .RE
@@ -306,16 +374,17 @@ the output string.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then an error will be
 generated.  This type does not consume an argument. For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary format a5@2a1@*a3@10a1 abcde f ghi j\fR
+\fBbinary format\fR a5@2a1@*a3@10a1 abcde f ghi j
 .CE
-will return \fBabfdeghi\\000\\000j\fR.
+will return \fBabfdeghi\e000\e000j\fR.
 .RE
-
 .SH "BINARY SCAN"
 .PP
 The \fBbinary scan\fR command parses fields from a binary string,
 returning the number of conversions performed.  \fIString\fR gives the
-input to be parsed and \fIformatString\fR indicates how to parse it.
+input bytes to be parsed (one byte per character, and characters not
+representable as a byte have their high bits chopped)
+and \fIformatString\fR indicates how to parse it.
 Each \fIvarName\fR gives the name of a variable; when a field is
 scanned from \fIstring\fR the result is assigned to the corresponding
 variable.
@@ -323,7 +392,8 @@ variable.
 As with \fBbinary format\fR, the \fIformatString\fR consists of a
 sequence of zero or more field specifiers separated by zero or more
 spaces.  Each field specifier is a single type character followed by
-an optional numeric \fIcount\fR.  Most field specifiers consume one
+an optional flag character followed by an optional numeric \fIcount\fR.
+Most field specifiers consume one
 argument to obtain the variable into which the scanned values should
 be placed.  The type character specifies how the binary data is to be
 interpreted.  The \fIcount\fR typically indicates how many items of
@@ -335,13 +405,16 @@ position to satisfy the current field specifier, then the
 corresponding variable is left untouched and \fBbinary scan\fR returns
 immediately with the number of variables that were set.  If there are
 not enough arguments for all of the fields in the format string that
-consume arguments, then an error is generated.
+consume arguments, then an error is generated. The flag character
+.QW u
+may be given to cause some types to be read as unsigned values. The flag
+is accepted for all field types but is ignored for non-integer fields.
 .PP
 A similar example as with \fBbinary format\fR should explain the
 relation between field specifiers and arguments in case of the binary
 scan subcommand:
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan $bytes s3s first second\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR $bytes s3s first second
 .CE
 .PP
 This command (provided the binary string in the variable \fIbytes\fR
@@ -352,31 +425,33 @@ integers), no assignment to \fIsecond\fR will be made, and if
 \fIbytes\fR contains fewer than 6 bytes (i.e. three 2-byte integers),
 no assignment to \fIfirst\fR will be made.  Hence:
 .CS
-\fBputs [binary scan abcdefg s3s first second]\fR
-\fBputs $first\fR
-\fBputs $second\fR
+puts [\fBbinary scan\fR abcdefg s3s first second]
+puts $first
+puts $second
 .CE
 will print (assuming neither variable is set previously):
 .CS
-\fB1\fR
-\fB25185 25699 26213\fR
-\fIcan't read "second": no such variable\fR
+1
+25185 25699 26213
+can't read "second": no such variable
 .CE
 .PP
-It is \fBimportant\fR to note that the \fBc\fR, \fBs\fR, and \fBS\fR
+It is \fIimportant\fR to note that the \fBc\fR, \fBs\fR, and \fBS\fR
 (and \fBi\fR and \fBI\fR on 64bit systems) will be scanned into
 long data size values.  In doing this, values that have their high
 bit set (0x80 for chars, 0x8000 for shorts, 0x80000000 for ints),
 will be sign extended.  Thus the following will occur:
 .CS
-\fBset signShort [binary format s1 0x8000]\fR
-\fBbinary scan $signShort s1 val; \fI# val == 0xFFFF8000\fR
+set signShort [\fBbinary format\fR s1 0x8000]
+\fBbinary scan\fR $signShort s1 val; \fI# val == 0xFFFF8000\fR
 .CE
-If you want to produce an unsigned value, then you can mask the return 
-value to the desired size.  For example, to produce an unsigned short 
-value:
+If you require unsigned values you can include the
+.QW u
+flag character following
+the field type. For example, to read an unsigned short value:
 .CS
-\fBset val [expr {$val & 0xFFFF}]; \fI# val == 0x8000\fR
+set signShort [\fBbinary format\fR s1 0x8000]
+\fBbinary scan\fR $signShort su1 val; \fI# val == 0x00008000\fR
 .CE
 .PP
 Each type-count pair moves an imaginary cursor through the binary data,
@@ -384,116 +459,128 @@ reading bytes from the current position.  The cursor is initially
 at position 0 at the beginning of the data.  The type may be any one of
 the following characters:
 .IP \fBa\fR 5
-The data is a character string of length \fIcount\fR.  If \fIcount\fR
+The data is a byte string of length \fIcount\fR.  If \fIcount\fR
 is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be
 scanned into the variable.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one
-character will be scanned.
-All characters scanned will be interpreted as being in the
-range \\u0000-\\u00ff so the \fBencoding convertfrom\fR command might be
-needed if the string is not an ISO 8859\-1 string.
+byte will be scanned.
+All bytes scanned will be interpreted as being characters in the
+range \eu0000-\eu00ff so the \fBencoding convertfrom\fR command will be
+needed if the string is not a binary string or a string encoded in ISO
+8859\-1.
 For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan abcde\\000fghi a6a10 var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR abcde\e000fghi a6a10 var1 var2
+.CE
+will return \fB1\fR with the string equivalent to \fBabcde\e000\fR
+stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fIvar2\fR left unmodified, and
+.CS
+\fBbinary scan\fR \e342\e202\e254 a* var1
+set var2 [encoding convertfrom utf-8 $var1]
 .CE
-will return \fB1\fR with the string equivalent to \fBabcde\\000\fR
-stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fBvar2\fR left unmodified.
+will store a Euro-currency character in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBA\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBa\fR, except trailing blanks and nulls are stripped from
 the scanned value before it is stored in the variable.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan "abc efghi  \\000" A* var1\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR "abc efghi  \e000" A* var1
 .CE
-will return \fB1\fR with \fBabc efghi\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR.
+will return \fB1\fR with \fBabc efghi\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBb\fR 5
 The data is turned into a string of \fIcount\fR binary digits in
-low-to-high order represented as a sequence of ``1'' and ``0''
+low-to-high order represented as a sequence of
+.QW 1
+and
+.QW 0
 characters.  The data bytes are scanned in first to last order with
 the bits being taken in low-to-high order within each byte.  Any extra
 bits in the last byte are ignored.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bits in \fBstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+all of the remaining bits in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one bit will be scanned.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x87\\x05 b5b* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\ex87\ex05 b5b* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB11100\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB1110000110100000\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB11100\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
+\fB1110000110100000\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBB\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBb\fR, except the bits are taken in
 high-to-low order within each byte.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x70\\x87\\x05 B5B* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex70\ex87\ex05 B5B* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB01110\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB1000011100000101\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB01110\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
+\fB1000011100000101\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
-.IP \fBh\fR 5
+.IP \fBH\fR 5
 The data is turned into a string of \fIcount\fR hexadecimal digits in
-low-to-high order represented as a sequence of characters in the set
-``0123456789abcdef''.  The data bytes are scanned in first to last
-order with the hex digits being taken in low-to-high order within each
-byte.  Any extra bits in the last byte are ignored.  If \fIcount\fR
-is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining hex digits in \fBstring\fR will be
-scanned.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one hex digit will be
-scanned.  For example,
+high-to-low order represented as a sequence of characters in the set
+.QW 0123456789abcdef .
+The data bytes are scanned in first to last
+order with the hex digits being taken in high-to-low order within each
+byte. Any extra bits in the last byte are ignored. If \fIcount\fR is
+\fB*\fR, then all of the remaining hex digits in \fIstring\fR will be
+scanned. If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one hex digit will be
+scanned. For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x86\\x05 h3h* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\exC6\ex05\ex1f\ex34 H3H* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB706\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB50\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB07c\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
+\fB051f34\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
-.IP \fBH\fR 5
-This form is the same as \fBh\fR, except the digits are taken in
-high-to-low order within each byte.  For example,
+.IP \fBh\fR 5
+This form is the same as \fBH\fR, except the digits are taken in
+reverse (low-to-high) order within each byte. For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x86\\x05 H3H* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\ex86\ex05\ex12\ex34 h3h* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB078\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB05\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB706\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
+\fB502143\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
+Note that most code that wishes to parse the hexadecimal digits from
+multiple bytes in order should use the \fBH\fR format.
 .IP \fBc\fR 5
 The data is turned into \fIcount\fR 8-bit signed integers and stored
 in the corresponding variable as a list. If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR,
-then all of the remaining bytes in \fBstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+then all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 8-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x07\\x86\\x05 c2c* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex07\ex86\ex05 c2c* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB7 -122\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB5\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB7 -122\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB5\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
 they can be converted to unsigned 8-bit quantities using an expression
 like:
 .CS
-\fBexpr { $num & 0xff }\fR
+set num [expr { $num & 0xff }]
 .CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBs\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers
 represented in little-endian byte order.  The integers are stored in
 the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fBstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 16-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x05\\x00\\x07\\x00\\xf0\\xff s2s* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex05\ex00\ex07\ex00\exf0\exff s2s* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
 they can be converted to unsigned 16-bit quantities using an expression
 like:
 .CS
-\fBexpr { $num & 0xffff }\fR
+set num [expr { $num & 0xffff }]
 .CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBS\fR 5
@@ -502,28 +589,37 @@ as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
 order.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x00\\x05\\x00\\x07\\xff\\xf0 S2S* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex00\ex05\ex00\ex07\exff\exf0 S2S* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR. 
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR. 
 .RE
+.IP \fBt\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 16-bit signed integers
+represented in the native byte order of the machine running the Tcl
+script.  It is otherwise identical to \fBs\fR and \fBS\fR.
+To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
+the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBi\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers
 represented in little-endian byte order.  The integers are stored in
 the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fBstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 32-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x05\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x07\\x00\\x00\\x00\\xf0\\xff\\xff\\xff i2i* var1 var2\fR
+set str \ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\ex00\ex00\ex00\exf0\exff\exff\exff
+\fBbinary scan\fR $str i2i* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are signed, but
 they can be converted to unsigned 32-bit quantities using an expression
 like:
 .CS
-\fBexpr { $num & 0xffffffff }\fR
+set num [expr { $num & 0xffffffff }]
 .CE
 .RE
 .IP \fBI\fR 5
@@ -532,25 +628,34 @@ as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
 order.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x00\\x00\\x00\\x05\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x07\\xff\\xff\\xff\\xf0 I2I* var1 var2\fR
+set str \ex00\ex00\ex00\ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\exff\exff\exff\exf0
+\fBbinary scan\fR $str I2I* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB5 7\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
+.IP \fBn\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 32-bit signed integers
+represented in the native byte order of the machine running the Tcl
+script.  It is otherwise identical to \fBi\fR and \fBI\fR.
+To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
+the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBw\fR 5
-.VS 8.4
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 64-bit signed integers
 represented in little-endian byte order.  The integers are stored in
 the corresponding variable as a list.  If \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then
-all of the remaining bytes in \fBstring\fR will be scanned.  If
+all of the remaining bytes in \fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one 64-bit integer will be scanned.  For
 example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x05\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x07\\x00\\x00\\x00\\xf0\\xff\\xff\\xff wi* var1 var2\fR
+set str \ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\ex00\ex00\ex00\exf0\exff\exff\exff
+\fBbinary scan\fR $str wi* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB30064771077\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and
-\fB-16\fR stored in \fBvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB30064771077\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and
+\fB\-16\fR stored in \fIvar2\fR.  Note that the integers returned are
 signed and cannot be represented by Tcl as unsigned values.
 .RE
 .IP \fBW\fR 5
@@ -559,18 +664,26 @@ as \fIcount\fR 64-bit signed integers represented in big-endian byte
 order.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x00\\x00\\x00\\x05\\x00\\x00\\x00\\x07\\xff\\xff\\xff\\xf0 WI* var1 var2\fR
+set str \ex00\ex00\ex00\ex05\ex00\ex00\ex00\ex07\exff\exff\exff\exf0
+\fBbinary scan\fR $str WI* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB21474836487\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB-16\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
-.VE
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB21474836487\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB\-16\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
+.IP \fBm\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR 64-bit signed integers
+represented in the native byte order of the machine running the Tcl
+script.  It is otherwise identical to \fBw\fR and \fBW\fR.
+To determine what the native byte order of the machine is, refer to
+the \fBbyteOrder\fR element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBf\fR 5
 The data is interpreted as \fIcount\fR single-precision floating point
 numbers in the machine's native representation.  The floating point
 numbers are stored in the corresponding variable as a list.  If
 \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR, then all of the remaining bytes in
-\fBstring\fR will be scanned.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one
+\fIstring\fR will be scanned.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then one
 single-precision floating point number will be scanned.  The size of a
 floating point number may vary across architectures, so the number of
 bytes that are scanned may vary.  If the data does not represent a
@@ -579,11 +692,25 @@ compiler dependent.  For example, on a Windows system running on an
 Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x3f\\xcc\\xcc\\xcd f var1\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex3f\excc\excc\excd f var1
 .CE
 will return \fB1\fR with \fB1.6000000238418579\fR stored in
-\fBvar1\fR.
+\fIvar1\fR.
 .RE
+.IP \fBr\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form is the same as \fBf\fR except that the data is interpreted
+as \fIcount\fR single-precision floating point number in little-endian
+order.  This conversion is not portable to the minority of systems not
+using IEEE floating point representations.
+.VE 8.5
+.IP \fBR\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form is the same as \fBf\fR except that the data is interpreted
+as \fIcount\fR single-precision floating point number in big-endian
+order.  This conversion is not portable to the minority of systems not
+using IEEE floating point representations.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBd\fR 5
 This form is the same as \fBf\fR except that the data is interpreted
 as \fIcount\fR double-precision floating point numbers in the
@@ -591,23 +718,37 @@ machine's native representation. For example, on a Windows system
 running on an Intel Pentium processor,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x9a\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\x99\\xf9\\x3f d var1\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex9a\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\ex99\exf9\ex3f d var1
 .CE
 will return \fB1\fR with \fB1.6000000000000001\fR
-stored in \fBvar1\fR.
-.RE
+stored in \fIvar1\fR.
+.RE
+.IP \fBq\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form is the same as \fBd\fR except that the data is interpreted
+as \fIcount\fR double-precision floating point number in little-endian
+order.  This conversion is not portable to the minority of systems not
+using IEEE floating point representations.
+.VE 8.5
+.IP \fBQ\fR 5
+.VS 8.5
+This form is the same as \fBd\fR except that the data is interpreted
+as \fIcount\fR double-precision floating point number in big-endian
+order.  This conversion is not portable to the minority of systems not
+using IEEE floating point representations.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBx\fR 5
 Moves the cursor forward \fIcount\fR bytes in \fIstring\fR.  If
 \fIcount\fR is \fB*\fR or is larger than the number of bytes after the
-current cursor cursor position, then the cursor is positioned after
+current cursor position, then the cursor is positioned after
 the last byte in \fIstring\fR.  If \fIcount\fR is omitted, then the
 cursor is moved forward one byte.  Note that this type does not
 consume an argument.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x01\\x02\\x03\\x04 x2H* var1\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex01\ex02\ex03\ex04 x2H* var1
 .CE
-will return \fB1\fR with \fB0304\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR.
+will return \fB1\fR with \fB0304\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fBX\fR 5
 Moves the cursor back \fIcount\fR bytes in \fIstring\fR.  If
@@ -618,10 +759,10 @@ is omitted then the cursor is moved back one byte.  Note that this
 type does not consume an argument.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x01\\x02\\x03\\x04 c2XH* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex01\ex02\ex03\ex04 c2XH* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
 .IP \fB@\fR 5
 Moves the cursor to the absolute location in the data string specified
@@ -631,21 +772,23 @@ by \fIcount\fR.  Note that position 0 refers to the first byte in
 \fIcount\fR is omitted, then an error will be generated.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-\fBbinary scan \\x01\\x02\\x03\\x04 c2@1H* var1 var2\fR
+\fBbinary scan\fR \ex01\ex02\ex03\ex04 c2@1H* var1 var2
 .CE
-will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fBvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
-stored in \fBvar2\fR.
+will return \fB2\fR with \fB1 2\fR stored in \fIvar1\fR and \fB020304\fR
+stored in \fIvar2\fR.
 .RE
-.SH "PLATFORM ISSUES"
-Sometimes it is desirable to format or scan integer values in the
-native byte order for the machine.  Refer to the \fBbyteOrder\fR
-element of the \fBtcl_platform\fR array to decide which type character
-to use when formatting or scanning integers.
+.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
+The \fBr\fR, \fBR\fR, \fBq\fR and \fBQ\fR conversions will only work
+reliably for transferring data between computers which are all using
+IEEE floating point representations.  This is very common, but not
+universal.  To transfer floating-point numbers portably between all
+architectures, use their textual representation (as produced by
+\fBformat\fR) instead.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 This is a procedure to write a Tcl string to a binary-encoded channel as
 UTF-8 data preceded by a length word:
 .CS
-proc writeString {channel string} {
+proc \fIwriteString\fR {channel string} {
     set data [encoding convertto utf-8 $string]
     puts -nonewline [\fBbinary format\fR Ia* \e
             [string length $data] $data]
@@ -653,9 +796,9 @@ proc writeString {channel string} {
 .CE
 .PP
 This procedure reads a string from a channel that was written by the
-previously presented \fBwriteString\fR procedure:
+previously presented \fIwriteString\fR procedure:
 .CS
-proc readString {channel} {
+proc \fIreadString\fR {channel} {
     if {![\fBbinary scan\fR [read $channel 4] I length]} {
         error "missing length"
     }
@@ -663,9 +806,7 @@ proc readString {channel} {
     return [encoding convertfrom utf-8 $data]
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 format(n), scan(n), tclvars(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 binary, format, scan
diff --git a/doc/catch.n b/doc/catch.n
index f2d5533..0e2ec04 100644
--- a/doc/catch.n
+++ b/doc/catch.n
@@ -1,18 +1,19 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993-1994 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2003.  (not subject to US copyright)
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH catch n "8.0" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH catch n "8.5" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
 catch \- Evaluate script and trap exceptional returns
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBcatch\fI script \fR?\fIvarName\fR?
+\fBcatch\fI script \fR?\fIresultVarName\fR? ?\fIoptionsVarName\fR?
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -35,44 +36,61 @@ new commands that return other integer values as return codes as well,
 and scripts that make use of the \fBreturn -code\fR command can also
 have return codes other than the five defined by Tcl.
 .PP
-If the \fIvarName\fR argument is given, then the variable it names is
+If the \fIresultVarName\fR argument is given, then the variable it names is
 set to the result of the script evaluation.  When the return code from
-the script is 1 (\fBTCL_ERROR\fR), the value stored in \fIvarName\fR is an error
+the script is 1 (\fBTCL_ERROR\fR), the value stored in \fIresultVarName\fR is an error
 message.  When the return code from the script is 0 (\fBTCL_OK\fR), the value
 stored in \fIresultVarName\fR is the value returned from \fIscript\fR.
 .PP
-If \fIscript\fR does not raise an error, \fBcatch\fR will return 0
-(\fBTCL_OK\fR) and set the variable to the value returned from \fIscript\fR.
+.VS 8.5
+If the \fIoptionsVarName\fR argument is given, then the variable it
+names is set to a dictionary of return options returned by evaluation
+of \fIscript\fR.  Tcl specifies two entries that are always 
+defined in the dictionary: \fB\-code\fR and \fB\-level\fR.  When
+the return code from evaluation of \fIscript\fR is not \fBTCL_RETURN\fR,
+the value of the \fB\-level\fR entry will be 0, and the value
+of the \fB\-code\fR entry will be the same as the return code.
+Only when the return code is \fBTCL_RETURN\fR will the values of
+the \fB\-level\fR and \fB\-code\fR entries be something else, as
+further described in the documentation for the \fBreturn\fR command.
 .PP
-Note that \fBcatch\fR catches all exceptions, including those
-generated by \fBbreak\fR and \fBcontinue\fR as well as errors.  The
-only errors that are not caught are syntax errors found when the
-script is compiled.  This is because the catch command only catches
-errors during runtime.  When the catch statement is compiled, the
-script is compiled as well and any syntax errors will generate a Tcl
-error. 
-
+When the return code from evaluation of \fIscript\fR is \fBTCL_ERROR\fR,
+three additional entries are defined in the dictionary of return options
+stored in \fIoptionsVarName\fR: \fB\-errorinfo\fR, \fB\-errorcode\fR, 
+and \fB\-errorline\fR.  The value of the \fB\-errorinfo\fR entry
+is a formatted stack trace containing more information about
+the context in which the error happened.  The formatted stack
+trace is meant to be read by a person.  The value of
+the \fB\-errorcode\fR entry is additional information about the
+error stored as a list.  The \fB\-errorcode\fR value is meant to
+be further processed by programs, and may not be particularly
+readable by people.  The value of the \fB\-errorline\fR entry
+is an integer indicating which line of \fIscript\fR was being
+evaluated when the error occurred.  The values of the \fB\-errorinfo\fR
+and \fB\-errorcode\fR entries of the most recent error are also
+available as values of the global variables \fB::errorInfo\fR
+and \fB::errorCode\fR respectively.
+.PP
+Tcl packages may provide commands that set other entries in the
+dictionary of return options, and the \fBreturn\fR command may be
+used by scripts to set return options in addition to those defined
+above.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH EXAMPLES
 The \fBcatch\fR command may be used in an \fBif\fR to branch based on
 the success of a script.
 .CS
 if { [\fBcatch\fR {open $someFile w} fid] } {
-    puts stderr "Could not open $someFile for writing\\n$fid"
+    puts stderr "Could not open $someFile for writing\en$fid"
     exit 1
 }
 .CE
 .PP
-The \fBcatch\fR command will not catch compiled syntax errors.  The
-first time proc \fBfoo\fR is called, the body will be compiled and a
-Tcl error will be generated. 
-.CS
-proc foo {} {
-    \fBcatch\fR {expr {1 +- }}
-}
-.CE
+There are more complex examples of \fBcatch\fR usage in the
+documentation for the \fBreturn\fR command.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO" 
-break(n), continue(n), error(n), return(n), tclvars(n)
+break(n), continue(n), dict(n), error(n), return(n), tclvars(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 catch, error
diff --git a/doc/chan.n b/doc/chan.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f5d3d54
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/chan.n
@@ -0,0 +1,736 @@
+'\" 
+'\" Copyright (c) 2005-2006 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+.so man.macros
+.TH chan n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+chan \- Read, write and manipulate channels
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBchan \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+This command provides several operations for reading from, writing to
+and otherwise manipulating open channels (such as have been created
+with the \fBopen\fR and \fBsocket\fR commands, or the default named
+channels \fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR which correspond to
+the process's standard input, output and error streams respectively).
+\fIOption\fR indicates what to do with the channel; any unique
+abbreviation for \fIoption\fR is acceptable. Valid options are:
+.TP
+\fBchan blocked \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+This tests whether the last input operation on the channel called
+\fIchannelId\fR failed because it would have otherwise caused the
+process to block, and returns 1 if that was the case. It returns 0
+otherwise. Note that this only ever returns 1 when the channel has
+been configured to be non-blocking; all Tcl channels have blocking
+turned on by default.
+.TP
+\fBchan close \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+Close and destroy the channel called \fIchannelId\fR. Note that this
+deletes all existing file-events registered on the channel.
+.RS
+.PP
+As part of closing the channel, all buffered output is flushed to the
+channel's output device, any buffered input is discarded, the
+underlying operating system resource is closed and \fIchannelId\fR
+becomes unavailable for future use.
+.PP
+If the channel is blocking, the command does not return until all
+output is flushed.  If the channel is nonblocking and there is
+unflushed output, the channel remains open and the command returns
+immediately; output will be flushed in the background and the channel
+will be closed when all the flushing is complete.
+.PP
+If \fIchannelId\fR is a blocking channel for a command pipeline then
+\fBchan close\fR waits for the child processes to complete.
+.PP
+If the channel is shared between interpreters, then \fBchan close\fR
+makes \fIchannelId\fR unavailable in the invoking interpreter but has
+no other effect until all of the sharing interpreters have closed the
+channel. When the last interpreter in which the channel is registered
+invokes \fBchan close\fR (or \fBclose\fR), the cleanup actions
+described above occur. See the \fBinterp\fR command for a description
+of channel sharing.
+.PP
+Channels are automatically closed when an interpreter is destroyed and
+when the process exits.  Channels are switched to blocking mode, to
+ensure that all output is correctly flushed before the process exits.
+.PP
+The command returns an empty string, and may generate an error if
+an error occurs while flushing output.  If a command in a command
+pipeline created with \fBopen\fR returns an error, \fBchan close\fR
+generates an error (similar to the \fBexec\fR command.)
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan configure \fIchannelId\fR ?\fIoptionName\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR? ?\fIoptionName value\fR?...
+.
+Query or set the configuration options of the channel named
+\fIchannelId\fR.
+.RS
+.PP
+If no \fIoptionName\fR or \fIvalue\fR arguments are supplied, the
+command returns a list containing alternating option names and values
+for the channel.  If \fIoptionName\fR is supplied but no \fIvalue\fR
+then the command returns the current value of the given option.  If
+one or more pairs of \fIoptionName\fR and \fIvalue\fR are supplied,
+the command sets each of the named options to the corresponding
+\fIvalue\fR; in this case the return value is an empty string.
+.PP
+The options described below are supported for all channels. In
+addition, each channel type may add options that only it supports. See
+the manual entry for the command that creates each type of channels
+for the options that that specific type of channel supports. For
+example, see the manual entry for the \fBsocket\fR command for its
+additional options.
+.TP
+\fB\-blocking\fR \fIboolean\fR
+.
+The \fB\-blocking\fR option determines whether I/O operations on the
+channel can cause the process to block indefinitely.  The value of the
+option must be a proper boolean value.  Channels are normally in
+blocking mode; if a channel is placed into nonblocking mode it will
+affect the operation of the \fBchan gets\fR, \fBchan read\fR, \fBchan
+puts\fR, \fBchan flush\fR, and \fBchan close\fR commands; see the
+documentation for those commands for details.  For nonblocking mode to
+work correctly, the application must be using the Tcl event loop
+(e.g. by calling \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR or invoking the \fBvwait\fR
+command).
+.TP
+\fB\-buffering\fR \fInewValue\fR
+.
+If \fInewValue\fR is \fBfull\fR then the I/O system will buffer output
+until its internal buffer is full or until the \fBchan flush\fR
+command is invoked. If \fInewValue\fR is \fBline\fR, then the I/O
+system will automatically flush output for the channel whenever a
+newline character is output. If \fInewValue\fR is \fBnone\fR, the I/O
+system will flush automatically after every output operation.  The
+default is for \fB\-buffering\fR to be set to \fBfull\fR except for
+channels that connect to terminal-like devices; for these channels the
+initial setting is \fBline\fR.  Additionally, \fBstdin\fR and
+\fBstdout\fR are initially set to \fBline\fR, and \fBstderr\fR is set
+to \fBnone\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-buffersize\fR \fInewSize\fR
+.
+\fINewvalue\fR must be an integer; its value is used to set the size
+of buffers, in bytes, subsequently allocated for this channel to store
+input or output. \fINewvalue\fR must be a number of no more than one
+million, allowing buffers of up to one million bytes in size.
+.TP
+\fB\-encoding\fR \fIname\fR
+.
+This option is used to specify the encoding of the channel as one of
+the named encodings returned by \fBencoding names\fR or the special
+value \fBbinary\fR, so that the data can be converted to and from
+Unicode for use in Tcl.  For instance, in order for Tcl to read
+characters from a Japanese file in \fBshiftjis\fR and properly process
+and display the contents, the encoding would be set to \fBshiftjis\fR.
+Thereafter, when reading from the channel, the bytes in the Japanese
+file would be converted to Unicode as they are read.  Writing is also
+supported \- as Tcl strings are written to the channel they will
+automatically be converted to the specified encoding on output.
+.RS
+.PP
+If a file contains pure binary data (for instance, a JPEG image), the
+encoding for the channel should be configured to be \fBbinary\fR.  Tcl
+will then assign no interpretation to the data in the file and simply
+read or write raw bytes.  The Tcl \fBbinary\fR command can be used to
+manipulate this byte-oriented data.  It is usually better to set the
+\fB\-translation\fR option to \fBbinary\fR when you want to transfer
+binary data, as this turns off the other automatic interpretations of
+the bytes in the stream as well.
+.PP
+The default encoding for newly opened channels is the same platform-
+and locale-dependent system encoding used for interfacing with the
+operating system, as returned by \fBencoding system\fR.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB\-eofchar\fR \fIchar\fR
+.TP
+\fB\-eofchar\fR \fB{\fIinChar outChar\fB}\fR
+.
+This option supports DOS file systems that use Control-z (\ex1a) as an
+end of file marker.  If \fIchar\fR is not an empty string, then this
+character signals end-of-file when it is encountered during input.
+For output, the end-of-file character is output when the channel is
+closed.  If \fIchar\fR is the empty string, then there is no special
+end of file character marker.  For read-write channels, a two-element
+list specifies the end of file marker for input and output,
+respectively.  As a convenience, when setting the end-of-file
+character for a read-write channel you can specify a single value that
+will apply to both reading and writing.  When querying the end-of-file
+character of a read-write channel, a two-element list will always be
+returned.  The default value for \fB\-eofchar\fR is the empty string
+in all cases except for files under Windows.  In that case the
+\fB\-eofchar\fR is Control-z (\ex1a) for reading and the empty string
+for writing.
+The acceptable range for \fB\-eofchar\fR values is \ex01 - \ex7f;
+attempting to set \fB\-eofchar\fR to a value outside of this range will
+generate an error.
+.TP
+\fB\-translation\fR \fImode\fR
+.TP
+\fB\-translation\fR \fB{\fIinMode outMode\fB}\fR 
+.
+In Tcl scripts the end of a line is always represented using a single
+newline character (\en).  However, in actual files and devices the end
+of a line may be represented differently on different platforms, or
+even for different devices on the same platform.  For example, under
+UNIX newlines are used in files, whereas carriage-return-linefeed
+sequences are normally used in network connections.  On input (i.e.,
+with \fBchan gets\fR and \fBchan read\fR) the Tcl I/O system
+automatically translates the external end-of-line representation into
+newline characters.  Upon output (i.e., with \fBchan puts\fR), the I/O
+system translates newlines to the external end-of-line representation.
+The default translation mode, \fBauto\fR, handles all the common cases
+automatically, but the \fB\-translation\fR option provides explicit
+control over the end of line translations.
+.RS
+.PP
+The value associated with \fB\-translation\fR is a single item for
+read-only and write-only channels.  The value is a two-element list for
+read-write channels; the read translation mode is the first element of
+the list, and the write translation mode is the second element.  As a
+convenience, when setting the translation mode for a read-write channel
+you can specify a single value that will apply to both reading and
+writing.  When querying the translation mode of a read-write channel, a
+two-element list will always be returned.  The following values are
+currently supported:
+.TP
+\fBauto\fR
+.
+As the input translation mode, \fBauto\fR treats any of newline
+(\fBlf\fR), carriage return (\fBcr\fR), or carriage return followed by
+a newline (\fBcrlf\fR) as the end of line representation.  The end of
+line representation can even change from line-to-line, and all cases
+are translated to a newline.  As the output translation mode,
+\fBauto\fR chooses a platform specific representation; for sockets on
+all platforms Tcl chooses \fBcrlf\fR, for all Unix flavors, it chooses
+\fBlf\fR, and for the various flavors of Windows it chooses
+\fBcrlf\fR.  The default setting for \fB\-translation\fR is \fBauto\fR
+for both input and output.
+.TP
+\fBbinary\fR 
+.
+No end-of-line translations are performed.  This is nearly identical
+to \fBlf\fR mode, except that in addition \fBbinary\fR mode also sets
+the end-of-file character to the empty string (which disables it) and
+sets the encoding to \fBbinary\fR (which disables encoding filtering).
+See the description of \fB\-eofchar\fR and \fB\-encoding\fR for more
+information.
+.TP
+\fBcr\fR
+.
+The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
+single carriage return character.  As the input translation mode,
+\fBcr\fR mode converts carriage returns to newline characters.  As the
+output translation mode, \fBcr\fR mode translates newline characters
+to carriage returns.
+.TP
+\fBcrlf\fR
+.
+The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
+carriage return character followed by a linefeed character.  As the
+input translation mode, \fBcrlf\fR mode converts
+carriage-return-linefeed sequences to newline characters.  As the
+output translation mode, \fBcrlf\fR mode translates newline characters
+to carriage-return-linefeed sequences.  This mode is typically used on
+Windows platforms and for network connections.
+.TP
+\fBlf\fR
+.
+The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
+single newline (linefeed) character.  In this mode no translations
+occur during either input or output.  This mode is typically used on
+UNIX platforms.
+.RE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan copy \fIinputChan outputChan\fR ?\fB\-size \fIsize\fR? ?\fB\-command \fIcallback\fR?
+.
+Copy data from the channel \fIinputChan\fR, which must have been
+opened for reading, to the channel \fIoutputChan\fR, which must have
+been opened for writing. The \fBchan copy\fR command leverages the
+buffering in the Tcl I/O system to avoid extra copies and to avoid
+buffering too much data in main memory when copying large files to
+slow destinations like network sockets.
+.RS
+.PP
+The \fBchan copy\fR command transfers data from \fIinputChan\fR until
+end of file or \fIsize\fR bytes have been transferred. If no
+\fB\-size\fR argument is given, then the copy goes until end of file.
+All the data read from \fIinputChan\fR is copied to \fIoutputChan\fR.
+Without the \fB\-command\fR option, \fBchan copy\fR blocks until the
+copy is complete and returns the number of bytes written to
+\fIoutputChan\fR.
+.PP
+The \fB\-command\fR argument makes \fBchan copy\fR work in the
+background.  In this case it returns immediately and the
+\fIcallback\fR is invoked later when the copy completes.  The
+\fIcallback\fR is called with one or two additional arguments that
+indicates how many bytes were written to \fIoutputChan\fR.  If an
+error occurred during the background copy, the second argument is the
+error string associated with the error.  With a background copy, it is
+not necessary to put \fIinputChan\fR or \fIoutputChan\fR into
+non-blocking mode; the \fBchan copy\fR command takes care of that
+automatically.  However, it is necessary to enter the event loop by
+using the \fBvwait\fR command or by using Tk.
+.PP
+You are not allowed to do other I/O operations with \fIinputChan\fR or
+\fIoutputChan\fR during a background \fBchan copy\fR.  If either
+\fIinputChan\fR or \fIoutputChan\fR get closed while the copy is in
+progress, the current copy is stopped and the command callback is
+\fInot\fR made.  If \fIinputChan\fR is closed, then all data already
+queued for \fIoutputChan\fR is written out.
+.PP
+Note that \fIinputChan\fR can become readable during a background
+copy.  You should turn off any \fBchan event\fR or \fBfileevent\fR
+handlers during a background copy so those handlers do not interfere
+with the copy.  Any I/O attempted by a \fBchan event\fR or
+\fBfileevent\fR handler will get a
+.QW "channel busy"
+error.
+.PP
+\fBChan copy\fR translates end-of-line sequences in \fIinputChan\fR
+and \fIoutputChan\fR according to the \fB\-translation\fR option for
+these channels (see \fBchan configure\fR above).  The translations
+mean that the number of bytes read from \fIinputChan\fR can be
+different than the number of bytes written to \fIoutputChan\fR.  Only
+the number of bytes written to \fIoutputChan\fR is reported, either as
+the return value of a synchronous \fBchan copy\fR or as the argument
+to the callback for an asynchronous \fBchan copy\fR.
+.PP
+\fBChan copy\fR obeys the encodings and character translations
+configured for the channels. This means that the incoming characters
+are converted internally first UTF-8 and then into the encoding of the
+channel \fBchan copy\fR writes to (see \fBchan configure\fR above for
+details on the \fB\-encoding\fR and \fB\-translation\fR options). No
+conversion is done if both channels are set to encoding \fBbinary\fR
+and have matching translations. If only the output channel is set to
+encoding \fBbinary\fR the system will write the internal UTF-8
+representation of the incoming characters. If only the input channel
+is set to encoding \fBbinary\fR the system will assume that the
+incoming bytes are valid UTF-8 characters and convert them according
+to the output encoding. The behaviour of the system for bytes which
+are not valid UTF-8 characters is undefined in this case.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan create \fImode cmdPrefix\fR
+.
+This subcommand creates a new script level channel using the command
+prefix \fIcmdPrefix\fR as its handler. Any such channel is called a
+\fBreflected\fR channel. The specified command prefix, \fBcmdPrefix\fR,
+must be a non-empty list, and should provide the API described in the
+\fBreflectedchan\fR manual page. The handle of the new channel is
+returned as the result of the \fBchan create\fR command, and the
+channel is open. Use either \fBclose\fR or \fBchan close\fR to remove
+the channel.
+.RS
+.PP
+The argument \fImode\fR specifies if the new channel is opened for
+reading, writing, or both. It has to be a list containing any of the
+strings
+.QW \fBread\fR
+or
+.QW \fBwrite\fR .
+The list must have at least one
+element, as a channel you can neither write to nor read from makes no
+sense. The handler command for the new channel must support the chosen
+mode, or an error is thrown.
+.PP
+The command prefix is executed in the global namespace, at the top of
+call stack, following the appending of arguments as described in the
+\fBreflectedchan\fR manual page. Command resolution happens at the
+time of the call. Renaming the command, or destroying it means that
+the next call of a handler method may fail, causing the channel
+command invoking the handler to fail as well. Depending on the
+subcommand being invoked, the error message may not be able to explain
+the reason for that failure.
+.PP
+Every channel created with this subcommand knows which interpreter it
+was created in, and only ever executes its handler command in that
+interpreter, even if the channel was shared with and/or was moved into
+a different interpreter. Each reflected channel also knows the thread
+it was created in, and executes its handler command only in that
+thread, even if the channel was moved into a different thread. To this
+end all invocations of the handler are forwarded to the original
+thread by posting special events to it. This means that the original
+thread (i.e. the thread that executed the \fBchan create\fR command)
+must have an active event loop, i.e. it must be able to process such
+events. Otherwise the thread sending them will \fIblock
+indefinitely\fR. Deadlock may occur.
+.PP
+Note that this permits the creation of a channel whose two endpoints
+live in two different threads, providing a stream-oriented bridge
+between these threads. In other words, we can provide a way for
+regular stream communication between threads instead of having to send
+commands.
+.PP
+When a thread or interpreter is deleted, all channels created with
+this subcommand and using this thread/interpreter as their computing
+base are deleted as well, in all interpreters they have been shared
+with or moved into, and in whatever thread they have been transfered
+to. While this pulls the rug out under the other thread(s) and/or
+interpreter(s), this cannot be avoided. Trying to use such a channel
+will cause the generation of a regular error about unknown channel
+handles.
+.PP
+This subcommand is \fBsafe\fR and made accessible to safe
+interpreters.  While it arranges for the execution of arbitrary Tcl
+code the system also makes sure that the code is always executed
+within the safe interpreter.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan eof \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+Test whether the last input operation on the channel called
+\fIchannelId\fR failed because the end of the data stream was reached,
+returning 1 if end-of-file was reached, and 0 otherwise.
+.TP
+\fBchan event \fIchannelId event\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
+.
+Arrange for the Tcl script \fIscript\fR to be installed as a \fIfile
+event handler\fR to be called whenever the channel called
+\fIchannelId\fR enters the state described by \fIevent\fR (which must
+be either \fBreadable\fR or \fBwritable\fR); only one such handler may
+be installed per event per channel at a time.  If \fIscript\fR is the
+empty string, the current handler is deleted (this also happens if the
+channel is closed or the interpreter deleted).  If \fIscript\fR is
+omitted, the currently installed script is returned (or an empty
+string if no such handler is installed).  The callback is only
+performed if the event loop is being serviced (e.g. via \fBvwait\fR or
+\fBupdate\fR).
+.RS
+.PP
+A file event handler is a binding between a channel and a script, such
+that the script is evaluated whenever the channel becomes readable or
+writable.  File event handlers are most commonly used to allow data to
+be received from another process on an event-driven basis, so that the
+receiver can continue to interact with the user or with other channels
+while waiting for the data to arrive.  If an application invokes
+\fBchan gets\fR or \fBchan read\fR on a blocking channel when there is
+no input data available, the process will block; until the input data
+arrives, it will not be able to service other events, so it will
+appear to the user to
+.QW "freeze up" .
+With \fBchan event\fR, the
+process can tell when data is present and only invoke \fBchan gets\fR
+or \fBchan read\fR when they will not block.
+.PP
+A channel is considered to be readable if there is unread data
+available on the underlying device.  A channel is also considered to
+be readable if there is unread data in an input buffer, except in the
+special case where the most recent attempt to read from the channel
+was a \fBchan gets\fR call that could not find a complete line in the
+input buffer.  This feature allows a file to be read a line at a time
+in nonblocking mode using events.  A channel is also considered to be
+readable if an end of file or error condition is present on the
+underlying file or device.  It is important for \fIscript\fR to check
+for these conditions and handle them appropriately; for example, if
+there is no special check for end of file, an infinite loop may occur
+where \fIscript\fR reads no data, returns, and is immediately invoked
+again.
+.PP
+A channel is considered to be writable if at least one byte of data
+can be written to the underlying file or device without blocking, or
+if an error condition is present on the underlying file or device.
+Note that client sockets opened in asynchronous mode become writable
+when they become connected or if the connection fails.
+.PP
+Event-driven I/O works best for channels that have been placed into
+nonblocking mode with the \fBchan configure\fR command.  In blocking
+mode, a \fBchan puts\fR command may block if you give it more data
+than the underlying file or device can accept, and a \fBchan gets\fR
+or \fBchan read\fR command will block if you attempt to read more data
+than is ready; no events will be processed while the commands block.
+In nonblocking mode \fBchan puts\fR, \fBchan read\fR, and \fBchan
+gets\fR never block.
+.PP
+The script for a file event is executed at global level (outside the
+context of any Tcl procedure) in the interpreter in which the \fBchan
+event\fR command was invoked.  If an error occurs while executing the
+script then the command registered with \fBinterp bgerror\fR is used
+to report the error.  In addition, the file event handler is deleted
+if it ever returns an error; this is done in order to prevent infinite
+loops due to buggy handlers.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan flush \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+Ensures that all pending output for the channel called \fIchannelId\fR
+is written.
+.RS
+.PP
+If the channel is in blocking mode the command does not return until
+all the buffered output has been flushed to the channel. If the
+channel is in nonblocking mode, the command may return before all
+buffered output has been flushed; the remainder will be flushed in the
+background as fast as the underlying file or device is able to absorb
+it.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan gets \fIchannelId\fR ?\fIvarName\fR?
+.
+Reads the next line from the channel called \fIchannelId\fR. If
+\fIvarName\fR is not specified, the result of the command will be the
+line that has been read (without a trailing newline character) or an
+empty string upon end-of-file or, in non-blocking mode, if the data
+available is exhausted. If \fIvarName\fR is specified, the line that
+has been read will be written to the variable called \fIvarName\fR and
+result will be the number of characters that have been read or -1 if
+end-of-file was reached or, in non-blocking mode, if the data
+available is exhausted.
+.RS
+.PP
+If an end-of-file occurs while part way through reading a line, the
+partial line will be returned (or written into \fIvarName\fR). When
+\fIvarName\fR is not specified, the end-of-file case can be
+distinguished from an empty line using the \fBchan eof\fR command, and
+the partial-line-but-nonblocking case can be distinguished with the
+\fBchan blocked\fR command.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan names\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
+.
+Produces a list of all channel names. If \fIpattern\fR is specified,
+only those channel names that match it (according to the rules of
+\fBstring match\fR) will be returned.
+.TP
+\fBchan pending \fImode channelId\fR
+.
+Depending on whether \fImode\fR is \fBinput\fR or \fBoutput\fR,
+returns the number of
+bytes of input or output (respectively) currently buffered 
+internally for \fIchannelId\fR (especially useful in a readable event 
+callback to impose application-specific limits on input line lengths to avoid
+a potential denial-of-service attack where a hostile user crafts
+an extremely long line that exceeds the available memory to buffer it).
+Returns -1 if the channel was not opened for the mode in question.
+.TP
+\fBchan postevent \fIchannelId eventSpec\fR
+.
+This subcommand is used by command handlers specified with \fBchan
+create\fR. It notifies the channel represented by the handle
+\fIchannelId\fR that the event(s) listed in the \fIeventSpec\fR have
+occurred. The argument has to be a list containing any of the strings
+\fBread\fR and \fBwrite\fR. The list must contain at least one
+element as it does not make sense to invoke the command if there are
+no events to post.
+.RS
+.PP
+Note that this subcommand can only be used with channel handles that
+were created/opened by \fBchan create\fR. All other channels will
+cause this subcommand to report an error.
+.PP
+As only the Tcl level of a channel, i.e. its command handler, should
+post events to it we also restrict the usage of this command to the
+interpreter that created the channel. In other words, posting events
+to a reflected channel from an interpreter that does not contain it's
+implementation is not allowed. Attempting to post an event from any
+other interpreter will cause this subcommand to report an error.
+.PP
+Another restriction is that it is not possible to post events that the
+I/O core has not registered an interest in. Trying to do so will cause
+the method to throw an error. See the command handler method
+\fBwatch\fR described in \fBreflectedchan\fR, the document specifying
+the API of command handlers for reflected channels.
+.PP
+This command is \fBsafe\fR and made accessible to safe interpreters.
+It can trigger the execution of \fBchan event\fR handlers, whether in the
+current interpreter or in other interpreters or other threads, even
+where the event is posted from a safe interpreter and listened for by
+a trusted interpreter. \fBChan event\fR handlers are \fIalways\fR
+executed in the interpreter that set them up.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan puts\fR ?\fB\-nonewline\fR? ?\fIchannelId\fR? \fIstring\fR
+.
+Writes \fIstring\fR to the channel named \fIchannelId\fR followed by a
+newline character. A trailing newline character is written unless the
+optional flag \fB\-nonewline\fR is given. If \fIchannelId\fR is
+omitted, the string is written to the standard output channel,
+\fBstdout\fR.
+.RS
+.PP
+Newline characters in the output are translated by \fBchan puts\fR to
+platform-specific end-of-line sequences according to the currently
+configured value of the \fB\-translation\fR option for the channel
+(for example, on PCs newlines are normally replaced with
+carriage-return-linefeed sequences; see \fBchan configure\fR above for
+details).
+.PP
+Tcl buffers output internally, so characters written with \fBchan
+puts\fR may not appear immediately on the output file or device; Tcl
+will normally delay output until the buffer is full or the channel is
+closed.  You can force output to appear immediately with the \fBchan
+flush\fR command.
+.PP
+When the output buffer fills up, the \fBchan puts\fR command will
+normally block until all the buffered data has been accepted for
+output by the operating system.  If \fIchannelId\fR is in nonblocking
+mode then the \fBchan puts\fR command will not block even if the
+operating system cannot accept the data.  Instead, Tcl continues to
+buffer the data and writes it in the background as fast as the
+underlying file or device can accept it.  The application must use the
+Tcl event loop for nonblocking output to work; otherwise Tcl never
+finds out that the file or device is ready for more output data.  It
+is possible for an arbitrarily large amount of data to be buffered for
+a channel in nonblocking mode, which could consume a large amount of
+memory.  To avoid wasting memory, nonblocking I/O should normally be
+used in an event-driven fashion with the \fBchan event\fR command
+(do not invoke \fBchan puts\fR unless you have recently been notified
+via a file event that the channel is ready for more output data).
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan read \fIchannelId\fR ?\fInumChars\fR?
+.TP
+\fBchan read \fR?\fB\-nonewline\fR? \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+In the first form, the result will be the next \fInumChars\fR
+characters read from the channel named \fIchannelId\fR; if
+\fInumChars\fR is omitted, all characters up to the point when the
+channel would signal a failure (whether an end-of-file, blocked or
+other error condition) are read. In the second form (i.e. when
+\fInumChars\fR has been omitted) the flag \fB\-nonewline\fR may be
+given to indicate that any trailing newline in the string that has
+been read should be trimmed.
+.RS
+.PP
+If \fIchannelId\fR is in nonblocking mode, \fBchan read\fR may not
+read as many characters as requested: once all available input has
+been read, the command will return the data that is available rather
+than blocking for more input.  If the channel is configured to use a
+multi-byte encoding, then there may actually be some bytes remaining
+in the internal buffers that do not form a complete character.  These
+bytes will not be returned until a complete character is available or
+end-of-file is reached.  The \fB\-nonewline\fR switch is ignored if
+the command returns before reaching the end of the file.
+.PP
+\fBChan read\fR translates end-of-line sequences in the input into
+newline characters according to the \fB\-translation\fR option for the
+channel (see \fBchan configure\fR above for a discussion on the ways
+in which \fBchan configure\fR will alter input).
+.PP
+When reading from a serial port, most applications should configure
+the serial port channel to be nonblocking, like this:
+.CS
+\fBchan configure \fIchannelId \fB\-blocking \fI0\fR.
+.CE
+Then \fBchan read\fR behaves much like described above.  Note that
+most serial ports are comparatively slow; it is entirely possible to
+get a \fBreadable\fR event for each character read from them. Care
+must be taken when using \fBchan read\fR on blocking serial ports:
+.TP
+\fBchan read \fIchannelId numChars\fR
+.
+In this form \fBchan read\fR blocks until \fInumChars\fR have been
+received from the serial port.
+.TP
+\fBchan read \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+In this form \fBchan read\fR blocks until the reception of the
+end-of-file character, see \fBchan configure -eofchar\fR. If there no
+end-of-file character has been configured for the channel, then
+\fBchan read\fR will block forever.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan seek \fIchannelId offset\fR ?\fIorigin\fR?
+.
+Sets the current access position within the underlying data stream for
+the channel named \fIchannelId\fR to be \fIoffset\fR bytes relative to
+\fIorigin\fR. \fIOffset\fR must be an integer (which may be negative)
+and \fIorigin\fR must be one of the following:
+.RS
+.TP 10
+\fBstart\fR
+.
+The new access position will be \fIoffset\fR bytes from the start
+of the underlying file or device.
+.TP 10
+\fBcurrent\fR
+.
+The new access position will be \fIoffset\fR bytes from the current
+access position; a negative \fIoffset\fR moves the access position
+backwards in the underlying file or device.
+.TP 10
+\fBend\fR
+.
+The new access position will be \fIoffset\fR bytes from the end of the
+file or device.  A negative \fIoffset\fR places the access position
+before the end of file, and a positive \fIoffset\fR places the access
+position after the end of file.
+.PP
+The \fIorigin\fR argument defaults to \fBstart\fR.
+.PP
+\fBChan seek\fR flushes all buffered output for the channel before the
+command returns, even if the channel is in nonblocking mode.  It also
+discards any buffered and unread input.  This command returns an empty
+string.  An error occurs if this command is applied to channels whose
+underlying file or device does not support seeking.
+.PP
+Note that \fIoffset\fR values are byte offsets, not character offsets.
+Both \fBchan seek\fR and \fBchan tell\fR operate in terms of bytes,
+not characters, unlike \fBchan read\fR.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBchan tell \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+Returns a number giving the current access position within the
+underlying data stream for the channel named \fIchannelId\fR. This
+value returned is a byte offset that can be passed to \fBchan seek\fR
+in order to set the channel to a particular position.  Note that this
+value is in terms of bytes, not characters like \fBchan read\fR.  The
+value returned is -1 for channels that do not support seeking.
+.TP
+\fBchan truncate \fIchannelId\fR ?\fIlength\fR?
+.
+Sets the byte length of the underlying data stream for the channel
+named \fIchannelId\fR to be \fIlength\fR (or to the current byte
+offset within the underlying data stream if \fIlength\fR is
+omitted). The channel is flushed before truncation.
+.SH EXAMPLE
+This opens a file using a known encoding (CP1252, a very common encoding
+on Windows), searches for a string, rewrites that part, and truncates the
+file after a further two lines.
+.PP
+.CS
+set f [open somefile.txt r+]
+\fBchan configure\fR $f -encoding cp1252
+set offset 0
+
+\fI# Search for string "FOOBAR" in the file\fR
+while {[\fBchan gets\fR $f line] >= 0} {
+   set idx [string first FOOBAR $line]
+   if {$idx > -1} {
+      \fI# Found it; rewrite line\fR
+
+      \fBchan seek\fR $f [expr {$offset + $idx}]
+      \fBchan puts\fR -nonewline $f BARFOO
+
+      \fI# Skip to end of following line, and truncate\fR
+      \fBchan gets\fR $f
+      \fBchan gets\fR $f
+      \fBchan truncate\fR $f
+
+      \fI# Stop searching the file now\fR
+      break
+   }
+
+   \fI# Save offset of start of next line for later\fR
+   set offset [\fBchan tell\fR $f]
+}
+\fBchan close\fR $f
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+close(n), eof(n), fblocked(n), fconfigure(n), fcopy(n), file(n),
+fileevent(n), flush(n), gets(n), open(n), puts(n), read(n), seek(n),
+socket(n), tell(n), refchan(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+channel, input, output, events, offset
diff --git a/doc/clock.n b/doc/clock.n
index 8e00c43..600722b 100644
--- a/doc/clock.n
+++ b/doc/clock.n
@@ -1,259 +1,890 @@
 '\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1995 Karl Lehenbauer and Mark Diekhans.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1995-1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1998-1999 Scriptics Corporation
-'\" Copyright (c) 2002 ActiveState Corporation
+'\" Generated from file './doc/clock.dt' by tcllib/doctools with format 'nroff'
+'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved.
 '\"
-'\" This documentation is derived from the time and date facilities of
-'\" TclX, by Mark Diekhans and Karl Lehenbauer.
-'\" 
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH clock n 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH "clock" n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-clock \- Obtain and manipulate time
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBclock \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
+clock \- Obtain and manipulate dates and times
+.SH "SYNOPSIS"
+package require \fBTcl 8.5\fR
+.sp
+\fBclock add\fR \fItimeVal\fR ?\fIcount unit...\fR? ?\fI\-option value\fR?
+.sp
+\fBclock clicks\fR ?\fI\-option\fR?
+.sp
+\fBclock format\fR \fItimeVal\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR...?
+.sp
+\fBclock microseconds\fR 
+.sp
+\fBclock milliseconds\fR 
+.sp
+\fBclock scan\fR \fIinputString\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR...?
+.sp
+\fBclock seconds\fR 
+.sp
 .BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-This command performs one of several operations that may obtain
-or manipulate strings or values that represent some notion of
-time.  The \fIoption\fR argument determines what action is carried
-out by the command.  The legal \fIoptions\fR (which may be
-abbreviated) are:
-.VS 8.3
-.TP
-\fBclock clicks\fR ?\fB\-milliseconds\fR?
-Return a high-resolution time value as a system-dependent integer
-value.  The unit of the value is system-dependent but should be the
-highest resolution clock available on the system such as a CPU cycle
-counter. If \fB\-milliseconds\fR is specified, then the value is
-guaranteed to be of millisecond granularity.
-This value should only be used for the relative measurement
-of elapsed time.
-.VE 8.3
-.TP
-\fBclock format \fIclockValue\fR ?\fB\-format \fIstring\fR? ?\fB\-gmt \fIboolean\fR?
-Converts an integer time value, typically returned by
-\fBclock seconds\fR, \fBclock scan\fR, or the \fBatime\fR or \fBmtime\fR
-options of the \fBfile\fR command, to human-readable
-form.  If the \fB\-format\fR argument is present the next argument is a
-string that describes how the date and time are to be formatted.
-Field descriptors consist of a \fB%\fR followed by a field
-descriptor character.  All other characters are copied into the result.
-Valid field descriptors are:
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+The \fBclock\fR command performs several operations that obtain and
+manipulate values that represent times.  The command supports several
+subcommands that determine what action is carried out by the command.
+.TP
+\fBclock add\fR \fItimeVal\fR ?\fIcount unit...\fR? ?\fI\-option value\fR?
+Adds a (possibly negative) offset to a time that is expressed as an
+integer number of seconds.  See \fBCLOCK ARITHMETIC\fR for a full description.
+.TP
+\fBclock clicks\fR ?\fI\-option\fR?
+If no \fI\-option\fR argument is supplied, returns a high-resolution
+time value as a system-dependent integer value.  The unit of the value
+is system-dependent but should be the highest resolution clock available
+on the system such as a CPU cycle counter.  See \fBHIGH RESOLUTION TIMERS\fR for a full description.
 .RS
-.IP \fB%%\fR
-Insert a %.
-.IP \fB%a\fR
-Abbreviated weekday name (Mon, Tue, etc.).
-.IP \fB%A\fR
-Full weekday name (Monday, Tuesday, etc.).
-.IP \fB%b\fR
-Abbreviated month name (Jan, Feb, etc.).
-.IP \fB%B\fR
-Full month name.
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%c\fR
-Locale specific date and time.  The format for date and time
-in the default "C" locale on Unix/Mac is "%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %Y".
-On Windows, this value is the locale specific long date and time, as
-specified in the Regional Options control panel settings.
-.IP \fB%C\fR
-First two digits of the four-digit year (19 or 20).
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%d\fR
-Day of month (01 - 31).
-.VS 8.4
-'\" Since the inclusion of compat/strftime.c, %D, %e, %h should work on all
-'\" platforms.
-.IP \fB%D\fR
-Date as %m/%d/%y.
-.IP \fB%e\fR
-Day of month (1 - 31), no leading zeros.
-.IP \fB%g\fR
-The ISO8601 year number corresponding to the ISO8601 week (%V), expressed
-as a two-digit year-of-the-century, with leading zero if necessary.
-.IP \fB%G\fR
-The ISO8601 year number corresponding to the ISO8601 week (%V), expressed
-as a four-digit number.
-.IP \fB%h\fR
-Abbreviated month name.
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%H\fR
-Hour in 24-hour format (00 - 23).
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%I\fR
-Hour in 12-hour format (01 - 12).
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%j\fR
-Day of year (001 - 366).
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%k\fR
-Hour in 24-hour format, without leading zeros (0 - 23).
-.IP \fB%l\fR
-Hour in 12-hour format, without leading zeros (1 - 12).
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%m\fR
-Month number (01 - 12).
-.IP \fB%M\fR
-Minute (00 - 59).
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%n\fR
-Insert a newline.
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%p\fR
-AM/PM indicator.
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%r\fR
-Time in a locale-specific "meridian" format.  The "meridian"
-format in the default "C" locale is "%I:%M:%S %p".
-.IP \fB%R\fR
-Time as %H:%M.
-.IP \fB%s\fR
-Count of seconds since the epoch, expressed as a decimal integer.
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%S\fR
-Seconds (00 - 59).
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%t\fR
-Insert a tab.
-.IP \fB%T\fR
-Time as %H:%M:%S.
-.IP \fB%u\fR
-Weekday number (Monday = 1, Sunday = 7).
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%U\fR
-Week of year (00 - 52), Sunday is the first day of the week.
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%V\fR
-Week of year according to ISO-8601 rules.  Week 1 of a given
-year is the week containing 4 January.
-.IP \fB%w\fR
-Weekday number (Sunday = 0, Saturday = 6).
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%W\fR
-Week of year (00 - 52), Monday is the first day of the week.
-.VS 8.4
-.IP \fB%x\fR
-Locale specific date format.  The format for a date in the default "C"
-locale for Unix/Mac is "%m/%d/%y".
-On Windows, this value is the locale specific short date format, as
-specified in the Regional Options control panel settings.
-.IP \fB%X\fR
-Locale specific 24-hour time format.  The format for a 
-24-hour time in the default "C" locale for Unix/Mac is "%H:%M:%S".
-On Windows, this value is the locale specific time format, as
-specified in the Regional Options control panel settings.
-.VE 8.4
-.IP \fB%y\fR
-Year without century (00 - 99).
-.IP \fB%Y\fR
-Year with century (e.g. 1990)
-.IP \fB%Z\fR
-Time zone name.
+.PP
+If the \fI\-option\fR argument is \fI\-milliseconds\fR, then the command
+is synonymous with \fBclock milliseconds\fR (see below).  This
+usage is obsolete, and \fBclock milliseconds\fR is to be
+considered the preferred way of obtaining a count of milliseconds.
+.PP
+If the \fI\-option\fR argument is \fI\-microseconds\fR, then the command
+is synonymous with \fBclock microseconds\fR (see below).  This
+usage is obsolete, and \fBclock microseconds\fR is to be
+considered the preferred way of obtaining a count of microseconds.
 .RE
-.VS 8.4
-.sp
-'\" All the field descriptors should be portable now that
-'\" compat/strftime.c is in place, with the possible exception
-'\" of the time zone name.
-'\".RS
-'\"In addition, the following field descriptors may be supported on some
-'\"systems (e.g. Unix but not Windows):
-'\".IP \fB%D\fR
-'\"Date as %m/%d/%y.
-'\".IP \fB%e\fR
-'\"Day of month (1 - 31), no leading zeros.
-'\".IP \fB%h\fR
-'\"Abbreviated month name.
-'\".IP \fB%n\fR
-'\"Insert a newline.
-'\".IP \fB%r\fR
-'\"Time as %I:%M:%S %p.
-'\".IP \fB%R\fR
-'\"Time as %H:%M.
-'\".IP \fB%t\fR
-'\"Insert a tab.
-'\".IP \fB%T\fR
-'\"Time as %H:%M:%S.
-'\".RE
-'\".sp
-.VE 8.4
+.TP
+\fBclock format\fR \fItimeVal\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR...?
+Formats a time that is expressed as an integer number of seconds into a format
+intended for consumption by users or external programs.
+See \fBFORMATTING TIMES\fR for a full description.
+.TP
+\fBclock microseconds\fR 
+Returns the current time as an integer number of microseconds.  See \fBHIGH RESOLUTION TIMERS\fR for a full description.
+.TP
+\fBclock milliseconds\fR 
+Returns the current time as an integer number of milliseconds.  See \fBHIGH RESOLUTION TIMERS\fR for a full description.
+.TP
+\fBclock scan\fR \fIinputString\fR ?\fI\-option value\fR...?
+Scans a time that is expressed as a character string and produces an
+integer number of seconds.
+See \fBSCANNING TIMES\fR for a full description.
+.TP
+\fBclock seconds\fR 
+Returns the current time as an integer number of seconds.
+.SS "PARAMETERS"
+.TP
+\fIcount\fR
+An integer representing a count of some unit of time.  See
+\fBCLOCK ARITHMETIC\fR for the details.
+.TP
+\fItimeVal\fR
+An integer value passed to the \fBclock\fR command that represents an
+absolute time as a number of seconds from the \fIepoch time\fR of
+1 January 1970, 00:00 UTC.  Note that the count of seconds does not
+include any leap seconds; seconds are counted as if each UTC day has
+exactly 86400 seconds.  Tcl responds to leap seconds by speeding or
+slowing its clock by a tiny fraction for some minutes until it is
+back in sync with UTC; its data model does not represent minutes that
+have 59 or 61 seconds.
+.TP
+\fIunit\fR
+One of the words, \fBseconds\fR, \fBminutes\fR, \fBhours\fR,
+\fBdays\fR, \fBweeks\fR, \fBmonths\fR, or \fByears\fR, or
+any unique prefix of such a word. Used in conjunction with \fIcount\fR
+to identify an interval of time, for example, \fI3 seconds\fR or
+\fI1 year\fR.
+.SS "OPTIONS"
+.TP
+\fB\-base\fR time
+Specifies that any relative times present in a \fBclock scan\fR command
+are to be given relative to \fItime\fR.  \fItime\fR must be expressed as
+a count of nominal seconds from the epoch time of 1 January 1970, 00:00 UTC.
+.TP
+\fB\-format\fR format
+Specifies the desired output format for \fBclock format\fR or the
+expected input format for \fBclock scan\fR.  The \fIformat\fR string consists
+of any number of characters other than the per-cent sign
+.PQ \fB%\fR
+interspersed with any number of \fIformat groups\fR, which are two-character
+sequences beginning with the per-cent sign.  The permissible format groups,
+and their interpretation, are described under \fBFORMAT GROUPS\fR.
+.RS
+.PP
+On \fBclock format\fR, the default format is
+.CS
+%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %z %Y
+.CE
+.PP
+On \fBclock scan\fR, the lack of a \fI\-format\fR option indicates that a
+.QW "free format scan"
+is requested; see \fBFREE FORM SCAN\fR for a description of what happens.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB\-gmt\fR boolean
+If \fIboolean\fR is true, specifies that a time specified to \fBclock add\fR,
+\fBclock format\fR or \fBclock scan\fR should be processed in
+UTC.  If \fIboolean\fR is false, the processing defaults to the local time
+zone.  This usage is obsolete; the correct current usage is to
+specify the UTC time zone with
+.QW "\fB\-timezone\fR \fI:UTC\fR"
+or any of the equivalent ways to specify it.
+.TP
+\fB\-locale\fR localeName
+Specifies that locale-dependent scanning and formatting (and date arithmetic
+for dates preceding the adoption of the Gregorian calendar) is to be done in
+the locale identified by \fIlocaleName\fR.  The locale name may be any of
+the locales acceptable to the \fBmsgcat\fR package, or it may be the special
+name \fIsystem\fR, which represents the current locale of the process, or
+the null string, which represents Tcl's default locale.
+.RS
+.PP
+The effect of locale on scanning and formatting is discussed in the
+descriptions of the individual format groups under \fBFORMAT GROUPS\fR.
+The effect of locale on clock arithmetic is discussed under
+\fBCLOCK ARITHMETIC\fR.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB\-timezone\fR zoneName
+Specifies that clock arithmetic, formatting, and scanning are to be done
+according to the rules for the time zone specified by \fIzoneName\fR.
+The permissible values, and their interpretation, are discussed under
+\fBTIME ZONES\fR.
+On subcommands that expect a \fB\-timezone\fR argument, the default
+is to use the \fIcurrent time zone\fR.  The current time zone is
+determined, in order of preference, by:
 .RS
-If the \fB\-format\fR argument is not specified, the format string 
-\fB"%a %b %d %H:%M:%S %Z %Y"\fR is used.  If the \fB\-gmt\fR argument
-is present the next argument must be a boolean which if true specifies
-that the time will be formatted as Greenwich Mean Time. If false
-then the local timezone will be used as defined by the operating
-environment.
+.IP [1]
+the environment variable \fBTCL_TZ\fR.
+.IP [2]
+the environment variable \fBTZ\fR.
+.IP [3]
+on Windows systems, the time zone settings from the Control Panel.
 .RE
+If none of these is present, the C \fBlocaltime\fR and \fBmktime\fR
+functions are used to attempt to convert times between local and
+Greenwich.  On 32-bit systems, this approach is likely to have bugs,
+particularly for times that lie outside the window (approximately the
+years 1902 to 2037) that can be represented in a 32-bit integer.
+.SH "CLOCK ARITHMETIC"
+The \fBclock add\fR command performs clock arithmetic on a value
+(expressed as nominal seconds from the epoch time of 1 January 1970, 00:00 UTC)
+given as its first argument.  The remaining arguments (other than the
+possible \fB\-timezone\fR, \fB\-locale\fR and \fB\-gmt\fR options)
+are integers and keywords in alternation, where the keywords are chosen
+from \fBseconds\fR, \fBminutes\fR, \fBhours\fR,
+\fBdays\fR, \fBweeks\fR, \fBmonths\fR, or \fByears\fR, or
+any unique prefix of such a word.
+.PP
+Addition of seconds, minutes and hours is fairly straightforward;
+the given time increment (times sixty for minutes, or 3600 for hours)
+is simply added to the \fItimeVal\fR given
+to the \fBclock add\fR command.  The result is interpreted as
+a nominal number of seconds from the Epoch.
+.PP
+Surprising results
+may be obtained when crossing a point at which a leap second is
+inserted or removed; the \fBclock add\fR command simply ignores
+leap seconds and therefore assumes that times come in sequence,
+23:59:58, 23:59:59, 00:00:00.  (This assumption is handled by
+the fact that Tcl's model of time reacts to leap seconds by speeding
+or slowing the clock by a minuscule amount until Tcl's time
+is back in step with the world.
+.PP
+The fact that adding and subtracting hours is defined in terms of
+absolute time means that it will add fixed amounts of time in time zones
+that observe summer time (Daylight Saving Time).  For example,
+the following code sets the value of \fBx\fR to \fB04:00:00\fR because
+the clock has changed in the interval in question.
+.CS
+set s [\fBclock scan\fR {2004-10-30 05:00:00} \e
+           -format {%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S} \e
+           -timezone :America/New_York]
+set a [\fBclock add\fR $s 24 hours -timezone :America/New_York]
+set x [\fBclock format\fR $a \e
+           -format {%H:%M:%S} -timezone :America/New_York]
+.CE
+.PP
+Adding and subtracting days and weeks is accomplished by converting
+the given time to a calendar day and time of day in the appropriate
+time zone and locale.  The requisite number of days (weeks are converted
+to days by multiplying by seven) is added to the calendar day, and
+the date and time are then converted back to a count of seconds from
+the epoch time.
+.PP
+Adding and subtracting a given number of days across the point that
+the time changes at the start or end of summer time (Daylight Saving Time)
+results in the \fIsame local time\fR on the day in question.  For
+instance, the following code sets the value of \fBx\fR to \fB05:00:00\fR.
+.CS
+set s [\fBclock scan\fR {2004-10-30 05:00:00} \e
+           -format {%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S} \e
+           -timezone :America/New_York]
+set a [\fBclock add\fR $s 1 day -timezone :America/New_York]
+set x [\fBclock format\fR $a \e
+           -format {%H:%M:%S} -timezone :America/New_York]
+.CE
+.PP
+In cases of ambiguity, where the same local time happens twice
+on the same day, the earlier time is used.  In cases where the conversion
+yields an impossible time (for instance, 02:30 during the Spring
+Daylight Saving Time change using US rules), the time is converted
+as if the clock had not changed.  Thus, the following code
+will set the value of \fBx\fR to \fB03:30:00\fR.
+.CS
+set s [\fBclock scan\fR {2004-04-03 02:30:00} \e
+           -format {%Y-%m-%d %H:%M:%S} \e
+           -timezone :America/New_York]
+set a [\fBclock add\fR $s 1 day -timezone :America/New_York]
+set x [\fBclock format\fR $a \e
+           -format {%H:%M:%S} -timezone :America/New_York]
+.CE
+.PP
+Adding a given number of days or weeks works correctly across the conversion
+between the Julian and Gregorian calendars; the omitted days are skipped.
+The following code sets \fBz\fR to \fB1752-09-14\fR.
+.CS
+set x [\fBclock scan\fR 1752-09-02 -format %Y-%m-%d -locale en_US]
+set y [\fBclock add\fR $x 1 day -locale en_US]
+set z [\fBclock format\fR $y -format %Y-%m-%d -locale en_US]
+.CE
+.PP
+In the bizarre case that adding the given number of days yields a date
+that does not exist because it falls within the dropped days of the
+Julian-to-Gregorian conversion, the date is converted as if it was
+on the Julian calendar.
+.PP
+Adding a number of months, or a number of years, is similar; it
+converts the given time to a calendar date and time of day.  It then
+adds the requisite number of months or years, and reconverts the resulting
+date and time of day to an absolute time.
+.PP
+If the resulting date is impossible because the month has too few days
+(for example, when adding 1 month to 31 January), the last day of the
+month is substituted.  Thus, adding 1 month to 31 January will result in
+28 February in a common year or 29 February in a leap year.
+.PP
+The rules for handling anomalies relating to summer time and to the
+Gregorian calendar are the same when adding/subtracting months and
+years as they are when adding/subtracting days and weeks.
+.PP
+If multiple \fIcount unit\fR pairs are present on the command, they
+are evaluated consecutively, from left to right.
+.SH "HIGH RESOLUTION TIMERS"
+Most of the subcommands supported by the \fBclock\fR command deal with
+times represented as a count of seconds from the epoch time, and this is the
+representation that \fBclock seconds\fR returns.  There are three exceptions,
+which are all intended for use where higher-resolution times are required.
+\fBclock milliseconds\fR returns the count of milliseconds from the
+epoch time, and \fBclock microseconds\fR returns the count of microseconds
+from the epoch time. In addition, there is a \fBclock clicks\fR command
+that returns a platform-dependent high-resolution timer.  Unlike
+\fBclock seconds\fR and \fBclock milliseconds\fR, the value
+of \fBclock clicks\fR is not guaranteed to be tied to any fixed
+epoch; it is simply intended to be the most precise interval timer
+available, and is intended only for relative timing studies such as
+benchmarks.
+.SH "FORMATTING TIMES"
+The \fBclock format\fR command produces times for display to a user
+or writing to an external medium.  The command accepts times that are
+expressed in seconds from the epoch time of 1 January 1970, 00:00 UTC,
+as returned by \fBclock seconds\fR, \fBclock scan\fR, \fBclock add\fR,
+\fBfile atime\fR or \fBfile mtime\fR.
+.PP
+If a \fB\-format\fR option is present, the following argument is
+a string that specifies how the date and time are to be formatted.
+The string consists
+of any number of characters other than the per-cent sign
+.PQ \fB%\fR
+interspersed with any number of \fIformat groups\fR, which are two-character
+sequences beginning with the per-cent sign.  The permissible format groups,
+and their interpretation, are described under \fBFORMAT GROUPS\fR.
+.PP
+If a \fB\-timezone\fR option is present, the following
+argument is a string that specifies the time zone in which the date and time
+are to be formatted.  As an alternative to
+.QW "\fB\-timezone\fR \fI:UTC\fR" ,
+the obsolete usage
+.QW "\fB\-gmt\fR \fItrue\fR"
+may be used.  See
+\fBTIME ZONES\fR for the permissible variants for the time zone.
+.PP
+If a \fB\-locale\fR option is present, the following argument is
+a string that specifies the locale in which the time is to be formatted,
+in the same format that is used for the \fBmsgcat\fR package.  Note
+that the default, if \fB\-locale\fR is not specified, is the root locale
+\fB{}\fR rather than the current locale.  The current locale may
+be obtained by using \fB\-locale\fR \fBcurrent\fR.
+In addition, some platforms support a \fBsystem\fR locale that
+reflects the user's current choices.  For instance, on Windows, the
+format that the user has selected from dates and times in the Control
+Panel can be obtained by using the \fBsystem\fR locale.  On
+platforms that do not define a user selection of date and time formats
+separate from \fBLC_TIME\fR, \fB\-locale\fR \fBsystem\fR is
+synonymous with \fB\-locale\fR \fBcurrent\fR.
+.SH "SCANNING TIMES"
+The \fBclock scan\fR command accepts times that are formatted as
+strings and converts them to counts of seconds from the epoch time
+of 1 January 1970, 00:00 UTC.  It normally takes a \fB\-format\fR
+option that is followed by a string describing
+the expected format of the input.  (See
+\fBFREE FORM SCAN\fR for the effect of \fBclock scan\fR
+without such an argument.)  The string consists of any number of
+characters other than the per-cent sign
+.PQ \fB%\fR "" ,
+interspersed with any number of \fIformat groups\fR, which are two-character
+sequences beginning with the per-cent sign.  The permissible format groups,
+and their interpretation, are described under \fBFORMAT GROUPS\fR.
+.PP
+If a \fB\-timezone\fR option is present, the following
+argument is a string that specifies the time zone in which the date and time
+are to be interpreted.  As an alternative to \fB\-timezone\fR \fI:UTC\fR,
+the obsolete usage \fB\-gmt\fR \fItrue\fR may be used.  See
+\fBTIME ZONES\fR for the permissible variants for the time zone.
+.PP
+If a \fB\-locale\fR option is present, the following argument is
+a string that specifies the locale in which the time is to be interpreted,
+in the same format that is used for the \fBmsgcat\fR package.  Note
+that the default, if \fB\-locale\fR is not specified, is the root locale
+\fB{}\fR rather than the current locale.  The current locale may
+be obtained by using \fB\-locale\fR \fBcurrent\fR.
+In addition, some platforms support a \fBsystem\fR locale that
+reflects the user's current choices.  For instance, on Windows, the
+format that the user has selected from dates and times in the Control
+Panel can be obtained by using the \fBsystem\fR locale.  On
+platforms that do not define a user selection of date and time formats
+separate from \fBLC_TIME\fR, \fB\-locale\fR \fBsystem\fR is
+synonymous with \fB\-locale\fR \fBcurrent\fR.
+.PP
+If a \fB\-base\fR option is present, the following argument is
+a time (expressed in seconds from the epoch time) that is used as
+a \fIbase time\fR for interpreting relative times.  If no
+\fB\-base\fR option is present, the base time is the current time.
+.PP
+Scanning of times in fixed format works by determining three things:
+the date, the time of day, and the time zone.  These three are then
+combined into a point in time, which is returned as the number of seconds
+from the epoch.
+.PP
+Before scanning begins, the format string is preprocessed
+to replace \fB%c\fR, \fB%Ec\fR, \fB%x\fR, \fB%Ex\fR,
+\fB%X\fR. \fB%Ex\fR, \fB%r\fR, \fB%R\fR, \fB%T\fR,
+\fB%D\fR, \fB%EY\fR and \fB%+\fR format groups with counterparts
+that are appropriate to the current locale and contain none of the
+above groups.  For instance, \fB%D\fR will (in the \fBen_US\fR locale)
+be replaced with \fB%m/%d/%Y\fR.
+.PP
+The date is determined according to the fields that are present in the
+preprocessed format string.  In order of preference:
+.IP [1]
+If the string contains a \fB%s\fR format group, representing
+seconds from the epoch, that group is used to determine the date.
+.IP [2]
+If the string contains a \fB%J\fR format group, representing
+the Julian Day Number, that group is used to determine the date.
+.IP [3]
+If the string contains a complete set of format groups specifying
+century, year, month, and day of month; century, year, and day of year;
+or ISO8601 fiscal year, week of year, and day of week; those groups are
+combined and used to determine the date.  If more than one complete
+set is present, the one at the rightmost position in the string is
+used.
+.IP [4]
+If the string lacks a century but contains a set of format
+groups specifying year of century, month and day of month; year of
+century and day of year; or two-digit ISO8601 fiscal year, week of year,
+and day of week; those groups are
+combined and used to determine the date.  If more than one complete
+set is present, the one at the rightmost position in the string is
+used.  The year is presumed to lie in the range 1938 to 2037 inclusive.
+.IP [5]
+If the string entirely lacks any specification for the year
+(or contains the year only on the locale's alternative calendar)
+and contains a set of format groups specifying month and day of month,
+day of year, or week of year and day of week, those groups are
+combined and used to determine the date.  If more than one complete
+set is present, the one at the rightmost position in the string is
+used.  The year is determined by interpreting the base time in the given
+time zone.
+.IP [6]
+If the string contains none of the above sets, but has a day
+of the month or day of the week, the day of the month or day of the week
+are used to determine the date by interpreting the base time in the
+given time zone and returning the given day of the current week or month.
+(The week runs from Monday to Sunday, ISO8601-fashion.)  If both day
+of month and day of week are present, the day of the month takes
+priority.
+.IP [7]
+If none of the above rules results in a usable date, the date
+of the base time in the given time zone is used.
+.PP
+The time is also determined according to the fields that are present in the
+preprocessed format string.  In order of preference:
+.IP [1]
+If the string contains a \fB%s\fR format group, representing
+seconds from the epoch, that group determines the time of day.
+.IP [2]
+If the string contains either an hour on the 24-hour clock
+or an hour on the 12-hour clock plus an AM/PM indicator, that hour determines
+the hour of the day.  If the string further contains a group specifying
+the minute of the hour, that group combines with the hour.  If the string
+further contains a group specifying the second of the minute, that group
+combines with the hour and minute.
+.IP [3]
+If the string contains neither a \fB%s\fR format group nor
+a group specifying the hour of the day, then midnight (\fB00:00\fR, the start
+of the given date) is used.
+The time zone is determined by either the \fB\-timezone\fR or \fB\-gmt\fR
+options, or by using the current time zone.
+.PP
+If a format string lacks a \fB%z\fR or \fB%Z\fR format group,
+it is possible for the time to be ambiguous because it appears twice
+in the same day, once without and once with Daylight Saving Time.
+If this situation occurs, the first occurrence of the time is chosen.
+(For this reason, it is wise to have the input string contain the
+time zone when converting local times.  This caveat does not apply to
+UTC times.)
+.SH "FORMAT GROUPS"
+The following format groups are recognized by the \fBclock scan\fR and
+\fBclock format\fR commands.
+.TP
+\fB%a\fR
+On output, receives an abbreviation (\fIe.g.,\fR \fBMon\fR) for the day
+of the week in the given locale.  On input, matches the name of the day
+of the week in the given locale (in either abbreviated or full form, or
+any unique prefix of either form).
+.TP
+\fB%A\fR
+On output, receives the full name (\fIe.g.,\fR \fBMonday\fR) of the day
+of the week in the given locale.  On input, matches the name of the day
+of the week in the given locale (in either abbreviated or full form, or
+any unique prefix of either form).
+.TP
+\fB%b\fR
+On output, receives an abbreviation (\fIe.g.,\fR \fBJan\fR) for the name
+of the month in the given locale.  On input, matches the name of the month
+in the given locale (in either abbreviated or full form, or
+any unique prefix of either form).
+.TP
+\fB%B\fR
+On output, receives the full name (\fIe.g.,\fR \fBJanuary\fR)
+of the month in the given locale.  On input, matches the name of the month
+in the given locale (in either abbreviated or full form, or
+any unique prefix of either form).
+.TP
+\fB%c\fR
+On output, receives a localized representation of date and time of day;
+the localized representation is expected to use the Gregorian calendar.
+On input, matches whatever \fB%c\fR produces.
 .TP
-\fBclock scan \fIdateString\fR ?\fB\-base \fIclockVal\fR? ?\fB\-gmt \fIboolean\fR?
-Convert \fIdateString\fR to an integer clock value (see \fBclock seconds\fR).
-This command can parse and convert virtually any standard date and/or time
-string, which can include standard time zone mnemonics.  If only a time is
-specified, the current date is assumed.  If the string does not contain a
-time zone mnemonic, the local time zone is assumed, unless the \fB\-gmt\fR 
+\fB%C\fR
+On output, receives the number of the century in Indo-Arabic numerals.
+On input, matches one or two digits, possibly with leading whitespace,
+that are expected to be the number of the century.
+.TP
+\fB%d\fR
+On output, produces the number of the day of the month, as two decimal
+digits.  On input, matches one or two digits, possibly with leading
+whitespace, that are expected to be the number of the day of the month.
+.TP
+\fB%D\fR
+This format group is synonymous with \fB%m/%d/%Y\fR.  It should be
+used only in exchanging data within the \fBen_US\fR locale, since
+other locales typically do not use this order for the fields of the date.
+.TP
+\fB%e\fR
+On output, produces the number of the day of the month, as one or
+two decimal digits (with a leading blank for one-digit dates).
+On input, matches one or two digits, possibly with leading
+whitespace, that are expected to be the number of the day of the month.
+.TP
+\fB%Ec\fR
+On output, produces a locale-dependent representation of the date and
+time of day in the locale's alternative calendar.  On input, matches
+whatever \fB%Ec\fR produces.  The locale's alternative calendar need not
+be the Gregorian calendar.
+.TP
+\fB%EC\fR
+On output, produces a locale-dependent name of an era in the locale's
+alternative calendar.  On input, matches the name of the era or any
+unique prefix.
+.TP
+\fB%EE\fR
+On output, produces the string \fBB.C.E.\fR or \fBC.E.\fR, or a
+string of the same meaning in the locale, to indicate whether \fB%Y\fR refers
+to years before or after Year 1 of the Common Era.  On input, accepts
+the string \fBB.C.E.\fR, \fBB.C.\fR, \fBC.E.\fR, \fBA.D.\fR, or the
+abbreviation appropriate to the current locale, and uses it to fix
+whether \fB%Y\fR refers to years before or after Year 1 of the 
+Common Era.
+.TP
+\fB%Ex\fR
+On output, produces a locale-dependent representation of the date
+in the locale's alternative calendar.  On input, matches
+whatever \fB%Ex\fR produces.  The locale's alternative calendar need not
+be the Gregorian calendar.
+.TP
+\fB%EX\fR
+On output, produces a locale-dependent representation of the
+time of day in the locale's alternative numerals.  On input, matches
+whatever \fB%EX\fR produces.
+.TP
+\fB%Ey\fR
+On output, produces a locale-dependent number of the year of the era
+in the locale's alternative calendar and numerals.  On input, matches
+such a number.
+.TP
+\fB%EY\fR
+On output, produces a representation of the year in the locale's
+alternative calendar and numerals.  On input, matches what \fB%EY\fR
+produces.  Often synonymous with \fB%EC%Ey\fR.
+.TP
+\fB%g\fR
+On output, produces a two-digit year number suitable for use with
+the week-based ISO8601 calendar; that is, the year number corresponds
+to the week number produced by \fB%V\fR.  On input, accepts such
+a two-digit year number, possibly with leading whitespace.
+.TP
+\fB%G\fR
+On output, produces a four-digit year number suitable for use with
+the week-based ISO8601 calendar; that is, the year number corresponds
+to the week number produced by \fB%V\fR.  On input, accepts such
+a four-digit year number, possibly with leading whitespace.
+.TP
+\fB%h\fR
+This format group is synonymous with \fB%b\fR.
+.TP
+\fB%H\fR
+On output, produces a two-digit number giving the hour of the day
+(00-23) on a 24-hour clock.  On input, accepts such a number.
+.TP
+\fB%I\fR
+On output, produces a two-digit number giving the hour of the day
+(12-11) on a 12-hour clock.  On input, accepts such a number.
+.TP
+\fB%j\fR
+On output, produces a three-digit number giving the day of the year
+(001-366).  On input, accepts such a number.
+.TP
+\fB%J\fR
+On output, produces a string of digits giving the Julian Day Number.
+On input, accepts a string of digits and interprets it as a Julian Day Number.
+The Julian Day Number is a count of the number of calendar days
+that have elapsed since 1 January, 4713 BCE of the proleptic
+Julian calendar.  The epoch time of 1 January 1970 corresponds
+to Julian Day Number 2440588.
+.TP
+\fB%k\fR
+On output, produces a one- or two-digit number giving the hour of the day
+(0-23) on a 24-hour clock.  On input, accepts such a number.
+.TP
+\fB%l\fR
+On output, produces a one- or two-digit number giving the hour of the day
+(12-11) on a 12-hour clock.  On input, accepts such a number.
+.TP
+\fB%m\fR
+On output, produces the number of the month (01-12) with exactly two
+digits.  On input, accepts two digits and interprets them as the number
+of the month.
+.TP
+\fB%M\fR
+On output, produces the number of the minute of the hour (00-59)
+with exactly two digits.  On input, accepts two digits and interprets them
+as the number of the minute of the hour.
+.TP
+\fB%N\fR
+On output, produces the number of the month (1-12) with one or two digits,
+and a leading blank for one-digit dates.
+On input, accepts one or two digits, possibly with leading whitespace,
+and interprets them as the number of the month.
+.TP
+\fB%Od\fR, \fB%Oe\fR, \fB%OH\fR, \fB%OI\fR, \fB%Ok\fR, \fB%Ol\fR, \fB%Om\fR, \fB%OM\fR, \fB%OS\fR, \fB%Ou\fR, \fB%Ow\fR, \fB%Oy\fR
+All of these format groups are synonymous with their counterparts
+without the
+.QW \fBO\fR ,
+except that the string is produced and parsed in the
+locale-dependent alternative numerals.
+.TP
+\fB%p\fR
+On output, produces an indicator for the part of the day, \fBAM\fR
+or \fBPM\fR, appropriate to the given locale.  If the script of the
+given locale supports multiple letterforms, lowercase is preferred.
+On input, matches the representation \fBAM\fR or \fBPM\fR in
+the given locale, in either case.
+.TP
+\fB%P\fR
+On output, produces an indicator for the part of the day, \fBam\fR
+or \fBpm\fR, appropriate to the given locale.  If the script of the
+given locale supports multiple letterforms, uppercase is preferred.
+On input, matches the representation \fBAM\fR or \fBPM\fR in
+the given locale, in either case.
+.TP
+\fB%Q\fR
+This format group is reserved for internal use within the Tcl library.
+.TP
+\fB%r\fR
+On output, produces a locale-dependent time of day representation on a
+12-hour clock. On input, accepts whatever \fB%r\fR produces.
+.TP
+\fB%R\fR
+On output, produces a locale-dependent time of day representation on a
+24-hour clock. On input, accepts whatever \fB%R\fR produces.
+.TP
+\fB%s\fR
+On output, simply formats the \fItimeVal\fR argument as a decimal
+integer and inserts it into the output string.  On input, accepts
+a decimal integer and uses is as the time value without any further
+processing. Since \fB%s\fR uniquely determines a point in time, it
+overrides all other input formats.
+.TP
+\fB%S\fR
+On output, produces a two-digit number of the second of the minute
+(00-59). On input, accepts two digits and uses them as the second of the
+minute.
+.TP
+\fB%t\fR
+On output, produces a TAB character. On input, matches a TAB character.
+.TP
+\fB%T\fR
+Synonymous with \fB%H:%M:%S\fR.
+.TP
+\fB%u\fR
+On output, produces the number of the day of the week
+(\fB1\fR\(->Monday, \fB7\fR\(->Sunday). On input, accepts a single digit and
+interprets it as the day of the week. Sunday may be either \fB0\fR or
+\fB7\fR.
+.TP
+\fB%U\fR
+On output, produces the ordinal number of the week of the year
+(00-53). The first Sunday of the year is the first day of week 01. On
+input accepts two digits which are otherwise ignored. This format
+group is never used in determining an input date.  This interpretation
+of the week of the year was once common in US banking but is now
+largely obsolete.  See \fB%V\fR for the ISO8601 week number.
+.TP
+\fB%V\fR
+On output, produces the number of the ISO8601 week as a two digit
+number (01-53). Week 01 is the week containing January 4; or the first
+week of the year containing at least 4 days; or the week containing
+the first Thursday of the year (the three statements are
+equivalent). Each week begins on a Monday. On input, accepts the
+ISO8601 week number.
+.TP
+\fB%w\fR
+On output, produces the ordinal number of the day of the week
+(Sunday==0; Saturday==6).  On input, accepts a single digit and
+interprets it as the day of the week; Sunday may be represented as 
+either 0 or 7.  Note that \fB%w\fR is not the ISO8601 weekday number, 
+which is produced and accepted by \fB%u\fR.
+.TP
+\fB%W\fR
+On output, produces a week number (00-53) within the year; week 01
+begins on the first Monday of the year. On input, accepts two digits,
+which are otherwise ignored. This format group is never used in
+determining an input date.  It is not the ISO8601 week number; that
+week is produced and accepted by \fB%V\fR.
+.TP
+\fB%x\fR
+On output, produces the date in a locale-dependent representation. On
+input, accepts whatever \fB%x\fR produces and is used to determine
+calendar date.
+.TP
+\fB%X\fR
+On output, produces the time of day in a locale-dependent
+representation. On input, accepts whatever \fB%X\fR produces and is used
+to determine time of day.
+.TP
+\fB%y\fR
+On output, produces the two-digit year of the century. On input,
+accepts two digits, and is used to determine calendar date. The
+date is presumed to lie between 1938 and 2037 inclusive. Note
+that \fB%y\fR does not yield a year appropriate for use with the ISO8601
+week number \fB%V\fR; programs should use \fB%g\fR for that purpose.
+.TP
+\fB%Y\fR
+On output, produces the four-digit calendar year. On input,
+accepts four digits and may be used to determine calendar date. Note
+that \fB%Y\fR does not yield a year appropriate for use with the ISO8601
+week number \fB%V\fR; programs should use \fB%G\fR for that purpose.
+.TP
+\fB%z\fR
+On output, produces the current time zone, expressed in hours and
+minutes east (+hhmm) or west (\-hhmm) of Greenwich. On input, accepts a
+time zone specifier (see \fBTIME ZONES\fR below) that will be used to
+determine the time zone.
+.TP
+\fB%Z\fR
+On output, produces the current time zone's name, possibly
+translated to the given locale. On input, accepts a time zone
+specifier (see \fBTIME ZONES\fR below) that will be used to determine the
+time zone. This option should, in general, be used on input only when
+parsing RFC822 dates. Other uses are fraught with ambiguity; for
+instance, the string \fBBST\fR may represent British Summer Time or
+Brazilian Standard Time. It is recommended that date/time strings for
+use by computers use numeric time zones instead.
+.TP
+\fB%%\fR
+On output, produces a literal
+.QW \fB%\fR
+character. On input, matches a literal
+.QW \fB%\fR
+character.
+.TP
+\fB%+\fR
+Synonymous with
+.QW "\fB%a %b %e %H:%M:%S %Z %Y\fR" .
+.SH "TIME ZONES"
+When the \fBclock\fR command is processing a local time, it has several
+possible sources for the time zone to use.  In order of preference, they
+are:
+.IP [1]
+A time zone specified inside a string being parsed and matched by a \fB%z\fR
+or \fB%Z\fR format group.
+.IP [2]
+A time zone specified with the \fB\-timezone\fR option to the \fBclock\fR
+command (or, equivalently, by \fB\-gmt\fR \fB1\fR).
+.IP [3]
+A time zone specified in an environment variable \fBTCL_TZ\fR.
+.IP [4]
+A time zone specified in an environment variable \fBTZ\fR.
+.IP [5]
+The local time zone from the Control Panel on Windows systems.
+.IP [6]
+The C library's idea of the local time zone, as defined by the
+\fBmktime\fR and \fBlocaltime\fR functions.
+.PP
+In case [1] \fIonly,\fR the string is tested to see if it is one 
+of the strings:
+.CS
+ gmt     ut      utc     bst     wet     wat     at
+ nft     nst     ndt     ast     adt     est     edt
+ cst     cdt     mst     mdt     pst     pdt     yst
+ ydt     hst     hdt     cat     ahst    nt      idlw
+ cet     cest    met     mewt    mest    swt     sst
+ eet     eest    bt      it      zp4     zp5     ist
+ zp6     wast    wadt    jt      cct     jst     cast
+ cadt    east    eadt    gst     nzt     nzst    nzdt
+ idle
+.CE
+If it is a string in the above list, it designates a known
+time zone, and is interpreted as such.
+.PP
+For time zones in case [1] that do not match any of the above strings, 
+and always for cases [2]-[6], the following rules apply.
+.PP
+If the time zone begins with a colon, it is one of a
+standardized list of names like \fB:America/New_York\fR
+that give the rules for various locales.  A complete list
+of the location names is too lengthy to be listed here.
+On most Tcl installations, the definitions of the locations
+are to be found in named files in the directory
+.QW "\fI/no_backup/tools/lib/tcl8.5/clock/tzdata\fR" .
+On some Unix systems, these files are omitted, and the definitions are
+instead obtained from system files in
+.QW "\fI/usr/share/zoneinfo\fR" ,
+.QW "\fI/usr/share/lib/zoneinfo\fR"
+or
+.QW "\fI/usr/local/etc/zoneinfo\fR" .
+As a special case, the name \fB:localtime\fR refers to
+the local time zone as defined by the C library.
+.PP
+A time zone string consisting of a plus or minus sign followed by
+four or six decimal digits is interpreted as an offset in
+hours, minutes, and seconds (if six digits are present) from
+UTC.  The plus sign denotes a sign east of Greenwich;
+the minus sign one west of Greenwich.
+.PP
+A time zone string conforming to the Posix specification of the \fBTZ\fR
+environment variable will be recognized.  The specification
+may be found at
+\fIhttp://www.opengroup.org/onlinepubs/009695399/basedefs/xbd_chap08.html\fR.
+.PP
+Any other time zone string is processed by prefixing a colon and attempting
+to use it as a location name, as above.
+.SH "LOCALIZATION"
+Developers wishing to localize the date and time formatting and parsing
+are referred to \fIhttp://tip.tcl.tk/173\fR for a
+specification.
+.SH "FREE FORM SCAN"
+If the \fBclock scan\fR command is invoked without a \fB\-format\fR
+option, then it requests a \fIfree-form scan.\fR  \fI
+This form of scan is deprecated.\fR  The reason for the deprecation
+is that there are too many ambiguities. (Does the string
+.QW 2000
+represent a year, a time of day, or a quantity?)  No set of rules
+for interpreting free-form dates and times has been found to
+give unsurprising results in all cases.
+.PP
+If free-form scan is used, only the \fB\-base\fR and \fB\-gmt\fR
+options are accepted.  The \fB\-timezone\fR and \fB\-locale\fR
+options will result in an error if \fB\-format\fR is not supplied.
+.PP
+For the benefit of users who need to understand legacy code that
+uses free-form scan, the documentation for how free-form scan
+interprets a string is included here:
+.PP
+If only a time is
+specified, the current date is assumed.  If the \fIinputString\fR
+does not contain a
+time zone mnemonic, the local time zone is assumed, unless the \fB\-gmt\fR
 argument is true, in which case the clock value is calculated assuming
 that the specified time is relative to Greenwich Mean Time.
-\fB-gmt\fR, if specified, affects only the computed time value; it does not
-impact the interpretation of \fB-base\fR.
-.sp
+\fB\-gmt\fR, if specified, affects only the computed time value; it does not
+impact the interpretation of \fB\-base\fR.
+.PP
 If the \fB\-base\fR flag is specified, the next argument should contain
 an integer clock value.  Only the date in this value is used, not the
 time.  This is useful for determining the time on a specific day or
 doing other date-relative conversions.
-.sp
-The \fIdateString\fR consists of zero or more specifications of the
+.PP
+The \fIinputString\fR argument consists of zero or more specifications of the
 following form:
-.RS
 .TP
 \fItime\fR
-A time of day, which is of the form: \fIhh\fR?\fI:mm\fR?\fI:ss\fR?? 
-?\fImeridian\fR? ?\fIzone\fR? or \fIhhmm \fR?\fImeridian\fR? 
-?\fIzone\fR?. If no meridian is specified, \fIhh\fR is interpreted on
+A time of day, which is of the form: \fBhh?:mm?:ss?? ?meridian? ?zone?\fR
+or \fBhhmm ?meridian? ?zone?\fR
+If no meridian is specified, \fBhh\fR is interpreted on
 a 24-hour clock.
 .TP
 \fIdate\fR
 A specific month and day with optional year.  The
-acceptable formats are \fImm/dd\fR?\fI/yy\fR?, \fImonthname dd\fR
-?, \fIyy\fR?, \fIdd monthname \fR?\fIyy\fR?, \fIday, dd monthname
-yy\fR, \fI?CC?yymmdd\fR, \fI?CC?yy-mm-dd\fR, \fIdd-monthname-?CC?yy\fR.
+acceptable formats are
+.QW "\fBmm/dd\fR?\fB/yy\fR?" ,
+.QW "\fBmonthname dd\fR?\fB, yy\fR?" ,
+.QW "\fBday, dd monthname \fR?\fByy\fR?" ,
+.QW "\fBdd monthname yy\fR" ,
+.QW "?\fBCC\fR?\fByymmdd\fR" ,
+and
+.QW "\fBdd-monthname-\fR?\fBCC\fR?\fByy\fR" .
 The default year is the current year.  If the year is less
-.VS
 than 100, we treat the years 00-68 as 2000-2068 and the years 69-99
 as 1969-1999.  Not all platforms can represent the years 38-70, so
 an error may result if these years are used.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fIISO 8601 point-in-time\fR
-An ISO 8601 point-in-time specification, such as \fICCyymmddThhmmss\fR, where
-T is the literal T, \fICCyymmdd hhmmss\fR, or 
-\fICCyymmddThh:mm:ss\fR.  Note that only these three formats are accepted.
+An ISO 8601 point-in-time specification, such as
+.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhhmmss\fR,
+where \fBT\fR is the literal
+.QW T ,
+.QW "\fICCyymmdd hhmmss\fR" ,
+or
+.QW \fICCyymmdd\fBT\fIhh:mm:ss\fR .
+Note that only these three formats are accepted.
 The command does \fInot\fR accept the full range of point-in-time
 specifications specified in ISO8601.  Other formats can be recognized by
-using commands such as \fBregexp\fR to extract their fields and reorganize
-them into a form accepted by the \fBclock scan\fR command.
+giving an explicit \fI\-format\fR option to the \fBclock scan\fR command.
 .TP
 \fIrelative time\fR
-A specification relative to the current time.  The format is \fInumber
-unit\fR acceptable units are \fByear\fR, \fBfortnight\fR, \fBmonth\fR, \fBweek\fR, \fBday\fR,
+A specification relative to the current time.  The format is \fBnumber
+unit\fR. Acceptable units are \fByear\fR, \fBfortnight\fR, 
+\fBmonth\fR, \fBweek\fR, \fBday\fR,
 \fBhour\fR, \fBminute\fR (or \fBmin\fR), and \fBsecond\fR (or \fBsec\fR).  The
 unit can be specified as a singular or plural, as in \fB3 weeks\fR.
 These modifiers may also be specified:
 \fBtomorrow\fR, \fByesterday\fR, \fBtoday\fR, \fBnow\fR,
 \fBlast\fR, \fBthis\fR, \fBnext\fR, \fBago\fR.
-.RE
-.sp
-.RS
+.PP
 The actual date is calculated according to the following steps.
+.PP
 First, any absolute date and/or time is processed and converted.
 Using that time as the base, day-of-week specifications are added.
 Next, relative specifications are used.  If a date or day is
@@ -262,29 +893,9 @@ used.  Finally, a correction is applied so that the correct hour of
 the day is produced after allowing for daylight savings time
 differences and the correct date is given when going from the end
 of a long month to a short month.
-.sp
-Daylight savings time correction is applied only when the relative time
-is specified in units of days or more, ie, days, weeks, fortnights, months or
-years.  This means that when crossing the daylight savings time boundary,
-different results will be given for \fBclock scan "1 day"\fR and
-\fBclock scan "24 hours"\fR:
-.CS
-.ta 6c
-% \fBclock scan\fR "1 day" -base [\fBclock scan\fR 1999-10-31]
-941443200
-% \fBclock scan\fR "24 hours" -base [\fBclock scan\fR 1999-10-31]
-941439600
-.CE
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBclock seconds\fR
-Return the current date and time as a system-dependent integer value.  The
-unit of the value is seconds, allowing it to be used for relative time
-calculations.  The value is usually defined as total elapsed time from
-an ``epoch''.  You shouldn't assume the value of the epoch.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-date(1), time(n)
-
+msgcat(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 clock, date, time
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+Copyright (c) 2004 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved.
diff --git a/doc/close.n b/doc/close.n
index a1c5f01..4ef3c7d 100644
--- a/doc/close.n
+++ b/doc/close.n
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-close \- Close an open channel.
+close \- Close an open channel
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBclose \fIchannelId\fR
 .BE
@@ -19,17 +19,14 @@ close \- Close an open channel.
 .PP
 Closes the channel given by \fIchannelId\fR.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as a
 Tcl standard channel (\fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR, or \fBstderr\fR),
 the return value from an invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or
 the result of a channel creation command provided by a Tcl extension.
-.VE
 .PP
 All buffered output is flushed to the channel's output device,
 any buffered input is discarded, the underlying file or device is closed,
 and \fIchannelId\fR becomes unavailable for use.
-.VS "" br
 .PP
 If the channel is blocking, the command does not return until all output
 is flushed.
@@ -37,11 +34,9 @@ If the channel is nonblocking and there is unflushed output, the
 channel remains open and the command
 returns immediately; output will be flushed in the background and the
 channel will be closed when all the flushing is complete.
-.VE
 .PP
 If \fIchannelId\fR is a blocking channel for a command pipeline then
 \fBclose\fR waits for the child processes to complete.
-.VS "" br
 .PP
 If the channel is shared between interpreters, then \fBclose\fR
 makes \fIchannelId\fR unavailable in the invoking interpreter but has no
@@ -54,7 +49,6 @@ When the last interpreter in which the channel is registered invokes
 Channels are automatically closed when an interpreter is destroyed and
 when the process exits.  Channels are switched to blocking mode, to ensure
 that all output is correctly flushed before the process exits.
-.VE
 .PP
 The command returns an empty string, and may generate an error if
 an error occurs while flushing output.  If a command in a command
diff --git a/doc/concat.n b/doc/concat.n
index e52d978..f7317c4 100644
--- a/doc/concat.n
+++ b/doc/concat.n
@@ -24,27 +24,33 @@ into a single list.
 It permits any number of arguments;
 if no \fIarg\fRs are supplied, the result is an empty string.
 .SH EXAMPLES
-Although \fBconcat\fR will concatenate lists (so the command:
+Although \fBconcat\fR will concatenate lists, flattening them in the process
+(so giving the following interactive session):
+.PP
 .CS
-\fBconcat\fR a b {c d e} {f {g h}}
+\fI%\fR \fBconcat\fR a b {c d e} {f {g h}}
+\fIa b c d e f {g h}\fR
 .CE
-will return "\fBa b c d e f {g h}\fR" as its result), it will also
-concatenate things that are not lists, and hence the command:
+.PP
+it will also concatenate things that are not lists, as can be seen from this
+session:
+.PP
 .CS
-\fBconcat\fR " a b {c   " d "  e} f"
+\fI%\fR \fBconcat\fR " a b {c   " d "  e} f"
+\fIa b {c d e} f\fR
 .CE
-will return "\fBa b {c d e} f\fR" as its result.
 .PP
-Note that the concatenation does not remove spaces from the middle of
-its arguments, so the command:
+Note also that the concatenation does not remove spaces from the middle of
+values, as can be seen here:
+.PP
 .CS
-\fBconcat\fR "a   b   c" { d e f }
+\fI%\fR \fBconcat\fR "a   b   c" { d e f }
+\fIa   b   c d e f\fR
 .CE
-will return "\fBa   b   c d e f\fR" (i.e. with three spaces between
-the \fBa\fR, the \fBb\fR and the \fBc\fR).
-
+.PP
+(i.e., there are three spaces between each of the \fBa\fR, the \fBb\fR and the
+\fBc\fR).
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-append(n), eval(n)
-
+append(n), eval(n), join(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 concatenate, join, lists
diff --git a/doc/dde.n b/doc/dde.n
index 7222f51..ce00aee 100644
--- a/doc/dde.n
+++ b/doc/dde.n
@@ -6,26 +6,26 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH dde n 1.2 dde "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.TH dde n 1.3 dde "Tcl Bundled Packages"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
 dde \- Execute a Dynamic Data Exchange command
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .sp
-\fBpackage require dde 1.2\fR
+\fBpackage require dde 1.3\fR
 .sp
-\fBdde eval\fR ?\fB\-async\fR? \fIservice cmd\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
+\fBdde servername\fR ?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-handler \fIproc\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fItopic\fR?
 .sp
 \fBdde execute\fR ?\fB\-async\fR? \fIservice topic data\fR
 .sp
-\fBdde poke \fIservice topic item data\fR
-.sp
-\fBdde request\fR ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic data\fR
+\fBdde poke\fR \fIservice topic item data\fR
 .sp
-\fBdde servername\fR ?\fItopic\fR?
+\fBdde request\fR ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic item\fR
 .sp
 \fBdde services \fIservice topic\fR
+.sp
+\fBdde eval\fR ?\fB\-async\fR? \fItopic cmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -37,23 +37,40 @@ transaction needs a \fIservice name\fR and a \fItopic\fR. Both the
 \fIservice name\fR and \fItopic\fR are application defined; Tcl uses
 the service name \fBTclEval\fR, while the topic name is the name of the
 interpreter given by \fBdde servername\fR. Other applications have their
-own \fIservice name\fRs and \fItopic\fRs. For instance, Microsoft Excel
+own \fIservice names\fR and \fItopics\fR. For instance, Microsoft Excel
 has the service name \fBExcel\fR.
 .PP
-The \fBeval\fR and \fBexecute\fR commands accept the option \fB\-async\fR:
-
 .SH "DDE COMMANDS"
 .PP
 The following commands are a subset of the full Dynamic Data Exchange
 set of commands.
 .TP
-\fBdde servername \fR?\fItopic\fR?
+\fBdde servername \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-handler \fIproc\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fItopic\fR?
+.
 \fBdde servername\fR registers the interpreter as a DDE server with
 the service name \fBTclEval\fR and the topic name specified by \fItopic\fR.
 If no \fItopic\fR is given, \fBdde servername\fR returns the name
-of the current topic or the empty string if it is not registered as a service.
+of the current topic or the empty string if it is not registered as a
+service. If the given \fItopic\fR name is already in use, then a
+suffix of the form
+.QW " #2"
+or
+.QW " #3"
+is appended to the name to make it
+unique. The command's result will be the name actually used. The
+\fB\-force\fR option is used to force registration of precisely the
+given \fItopic\fR name.
+.RS
+.PP
+The \fB\-handler\fR option specifies a Tcl procedure that will be called to
+process calls to the dde server. If the package has been loaded into a
+safe interpreter then a \fB\-handler\fR procedure must be defined. The
+procedure is called with all the arguments provided by the remote
+call.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBdde execute\fR ?\fB\-async\fR? \fIservice topic data\fR
+.
 \fBdde execute\fR takes the \fIdata\fR and sends it to the server indicated
 by \fIservice\fR with the topic indicated by \fItopic\fR. Typically,
 \fIservice\fR is the name of an application, and \fItopic\fR is a file to
@@ -65,6 +82,7 @@ script did not run, unless the \fB\-async\fR flag was used, in which case
 the command returns immediately with no error.
 .TP
 \fBdde poke \fIservice topic item data\fR
+.
 \fBdde poke\fR passes the \fIdata\fR to the server indicated by
 \fIservice\fR using the \fItopic\fR and \fIitem\fR specified.  Typically,
 \fIservice\fR is the name of an application.  \fItopic\fR is application
@@ -74,6 +92,7 @@ it must always be non-null.  The \fIdata\fR field is given to the remote
 application.
 .TP
 \fBdde request\fR ?\fB\-binary\fR? \fIservice topic item\fR
+.
 \fBdde request\fR is typically used to get the value of something; the
 value of a cell in Microsoft Excel or the text of a selection in
 Microsoft Word. \fIservice\fR is typically the name of an application,
@@ -84,24 +103,25 @@ string with terminating null.  If \fB\-binary\fR is specified, the
 result is returned as a byte array.
 .TP
 \fBdde services \fIservice topic\fR
+.
 \fBdde services\fR returns a list of service-topic pairs that
 currently exist on the machine. If \fIservice\fR and \fItopic\fR are
-both null strings ({}), then all service-topic pairs currently
-available on the system are returned. If \fIservice\fR is null and
+both empty strings ({}), then all service-topic pairs currently
+available on the system are returned. If \fIservice\fR is empty and
 \fItopic\fR is not, then all services with the specified topic are
-returned. If \fIservice\fR is not null and \fItopic\fR is, all topics
-for a given service are returned. If both are not null, if that
-service-topic pair currently exists, it is returned; otherwise, null
-is returned.
+returned. If \fIservice\fR is non-empty and \fItopic\fR is, all topics
+for a given service are returned. If both are non-empty, if that
+service-topic pair currently exists, it is returned; otherwise, an
+empty string is returned.
 .TP
 \fBdde eval\fR ?\fB\-async\fR? \fItopic cmd \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
+.
 \fBdde eval\fR evaluates a command and its arguments using the interpreter
 specified by \fItopic\fR. The DDE service must be the \fBTclEval\fR
 service.  The \fB\-async\fR option requests asynchronous invocation.  The
 command returns an error message if the script did not run, unless the
 \fB\-async\fR flag was used, in which case the command returns immediately
-with no error.  This command can be used to replace \fBsend\fR on Windows.
-
+with no error.  This command can be used to replace send on Windows.
 .SH "DDE AND TCL"
 A Tcl interpreter always has a service name of \fBTclEval\fR.  Each
 different interpreter of all running Tcl applications must be
@@ -134,7 +154,6 @@ without adding the \fB&\fR to place the process in the background).
 If for any reason the event queue is not flushed, DDE commands may
 hang until the event queue is flushed.  This can create a deadlock
 situation.
-
 .SH EXAMPLE
 This asks Internet Explorer (which must already be running) to go to a
 particularly important website:
@@ -142,9 +161,7 @@ particularly important website:
 package require dde
 \fBdde execute\fR iexplore WWW_OpenURL http://www.tcl.tk/
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 tk(n), winfo(n), send(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 application, dde, name, remote execution
diff --git a/doc/dict.n b/doc/dict.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..c54a990
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/dict.n
@@ -0,0 +1,370 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2003 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.so man.macros
+.TH dict n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+dict \- Manipulate dictionaries
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBdict \fIoption arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+Performs one of several operations on dictionary values or variables
+containing dictionary values (see the \fBDICTIONARY VALUES\fR section
+below for a description), depending on \fIoption\fR.  The legal
+\fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
+.TP
+\fBdict append \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIstring ...\fR?
+This appends the given string (or strings) to the value that the given
+key maps to in the dictionary value contained in the given variable,
+writing the resulting dictionary value back to that variable.
+Non-existent keys are treated as if they map to an empty string.
+.TP
+\fBdict create \fR?\fIkey value ...\fR?
+Create a new dictionary that contains each of the key/value mappings
+listed as arguments (keys and values alternating, with each key being
+followed by its associated value.)
+.TP
+\fBdict exists \fIdictionaryValue key \fR?\fIkey ...\fR?
+This returns a boolean value indicating whether the given key (or path
+of keys through a set of nested dictionaries) exists in the given
+dictionary value. This returns a true value exactly when \fBdict
+get\fR on that path will succeed.
+.TP
+\fBdict filter \fIdictionaryValue filterType arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
+This takes a dictionary value and returns a new dictionary that
+contains just those key/value pairs that match the specified filter
+type (which may be abbreviated.)  Supported filter types are:
+.RS
+.TP
+\fBdict filter \fIdictionaryValue \fBkey \fIglobPattern\fR
+The key rule only matches those key/value pairs whose keys match the
+given pattern (in the style of \fBstring match\fR.)
+.TP
+\fBdict filter \fIdictionaryValue \fBscript {\fIkeyVar valueVar\fB} \fIscript\fR
+The script rule tests for matching by assigning the key to the
+\fIkeyVar\fR and the value to the \fIvalueVar\fR, and then evaluating
+the given script which should return a boolean value (with the
+key/value pair only being included in the result of the \fBdict
+filter\fR when a true value is returned.)  Note that the first
+argument after the rule selection word is a two-element list.  If the
+\fIscript\fR returns with a condition of \fBTCL_BREAK\fR, no further
+key/value pairs are considered for inclusion in the resulting
+dictionary, and a condition of \fBTCL_CONTINUE\fR is equivalent to a false
+result. The key/value pairs are tested in the order in which the keys
+were inserted into the dictionary.
+.TP
+\fBdict filter \fIdictionaryValue \fBvalue \fIglobPattern\fR
+The value rule only matches those key/value pairs whose values match
+the given pattern (in the style of \fBstring match\fR.)
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBdict for {\fIkeyVar valueVar\fB} \fIdictionaryValue body\fR
+This command takes three arguments, the first a two-element list of
+variable names (for the key and value respectively of each mapping in
+the dictionary), the second the dictionary value to iterate across,
+and the third a script to be evaluated for each mapping with the key
+and value variables set appropriately (in the manner of \fBforeach\fR.)
+The result of the command is an empty string. If any evaluation of the
+body generates a \fBTCL_BREAK\fR result, no further pairs from the
+dictionary will be iterated over and the \fBdict for\fR command will
+terminate successfully immediately. If any evaluation of the body
+generates a \fBTCL_CONTINUE\fR result, this shall be treated exactly like a
+normal \fBTCL_OK\fR result. The order of iteration is the order in
+which the keys were inserted into the dictionary.
+.TP
+\fBdict get \fIdictionaryValue \fR?\fIkey ...\fR?
+Given a dictionary value (first argument) and a key (second argument),
+this will retrieve the value for that key. Where several keys are
+supplied, the behaviour of the command shall be as if the result of
+\fBdict get $dictVal $key\fR was passed as the first argument to
+\fBdict get\fR with the remaining arguments as second (and possibly
+subsequent) arguments. This facilitates lookups in nested
+dictionaries. For example, the following two commands are equivalent:
+.RS
+.PP
+.CS
+dict get $dict foo bar spong
+dict get [dict get [dict get $dict foo] bar] spong
+.CE
+.PP
+If no keys are provided, \fBdict get\fR will return a list containing pairs of
+elements in a manner similar to \fBarray get\fR. That is, the first
+element of each pair would be the key and the second element would be
+the value for that key.
+.PP
+It is an error to attempt to retrieve a value for a key that is not
+present in the dictionary.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBdict incr \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIincrement\fR?
+This adds the given increment value (an integer that defaults to 1 if
+not specified) to the value that the given key maps to in the
+dictionary value contained in the given variable, writing the
+resulting dictionary value back to that variable. Non-existent keys
+are treated as if they map to 0. It is an error to increment a value
+for an existing key if that value is not an integer.
+.TP
+\fBdict info \fIdictionaryValue\fR
+This returns information (intended for display to people) about the
+given dictionary though the format of this data is dependent on the
+implementation of the dictionary. For dictionaries that are
+implemented by hash tables, it is expected that this will return the
+string produced by \fBTcl_HashStats\fR, similar to \fBarray statistics\fR.
+.TP
+\fBdict keys \fIdictionaryValue \fR?\fIglobPattern\fR?
+Return a list of all keys in the given dictionary value. If a pattern
+is supplied, only those keys that match it (according to the rules of
+\fBstring match\fR) will be returned. The returned keys will be in the
+order that they were inserted into the dictionary.
+.TP
+\fBdict lappend \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIvalue ...\fR?
+This appends the given items to the list value that the given key maps
+to in the dictionary value contained in the given variable, writing
+the resulting dictionary value back to that variable. Non-existent
+keys are treated as if they map to an empty list, and it is legal for
+there to be no items to append to the list. It is an error for the
+value that the key maps to to not be representable as a list.
+.TP
+\fBdict merge \fR?\fIdictionaryValue ...\fR?
+Return a dictionary that contains the contents of each of the
+\fIdictionaryValue\fR arguments.  Where two (or more) dictionaries
+contain a mapping for the same key, the resulting dictionary maps that
+key to the value according to the last dictionary on the command line
+containing a mapping for that key.
+.TP
+\fBdict remove \fIdictionaryValue \fR?\fIkey ...\fR?
+Return a new dictionary that is a copy of an old one passed in as
+first argument except without mappings for each of the keys listed.
+It is legal for there to be no keys to remove, and it also legal for
+any of the keys to be removed to not be present in the input
+dictionary in the first place.
+.TP
+\fBdict replace \fIdictionaryValue \fR?\fIkey value ...\fR?
+Return a new dictionary that is a copy of an old one passed in as
+first argument except with some values different or some extra
+key/value pairs added. It is legal for this command to be called with
+no key/value pairs, but illegal for this command to be called with a
+key but no value.
+.TP
+\fBdict set \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIkey ...\fR? \fIvalue\fR
+This operation takes the name of a variable containing a dictionary
+value and places an updated dictionary value in that variable
+containing a mapping from the given key to the given value. When
+multiple keys are present, this operation creates or updates a chain
+of nested dictionaries.
+.TP
+\fBdict size \fIdictionaryValue\fR
+Return the number of key/value mappings in the given dictionary value.
+.TP
+\fBdict unset \fIdictionaryVariable key \fR?\fIkey ...\fR?
+This operation (the companion to \fBdict set\fR) takes the name of a
+variable containing a dictionary value and places an updated
+dictionary value in that variable that does not contain a mapping for
+the given key. Where multiple keys are present, this describes a path
+through nested dictionaries to the mapping to remove. At least one key
+must be specified, but the last key on the key-path need not exist.
+All other components on the path must exist.
+.TP
+\fBdict update \fIdictionaryVariable key varName \fR?\fIkey varName ...\fR? \fIbody\fR
+Execute the Tcl script in \fIbody\fR with the value for each \fIkey\fR
+(as found by reading the dictionary value in \fIdictionaryVariable\fR)
+mapped to the variable \fIvarName\fR. There may be multiple
+\fIkey\fR/\fIvarName\fR pairs. If a \fIkey\fR does not have a mapping,
+that corresponds to an unset \fIvarName\fR. When \fIbody\fR
+terminates, any changes made to the \fIvarName\fRs is reflected back
+to the dictionary within \fIdictionaryVariable\fR (unless
+\fIdictionaryVariable\fR itself becomes unreadable, when all updates
+are silently discarded), even if the result of \fIbody\fR is an error
+or some other kind of exceptional exit. The result of \fBdict
+update\fR is (unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the
+evaluation of \fIbody\fR.
+.RS
+.PP
+Each \fIvarName\fR is mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict update\fR;
+it is recommended that this command only be used in a local scope
+(\fBproc\fRedure or lambda term for \fBapply\fR). Because of
+this, the variables set by \fBdict update\fR will continue to
+exist after the command finishes (unless explicitly \fBunset\fR).
+Note that the mapping of values to variables
+does not use traces; changes to the \fIdictionaryVariable\fR's
+contents only happen when \fIbody\fR terminates.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBdict values \fIdictionaryValue \fR?\fIglobPattern\fR?
+Return a list of all values in the given dictionary value. If a
+pattern is supplied, only those values that match it (according to the
+rules of \fBstring match\fR) will be returned. The returned values
+will be in the order of that the keys associated with those values
+were inserted into the dictionary.
+.TP
+\fBdict with \fIdictionaryVariable \fR?\fIkey ...\fR? \fIbody\fR
+Execute the Tcl script in \fIbody\fR with the value for each key in
+\fIdictionaryVariable\fR mapped (in a manner similarly to \fBdict
+update\fR) to a variable with the same name. Where one or more
+\fIkey\fRs are available, these indicate a chain of nested
+dictionaries, with the innermost dictionary being the one opened out
+for the execution of \fIbody\fR. As with \fBdict update\fR, making
+\fIdictionaryVariable\fR unreadable will make the updates to the
+dictionary be discarded, and this also happens if the contents of
+\fIdictionaryVariable\fR are adjusted so that the chain of
+dictionaries no longer exists. The result of \fBdict with\fR is
+(unless some kind of error occurs) the result of the evaluation of
+\fIbody\fR.
+.RS
+.PP
+The variables are mapped in the scope enclosing the \fBdict with\fR;
+it is recommended that this command only be used in a local scope
+(\fBproc\fRedure or lambda term for \fBapply\fR). Because of
+this, the variables set by \fBdict with\fR will continue to
+exist after the command finishes (unless explicitly \fBunset\fR).
+Note that the mapping of values to variables does not use
+traces; changes to the \fIdictionaryVariable\fR's contents only happen
+when \fIbody\fR terminates.
+.RE
+.SH "DICTIONARY VALUES"
+.PP
+Dictionaries are values that contain an efficient, order-preserving
+mapping from arbitrary keys to arbitrary values.
+Each key in the dictionary maps to a single value.
+They have a textual format that is exactly that of any list with an
+even number of elements, with each mapping in the dictionary being
+represented as two items in the list. When a command takes a
+dictionary and produces a new dictionary based on it (either returning
+it or writing it back into the variable that the starting dictionary
+was read from) the new dictionary will have the same order of keys,
+modulo any deleted keys and with new keys added on to the end.
+When a string is interpreted as a dictionary and it would otherwise
+have duplicate keys, only the last value for a particular key is used;
+the others are ignored, meaning that,
+.QW "apple banana"
+and
+.QW "apple carrot apple banana"
+are equivalent dictionaries (with different string representations).
+.PP
+Operations that derive a new dictionary from an old one (e.g., updates
+like \fBdict set\fR and \fBdict unset\fR) preserve the order of keys
+in the dictionary. The exceptions to this are for any new keys they
+add, which are appended to the sequence, and any keys that are
+removed, which are excised from the order.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.PP
+Basic dictionary usage:
+.PP
+.CS
+# Make a dictionary to map extensions to descriptions
+set filetypes [\fBdict create\fR .txt "Text File" .tcl "Tcl File"]
+
+# Add/update the dictionary
+\fBdict set\fR filetypes .tcl "Tcl Script"
+\fBdict set\fR filetypes .tm  "Tcl Module"
+\fBdict set\fR filetypes .gif "GIF Image"
+\fBdict set\fR filetypes .png "PNG Image"
+
+# Simple read from the dictionary
+set ext ".tcl"
+set desc [\fBdict get\fR $filetypes $ext]
+puts "$ext is for a $desc"
+
+# Somewhat more complex, with existence test
+foreach filename [glob *] {
+    set ext [file extension $filename]
+    if {[\fBdict exists\fR $filetypes $ext]} {
+        puts "$filename is a [\fBdict get\fR $filetypes $ext]"
+    }
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+Constructing and using nested dictionaries:
+.PP
+.CS
+# Data for one employee
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 12345-A forenames "Joe"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 12345-A surname   "Schmoe"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 12345-A street "147 Short Street"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 12345-A city   "Springfield"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 12345-A phone  "555-1234"
+# Data for another employee
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 98372-J forenames "Anne"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 98372-J surname   "Other"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 98372-J street "32995 Oakdale Way"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 98372-J city   "Springfield"
+\fBdict set\fR employeeInfo 98372-J phone  "555-8765"
+# The above data probably ought to come from a database...
+
+# Print out some employee info
+set i 0
+puts "There are [\fBdict size\fR $employeeInfo] employees"
+\fBdict for\fR {id info} $employeeInfo {
+   puts "Employee #[incr i]: $id"
+   \fBdict with\fR info {
+      puts "   Name: $forenames $surname"
+      puts "   Address: $street, $city"
+      puts "   Telephone: $phone"
+   }
+}
+# Another way to iterate and pick out names...
+foreach id [\fBdict keys\fR $employeeInfo] {
+   puts "Hello, [\fBdict get\fR $employeeInfo $id forenames]!"
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+A localizable version of \fBstring toupper\fR:
+.PP
+.CS
+# Set up the basic C locale
+set capital [\fBdict create\fR C [\fBdict create\fR]]
+foreach c [split {abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz} ""] {
+   \fBdict set\fR capital C $c [string toupper $c]
+}
+
+# English locales can luckily share the "C" locale
+\fBdict set\fR capital en [\fBdict get\fR $capital C]
+\fBdict set\fR capital en_US [\fBdict get\fR $capital C]
+\fBdict set\fR capital en_GB [\fBdict get\fR $capital C]
+
+# ... and so on for other supported languages ...
+
+# Now get the mapping for the current locale and use it.
+set upperCaseMap [\fBdict get\fR $capital $env(LANG)]
+set upperCase [string map $upperCaseMap $string]
+.CE
+.PP
+Showing the detail of \fBdict with\fR:
+.PP
+.CS
+proc sumDictionary {varName} {
+   upvar 1 $varName vbl
+   foreach key [\fBdict keys\fR $vbl] {
+      # Manufacture an entry in the subdictionary
+      \fBdict set\fR vbl $key total 0
+      # Add the values and remove the old
+      \fBdict with\fR vbl $key {
+         set total [expr {$x + $y + $z}]
+         unset x y z
+      }
+   }
+   puts "last total was $total, for key $key"
+}
+
+set myDict {
+   a {x 1 y 2 z 3}
+   b {x 6 y 5 z 4}
+}
+
+sumDictionary myDict
+#    prints: \fIlast total was 15, for key b\fR
+
+puts "dictionary is now \\"$myDict\\""
+#    prints: \fIdictionary is now "a {total 6} b {total 15}"\fR
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+append(n), array(n), foreach(n), incr(n), list(n), lappend(n), set(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+dictionary, create, update, lookup, iterate, filter
diff --git a/doc/encoding.n b/doc/encoding.n
index 5950246..f8f3d54 100644
--- a/doc/encoding.n
+++ b/doc/encoding.n
@@ -39,6 +39,19 @@ string.  Each byte is stored in the lower 8-bits of a Unicode
 character.  If \fIencoding\fR is not specified, the current
 system encoding is used.
 .TP
+\fBencoding dirs\fR ?\fIdirectoryList\fR?
+.VS 8.5
+Tcl can load encoding data files from the file system that describe
+additional encodings for it to work with. This command sets the search
+path for \fB*.enc\fR encoding data files to the list of directories
+\fIdirectoryList\fR. If \fIdirectoryList\fR is omitted then the
+command returns the current list of directories that make up the
+search path. It is an error for \fIdirectoryList\fR to not be a valid
+list. If, when a search for an encoding data file is happening, an
+element in \fIdirectoryList\fR does not refer to a readable,
+searchable directory, that element is ignored.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
 \fBencoding names\fR
 Returns a list containing the names of all of the encodings that are
 currently available. 
@@ -67,10 +80,11 @@ of the original string.  The \fBencoding\fR command can be used to
 convert this string to the expected Japanese Unicode characters.  For
 example,
 .CS
-set s [\fBencoding convertfrom\fR euc-jp "\\xA4\\xCF"]
+set s [\fBencoding convertfrom\fR euc-jp "\exA4\exCF"]
 .CE
-would return the Unicode string "\\u306F", which is the Hiragana
-letter HA.
+would return the Unicode string
+.QW "\eu306F" ,
+which is the Hiragana letter HA.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl_GetEncoding(3)
diff --git a/doc/error.n b/doc/error.n
index 8c47ba3..77391e5 100644
--- a/doc/error.n
+++ b/doc/error.n
@@ -21,36 +21,42 @@ Returns a \fBTCL_ERROR\fR code, which causes command interpretation to be
 unwound.  \fIMessage\fR is a string that is returned to the application
 to indicate what went wrong.
 .PP
-If the \fIinfo\fR argument is provided and is non-empty,
-it is used to initialize the global variable \fBerrorInfo\fR.
-\fBerrorInfo\fR is used to accumulate a stack trace of what
-was in progress when an error occurred; as nested commands unwind,
-the Tcl interpreter adds information to \fBerrorInfo\fR.  If the
-\fIinfo\fR argument is present, it is used to initialize
-\fBerrorInfo\fR and the first increment of unwind information
-will not be added by the Tcl interpreter.  In other
+The \fB\-errorinfo\fR return option of an interpreter is used
+to accumulate a stack trace of what was in progress when an
+error occurred; as nested commands unwind,
+the Tcl interpreter adds information to the \fB\-errorinfo\fR
+return option.  If the \fIinfo\fR argument is present, it is
+used to initialize the \fB\-errorinfo\fR return options and
+the first increment of unwind information
+will not be added by the Tcl interpreter.  
+In other
 words, the command containing the \fBerror\fR command will not appear
-in \fBerrorInfo\fR; in its place will be \fIinfo\fR.
-This feature is most useful in conjunction with the \fBcatch\fR command:
+in the stack trace; in its place will be \fIinfo\fR.
+Historically, this feature had been most useful in conjunction
+with the \fBcatch\fR command:
 if a caught error cannot be handled successfully, \fIinfo\fR can be used
 to return a stack trace reflecting the original point of occurrence
 of the error:
 .CS
 \fBcatch {...} errMsg
-set savedInfo $errorInfo
+set savedInfo $::errorInfo
 \&...
 error $errMsg $savedInfo\fR
 .CE
+When working with Tcl 8.5 or later, the following code
+should be used instead:
+.CS
+\fBcatch {...} errMsg options
+\&...
+return -options $options $errMsg\fR
+.CE
 .PP
 If the \fIcode\fR argument is present, then its value is stored
-in the \fBerrorCode\fR global variable.  This variable is intended
-to hold a machine-readable description of the error in cases where
-such information is available; see the \fBtclvars\fR manual
-page for information on the proper format for the variable.
-If the \fIcode\fR argument is not
-present, then \fBerrorCode\fR is automatically reset to
-``NONE'' by the Tcl interpreter as part of processing the
-error generated by the command.
+in the \fB\-errorcode\fR return option.  The \fB\-errorcode\fR
+return option is intended to hold a machine-readable description
+of the error in cases where such information is available; see
+the \fBreturn\fR manual page for information on the proper format
+for this option's value.
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Generate an error if a basic mathematical operation fails:
 .CS
@@ -60,7 +66,7 @@ if {1+2 != 3} {
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-catch(n), return(n), tclvars(n)
+catch(n), return(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
-error, errorCode, errorInfo
+error
diff --git a/doc/eval.n b/doc/eval.n
index 81b9b1f..a642d23 100644
--- a/doc/eval.n
+++ b/doc/eval.n
@@ -25,10 +25,39 @@ Tcl interpreter recursively, and returns the result of that
 evaluation (or any error generated by it).
 Note that the \fBlist\fR command quotes sequences of words in such a
 way that they are not further expanded by the \fBeval\fR command.
-.SH EXAMPLE
-This procedure acts in a way that is analogous to the \fBlappend\fR
-command, except it inserts the argument values at the start of the
-list in the variable:
+.SH EXAMPLES
+Often, it is useful to store a fragment of a script in a variable and
+execute it later on with extra values appended. This technique is used
+in a number of places throughout the Tcl core (e.g. in \fBfcopy\fR,
+\fBlsort\fR and \fBtrace\fR command callbacks). This example shows how
+to do this using core Tcl commands:
+.CS
+set script {
+    puts "logging now"
+    lappend $myCurrentLogVar
+}
+set myCurrentLogVar log1
+# Set up a switch of logging variable part way through!
+after 20000 set myCurrentLogVar log2
+
+for {set i 0} {$i<10} {incr i} {
+    # Introduce a random delay
+    after [expr {int(5000 * rand())}]
+    update    ;# Check for the asynch log switch
+    \fBeval\fR $script $i [clock clicks]
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+Note that in the most common case (where the script fragment is
+actually just a list of words forming a command prefix), it is better
+to use \fB{*}$script\fR when doing this sort of invocation
+pattern.  It is less general than the \fBeval\fR command, and hence
+easier to make robust in practice.
+.VE 8.5
+The following procedure acts in a way that is analogous to the
+\fBlappend\fR command, except it inserts the argument values at the
+start of the list in the variable:
 .CS
 proc lprepend {varName args} {
    upvar 1 $varName var
@@ -38,9 +67,16 @@ proc lprepend {varName args} {
    set var [\fBeval\fR [list linsert $var 0] $args]
 }
 .CE
+.VS 8.5
+However, the last line would now normally be written without
+\fBeval\fR, like this:
+.CS
+set var [linsert $var 0 {*}$args]
+.CE
+.VE 8.5
+
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+catch(n), concat(n), error(n), interp(n), list(n), namespace(n), subst(n), tclvars(n), uplevel(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 concatenate, evaluate, script
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-catch(n), concat(n), error(n), list(n), subst(n), tclvars(n)
diff --git a/doc/exec.n b/doc/exec.n
index 3f85fd6..fd4e9cf 100644
--- a/doc/exec.n
+++ b/doc/exec.n
@@ -1,12 +1,13 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2006 Donal K. Fellows.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH exec n 7.6 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH exec n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
@@ -28,6 +29,12 @@ they are treated as command-line switches and are not part
 of the pipeline specification.  The following switches are
 currently supported:
 .TP 13
+\fB\-ignorestderr\fR
+.VS 8.5
+Stops the \fBexec\fR command from treating the output of messages to the
+pipeline's standard error channel as an error case.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP 13
 \fB\-keepnewline\fR
 Retains a trailing newline in the pipeline's output.
 Normally a trailing newline will be deleted.
@@ -40,76 +47,84 @@ If an \fIarg\fR (or pair of \fIarg\fRs) has one of the forms
 described below then it is used by \fBexec\fR to control the
 flow of input and output among the subprocess(es).
 Such arguments will not be passed to the subprocess(es).  In forms
-such as ``< \fIfileName\fR'' \fIfileName\fR may either be in a
-separate argument from ``<'' or in the same argument with no
-intervening space (i.e. ``<\fIfileName\fR'').
+such as
+.QW "\fB<\fR \fIfileName\fR" ,
+\fIfileName\fR may either be in a separate argument from
+.QW \fB<\fR
+or in the same argument with no intervening space (i.e.
+.QW \fB<\fIfileName\fR ).
 .TP 15
-|
+\fB|\fR
 Separates distinct commands in the pipeline.  The standard output
 of the preceding command will be piped into the standard input
 of the next command.
 .TP 15
-|&
+\fB|&\fR
 Separates distinct commands in the pipeline.  Both standard output
 and standard error of the preceding command will be piped into
 the standard input of the next command.
 This form of redirection overrides forms such as 2> and >&.
 .TP 15
-<\0\fIfileName\fR
+\fB<\0\fIfileName\fR
 The file named by \fIfileName\fR is opened and used as the standard
 input for the first command in the pipeline.
 .TP 15
-<@\0\fIfileId\fR
+\fB<@\0\fIfileId\fR
 \fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
 value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
 It is used as the standard input for the first command in the pipeline.
 \fIFileId\fR must have been opened for reading.
 .TP 15
-<<\0\fIvalue\fR
+\fB<<\0\fIvalue\fR
 \fIValue\fR is passed to the first command as its standard input.
 .TP 15
->\0\fIfileName\fR
+\fB>\0\fIfileName\fR
 Standard output from the last command is redirected to the file named
 \fIfileName\fR, overwriting its previous contents.
 .TP 15
-2>\0\fIfileName\fR
+\fB2>\0\fIfileName\fR
 Standard error from all commands in the pipeline is redirected to the
 file named \fIfileName\fR, overwriting its previous contents.
 .TP 15
->&\0\fIfileName\fR
+\fB>&\0\fIfileName\fR
 Both standard output from the last command and standard error from all
 commands are redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR, overwriting
 its previous contents.
 .TP 15
->>\0\fIfileName\fR
+\fB>>\0\fIfileName\fR
 Standard output from the last command is
 redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR, appending to it rather
 than overwriting it.
 .TP 15
-2>>\0\fIfileName\fR
+\fB2>>\0\fIfileName\fR
 Standard error from all commands in the pipeline is
 redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR, appending to it rather
 than overwriting it.
 .TP 15
->>&\0\fIfileName\fR
+\fB>>&\0\fIfileName\fR
 Both standard output from the last command and standard error from
 all commands are redirected to the file named \fIfileName\fR,
 appending to it rather than overwriting it.
 .TP 15
->@\0\fIfileId\fR
+\fB>@\0\fIfileId\fR
 \fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
 value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
 Standard output from the last command is redirected to \fIfileId\fR's
 file, which must have been opened for writing.
 .TP 15
-2>@\0\fIfileId\fR
+\fB2>@\0\fIfileId\fR
 \fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
 value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
 Standard error from all commands in the pipeline is
 redirected to \fIfileId\fR's file.
 The file must have been opened for writing.
 .TP 15
->&@\0\fIfileId\fR
+\fB2>@1\0\fR
+Standard error from all commands in the pipeline is redirected to the
+command result.  This operator is only valid at the end of the command
+pipeline.
+.TP 15
+\fB>&@\0\fIfileId\fR
 \fIFileId\fR must be the identifier for an open file, such as the return
 value from a previous call to \fBopen\fR.
 Both standard output from the last command and standard error from
@@ -118,15 +133,23 @@ The file must have been opened for writing.
 .PP
 If standard output has not been redirected then the \fBexec\fR
 command returns the standard output from the last command
-in the pipeline.
+in the pipeline,
+.VS 8.5
+unless
+.QW 2>@1
+was specified, in which case standard error is included as well.
+.VE 8.5
 If any of the commands in the pipeline exit abnormally or
 are killed or suspended, then \fBexec\fR will return an error
 and the error message will include the pipeline's output followed by
 error messages describing the abnormal terminations; the
-\fBerrorCode\fR variable will contain additional information
+\fB\-errorcode\fR return option will contain additional information
 about the last abnormal termination encountered.
 If any of the commands writes to its standard error file and that
-standard error isn't redirected,
+standard error is not redirected
+.VS 8.5
+and \fB\-ignorestderr\fR is not specified,
+.VE 8.5
 then \fBexec\fR will return an error;  the error message
 will include the pipeline's standard output, followed by messages
 about abnormal terminations (if any), followed by the standard error
@@ -135,22 +158,27 @@ output.
 If the last character of the result or error message
 is a newline then that character is normally deleted
 from the result or error message.
-This is consistent with other Tcl return values, which don't
+This is consistent with other Tcl return values, which do not
 normally end with newlines.
 However, if \fB\-keepnewline\fR is specified then the trailing
 newline is retained.
 .PP
-If standard input isn't redirected with ``<'' or ``<<''
-or ``<@'' then the standard input for the first command in the
+If standard input is not redirected with
+.QW < ,
+.QW <<
+or
+.QW <@
+then the standard input for the first command in the
 pipeline is taken from the application's current standard input.
 .PP
-If the last \fIarg\fR is ``&'' then the pipeline will be
-executed in background.
+If the last \fIarg\fR is
+.QW &
+then the pipeline will be executed in background.
 In this case the \fBexec\fR command will return a list whose
 elements are the process identifiers for all of the subprocesses
 in the pipeline.
 The standard output from the last command in the pipeline will
-go to the application's standard output if it hasn't been
+go to the application's standard output if it has not been
 redirected, and error output from all of
 the commands in the pipeline will go to the application's
 standard error file unless redirected.
@@ -162,26 +190,28 @@ in the PATH environment variable are searched for
 an executable by the given name.
 If the name contains a slash then it must refer to an executable
 reachable from the current directory.
-No ``glob'' expansion or other shell-like substitutions
+No
+.QW glob
+expansion or other shell-like substitutions
 are performed on the arguments to commands.
-
-.VS
 .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
 .TP
 \fBWindows\fR (all versions)
 .
-Reading from or writing to a socket, using the ``\fB@\0\fIfileId\fR''
+Reading from or writing to a socket, using the
+.QW \fB@\0\fIfileId\fR
 notation, does not work.  When reading from a socket, a 16-bit DOS
 application will hang and a 32-bit application will return immediately with
 end-of-file.  When either type of application writes to a socket, the
 information is instead sent to the console, if one is present, or is
 discarded.
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 The Tk console text widget does not provide real standard IO capabilities.
 Under Tk, when redirecting from standard input, all applications will see an
 immediate end-of-file; information redirected to standard output or standard
 error will be discarded.  
-.sp
+.PP
 Either forward or backward slashes are accepted as path separators for
 arguments to Tcl commands.  When executing an application, the path name
 specified for the application may also contain forward or backward slashes
@@ -192,12 +222,16 @@ path name with forward slashes will not automatically be converted to use
 the backslash character.  If an argument contains forward slashes as the
 path separator, it may or may not be recognized as a path name, depending on
 the program.  
-.sp
+.PP
 Additionally, when calling a 16-bit DOS or Windows 3.X application, all path
-names must use the short, cryptic, path format (e.g., using ``applba~1.def''
-instead of ``applbakery.default''), which can be obtained with the
-\fBfile attributes $fileName -shortname\fR command.
-.sp
+names must use the short, cryptic, path format (e.g., using
+.QW applba~1.def
+instead of
+.QW applbakery.default ),
+which can be obtained with the
+.QW "\fBfile attributes \fIfileName \fB\-shortname\fR"
+command.
+.PP
 Two or more forward or backward slashes in a row in a path refer to a
 network path.  For example, a simple concatenation of the root directory
 \fBc:/\fR with a subdirectory \fB/windows/system\fR will yield
@@ -206,25 +240,25 @@ point called \fBsystem\fR on the machine called \fBwindows\fR (and the
 \fBc:/\fR is ignored), and is not equivalent to \fBc:/windows/system\fR,
 which describes a directory on the current computer.  The \fBfile join\fR
 command should be used to concatenate path components.
-.sp
-.RS
+.PP
 Note that there are two general types of Win32 console applications:
 .RS
-1) CLI -- CommandLine Interface, simple stdio exchange. \fBnetstat.exe\fR for
+.IP [1]
+CLI \(em CommandLine Interface, simple stdio exchange. \fBnetstat.exe\fR for
 example.
-.br
-2) TUI -- Textmode User Interface, any application that accesses the console
+.IP [2]
+TUI \(em Textmode User Interface, any application that accesses the console
 API for doing such things as cursor movement, setting text color, detecting
 key presses and mouse movement, etc.  An example would be \fBtelnet.exe\fR
 from Windows 2000.  These types of applications are not common in a windows
 environment, but do exist.
 .RE
+.PP
 \fBexec\fR will not work well with TUI applications when a console is not
 present, as is done when launching applications under wish.  It is desirable
 to have console applications hidden and detached.  This is a designed-in
 limitation as \fBexec\fR wants to communicate over pipes.  The Expect
 extension addresses this issue when communicating with a TUI application.
-.sp
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBWindows NT\fR
@@ -235,26 +269,24 @@ the name as it was specified.  Then, in order, \fB.com\fR, \fB.exe\fR, and
 for the longer name.  If a directory name was not specified as part of the
 application name, the following directories are automatically searched in
 order when attempting to locate the application:
-.sp
-.RS
 .RS
+.IP \(bu
 The directory from which the Tcl executable was loaded.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The current directory.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The Windows NT 32-bit system directory.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The Windows NT 16-bit system directory.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The Windows NT home directory.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The directories listed in the path.
-.RE
-.sp
+.PP
 In order to execute shell built-in commands like \fBdir\fR and \fBcopy\fR,
-the caller must prepend the desired command with ``\fBcmd.exe /c\0\fR''
+the caller must prepend the desired command with
+.QW "\fBcmd.exe /c\0\fR"
 because built-in commands are not implemented using executables.
-.sp
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBWindows 9x\fR
@@ -265,39 +297,42 @@ the name as it was specified.  Then, in order, \fB.com\fR, \fB.exe\fR, and
 for the longer name.  If a directory name was not specified as part of the
 application name, the following directories are automatically searched in
 order when attempting to locate the application:
-.sp
-.RS
 .RS
+.IP \(bu
 The directory from which the Tcl executable was loaded.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The current directory.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The Windows 9x system directory.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The Windows 9x home directory.
-.br
+.IP \(bu
 The directories listed in the path.
 .RE
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 In order to execute shell built-in commands like \fBdir\fR and \fBcopy\fR,
-the caller must prepend the desired command with ``\fBcommand.com /c\0\fR''
+the caller must prepend the desired command with
+.QW "\fBcommand.com /c\0\fR"
 because built-in commands are not implemented using executables.
-.sp
+.PP
 Once a 16-bit DOS application has read standard input from a console and 
 then quit, all subsequently run 16-bit DOS applications will see the 
 standard input as already closed.  32-bit applications do not have this
 problem and will run correctly, even after a 16-bit DOS application thinks 
 that standard input is closed.  There is no known workaround for this bug
 at this time.
-.sp
+.PP
 Redirection between the \fBNUL:\fR device and a 16-bit application does not
 always work.  When redirecting from \fBNUL:\fR, some applications may hang,
-others will get an infinite stream of ``0x01'' bytes, and some will actually
+others will get an infinite stream of
+.QW 0x01
+bytes, and some will actually
 correctly get an immediate end-of-file; the behavior seems to depend upon 
 something compiled into the application itself.  When redirecting greater than
 4K or so to \fBNUL:\fR, some applications will hang.  The above problems do not
 happen with 32-bit applications.  
-.sp
+.PP
 All DOS 16-bit applications are run synchronously.  All standard input from
 a pipe to a 16-bit DOS application is collected into a temporary file; the
 other end of the pipe must be closed before the 16-bit DOS application
@@ -307,7 +342,7 @@ must terminate before the temporary files are redirected to the next stage
 of the pipeline.  This is due to a workaround for a Windows 95 bug in the
 implementation of pipes, and is how the standard Windows 95 DOS shell
 handles pipes itself.
-.sp
+.PP
 Certain applications, such as \fBcommand.com\fR, should not be executed
 interactively.  Applications which directly access the console window,
 rather than reading from their standard input and writing to their standard
@@ -315,12 +350,8 @@ output may fail, hang Tcl, or even hang the system if their own private
 console window is not available to them.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBMacintosh\fR
-The \fBexec\fR command is not implemented and does not exist under Macintosh.
-.TP
 \fBUnix\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
 The \fBexec\fR command is fully functional and works as described.
-
 .SH "UNIX EXAMPLES"
 Here are some examples of the use of the \fBexec\fR command on Unix.
 .PP
@@ -330,13 +361,14 @@ To execute a simple program and get its result:
 .CE
 .PP
 To execute a program that can return a non-zero result, you should
-wrap the call to \fBexec\fR in \fBcatch\fR and check what the contents
-of the global \fBerrorCode\fR variable is if you have an error:
+wrap the call to \fBexec\fR in \fBcatch\fR and check the contents
+of the \fB\-errorcode\fR return option if you have an error:
 .CS
 set status 0
-if {[catch {\fBexec\fR grep foo bar.txt} results]} {
-   if {[lindex $::errorCode 0] eq "CHILDSTATUS"} {
-      set status [lindex $::errorCode 2]
+if {[catch {\fBexec\fR grep foo bar.txt} results options]} {
+   set details [dict get $options -errorcode]
+   if {[lindex $details 0] eq "CHILDSTATUS"} {
+      set status [lindex $details 2]
    } else {
       # Some kind of unexpected failure
    }
@@ -359,9 +391,8 @@ remember that Tcl does not handle globbing or expand things into
 multiple arguments by default.  Instead you should write things like
 this:
 .CS
-eval [list \fBexec\fR ls -l] [glob *.tcl]
+\fBexec\fR ls -l {*}[glob *.tcl]
 .CE
-.PP
 .SH "WINDOWS EXAMPLES"
 Here are some examples of the use of the \fBexec\fR command on Windows.
 .PP
@@ -395,15 +426,15 @@ differences in behaviour between \fBexec\fR and DOS batch files.
 .PP
 When in doubt, use the command \fBauto_execok\fR: it will return the
 complete path to the program as seen by the \fBexec\fR command.  This
-applies especially when you want to run "internal" commands like
+applies especially when you want to run
+.QW internal
+commands like
 \fIdir\fR from a Tcl script (if you just want to list filenames, use
 the \fBglob\fR command.)  To do that, use this:
 .CS
-eval [list \fBexec\fR] [auto_execok dir] [list *.tcl]
+\fBexec\fR {*}[auto_execok dir] *.tcl
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 error(n), open(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 execute, pipeline, redirection, subprocess
diff --git a/doc/exit.n b/doc/exit.n
index 5d1dc0b..eccd635 100644
--- a/doc/exit.n
+++ b/doc/exit.n
@@ -19,23 +19,23 @@ exit \- End the application
 .PP
 Terminate the process, returning \fIreturnCode\fR to the
 system as the exit status.
-If \fIreturnCode\fR isn't specified then it defaults
+If \fIreturnCode\fR is not specified then it defaults
 to 0.
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Since non-zero exit codes are usually interpreted as error cases by
 the calling process, the \fBexit\fR command is an important part of
-signalling that something fatal has gone wrong.  This code fragment is
+signaling that something fatal has gone wrong. This code fragment is
 useful in scripts to act as a general problem trap:
 .CS
 proc main {} {
     # ... put the real main code in here ...
 }
 
-if {[catch {main} msg]} {
+if {[catch {main} msg options]} {
     puts stderr "unexpected script error: $msg"
     if {[info exist env(DEBUG)]} {
         puts stderr "---- BEGIN TRACE ----"
-        puts stderr $errorInfo
+        puts stderr [dict get $options -errorinfo]
         puts stderr "---- END TRACE ----"
     }
 
@@ -45,7 +45,7 @@ if {[catch {main} msg]} {
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-exec(n), tclvars(n)
+exec(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 exit, process
diff --git a/doc/expr.n b/doc/expr.n
index e529925..8d6a8ae 100644
--- a/doc/expr.n
+++ b/doc/expr.n
@@ -1,12 +1,13 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-2000 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2005 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH expr n 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH expr n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
@@ -14,14 +15,14 @@ expr \- Evaluate an expression
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBexpr \fIarg \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 Concatenates \fIarg\fRs (adding separator spaces between them),
 evaluates the result as a Tcl expression, and returns the value.
-The operators permitted in Tcl expressions are a subset of
-the operators permitted in C expressions, and they have the
-same meaning and precedence as the corresponding C operators.
+The operators permitted in Tcl expressions include a subset of
+the operators permitted in C expressions.  For those operators
+common to both Tcl and C, Tcl applies the same meaning and precedence
+as the corresponding C operators.
 Expressions almost always yield numeric results
 (integer or floating-point values).
 For example, the expression
@@ -31,36 +32,38 @@ For example, the expression
 evaluates to 14.2.
 Tcl expressions differ from C expressions in the way that
 operands are specified.  Also, Tcl expressions support
-non-numeric operands and string comparisons.
-.SH OPERANDS
+non-numeric operands and string comparisons, as well as some
+additional operators not found in C.
+.SS OPERANDS
 .PP
 A Tcl expression consists of a combination of operands, operators,
 and parentheses.
 White space may be used between the operands and operators and
 parentheses; it is ignored by the expression's instructions.
 Where possible, operands are interpreted as integer values.
-Integer values may be specified in decimal (the normal case), in octal (if the
-first character of the operand is \fB0\fR), or in hexadecimal (if the first
-two characters of the operand are \fB0x\fR).
+.VS 8.5
+Integer values may be specified in decimal (the normal case), in binary
+(if the first two characters of the operand are \fB0b\fR), in octal
+(if the first two characters of the operand are \fB0o\fR), or in hexadecimal
+(if the first two characters of the operand are \fB0x\fR).  For
+compatibility with older Tcl releases, an octal integer value is also
+indicated simply when the first character of the operand is \fB0\fR,
+whether or not the second character is also \fBo\fR.
 If an operand does not have one of the integer formats given
 above, then it is treated as a floating-point number if that is
-possible.  Floating-point numbers may be specified in any of the
-ways accepted by an ANSI-compliant C compiler (except that the
-\fBf\fR, \fBF\fR, \fBl\fR, and \fBL\fR suffixes will not be permitted in
-most installations).  For example, all of the
+possible.  Floating-point numbers may be specified in any of several
+common formats making use of the decimal digits, the decimal point \fB.\fR,
+the characters \fBe\fR or \fBE\fR indicating scientific notation, and
+the sign characters \fB+\fR or \fB\-\fR.  For example, all of the
 following are valid floating-point numbers:  2.1, 3., 6e4, 7.91e+16.
+Also recognized as floating point values are the strings \fBInf\fR
+and \fBNaN\fR making use of any case for each character.
+.VE 8.5
 If no numeric interpretation is possible (note that all literal
 operands that are not numeric or boolean must be quoted with either
 braces or with double quotes), then an operand is left as a string
 (and only a limited set of operators may be applied to it).
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
-On 32-bit systems, integer values MAX_INT (0x7FFFFFFF) and MIN_INT
-(-0x80000000) will be represented as 32-bit values, and integer values
-outside that range will be represented as 64-bit values (if that is
-possible at all.)
-.VE 8.4
-.PP
 Operands may be specified in any of the following ways:
 .IP [1]
 As a numeric value, either integer or floating-point.
@@ -84,8 +87,8 @@ The command will be executed and its result will be used as
 the operand.
 .IP [7]
 As a mathematical function whose arguments have any of the above
-forms for operands, such as \fBsin($x)\fR.  See below for a list of defined
-functions.
+forms for operands, such as \fBsin($x)\fR.  See \fBMATH FUNCTIONS\fR below for
+a discussion of how mathematical functions are handled.
 .LP
 Where the above substitutions occur (e.g. inside quoted strings), they
 are performed by the expression's instructions.
@@ -102,21 +105,27 @@ Then the command on the left side of each of the lines below
 will produce the value on the right side of the line:
 .CS
 .ta 6c
-\fBexpr 3.1 + $a	6.1
-expr 2 + "$a.$b"	5.6
-expr 4*[llength "6 2"]	8
-expr {{word one} < "word $a"}	0\fR
+\fBexpr\fR 3.1 + $a	\fI6.1\fR
+\fBexpr\fR 2 + "$a.$b"	\fI5.6\fR
+\fBexpr\fR 4*[llength "6 2"]	\fI8\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {{word one} < "word $a"}	\fI0\fR
 .CE
-.SH OPERATORS
+.SS OPERATORS
 .PP
-The valid operators are listed below, grouped in decreasing order
-of precedence:
+The valid operators (most of which are also available as commands in
+the \fBtcl::mathop\fR namespace; see the \fBmathop\fR(n) manual page
+for details) are listed below, grouped in decreasing order of precedence:
 .TP 20
 \fB\-\0\0+\0\0~\0\0!\fR
 Unary minus, unary plus, bit-wise NOT, logical NOT.  None of these operators
 may be applied to string operands, and bit-wise NOT may be
 applied only to integers.
 .TP 20
+\fB**\fR
+.VS 8.5
+Exponentiation.  Valid for any numeric operands.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP 20
 \fB*\0\0/\0\0%\fR
 Multiply, divide, remainder.  None of these operators may be
 applied to string operands, and remainder may be applied only
@@ -140,12 +149,19 @@ in which case string comparison is used.
 \fB==\0\0!=\fR
 Boolean equal and not equal.  Each operator produces a zero/one result.
 Valid for all operand types.
-.VS 8.4
 .TP 20
 \fBeq\0\0ne\fR
 Boolean string equal and string not equal.  Each operator produces a
 zero/one result.  The operand types are interpreted only as strings.
-.VE 8.4
+.TP 20
+\fBin\0\0ni\fR
+.VS 8.5
+List containment and negated list containment.  Each operator produces
+a zero/one result and treats its first argument as a string and its
+second argument as a Tcl list.  The \fBin\fR operator indicates
+whether the first argument is a member of the second argument list;
+the \fBni\fR operator inverts the sense of the result.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP 20
 \fB&\fR
 Bit-wise AND.  Valid for integer operands only.
@@ -173,168 +189,84 @@ The \fIx\fR operand must have a boolean or numeric value.
 .LP
 See the C manual for more details on the results
 produced by each operator.
+.VS 8.5
+The exponentiation operator promotes types like the multiply and
+divide operators, and produces a result that is the same as the output
+of the \fBpow\fR function (after any type conversions.)
+.VE 8.5
 All of the binary operators group left-to-right within the same
 precedence level.  For example, the command
 .CS
-\fBexpr 4*2 < 7\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {4*2 < 7}
 .CE
 returns 0.
 .PP
-The \fB&&\fR, \fB||\fR, and \fB?:\fR operators have ``lazy
-evaluation'', just as in C, 
-which means that operands are not evaluated if they are
+The \fB&&\fR, \fB||\fR, and \fB?:\fR operators have
+.QW "lazy evaluation" ,
+just as in C, which means that operands are not evaluated if they are
 not needed to determine the outcome.  For example, in the command
 .CS
 \fBexpr {$v ? [a] : [b]}\fR
 .CE
-only one of \fB[a]\fR or \fB[b]\fR will actually be evaluated,
+only one of
+.QW \fB[a]\fR
+or
+.QW \fB[b]\fR
+will actually be evaluated,
 depending on the value of \fB$v\fR.  Note, however, that this is
 only true if the entire expression is enclosed in braces;  otherwise
-the Tcl parser will evaluate both \fB[a]\fR and \fB[b]\fR before
-invoking the \fBexpr\fR command.
-.SH "MATH FUNCTIONS"
+the Tcl parser will evaluate both
+.QW \fB[a]\fR
+and
+.QW \fB[b]\fR
+before invoking the \fBexpr\fR command.
+.SS "MATH FUNCTIONS"
 .PP
-Tcl supports the following mathematical functions in expressions, all
-of which work solely with floating-point numbers unless otherwise noted:
-.DS
-.ta 3c 6c 9c
-\fBabs\fR	\fBcosh\fR	\fBlog\fR	\fBsqrt\fR
-\fBacos\fR	\fBdouble\fR	\fBlog10\fR	\fBsrand\fR
-\fBasin\fR	\fBexp\fR	\fBpow\fR	\fBtan\fR
-\fBatan\fR	\fBfloor\fR	\fBrand\fR	\fBtanh\fR
-\fBatan2\fR	\fBfmod\fR	\fBround\fR	\fBwide\fR
-\fBceil\fR	\fBhypot\fR	\fBsin\fR
-\fBcos\fR	\fBint\fR	\fBsinh\fR
-.DE
+.VS 8.5
+When the expression parser encounters a mathematical function
+such as \fBsin($x)\fR, it replaces it with a call to an ordinary
+Tcl function in the \fBtcl::mathfunc\fR namespace.  The processing
+of an expression such as:
+.CS
+\fBexpr {sin($x+$y)}\fR
+.CE
+is the same in every way as the processing of:
+.CS
+\fBexpr {[tcl::mathfunc::sin [expr {$x+$y}]]}\fR
+.CE
+which in turn is the same as the processing of:
+.CS
+\fBtcl::mathfunc::sin [expr {$x+$y}]\fR
+.CE
 .PP
-.TP
-\fBabs(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the absolute value of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR may be either
-integer or floating-point, and the result is returned in the same form.
-.TP
-\fBacos(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc cosine of \fIarg\fR, in the range [\fI0\fR,\fIpi\fR]
-radians. \fIArg\fR should be in the range [\fI-1\fR,\fI1\fR].
-.TP
-\fBasin(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc sine of \fIarg\fR, in the range [\fI-pi/2\fR,\fIpi/2\fR]
-radians.  \fIArg\fR should be in the range [\fI-1\fR,\fI1\fR].
-.TP
-\fBatan(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc tangent of \fIarg\fR, in the range [\fI-pi/2\fR,\fIpi/2\fR]
-radians.
-.TP
-\fBatan2(\fIy, x\fB)\fR
-Returns the arc tangent of \fIy\fR/\fIx\fR, in the range [\fI-pi\fR,\fIpi\fR]
-radians.  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR cannot both be 0.  If \fIx\fR is greater
-than \fI0\fR, this is equivalent to \fBatan(\fIy/x\fB)\fR.
-.TP
-\fBceil(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the smallest integral floating-point value (i.e. with a zero
-fractional part) not less than \fIarg\fR.
-.TP
-\fBcos(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the cosine of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
-.TP
-\fBcosh(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the hyperbolic cosine of \fIarg\fR.  If the result would cause
-an overflow, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBdouble(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-If \fIarg\fR is a floating-point value, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise converts
-\fIarg\fR to floating-point and returns the converted value.
-.TP
-\fBexp(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the exponential of \fIarg\fR, defined as \fIe\fR**\fIarg\fR.
-If the result would cause an overflow, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBfloor(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the largest integral floating-point value (i.e. with a zero
-fractional part) not greater than \fIarg\fR.
-.TP
-\fBfmod(\fIx, y\fB)\fR
-Returns the floating-point remainder of the division of \fIx\fR by
-\fIy\fR.  If \fIy\fR is 0, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBhypot(\fIx, y\fB)\fR
-Computes the length of the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle
-\fBsqrt(\fIx\fR*\fIx\fR+\fIy\fR*\fIy\fB)\fR.
-.TP
-\fBint(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-.VS 8.4
-If \fIarg\fR is an integer value of the same width as the machine
-word, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise
-converts \fIarg\fR to an integer (of the same size as a machine word,
-i.e. 32-bits on 32-bit systems, and 64-bits on 64-bit systems) by
-truncation and returns the converted value.
-.VE 8.4
-.TP
-\fBlog(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the natural logarithm of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR must be a
-positive value.
-.TP
-\fBlog10(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the base 10 logarithm of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR must be a
-positive value.
-.TP
-\fBpow(\fIx, y\fB)\fR
-Computes the value of \fIx\fR raised to the power \fIy\fR.  If \fIx\fR
-is negative, \fIy\fR must be an integer value.
-.TP
-\fBrand()\fR
-Returns a pseudo-random floating-point value in the range (\fI0\fR,\fI1\fR).  
-The generator algorithm is a simple linear congruential generator that
-is not cryptographically secure.  Each result from \fBrand\fR completely
-determines all future results from subsequent calls to \fBrand\fR, so
-\fBrand\fR should not be used to generate a sequence of secrets, such as
-one-time passwords.  The seed of the generator is initialized from the
-internal clock of the machine or may be set with the \fBsrand\fR function.
-.TP
-\fBround(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-If \fIarg\fR is an integer value, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise converts
-\fIarg\fR to integer by rounding and returns the converted value.
-.TP
-\fBsin(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the sine of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
-.TP
-\fBsinh(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the hyperbolic sine of \fIarg\fR.  If the result would cause
-an overflow, an error is returned.
-.TP
-\fBsqrt(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the square root of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR must be non-negative.
-.TP
-\fBsrand(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-The \fIarg\fR, which must be an integer, is used to reset the seed for
-the random number generator of \fBrand\fR.  Returns the first random
-number (see \fBrand()\fR) from that seed.  Each interpreter has its own seed.
-.TP
-\fBtan(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the tangent of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
-.TP
-\fBtanh(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-Returns the hyperbolic tangent of \fIarg\fR.
-.TP
-\fBwide(\fIarg\fB)\fR
-.VS 8.4
-Converts \fIarg\fR to an integer value at least 64-bits wide (by sign-extension
-if \fIarg\fR is a 32-bit number) if it is not one already.
-.VE 8.4
+The executor will search for \fBtcl::mathfunc::sin\fR using the usual
+rules for resolving functions in namespaces. Either
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::sin\fR or \fB[namespace
+current]::tcl::mathfunc::sin\fR will satisfy the request, and others
+may as well (depending on the current \fBnamespace path\fR setting).
 .PP
-In addition to these predefined functions, applications may
-define additional functions using \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR().
-.SH "TYPES, OVERFLOW, AND PRECISION"
+See the \fBmathfunc\fR(n) manual page for the math functions that are
+available by default.
+.VE 8.5
+.SS "TYPES, OVERFLOW, AND PRECISION"
 .PP
-All internal computations involving integers are done with the C type
-\fIlong\fR, and all internal computations involving floating-point are
+.VS 8.5
+All internal computations involving integers are done calling on the
+LibTomMath multiple precision integer library as required so that all
+integer calculations are performed exactly.  Note that in Tcl releases
+prior to 8.5, integer calculations were performed with one of the C types
+\fIlong int\fR or \fITcl_WideInt\fR, causing implicit range truncation
+in those calculations where values overflowed the range of those types.
+Any code that relied on these implicit truncations will need to explicitly
+add \fBint()\fR or \fBwide()\fR function calls to expressions at the points
+where such truncation is required to take place.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
+All internal computations involving floating-point are
 done with the C type \fIdouble\fR.
 When converting a string to floating-point, exponent overflow is
-detected and results in a Tcl error.
-For conversion to integer from string, detection of overflow depends
-on the behavior of some routines in the local C library, so it should
-be regarded as unreliable.
-In any case, integer overflow and underflow are generally not detected
-reliably for intermediate results.  Floating-point overflow and underflow
+detected and results in the \fIdouble\fR value of \fBInf\fR or
+\fB\-Inf\fR as appropriate.  Floating-point overflow and underflow
 are detected to the degree supported by the hardware, which is generally
 pretty reliable.
 .PP
@@ -344,34 +276,36 @@ For arithmetic computations, integers are used until some
 floating-point number is introduced, after which floating-point is used.
 For example,
 .CS
-\fBexpr 5 / 4\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {5 / 4}
 .CE
 returns 1, while
 .CS
-\fBexpr 5 / 4.0\fR
-\fBexpr 5 / ( [string length "abcd"] + 0.0 )\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {5 / 4.0}
+\fBexpr\fR {5 / ( [string length "abcd"] + 0.0 )}
 .CE
 both return 1.25.
-Floating-point values are always returned with a ``\fB.\fR''
-or an \fBe\fR so that they will not look like integer values.  For
-example,
+Floating-point values are always returned with a
+.QW \fB.\fR
+or an
+.QW \fBe\fR
+so that they will not look like integer values.  For example,
 .CS
-\fBexpr 20.0/5.0\fR
+\fBexpr\fR {20.0/5.0}
 .CE
 returns \fB4.0\fR, not \fB4\fR.
-.SH "STRING OPERATIONS"
+.SS "STRING OPERATIONS"
 .PP
 String values may be used as operands of the comparison operators,
 although the expression evaluator tries to do comparisons as integer
 or floating-point when it can,
-.VS 8.4
 except in the case of the \fBeq\fR and \fBne\fR operators.
-.VE 8.4
 If one of the operands of a comparison is a string and the other
-has a numeric value, the numeric operand is converted back to
-a string using the C \fIsprintf\fR format specifier
-\fB%d\fR for integers and \fB%g\fR for floating-point values.
-For example, the commands
+has a numeric value, a canonical string representation of the numeric
+operand value is generated to compare with the string operand.
+Canonical string representation for integer values is a decimal string
+format.  Canonical string representation for floating-point values
+is that produced by the \fB%g\fR format specifier of Tcl's
+\fBformat\fR command.  For example, the commands
 .CS
 \fBexpr {"0x03" > "2"}\fR
 \fBexpr {"0y" < "0x12"}\fR
@@ -380,14 +314,10 @@ both return 1.  The first comparison is done using integer
 comparison, and the second is done using string comparison after
 the second operand is converted to the string \fB18\fR.
 Because of Tcl's tendency to treat values as numbers whenever
-possible, it isn't generally a good idea to use operators like \fB==\fR
+possible, it is not generally a good idea to use operators like \fB==\fR
 when you really want string comparison and the values of the
-operands could be arbitrary;  it's better in these cases to use
-.VS 8.4
-the \fBeq\fR or \fBne\fR operators, or
-.VE 8.4
-the \fBstring\fR command instead.
-
+operands could be arbitrary;  it is better in these cases to use
+the \fBeq\fR or \fBne\fR operators, or the \fBstring\fR command instead.
 .SH "PERFORMANCE CONSIDERATIONS"
 .PP
 Enclose expressions in braces for the best speed and the smallest
@@ -410,7 +340,7 @@ then the \fBexpr\fR command will evaluate the expression \fB$a + 2*4\fR.
 Most expressions do not require a second round of substitutions.
 Either they are enclosed in braces or, if not,
 their variable and command substitutions yield numbers or strings
-that don't themselves require substitutions.
+that do not themselves require substitutions.
 However, because a few unbraced expressions 
 need two rounds of substitutions,
 the bytecode compiler must emit
@@ -419,12 +349,18 @@ The most expensive code is required for
 unbraced expressions that contain command substitutions.
 These expressions must be implemented by generating new code
 each time the expression is executed.
+.VS 8.5
+When the expression is unbraced to allow the substitution of a function or
+operator, consider using the commands documented in the \fBmathfunc\fR(n) or
+\fBmathop\fR(n) manual pages directly instead.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH EXAMPLES
-Define a procedure that computes an "interesting" mathematical
-function:
+Define a procedure that computes an
+.QW interesting
+mathematical function:
 .CS
-proc calc {x y} {
-    \fBexpr\fR { ($x*$x - $y*$y) / exp($x*$x + $y*$y) }
+proc tcl::mathfunc::calc {x y} {
+    \fBexpr\fR { ($x**2 - $y**2) / exp($x**2 + $y**2) }
 }
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -461,9 +397,14 @@ Generate a random integer in the range 0..99 inclusive:
 .CS
 set randNum [\fBexpr\fR { int(100 * rand()) }]
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-array(n), for(n), if(n), string(n), Tcl(n), while(n)
-
+array(n), for(n), if(n), mathfunc(n), mathop(n), namespace(n), proc(n),
+string(n), Tcl(n), while(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 arithmetic, boolean, compare, expression, fuzzy comparison
+.SH COPYRIGHT
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+Copyright (c) 1994-2000 Sun Microsystems Incorporated.
+Copyright (c) 2005 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved.
+.fi
diff --git a/doc/fblocked.n b/doc/fblocked.n
index 08d8054..d8e8af7 100644
--- a/doc/fblocked.n
+++ b/doc/fblocked.n
@@ -24,12 +24,10 @@ characters available for input and no end-of-line sequence, \fBgets\fR
 returns an empty string and a subsequent call to \fBfblocked\fR will
 return 1.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as a
 Tcl standard channel (\fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR, or \fBstderr\fR),
 the return value from an invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or
 the result of a channel creation command provided by a Tcl extension.
-.VE
 .SH EXAMPLE
 The \fBfblocked\fR command is particularly useful when writing network
 servers, as it allows you to write your code in a line-by-line style
diff --git a/doc/fconfigure.n b/doc/fconfigure.n
index 11a4c4f..0763232 100644
--- a/doc/fconfigure.n
+++ b/doc/fconfigure.n
@@ -47,7 +47,8 @@ channel can cause the process to block indefinitely.
 The value of the option must be a proper boolean value.
 Channels are normally in blocking mode;  if a channel is placed into
 nonblocking mode it will affect the operation of the \fBgets\fR,
-\fBread\fR, \fBputs\fR, \fBflush\fR, and \fBclose\fR commands;
+\fBread\fR, \fBputs\fR, \fBflush\fR, and \fBclose\fR commands by
+allowing them to operate asynchronously;
 see the documentation for those commands for details.
 For nonblocking mode to work correctly, the application must be
 using the Tcl event loop (e.g. by calling \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR or
@@ -89,11 +90,14 @@ If a file contains pure binary data (for instance, a JPEG image), the
 encoding for the channel should be configured to be \fBbinary\fR.  Tcl
 will then assign no interpretation to the data in the file and simply read or
 write raw bytes.  The Tcl \fBbinary\fR command can be used to manipulate this
-byte-oriented data.
+byte-oriented data.  It is usually better to set the
+\fB\-translation\fR option to \fBbinary\fR when you want to transfer
+binary data, as this turns off the other automatic interpretations of
+the bytes in the stream as well.
 .PP
 The default encoding for newly opened channels is the same platform- and
 locale-dependent system encoding used for interfacing with the operating
-system.  
+system, as returned by \fBencoding system\fR.
 .RE
 .TP
 \fB\-eofchar\fR \fIchar\fR
@@ -114,6 +118,9 @@ channel, a two-element list will always be returned.  The default value
 for \fB\-eofchar\fR is the empty string in all cases except for files
 under Windows.  In that case the \fB\-eofchar\fR is Control-z (\ex1a) for
 reading and the empty string for writing.
+The acceptable range for \fB\-eofchar\fR values is \ex01 - \ex7f;
+attempting to set \fB\-eofchar\fR to a value outside of this range will
+generate an error.
 .TP
 \fB\-translation\fR \fImode\fR
 .TP
@@ -124,11 +131,11 @@ newline character (\en).  However, in actual files and devices the end of
 a line may be represented differently on different platforms, or even for
 different devices on the same platform.  For example, under UNIX newlines
 are used in files, whereas carriage-return-linefeed sequences are
-normally used in network connections.  On input (i.e., with \fBgets\fP
-and \fBread\fP) the Tcl I/O system automatically translates the external
+normally used in network connections.  On input (i.e., with \fBgets\fR
+and \fBread\fR) the Tcl I/O system automatically translates the external
 end-of-line representation into newline characters.  Upon output (i.e.,
-with \fBputs\fP), the I/O system translates newlines to the external
-end-of-line representation.  The default translation mode, \fBauto\fP,
+with \fBputs\fR), the I/O system translates newlines to the external
+end-of-line representation.  The default translation mode, \fBauto\fR,
 handles all the common cases automatically, but the \fB\-translation\fR
 option provides explicit control over the end of line translations.
 .RS
@@ -146,25 +153,24 @@ currently supported:
 \fBauto\fR
 .
 As the input translation mode, \fBauto\fR treats any of newline
-(\fBlf\fP), carriage return (\fBcr\fP), or carriage return followed by a
-newline (\fBcrlf\fP) as the end of line representation.  The end of line
+(\fBlf\fR), carriage return (\fBcr\fR), or carriage return followed by a
+newline (\fBcrlf\fR) as the end of line representation.  The end of line
 representation can even change from line-to-line, and all cases are
 translated to a newline.  As the output translation mode, \fBauto\fR
 chooses a platform specific representation; for sockets on all platforms
-Tcl chooses \fBcrlf\fR, for all Unix flavors, it chooses \fBlf\fR, for the
-Macintosh platform it chooses \fBcr\fR and for the various flavors of
-Windows it chooses \fBcrlf\fR.  The default setting for
-\fB\-translation\fR is \fBauto\fR for both input and output.
+Tcl chooses \fBcrlf\fR, for all Unix flavors, it chooses \fBlf\fR, and
+for the various flavors of Windows it chooses \fBcrlf\fR.  The default
+setting for \fB\-translation\fR is \fBauto\fR for both input and output.
 .TP
 \fBbinary\fR 
 .
 No end-of-line translations are performed.  This is nearly identical to
-\fBlf\fP mode, except that in addition \fBbinary\fP mode also sets the
+\fBlf\fR mode, except that in addition \fBbinary\fR mode also sets the
 end-of-file character to the empty string (which disables it) and sets the
 encoding to \fBbinary\fR (which disables encoding filtering).  See the
 description of \fB\-eofchar\fR and \fB\-encoding\fR for more information.
-.PP
 .RS
+.PP
 Internally, i.e. when it comes to the actual behaviour of the
 translator this value \fBis\fR identical to \fBlf\fR and is therefore
 reported as such when queried. Even if \fBbinary\fR was used to set
@@ -175,17 +181,17 @@ the translation.
 .
 The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
 single carriage return character.  As the input translation mode,
-\fBcr\fP mode converts carriage returns to newline characters.  As the
-output translation mode, \fBcr\fP mode translates newline characters to
-carriage returns.  This mode is typically used on Macintosh platforms.
+\fBcr\fR mode converts carriage returns to newline characters.  As the
+output translation mode, \fBcr\fR mode translates newline characters to
+carriage returns.
 .TP
 \fBcrlf\fR
 .
 The end of a line in the underlying file or device is represented by a
 carriage return character followed by a linefeed character.  As the input
-translation mode, \fBcrlf\fP mode converts carriage-return-linefeed
+translation mode, \fBcrlf\fR mode converts carriage-return-linefeed
 sequences to newline characters.  As the output translation mode,
-\fBcrlf\fP mode translates newline characters to carriage-return-linefeed
+\fBcrlf\fR mode translates newline characters to carriage-return-linefeed
 sequences.  This mode is typically used on Windows platforms and for
 network connections.
 .TP
@@ -251,12 +257,12 @@ set words {}
 while {[llength $words] < 3} {
    gets $f line
    if {[string match "#*" $line]} continue
-   lappend words [eval concat [scan $line %d%d%d]]
+   lappend words {*}[join [scan $line %d%d%d]]
 }
 
 # Those words supply the size of the image and its
 # overall depth per channel. Assign to variables.
-foreach {xSize ySize depth} $words {break}
+lassign $words xSize ySize depth
 
 # Now switch to binary mode to pull in the data,
 # one byte per channel (red,green,blue) per pixel.
diff --git a/doc/fcopy.n b/doc/fcopy.n
index 3702f15..d583cf0 100644
--- a/doc/fcopy.n
+++ b/doc/fcopy.n
@@ -10,54 +10,56 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-fcopy \- Copy data from one channel to another.
+fcopy \- Copy data from one channel to another
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBfcopy \fIinchan\fR \fIoutchan\fR ?\fB\-size \fIsize\fR? ?\fB\-command \fIcallback\fR?
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-The \fBfcopy\fP command copies data from one I/O channel, \fIinchan\fR to another I/O channel, \fIoutchan\fR.
-The \fBfcopy\fP command leverages the buffering in the Tcl I/O system to
+The \fBfcopy\fR command copies data from one I/O channel, \fIinchan\fR to another I/O channel, \fIoutchan\fR.
+The \fBfcopy\fR command leverages the buffering in the Tcl I/O system to
 avoid extra copies and to avoid buffering too much data in
 main memory when copying large files to slow destinations like
 network sockets.
 .PP
-The \fBfcopy\fP 
+The \fBfcopy\fR 
 command transfers data from \fIinchan\fR until end of file
-or \fIsize\fP bytes have been 
-transferred. If no \fB\-size\fP argument is given,
+or \fIsize\fR bytes have been 
+transferred. If no \fB\-size\fR argument is given,
 then the copy goes until end of file.
 All the data read from \fIinchan\fR is copied to \fIoutchan\fR.
-Without the \fB\-command\fP option, \fBfcopy\fP blocks until the copy is complete
+Without the \fB\-command\fR option, \fBfcopy\fR blocks until the copy is complete
 and returns the number of bytes written to \fIoutchan\fR.
 .PP
-The \fB\-command\fP argument makes \fBfcopy\fP work in the background.
-In this case it returns immediately and the \fIcallback\fP is invoked
+The \fB\-command\fR argument makes \fBfcopy\fR work in the background.
+In this case it returns immediately and the \fIcallback\fR is invoked
 later when the copy completes.
-The \fIcallback\fP is called with
+The \fIcallback\fR is called with
 one or two additional 
 arguments that indicates how many bytes were written to \fIoutchan\fR.
 If an error occurred during the background copy, the second argument is the
 error string associated with the error.
 With a background copy,
 it is not necessary to put \fIinchan\fR or \fIoutchan\fR into
-non-blocking mode; the \fBfcopy\fP command takes care of that automatically.
+non-blocking mode; the \fBfcopy\fR command takes care of that automatically.
 However, it is necessary to enter the event loop by using
-the \fBvwait\fP command or by using Tk.
+the \fBvwait\fR command or by using Tk.
 .PP
 You are not allowed to do other I/O operations with
-\fIinchan\fR or \fIoutchan\fR during a background fcopy.
+\fIinchan\fR or \fIoutchan\fR during a background \fBfcopy\fR.
 If either \fIinchan\fR or \fIoutchan\fR get closed
 while the copy is in progress, the current copy is stopped
-and the command callback is \fInot\fP made.
+and the command callback is \fInot\fR made.
 If \fIinchan\fR is closed,
 then all data already queued for \fIoutchan\fR is written out.
 .PP
 Note that \fIinchan\fR can become readable during a background copy.
-You should turn off any \fBfileevent\fP handlers during a background
+You should turn off any \fBfileevent\fR handlers during a background
 copy so those handlers do not interfere with the copy.
-Any I/O attempted by a \fBfileevent\fP handler will get a "channel busy" error.
+Any I/O attempted by a \fBfileevent\fR handler will get a
+.QW "channel busy"
+error.
 .PP
 \fBFcopy\fR translates end-of-line sequences in \fIinchan\fR and \fIoutchan\fR
 according to the \fB\-translation\fR option
@@ -67,30 +69,46 @@ See the manual entry for \fBfconfigure\fR for details on the
 The translations mean that the number of bytes read from \fIinchan\fR
 can be different than the number of bytes written to \fIoutchan\fR.
 Only the number of bytes written to \fIoutchan\fR is reported,
-either as the return value of a synchronous \fBfcopy\fP or
-as the argument to the callback for an asynchronous \fBfcopy\fP.
+either as the return value of a synchronous \fBfcopy\fR or
+as the argument to the callback for an asynchronous \fBfcopy\fR.
 .PP
-\fBFcopy\fR obeys the encodings configured for the channels. This
+\fBFcopy\fR obeys the encodings and character translations configured
+for the channels. This
 means that the incoming characters are converted internally first
 UTF-8 and then into the encoding of the channel \fBfcopy\fR writes
 to. See the manual entry for \fBfconfigure\fR for details on the
-\fB\-encoding\fR option. No conversion is done if both channels are
-set to encoding "binary". If only the output channel is set to
-encoding "binary" the system will write the internal UTF-8
-representation of the incoming characters. If only the input channel
-is set to encoding "binary" the system will assume that the incoming
+\fB\-encoding\fR and \fB\-translation\fR options. No conversion is
+done if both channels are
+set to encoding
+.QW binary
+and have matching translations. If only the output channel is set to encoding
+.QW binary
+the system will write the internal UTF-8 representation of the incoming
+characters. If only the input channel is set to encoding
+.QW binary
+the system will assume that the incoming
 bytes are valid UTF-8 characters and convert them according to the
 output encoding. The behaviour of the system for bytes which are not
 valid UTF-8 characters is undefined in this case.
 
-.SH EXAMPLE
+.SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
-This first example shows how the callback gets
+The first example transfers the contents of one channel exactly to
+another. Note that when copying one file to another, it is better to
+use \fBfile copy\fR which also copies file metadata (e.g. the file
+access permissions) where possible.
+.CS
+fconfigure $in -translation binary
+fconfigure $out -translation binary
+\fBfcopy\fR $in $out
+.CE
+.PP
+This second example shows how the callback gets
 passed the number of bytes transferred.
 It also uses vwait to put the application into the event loop.
 Of course, this simplified example could be done without the command 
 callback.
-.DS
+.CS
 proc Cleanup {in out bytes {error {}}} {
     global total
     set total $bytes
@@ -102,14 +120,13 @@ proc Cleanup {in out bytes {error {}}} {
 }
 set in [open $file1]
 set out [socket $server $port]
-fcopy $in $out -command [list Cleanup $in $out]
+\fBfcopy\fR $in $out -command [list Cleanup $in $out]
 vwait total
-
-.DE
+.CE
 .PP
-The second example copies in chunks and tests for end of file
+The third example copies in chunks and tests for end of file
 in the command callback
-.DS
+.CS
 proc CopyMore {in out chunk bytes {error {}}} {
     global total done
     incr total $bytes
@@ -118,21 +135,21 @@ proc CopyMore {in out chunk bytes {error {}}} {
 	close $in
 	close $out
     } else {
-	fcopy $in $out -command [list CopyMore $in $out $chunk] \\
-	    -size $chunk
+	\fBfcopy\fR $in $out -size $chunk \e
+                -command [list CopyMore $in $out $chunk]
     }
 }
 set in [open $file1]
 set out [socket $server $port]
 set chunk 1024
 set total 0
-fcopy $in $out -command [list CopyMore $in $out $chunk] -size $chunk
+\fBfcopy\fR $in $out -size $chunk \e
+        -command [list CopyMore $in $out $chunk]
 vwait done
-
-.DE
+.CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-eof(n), fblocked(n), fconfigure(n)
+eof(n), fblocked(n), fconfigure(n), file(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 blocking, channel, end of line, end of file, nonblocking, read, translation
diff --git a/doc/file.n b/doc/file.n
index bc9eccc..b62d252 100644
--- a/doc/file.n
+++ b/doc/file.n
@@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ file \- Manipulate file names and attributes
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBfile \fIoption\fR \fIname\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command provides several operations on a file's name or attributes.
@@ -30,7 +29,7 @@ Returns a decimal string giving the time at which file \fIname\fR was last
 accessed.  If \fItime\fR is specified, it is an access time to set
 for the file.  The time is measured in the standard POSIX fashion as
 seconds from a fixed starting time (often January 1, 1970).  If the file
-doesn't exist or its access time cannot be queried or set then an error is
+does not exist or its access time cannot be queried or set then an error is
 generated.  On Windows, FAT file systems do not support access time.
 .TP
 \fBfile attributes \fIname\fR
@@ -38,18 +37,19 @@ generated.  On Windows, FAT file systems do not support access time.
 \fBfile attributes \fIname\fR ?\fBoption\fR?
 .TP
 \fBfile attributes \fIname\fR ?\fBoption value option value...\fR?
-.RS
+.
 This subcommand returns or sets platform specific values associated
 with a file. The first form returns a list of the platform specific
 flags and their values. The second form returns the value for the
 specific option. The third form sets one or more of the values. The
 values are as follows:
+.RS
 .PP
-On Unix, \fB-group\fR gets or sets the group name for the file. A group id
-can be given to the command, but it returns a group name. \fB-owner\fR gets
+On Unix, \fB\-group\fR gets or sets the group name for the file. A group id
+can be given to the command, but it returns a group name. \fB\-owner\fR gets
 or sets the user name of the owner of the file. The command returns the
 owner name, but the numerical id can be passed when setting the
-owner. \fB-permissions\fR sets or retrieves the octal code that chmod(1)
+owner. \fB\-permissions\fR sets or retrieves the octal code that chmod(1)
 uses.  This command does also has limited support for setting using the
 symbolic attributes for chmod(1), of the form [ugo]?[[+\-=][rwxst],[...]],
 where multiple symbolic attributes can be separated by commas (example:
@@ -57,45 +57,49 @@ where multiple symbolic attributes can be separated by commas (example:
 permissions for group and other).  A simplified \fBls\fR style string,
 of the form rwxrwxrwx (must be 9 characters), is also supported
 (example: \fBrwxr\-xr\-t\fR is equivalent to 01755).
+On versions of Unix supporting file flags, \fB\-readonly\fR gives the
+value or sets or clears the readonly attribute of the file,
+i.e. the user immutable flag \fBuchg\fR to chflags(1).
 .PP
-On Windows, \fB-archive\fR gives the value or sets or clears the
-archive attribute of the file. \fB-hidden\fR gives the value or sets
-or clears the hidden attribute of the file. \fB-longname\fR will
+On Windows, \fB\-archive\fR gives the value or sets or clears the
+archive attribute of the file. \fB\-hidden\fR gives the value or sets
+or clears the hidden attribute of the file. \fB\-longname\fR will
 expand each path element to its long version. This attribute cannot be
-set. \fB-readonly\fR gives the value or sets or clears the readonly
-attribute of the file. \fB-shortname\fR gives a string where every
+set. \fB\-readonly\fR gives the value or sets or clears the readonly
+attribute of the file. \fB\-shortname\fR gives a string where every
 path element is replaced with its short (8.3) version of the
-name. This attribute cannot be set. \fB-system\fR gives or sets or
+name. This attribute cannot be set. \fB\-system\fR gives or sets or
 clears the value of the system attribute of the file.
 .PP
-On Macintosh, \fB-creator\fR gives or sets the Finder creator type of
-the file. \fB-hidden\fR gives or sets or clears the hidden attribute
-of the file. \fB-readonly\fR gives or sets or clears the readonly
-attribute of the file. Note that directories can only be locked if
-File Sharing is turned on. \fB-type\fR gives or sets the Finder file
-type for the file.
+On Mac OS X and Darwin, \fB\-creator\fR gives or sets the
+Finder creator type of the file. \fB\-hidden\fR gives or sets or clears
+the hidden attribute of the file. \fB\-readonly\fR gives or sets or
+clears the readonly attribute of the file. \fB\-rsrclength\fR gives
+the length of the resource fork of the file, this attribute can only be
+set to the value 0, which results in the resource fork being stripped
+off the file.
 .RE
-.VS
 .TP
 \fBfile channels ?\fIpattern\fR?
 .
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of names of all
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, returns a list of names of all
 registered open channels in this interpreter.  If \fIpattern\fR is
 specified, only those names matching \fIpattern\fR are returned.  Matching
 is determined using the same rules as for \fBstring match\fR.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBfile copy \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR \fItarget\fR
 .TP
 \fBfile copy \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR ?\fIsource\fR ...? \fItargetDir\fR
-.RS
+.
 The first form makes a copy of the file or directory \fIsource\fR under
 the pathname \fItarget\fR. If \fItarget\fR is an existing directory,
 then the second form is used.  The second form makes a copy inside
 \fItargetDir\fR of each \fIsource\fR file listed.  If a directory is
 specified as a \fIsource\fR, then the contents of the directory will be
 recursively copied into \fItargetDir\fR. Existing files will not be
-overwritten unless the \fB\-force\fR option is specified.  When copying
+overwritten unless the \fB\-force\fR option is specified (when Tcl will
+also attempt to adjust permissions on the destination file or directory
+if that is necessary to allow the copy to proceed).  When copying
 within a single filesystem, \fIfile copy\fR will copy soft links (i.e.
 the links themselves are copied, not the things they point to).  Trying
 to overwrite a non-empty directory, overwrite a directory with a file,
@@ -104,7 +108,6 @@ or overwrite a file with a directory will all result in errors even if
 specified, halting at the first error, if any.  A \fB\-\|\-\fR marks
 the end of switches; the argument following the \fB\-\|\-\fR will be
 treated as a \fIsource\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.RE
 .TP
 \fBfile delete \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIpathname\fR ?\fIpathname\fR ... ?
 .
@@ -116,9 +119,11 @@ Trying to delete a non-existent file is not considered an error.
 Trying to delete a read-only file will cause the file to be deleted,
 even if the \fB\-force\fR flags is not specified.  If the \fB\-force\fR
 option is specified on a directory, Tcl will attempt both to change
-permissions and move the current directory 'pwd' out of the given path
-if that is necessary to allow the deletion to proceed.  Arguments are
-processed in the order specified, halting at the first error, if any.
+permissions and move the current directory
+.QW pwd
+out of the given path if that is necessary to allow the deletion to
+proceed.  Arguments are processed in the order specified, halting at
+the first error, if any.
 A \fB\-\|\-\fR marks the end of switches; the argument following the
 \fB\-\|\-\fR will be treated as a \fIpathname\fR even if it starts with
 a \fB\-\fR.
@@ -126,9 +131,10 @@ a \fB\-\fR.
 \fBfile dirname \fIname\fR
 Returns a name comprised of all of the path components in \fIname\fR
 excluding the last element.  If \fIname\fR is a relative file name and
-only contains one path element, then returns ``\fB.\fR'' (or ``\fB:\fR''
-on the Macintosh).  If \fIname\fR refers to a root directory, then the
-root directory is returned.  For example,
+only contains one path element, then returns
+.QW \fB.\fR .
+If \fIname\fR refers to a root directory, then the root directory is
+returned.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
 \fBfile dirname c:/\fR
@@ -186,39 +192,53 @@ returns \fB/foo/bar\fR.
 .PP
 Note that any of the names can contain separators, and that the result
 is always canonical for the current platform: \fB/\fR for Unix and
-Windows, and \fB:\fR for Macintosh.
+Windows.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBfile link ?\fI-linktype\fR? \fIlinkName\fR ?\fItarget\fR?
+\fBfile link ?\fI\-linktype\fR? \fIlinkName\fR ?\fItarget\fR?
 .
 If only one argument is given, that argument is assumed to be
 \fIlinkName\fR, and this command returns the value of the link given by
 \fIlinkName\fR (i.e. the name of the file it points to).  If
-\fIlinkName\fR isn't a link or its value cannot be read (as, for example,
+\fIlinkName\fR is not a link or its value cannot be read (as, for example,
 seems to be the case with hard links, which look just like ordinary
 files), then an error is returned.
-.
+.RS
+.PP
 If 2 arguments are given, then these are assumed to be \fIlinkName\fR
 and \fItarget\fR. If \fIlinkName\fR already exists, or if \fItarget\fR
-doesn't exist, an error will be returned.  Otherwise, Tcl creates a new
-link called \fIlinkName\fR which points to the existing filesystem object
-at \fItarget\fR, where the type of the link is platform-specific (on Unix
-a symbolic link will be the default).  This is useful for the case where
-the user wishes to create a link in a cross-platform way, and doesn't
-care what type of link is created.
-.
+does not exist, an error will be returned.  Otherwise, Tcl creates a new
+link called \fIlinkName\fR which points to the existing filesystem
+object at \fItarget\fR (which is also the returned value), where the
+type of the link is platform-specific (on Unix a symbolic link will be
+the default).  This is useful for the case where the user wishes to
+create a link in a cross-platform way, and does not care what type of
+link is created.
+.PP
 If the user wishes to make a link of a specific type only, (and signal an
 error if for some reason that is not possible), then the optional
-\fI-linktype\fR argument should be given.  Accepted values for
-\fI-linktype\fR are "-symbolic" and "-hard".
-.
-When creating links on filesystems that either do not support any links,
-or do not support the specific type requested, an error message will be
-returned.  In particular Windows 95, 98 and ME do not support any links
-at present, but most Unix platforms support both symbolic and hard links
-(the latter for files only), MacOS supports symbolic links and Windows
-NT/2000/XP (on NTFS drives) support symbolic directory links and hard
-file links.
+\fI\-linktype\fR argument should be given.  Accepted values for
+\fI\-linktype\fR are
+.QW \-symbolic
+and
+.QW \-hard .
+.PP
+On Unix, symbolic links can be made to relative paths, and those paths
+must be relative to the actual \fIlinkName\fR's location (not to the
+cwd), but on all other platforms where relative links are not supported,
+target paths will always be converted to absolute, normalized form
+before the link is created (and therefore relative paths are interpreted
+as relative to the cwd).  Furthermore,
+.QW ~user
+paths are always expanded
+to absolute form.  When creating links on filesystems that either do not
+support any links, or do not support the specific type requested, an
+error message will be returned.  In particular Windows 95, 98 and ME do
+not support any links at present, but most Unix platforms support both
+symbolic and hard links (the latter for files only) and Windows
+NT/2000/XP (on NTFS drives) support symbolic
+directory links and hard file links.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBfile lstat \fIname varName\fR
 .
@@ -226,7 +246,7 @@ Same as \fBstat\fR option (see below) except uses the \fIlstat\fR
 kernel call instead of \fIstat\fR.  This means that if \fIname\fR
 refers to a symbolic link the information returned in \fIvarName\fR
 is for the link rather than the file it refers to.  On systems that
-don't support symbolic links this option behaves exactly the same
+do not support symbolic links this option behaves exactly the same
 as the \fBstat\fR option.
 .TP
 \fBfile mkdir \fIdir\fR ?\fIdir\fR ...?
@@ -244,32 +264,35 @@ Returns a decimal string giving the time at which file \fIname\fR was last
 modified.  If \fItime\fR is specified, it is a modification time to set for
 the file (equivalent to Unix \fBtouch\fR).  The time is measured in the
 standard POSIX fashion as seconds from a fixed starting time (often January
-1, 1970).  If the file doesn't exist or its modified time cannot be queried
+1, 1970).  If the file does not exist or its modified time cannot be queried
 or set then an error is generated.
 .TP
 \fBfile nativename \fIname\fR
 .
 Returns the platform-specific name of the file. This is useful if the
-filename is needed to pass to a platform-specific call, such as exec
-under Windows or AppleScript on the Macintosh.
+filename is needed to pass to a platform-specific call, such as to a
+subprocess via \fBexec\fR under Windows (see \fBEXAMPLES\fR below).
 .TP
 \fBfile normalize \fIname\fR
 .
-.RS
 Returns a unique normalized path representation for the file-system
 object (file, directory, link, etc), whose string value can be used as a
 unique identifier for it.  A normalized path is an absolute path which has
-all '../', './' removed.  Also it is one which is in the ``standard''
-format for the native platform.  On MacOS, Unix, this means the segments
+all
+.QW ../
+and
+.QW ./
+removed.  Also it is one which is in the
+.QW standard
+format for the native platform.  On Unix, this means the segments
 leading up to the path must be free of symbolic links/aliases (but the
 very last path component may be a symbolic link), and on Windows it also
 means we want the long form with that form's case-dependence (which
 gives us a unique, case-dependent path).  The one exception concerning the
 last link in the path is necessary, because Tcl or the user may wish to
-operate on the actual symbolic link itself (for example 'file delete', 'file
-rename', 'file copy' are defined to operate on symbolic links, not on the
-things that they point to).
-.RE
+operate on the actual symbolic link itself (for example \fBfile delete\fR,
+\fBfile rename\fR, \fBfile copy\fR are defined to operate on symbolic
+links, not on the things that they point to).
 .TP
 \fBfile owned \fIname\fR 
 .
@@ -278,13 +301,13 @@ otherwise.
 .TP
 \fBfile pathtype \fIname\fR
 .
-Returns one of \fBabsolute\fR, \fBrelative\fR, \fBvolumerelative\fR.  If
-\fIname\fR refers to a specific file on a specific volume, the path type
-will be \fBabsolute\fR.  If \fIname\fR refers to a file relative to the
-current working directory, then the path type will be \fBrelative\fR.  If
-\fIname\fR refers to a file relative to the current working directory on
-a specified volume, or to a specific file on the current working volume, then
-the path type is \fBvolumerelative\fR.
+Returns one of \fBabsolute\fR, \fBrelative\fR, \fBvolumerelative\fR. If
+\fIname\fR refers to a specific file on a specific volume, the path type will
+be \fBabsolute\fR. If \fIname\fR refers to a file relative to the current
+working directory, then the path type will be \fBrelative\fR. If \fIname\fR
+refers to a file relative to the current working directory on a specified
+volume, or to a specific file on the current working volume, then the path
+type is \fBvolumerelative\fR.
 .TP
 \fBfile readable \fIname\fR
 .
@@ -294,14 +317,14 @@ Returns \fB1\fR if file \fIname\fR is readable by the current user,
 \fBfile readlink \fIname\fR
 .
 Returns the value of the symbolic link given by \fIname\fR (i.e. the name
-of the file it points to).  If \fIname\fR isn't a symbolic link or its
-value cannot be read, then an error is returned.  On systems that don't
+of the file it points to).  If \fIname\fR is not a symbolic link or its
+value cannot be read, then an error is returned.  On systems that do not
 support symbolic links this option is undefined.
 .TP
 \fBfile rename \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR \fItarget\fR
 .TP
 \fBfile rename \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? \fIsource\fR ?\fIsource\fR ...? \fItargetDir\fR
-.RS
+.
 The first form takes the file or directory specified by pathname
 \fIsource\fR and renames it to \fItarget\fR, moving the file if the
 pathname \fItarget\fR specifies a name in a different directory.  If
@@ -316,13 +339,14 @@ result in errors.  Arguments are processed in the order specified,
 halting at the first error, if any.  A \fB\-\|\-\fR marks the end of
 switches; the argument following the \fB\-\|\-\fR will be treated as a
 \fIsource\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
-.RE
 .TP
 \fBfile rootname \fIname\fR
 .
 Returns all of the characters in \fIname\fR up to but not including the
-last ``.'' character in the last component of name.  If the last
-component of \fIname\fR doesn't contain a dot, then returns \fIname\fR.
+last
+.QW .
+character in the last component of name.  If the last
+component of \fIname\fR does not contain a dot, then returns \fIname\fR.
 .TP
 \fBfile separator\fR ?\fIname\fR?
 .
@@ -335,7 +359,7 @@ is generated.
 \fBfile size \fIname\fR
 .
 Returns a decimal string giving the size of file \fIname\fR in bytes.  If
-the file doesn't exist or its size cannot be queried then an error is
+the file does not exist or its size cannot be queried then an error is
 generated.
 .TP
 \fBfile split \fIname\fR
@@ -343,7 +367,7 @@ generated.
 Returns a list whose elements are the path components in \fIname\fR.  The
 first element of the list will have the same path type as \fIname\fR.
 All other elements will be relative.  Path separators will be discarded
-unless they are needed ensure that an element is unambiguously relative.
+unless they are needed to ensure that an element is unambiguously relative.
 For example, under Unix
 .RS
 .CS
@@ -370,24 +394,32 @@ empty string.
 .TP
 \fBfile system \fIname\fR
 .
-Returns a list of two elements, the first of which is the name of the
-filesystem to use for the file, and the second an arbitrary string
-representing the filesystem-specific nature or type of the location
-within that filesystem.  If a filesystem only supports one type of file,
-the second element may be null.  For example the native files have a
-first element 'native', and a second element which is a platform-specific
-type name for the file's system (e.g. 'NTFS', 'FAT', etc), or possibly
-the empty string if no further information is available or if this
-is not implemented.  A generic virtual file system might return the
-list 'vfs ftp' to represent a file on a remote ftp site mounted as a
-virtual filesystem through an extension called 'vfs'.  If the file does
-not belong to any filesystem, an error is generated.
+Returns a list of one or two elements, the first of which is the name of
+the filesystem to use for the file, and the second, if given, an
+arbitrary string representing the filesystem-specific nature or type of
+the location within that filesystem.  If a filesystem only supports one
+type of file, the second element may not be supplied.  For example the
+native files have a first element
+.QW native ,
+and a second element which when given is a platform-specific type name
+for the file's system (e.g.
+.QW NTFS ,
+.QW FAT ,
+on Windows).  A generic virtual file system might return
+the list
+.QW "vfs ftp"
+to represent a file on a remote ftp site mounted as a
+virtual filesystem through an extension called
+.QW vfs .
+If the file does not belong to any filesystem, an error is generated.
 .TP
 \fBfile tail \fIname\fR
 .
-Returns all of the characters in \fIname\fR after the last directory
-separator.  If \fIname\fR contains no separators then returns
-\fIname\fR.
+Returns all of the characters in the last filesystem component of
+\fIname\fR.  Any trailing directory separator in \fIname\fR is ignored.
+If \fIname\fR contains no separators then returns \fIname\fR.  So, 
+\fBfile tail a/b\fR, \fBfile tail a/b/\fR and \fBfile tail b\fR all
+return \fBb\fR.
 .TP
 \fBfile type \fIname\fR
 .
@@ -398,13 +430,15 @@ Returns a string giving the type of file \fIname\fR, which will be one of
 \fBfile volumes\fR
 . 
 Returns the absolute paths to the volumes mounted on the system, as a
-proper Tcl list.  On the Macintosh, this will be a list of the mounted
-drives, both local and network.  N.B. if two drives have the same name,
-they will both appear on the volume list, but there is currently no way,
-from Tcl, to access any but the first of these drives.  On UNIX, the
-command will always return "/", since all filesystems are locally mounted.
+proper Tcl list.  Without any virtual filesystems mounted as root
+volumes, on UNIX, the command will always return
+.QW / ,
+since all filesystems are locally mounted.
 On Windows, it will return a list of the available local drives
-(e.g. {a:/ c:/}).
+(e.g.
+.QW "a:/ c:/" ).
+If any virtual filesystem has mounted additional
+volumes, they will be in the returned list.
 .TP
 \fBfile writable \fIname\fR
 .
@@ -431,7 +465,7 @@ proc findMatchingCFiles {dir} {
          set ext .o
       }
    }
-   foreach file [glob -nocomplain -directory $dir *.c] {
+   foreach file [glob \-nocomplain \-directory $dir *.c] {
       set objectFile [\fBfile tail\fR [\fBfile rootname\fR $file]]$ext
       if {[\fBfile exists\fR $objectFile]} {
          lappend files $file
@@ -451,12 +485,19 @@ if {![\fBfile isdirectory\fR [\fBfile dirname\fR $newName]]} {
    \fBfile mkdir\fR [\fBfile dirname\fR $newName]
 }
 \fBfile rename\fR $oldName $newName
-\fBfile link\fR -symbolic $oldName $newName
+\fBfile link\fR \-symbolic $oldName $newName
+.CE
+.PP
+On Windows, a file can be
+.QW started
+easily enough (equivalent to double-clicking on it in the Explorer
+interface) but the name passed to the operating system must be in
+native format:
+.CS
+exec {*}[auto_execok start] {} [\fBfile nativename\fR ~/example.txt]
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 filename(n), open(n), close(n), eof(n), gets(n), tell(n), seek(n),
 fblocked(n), flush(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 attributes, copy files, delete files, directory, file, move files, name, rename files, stat
diff --git a/doc/fileevent.n b/doc/fileevent.n
index 99fe43a..eb555f5 100644
--- a/doc/fileevent.n
+++ b/doc/fileevent.n
@@ -28,17 +28,17 @@ interact with the user while waiting for the data to arrive.  If an
 application invokes \fBgets\fR or \fBread\fR on a blocking channel when
 there is no input data available, the process will block; until the input
 data arrives, it will not be able to service other events, so it will
-appear to the user to ``freeze up''.  With \fBfileevent\fR, the process can
+appear to the user to
+.QW "freeze up" .
+With \fBfileevent\fR, the process can
 tell when data is present and only invoke \fBgets\fR or \fBread\fR when
-they won't block.
+they will not block.
 .PP
-.VS
 The \fIchannelId\fR argument to \fBfileevent\fR refers to an open
 channel such as a Tcl standard channel (\fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR,
 or \fBstderr\fR), the return value from an invocation of \fBopen\fR
 or \fBsocket\fR, or the result of a channel creation command provided
 by a Tcl extension.
-.VE
 .PP
 If the \fIscript\fR argument is specified, then \fBfileevent\fR
 creates a new event handler:  \fIscript\fR will be evaluated
@@ -94,7 +94,7 @@ The script for a file event is executed at global level (outside the
 context of any Tcl procedure) in the interpreter in which the
 \fBfileevent\fR command was invoked.
 If an error occurs while executing the script then the
-\fBbgerror\fR mechanism is used to report the error.
+command registered with \fBinterp bgerror\fR is used to report the error.
 In addition, the file event handler is deleted if it ever returns
 an error;  this is done in order to prevent infinite loops due to
 buggy handlers.
@@ -117,7 +117,7 @@ proc GetData {chan} {
 by Mark Diekhans.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-bgerror(n), fconfigure(n), gets(n), puts(n), read(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
+fconfigure(n), gets(n), interp(n), puts(n), read(n), Tcl_StandardChannels(3)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 asynchronous I/O, blocking, channel, event handler, nonblocking, readable,
diff --git a/doc/filename.n b/doc/filename.n
index b588440..1fe22f0 100644
--- a/doc/filename.n
+++ b/doc/filename.n
@@ -23,7 +23,6 @@ to be portable should not assume a particular form for file names.
 Instead, portable scripts must use the \fBfile split\fR and \fBfile
 join\fR commands to manipulate file names (see the \fBfile\fR manual
 entry for more details).
-
 .SH "PATH TYPES"
 .PP
 File names are grouped into three general types based on the starting point
@@ -36,76 +35,26 @@ qualified, either giving the path relative to the root directory on the
 current volume, or relative to the current directory of the specified
 volume.  The \fBfile pathtype\fR command can be used to determine the
 type of a given path.
-
 .SH "PATH SYNTAX"
 .PP
 The rules for native names depend on the value reported in the Tcl
 array element \fBtcl_platform(platform)\fR:
 .TP 10
-\fBmac\fR
-On Apple Macintosh systems, Tcl supports two forms of path names.  The
-normal Mac style names use colons as path separators.  Paths may be
-relative or absolute, and file names may contain any character other
-than colon.  A leading colon causes the rest of the path to be
-interpreted relative to the current directory.  If a path contains a
-colon that is not at the beginning, then the path is interpreted as an
-absolute path.  Sequences of two or more colons anywhere in the path
-are used to construct relative paths where \fB::\fR refers to the
-parent of the current directory, \fB:::\fR refers to the parent of the
-parent, and so forth.
+\fBUnix\fR
+On Unix and Apple MacOS X platforms, Tcl uses path names where the
+components are separated by slashes.  Path names may be relative or
+absolute, and file names may contain any character other than slash.
+The file names \fB\&.\fR and \fB\&..\fR are special and refer to the
+current directory and the parent of the current directory respectively.
+Multiple adjacent slash characters are interpreted as a single
+separator.  Any number of trailing slash characters at the end of a
+path are simply ignored, so the paths \fBfoo\fR, \fBfoo/\fR and
+\fBfoo//\fR are all identical, and in particular \fBfoo/\fR does not
+necessarily mean a directory is being referred.
 .RS
 .PP
-In addition to Macintosh style names, Tcl also supports a subset of
-Unix-like names.  If a path contains no colons, then it is interpreted
-like a Unix path.  Slash is used as the path separator.  The file name
-\fB\&.\fR refers to the current directory, and \fB\&..\fR refers to the
-parent of the current directory.  However, some names like \fB/\fR or
-\fB/..\fR have no mapping, and are interpreted as Macintosh names.  In
-general, commands that generate file names will return Macintosh style
-names, but commands that accept file names will take both Macintosh
-and Unix-style names.
-.PP
-The following examples illustrate various forms of path names:
-.TP 15
-\fB:\fR
-Relative path to the current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fBMyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fBMyDisk:MyFile\fR
-Absolute path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR on the device named \fBMyDisk\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fB:MyDir:MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file name \fBMyFile\fR in a folder named
-\fBMyDir\fR in the current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fB::MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the folder above the
-current folder.
-.TP 15
-\fB:::MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the folder two levels above the
-current folder. 
-.TP 15
-\fB/MyDisk/MyFile\fR
-Absolute path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR on the device named
-\fBMyDisk\fR.
-.TP 15
-\fB\&../MyFile\fR
-Relative path to a file named \fBMyFile\fR in the folder above the
-current folder.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBunix\fR
-On Unix platforms, Tcl uses path names where the components are
-separated by slashes.  Path names may be relative or absolute, and
-file names may contain any character other than slash.  The file names
-\fB\&.\fR and \fB\&..\fR are special and refer to the current directory
-and the parent of the current directory respectively.  Multiple
-adjacent slash characters are interpreted as a single separator.
-The following examples illustrate various forms of path names:
-.RS
+The following examples illustrate various forms of path
+names:
 .TP 15
 \fB/\fR
 Absolute path to the root directory.
@@ -129,7 +78,7 @@ Relative path to the file \fBfoo\fR in the directory above the current
 directory. 
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBwindows\fR
+\fBWindows\fR
 On Microsoft Windows platforms, Tcl supports both drive-relative and UNC
 style names.  Both \fB/\fR and \fB\e\fR may be used as directory separators
 in either type of name.  Drive-relative names consist of an optional drive
@@ -169,37 +118,39 @@ Volume-relative path to a file \fBfoo\fR in the root directory of the current
 volume.  This is not a valid UNC path, so the assumption is that the
 extra backslashes are superfluous.
 .RE
-
 .SH "TILDE SUBSTITUTION"
 .PP
 In addition to the file name rules described above, Tcl also supports
-\fIcsh\fR-style tilde substitution.  If a file name starts with a
-tilde, then the file name will be interpreted as if the first element
-is replaced with the location of the home directory for the given
-user.  If the tilde is followed immediately by a separator, then the
-\fB$HOME\fR environment variable is substituted.  Otherwise the
-characters between the tilde and the next separator are taken as a
-user name, which is used to retrieve the user's home directory for
-substitution.
+\fIcsh\fR-style tilde substitution.  If a file name starts with a tilde,
+then the file name will be interpreted as if the first element is
+replaced with the location of the home directory for the given user.  If
+the tilde is followed immediately by a separator, then the \fB$HOME\fR
+environment variable is substituted.  Otherwise the characters between
+the tilde and the next separator are taken as a user name, which is used
+to retrieve the user's home directory for substitution.  This works on
+Unix, MacOS X and Windows (except very old releases).
 .PP
-The Macintosh and Windows platforms do not support tilde substitution
-when a user name follows the tilde.  On these platforms, attempts to
-use a tilde followed by a user name will generate an error that the
-user does not exist when Tcl attempts to interpret that part of the
-path or otherwise access the file.  The behaviour of these paths
-when not trying to interpret them is the same as on Unix.  File
-names that have a tilde without a user name will be correctly
-substituted using the \fB$HOME\fR environment variable, just like 
-for Unix.
-
+Old Windows platforms do not support tilde substitution when a user name
+follows the tilde.  On these platforms, attempts to use a tilde followed
+by a user name will generate an error that the user does not exist when
+Tcl attempts to interpret that part of the path or otherwise access the
+file.  The behaviour of these paths when not trying to interpret them is
+the same as on Unix.  File names that have a tilde without a user name
+will be correctly substituted using the \fB$HOME\fR environment
+variable, just like for Unix.
 .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
 .PP
 Not all file systems are case sensitive, so scripts should avoid code
 that depends on the case of characters in a file name.  In addition,
 the character sets allowed on different devices may differ, so scripts
 should choose file names that do not contain special characters like:
-\fB<>:"/\e|\fR.  The safest approach is to use names consisting of
-alphanumeric characters only.  Also Windows 3.1 only supports file
+\fB<>:?"/\e|\fR.
+'\""\" reset emacs highlighting
+The safest approach is to use names consisting of
+alphanumeric characters only.  Care should be taken with filenames
+which contain spaces (common on Windows systems) and
+filenames where the backslash is the directory separator (Windows
+native path names).  Also Windows 3.1 only supports file
 names with a root of no more than 8 characters and an extension of no
 more than 3 characters.
 .PP
@@ -207,16 +158,21 @@ On Windows platforms there are file and path length restrictions.
 Complete paths or filenames longer than about 260 characters will lead
 to errors in most file operations.
 .PP
-Another Windows peculiarity is that any number of trailing dots '.'  in
-filenames are totally ignored, so, for example, attempts to create a
-file or directory with a name "foo." will result in the creation of a
-file/directory with name "foo".  This fact is reflected in the
-results of 'file normalize'.  Furthermore, a file name consisting only
-of dots '.........' or dots with trailing characters '.....abc' is
-illegal.
+Another Windows peculiarity is that any number of trailing dots
+.QW .
+in filenames are totally ignored, so, for example, attempts to create a
+file or directory with a name
+.QW foo.
+will result in the creation of a file/directory with name
+.QW foo .
+This fact is reflected in the results of \fBfile normalize\fR.
+Furthermore, a file name consisting only of dots
+.QW .........
+or dots with trailing characters
+.QW .....abc
+is illegal.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+file(n), glob(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 current directory, absolute file name, relative file name,
 volume-relative file name, portability
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), glob(n)
diff --git a/doc/flush.n b/doc/flush.n
index a288141..1c79ea0 100644
--- a/doc/flush.n
+++ b/doc/flush.n
@@ -19,13 +19,11 @@ flush \- Flush buffered output for a channel
 .PP
 Flushes any output that has been buffered for \fIchannelId\fR.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as a
 Tcl standard channel (\fBstdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR), the return
 value from an invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or the result
 of a channel creation command provided by a Tcl extension.  The
 channel must have been opened for writing.
-.VE
 .PP
 If the channel is in blocking mode the command does not return until all the
 buffered output has been flushed to the channel. If the channel is in
diff --git a/doc/for.n b/doc/for.n
index 14755cb..033903f 100644
--- a/doc/for.n
+++ b/doc/for.n
@@ -10,7 +10,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-for \- ``For'' loop
+for \- 'For' loop
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBfor \fIstart test next body\fR
 .BE
diff --git a/doc/foreach.n b/doc/foreach.n
index be7a6fb..654c0cf 100644
--- a/doc/foreach.n
+++ b/doc/foreach.n
@@ -35,9 +35,9 @@ In the general case there can be more than one value list
 and each value list can be associated with a list of loop variables
 (e.g., \fIvarlist1\fR and \fIvarlist2\fR).
 During each iteration of the loop
-the variables of each \fIvarlist\fP are assigned
-consecutive values from the corresponding \fIlist\fP.
-Values in each \fIlist\fP are used in order from first to last,
+the variables of each \fIvarlist\fR are assigned
+consecutive values from the corresponding \fIlist\fR.
+Values in each \fIlist\fR are used in order from first to last,
 and each value is used exactly once.
 The total number of loop iterations is large enough to use
 up all the values from all the value lists.
@@ -49,37 +49,48 @@ The \fBbreak\fR and \fBcontinue\fR statements may be
 invoked inside \fIbody\fR, with the same effect as in the \fBfor\fR
 command.  \fBForeach\fR returns an empty string.
 .SH EXAMPLES
+This loop prints every value in a list together with the square and
+cube of the value:
+.CS
+'\" Maintainers: notice the tab hacking below!
+.ta 3i
+set values {1 3 5 7 2 4 6 8}	;# Odd numbers first, for fun!
+puts "Value\etSquare\etCube"	;# Neat-looking header
+\fBforeach\fR x $values {	;# Now loop and print...
+    puts " $x\et [expr {$x**2}]\et [expr {$x**3}]"
+}
+.CE
 .PP
 The following loop uses i and j as loop variables to iterate over
 pairs of elements of a single list.
-.DS
+.CS
 set x {}
 \fBforeach\fR {i j} {a b c d e f} {
     lappend x $j $i
 }
 # The value of x is "b a d c f e"
 # There are 3 iterations of the loop.
-.DE
+.CE
 .PP
 The next loop uses i and j to iterate over two lists in parallel.
-.DS
+.CS
 set x {}
 \fBforeach\fR i {a b c} j {d e f g} {
     lappend x $i $j
 }
 # The value of x is "a d b e c f {} g"
 # There are 4 iterations of the loop.
-.DE
+.CE
 .PP
 The two forms are combined in the following example.
-.DS
+.CS
 set x {}
 \fBforeach\fR i {a b c} {j k} {d e f g} {
     lappend x $i $j $k
 }
 # The value of x is "a d e b f g c {} {}"
 # There are 3 iterations of the loop.
-.DE
+.CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 for(n), while(n), break(n), continue(n)
diff --git a/doc/format.n b/doc/format.n
index 0dea667..f842f16 100644
--- a/doc/format.n
+++ b/doc/format.n
@@ -17,9 +17,8 @@ format \- Format a string in the style of sprintf
 
 .SH INTRODUCTION
 .PP
-This command generates a formatted string in the same way as the
-ANSI C \fBsprintf\fR procedure (it uses \fBsprintf\fR in its
-implementation).
+This command generates a formatted string in a fashion similar to the
+ANSI C \fBsprintf\fR procedure.
 \fIFormatString\fR indicates how to format the result, using
 \fB%\fR conversion specifiers as in \fBsprintf\fR, and the additional
 arguments, if any, provide values to be substituted into the result.
@@ -42,15 +41,15 @@ of all of the conversion specifiers in \fIformatString\fR.
 .PP
 Each conversion specifier may contain up to six different parts:
 an XPG3 position specifier,
-a set of flags, a minimum field width, a precision, a length modifier,
+a set of flags, a minimum field width, a precision, a size modifier,
 and a conversion character.
 Any of these fields may be omitted except for the conversion character.
 The fields that are present must appear in the order given above.
 The paragraphs below discuss each of these fields in turn.
 .PP
 If the \fB%\fR is followed by a decimal number and a \fB$\fR, as in
-``\fB%2$d\fR'', then the value to convert is not taken from the
-next sequential argument.
+.QW \fB%2$d\fR ,
+then the value to convert is not taken from the next sequential argument.
 Instead, it is taken from the argument indicated by the number,
 where 1 corresponds to the first \fIarg\fR.
 If the conversion specifier requires multiple arguments because
@@ -74,8 +73,8 @@ Specifies that a number should always be printed with a sign,
 even if positive.
 .TP 10
 \fIspace\fR
-Specifies that a space should be added to the beginning of the 
-number if the first character isn't a sign.
+Specifies that a space should be added to the beginning of the
+number if the first character is not a sign.
 .TP 10
 \fB0\fR
 Specifies that the number should be padded on the left with 
@@ -92,7 +91,7 @@ has a decimal point.
 For \fBg\fR and \fBG\fR conversions it specifies that 
 trailing zeroes should not be removed.
 .PP
-The third portion of a conversion specifier is a number giving a
+The third portion of a conversion specifier is a decimal number giving a
 minimum field width for this conversion.
 It is typically used to make columns line up in tabular printouts.
 If the converted argument contains fewer characters than the
@@ -104,7 +103,7 @@ may be used to specify padding with zeroes on the left or with
 spaces on the right, respectively.
 If the minimum field width is specified as \fB*\fR rather than
 a number, then the next argument to the \fBformat\fR command
-determines the minimum field width; it must be a numeric string.
+determines the minimum field width; it must be an integer value.
 .PP
 The fourth portion of a conversion specifier is a precision,
 which consists of a period followed by a number.
@@ -123,17 +122,19 @@ If the precision is specified with \fB*\fR rather than a number
 then the next argument to the \fBformat\fR command determines the precision;
 it must be a numeric string.
 .PP
-The fifth part of a conversion specifier is a length modifier,
-which must be \fBh\fR or \fBl\fR.
-If it is \fBh\fR it specifies that the numeric value should be
-truncated to a 16-bit value before converting.
-This option is rarely useful.
-.VS 8.4
-If it is \fBl\fR it specifies that the numeric value should be (at
-least) a 64-bit value.  If neither \fBh\fR nor \fBl\fR are present,
-numeric values are interpreted as being values of the width of the
-native machine word, as described by \fBtcl_platform(wordSize)\fR.
-.VE
+The fifth part of a conversion specifier is a size modifier,
+which must be \fBll\fR, \fBh\fR, or \fBl\fR.
+If it is \fBll\fR it specifies that an integer value is taken
+without truncation for conversion to a formatted substring.
+If it is \fBh\fR it specifies that an integer value is
+truncated to a 16-bit range before converting.  This option is rarely useful.
+If it is \fBl\fR it specifies that the integer value is 
+truncated to the same range as that produced by the \fBwide()\fR
+function of the \fBexpr\fR command (at least a 64-bit range).
+If neither \fBh\fR nor \fBl\fR are present, the integer value is
+truncated to the same range as that produced by the \fBint()\fR
+function of the \fBexpr\fR command (at least a 32-bit range, but
+determined by the value of \fBtcl_platform(wordSize)\fR).
 .PP
 The last thing in a conversion specifier is an alphabetic character
 that determines what kind of conversion to perform.
@@ -146,33 +147,32 @@ Convert integer to signed decimal string.
 Convert integer to unsigned decimal string.
 .TP 10
 \fBi\fR
-Convert integer to signed decimal string;  the integer may either be
-in decimal, in octal (with a leading \fB0\fR) or in hexadecimal
-(with a leading \fB0x\fR).
+Convert integer to signed decimal string (equivalent to \fBd\fR).
 .TP 10
 \fBo\fR
 Convert integer to unsigned octal string.
 .TP 10
 \fBx\fR or \fBX\fR
 Convert integer to unsigned hexadecimal string, using digits
-``0123456789abcdef'' for \fBx\fR and ``0123456789ABCDEF'' for \fBX\fR).
-.VS
+.QW 0123456789abcdef
+for \fBx\fR and
+.QW 0123456789ABCDEF
+for \fBX\fR).
 .TP 10
 \fBc\fR
 Convert integer to the Unicode character it represents.
-.VE
 .TP 10
 \fBs\fR
 No conversion; just insert string.
 .TP 10
 \fBf\fR
-Convert floating-point number to signed decimal string of 
+Convert number to signed decimal string of 
 the form \fIxx.yyy\fR, where the number of \fIy\fR's is determined by 
 the precision (default: 6).
 If the precision is 0 then no decimal point is output.
 .TP 10
-\fBe\fR or \fBe\fR
-Convert floating-point number to scientific notation in the 
+\fBe\fR or \fBE\fR
+Convert number to scientific notation in the 
 form \fIx.yyy\fBe\(+-\fIzz\fR, where the number of \fIy\fR's is determined 
 by the precision (default: 6).
 If the precision is 0 then no decimal point is output.
@@ -181,40 +181,34 @@ printed instead of \fBe\fR.
 .TP 10
 \fBg\fR or \fBG\fR
 If the exponent is less than \-4 or greater than or equal to the 
-precision, then convert floating-point number as for \fB%e\fR or 
+precision, then convert number as for \fB%e\fR or 
 \fB%E\fR.
 Otherwise convert as for \fB%f\fR.
 Trailing zeroes and a trailing decimal point are omitted.
 .TP 10
 \fB%\fR
 No conversion: just insert \fB%\fR.
-.LP
-For the numerical conversions the argument being converted must
-be an integer or floating-point string; format converts the argument
-to binary and then converts it back to a string according to 
-the conversion specifier.
 .SH "DIFFERENCES FROM ANSI SPRINTF"
 .PP
 The behavior of the format command is the same as the
 ANSI C \fBsprintf\fR procedure except for the following
 differences:
 .IP [1]
-\fB%p\fR and \fB%n\fR specifiers are not currently supported.
+\fB%p\fR and \fB%n\fR specifiers are not supported.
 .IP [2]
-For \fB%c\fR conversions the argument must be a decimal string,
+For \fB%c\fR conversions the argument must be an integer value,
 which will then be converted to the corresponding character value.
 .IP [3]
-The \fBl\fR modifier
-.VS 8.4
-is ignored for real values and on 64-bit platforms, which are always
-converted as if the \fBl\fR modifier were present (i.e. the types
-\fBdouble\fR and \fBlong\fR are used for the internal representation
-of real and integer values, respectively).
-.VE 8.4
-If the \fBh\fR modifier is specified then integer values are truncated
-to \fBshort\fR before conversion.  Both \fBh\fR and \fBl\fR modifiers
-are ignored on all other conversions.
+The size modifiers are ignored when formatting floating-point values.
+The \fBll\fR modifier has no \fBsprintf\fR counterpart.
 .SH EXAMPLES
+Convert the numeric value of a UNICODE character to the character
+itself:
+.CS
+set value 120
+set char [\fBformat\fR %c $value]
+.CE
+.PP
 Convert the output of \fBtime\fR into seconds to an accuracy of
 hundredths of a second:
 .CS
@@ -235,7 +229,7 @@ reordering the data values passed to \fBformat\fR:
 set fmt1 "Today, %d shares in %s were bought at $%.2f each"
 puts [\fBformat\fR $fmt1 123 "Global BigCorp" 19.37]
 
-set fmt2 "Bought %2\\$s equity ($%3$.2f x %1\\$d) today"
+set fmt2 "Bought %2\e$s equity ($%3$.2f x %1\e$d) today"
 puts [\fBformat\fR $fmt2 123 "Global BigCorp" 19.37]
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -261,9 +255,7 @@ for {set i 0} {$i<=20} {incr i} {
 # Finish off by printing the separator again
 puts $sep
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 scan(n), sprintf(3), string(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 conversion specifier, format, sprintf, string, substitution
diff --git a/doc/gets.n b/doc/gets.n
index d61d072..bed7e32 100644
--- a/doc/gets.n
+++ b/doc/gets.n
@@ -21,13 +21,11 @@ This command reads the next line from \fIchannelId\fR, returns everything
 in the line up to (but not including) the end-of-line character(s), and
 discards the end-of-line character(s).
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as the
 Tcl standard input channel (\fBstdin\fR), the return value from an
 invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or the result of a channel
 creation command provided by a Tcl extension. The channel must have
 been opened for input.
-.VE
 .PP
 If \fIvarName\fR is omitted the line is returned as the result of the
 command.
diff --git a/doc/glob.n b/doc/glob.n
index 6f45d90..c257983 100644
--- a/doc/glob.n
+++ b/doc/glob.n
@@ -17,14 +17,17 @@ glob \- Return names of files that match patterns
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-This command performs file name ``globbing'' in a fashion similar to
+This command performs file name
+.QW globbing
+in a fashion similar to
 the csh shell.  It returns a list of the files whose names match any
-of the \fIpattern\fR arguments.
+of the \fIpattern\fR arguments.  No particular order is guaranteed
+in the list, so if a sorted list is required the caller should use 
+\fBlsort\fR.
 .LP
 If the initial arguments to \fBglob\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
 they are treated as switches.  The following switches are
 currently supported:
-.VS 8.3
 .TP
 \fB\-directory\fR \fIdirectory\fR
 Search for files which match the given patterns starting in the given
@@ -35,14 +38,13 @@ characters explicitly.  This option may not be used in conjunction with
 whose names may contain glob-sensitive characters.
 .TP
 \fB\-join\fR
-The remaining pattern arguments are treated as a single pattern
-obtained by joining the arguments with directory separators.
-.VE 8.3
+The remaining pattern arguments, after option processing, are treated
+as a single pattern obtained by joining the arguments with directory
+separators.
 .TP
 \fB\-nocomplain\fR
 Allows an empty list to be returned without error;  without this
 switch an error is returned if the result list would be empty.
-.VS 8.3
 .TP
 \fB\-path\fR \fIpathPrefix\fR
 Search for files with the given \fIpathPrefix\fR where the rest of the name
@@ -100,10 +102,10 @@ The following are equivalent:
 \fBglob */\fR
 .CE
 .RE
-except that the first case doesn't return the trailing ``/'' and
-is more platform independent.
+except that the first case doesn't return the trailing
+.QW /
+and is more platform independent.
 .RE
-.VE 8.3
 .TP
 \fB\-\|\-\fR
 Marks the end of switches.  The argument following this one will
@@ -129,20 +131,35 @@ Matches the character \fIx\fR.
 \fB{\fIa\fB,\fIb\fB,\fI...\fR}
 Matches any of the strings \fIa\fR, \fIb\fR, etc.
 .LP
-On Unix, as with csh, a ``.'' at the beginning of a file's name or just
-after a ``/'' must be matched explicitly or with a {} construct,
-unless the ``-types hidden'' flag is given (since ``.'' at the beginning 
-of a file's name indicates that it is hidden).  On other platforms,
-files beginning with a ``.'' are handled no differently to any others,
-except the special directories ``.'' and ``..'' which must be matched
-explicitly (this is to avoid a recursive pattern like ``glob -join * *
-* *'' from recursing up the directory hierarchy as well as down).
-In addition, all ``/'' characters must be matched explicitly.
+On Unix, as with csh, a
+.QW .
+at the beginning of a file's name or just after a
+.QW /
+must be matched explicitly or with a {} construct, unless the
+\fB\-types hidden\fR flag is given (since
+.QW .
+at the beginning of a file's name indicates that it is hidden).  On
+other platforms, files beginning with a
+.QW .
+are handled no differently to any others, except the special directories
+.QW .
+and
+.QW ..
+which must be matched explicitly (this is to avoid a recursive pattern like
+.QW "glob -join * * * *"
+from recursing up the directory hierarchy as well as down). In addition, all
+.QW /
+characters must be matched explicitly.
 .LP
-If the first character in a \fIpattern\fR is ``~'' then it refers
-to the home directory for the user whose name follows the ``~''.
-If the ``~'' is followed immediately by ``/'' then the value of
-the HOME environment variable is used.
+If the first character in a \fIpattern\fR is
+.QW ~
+then it refers to the home directory for the user whose name follows the
+.QW ~ .
+If the
+.QW ~
+is followed immediately by
+.QW /
+then the value of the HOME environment variable is used.
 .LP
 The \fBglob\fR command differs from csh globbing in two ways.
 First, it does not sort its result list (use the \fBlsort\fR
@@ -152,29 +169,32 @@ exist;  in csh no check for existence is made unless a pattern
 contains a ?, *, or [] construct.
 .LP
 When the \fBglob\fR command returns relative paths whose filenames
-start with a tilde ``~'' (for example through \fBglob *\fR or 
-\fBglob -tails\fR, the returned list will not quote the tilde with
-``./''.  This means care must be taken if those names are later to
+start with a tilde
+.QW ~
+(for example through \fBglob *\fR or \fBglob -tails\fR, the returned
+list will not quote the tilde with
+.QW ./ .
+This means care must be taken if those names are later to
 be used with \fBfile join\fR, to avoid them being interpreted as
 absolute paths pointing to a given user's home directory.
 .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
 .PP
-Unlike other Tcl commands that will accept both network and native
-style names (see the \fBfilename\fR manual entry for details on how
-native and network names are specified), the \fBglob\fR command only
-accepts native names.  
-.TP
 \fBWindows\fR
 .
 For Windows UNC names, the servername and sharename components of the path
 may not contain ?, *, or [] constructs.  On Windows NT, if \fIpattern\fR is
-of the form ``\fB~\fIusername\fB@\fIdomain\fR'' it refers to the home
+of the form
+.QW \fB~\fIusername\fB@\fIdomain\fR ,
+it refers to the home
 directory of the user whose account information resides on the specified NT
 domain server.  Otherwise, user account information is obtained from
 the local computer.  On Windows 95 and 98, \fBglob\fR accepts patterns
-like ``.../'' and ``..../'' for successively higher up parent directories.
-
-.
+like
+.QW .../
+and
+.QW ..../
+for successively higher up parent directories.
+.PP
 Since the backslash character has a special meaning to the glob 
 command, glob patterns containing Windows style path separators need 
 special care. The pattern \fIC:\e\efoo\e\e*\fR is interpreted as 
@@ -184,13 +204,6 @@ interpreted as a wildcard character. One solution to this problem is
 to use the Unix style forward slash as a path separator. Windows style 
 paths can be converted to Unix style paths with the command \fBfile
 join $path\fR (or \fBfile normalize $path\fR in Tcl 8.4). 
-.TP 
-\fBMacintosh\fR 
-. 
-When using the options, \fB\-directory\fR, \fB\-join\fR or \fB\-path\fR, glob
-assumes the directory separator for the entire pattern is the standard
-``:''.  When not using these options, glob examines each pattern argument
-and uses ``/'' unless the pattern contains a ``:''.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Find all the Tcl files in the current directory:
 .CS
@@ -208,7 +221,12 @@ Find all subdirectories of the current directory:
 \fBglob\fR \-type d *
 .CE
 .PP
-Find all files whose name contains an "a", a "b" or the sequence "cde":
+Find all files whose name contains an
+.QW a ,
+a
+.QW b
+or the sequence
+.QW cde :
 .CS
 \fBglob\fR \-type f *{a,b,cde}*
 .CE
diff --git a/doc/global.n b/doc/global.n
index b0e4389..c9d7a36 100644
--- a/doc/global.n
+++ b/doc/global.n
@@ -26,6 +26,10 @@ in the list returned by \fBinfo locals\fR).
 If \fIvarname\fR contains namespace qualifiers, the local variable's name is
 the unqualified name of the global variable, as determined by the
 \fBnamespace tail\fR command. 
+.PP
+\fIvarname\fR is always treated as the name of a variable, not an
+array element.  An error is returned if the name looks like an array element,
+such as \fBa(b)\fR.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 This procedure sets the namespace variable \fI::a::x\fR
 .CS
@@ -43,7 +47,7 @@ opened with \fBsocket\fR or as part of a counted HTTP response).
 .CS
 proc accum {string} {
     \fBglobal\fR accumulator
-    append accumulator $string \\n
+    append accumulator $string \en
 }
 .CE
 
diff --git a/doc/history.n b/doc/history.n
index 0ce7c4c..ba507b4 100644
--- a/doc/history.n
+++ b/doc/history.n
@@ -14,20 +14,20 @@ history \- Manipulate the history list
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBhistory \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The \fBhistory\fR command performs one of several operations related to
 recently-executed commands recorded in a history list.  Each of
-these recorded commands is referred to as an ``event''.  When
-specifying an event to the \fBhistory\fR command, the following
+these recorded commands is referred to as an
+.QW event .
+When specifying an event to the \fBhistory\fR command, the following
 forms may be used:
 .IP [1]
 A number:  if positive, it refers to the event with
 that number (all events are numbered starting at 1).  If the number
 is negative, it selects an event relative to the current event
 (\fB\-1\fR refers to the previous event, \fB\-2\fR to the one before that, and
-so on).  Event \fB0\fP refers to the current event.
+so on).  Event \fB0\fR refers to the current event.
 .IP [2]
 A string:  selects the most recent event that matches the string.
 An event is considered to match the string either if the string is
@@ -43,7 +43,7 @@ as \fBhistory info\fR, described below.
 \fBhistory add\fI command \fR?\fBexec\fR?
 Adds the \fIcommand\fR argument to the history list as a new event.  If
 \fBexec\fR is specified (or abbreviated) then the command is also
-executed and its result is returned.  If \fBexec\fR isn't specified
+executed and its result is returned.  If \fBexec\fR is not specified
 then an empty string is returned as result.
 .TP
 \fBhistory change\fI newValue\fR ?\fIevent\fR?
@@ -87,16 +87,16 @@ revision:  see below for details.
 .PP
 Pre-8.0 Tcl had a complex history revision mechanism.
 The current mechanism is more limited, and the old
-history operations \fBsubstitute\fP and \fBwords\fP have been removed.
-(As a consolation, the \fBclear\fP operation was added.)
+history operations \fBsubstitute\fR and \fBwords\fR have been removed.
+(As a consolation, the \fBclear\fR operation was added.)
 .PP
-The history option \fBredo\fR results in much simpler ``history revision''.
+The history option \fBredo\fR results in much simpler
+.QW "history revision" .
 When this option is invoked then the most recent event
 is modified to eliminate the history command and replace it with
 the result of the history command.
 If you want to redo an event without modifying history, then use
-the \fBevent\fP operation to retrieve some event,
-and the \fBadd\fP operation to add it to history and execute it.
-
+the \fBevent\fR operation to retrieve some event,
+and the \fBadd\fR operation to add it to history and execute it.
 .SH KEYWORDS
 event, history, record
diff --git a/doc/http.n b/doc/http.n
index a563b5d..77dfc7f 100644
--- a/doc/http.n
+++ b/doc/http.n
@@ -7,21 +7,22 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH "http" n 2.5 http "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.TH "http" n 2.7 http "Tcl Bundled Packages"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-http \- Client-side implementation of the HTTP/1.0 protocol.
+http \- Client-side implementation of the HTTP/1.1 protocol
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpackage require http ?2.5?\fR
+\fBpackage require http ?2.7?\fR
+.\" See Also -useragent option documentation in body!
 .sp
 \fB::http::config \fI?options?\fR
 .sp
 \fB::http::geturl \fIurl ?options?\fR
 .sp
-\fB::http::formatQuery\fP \fIkey value\fP ?\fIkey value\fP ...?
+\fB::http::formatQuery\fR \fIkey value\fR ?\fIkey value\fR ...?
 .sp
-\fB::http::reset\fP \fItoken\fP ?\fIwhy\fP?
+\fB::http::reset\fR \fItoken\fR ?\fIwhy\fR?
 .sp
 \fB::http::wait \fItoken\fR
 .sp
@@ -45,12 +46,11 @@ http \- Client-side implementation of the HTTP/1.0 protocol.
 .sp
 \fB::http::unregister \fIproto\fR
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-The \fBhttp\fR package provides the client side of the HTTP/1.0
+The \fBhttp\fR package provides the client side of the HTTP/1.1
 protocol.  The package implements the GET, POST, and HEAD operations
-of HTTP/1.0.  It allows configuration of a proxy host to get through
+of HTTP/1.1.  It allows configuration of a proxy host to get through
 firewalls.  The package is compatible with the \fBSafesock\fR security
 policy, so it can be used by untrusted applets to do URL fetching from
 a restricted set of hosts. This package can be extended to support
@@ -63,9 +63,9 @@ is performed.
 The return value of \fB::http::geturl\fR is a token for the transaction.
 The value is also the name of an array in the ::http namespace
 that contains state information about the transaction.  The elements
-of this array are described in the STATE ARRAY section.
+of this array are described in the \fBSTATE ARRAY\fR section.
 .PP
-If the \fB-command\fP option is specified, then
+If the \fB\-command\fR option is specified, then
 the HTTP operation is done in the background.
 \fB::http::geturl\fR returns immediately after generating the
 HTTP request and the callback is invoked
@@ -75,7 +75,7 @@ applications, the caller can use \fB::http::wait\fR after calling
 \fB::http::geturl\fR to start the event loop.
 .SH COMMANDS
 .TP
-\fB::http::config\fP ?\fIoptions\fR?
+\fB::http::config\fR ?\fIoptions\fR?
 The \fB::http::config\fR command is used to set and query the name of the
 proxy server and port, and the User-Agent name used in the HTTP
 requests.  If no options are specified, then the current configuration
@@ -85,20 +85,21 @@ that setting is returned.  Otherwise, the options should be a set of
 flags and values that define the configuration:
 .RS
 .TP
-\fB\-accept\fP \fImimetypes\fP
+\fB\-accept\fR \fImimetypes\fR
 The Accept header of the request.  The default is */*, which means that
 all types of documents are accepted.  Otherwise you can supply a 
 comma-separated list of mime type patterns that you are
-willing to receive.  For example, "image/gif, image/jpeg, text/*".
+willing to receive.  For example,
+.QW "image/gif, image/jpeg, text/*" .
 .TP
-\fB\-proxyhost\fP \fIhostname\fP
+\fB\-proxyhost\fR \fIhostname\fR
 The name of the proxy host, if any.  If this value is the
 empty string, the URL host is contacted directly.
 .TP
-\fB\-proxyport\fP \fInumber\fP
+\fB\-proxyport\fR \fInumber\fR
 The proxy port number.
 .TP
-\fB\-proxyfilter\fP \fIcommand\fP
+\fB\-proxyfilter\fR \fIcommand\fR
 The command is a callback that is made during
 \fB::http::geturl\fR
 to determine if a proxy is required for a given host.  One argument, a
@@ -109,7 +110,7 @@ an empty list.  The default filter returns the values of the
 \fB\-proxyhost\fR and \fB\-proxyport\fR settings if they are
 non-empty.
 .TP
-\fB\-urlencoding\fP \fIencoding\fP
+\fB\-urlencoding\fR \fIencoding\fR
 The \fIencoding\fR used for creating the x-url-encoded URLs with
 \fB::http::formatQuery\fR.  The default is \fButf-8\fR, as specified by RFC
 2718.  Prior to http 2.5 this was unspecified, and that behavior can be
@@ -118,45 +119,46 @@ returned by specifying the empty string (\fB{}\fR), although
 \fB::http::formatQuery\fR throwing an error processing non-latin-1
 characters.
 .TP
-\fB\-useragent\fP \fIstring\fP
-The value of the User-Agent header in the HTTP request.  The default
-is \fB"Tcl http client package 2.4."\fR
+\fB\-useragent\fR \fIstring\fR
+The value of the User-Agent header in the HTTP request.  The default is
+.QW "\fBTcl http client package 2.7\fR" .
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB::http::geturl\fP \fIurl\fP ?\fIoptions\fP? 
+\fB::http::geturl\fR \fIurl\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? 
 The \fB::http::geturl\fR command is the main procedure in the package.
 The \fB\-query\fR option causes a POST operation and
 the \fB\-validate\fR option causes a HEAD operation;
 otherwise, a GET operation is performed.  The \fB::http::geturl\fR command
 returns a \fItoken\fR value that can be used to get
-information about the transaction.  See the STATE ARRAY and ERRORS section for
+information about the transaction.  See the \fBSTATE ARRAY\fR and
+\fBERRORS\fR section for
 details.  The \fB::http::geturl\fR command blocks until the operation
 completes, unless the \fB\-command\fR option specifies a callback
 that is invoked when the HTTP transaction completes.
 \fB::http::geturl\fR takes several options:
 .RS
 .TP
-\fB\-binary\fP \fIboolean\fP
+\fB\-binary\fR \fIboolean\fR
 Specifies whether to force interpreting the URL data as binary.  Normally
 this is auto-detected (anything not beginning with a \fBtext\fR content
 type or whose content encoding is \fBgzip\fR or \fBcompress\fR is
 considered binary data).
 .TP
-\fB\-blocksize\fP \fIsize\fP
+\fB\-blocksize\fR \fIsize\fR
 The block size used when reading the URL.
 At most \fIsize\fR bytes are read at once.  After each block, a call to the
 \fB\-progress\fR callback is made (if that option is specified).
 .TP
-\fB\-channel\fP \fIname\fP
+\fB\-channel\fR \fIname\fR
 Copy the URL contents to channel \fIname\fR instead of saving it in
 \fBstate(body)\fR.
 .TP
-\fB\-command\fP \fIcallback\fP
-Invoke \fIcallback\fP after the HTTP transaction completes.
-This option causes \fB::http::geturl\fP to return immediately.
-The \fIcallback\fP gets an additional argument that is the \fItoken\fR returned
+\fB\-command\fR \fIcallback\fR
+Invoke \fIcallback\fR after the HTTP transaction completes.
+This option causes \fB::http::geturl\fR to return immediately.
+The \fIcallback\fR gets an additional argument that is the \fItoken\fR returned
 from \fB::http::geturl\fR. This token is the name of an array that is
-described in the STATE ARRAY section.  Here is a template for the
+described in the \fBSTATE ARRAY\fR section.  Here is a template for the
 callback:
 .RS
 .CS
@@ -167,27 +169,30 @@ proc httpCallback {token} {
 .CE
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB\-handler\fP \fIcallback\fP
-Invoke \fIcallback\fP whenever HTTP data is available; if present, nothing
+\fB\-handler\fR \fIcallback\fR
+Invoke \fIcallback\fR whenever HTTP data is available; if present, nothing
 else will be done with the HTTP data.  This procedure gets two additional
 arguments: the socket for the HTTP data and the \fItoken\fR returned from
-\fB::http::geturl\fR.  The token is the name of a global array that is described
-in the STATE ARRAY section.  The procedure is expected to return the number
-of bytes read from the socket.  Here is a template for the callback:
+\fB::http::geturl\fR.  The token is the name of a global array that is
+described in the \fBSTATE ARRAY\fR section.  The procedure is expected
+to return the number of bytes read from the socket.  Here is a
+template for the callback:
 .RS
 .CS
 proc httpHandlerCallback {socket token} {
     upvar #0 $token state
     # Access socket, and state as a Tcl array
+    # For example...
     ...
-    (example: set data [read $socket 1000];set nbytes [string length $data])
+    set data [read $socket 1000]
+    set nbytes [string length $data]
     ...
-    return nbytes
+    return $nbytes
 }
 .CE
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB\-headers\fP \fIkeyvaluelist\fP
+\fB\-headers\fR \fIkeyvaluelist\fR
 This option is used to add extra headers to the HTTP request.  The
 \fIkeyvaluelist\fR argument must be a list with an even number of
 elements that alternate between keys and values.  The keys become
@@ -199,7 +204,20 @@ HTTP request:
 Pragma: no-cache
 .CE
 .TP
-\fB\-progress\fP \fIcallback\fP
+\fB\-keepalive\fR \fIboolean\fR
+If true, attempt to keep the connection open for servicing
+multiple requests.  Default is 0.
+.TP
+\fB\-method\fR \fItype\fR
+Force the HTTP request method to \fItype\fR. \fB::http::geturl\fR will
+auto-select GET, POST or HEAD based on other options, but this option
+enables choices like PUT and DELETE for webdav support.
+.TP
+\fB\-myaddr\fR \fIaddress\fR
+Pass an specific local address to the underlying \fBsocket\fR call in case
+multiple interfaces are available.
+.TP
+\fB\-progress\fR \fIcallback\fR
 The \fIcallback\fR is made after each transfer of data from the URL.
 The callback gets three additional arguments: the \fItoken\fR from
 \fB::http::geturl\fR, the expected total size of the contents from the
@@ -215,13 +233,18 @@ proc httpProgress {token total current} {
 .CE
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB\-query\fP \fIquery\fP
+\fB\-protocol\fR \fIversion\fR
+Select the HTTP protocol version to use. This should be 1.0 or 1.1 (the
+default). Should only be necessary for servers that do not understand or
+otherwise complain about HTTP/1.1.
+.TP
+\fB\-query\fR \fIquery\fR
 This flag causes \fB::http::geturl\fR to do a POST request that passes the
 \fIquery\fR to the server. The \fIquery\fR must be an x-url-encoding
 formatted query.  The \fB::http::formatQuery\fR procedure can be used to
 do the formatting.
 .TP
-\fB\-queryblocksize\fP \fIsize\fP
+\fB\-queryblocksize\fR \fIsize\fR
 The block size used when posting query data to the URL.
 At most 
 \fIsize\fR
@@ -229,103 +252,106 @@ bytes are written at once.  After each block, a call to the
 \fB\-queryprogress\fR
 callback is made (if that option is specified).
 .TP
-\fB\-querychannel\fP \fIchannelID\fP
+\fB\-querychannel\fR \fIchannelID\fR
 This flag causes \fB::http::geturl\fR to do a POST request that passes the
 data contained in \fIchannelID\fR to the server. The data contained in
 \fIchannelID\fR must be an x-url-encoding
-formatted query unless the \fB\-type\fP option below is used.
+formatted query unless the \fB\-type\fR option below is used.
 If a Content-Length header is not specified via the \fB\-headers\fR options,
 \fB::http::geturl\fR attempts to determine the size of the post data
 in order to create that header.  If it is
 unable to determine the size, it returns an error.
 .TP
-\fB\-queryprogress\fP \fIcallback\fP
+\fB\-queryprogress\fR \fIcallback\fR
 The \fIcallback\fR is made after each transfer of data to the URL
 (i.e. POST) and acts exactly like the \fB\-progress\fR option (the
 callback format is the same).
 .TP
-\fB\-timeout\fP \fImilliseconds\fP
+\fB\-strict\fR \fIboolean\fR
+Whether to enforce RFC 3986 URL validation on the request.  Default is 1.
+.TP
+\fB\-timeout\fR \fImilliseconds\fR
 If \fImilliseconds\fR is non-zero, then \fB::http::geturl\fR sets up a timeout
 to occur after the specified number of milliseconds.
-A timeout results in a call to \fB::http::reset\fP and to
-the \fB-command\fP callback, if specified.
-The return value of \fB::http::status\fP is \fBtimeout\fP
+A timeout results in a call to \fB::http::reset\fR and to
+the \fB\-command\fR callback, if specified.
+The return value of \fB::http::status\fR is \fBtimeout\fR
 after a timeout has occurred.
 .TP
-\fB\-type\fP \fImime-type\fP
+\fB\-type\fR \fImime-type\fR
 Use \fImime-type\fR as the \fBContent-Type\fR value, instead of the
 default value (\fBapplication/x-www-form-urlencoded\fR) during a
 POST operation.
 .TP
-\fB\-validate\fP \fIboolean\fP
+\fB\-validate\fR \fIboolean\fR
 If \fIboolean\fR is non-zero, then \fB::http::geturl\fR does an HTTP HEAD
 request.  This request returns meta information about the URL, but the
 contents are not returned.  The meta information is available in the
-\fBstate(meta) \fR variable after the transaction.  See the STATE
-ARRAY section for details.
+\fBstate(meta) \fR variable after the transaction.  See the
+\fBSTATE ARRAY\fR section for details.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB::http::formatQuery\fP \fIkey value\fP ?\fIkey value\fP ...?
+\fB::http::formatQuery\fR \fIkey value\fR ?\fIkey value\fR ...?
 This procedure does x-url-encoding of query data.  It takes an even
 number of arguments that are the keys and values of the query.  It
 encodes the keys and values, and generates one string that has the
 proper & and = separators.  The result is suitable for the
 \fB\-query\fR value passed to \fB::http::geturl\fR.
 .TP
-\fB::http::reset\fP \fItoken\fP ?\fIwhy\fP?
+\fB::http::reset\fR \fItoken\fR ?\fIwhy\fR?
 This command resets the HTTP transaction identified by \fItoken\fR, if
-any.  This sets the \fBstate(status)\fP value to \fIwhy\fP, which defaults to \fBreset\fR, and then calls the registered \fB\-command\fR callback.
+any.  This sets the \fBstate(status)\fR value to \fIwhy\fR, which defaults to \fBreset\fR, and then calls the registered \fB\-command\fR callback.
 .TP
-\fB::http::wait\fP \fItoken\fP
+\fB::http::wait\fR \fItoken\fR
 This is a convenience procedure that blocks and waits for the
 transaction to complete.  This only works in trusted code because it
-uses \fBvwait\fR.  Also, it's not useful for the case where
-\fB::http::geturl\fP is called \fIwithout\fP the \fB-command\fP option
-because in this case the \fB::http::geturl\fP call doesn't return
-until the HTTP transaction is complete, and thus there's nothing to
+uses \fBvwait\fR.  Also, it is not useful for the case where
+\fB::http::geturl\fR is called \fIwithout\fR the \fB\-command\fR option
+because in this case the \fB::http::geturl\fR call does not return
+until the HTTP transaction is complete, and thus there is nothing to
 wait for.
 .TP
-\fB::http::data\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBbody\fP element
+\fB::http::data\fR \fItoken\fR
+This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBbody\fR element
 (i.e., the URL data) of the state array.
 .TP
-\fB::http::error\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBerror\fP element
+\fB::http::error\fR \fItoken\fR
+This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBerror\fR element
 of the state array.
 .TP
-\fB::http::status\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBstatus\fP element of
+\fB::http::status\fR \fItoken\fR
+This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBstatus\fR element of
 the state array.
 .TP
-\fB::http::code\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBhttp\fP element of the
+\fB::http::code\fR \fItoken\fR
+This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBhttp\fR element of the
 state array.
 .TP
-\fB::http::ncode\fP \fItoken\fP
+\fB::http::ncode\fR \fItoken\fR
 This is a convenience procedure that returns just the numeric return
-code (200, 404, etc.) from the \fBhttp\fP element of the state array.
+code (200, 404, etc.) from the \fBhttp\fR element of the state array.
 .TP
-\fB::http::size\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBcurrentsize\fP
+\fB::http::size\fR \fItoken\fR
+This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBcurrentsize\fR
 element of the state array, which represents the number of bytes
-received from the URL in the \fB::http::geturl\fP call.
+received from the URL in the \fB::http::geturl\fR call.
 .TP
-\fB::http::meta\fP \fItoken\fP
-This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBmeta\fP
+\fB::http::meta\fR \fItoken\fR
+This is a convenience procedure that returns the \fBmeta\fR
 element of the state array which contains the HTTP response
 headers. See below for an explanation of this element.
 .TP
-\fB::http::cleanup\fP \fItoken\fP
+\fB::http::cleanup\fR \fItoken\fR
 This procedure cleans up the state associated with the connection
-identified by \fItoken\fP.  After this call, the procedures
-like \fB::http::data\fP cannot be used to get information
-about the operation.  It is \fIstrongly\fP recommended that you call
-this function after you're done with a given HTTP request.  Not doing
+identified by \fItoken\fR.  After this call, the procedures
+like \fB::http::data\fR cannot be used to get information
+about the operation.  It is \fIstrongly\fR recommended that you call
+this function after you are done with a given HTTP request.  Not doing
 so will result in memory not being freed, and if your app calls
-\fB::http::geturl\fP enough times, the memory leak could cause a
+\fB::http::geturl\fR enough times, the memory leak could cause a
 performance hit...or worse.
 .TP
-\fB::http::register\fP \fIproto port command\fP
+\fB::http::register\fR \fIproto port command\fR
 This procedure allows one to provide custom HTTP transport types
 such as HTTPS, by registering a prefix, the default port, and the
 command to execute to create the Tcl \fBchannel\fR. E.g.:
@@ -340,12 +366,11 @@ set token [::http::geturl https://my.secure.site/]
 .CE
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB::http::unregister\fP \fIproto\fP
+\fB::http::unregister\fR \fIproto\fR
 This procedure unregisters a protocol handler that was previously
 registered via \fB::http::register\fR.
-
-.SH "ERRORS"
-The \fB::http::geturl\fP procedure will raise errors in the following cases:
+.SH ERRORS
+The \fB::http::geturl\fR procedure will raise errors in the following cases:
 invalid command line options,
 an invalid URL,
 a URL on a non-existent host,
@@ -354,60 +379,59 @@ These errors mean that it
 cannot even start the network transaction.
 It will also raise an error if it gets an I/O error while
 writing out the HTTP request header.
-For synchronous \fB::http::geturl\fP calls (where \fB-command\fP is
+For synchronous \fB::http::geturl\fR calls (where \fB\-command\fR is
 not specified), it will raise an error if it gets an I/O error while
-reading the HTTP reply headers or data.  Because \fB::http::geturl\fP
-doesn't return a token in these cases, it does all the required
-cleanup and there's no issue of your app having to call
-\fB::http::cleanup\fP.
+reading the HTTP reply headers or data.  Because \fB::http::geturl\fR
+does not return a token in these cases, it does all the required
+cleanup and there is no issue of your app having to call
+\fB::http::cleanup\fR.
 .PP
-For asynchronous \fB::http::geturl\fP calls, all of the above error
-situations apply, except that if there's any error while 
-reading the
+For asynchronous \fB::http::geturl\fR calls, all of the above error
+situations apply, except that if there is any error while reading the
 HTTP reply headers or data, no exception is thrown.  This is because
-after writing the HTTP headers, \fB::http::geturl\fP returns, and the
+after writing the HTTP headers, \fB::http::geturl\fR returns, and the
 rest of the HTTP transaction occurs in the background.  The command
 callback can check if any error occurred during the read by calling
-\fB::http::status\fP to check the status and if its \fIerror\fP,
-calling \fB::http::error\fP to get the error message.
+\fB::http::status\fR to check the status and if its \fIerror\fR,
+calling \fB::http::error\fR to get the error message.
 .PP
 Alternatively, if the main program flow reaches a point where it needs
 to know the result of the asynchronous HTTP request, it can call
-\fB::http::wait\fP and then check status and error, just as the
+\fB::http::wait\fR and then check status and error, just as the
 callback does.
 .PP
 In any case, you must still call
-\fB::http::cleanup\fP to delete the state array when you're done.
+\fB::http::cleanup\fR to delete the state array when you are done.
 .PP
 There are other possible results of the HTTP transaction
-determined by examining the status from \fB::http::status\fP.
+determined by examining the status from \fB::http::status\fR.
 These are described below.
 .TP
 ok
-If the HTTP transaction completes entirely, then status will be \fBok\fP.
-However, you should still check the \fB::http::code\fP value to get
-the HTTP status.  The \fB::http::ncode\fP procedure provides just
-the numeric error (e.g., 200, 404 or 500) while the \fB::http::code\fP
-procedure returns a value like "HTTP 404 File not found".
+If the HTTP transaction completes entirely, then status will be \fBok\fR.
+However, you should still check the \fB::http::code\fR value to get
+the HTTP status.  The \fB::http::ncode\fR procedure provides just
+the numeric error (e.g., 200, 404 or 500) while the \fB::http::code\fR
+procedure returns a value like
+.QW "HTTP 404 File not found" .
 .TP
 eof
 If the server closes the socket without replying, then no error
-is raised, but the status of the transaction will be \fBeof\fP.
+is raised, but the status of the transaction will be \fBeof\fR.
 .TP
 error
-The error message will also be stored in the \fBerror\fP status
-array element, accessible via \fB::http::error\fP.
+The error message will also be stored in the \fBerror\fR status
+array element, accessible via \fB::http::error\fR.
 .PP
-Another error possibility is that \fB::http::geturl\fP is unable to
+Another error possibility is that \fB::http::geturl\fR is unable to
 write all the post query data to the server before the server
 responds and closes the socket.
-The error message is saved in the \fBposterror\fP status array
-element and then  \fB::http::geturl\fP attempts to complete the
+The error message is saved in the \fBposterror\fR status array
+element and then  \fB::http::geturl\fR attempts to complete the
 transaction.
 If it can read the server's response
-it will end up with an \fBok\fP status, otherwise it will have
-an \fBeof\fP status.
-
+it will end up with an \fBok\fR status, otherwise it will have
+an \fBeof\fR status.
 .SH "STATE ARRAY"
 The \fB::http::geturl\fR procedure returns a \fItoken\fR that can be used to
 get to the state of the HTTP transaction in the form of a Tcl array.
@@ -417,14 +441,14 @@ upvar #0 $token state
 .CE
 Once the data associated with the URL is no longer needed, the state
 array should be unset to free up storage.
-The \fB::http::cleanup\fP procedure is provided for that purpose.
+The \fB::http::cleanup\fR procedure is provided for that purpose.
 The following elements of
 the array are supported:
 .RS
 .TP
 \fBbody\fR
 The contents of the URL.  This will be empty if the \fB\-channel\fR
-option has been specified.  This value is returned by the \fB::http::data\fP command.
+option has been specified.  This value is returned by the \fB::http::data\fR command.
 .TP
 \fBcharset\fR
 The value of the charset attribute from the \fBContent-Type\fR meta-data
@@ -437,7 +461,7 @@ A copy of the \fBContent-Encoding\fR meta-data value.
 .TP
 \fBcurrentsize\fR
 The current number of bytes fetched from the URL.
-This value is returned by the \fB::http::size\fP command.
+This value is returned by the \fB::http::size\fR command.
 .TP
 \fBerror\fR
 If defined, this is the error string seen when the HTTP transaction
@@ -445,10 +469,10 @@ was aborted.
 .TP
 \fBhttp\fR
 The HTTP status reply from the server.  This value
-is returned by the \fB::http::code\fP command.  The format of this value is:
+is returned by the \fB::http::code\fR command.  The format of this value is:
 .RS
 .CS
-\fIHTTP/1.0 code string\fP
+\fIHTTP/1.1 code string\fR
 .CE
 The \fIcode\fR is a three-digit number defined in the HTTP standard.
 A code of 200 is OK.  Codes beginning with 4 or 5 indicate errors.
@@ -488,7 +512,7 @@ the post query data to the server.
 .TP
 \fBstatus\fR
 Either \fBok\fR, for successful completion, \fBreset\fR for
-user-reset, \fBtimeout\fP if a timeout occurred before the transaction
+user-reset, \fBtimeout\fR if a timeout occurred before the transaction
 could complete, or \fBerror\fR for an error condition.  During the
 transaction this value is the empty string.
 .TP
@@ -506,7 +530,7 @@ The requested URL.
 # Copy a URL to a file and print meta-data
 proc httpcopy { url file {chunk 4096} } {
    set out [open $file w]
-   set token [\fB::http::geturl\fR $url -channel $out \\
+   set token [\fB::http::geturl\fR $url -channel $out \e
           -progress httpCopyProgress -blocksize $chunk]
    close $out
 
@@ -537,9 +561,7 @@ proc httpCopyProgress {args} {
    flush stderr
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 safe(n), socket(n), safesock(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 security policy, socket
diff --git a/doc/if.n b/doc/if.n
index b9e9219..d84cf08 100644
--- a/doc/if.n
+++ b/doc/if.n
@@ -30,7 +30,8 @@ then \fBbody2\fR is executed, and so on.
 If none of the expressions evaluates to true then \fIbodyN\fR is
 executed.
 The \fBthen\fR and \fBelse\fR arguments are optional
-``noise words'' to make the command easier to read.
+.QW "noise words"
+to make the command easier to read.
 There may be any number of \fBelseif\fR clauses, including zero.
 \fIBodyN\fR may also be omitted as long as \fBelse\fR is omitted too.
 The return value from the command is the result of the body script
diff --git a/doc/incr.n b/doc/incr.n
index c98d795..72b3ff8 100644
--- a/doc/incr.n
+++ b/doc/incr.n
@@ -24,6 +24,12 @@ integer) is added to the value of variable \fIvarName\fR;  otherwise
 1 is added to \fIvarName\fR.
 The new value is stored as a decimal string in variable \fIvarName\fR
 and also returned as result.
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+Starting with the Tcl 8.5 release, the variable \fIvarName\fR passed
+to \fBincr\fR may be unset, and in that case, it will be set to
+the value \fIincrement\fR or to the default increment value of \fB1\fR.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Add one to the contents of the variable \fIx\fR:
 .CS
@@ -42,7 +48,7 @@ variable \fIx\fR:
 .CE
 .PP
 Add nothing at all to the variable \fIx\fR (often useful for checking
-whether an argument to a procedure is actually numeric and generating
+whether an argument to a procedure is actually integral and generating
 an error if it is not):
 .CS
 \fBincr\fR x 0
diff --git a/doc/info.n b/doc/info.n
index 1b11397..fae0d43 100644
--- a/doc/info.n
+++ b/doc/info.n
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ info \- Return information about the state of the Tcl interpreter
 .PP
 This command provides information about various internals of the Tcl
 interpreter.
-The legal \fIoption\fR's (which may be abbreviated) are:
+The legal \fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
 .TP
 \fBinfo args \fIprocname\fR
 Returns a list containing the names of the arguments to procedure
@@ -37,8 +37,11 @@ Returns a count of the total number of commands that have been invoked
 in this interpreter.
 .TP
 \fBinfo commands \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified,
-returns a list of names of all the Tcl commands in the current namespace,
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified,
+.\" Do not move this .VS above the .TP
+.VS 8.5
+returns a list of names of all the Tcl commands visible
+(i.e. executable without using a qualified name) to the current namespace,
 including both the built-in commands written in C and
 the command procedures defined using the \fBproc\fR command.
 If \fIpattern\fR is specified,
@@ -51,21 +54,25 @@ and may have pattern matching special characters
 at the end to specify a set of commands in that namespace.
 If \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name,
 the resulting list of command names has each one qualified with the name
-of the specified namespace.
+of the specified namespace, and only the commands defined in the named
+namespace are returned.
+.\" Technically, most of this hasn't changed; that's mostly just the
+.\" way it always worked. Hardly anyone knew that though.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fBinfo complete \fIcommand\fR
 Returns 1 if \fIcommand\fR is a complete Tcl command in the sense of
 having no unclosed quotes, braces, brackets or array element names.
-If the command doesn't appear to be complete then 0 is returned.
+If the command does not appear to be complete then 0 is returned.
 This command is typically used in line-oriented input environments
 to allow users to type in commands that span multiple lines;  if the
-command isn't complete, the script can delay evaluating it until additional
+command is not complete, the script can delay evaluating it until additional
 lines have been typed to complete the command.
 .TP
 \fBinfo default \fIprocname arg varname\fR
 \fIProcname\fR must be the name of a Tcl command procedure and \fIarg\fR
 must be the name of an argument to that procedure.  If \fIarg\fR
-doesn't have a default value then the command returns \fB0\fR.
+does not have a default value then the command returns \fB0\fR.
 Otherwise it returns \fB1\fR and places the default value of \fIarg\fR
 into variable \fIvarname\fR.
 .TP
@@ -73,18 +80,125 @@ into variable \fIvarname\fR.
 Returns \fB1\fR if the variable named \fIvarName\fR exists in the
 current context (either as a global or local variable) and has been
 defined by being given a value, returns \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.VS 8.4
+.TP
+\fBinfo frame\fR ?\fInumber\fR?
+This command provides access to all frames on the stack, even those
+hidden from \fBinfo level\fR. If \fInumber\fR is not specified, this
+command returns a number giving the frame level of the command. This
+is 1 if the command is invoked at top-level. If \fInumber\fR is
+specified, then the result is a dictionary containing the location
+information for the command at the \fInumber\fRed level on the stack.
+.RS
+.PP
+If \fInumber\fR is positive (> 0) then it selects a particular stack
+level (1 refers to the top-most active command, i.e., \fBinfo frame\fR
+itself, 2 to the command it was called from, and so on); otherwise it
+gives a level relative to the current command (0 refers to the current
+command, i.e., \fBinfo frame\fR itself, -1 to its caller, and so on).
+.PP
+This is similar to how \fBinfo level\fR works, except that this
+subcommand reports all frames, like \fBsource\fRd scripts,
+\fBeval\fRs, \fBuplevel\fRs, etc.
+.PP
+Note that for nested commands, like
+.QW "foo [bar [x]]" ,
+only
+.QW x
+will be seen by an \fBinfo frame\fR invoked within
+.QW x .
+This is the same as for \fBinfo level\fR and error stack traces.
+.PP
+The result dictionary may contain the keys listed below, with the
+specified meanings for their values:
+.TP
+\fBtype\fR
+This entry is always present and describes the nature of the location
+for the command. The recognized values are \fBsource\fR, \fBproc\fR,
+\fBeval\fR, and \fBprecompiled\fR.
+.RS
+.TP
+\fBsource\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
+means that the command is found in a script loaded by the \fBsource\fR
+command.
+.TP
+\fBproc\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
+means that the command is found in dynamically created procedure body.
+.TP
+\fBeval\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
+means that the command is executed by \fBeval\fR or \fBuplevel\fR.
+.TP
+\fBprecompiled\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
+means that the command is found in a precompiled script (loadable by
+the package \fBtbcload\fR), and no further information will be
+available.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBline\fR
+This entry provides the number of the line the command is at inside of
+the script it is a part of. This information is not present for type
+\fBprecompiled\fR. For type \fBsource\fR this information is counted
+relative to the beginning of the file, whereas for the last two types
+the line is counted relative to the start of the script.
+.TP
+\fBfile\fR
+This entry is present only for type \fBsource\fR. It provides the
+normalized path of the file the command is in.
+.TP
+\fBcmd\fR
+This entry provides the string representation of the command. This is
+usually the unsubstituted form, however for commands which are a pure
+list executed by eval it is the substituted form as they have no other
+string representation. Care is taken that the pure-List property of
+the latter is not spoiled.
+.TP
+\fBproc\fR
+This entry is present only if the command is found in the body of a
+regular Tcl procedure. It then provides the name of that procedure.
+.TP
+\fBlambda\fR
+This entry is present only if the command is found in the body of an
+anonymous Tcl procedure, i.e. a lambda. It then provides the entire
+definition of the lambda in question.
+.TP
+\fBlevel\fR
+This entry is present only if the queried frame has a corresponding
+frame returned by \fBinfo level\fR. It provides the index of this
+frame, relative to the current level (0 and negative numbers).
+.PP
+A thing of note is that for procedures statically defined in files the
+locations of commands in their bodies will be reported with type
+\fBsource\fR and absolute line numbers, and not as type
+\fBproc\fR. The same is true for procedures nested in statically
+defined procedures, and literal eval scripts in files or statically
+defined procedures.
+.PP
+In contrast, a procedure definition or \fBeval\fR within a dynamically
+\fBeval\fRuated environment count linenumbers relative to the start of
+their script, even if they would be able to count relative to the
+start of the outer dynamic script. That type of number usually makes
+more sense.
+.PP
+A different way of describing this behaviour is that file based
+locations are tracked as deeply as possible, and where this is not
+possible the lines are counted based on the smallest possible
+\fBeval\fR or procedure body, as that scope is usually easier to find
+than any dynamic outer scope.
+.PP
+The syntactic form \fB{*}\fR is handled like \fBeval\fR. I.e. if it
+is given a literal list argument the system tracks the linenumber
+within the list words as well, and otherwise all linenumbers are
+counted relative to the start of each word (smallest scope)
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBinfo functions \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of all the math
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, returns a list of all the math
 functions currently defined.
 If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those functions whose name matches
 \fIpattern\fR are returned.  Matching is determined using the same
 rules as for \fBstring match\fR.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBinfo globals \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of all the names
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, returns a list of all the names
 of currently-defined global variables.
 Global variables are variables in the global namespace.
 If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those names matching \fIpattern\fR
@@ -94,13 +208,11 @@ are returned.  Matching is determined using the same rules as for
 \fBinfo hostname\fR
 Returns the name of the computer on which this invocation is being
 executed.
-.VS
 Note that this name is not guaranteed to be the fully qualified domain
 name of the host.  Where machines have several different names (as is
 common on systems with both TCP/IP (DNS) and NetBIOS-based networking
 installed,) it is the name that is suitable for TCP/IP networking that
 is returned.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBinfo level\fR ?\fInumber\fR?
 If \fInumber\fR is not specified, this command returns a number
@@ -135,7 +247,7 @@ To get a list of just the packages in the current interpreter, specify
 an empty string for the \fIinterp\fR argument.
 .TP
 \fBinfo locals \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of all the names
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, returns a list of all the names
 of currently-defined local variables, including arguments to the
 current procedure, if any.
 Variables defined with the \fBglobal\fR, \fBupvar\fR  and
@@ -154,7 +266,7 @@ Returns the value of the global variable \fBtcl_patchLevel\fR; see
 the \fBtclvars\fR manual entry for more information.
 .TP
 \fBinfo procs \fR?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of all the
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, returns a list of all the
 names of Tcl command procedures in the current namespace.
 If \fIpattern\fR is specified,
 only those procedure names in the current namespace
@@ -180,7 +292,7 @@ Otherwise the command returns an empty string.
 \fBinfo sharedlibextension\fR
 Returns the extension used on this platform for the names of files
 containing shared libraries (for example, \fB.so\fR under Solaris).
-If shared libraries aren't supported on this platform then an empty
+If shared libraries are not supported on this platform then an empty
 string is returned.
 .TP
 \fBinfo tclversion\fR
@@ -188,7 +300,7 @@ Returns the value of the global variable \fBtcl_version\fR; see
 the \fBtclvars\fR manual entry for more information.
 .TP
 \fBinfo vars\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified,
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified,
 returns a list of all the names of currently-visible variables.
 This includes locals and currently-visible globals.
 If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those names matching \fIpattern\fR
@@ -203,11 +315,14 @@ If \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name,
 the resulting list of variable names
 has each matching namespace variable qualified with the name
 of its namespace.
-Note that a currently-visible variable may not yet "exist" if it has not
+Note that a currently-visible variable may not yet
+.QW exist
+if it has not
 been set (e.g. a variable declared but not set by \fBvariable\fR).
 .SH EXAMPLE
 This command prints out a procedure suitable for saving in a Tcl
 script:
+.PP
 .CS
 proc printProc {procName} {
     set result [list proc $procName]
@@ -224,13 +339,10 @@ proc printProc {procName} {
     puts [lappend result $formals [\fBinfo body\fR $procName]]
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 global(n), proc(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 command, information, interpreter, level, namespace, procedure, variable
-
-'\" Local Variables:
-'\" mode: nroff
-'\" End:
+.\" Local Variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" End:
diff --git a/doc/interp.n b/doc/interp.n
index bbe7826..c753ee9 100644
--- a/doc/interp.n
+++ b/doc/interp.n
@@ -1,5 +1,6 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1995-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Donal K. Fellows
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -11,15 +12,14 @@
 .SH NAME
 interp \- Create and manipulate Tcl interpreters
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBinterp \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
+\fBinterp \fIsubcommand \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-This command makes it possible to create one or more new Tcl 
+This command makes it possible to create one or more new Tcl
 interpreters that co-exist with the creating interpreter in the
 same application.  The creating interpreter is called the \fImaster\fR
-and the new interpreter is called a \fIslave\fR. 
+and the new interpreter is called a \fIslave\fR.
 A master can create any number of slaves, and each slave can
 itself create additional slaves for which it is master, resulting
 in a hierarchy of interpreters.
@@ -32,7 +32,11 @@ a command in a slave interpreter which, when invoked, causes a
 command to be invoked in its master interpreter or in another slave
 interpreter.  The only other connections between interpreters are
 through environment variables (the \fBenv\fR variable), which are
-normally shared among all interpreters in the application. Note that the
+normally shared among all interpreters in the application,
+.VS 8.5
+and by resource limit exceeded callbacks.
+.VE 8.5
+Note that the
 name space for files (such as the names returned by the \fBopen\fR command)
 is no longer shared between interpreters. Explicit commands are provided to
 share files and to transfer references to open files from one interpreter
@@ -45,7 +49,6 @@ scripts without fear of them damaging other interpreters or the
 application's environment. For example, all IO channel creation
 commands and subprocess creation commands are made inaccessible to safe
 interpreters.
-.VS
 See \fBSAFE INTERPRETERS\fR below for more information on
 what features are present in a safe interpreter.
 The dangerous functionality is not removed from the safe interpreter;
@@ -53,10 +56,9 @@ instead, it is \fIhidden\fR, so that only trusted interpreters can obtain
 access to it. For a detailed explanation of hidden commands, see
 \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 The alias mechanism can be used for protected communication (analogous to a
-kernel call) between a slave interpreter and its master. 
-See \fBALIAS INVOCATION\fR, below, for more details 
+kernel call) between a slave interpreter and its master.
+See \fBALIAS INVOCATION\fR, below, for more details
 on how the alias mechanism works.
-.VE
 .PP
 A qualified interpreter name is a proper Tcl lists containing a subset of its
 ancestors in the interpreter hierarchy, terminated by the string naming the
@@ -78,7 +80,7 @@ Both restrictions are motivated by safety concerns.
 The \fBinterp\fR command is used to create, delete, and manipulate
 slave interpreters, and to share or transfer
 channels between interpreters.  It can have any of several forms, depending
-on the \fIoption\fR argument:
+on the \fIsubcommand\fR argument:
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBalias\fR \fIsrcPath\fR \fIsrcToken\fR
 Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the \fItargetCmd\fR and
@@ -102,7 +104,9 @@ may be anywhere in the hierarchy of interpreters under the interpreter
 invoking the command.
 \fISrcPath\fR and \fIsrcCmd\fR identify the source of the alias.
 \fISrcPath\fR is a Tcl list whose elements select a particular
-interpreter.  For example, ``\fBa b\fR'' identifies an interpreter
+interpreter.  For example,
+.QW "\fBa b\fR"
+identifies an interpreter
 \fBb\fR, which is a slave of interpreter \fBa\fR, which is a slave
 of the invoking interpreter.  An empty list specifies the interpreter
 invoking the command.  \fIsrcCmd\fR gives the name of a new
@@ -116,7 +120,7 @@ already exist; it is not created by this command.
 The alias arranges for the given target command to be invoked
 in the target interpreter whenever the given source command is
 invoked in the source interpreter.  See \fBALIAS INVOCATION\fR below for
-more details. 
+more details.
 The command returns a token that uniquely identifies the command created
 \fIsrcCmd\fR, even if the command is renamed afterwards. The token may but
 does not have to be equal to \fIsrcCmd\fR.
@@ -124,16 +128,26 @@ does not have to be equal to \fIsrcCmd\fR.
 \fBinterp\fR \fBaliases \fR?\fIpath\fR?
 This command returns a Tcl list of the tokens of all the source commands for
 aliases defined in the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. The tokens
-correspond to the values returned when 
-the aliases were created (which may not be the same 
+correspond to the values returned when
+the aliases were created (which may not be the same
 as the current names of the commands).
 .TP
+\fBinterp bgerror \fIpath\fR ?\fIcmdPrefix\fR?
+.VS 8.5
+This command either gets or sets the current background error handler
+for the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. If \fIcmdPrefix\fR is
+absent, the current background error handler is returned, and if it is
+present, it is a list of words (of minimum length one) that describes
+what to set the interpreter's background error to. See the
+\fBBACKGROUND ERROR HANDLING\fR section for more details.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBcreate \fR?\fB\-safe\fR? ?\fB\-\|\-\fR? ?\fIpath\fR?
 Creates a slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR and a new command,
 called a \fIslave command\fR. The name of the slave command is the last
 component of \fIpath\fR. The new slave interpreter and the slave command
 are created in the interpreter identified by the path obtained by removing
-the last component from \fIpath\fR. For example, if \fIpath is \fBa b
+the last component from \fIpath\fR. For example, if \fIpath\fR is \fBa b
 c\fR then a new slave interpreter and slave command named \fBc\fR are
 created in the interpreter identified by the path \fBa b\fR.
 The slave command may be used to manipulate the new interpreter as
@@ -152,6 +166,44 @@ given name already exists in this master.
 The initial recursion limit of the slave interpreter is set to the
 current recursion limit of its parent interpreter.
 .TP
+\fBinterp\fR \fBdebug \fIpath\fR ?\fI\-frame\fR ?\fIbool\fR??
+.
+Controls whether frame-level stack information is captured in the
+slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR.  If no arguments are
+given, option and current setting are returned.  If \fI\-frame\fR
+is given, the debug setting is set to the given boolean if provided
+and the current setting is returned.
+This only effects the output of \fBinfo frame\fR, in that exact
+frame-level information for command invocation at the bytecode level
+is only captured with this setting on.
+.PP
+.RS
+For example, with code like
+.PP
+.CS
+\fBproc\fR mycontrol {... script} {
+  ...
+  \fBuplevel\fR 1 $script
+  ...
+}
+
+\fBproc\fR dosomething {...} {
+  ...
+  mycontrol {
+    somecode
+  }
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+the standard setting will provide a relative line number for the
+command \fBsomecode\fR and the relevant frame will be of type
+\fBeval\fR. With frame-debug active on the other hand the tracking
+extends so far that the system will be able to determine the file and
+absolute line number of this command, and return a frame of type
+\fBsource\fR. This more exact information is paid for with slower
+execution of all commands.
+.RE
+.TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBdelete \fR?\fIpath ...?\fR
 Deletes zero or more interpreters given by the optional \fIpath\fR
 arguments, and for each interpreter, it also deletes its slaves. The
@@ -163,9 +215,9 @@ exists, the command raises an error.
 This command concatenates all of the \fIarg\fR arguments in the same
 fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command, then evaluates the resulting string as
 a Tcl script in the slave interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR. The result
-of this evaluation (including error information such as the \fBerrorInfo\fR
-and \fBerrorCode\fR variables, if an error occurs) is returned to the
-invoking interpreter.
+of this evaluation (including all \fBreturn\fR options,
+such as \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR information, if an
+error occurs) is returned to the invoking interpreter.
 Note that the script will be executed in the current context stack frame of the
 \fIpath\fR interpreter; this is so that the implementations (in a master
 interpreter) of aliases in a slave interpreter can execute scripts in
@@ -173,10 +225,9 @@ the slave that find out information about the slave's current state
 and stack frame.
 .TP
 \fBinterp exists \fIpath\fR
-Returns  \fB1\fR if a slave interpreter by the specified \fIpath\fR
+Returns \fB1\fR if a slave interpreter by the specified \fIpath\fR
 exists in this master, \fB0\fR otherwise. If \fIpath\fR is omitted, the
 invoking interpreter is used.
-.VS "" BR
 .TP
 \fBinterp expose \fIpath\fR \fIhiddenName\fR ?\fIexposedCmdName\fR?
 Makes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR exposed, eventually bringing
@@ -191,11 +242,11 @@ Hidden commands are explained in more detail in \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 \fBinterp\fR \fBhide\fR \fIpath\fR \fIexposedCmdName\fR ?\fIhiddenCmdName\fR?
 Makes the exposed command \fIexposedCmdName\fR hidden, renaming
 it to the hidden command \fIhiddenCmdName\fR, or keeping the same name if
-\fIhiddenCmdName\fR is not given, in the interpreter denoted 
+\fIhiddenCmdName\fR is not given, in the interpreter denoted
 by \fIpath\fR.
 If a hidden command with the targeted name already exists, this command
 fails.
-Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can 
+Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can
 not contain namespace qualifiers, or an error is raised.
 Commands to be hidden by \fBinterp hide\fR are looked up in the global
 namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
@@ -207,21 +258,41 @@ Hidden commands are explained in more detail in \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 Returns a list of the names of all hidden commands in the interpreter
 identified by \fIpath\fR.
 .TP
-\fBinterp\fR \fBinvokehidden\fR \fIpath\fR ?\fB-global\fR? \fIhiddenCmdName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
+\fBinterp\fR \fBinvokehidden\fR \fIpath\fR ?\fI\-option ...\fR? \fIhiddenCmdName\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
 Invokes the hidden command \fIhiddenCmdName\fR with the arguments supplied
 in the interpreter denoted by \fIpath\fR. No substitutions or evaluation
-are applied to the arguments.
-If the \fB-global\fR flag is present, the hidden command is invoked at the
+are applied to the arguments. Three \fI\-option\fRs are supported, all
+of which start with \fB\-\fR: \fB\-namespace\fR (which takes a single
+argument afterwards, \fInsName\fR), \fB\-global\fR, and \fB\-\|\-\fR.
+If the \fB\-namespace\fR flag is present, the hidden command is invoked in
+the namespace called \fInsName\fR in the target interpreter.
+If the \fB\-global\fR flag is present, the hidden command is invoked at the
 global level in the target interpreter; otherwise it is invoked at the
 current call frame and can access local variables in that and outer call
 frames.
+The \fB\-\|\-\fR flag allows the \fIhiddenCmdName\fR argument to start with a
+.QW \-
+character, and is otherwise unnecessary.
+If both the \fB\-namespace\fR and \fB\-global\fR flags are present, the
+\fB\-namespace\fR flag is ignored.
+Note that the hidden command will be executed (by default) in the
+current context stack frame of the \fIpath\fR interpreter.
 Hidden commands are explained in more detail in \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
-.VE
+.TP
+\fBinterp\fR \fBlimit\fR \fIpath\fR \fIlimitType\fR ?\fI\-option\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR \fI...\fR?
+.VS 8.5
+Sets up, manipulates and queries the configuration of the resource
+limit \fIlimitType\fR for the interpreter denoted by \fIpath\fR.  If
+no \fI\-option\fR is specified, return the current configuration of the
+limit.  If \fI\-option\fR is the sole argument, return the value of that
+option.  Otherwise, a list of \fI\-option\fR/\fIvalue\fR argument pairs
+must supplied. See \fBRESOURCE LIMITS\fR below for a more detailed
+explanation of what limits and options are supported.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fBinterp issafe\fR ?\fIpath\fR?
 Returns \fB1\fR if the interpreter identified by the specified \fIpath\fR
 is safe, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.VS "" BR
 .TP
 \fBinterp marktrusted\fR \fIpath\fR
 Marks the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR as trusted. Does
@@ -229,7 +300,6 @@ not expose the hidden commands. This command can only be invoked from a
 trusted interpreter.
 The command has no effect if the interpreter identified by \fIpath\fR is
 already trusted.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBrecursionlimit\fR \fIpath\fR ?\fInewlimit\fR?
 Returns the maximum allowable nesting depth for the interpreter
@@ -239,14 +309,16 @@ of more than \fInewlimit\fR calls to \fBTcl_Eval()\fR
 and related procedures in that interpreter will return an error.
 The \fInewlimit\fR value is also returned.
 The \fInewlimit\fR value must be a positive integer between 1 and the
-maximum value of a non-long integer on the platform.  
-.sp
+maximum value of a non-long integer on the platform.
+.RS
+.PP
 The command sets the maximum size of the Tcl call stack only. It cannot
 by itself prevent stack overflows on the C stack being used by the
 application. If your machine has a limit on the size of the C stack, you
 may get stack overflows before reaching the limit set by the command. If
 this happens, see if there is a mechanism in your system for increasing
-the maximum size of the C stack. 
+the maximum size of the C stack.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBinterp\fR \fBshare\fR \fIsrcPath channelId destPath\fR
 Causes the IO channel identified by \fIchannelId\fR to become shared
@@ -293,7 +365,7 @@ The valid forms of this command are:
 \fIslave \fBaliases\fR
 Returns a Tcl list whose elements are the tokens of all the
 aliases in \fIslave\fR.  The tokens correspond to the values returned when
-the aliases were created (which may not be the same 
+the aliases were created (which may not be the same
 as the current names of the commands).
 .TP
 \fIslave \fBalias \fIsrcToken\fR
@@ -320,19 +392,28 @@ The command returns a token that uniquely identifies the command created
 \fIsrcCmd\fR, even if the command is renamed afterwards. The token may but
 does not have to be equal to \fIsrcCmd\fR.
 .TP
+\fIslave \fBbgerror\fR ?\fIcmdPrefix\fR?
+.VS 8.5
+This command either gets or sets the current background error handler
+for the \fIslave\fR interpreter. If \fIcmdPrefix\fR is
+absent, the current background error handler is returned, and if it is
+present, it is a list of words (of minimum length one) that describes
+what to set the interpreter's background error to. See the
+\fBBACKGROUND ERROR HANDLING\fR section for more details.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
 \fIslave \fBeval \fIarg \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
 This command concatenates all of the \fIarg\fR arguments in
 the same fashion as the \fBconcat\fR command, then evaluates
 the resulting string as a Tcl script in \fIslave\fR.
-The result of this evaluation (including error information
-such as the \fBerrorInfo\fR and \fBerrorCode\fR variables, if an
+The result of this evaluation (including all \fBreturn\fR options,
+such as \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR information, if an
 error occurs) is returned to the invoking interpreter.
 Note that the script will be executed in the current context stack frame
 of \fIslave\fR; this is so that the implementations (in a master
 interpreter) of aliases in a slave interpreter can execute scripts in
 the slave that find out information about the slave's current state
 and stack frame.
-.VS "" BR
 .TP
 \fIslave \fBexpose \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIexposedCmdName\fR?
 This command exposes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR, eventually bringing
@@ -344,12 +425,12 @@ fails.
 For more details on hidden commands, see \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 .TP
 \fIslave \fBhide \fIexposedCmdName\fR ?\fIhiddenCmdName\fR?
-This command hides the exposed command \fIexposedCmdName\fR, renaming it to 
+This command hides the exposed command \fIexposedCmdName\fR, renaming it to
 the hidden command \fIhiddenCmdName\fR, or keeping the same name if the
 argument is not given, in the \fIslave\fR interpreter.
 If a hidden command with the targeted name already exists, this command
 fails.
-Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can 
+Currently both \fIexposedCmdName\fR and \fIhiddenCmdName\fR can
 not contain namespace qualifiers, or an error is raised.
 Commands to be hidden are looked up in the global
 namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
@@ -360,27 +441,46 @@ For more details on hidden commands, see \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
 \fIslave \fBhidden\fR
 Returns a list of the names of all hidden commands in \fIslave\fR.
 .TP
-\fIslave \fBinvokehidden\fR ?\fB-global\fR \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
+\fIslave \fBinvokehidden\fR ?\fI\-option ...\fR? \fIhiddenName \fR?\fIarg ..\fR?
 This command invokes the hidden command \fIhiddenName\fR with the
 supplied arguments, in \fIslave\fR. No substitutions or evaluations are
-applied to the arguments.
-If the \fB-global\fR flag is given, the command is invoked at the global
+applied to the arguments. Three \fI\-option\fRs are supported, all
+of which start with \fB\-\fR: \fB\-namespace\fR (which takes a single
+argument afterwards, \fInsName\fR), \fB\-global\fR, and \fB\-\|\-\fR.
+If the \fB\-namespace\fR flag is given, the hidden command is invoked in
+the specified namespace in the slave.
+If the \fB\-global\fR flag is given, the command is invoked at the global
 level in the slave; otherwise it is invoked at the current call frame and
 can access local variables in that or outer call frames.
+The \fB\-\|\-\fR flag allows the \fIhiddenCmdName\fR argument to start with a
+.QW \-
+character, and is otherwise unnecessary.
+If both the \fB\-namespace\fR and \fB\-global\fR flags are given, the
+\fB\-namespace\fR flag is ignored.
+Note that the hidden command will be executed (by default) in the
+current context stack frame of \fIslave\fR.
 For more details on hidden commands,
 see \fBHIDDEN COMMANDS\fR, below.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fIslave \fBissafe\fR
 Returns  \fB1\fR if the slave interpreter is safe, \fB0\fR otherwise.
-.VS "" BR
+.TP
+\fIslave \fBlimit\fR \fIlimitType\fR ?\fI\-option\fR? ?\fIvalue\fR \fI...\fR?
+.VS 8.5
+Sets up, manipulates and queries the configuration of the resource
+limit \fIlimitType\fR for the slave interpreter.  If no \fI\-option\fR
+is specified, return the current configuration of the limit.  If
+\fI\-option\fR is the sole argument, return the value of that option.
+Otherwise, a list of \fI\-option\fR/\fIvalue\fR argument pairs must
+supplied. See \fBRESOURCE LIMITS\fR below for a more detailed explanation of
+what limits and options are supported.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fIslave \fBmarktrusted\fR
 Marks the slave interpreter as trusted. Can only be invoked by a
 trusted interpreter. This command does not expose any hidden
 commands in the slave interpreter. The command has no effect if the slave
 is already trusted.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fIslave\fR \fBrecursionlimit\fR ?\fInewlimit\fR?
 Returns the maximum allowable nesting depth for the \fIslave\fR interpreter.
@@ -389,14 +489,16 @@ set so that nesting of more than \fInewlimit\fR calls to \fBTcl_Eval()\fR
 and related procedures in \fIslave\fR will return an error.
 The \fInewlimit\fR value is also returned.
 The \fInewlimit\fR value must be a positive integer between 1 and the
-maximum value of a non-long integer on the platform.  
-.sp
+maximum value of a non-long integer on the platform.
+.RS
+.PP
 The command sets the maximum size of the Tcl call stack only. It cannot
 by itself prevent stack overflows on the C stack being used by the
 application. If your machine has a limit on the size of the C stack, you
 may get stack overflows before reaching the limit set by the command. If
 this happens, see if there is a mechanism in your system for increasing
-the maximum size of the C stack. 
+the maximum size of the C stack.
+.RE
 .SH "SAFE INTERPRETERS"
 .PP
 A safe interpreter is one with restricted functionality, so that
@@ -422,32 +524,33 @@ A safe interpreter is created with exactly the following set of
 built-in commands:
 .DS
 .ta 1.2i 2.4i 3.6i
-\fBafter	append	array	binary
-break	case	catch	clock
-close	concat	continue	eof
-error	eval	expr	fblocked
-fcopy	fileevent	flush	for
-foreach	format	gets	global
-if	incr	info	interp
-join	lappend	lindex	linsert
-list	llength	lrange	lreplace
-lsearch	lsort	namespace	package
-pid	proc	puts	read
-regexp	regsub	rename	return
-scan	seek	set	split
-string	subst	switch	tell
-time	trace	unset	update
-uplevel	upvar	variable	vwait
-while\fR
+\fBafter\fR	\fBappend\fR	\fBapply\fR	\fBarray\fR
+\fBbinary\fR	\fBbreak\fR	\fBcatch\fR	\fBchan\fR
+\fBclock\fR	\fBclose\fR	\fBconcat\fR	\fBcontinue\fR
+\fBdict\fR	\fBeof\fR	\fBerror\fR	\fBeval\fR
+\fBexpr\fR	\fBfblocked\fR	\fBfcopy\fR	\fBfileevent\fR
+\fBflush\fR	\fBfor\fR	\fBforeach\fR	\fBformat\fR
+\fBgets\fR	\fBglobal\fR	\fBif\fR	\fBincr\fR
+\fBinfo\fR	\fBinterp\fR	\fBjoin\fR	\fBlappend\fR
+\fBlassign\fR	\fBlindex\fR	\fBlinsert\fR	\fBlist\fR
+\fBllength\fR	\fBlrange\fR	\fBlrepeat\fR	\fBlreplace\fR
+\fBlsearch\fR	\fBlset\fR	\fBlsort\fR	\fBnamespace\fR
+\fBpackage\fR	\fBpid\fR	\fBproc\fR	\fBputs\fR
+\fBread\fR	\fBregexp\fR	\fBregsub\fR	\fBrename\fR
+\fBreturn\fR	\fBscan\fR	\fBseek\fR	\fBset\fR
+\fBsplit\fR	\fBstring\fR	\fBsubst\fR	\fBswitch\fR
+\fBtell\fR	\fBtime\fR	\fBtrace\fR	\fBunset\fR
+\fBupdate\fR	\fBuplevel\fR	\fBupvar\fR	\fBvariable\fR
+\fBvwait\fR	\fBwhile\fR
 .DE
-.VS ""  BR
 The following commands are hidden by \fBinterp create\fR when it
 creates a safe interpreter:
 .DS
 .ta 1.2i 2.4i 3.6i
-\fBcd	encoding	exec	exit
-fconfigure	file	glob	load
-open	pwd	socket	source\fR
+\fBcd\fR	\fBencoding\fR	\fBexec\fR	\fBexit\fR
+\fBfconfigure\fR	\fBfile\fR	\fBglob\fR	\fBload\fR
+\fBopen\fR	\fBpwd\fR	\fBsocket\fR	\fBsource\fR
+\fBunload\fR
 .DE
 These commands can be recreated later as Tcl procedures or aliases, or
 re-exposed by \fBinterp expose\fR.
@@ -456,25 +559,24 @@ The following commands from Tcl's library of support procedures are
 not present in a safe interpreter:
 .DS
 .ta 1.6i 3.2i
-\fBauto_exec_ok	auto_import	auto_load
-auto_load_index	auto_qualify	unknown\fR
+\fBauto_exec_ok\fR	\fBauto_import\fR	\fBauto_load\fR
+\fBauto_load_index\fR	\fBauto_qualify\fR	\fBunknown\fR
 .DE
 Note in particular that safe interpreters have no default \fBunknown\fR
-command, so Tcl's default autoloading facilities are not available.  
+command, so Tcl's default autoloading facilities are not available.
 Autoload access to Tcl's commands that are normally autoloaded:
 .DS
 .ta 2.1i
-\fB
-auto_mkindex	auto_mkindex_old
-auto_reset	history
-parray	pkg_mkIndex
-::pkg::create	::safe::interpAddToAccessPath
-::safe::interpCreate	::safe::interpConfigure
-::safe::interpDelete	::safe::interpFindInAccessPath
-::safe::interpInit	::safe::setLogCmd
-tcl_endOfWord	tcl_findLibrary
-tcl_startOfNextWord	tcl_startOfPreviousWord
-tcl_wordBreakAfter	tcl_wordBreakBefore\fR
+\fBauto_mkindex\fR	\fBauto_mkindex_old\fR
+\fBauto_reset\fR	\fBhistory\fR
+\fBparray\fR	\fBpkg_mkIndex\fR
+\fB::pkg::create\fR	\fB::safe::interpAddToAccessPath\fR
+\fB::safe::interpCreate\fR	\fB::safe::interpConfigure\fR
+\fB::safe::interpDelete\fR	\fB::safe::interpFindInAccessPath\fR
+\fB::safe::interpInit\fR	\fB::safe::setLogCmd\fR
+\fBtcl_endOfWord\fR	\fBtcl_findLibrary\fR
+\fBtcl_startOfNextWord\fR	\fBtcl_startOfPreviousWord\fR
+\fBtcl_wordBreakAfter\fR	\fBtcl_wordBreakBefore\fR
 .DE
 can only be provided by explicit definition of an \fBunknown\fR command
 in the safe interpreter.  This will involve exposing the \fBsource\fR
@@ -482,7 +584,6 @@ command.  This is most easily accomplished by creating the safe interpreter
 with Tcl's \fBSafe\-Tcl\fR mechanism.  \fBSafe\-Tcl\fR provides safe
 versions of \fBsource\fR, \fBload\fR, and other Tcl commands needed
 to support autoloading of commands and the loading of packages.
-.VE
 .PP
 In addition, the \fBenv\fR variable is not present in a safe interpreter,
 so it cannot share environment variables with other interpreters. The
@@ -518,9 +619,10 @@ as they would be for any other command invoked in that interpreter.
 The command procedure for the source command takes its arguments
 and merges them with the \fItargetCmd\fR and \fIarg\fRs for the
 alias to create a new array of arguments.  If the words
-of \fIsrcCmd\fR were ``\fIsrcCmd arg1 arg2 ... argN\fR'',
+of \fIsrcCmd\fR were
+.QW "\fIsrcCmd arg1 arg2 ... argN\fR" ,
 the new set of words will be
-``\fItargetCmd arg arg ... arg arg1 arg2 ... argN\fR'',
+.QW "\fItargetCmd arg arg ... arg arg1 arg2 ... argN\fR" ,
 where \fItargetCmd\fR and \fIarg\fRs are the values supplied when the
 alias was created.  \fITargetCmd\fR is then used to locate a command
 procedure in the target interpreter, and that command procedure
@@ -540,7 +642,6 @@ evaluated or substituted, since this would provide an escape
 mechanism whereby the slave interpreter could execute arbitrary
 code in the master.  This in turn would compromise the security
 of the system.
-.VS
 .SH "HIDDEN COMMANDS"
 .PP
 Safe interpreters greatly restrict the functionality available to Tcl
@@ -608,10 +709,108 @@ Commands to be hidden by \fBinterp hide\fR are looked up in the global
 namespace even if the current namespace is not the global one. This
 prevents slaves from fooling a master interpreter into hiding the wrong
 command, by making the current namespace be different from the global one.
-.VE
-.SH CREDITS
+.SH "RESOURCE LIMITS"
+.VS 8.5
 .PP
-This mechanism is based on the Safe-Tcl prototype implemented
+Every interpreter has two kinds of resource limits that may be imposed by any
+master interpreter upon its slaves. Command limits (of type \fBcommand\fR)
+restrict the total number of Tcl commands that may be executed by an
+interpreter (as can be inspected via the \fBinfo cmdcount\fR command), and
+time limits (of type \fBtime\fR) place a limit by which execution within the
+interpreter must complete. Note that time limits are expressed as
+\fIabsolute\fR times (as in \fBclock seconds\fR) and not relative times (as in
+\fBafter\fR) because they may be modified after creation.
+.PP
+When a limit is exceeded for an interpreter, first any handler callbacks
+defined by master interpreters are called. If those callbacks increase or
+remove the limit, execution within the (previously) limited interpreter
+continues. If the limit is still in force, an error is generated at that point
+and normal processing of errors within the interpreter (by the \fBcatch\fR
+command) is disabled, so the error propagates outwards (building a stack-trace
+as it goes) to the point where the limited interpreter was invoked (e.g. by
+\fBinterp eval\fR) where it becomes the responsibility of the calling code to
+catch and handle.
+.SS "LIMIT OPTIONS"
+.PP
+Every limit has a number of options associated with it, some of which are
+common across all kinds of limits, and others of which are particular to the
+kind of limit.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
+\fB\-command\fR
+.VS 8.5
+This option (common for all limit types) specifies (if non-empty) a Tcl script
+to be executed in the global namespace of the interpreter reading and writing
+the option when the particular limit in the limited interpreter is exceeded.
+The callback may modify the limit on the interpreter if it wishes the limited
+interpreter to continue executing. If the callback generates an error, it is
+reported through the background error mechanism (see \fBBACKGROUND ERROR
+HANDLING\fR). Note that the callbacks defined by one interpreter are
+completely isolated from the callbacks defined by another, and that the order
+in which those callbacks are called is undefined.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
+\fB\-granularity\fR
+.VS 8.5
+This option (common for all limit types) specifies how frequently (out of the
+points when the Tcl interpreter is in a consistent state where limit checking
+is possible) that the limit is actually checked. This allows the tuning of how
+frequently a limit is checked, and hence how often the limit-checking overhead
+(which may be substantial in the case of time limits) is incurred.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
+\fB\-milliseconds\fR
+.VS 8.5
+This option specifies the number of milliseconds after the moment defined in
+the \fB\-seconds\fR option that the time limit will fire. It should only ever
+be specified in conjunction with the \fB\-seconds\fR option (whether it was
+set previously or is being set this invocation.)
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
+\fB\-seconds\fR
+.VS 8.5
+This option specifies the number of seconds after the epoch (see \fBclock
+seconds\fR) that the time limit for the interpreter will be triggered. The
+limit will be triggered at the start of the second unless specified at a
+sub-second level using the \fB\-milliseconds\fR option. This option may be the
+empty string, which indicates that a time limit is not set for the
+interpreter.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
+\fB\-value\fR
+.VS 8.5
+This option specifies the number of commands that the interpreter may execute
+before triggering the command limit. This option may be the empty string,
+which indicates that a command limit is not set for the interpreter.
+.PP
+Where an interpreter with a resource limit set on it creates a slave
+interpreter, that slave interpreter will have resource limits imposed on it
+that are at least as restrictive as the limits on the creating master
+interpreter. If the master interpreter of the limited master wishes to relax
+these conditions, it should hide the \fBinterp\fR command in the child and
+then use aliases and the \fBinterp invokehidden\fR subcommand to provide such
+access as it chooses to the \fBinterp\fR command to the limited master as
+necessary.
+.SH "BACKGROUND ERROR HANDLING"
+.PP
+When an error happens in a situation where it cannot be reported directly up
+the stack (e.g. when processing events in an \fBupdate\fR or \fBvwait\fR call)
+the error is instead reported through the background error handling mechanism.
+Every interpreter has a background error handler registered; the default error
+handler arranges for the \fBbgerror\fR command in the interpreter's global
+namespace to be called, but other error handlers may be installed and process
+background errors in substantially different ways.
+.PP
+A background error handler consists of a non-empty list of words to which will
+be appended two further words at invocation time. The first word will be the
+error message string, and the second will a dictionary of return options (this
+is also the sort of information that can be obtained by trapping a normal
+error using \fBcatch\fR of course.) The resulting list will then be executed
+in the interpreter's global namespace without further substitutions being
+performed.
+.VE 8.5
+.SH CREDITS
+The safe interpreter mechanism is based on the Safe-Tcl prototype implemented
 by Nathaniel Borenstein and Marshall Rose.
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Creating and using an alias for a command in the current interpreter:
@@ -621,22 +820,33 @@ set idx [getIndex delta]
 .CE
 .PP
 Executing an arbitrary command in a safe interpreter where every
-invokation of \fBlappend\fR is logged:
+invocation of \fBlappend\fR is logged:
 .CS
 set i [\fBinterp create\fR -safe]
 \fBinterp hide\fR $i lappend
 \fBinterp alias\fR $i lappend {} loggedLappend $i
 proc loggedLappend {i args} {
-   puts "logged invokation of lappend $args"
-   # Be extremely careful about command construction
-   eval [linsert $args 0 \\
-         \fBinterp invokehidden\fR $i lappend]
+   puts "logged invocation of lappend $args"
+   \fBinterp invokehidden\fR $i lappend {*}$args
 }
 \fBinterp eval\fR $i $someUntrustedScript
 .CE
-
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+Setting a resource limit on an interpreter so that an infinite loop
+terminates.
+.CS
+set i [\fBinterp create\fR]
+\fBinterp limit\fR $i command -value 1000
+\fBinterp eval\fR $i {
+   set x 0
+   while {1} {
+      puts "Counting up... [incr x]"
+   }
+}
+.CE
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-load(n), safe(n), Tcl_CreateSlave(3)
-
+bgerror(n), load(n), safe(n), Tcl_CreateSlave(3)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 alias, master interpreter, safe interpreter, slave interpreter
diff --git a/doc/join.n b/doc/join.n
index f28c07c..582b730 100644
--- a/doc/join.n
+++ b/doc/join.n
@@ -27,14 +27,14 @@ Making a comma-separated list:
 .CS
 set data {1 2 3 4 5}
 \fBjoin\fR $data ", "
-     \fB=> 1, 2, 3, 4, 5\fR
+     \fB\(-> 1, 2, 3, 4, 5\fR
 .CE
 .PP
 Using \fBjoin\fR to flatten a list by a single level:
 .CS
 set data {1 {2 3} 4 {5 {6 7} 8}}
 \fBjoin\fR $data
-     \fB=> 1 2 3 4 5 {6 7} 8\fR
+     \fB\(-> 1 2 3 4 5 {6 7} 8\fR
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/lappend.n b/doc/lappend.n
index cb5d7fa..dbed3bb 100644
--- a/doc/lappend.n
+++ b/doc/lappend.n
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -21,14 +21,16 @@ lappend \- Append list elements onto a variable
 This command treats the variable given by \fIvarName\fR as a list
 and appends each of the \fIvalue\fR arguments to that list as a separate
 element, with spaces between elements.
-If \fIvarName\fR doesn't exist, it is created as a list with elements
+If \fIvarName\fR does not exist, it is created as a list with elements
 given by the \fIvalue\fR arguments.
 \fBLappend\fR is similar to \fBappend\fR except that the \fIvalue\fRs
 are appended as list elements rather than raw text.
 This command provides a relatively efficient way to build up
-large lists.  For example, ``\fBlappend a $b\fR'' is much
-more efficient than ``\fBset a [concat $a [list $b]]\fR'' when
-\fB$a\fR is long.
+large lists.  For example,
+.QW "\fBlappend a $b\fR"
+is much more efficient than
+.QW "\fBset a [concat $a [list $b]]\fR"
+when \fB$a\fR is long.
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Using \fBlappend\fR to build up a list of numbers.
 .CS
@@ -41,10 +43,7 @@ Using \fBlappend\fR to build up a list of numbers.
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-list(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), 
-.VS 8.4
-lset(n)
-.VE
+list(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lset(n),
 lsort(n), lrange(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/doc/lassign.n b/doc/lassign.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..b791feb
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/lassign.n
@@ -0,0 +1,55 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 1992-1999 Karl Lehenbauer & Mark Diekhans
+'\" Copyright (c) 2004 Donal K. Fellows
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH lassign n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+lassign \- Assign list elements to variables
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBlassign \fIlist varName \fR?\fIvarName ...\fR?
+.BE
+
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+This command treats the value \fIlist\fR as a list and assigns
+successive elements from that list to the variables given by the
+\fIvarName\fR arguments in order.  If there are more variable names
+than list elements, the remaining variables are set to the empty
+string.  If there are more list elements than variables, a list of
+unassigned elements is returned.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+An illustration of how multiple assignment works, and what happens
+when there are either too few or too many elements.
+.CS
+lassign {a b c} x y z       ;# Empty return
+puts $x                     ;# Prints "a"
+puts $y                     ;# Prints "b"
+puts $z                     ;# Prints "c"
+
+lassign {d e} x y z         ;# Empty return
+puts $x                     ;# Prints "d"
+puts $y                     ;# Prints "e"
+puts $z                     ;# Prints ""
+
+lassign {f g h i} x y       ;# Returns "h i"
+puts $x                     ;# Prints "f"
+puts $y                     ;# Prints "g"
+.CE
+The \fBlassign\fR command has other uses.  It can be used to create
+the analogue of the
+.QW shift
+command in many shell languages like this:
+.CS
+set ::argv [lassign $::argv argumentToReadOff]
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+lindex(n), list(n), lset(n), set(n)
+
+.SH KEYWORDS
+assign, element, list, multiple, set, variable
diff --git a/doc/library.n b/doc/library.n
index 67b1037..f29af8b 100644
--- a/doc/library.n
+++ b/doc/library.n
@@ -21,15 +21,12 @@ auto_execok, auto_import, auto_load, auto_mkindex, auto_mkindex_old, auto_qualif
 \fBauto_reset\fR
 \fBtcl_findLibrary \fIbasename version patch initScript enVarName varName\fR
 \fBparray \fIarrayName\fR
-.VS
 \fBtcl_endOfWord \fIstr start\fR
 \fBtcl_startOfNextWord \fIstr start\fR
 \fBtcl_startOfPreviousWord \fIstr start\fR
 \fBtcl_wordBreakAfter \fIstr start\fR
 \fBtcl_wordBreakBefore \fIstr start\fR
-.VE
 .BE
-
 .SH INTRODUCTION
 .PP
 Tcl includes a library of Tcl procedures for commonly-needed functions.
@@ -55,7 +52,6 @@ If the library procedure \fBTcl_Init\fR is invoked from an application's
 The code in \fBinit.tcl\fR will define the \fBunknown\fR procedure
 and arrange for the other procedures to be loaded on-demand using
 the auto-load mechanism defined below.
-
 .SH "COMMAND PROCEDURES"
 .PP
 The following procedures are provided in the Tcl library:
@@ -68,7 +64,7 @@ named by \fIcmd\fR.  If not, it returns an empty string.  This command
 examines the directories in the current search path (given by the PATH
 environment variable) in its search for an executable file named
 \fIcmd\fR.  On Windows platforms, the search is expanded with the same
-directories and file extensions as used by \fBexec\fR. \fBAuto_exec\fR
+directories and file extensions as used by \fBexec\fR. \fBAuto_execok\fR
 remembers information about previous searches in an array named
 \fBauto_execs\fR;  this avoids the path search in future calls for the
 same \fIcmd\fR.  The command \fBauto_reset\fR may be used to force
@@ -98,7 +94,7 @@ with the \fBauto_mkindex\fR command.  If \fIcmd\fR is found in an
 index file, then the appropriate script is evaluated to create the
 command.  The \fBauto_load\fR command returns 1 if \fIcmd\fR was
 successfully created.  The command returns 0 if there was no index
-entry for \fIcmd\fR or if the script didn't actually define \fIcmd\fR
+entry for \fIcmd\fR or if the script did not actually define \fIcmd\fR
 (e.g. because index information is out of date).  If an error occurs
 while processing the script, then that error is returned.
 \fBAuto_load\fR only reads the index information once and saves it in
@@ -136,9 +132,11 @@ unsophisticated way:  if any line contains the word \fBproc\fR
 as its first characters then it is assumed to be a procedure
 definition and the next word of the line is taken as the
 procedure's name.
-Procedure definitions that don't appear in this way (e.g. they
+Procedure definitions that do not appear in this way (e.g. they
 have spaces before the \fBproc\fR) will not be indexed.  If your 
-script contains "dangerous" code, such as global initialization
+script contains
+.QW dangerous
+code, such as global initialization
 code or procedure names with special characters like \fB$\fR,
 \fB*\fR, \fB[\fR or \fB]\fR, you are safer using auto_mkindex_old.
 .RE
@@ -148,7 +146,7 @@ Destroys all the information cached by \fBauto_execok\fR and
 \fBauto_load\fR.  This information will be re-read from disk the next
 time it is needed.  \fBAuto_reset\fR also deletes any procedures
 listed in the auto-load index, so that fresh copies of them will be
-loaded the next time that they're used.
+loaded the next time that they are used.
 .TP
 \fBauto_qualify \fIcommand namespace\fR
 Computes a list of fully qualified names for \fIcommand\fR.  This list
@@ -174,18 +172,20 @@ This is a standard search procedure for use by extensions during
 their initialization.  They call this procedure to look for their
 script library in several standard directories.
 The last component of the name of the library directory is 
-normally \fIbasenameversion\fP
-(e.g., tk8.0), but it might be "library" when in the build hierarchies.
+normally \fIbasenameversion\fR
+(e.g., tk8.0), but it might be
+.QW library
+when in the build hierarchies.
 The \fIinitScript\fR file will be sourced into the interpreter
 once it is found.  The directory in which this file is found is
-stored into the global variable \fIvarName\fP.
+stored into the global variable \fIvarName\fR.
 If this variable is already defined (e.g., by C code during
 application initialization) then no searching is done.
 Otherwise the search looks in these directories:
-the directory named by the environment variable \fIenVarName\fP;
+the directory named by the environment variable \fIenVarName\fR;
 relative to the Tcl library directory;
 relative to the executable file in the standard installation
-bin or bin/\fIarch\fP directory;
+bin or bin/\fIarch\fR directory;
 relative to the executable file in the current build tree;
 relative to the executable file in a parallel build tree.
 .TP
@@ -196,7 +196,6 @@ in the array \fIarrayName\fR.
 It may be either local or global.
 .TP
 \fBtcl_endOfWord \fIstr start\fR
-.VS
 Returns the index of the first end-of-word location that occurs after
 a starting index \fIstart\fR in the string \fIstr\fR.  An end-of-word
 location is defined to be the first non-word character following the
@@ -232,8 +231,6 @@ Returns the index of the first word boundary before the starting index
 boundaries before the starting point in the given string.  The index
 returned refers to the second character of the pair that comprises a
 boundary.
-.VE
-
 .SH "VARIABLES"
 .PP
 The following global variables are defined or used by the procedures in
@@ -268,17 +265,18 @@ the directories listed in the $tcl_pkgPath variable.
 If set, then it specifies the location of the directory containing
 library scripts (the value of this variable will be
 assigned to the \fBtcl_library\fR variable and therefore returned by
-the command \fBinfo library\fR).  If this variable isn't set then
+the command \fBinfo library\fR).  If this variable is not set then
 a default value is used.
 .TP
 \fBenv(TCLLIBPATH)\fR
 If set, then it must contain a valid Tcl list giving directories to
 search during auto-load operations.  Directories must be specified in 
-Tcl format, using "/" as the path separator, regardless of platform.
+Tcl format, using
+.QW /
+as the path separator, regardless of platform.
 This variable is only used when initializing the \fBauto_path\fR variable.
 .TP
 \fBtcl_nonwordchars\fR
-.VS
 This variable contains a regular expression that is used by routines
 like \fBtcl_endOfWord\fR to identify whether a character is part of a
 word or not.  If the pattern matches a character, the character is
@@ -294,17 +292,7 @@ word or not.  If the pattern matches a character, the character is
 considered to be a word character.  On Windows platforms, words are
 comprised of any character that is not a space, tab, or newline.  Under
 Unix, words are comprised of numbers, letters or underscores.
-.VE
-.TP
-\fBunknown_pending\fR
-Used by \fBunknown\fR to record the command(s) for which it is
-searching.
-It is used to detect errors where \fBunknown\fR recurses on itself
-infinitely.
-The variable is unset before \fBunknown\fR returns.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 info(n), re_syntax(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 auto-exec, auto-load, library, unknown, word, whitespace 
diff --git a/doc/lindex.n b/doc/lindex.n
index a12fdcf..f0417ac 100644
--- a/doc/lindex.n
+++ b/doc/lindex.n
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 by Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -17,9 +17,8 @@ lindex \- Retrieve an element from a list
 .BE
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
-The \fBlindex\fP command accepts a parameter, \fIlist\fP, which
-it treats as a Tcl list. It also accepts zero or more \fIindices\fP into
+The \fBlindex\fR command accepts a parameter, \fIlist\fR, which
+it treats as a Tcl list. It also accepts zero or more \fIindices\fR into
 the list.  The indices may be presented either consecutively on the
 command line, or grouped in a
 Tcl list and presented as a single argument.
@@ -37,7 +36,6 @@ In this case, the return value of \fBlindex\fR is simply the value of the
 .PP
 When presented with a single index, the \fBlindex\fR command
 treats \fIlist\fR as a Tcl list and returns the
-.VE
 \fIindex\fR'th element from it (0 refers to the first element of the list).
 In extracting the element, \fBlindex\fR observes the same rules
 concerning braces and quotes and backslashes as the Tcl command
@@ -46,11 +44,12 @@ substitution and command substitution do not occur.
 If \fIindex\fR is negative or greater than or equal to the number
 of elements in \fIvalue\fR, then an empty
 string is returned.
-If \fIindex\fR has the value \fBend\fR, it refers to the last element
-in the list, and \fBend\-\fIinteger\fR refers to the last element in
-the list minus the specified integer offset.
+.VS 8.5
+The interpretation of each simple \fIindex\fR value is the same as 
+for the command \fBstring index\fR, supporting simple index
+arithmetic and indices relative to the end of the list.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 If additional \fIindex\fR arguments are supplied, then each argument is
 used in turn to select an element from the previous indexing operation,
 allowing the script to select elements from sublists.  The command,
@@ -67,25 +66,33 @@ lindex [lindex [lindex $a 1] 2] 3
 .CE
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .CS
-\fBlindex\fR {a b c}  \fI=> a b c\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {a b c} {} \fI=> a b c\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {a b c} 0 \fI=> a\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {a b c} 2 \fI=> c\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {a b c} end \fI=> c\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {a b c} end-1 \fI=> b\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {{a b c} {d e f} {g h i}} 2 1 \fI=> h\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {{a b c} {d e f} {g h i}} {2 1} \fI=> h\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {{{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {g h}}} 1 1 0 \fI=> g\fR
-\fBlindex\fR {{{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {g h}}} {1 1 0} \fI=> g\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {a b c}
+      \fI\(-> a b c\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {a b c} {}
+      \fI\(-> a b c\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {a b c} 0
+      \fI\(-> a\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {a b c} 2
+      \fI\(-> c\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {a b c} end
+      \fI\(-> c\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {a b c} end-1
+      \fI\(-> b\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {{a b c} {d e f} {g h i}} 2 1
+      \fI\(-> h\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {{a b c} {d e f} {g h i}} {2 1}
+      \fI\(-> h\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {{{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {g h}}} 1 1 0
+      \fI\(-> g\fR
+\fBlindex\fR {{{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {g h}}} {1 1 0}
+      \fI\(-> g\fR
 .CE
-.VE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 list(n), lappend(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), 
-.VS 8.4
-lset(n),
+lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
 .VE
-lsort(n),
-lrange(n), lreplace(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 element, index, list
diff --git a/doc/linsert.n b/doc/linsert.n
index 7b85adb..9f37fcd 100644
--- a/doc/linsert.n
+++ b/doc/linsert.n
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -22,11 +22,12 @@ This command produces a new list from \fIlist\fR by inserting all of the
 \fIelement\fR arguments just before the \fIindex\fR'th element of
 \fIlist\fR.  Each \fIelement\fR argument will become a separate element of
 the new list.  If \fIindex\fR is less than or equal to zero, then the new
-elements are inserted at the beginning of the list.  If \fIindex\fR has the
-value \fBend\fR, or if it is greater than or equal to the number of
-elements in the list, then the new elements are appended to the list.
-\fBend\-\fIinteger\fR refers to the last element in the list minus the
-specified integer offset.
+elements are inserted at the beginning of the list.  
+.VS 8.5
+The interpretation of the \fIindex\fR value is the same as
+for the command \fBstring index\fR, supporting simple index
+arithmetic and indices relative to the end of the list.
+.VE
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Putting some values into a list, first indexing from the start and
 then indexing from the end, and then chaining them together:
@@ -39,9 +40,10 @@ set newerList [\fBlinsert\fR [\fBlinsert\fR $oldList end-1 quick] 1 lazy]
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.VS 8.4
 list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), 
-lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n)
+lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
 .VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/doc/list.n b/doc/list.n
index 21f9edb..2bcdafb 100644
--- a/doc/list.n
+++ b/doc/list.n
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -43,11 +43,10 @@ while \fBconcat\fR with the same arguments will return
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lrange(n),
-lreplace(n), lsearch(n),
-.VS 8.4
-lset(n),
-.VE 8.4
-lsort(n)
+.VS 8.5
+lrepeat(n),
+.VE 8.5
+lreplace(n), lsearch(n), lset(n), lsort(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 element, list
diff --git a/doc/llength.n b/doc/llength.n
index 977d9ef..627800f 100644
--- a/doc/llength.n
+++ b/doc/llength.n
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -48,10 +48,8 @@ An empty list is not necessarily an empty string:
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.VS 8.4
 list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), lsearch(n), 
 lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n)
-.VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 element, list, length
diff --git a/doc/load.n b/doc/load.n
index 02fec35..e5501f6 100644
--- a/doc/load.n
+++ b/doc/load.n
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-load \- Load machine code and initialize new commands.
+load \- Load machine code and initialize new commands
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBload \fIfileName\fR
 .br
@@ -71,7 +71,12 @@ in an application.  If a given \fIfileName\fR is loaded into multiple
 interpreters, then the first \fBload\fR will load the code and
 call the initialization procedure;  subsequent \fBload\fRs will
 call the initialization procedure without loading the code again.
-It is not possible to unload or reload a package.
+.VS 8.5
+For Tcl versions lower than 8.5, it is not possible to unload or reload a
+package. From version 8.5 however, the \fBunload\fR command allows the unloading
+of libraries loaded with \fBload\fR, for libraries that are aware of the
+Tcl's unloading mechanism.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 The \fBload\fR command also supports packages that are statically
 linked with the application, if those packages have been registered
@@ -85,13 +90,10 @@ This may be done differently on different platforms.
 The default guess, which is used on most UNIX platforms, is to
 take the last element of \fIfileName\fR, strip off the first
 three characters if they are \fBlib\fR, and use any following
-.VS
 alphabetic and underline characters as the module name.
-.VE
 For example, the command \fBload libxyz4.2.so\fR uses the module
 name \fBxyz\fR and the command \fBload bin/last.so {}\fR uses the
 module name \fBlast\fR.
-.VS "" br
 .PP
 If \fIfileName\fR is an empty string, then \fIpackageName\fR must
 be specified.
@@ -102,17 +104,20 @@ Otherwise, the \fBload\fR command searches for a dynamically loaded
 package by that name, and uses it if it is found.  If several
 different files have been \fBload\fRed with different versions of
 the package, Tcl picks the file that was loaded first.
-.VE
 .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
 .TP
 \fBWindows\fR\0\0\0\0\0
 .
-When a load fails with "library not found" error, it is also possible
+When a load fails with
+.QW "library not found"
+error, it is also possible
 that a dependent library was not found.  To see the dependent libraries,
-type ``dumpbin -imports <dllname>'' in a DOS console to see what the
-library must import.
-When loading a DLL in the current directory, Windows will ignore ``./'' as
-a path specifier and use a search heuristic to find the DLL instead.
+type
+.QW "dumpbin -imports <dllname>"
+in a DOS console to see what the library must import.
+When loading a DLL in the current directory, Windows will ignore
+.QW ./
+as a path specifier and use a search heuristic to find the DLL instead.
 To avoid this, load the DLL with:
 .CS
 \fBload\fR [file join [pwd] mylib.DLL]
@@ -131,7 +136,7 @@ The following is a minimal extension:
 #include <stdio.h>
 static int fooCmd(ClientData clientData,
         Tcl_Interp *interp, int objc, Tcl_Obj *const objv[]) {
-    printf("called with %d arguments\\n", objc);
+    printf("called with %d arguments\en", objc);
     return TCL_OK;
 }
 int Foo_Init(Tcl_Interp *interp) {
diff --git a/doc/lrange.n b/doc/lrange.n
index 5b0d187..34f0150 100644
--- a/doc/lrange.n
+++ b/doc/lrange.n
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -21,18 +21,24 @@ lrange \- Return one or more adjacent elements from a list
 \fIList\fR must be a valid Tcl list.  This command will
 return a new list consisting of elements
 \fIfirst\fR through \fIlast\fR, inclusive.
-\fIFirst\fR or \fIlast\fR
-may be \fBend\fR (or any abbreviation of it) to refer to the last
-element of the list.
+.VS 8.5
+The index values \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are interpreted
+the same as index values for the command \fBstring index\fR,
+supporting simple index arithmetic and indices relative to the
+end of the list.
+.VE
 If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero, it is treated as if it were zero.
 If \fIlast\fR is greater than or equal to the number of elements
 in the list, then it is treated as if it were \fBend\fR.
 If \fIfirst\fR is greater than \fIlast\fR then an empty string
 is returned.
-Note: ``\fBlrange \fIlist first first\fR'' does not always produce the
-same result as ``\fBlindex \fIlist first\fR'' (although it often does
-for simple fields that aren't enclosed in braces); it does, however,
-produce exactly the same results as ``\fBlist [lindex \fIlist first\fB]\fR''
+Note:
+.QW "\fBlrange \fIlist first first\fR"
+does not always produce the same result as
+.QW "\fBlindex \fIlist first\fR"
+(although it often does for simple fields that are not enclosed in
+braces); it does, however, produce exactly the same results as
+.QW "\fBlist [lindex \fIlist first\fB]\fR"
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Selecting the first two elements:
 .CS
@@ -64,9 +70,10 @@ elements to
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.VS 8.4
 list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), 
-lset(n), lreplace(n), lsort(n)
+lset(n), lreplace(n), lsort(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
 .VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
diff --git a/doc/lrepeat.n b/doc/lrepeat.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..ac78690
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/lrepeat.n
@@ -0,0 +1,39 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2003 by Simon Geard.  All rights reserved.
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH lrepeat n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+lrepeat \- Build a list by repeating elements
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBlrepeat \fInumber element1 \fR?\fIelement2 element3 ...\fR?
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The \fBlrepeat\fR command creates a list of size \fInumber * number of
+elements\fR by repeating \fInumber\fR times the sequence of elements
+\fIelement1 element2 ...\fR.  \fInumber\fR must be a positive integer,
+\fIelementn\fR can be any Tcl value.  Note that \fBlrepeat 1 arg ...\fR
+is identical to \fBlist arg ...\fR, though the \fIarg\fR is required
+with \fBlrepeat\fR.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.CS
+\fBlrepeat\fR 3 a
+      \fI\(-> a a a\fR
+\fBlrepeat\fR 3 [\fBlrepeat\fR 3 0]
+      \fI\(-> {0 0 0} {0 0 0} {0 0 0}\fR
+\fBlrepeat\fR 3 a b c
+      \fI\(-> a b c a b c a b c\fR
+\fBlrepeat\fR 3 [\fBlrepeat\fR 2 a] b c
+      \fI\(-> {a a} b c {a a} b c {a a} b c\fR
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+list(n), lappend(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lset(n)
+
+.SH KEYWORDS
+element, index, list
diff --git a/doc/lreplace.n b/doc/lreplace.n
index 600a986..2cd79d8 100644
--- a/doc/lreplace.n
+++ b/doc/lreplace.n
@@ -1,7 +1,7 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -15,26 +15,31 @@ lreplace \- Replace elements in a list with new elements
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBlreplace \fIlist first last \fR?\fIelement element ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBlreplace\fR returns a new list formed by replacing one or more elements of
 \fIlist\fR with the \fIelement\fR arguments.
-\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR specify the first and last index of the
-range of elements to replace.  0 refers to the first element of the
-list, and \fBend\fR (or any abbreviation of it) may be used to refer
-to the last element of the list.  If \fIlist\fR is empty, then
-\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are ignored.
-
-If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero, it is considered to refer to the
+.VS 8.5
+\fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are index values specifying the first and
+last elements of the range to replace.
+The index values \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are interpreted
+the same as index values for the command \fBstring index\fR,
+supporting simple index arithmetic and indices relative to the
+end of the list.
+0 refers to the first element of the
+list, and \fBend\fR refers to the last element of the list.
+If \fIlist\fR is empty, then \fIfirst\fR and \fIlast\fR are ignored.
+.VE
+.PP
+If \fIfirst\fR is less than zero, it is considered to refer to before the
 first element of the list.  For non-empty lists, the element indicated
-by \fIfirst\fR must exist.
-
-If \fIlast\fR is less than zero but greater than \fIfirst\fR, then any
-specified elements will be prepended to the list.  If \fIlast\fR is
-less than \fIfirst\fR then no elements are deleted; the new elements
-are simply inserted before \fIfirst\fR.
-
+by \fIfirst\fR must exist or \fIfirst\fR must indicate before the
+start of the list.
+.PP
+If \fIlast\fR is less than \fIfirst\fR, then any specified elements
+will be inserted into the list at the point specified by \fIfirst\fR
+with no elements being deleted.
+.PP
 The \fIelement\fR arguments specify zero or more new arguments to
 be added to the list in place of those that were deleted.
 Each \fIelement\fR argument will become a separate element of
@@ -61,12 +66,20 @@ a b c d e
 % set var [\fBlreplace\fR $var end end]
 a b c d
 .CE
-
+.PP
+A procedure to delete a given element from a list:
+.CS
+proc lremove {listVariable value} {
+    upvar 1 $listVariable var
+    set idx [lsearch -exact $var $value]
+    set var [\fBlreplace\fR $var $idx $idx]
+}
+.CE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.VS 8.4
-list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), 
-lset(n), lrange(n), lsort(n)
+list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n),
+lset(n), lrange(n), lsort(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
 .VE
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 element, list, replace
diff --git a/doc/lreverse.n b/doc/lreverse.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..da5e489
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/lreverse.n
@@ -0,0 +1,31 @@
+'\" -*- nroff -*-
+'\" Copyright (c) 2006 by Donal K. Fellows.  All rights reserved.
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH lreverse n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+lreverse \- Reverse the order of a list
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBlreverse \fIlist\fR
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The \fBlreverse\fR command returns a list that has the same elements as its
+input list, \fIlist\fR, except with the elements in the reverse order.
+.SH EXAMPLES
+.CS
+\fBlreverse\fR {a a b c}
+      \fI\(-> c b a a\fR
+\fBlreverse\fR {a b {c d} e f}
+      \fI\(-> f e {c d} b a\fR
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+list(n), lsearch(n), lsort(n)
+
+.SH KEYWORDS
+element, list, reverse
diff --git a/doc/lsearch.n b/doc/lsearch.n
index 37362fa..b046ba2 100644
--- a/doc/lsearch.n
+++ b/doc/lsearch.n
@@ -1,13 +1,14 @@
 '\" 
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2003-2004 Donal K. Fellows.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH lsearch n 8.4 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH lsearch n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
@@ -21,121 +22,169 @@ lsearch \- See if a list contains a particular element
 This command searches the elements of \fIlist\fR to see if one
 of them matches \fIpattern\fR.  If so, the command returns the index
 of the first matching element
-.VS 8.4
 (unless the options \fB\-all\fR or \fB\-inline\fR are specified.)
-.VE 8.4
 If not, the command returns \fB\-1\fR.  The \fIoption\fR arguments
 indicates how the elements of the list are to be matched against
-\fIpattern\fR and it must have one of the following values:
-.TP
-\fB\-all\fR
-.VS 8.4
-Changes the result to be the list of all matching indices (or all
-matching values if \fB\-inline\fR is specified as well.)
-.VE 8.4
-.TP
-\fB\-ascii\fR
-The list elements are to be examined as Unicode strings (the name is
-for backward-compatability reasons.)  This option is only meaningful
-when used with \fB\-exact\fR or \fB\-sorted\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-decreasing\fR
-The list elements are sorted in decreasing order.  This option is only
-meaningful when used with \fB\-sorted\fR.
-.TP
-\fB\-dictionary\fR
-The list elements are to be compared using dictionary-style
-comparisons (see \fBlsort\fR for a fuller description).  This option
-is only meaningful when used with \fB\-exact\fR or \fB\-sorted\fR, and
-it is only distinguishable from the \fB\-ascii\fR option when
-the \fB\-sorted\fR option is given, because values are only
-dictionary-equal when exactly equal.
+\fIpattern\fR and must have one of the values below:
+.SS "MATCHING STYLE OPTIONS"
+If all matching style options are omitted, the default matching style
+is \fB\-glob\fR.  If more than one matching style is specified, the
+last matching style given takes precedence.
 .TP
 \fB\-exact\fR
-The list element must contain exactly the same string as \fIpattern\fR.
+\fIPattern\fR is a literal string that is compared for exact equality
+against each list element.
 .TP
 \fB\-glob\fR
 \fIPattern\fR is a glob-style pattern which is matched against each list
 element using the same rules as the \fBstring match\fR command.
 .TP
-\fB\-increasing\fR
-The list elements are sorted in increasing order.  This option is only
-meaningful when used with \fB\-sorted\fR.
+\fB\-regexp\fR
+\fIPattern\fR is treated as a regular expression and matched against
+each list element using the rules described in the \fBre_syntax\fR
+reference page.
+.TP
+\fB\-sorted\fR
+The list elements are in sorted order.  If this option is specified,
+\fBlsearch\fR will use a more efficient searching algorithm to search
+\fIlist\fR.  If no other options are specified, \fIlist\fR is assumed
+to be sorted in increasing order, and to contain ASCII strings.  This
+option is mutually exclusive with \fB\-glob\fR and \fB\-regexp\fR, and
+is treated exactly like \fB\-exact\fR when either \fB\-all\fR or
+\fB\-not\fR are specified.
+.SS "GENERAL MODIFIER OPTIONS"
+These options may be given with all matching styles.
+.TP
+\fB\-all\fR
+.
+Changes the result to be the list of all matching indices (or all matching
+values if \fB\-inline\fR is specified as well.) If indices are returned, the
+indices will be in numeric order. If values are returned, the order of the
+values will be the order of those values within the input \fIlist\fR.
 .TP
 \fB\-inline\fR
-.VS 8.4
 The matching value is returned instead of its index (or an empty
 string if no value matches.)  If \fB\-all\fR is also specified, then
 the result of the command is the list of all values that matched.
-.VE 8.4
-.TP
-\fB\-integer\fR
-The list elements are to be compared as integers.  This option is only
-meaningful when used with \fB\-exact\fR or \fB\-sorted\fR.
 .TP
 \fB\-not\fR
-.VS 8.4
 This negates the sense of the match, returning the index of the first
 non-matching value in the list.
-.VE 8.4
+.TP
+\fB\-start\fR\0\fIindex\fR
+The list is searched starting at position \fIindex\fR.
+.VS 8.5
+The interpretation of the \fIindex\fR value is the same as
+for the command \fBstring index\fR, supporting simple index
+arithmetic and indices relative to the end of the list.
+.VE 8.5
+.SS "CONTENTS DESCRIPTION OPTIONS"
+These options describe how to interpret the items in the list being
+searched.  They are only meaningful when used with the \fB\-exact\fR
+and \fB\-sorted\fR options.  If more than one is specified, the last
+one takes precedence.  The default is \fB\-ascii\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-ascii\fR
+The list elements are to be examined as Unicode strings (the name is
+for backward-compatibility reasons.)
+.TP
+\fB\-dictionary\fR
+The list elements are to be compared using dictionary-style
+comparisons (see \fBlsort\fR for a fuller description). Note that this
+only makes a meaningful difference from the \fB\-ascii\fR option when
+the \fB\-sorted\fR option is given, because values are only
+dictionary-equal when exactly equal.
+.TP
+\fB\-integer\fR
+The list elements are to be compared as integers.
+.VS 8.5
+.TP
+\fB\-nocase\fR
+Causes comparisons to be handled in a case-insensitive manner.  Has no
+effect if combined with the \fB\-dictionary\fR, \fB\-integer\fR, or 
+\fB\-real\fR options.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fB\-real\fR
-The list elements are to be compared as floating-point values.  This
-option is only meaningful when used with \fB\-exact\fR or \fB\-sorted\fR.
+The list elements are to be compared as floating-point values.
+.SS "SORTED LIST OPTIONS"
+These options (only meaningful with the \fB\-sorted\fR option) specify
+how the list is sorted.  If more than one is given, the last one takes
+precedence.  The default option is \fB\-increasing\fR.
 .TP
-\fB\-regexp\fR
-\fIPattern\fR is treated as a regular expression and matched against
-each list element using the rules described in the \fBre_syntax\fR
-reference page.
+\fB\-decreasing\fR
+The list elements are sorted in decreasing order.  This option is only
+meaningful when used with \fB\-sorted\fR.
 .TP
-\fB\-sorted\fR
-The list elements are in sorted order.  If this option is specified,
-\fBlsearch\fR will use a more efficient searching algorithm to search
-\fIlist\fR.  If no other options are specified, \fIlist\fR is assumed
-to be sorted in increasing order, and to contain ASCII strings.  This
-option is mutually exclusive with \fB\-glob\fR and \fB\-regexp\fR, and
-is treated exactly like \fB-exact\fR when either \fB\-all\fR, or
-\fB\-not\fR is specified.
-.TP
-\fB\-start\fR \fIindex\fR
-.VS 8.4
-The list is searched starting at position \fIindex\fR.  If \fIindex\fR
-has the value \fBend\fR, it refers to the last element in the list,
-and \fBend\-\fIinteger\fR refers to the last element in the list minus
-the specified integer offset.
-.VE 8.4
-.PP
-If \fIoption\fR is omitted then it defaults to \fB\-glob\fR.  If more
-than one of \fB\-exact\fR, \fB\-glob\fR, \fB\-regexp\fR, and
-\fB\-sorted\fR is specified, whichever option is specified last takes
-precedence.  If more than one of \fB\-ascii\fR, \fB\-dictionary\fR,
-\fB\-integer\fR and \fB\-real\fR is specified, the option specified
-last takes precedence.  If more than one of \fB\-increasing\fR and
-\fB\-decreasing\fR is specified, the option specified last takes
-precedence.
-
-.VS 8.4
+\fB\-increasing\fR
+The list elements are sorted in increasing order.  This option is only
+meaningful when used with \fB\-sorted\fR.
+.SS "NESTED LIST OPTIONS"
+.VS 8.5
+These options are used to search lists of lists.  They may be used
+with any other options.
+.TP
+\fB\-index\fR\0\fIindexList\fR
+This option is designed for use when searching within nested lists.
+The \fIindexList\fR argument gives a path of indices (much as might be
+used with the \fBlindex\fR or \fBlset\fR commands) within each element
+to allow the location of the term being matched against.
+.TP
+\fB\-subindices\fR
+If this option is given, the index result from this command (or every
+index result when \fB\-all\fR is also specified) will be a complete
+path (suitable for use with \fBlindex\fR or \fBlset\fR) within the
+overall list to the term found.  This option has no effect unless the
+\fI\-index\fR is also specified, and is just a convenience short-cut.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH EXAMPLES
+Basic searching:
 .CS
-\fBlsearch\fR {a b c d e} c \fI=> 2\fR
-\fBlsearch\fR -all {a b c a b c} c \fI=> 2 5\fR
-\fBlsearch\fR -inline {a20 b35 c47} b* \fI=> b35\fR
-\fBlsearch\fR -inline -not {a20 b35 c47} b* \fI=> a20\fR
-\fBlsearch\fR -all -inline -not {a20 b35 c47} b* \fI=> a20 c47\fR
-\fBlsearch\fR -all -not {a20 b35 c47} b* \fI=> 0 2\fR
-\fBlsearch\fR -start 3 {a b c a b c} c \fI=> 5\fR
+\fBlsearch\fR {a b c d e} c
+      \fI\(-> 2\fR
+\fBlsearch\fR -all {a b c a b c} c
+      \fI\(-> 2 5\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+Using \fBlsearch\fR to filter lists:
+.CS
+\fBlsearch\fR -inline {a20 b35 c47} b*
+      \fI\(-> b35\fR
+\fBlsearch\fR -inline -not {a20 b35 c47} b*
+      \fI\(-> a20\fR
+\fBlsearch\fR -all -inline -not {a20 b35 c47} b*
+      \fI\(-> a20 c47\fR
+\fBlsearch\fR -all -not {a20 b35 c47} b*
+      \fI\(-> 0 2\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+This can even do a
+.QW set-like
+removal operation:
+.CS
+\fBlsearch\fR -all -inline -not -exact {a b c a d e a f g a} a
+      \fI\(-> b c d e f g\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+Searching may start part-way through the list:
+.CS
+\fBlsearch\fR -start 3 {a b c a b c} c
+      \fI\(-> 5\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+It is also possible to search inside elements:
+.CS
+\fBlsearch\fR -index 1 -all -inline {{a abc} {b bcd} {c cde}} *bc*
+      \fI\(-> {a abc} {b bcd}\fR
 .CE
-.VE 8.4
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.VS 8.4
 foreach(n), list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), 
-lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n)
+lset(n), lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
 .VE
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 list, match, pattern, regular expression, search, string
-
 '\" Local Variables:
 '\" mode: nroff
 '\" End:
diff --git a/doc/lset.n b/doc/lset.n
index 81ee225..5efcbae 100755..100644
--- a/doc/lset.n
+++ b/doc/lset.n
@@ -1,5 +1,5 @@
 '\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 by Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
@@ -50,9 +50,11 @@ command.
 If \fIindex\fR is negative or greater than or equal to the number
 of elements in \fI$varName\fR, then an error occurs.
 .PP
-If \fIindex\fR has the value \fBend\fR, it refers to the last element
-in the list, and \fBend\-\fIinteger\fR refers to the last element in
-the list minus the specified integer offset.
+.VS 8.5
+The interpretation of each simple \fIindex\fR value is the same as
+for the command \fBstring index\fR, supporting simple index
+arithmetic and indices relative to the end of the list.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 If additional \fIindex\fR arguments are supplied, then each argument is
 used in turn to address an element within a sublist designated
@@ -76,36 +78,51 @@ of a list.  If an index is outside the permitted range, an error is reported.
 In each of these examples, the initial value of \fIx\fR is:
 .CS
 set x [list [list a b c] [list d e f] [list g h i]]
-  => {a b c} {d e f} {g h i}
+      \fI\(-> {a b c} {d e f} {g h i}\fR
 .CE
 The indicated return value also becomes the new value of \fIx\fR
 (except in the last case, which is an error which leaves the value of
 \fIx\fR unchanged.)
 .CS
-lset x {j k l} => j k l
-lset x {} {j k l} => j k l
-lset x 0 j => j {d e f} {g h i}
-lset x 2 j => {a b c} {d e f} j
-lset x end j => {a b c} {d e f} j
-lset x end-1 j => {a b c} j {g h i}
-lset x 2 1 j => {a b c} {d e f} {g j i}
-lset x {2 1} j => {a b c} {d e f} {g j i}
-lset x {2 3} j => \fIlist index out of range\fR
+\fBlset\fR x {j k l}
+      \fI\(-> j k l\fR
+\fBlset\fR x {} {j k l}
+      \fI\(-> j k l\fR
+\fBlset\fR x 0 j
+      \fI\(-> j {d e f} {g h i}\fR
+\fBlset\fR x 2 j
+      \fI\(-> {a b c} {d e f} j\fR
+\fBlset\fR x end j
+      \fI\(-> {a b c} {d e f} j\fR
+\fBlset\fR x end-1 j
+      \fI\(-> {a b c} j {g h i}\fR
+\fBlset\fR x 2 1 j
+      \fI\(-> {a b c} {d e f} {g j i}\fR
+\fBlset\fR x {2 1} j
+      \fI\(-> {a b c} {d e f} {g j i}\fR
+\fBlset\fR x {2 3} j
+      \fI\(-> list index out of range\fR
 .CE
 In the following examples, the initial value of \fIx\fR is:
 .CS
 set x [list [list [list a b] [list c d]] \e
             [list [list e f] [list g h]]]
- => {{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {g h}}
+      \fI\(-> {{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {g h}}\fR
 .CE
 The indicated return value also becomes the new value of \fIx\fR.
 .CS
-lset x 1 1 0 j => {{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {j h}}
-lset x {1 1 0} j => {{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {j h}}
+\fBlset\fR x 1 1 0 j
+      \fI\(-> {{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {j h}}\fR
+\fBlset\fR x {1 1 0} j
+      \fI\(-> {{a b} {c d}} {{e f} {j h}}\fR
 .CE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), 
-lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n)
+lsort(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
+.VE
+
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 element, index, list, replace, set
diff --git a/doc/lsort.n b/doc/lsort.n
index fa8cdd7..1726e92 100644
--- a/doc/lsort.n
+++ b/doc/lsort.n
@@ -2,13 +2,13 @@
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1999 Scriptics Corporation
-'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny.  All rights reserved.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2001 Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.  All rights reserved.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH lsort n 8.3 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH lsort n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
@@ -57,47 +57,72 @@ be considered less than, equal to, or greater than the second,
 respectively.
 .TP 20
 \fB\-increasing\fR
-Sort the list in increasing order (``smallest'' items first).
+Sort the list in increasing order
+.PQ smallest "items first" .
 This is the default.
 .TP 20
 \fB\-decreasing\fR
-Sort the list in decreasing order (``largest'' items first).
+Sort the list in decreasing order
+.PQ largest "items first" .
 .TP 20
-\fB\-index\0\fIindex\fR
+\fB\-indices\fR
+.VS "8.5 (TIP#217)"
+Return a list of indices into \fIlist\fR in sorted order instead of
+the values themselves.
+.VE "8.5 (TIP#217)"
+.TP 20
+\fB\-index\0\fIindexList\fR
 If this option is specified, each of the elements of \fIlist\fR must
 itself be a proper Tcl sublist.  Instead of sorting based on whole
-sublists, \fBlsort\fR will extract the \fIindex\fR'th element from
-each sublist and sort based on the given element.  The keyword
-\fBend\fP is allowed for the \fIindex\fP to sort on the last sublist
-element,
-.VS 8.4
-and \fBend-\fIindex\fR sorts on a sublist element offset from
-the end.
-.VE
+sublists, \fBlsort\fR will extract the \fIindexList\fR'th element from
+each sublist
+.VS 8.5
+(as if the overall element and the \fIindexList\fR were passed to
+\fBlindex\fR) and sort based on the given element.  
+.VE 8.5
 For example,
 .RS
 .CS
-lsort -integer -index 1 {{First 24} {Second 18} {Third 30}}
+lsort -integer -index 1 \e
+      {{First 24} {Second 18} {Third 30}}
 .CE
 returns \fB{Second 18} {First 24} {Third 30}\fR, and
-.VS 8.4
 '\"
 '\" This example is from the test suite!
 '\"
 .CS
-lsort -index end-1 {{a 1 e i} {b 2 3 f g} {c 4 5 6 d h}}
+lsort -index end-1 \e
+      {{a 1 e i} {b 2 3 f g} {c 4 5 6 d h}}
 .CE
-returns \fB{c 4 5 6 d h} {a 1 e i} {b 2 3 f g}\fR.
-.VE
+returns \fB{c 4 5 6 d h} {a 1 e i} {b 2 3 f g}\fR,
+.VS 8.5
+and
+.CS
+lsort -index {0 1} {
+   {{b i g} 12345}
+   {{d e m o} 34512}
+   {{c o d e} 54321}
+}
+.CE
+returns \fB{{d e m o} 34512} {{b i g} 12345} {{c o d e} 54321}\fR
+(because \fBe\fR sorts before \fBi\fR which sorts before \fBo\fR.)
+.VE 8.5
 This option is much more efficient than using \fB\-command\fR
 to achieve the same effect.
 .RE
+.VS 8.5
+.TP 20
+\fB\-nocase\fR
+Causes comparisons to be handled in a case-insensitive manner.  Has no
+effect if combined with the \fB\-dictionary\fR, \fB\-integer\fR, or 
+\fB\-real\fR options.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP 20
 \fB\-unique\fR
 If this option is specified, then only the last set of duplicate
 elements found in the list will be retained.  Note that duplicates are
 determined relative to the comparison used in the sort.  Thus if 
-\fI-index 0\fR is used, \fB{1 a}\fR and \fB{1 b}\fR would be
+\fI\-index 0\fR is used, \fB{1 a}\fR and \fB{1 b}\fR would be
 considered duplicates and only the second element, \fB{1 b}\fR, would
 be retained.
 .SH "NOTES"
@@ -169,16 +194,14 @@ More complex sorting using a comparison function:
     }
     return [string compare [lindex $a 1] [lindex $b 1]]
 }
-% \fBlsort\fR -command compare \\
+% \fBlsort\fR -command compare \e
         {{3 apple} {0x2 carrot} {1 dingo} {2 banana}}
 {1 dingo} {2 banana} {0x2 carrot} {3 apple}
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-.VS 8.4
 list(n), lappend(n), lindex(n), linsert(n), llength(n), lsearch(n), 
 lset(n), lrange(n), lreplace(n)
-.VE
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 element, list, order, sort
diff --git a/doc/man.macros b/doc/man.macros
index 5d0c6fa..ddd073d 100644
--- a/doc/man.macros
+++ b/doc/man.macros
@@ -1,69 +1,77 @@
-'\" The definitions below are for supplemental macros used in Tcl/Tk
-'\" manual entries.
-'\"
-'\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
-'\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
-'\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
-'\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
-'\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
-'\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
-'\"
-'\" .AS ?type? ?name?
-'\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
-'\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
-'\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
-'\"
-'\" .BS
-'\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
-'\"	enclosed in one large box.
-'\"
-'\" .BE
-'\"	End of box enclosure.
-'\"
-'\" .CS
-'\"	Begin code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .CE
-'\"	End code excerpt.
-'\"
-'\" .VS ?version? ?br?
-'\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
-'\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
-'\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
-'\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
-'\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .VE
-'\"	End of vertical sidebar.
-'\"
-'\" .DS
-'\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .DE
-'\"	End of indented unfilled display.
-'\"
-'\" .SO
-'\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget.  The
-'\"	options follow on successive lines, in four columns separated
-'\"	by tabs.
-'\"
-'\" .SE
-'\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
-'\"
-'\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
-'\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
-'\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
-'\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
-'\"	the option's class in the option database.
-'\"
-'\" .UL arg1 arg2
-'\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
-'\"
-'\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
+.\" The -*- nroff -*- definitions below are for supplemental macros used
+.\" in Tcl/Tk manual entries.
+.\"
+.\" .AP type name in/out ?indent?
+.\"	Start paragraph describing an argument to a library procedure.
+.\"	type is type of argument (int, etc.), in/out is either "in", "out",
+.\"	or "in/out" to describe whether procedure reads or modifies arg,
+.\"	and indent is equivalent to second arg of .IP (shouldn't ever be
+.\"	needed;  use .AS below instead)
+.\"
+.\" .AS ?type? ?name?
+.\"	Give maximum sizes of arguments for setting tab stops.  Type and
+.\"	name are examples of largest possible arguments that will be passed
+.\"	to .AP later.  If args are omitted, default tab stops are used.
+.\"
+.\" .BS
+.\"	Start box enclosure.  From here until next .BE, everything will be
+.\"	enclosed in one large box.
+.\"
+.\" .BE
+.\"	End of box enclosure.
+.\"
+.\" .CS
+.\"	Begin code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .CE
+.\"	End code excerpt.
+.\"
+.\" .VS ?version? ?br?
+.\"	Begin vertical sidebar, for use in marking newly-changed parts
+.\"	of man pages.  The first argument is ignored and used for recording
+.\"	the version when the .VS was added, so that the sidebars can be
+.\"	found and removed when they reach a certain age.  If another argument
+.\"	is present, then a line break is forced before starting the sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .VE
+.\"	End of vertical sidebar.
+.\"
+.\" .DS
+.\"	Begin an indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .DE
+.\"	End of indented unfilled display.
+.\"
+.\" .SO ?manpage?
+.\"	Start of list of standard options for a Tk widget. The manpage
+.\"	argument defines where to look up the standard options; if
+.\"	omitted, defaults to "options". The options follow on successive
+.\"	lines, in three columns separated by tabs.
+.\"
+.\" .SE
+.\"	End of list of standard options for a Tk widget.
+.\"
+.\" .OP cmdName dbName dbClass
+.\"	Start of description of a specific option.  cmdName gives the
+.\"	option's name as specified in the class command, dbName gives
+.\"	the option's name in the option database, and dbClass gives
+.\"	the option's class in the option database.
+.\"
+.\" .UL arg1 arg2
+.\"	Print arg1 underlined, then print arg2 normally.
+.\"
+.\" .QW arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally (for trailing punctuation).
+.\"
+.\" .PQ arg1 ?arg2?
+.\"	Print an open parenthesis, arg1 in quotes, then arg2 normally
+.\"	(for trailing punctuation) and then a closing parenthesis.
+.\"
+.\"	# Set up traps and other miscellaneous stuff for Tcl/Tk man pages.
 .if t .wh -1.3i ^B
 .nr ^l \n(.l
 .ad b
-'\"	# Start an argument description
+.\"	# Start an argument description
 .de AP
 .ie !"\\$4"" .TP \\$4
 .el \{\
@@ -72,7 +80,7 @@
 .\}
 .ta \\n()Au \\n()Bu
 .ie !"\\$3"" \{\
-\&\\$1	\\fI\\$2\\fP	(\\$3)
+\&\\$1 \\fI\\$2\\fP (\\$3)
 .\".b
 .\}
 .el \{\
@@ -85,7 +93,7 @@
 .\}
 .\}
 ..
-'\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
+.\"	# define tabbing values for .AP
 .de AS
 .nr )A 10n
 .if !"\\$1"" .nr )A \\w'\\$1'u+3n
@@ -95,9 +103,9 @@
 .nr )C \\n()Bu+\\w'(in/out)'u+2n
 ..
 .AS Tcl_Interp Tcl_CreateInterp in/out
-'\"	# BS - start boxed text
-'\"	# ^y = starting y location
-'\"	# ^b = 1
+.\"	# BS - start boxed text
+.\"	# ^y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^b = 1
 .de BS
 .br
 .mk ^y
@@ -107,7 +115,7 @@
 .if n \l'\\n(.lu\(ul'
 .if n .fi
 ..
-'\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
+.\"	# BE - end boxed text (draw box now)
 .de BE
 .nf
 .ti 0
@@ -127,16 +135,16 @@
 .br
 .nr ^b 0
 ..
-'\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
-'\"	# ^Y = starting y location
-'\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
+.\"	# VS - start vertical sidebar
+.\"	# ^Y = starting y location
+.\"	# ^v = 1 (for troff;  for nroff this doesn't matter)
 .de VS
 .if !"\\$2"" .br
 .mk ^Y
 .ie n 'mc \s12\(br\s0
 .el .nr ^v 1u
 ..
-'\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
+.\"	# VE - end of vertical sidebar
 .de VE
 .ie n 'mc
 .el \{\
@@ -151,9 +159,9 @@
 .\}
 .nr ^v 0
 ..
-'\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
-'\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
-'\"	# page bottom macro.
+.\"	# Special macro to handle page bottom:  finish off current
+.\"	# box/sidebar if in box/sidebar mode, then invoked standard
+.\"	# page bottom macro.
 .de ^B
 .ev 2
 'ti 0
@@ -180,34 +188,36 @@
 .mk ^Y
 .\}
 ..
-'\"	# DS - begin display
+.\"	# DS - begin display
 .de DS
 .RS
 .nf
 .sp
 ..
-'\"	# DE - end display
+.\"	# DE - end display
 .de DE
 .fi
 .RE
 .sp
 ..
-'\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
+.\"	# SO - start of list of standard options
 .de SO
+'ie '\\$1'' .ds So \\fBoptions\\fR
+'el .ds So \\fB\\$1\\fR
 .SH "STANDARD OPTIONS"
 .LP
 .nf
 .ta 5.5c 11c
 .ft B
 ..
-'\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
+.\"	# SE - end of list of standard options
 .de SE
 .fi
 .ft R
 .LP
-See the \\fBoptions\\fR manual entry for details on the standard options.
+See the \\*(So manual entry for details on the standard options.
 ..
-'\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
+.\"	# OP - start of full description for a single option
 .de OP
 .LP
 .nf
@@ -218,17 +228,40 @@ Database Class:	\\fB\\$3\\fR
 .fi
 .IP
 ..
-'\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
+.\"	# CS - begin code excerpt
 .de CS
 .RS
 .nf
 .ta .25i .5i .75i 1i
 ..
-'\"	# CE - end code excerpt
+.\"	# CE - end code excerpt
 .de CE
 .fi
 .RE
 ..
+.\"	# UL - underline word
 .de UL
 \\$1\l'|0\(ul'\\$2
 ..
+.\"	# QW - apply quotation marks to word
+.de QW
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\$2
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2
+..
+.\"	# PQ - apply parens and quotation marks to word
+.de PQ
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' (``\\$1''\\$2)\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el (\\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\$2)\\$3
+..
+.\"	# QR - quoted range
+.de QR
+.ie '\\*(lq'"' ``\\$1''\\-``\\$2''\\$3
+.\"" fix emacs highlighting
+.el \\*(lq\\$1\\*(rq\\-\\*(lq\\$2\\*(rq\\$3
+..
+.\"	# MT - "empty" string
+.de MT
+.QW ""
+..
diff --git a/doc/mathfunc.n b/doc/mathfunc.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..4ba25e4
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/mathfunc.n
@@ -0,0 +1,271 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+'\" Copyright (c) 1994-2000 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2005 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>. All rights reserved
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH mathfunc n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Mathematical Functions"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+mathfunc \- Mathematical functions for Tcl expressions
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBTcl 8.5\fR
+.sp
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::abs\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::acos\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::asin\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::atan\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::atan2\fR \fIy\fR \fIx\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::bool\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::ceil\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::cos\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::cosh\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::double\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+.VS 8.5
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::entier\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+.VE 8.5
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::exp\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::floor\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::fmod\fR \fIx\fR \fIy\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::hypot\fR \fIx\fR \fIy\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::int\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::isqrt\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::log\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::log10\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::max\fR \fIarg\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::min\fR \fIarg\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::pow\fR \fIx\fR \fIy\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::rand\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::round\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::sin\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::sinh\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::sqrt\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::srand\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::tan\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::tanh\fR \fIarg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathfunc::wide\fR \fIarg\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH "DESCRIPTION"
+.PP
+The \fBexpr\fR command handles mathematical functions of the form
+\fBsin($x)\fR or \fBatan2($y,$x)\fR by converting them to calls of the
+form \fB[tcl::mathfunc::sin [expr {$x}]]\fR or
+\fB[tcl::mathfunc::atan2 [expr {$y}] [expr {$x}]]\fR.
+A number of math functions are available by default within the
+namespace \fB::tcl::mathfunc\fR; these functions are also available
+for code apart from \fBexpr\fR, by invoking the given commands
+directly.
+.PP
+Tcl supports the following mathematical functions in expressions, all
+of which work solely with floating-point numbers unless otherwise noted:
+.DS
+.ta 3c 6c 9c
+\fBabs\fR	\fBacos\fR	\fBasin\fR	\fBatan\fR
+\fBatan2\fR	\fBbool\fR	\fBceil\fR	\fBcos\fR
+\fBcosh\fR	\fBdouble\fR	\fBentier\fR	\fBexp\fR
+\fBfloor\fR	\fBfmod\fR	\fBhypot\fR	\fBint\fR
+\fBisqrt\fR	\fBlog\fR	\fBlog10\fR	\fBmax\fR
+\fBmin\fR	\fBpow\fR	\fBrand\fR	\fBround\fR
+\fBsin\fR	\fBsinh\fR	\fBsqrt\fR	\fBsrand\fR
+\fBtan\fR	\fBtanh\fR	\fBwide\fR
+.DE
+.PP
+In addition to these predefined functions, applications may
+define additional functions by using \fBproc\fR (or any other method,
+such as \fBinterp alias\fR or \fBTcl_CreateObjCommand\fR) to define
+new commands in the \fBtcl::mathfunc\fR namespace.  In addition, an
+obsolete interface named \fBTcl_CreateMathFunc\fR() is available to
+extensions that are written in C. The latter interface is not recommended
+for new implementations.
+.SS "DETAILED DEFINITIONS"
+.TP
+\fBabs \fIarg\fR
+Returns the absolute value of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR may be either
+integer or floating-point, and the result is returned in the same form.
+.TP
+\fBacos \fIarg\fR
+Returns the arc cosine of \fIarg\fR, in the range [\fI0\fR,\fIpi\fR]
+radians. \fIArg\fR should be in the range [\fI\-1\fR,\fI1\fR].
+.TP
+\fBasin \fIarg\fR
+Returns the arc sine of \fIarg\fR, in the range [\fI\-pi/2\fR,\fIpi/2\fR]
+radians.  \fIArg\fR should be in the range [\fI\-1\fR,\fI1\fR].
+.TP
+\fBatan \fIarg\fR
+Returns the arc tangent of \fIarg\fR, in the range [\fI\-pi/2\fR,\fIpi/2\fR]
+radians.
+.TP
+\fBatan2 \fIy x\fR
+Returns the arc tangent of \fIy\fR/\fIx\fR, in the range [\fI\-pi\fR,\fIpi\fR]
+radians.  \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR cannot both be 0.  If \fIx\fR is greater
+than \fI0\fR, this is equivalent to
+.QW "\fBatan \fR[\fBexpr\fR {\fIy\fB/\fIx\fR}]" .
+.TP
+\fBbool \fIarg\fR
+Accepts any numeric value, or any string acceptable to
+\fBstring is boolean\fR, and returns the corresponding 
+boolean value \fB0\fR or \fB1\fR.  Non-zero numbers are true.
+Other numbers are false.  Non-numeric strings produce boolean value in
+agreement with \fBstring is true\fR and \fBstring is false\fR.
+.TP
+\fBceil \fIarg\fR
+Returns the smallest integral floating-point value (i.e. with a zero
+fractional part) not less than \fIarg\fR.  The argument may be any
+numeric value.
+.TP
+\fBcos \fIarg\fR
+Returns the cosine of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
+.TP
+\fBcosh \fIarg\fR
+Returns the hyperbolic cosine of \fIarg\fR.  If the result would cause
+an overflow, an error is returned.
+.TP
+\fBdouble \fIarg\fR
+The argument may be any numeric value,
+If \fIarg\fR is a floating-point value, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise converts
+\fIarg\fR to floating-point and returns the converted value.  May return
+\fBInf\fR or \fB\-Inf\fR when the argument is a numeric value that exceeds
+the floating-point range.
+.TP
+\fBentier \fIarg\fR
+.VS 8.5
+The argument may be any numeric value.  The integer part of \fIarg\fR
+is determined and returned.  The integer range returned by this function
+is unlimited, unlike \fBint\fR and \fBwide\fR which
+truncate their range to fit in particular storage widths.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
+\fBexp \fIarg\fR
+Returns the exponential of \fIarg\fR, defined as \fIe\fR**\fIarg\fR.
+If the result would cause an overflow, an error is returned.
+.TP
+\fBfloor \fIarg\fR
+Returns the largest integral floating-point value (i.e. with a zero
+fractional part) not greater than \fIarg\fR.  The argument may be
+any numeric value.
+.TP
+\fBfmod \fIx y\fR
+Returns the floating-point remainder of the division of \fIx\fR by
+\fIy\fR.  If \fIy\fR is 0, an error is returned.
+.TP
+\fBhypot \fIx y\fR
+Computes the length of the hypotenuse of a right-angled triangle
+.QW "\fBsqrt\fR [\fBexpr\fR {\fIx\fB*\fIx\fB+\fIy\fB*\fIy\fR}]".
+.TP
+\fBint \fIarg\fR
+The argument may be any numeric value.  The integer part of \fIarg\fR
+is determined, and then the low order bits of that integer value up
+to the machine word size are returned as an integer value.  For reference,
+the number of bytes in the machine word are stored in
+\fBtcl_platform(wordSize)\fR.
+.TP
+\fBisqrt \fIarg\fR
+Computes the integer part of the square root of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR must be
+a positive value, either an integer or a floating point number.
+Unlike \fBsqrt\fR, which is limited to the precision of a floating point
+number, \fIisqrt\fR will return a result of arbitrary precision.
+.TP
+\fBlog \fIarg\fR
+Returns the natural logarithm of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR must be a
+positive value.
+.TP
+\fBlog10 \fIarg\fR
+Returns the base 10 logarithm of \fIarg\fR.  \fIArg\fR must be a
+positive value.
+.TP
+\fBmax \fIarg\fB \fI...\fR
+Accepts one or more numeric arguments.  Returns the one argument
+with the greatest value.
+.TP
+\fBmin \fIarg\fB \fI...\fR
+Accepts one or more numeric arguments.  Returns the one argument
+with the least value.
+.TP
+\fBpow \fIx y\fR
+Computes the value of \fIx\fR raised to the power \fIy\fR.  If \fIx\fR
+is negative, \fIy\fR must be an integer value.
+.TP
+\fBrand\fR
+Returns a pseudo-random floating-point value in the range (\fI0\fR,\fI1\fR).  
+The generator algorithm is a simple linear congruential generator that
+is not cryptographically secure.  Each result from \fBrand\fR completely
+determines all future results from subsequent calls to \fBrand\fR, so
+\fBrand\fR should not be used to generate a sequence of secrets, such as
+one-time passwords.  The seed of the generator is initialized from the
+internal clock of the machine or may be set with the \fBsrand\fR function.
+.TP
+\fBround \fIarg\fR
+If \fIarg\fR is an integer value, returns \fIarg\fR, otherwise converts
+\fIarg\fR to integer by rounding and returns the converted value.
+.TP
+\fBsin \fIarg\fR
+Returns the sine of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
+.TP
+\fBsinh \fIarg\fR
+Returns the hyperbolic sine of \fIarg\fR.  If the result would cause
+an overflow, an error is returned.
+.TP
+\fBsqrt \fIarg\fR
+The argument may be any non-negative numeric value.  Returns a floating-point
+value that is the square root of \fIarg\fR.  May return \fBInf\fR when the
+argument is a numeric value that exceeds the square of the maximum value of
+the floating-point range.
+.TP
+\fBsrand \fIarg\fR
+The \fIarg\fR, which must be an integer, is used to reset the seed for
+the random number generator of \fBrand\fR.  Returns the first random
+number (see \fBrand\fR) from that seed.  Each interpreter has its own seed.
+.TP
+\fBtan \fIarg\fR
+Returns the tangent of \fIarg\fR, measured in radians.
+.TP
+\fBtanh \fIarg\fR
+Returns the hyperbolic tangent of \fIarg\fR.
+.TP
+\fBwide \fIarg\fR
+The argument may be any numeric value.  The integer part of \fIarg\fR
+is determined, and then the low order 64 bits of that integer value
+are returned as an integer value.  
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+expr(n), mathop(n), namespace(n)
+.SH "COPYRIGHT"
+.nf
+Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+Copyright (c) 1994-2000 Sun Microsystems Incorporated.
+Copyright (c) 2005, 2006 by Kevin B. Kenny <kennykb@acm.org>.
+.fi
diff --git a/doc/mathop.n b/doc/mathop.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..5a6ba4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/mathop.n
@@ -0,0 +1,299 @@
+.\" -*- nroff -*-
+.\" Copyright (c) 2006-2007 Donal K. Fellows.
+.\"
+.\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+.\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+.\"
+.so man.macros
+.TH mathop n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Mathematical Operator Commands"
+.BS
+.\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+mathop \- Mathematical operators as Tcl commands
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+package require \fBTcl 8.5\fR
+.sp
+\fB::tcl::mathop::!\fR \fInumber\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::~\fR \fInumber\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::+\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::\-\fR \fInumber\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::*\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::/\fR \fInumber\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::%\fR \fInumber number\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::**\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::&\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::|\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::^\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::<<\fR \fInumber number\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::>>\fR \fInumber number\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::==\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::!=\fR \fIarg arg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::<\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::<=\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::>=\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::>\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::eq\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::ne\fR \fIarg arg\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::in\fR \fIarg list\fR
+.br
+\fB::tcl::mathop::ni\fR \fIarg list\fR
+.sp
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The commands in the \fB::tcl::mathop\fR namespace implement the same set of
+operations as supported by the \fBexpr\fR command. All are exported from the
+namespace, but are not imported into any other namespace by default. Note that
+renaming, reimplementing or deleting any of the commands in the namespace does
+\fInot\fR alter the way that the \fBexpr\fR command behaves, and nor does
+defining any new commands in the \fB::tcl::mathop\fR namespace.
+.PP
+The following operator commands are supported:
+.DS
+.ta 2c 4c 6c 8c
+\fB~\fR	\fB!\fR	\fB+\fR	\fB\-\fR	\fB*\fR
+\fB/\fR	\fB%\fR	\fB**\fR	\fB&\fR	\fB|\fR
+\fB^\fR	\fB>>\fR	\fB<<\fR	\fB==\fR	\fBeq\fR
+\fB!=\fR	\fBne\fR	\fB<\fR	\fB<=\fR	\fB>\fR
+\fB>=\fR	\fBin\fR	\fBni\fR
+.DE
+.SS "MATHEMATICAL OPERATORS"
+.PP
+The behaviors of the mathematical operator commands are as follows:
+.TP
+\fB!\fR \fIboolean\fR
+.
+Returns the boolean negation of \fIboolean\fR, where \fIboolean\fR may be any
+numeric value or any other form of boolean value (i.e. it returns truth if the
+argument is falsity or zero, and falsity if the argument is truth or
+non-zero).
+.TP
+\fB+\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+Returns the sum of arbitrarily many arguments. Each \fInumber\fR argument may
+be any numeric value. If no arguments are given, the result will be zero (the
+summation identity).
+.TP
+\fB\-\fR \fInumber\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+If only a single \fInumber\fR argument is given, returns the negation of that
+numeric value. Otherwise returns the number that results when all subsequent
+numeric values are subtracted from the first one. All \fInumber\fR arguments
+must be numeric values. At least one argument must be given.
+.TP
+\fB*\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+Returns the product of arbitrarily many arguments. Each \fInumber\fR may be
+any numeric value. If no arguments are given, the result will be one (the
+multiplicative identity).
+.TP
+\fB/\fR \fInumber\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+If only a single \fInumber\fR argument is given, returns the reciprocal of that
+numeric value (i.e. the value obtained by dividing 1.0 by that value).
+Otherwise returns the number that results when the first numeric argument is
+divided by all subsequent numeric arguments. All \fInumber\fR arguments must
+be numeric values. At least one argument must be given.
+.RS
+.PP
+Note that when the leading values in the list of arguments are integers,
+integer division will be used for those initial steps (i.e. the intermediate
+results will be as if the functions \fIfloor\fR and \fIint\fR are applied to
+them, in that order). If all values in the operation are integers, the result
+will be an integer.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB%\fR \fInumber number\fR
+.
+Returns the integral modulus of the first argument with respect to the second.
+Each \fInumber\fR must have an integral value. Note that Tcl defines this
+operation exactly even for negative numbers, so that the following equality
+holds true:
+.RS
+.CS
+(\fIx \fB/ \fIy\fR) \fB* \fIy \fB== \fIx \fB-\fR (\fIx \fB% \fIy\fR)
+.CE
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB**\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+Returns the result of raising each value to the power of the result of
+recursively operating on the result of processing the following arguments, so
+.QW "\fB** 2 3 4\fR"
+is the same as
+.QW "\fB** 2 [** 3 4]\fR" .
+Each \fInumber\fR may be
+any numeric value, though the second number must not be fractional if the
+first is negative. If no arguments are given, the result will be one, and if
+only one argument is given, the result will be that argument. The
+result will have an integral value only when all arguments are
+integral values.
+.SS "COMPARISON OPERATORS"
+.PP
+The behaviors of the comparison operator commands (most of which operate
+preferentially on numeric arguments) are as follows:
+.TP
+\fB==\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.
+Returns whether each argument is equal to the arguments on each side of it in
+the sense of the \fBexpr\fR == operator (\fIi.e.\fR, numeric comparison if
+possible, exact string comparison otherwise). If fewer than two arguments
+are given, this operation always returns a true value.
+.TP
+\fBeq\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.
+Returns whether each argument is equal to the arguments on each side of it
+using exact string comparison. If fewer than two arguments are given, this
+operation always returns a true value.
+.TP
+\fB!=\fR \fIarg arg\fR
+.
+Returns whether the two arguments are not equal to each other, in the sense of
+the \fBexpr\fR != operator (\fIi.e.\fR, numeric comparison if possible, exact
+string comparison otherwise).
+.TP
+\fBne\fR \fIarg arg\fR
+.
+Returns whether the two arguments are not equal to each other using exact
+string comparison.
+.TP
+\fB<\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.
+Returns whether the arbitrarily-many arguments are ordered, with each argument
+after the first having to be strictly more than the one preceding it.
+Comparisons are performed preferentially on the numeric values, and are
+otherwise performed using UNICODE string comparison. If fewer than two
+arguments are present, this operation always returns a true value. When the
+arguments are numeric but should be compared as strings, the \fBstring
+compare\fR command should be used instead.
+.TP
+\fB<=\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.
+Returns whether the arbitrarily-many arguments are ordered, with each argument
+after the first having to be equal to or more than the one preceding it.
+Comparisons are performed preferentially on the numeric values, and are
+otherwise performed using UNICODE string comparison. If fewer than two
+arguments are present, this operation always returns a true value. When the
+arguments are numeric but should be compared as strings, the \fBstring
+compare\fR command should be used instead.
+.TP
+\fB>\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.
+Returns whether the arbitrarily-many arguments are ordered, with each argument
+after the first having to be strictly less than the one preceding it.
+Comparisons are performed preferentially on the numeric values, and are
+otherwise performed using UNICODE string comparison. If fewer than two
+arguments are present, this operation always returns a true value. When the
+arguments are numeric but should be compared as strings, the \fBstring
+compare\fR command should be used instead.
+.TP
+\fB>=\fR ?\fIarg\fR ...?
+.
+Returns whether the arbitrarily-many arguments are ordered, with each argument
+after the first having to be equal to or less than the one preceding it.
+Comparisons are performed preferentially on the numeric values, and are
+otherwise performed using UNICODE string comparison. If fewer than two
+arguments are present, this operation always returns a true value. When the
+arguments are numeric but should be compared as strings, the \fBstring
+compare\fR command should be used instead.
+.SS "BIT-WISE OPERATORS"
+.PP
+The behaviors of the bit-wise operator commands (all of which only operate on
+integral arguments) are as follows:
+.TP
+\fB~\fR \fInumber\fR
+.
+Returns the bit-wise negation of \fInumber\fR. \fINumber\fR may be an integer
+of any size. Note that the result of this operation will always have the
+opposite sign to the input \fInumber\fR.
+.TP
+\fB&\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+Returns the bit-wise AND of each of the arbitrarily many arguments. Each
+\fInumber\fR must have an integral value. If no arguments are given, the
+result will be minus one.
+.TP
+\fB|\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+Returns the bit-wise OR of each of the arbitrarily many arguments. Each
+\fInumber\fR must have an integral value. If no arguments are given, the
+result will be zero.
+.TP
+\fB^\fR ?\fInumber\fR ...?
+.
+Returns the bit-wise XOR of each of the arbitrarily many arguments. Each
+\fInumber\fR must have an integral value. If no arguments are given, the
+result will be zero.
+.TP
+\fB<<\fR \fInumber number\fR
+.
+Returns the result of bit-wise shifting the first argument left by the
+number of bits specified in the second argument. Each \fInumber\fR
+must have an integral value.
+.TP
+\fB>>\fR \fInumber number\fR
+.
+Returns the result of bit-wise shifting the first argument right by
+the number of bits specified in the second argument. Each \fInumber\fR
+must have an integral value.
+.SS "LIST OPERATORS"
+.PP
+The behaviors of the list-oriented operator commands are as follows:
+.TP
+\fBin\fR \fIarg list\fR
+.
+Returns whether the value \fIarg\fR is present in the list \fIlist\fR
+(according to exact string comparison of elements).
+.TP
+\fBni\fR \fIarg list\fR
+.
+Returns whether the value \fIarg\fR is not present in the list \fIlist\fR
+(according to exact string comparison of elements).
+.SH EXAMPLES
+The simplest way to use the operators is often by using \fBnamespace path\fR
+to make the commands available. This has the advantage of not affecting the
+set of commands defined by the current namespace.
+.CS
+namespace path {\fB::tcl::mathop\fR ::tcl::mathfunc}
+
+\fI# Compute the sum of some numbers\fR
+set sum [\fB+\fR 1 2 3]
+
+\fI# Compute the average of a list\fR
+set list {1 2 3 4 5 6}
+set mean [\fB/\fR [\fB+\fR {*}$list] [double [llength $list]]]
+
+\fI# Test for list membership\fR
+set gotIt [\fBin\fR 3 $list]
+
+\fI# Test to see if a value is within some defined range\fR
+set inRange [\fB<=\fR 1 $x 5]
+
+\fI# Test to see if a list is sorted\fR
+set sorted [\fB<=\fR {*}$list]
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+expr(n), mathfunc(n), namespace(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+command, expression, operator
diff --git a/doc/memory.n b/doc/memory.n
index 9485192..4ff681d 100644
--- a/doc/memory.n
+++ b/doc/memory.n
@@ -7,11 +7,10 @@
 .TH memory n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-memory \- Control Tcl memory debugging capabilities.
+memory \- Control Tcl memory debugging capabilities
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBmemory \fIoption \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The \fBmemory\fR command gives the Tcl developer control of Tcl's memory
@@ -21,9 +20,11 @@ memory debugging enabled (when \fBTCL_MEM_DEBUG\fR is defined at
 compile time), and after \fBTcl_InitMemory\fR has been called.
 .TP
 \fBmemory active\fR \fIfile\fR
+.
 Write a list of all currently allocated memory to the specified \fIfile\fR.
 .TP
 \fBmemory break_on_malloc\fR \fIcount\fR
+.
 After the \fIcount\fR allocations have been performed, \fBckalloc\fR
 outputs a message to this effect and that it is now attempting to enter
 the C debugger.  Tcl will then issue a \fISIGINT\fR signal against itself.
@@ -31,22 +32,33 @@ If you are running Tcl under a C debugger, it should then enter the debugger
 command mode.
 .TP
 \fBmemory info\fR
+.
 Returns a report containing the total allocations and frees since 
 Tcl began, the current packets allocated (the current
 number of calls to \fBckalloc\fR not met by a corresponding call 
 to \fBckfree\fR), the current bytes allocated, and the maximum number
 of packets and bytes allocated.
 .TP
-\fB memory init [on|off]\fR
+\fBmemory init \fR[\fBon\fR|\fBoff\fR]
+.
 Turn on or off the pre-initialization of all allocated memory
-with bogus bytes.  Useful for detecting the use of uninitialized values.
+with bogus bytes.  Useful for detecting the use of uninitialized
+values.
+.TP
+\fBmemory objs \fIfile\fR
+.
+Causes a list of all allocated Tcl_Obj values to be written to the specified
+\fIfile\fR immediately, together with where they were allocated.  Useful for
+checking for leaks of values.
 .TP
 \fBmemory onexit\fR \fIfile\fR
+.
 Causes a list of all allocated memory to be written to the specified \fIfile\fR
 during the finalization of Tcl's memory subsystem.  Useful for checking
 that memory is properly cleaned up during process exit.
 .TP
 \fBmemory tag\fR \fIstring\fR
+.
 Each packet of memory allocated by \fBckalloc\fR can have associated
 with it a string-valued tag.  In the lists of allocated memory generated
 by \fBmemory active\fR and \fBmemory onexit\fR, the tag for each packet
@@ -54,22 +66,25 @@ is printed along with other information about the packet.  The
 \fBmemory tag\fR command sets the tag value for subsequent calls
 to \fBckalloc\fR to be \fIstring\fR.  
 .TP
-\fBmemory trace [on|off]\fR
-.br
+\fBmemory trace \fR[\fBon\fR|\fBoff\fR]
+.
 Turns memory tracing on or off.  When memory tracing is on, every call
 to \fBckalloc\fR causes a line of trace information to be written to
 \fIstderr\fR, consisting of the word \fIckalloc\fR, followed by the
 address returned, the amount of memory allocated, and the C filename
 and line number of the code performing the allocation.  For example:
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
 ckalloc 40e478 98 tclProc.c 1406
 .CE
+.PP
 Calls to \fBckfree\fR are traced in the same manner.
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBmemory trace_on_at_malloc\fR \fIcount\fR
-Enable memory tracing after \fIcount\fR \fBckalloc\fR's have been performed.
+.
+Enable memory tracing after \fIcount\fR \fBckalloc\fRs have been performed.
 For example, if you enter \fBmemory trace_on_at_malloc 100\fR,
 after the 100th call to \fBckalloc\fR, memory trace information will begin
 being displayed for all allocations and frees.  Since there can be a lot
@@ -79,7 +94,8 @@ produced), if you can identify a number of allocations that occur before
 the problem sets in.  The current number of memory allocations that have 
 occurred since Tcl started is printed on a guard zone failure.
 .TP
-\fBmemory validate [on|off]\fR
+\fBmemory validate \fR[\fBon\fR|\fBoff\fR]
+.
 Turns memory validation on or off. When memory validation is enabled,
 on every call to \fBckalloc\fR or \fBckfree\fR, the guard zones are
 checked for every piece of memory currently in existence that was
@@ -90,9 +106,7 @@ overwrite can be detected on the first call to \fBckalloc\fR or
 \fBckfree\fR after the overwrite occurred, rather than when the
 specific memory with the overwritten guard zone(s) is freed, which may
 occur long after the overwrite occurred.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 ckalloc, ckfree, Tcl_ValidateAllMemory, Tcl_DumpActiveMemory, TCL_MEM_DEBUG
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 memory, debug
diff --git a/doc/msgcat.n b/doc/msgcat.n
index e6e08b5..00141ad 100644
--- a/doc/msgcat.n
+++ b/doc/msgcat.n
@@ -5,15 +5,15 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH "msgcat" n 1.3 msgcat "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.TH "msgcat" n 1.4 msgcat "Tcl Bundled Packages"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
 msgcat \- Tcl message catalog
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBpackage require Tcl 8.2\fR
+\fBpackage require Tcl 8.5\fR
 .sp
-\fBpackage require msgcat 1.3.4\fR
+\fBpackage require msgcat 1.4.2\fR
 .sp
 \fB::msgcat::mc \fIsrc-string\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .sp
@@ -31,13 +31,13 @@ msgcat \- Tcl message catalog
 .sp
 \fB::msgcat::mcunknown \fIlocale src-string\fR
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The \fBmsgcat\fR package provides a set of functions
 that can be used to manage multi-lingual user interfaces.
-Text strings are defined in a ``message catalog'' which
-is independent from the application, and
+Text strings are defined in a
+.QW "message catalog"
+which is independent from the application, and
 which can be edited or localized without modifying
 the application source code.  New languages
 or locales are provided by adding a new file to
@@ -53,6 +53,7 @@ Returns a translation of \fIsrc-string\fR according to the
 user's current locale.  If additional arguments past \fIsrc-string\fR
 are given, the \fBformat\fR command is used to substitute the
 additional arguments in the translation of \fIsrc-string\fR.
+.RS
 .PP
 \fB::msgcat::mc\fR will search the messages defined
 in the current namespace for a translation of \fIsrc-string\fR; if
@@ -67,6 +68,7 @@ application can pass the English string through \fB::msgcat::mc\fR and
 use the result.  If an application is written for a single language in
 this fashion, then it is easy to add support for additional languages
 later simply by defining new message catalog entries.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fB::msgcat::mcmax ?\fIsrc-string src-string ...\fR?
 Given several source strings, \fB::msgcat::mcmax\fR returns the length
@@ -91,13 +93,16 @@ preference.  The list is derived from the current
 locale set in msgcat by \fB::msgcat::mclocale\fR, and
 cannot be set independently.  For example, if the
 current locale is en_US_funky, then \fB::msgcat::mcpreferences\fR
-returns \fB{en_US_funky en_US en}\fR.
+.VS 1.4
+returns \fB{en_US_funky en_US en {}}\fR.
+.VE 1.4
 .TP
 \fB::msgcat::mcload \fIdirname\fR
 Searches the specified directory for files that match
 the language specifications returned by \fB::msgcat::mcpreferences\fR
-(note that these are all lowercase), extended by the file
-extension ``.msg''.  Each matching file is 
+(note that these are all lowercase), extended by the file extension
+.QW .msg .
+Each matching file is
 read in order, assuming a UTF-8 encoding.  The file contents are
 then evaluated as a Tcl script.  This means that Unicode characters
 may be present in the message file either directly in their UTF-8
@@ -137,10 +142,15 @@ The locale is specified to \fBmsgcat\fR by a locale string
 passed to \fB::msgcat::mclocale\fR.
 The locale string consists of
 a language code, an optional country code, and an optional
-system-specific code, each separated by ``_''.  The country and language
+system-specific code, each separated by
+.QW _ .
+The country and language
 codes are specified in standards ISO-639 and ISO-3166.
-For example, the locale ``en'' specifies English and ``en_US'' specifies
-U.S. English.
+For example, the locale
+.QW en
+specifies English and
+.QW en_US
+specifies U.S. English.
 .PP
 When the msgcat package is first loaded, the locale is initialized
 according to the user's environment.  The variables \fBenv(LC_ALL)\fR,
@@ -159,14 +169,25 @@ On Windows, if none of those environment variables is set, msgcat will
 attempt to extract locale information from the
 registry.  If all these attempts to discover an initial locale
 from the user's environment fail, msgcat defaults to an initial
-locale of ``C''.
+locale of
+.QW C .
 .PP
-When a locale is specified by the user, a ``best match'' search is
-performed during string translation.  For example, if a user specifies
-en_GB_Funky, the locales ``en_GB_Funky'', ``en_GB'', and ``en'' are
-searched in order until a matching translation string is found.  If no
-translation string is available, then \fB::msgcat::mcunknown\fR is
-called.
+When a locale is specified by the user, a
+.QW "best match"
+search is performed during string translation.  For example, if a user
+specifies
+.VS 1.4
+en_GB_Funky, the locales
+.QW en_GB_Funky ,
+.QW en_GB ,
+.QW en
+and
+.MT
+(the empty string)
+.VE 1.4
+are searched in order until a matching translation
+string is found.  If no translation string is available, then
+\fB::msgcat::mcunknown\fR is called.
 .SH "NAMESPACES AND MESSAGE CATALOGS"
 .PP
 Strings stored in the message catalog are stored relative
@@ -194,10 +215,13 @@ hello from ::foo
 When searching for a translation of a message, the
 message catalog will search first the current namespace,
 then the parent of the current namespace, and so on until
-the global namespace is reached.  This allows child namespaces
-to "inherit" messages from their parent namespace.
+the global namespace is reached.  This allows child namespaces to
+.QW inherit
+messages from their parent namespace.
 .PP
-For example, executing (in the ``en'' locale) the code 
+For example, executing (in the
+.QW en
+locale) the code
 .CS
 \fB::msgcat::mcset\fR en m1 ":: message1"
 \fB::msgcat::mcset\fR en m2 ":: message2"
@@ -227,12 +251,23 @@ to the following conditions:
 .IP [1]
 All message files for a package are in the same directory.
 .IP [2]
-The message file name is a msgcat locale specifier (all lowercase)
-followed by ``.msg''.  For example:
+The message file name is a msgcat locale specifier (all lowercase) followed by
+.QW .msg .
+For example:
 .CS
-es.msg    -- spanish
-en_gb.msg -- United Kingdom English
+es.msg    \(em spanish
+en_gb.msg \(em United Kingdom English
 .CE
+.VS 1.4
+\fIException:\fR The message file for the root locale
+.MT
+is called
+.QW \fBROOT.msg\fR .
+This exception is made so as not to
+cause peculiar behavior, such as marking the message file as
+.QW hidden
+on Unix file systems.
+.VE 1.4
 .IP [3]
 The file contains a series of calls to \fBmcset\fR and
 \fBmcmset\fR, setting the necessary translation strings
@@ -276,8 +311,8 @@ format "In location %s we produced %d units" $city $num
 This can be handled by using the positional
 parameters:
 .CS
-format "We produced %1\\$d units in location %2\\$s" $num $city
-format "In location %2\\$s we produced %1\\$d units" $num $city
+format "We produced %1\e$d units in location %2\e$s" $num $city
+format "In location %2\e$s we produced %1\e$d units" $num $city
 .CE
 .PP
 Similarly, positional parameters can be used with \fBscan\fR to
@@ -285,9 +320,7 @@ extract values from internationalized strings.
 .SH CREDITS
 .PP
 The message catalog code was developed by Mark Harrison.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 format(n), scan(n), namespace(n), package(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 internationalization, i18n, localization, l10n, message, text, translation
diff --git a/doc/namespace.n b/doc/namespace.n
index 5468416..ddf7b51 100644
--- a/doc/namespace.n
+++ b/doc/namespace.n
@@ -2,28 +2,28 @@
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993-1997 Bell Labs Innovations for Lucent Technologies
 '\" Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
 '\" Copyright (c) 2000 Scriptics Corporation.
+'\" Copyright (c) 2004-2005 Donal K. Fellows.
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\"
 .so man.macros
-.TH namespace n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH namespace n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
 namespace \- create and manipulate contexts for commands and variables
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBnamespace \fR?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIarg ...\fR?
+\fBnamespace \fR?\fIsubcommand\fR? ?\fIarg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The \fBnamespace\fR command lets you create, access, and destroy
 separate contexts for commands and variables.
 See the section \fBWHAT IS A NAMESPACE?\fR below
 for a brief overview of namespaces.
-The legal values of \fIoption\fR are listed below.
-Note that you can abbreviate the \fIoption\fRs.
+The legal values of \fIsubcommand\fR are listed below.
+Note that you can abbreviate the \fIsubcommand\fRs.
 .TP
 \fBnamespace children \fR?\fInamespace\fR? ?\fIpattern\fR?
 Returns a list of all child namespaces that belong to the
@@ -54,7 +54,7 @@ and they will be passed to \fIscript\fR as additional arguments.
 For example, suppose the command
 \fBset script [namespace code {foo bar}]\fR
 is invoked in namespace \fB::a::b\fR.
-Then \fBeval "$script x y"\fR
+Then \fBeval $script [list x y]\fR
 can be executed in any namespace (assuming the value of
 \fBscript\fR has been passed in properly)
 and will have the same effect as the command
@@ -69,7 +69,8 @@ of how this is used to create callback scripts.
 .TP
 \fBnamespace current\fR
 Returns the fully-qualified name for the current namespace.
-The actual name of the global namespace is ``''
+The actual name of the global namespace is
+.MT
 (i.e., an empty string),
 but this command returns \fB::\fR for the global namespace
 as a convenience to programmers.
@@ -82,9 +83,16 @@ If a procedure is currently executing inside the namespace,
 the namespace will be kept alive until the procedure returns;
 however, the namespace is marked to prevent other code from
 looking it up by name.
-If a namespace doesn't exist, this command returns an error.
+If a namespace does not exist, this command returns an error.
 If no namespace names are given, this command does nothing.
 .TP
+\fBnamespace ensemble\fR \fIsubcommand\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
+.VS 8.5
+Creates and manipulates a command that is formed out of an ensemble of
+subcommands.  See the section \fBENSEMBLES\fR below for further
+details.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
 \fBnamespace eval\fR \fInamespace arg\fR ?\fIarg ...\fR?
 Activates a namespace called \fInamespace\fR and evaluates some code
 in that context.
@@ -93,11 +101,12 @@ If more than one \fIarg\fR argument is specified,
 the arguments are concatenated together with a space between each one
 in the same fashion as the \fBeval\fR command,
 and the result is evaluated.
-.br
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 If \fInamespace\fR has leading namespace qualifiers
 and any leading namespaces do not exist,
 they are automatically created.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBnamespace exists\fR \fInamespace\fR
 Returns \fB1\fR if \fInamespace\fR is a valid namespace in the current
@@ -117,10 +126,10 @@ but it may not include any namespace qualifiers.
 That is, the pattern can only specify commands
 in the current (exporting) namespace.
 Each \fIpattern\fR is appended onto the namespace's list of export patterns.
-If the \-\fBclear\fR flag is given,
+If the \fB\-clear\fR flag is given,
 the namespace's export pattern list is reset to empty before any
 \fIpattern\fR arguments are appended.
-If no \fIpattern\fRs are given and the \-\fBclear\fR flag isn't given,
+If no \fIpattern\fRs are given and the \fB\-clear\fR flag is not given,
 this command returns the namespace's current export list.
 .TP
 \fBnamespace forget \fR?\fIpattern pattern ...\fR?
@@ -129,24 +138,37 @@ Each \fIpattern\fR is a simple or qualified name such as
 \fBx\fR, \fBfoo::x\fR or \fBa::b::p*\fR.
 Qualified names contain double colons (\fB::\fR) and qualify a name
 with the name of one or more namespaces.
-Each \fIqualified pattern\fR is qualified with the name of an
-exporting namespace 
+Each
+.QW "qualified pattern"
+is qualified with the name of an exporting namespace
 and may have glob-style special characters in the command name
 at the end of the qualified name.
 Glob characters may not appear in a namespace name.
-For each \fIsimple pattern\fR this command deletes the matching
-commands of the 
+For each
+.QW "simple pattern"
+this command deletes the matching commands of the
 current namespace that were imported from a different namespace.
-For \fIqualified patterns\fR, this command first finds the matching
-exported commands. 
+For
+.QW "qualified patterns" ,
+this command first finds the matching exported commands.
 It then checks whether any of those commands
 were previously imported by the current namespace.
-If so, this command deletes the corresponding imported commands. 
+If so, this command deletes the corresponding imported commands.
 In effect, this un-does the action of a \fBnamespace import\fR command.
 .TP
 \fBnamespace import \fR?\fB\-force\fR? ?\fIpattern\fR \fIpattern ...\fR?
-Imports commands into a namespace.
-Each \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name like
+.VS 8.5
+Imports commands into a namespace, or queries the set of imported
+commands in a namespace.  When no arguments are present,
+\fBnamespace import\fR returns the list of commands in
+the current namespace that have been imported from other
+namespaces.  The commands in the returned list are in
+the format of simple names, with no namespace qualifiers at all.
+This format is suitable for composition with \fBnamespace forget\fR
+(see \fBEXAMPLES\fR below).
+.VE 8.5
+When \fIpattern\fR arguments are present,
+each \fIpattern\fR is a qualified name like
 \fBfoo::x\fR or \fBa::p*\fR.
 That is, it includes the name of an exporting namespace
 and may have glob-style special characters in the command name
@@ -180,12 +202,18 @@ The \fBnamespace inscope\fR command is much like the \fBnamespace eval\fR
 command except that the \fInamespace\fR must already exist,
 and \fBnamespace inscope\fR appends additional \fIarg\fRs
 as proper list elements.
-.br
+.RS
+.PP
+.CS
 \fBnamespace inscope ::foo $script $x $y $z\fR
+.CE
 is equivalent to
+.CS
 \fBnamespace eval ::foo [concat $script [list $x $y $z]]\fR
+.CE
 thus additional arguments will not undergo a second round of substitution,
 as is the case with \fBnamespace eval\fR.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBnamespace origin \fIcommand\fR
 Returns the fully-qualified name of the original command
@@ -207,6 +235,17 @@ for namespace \fInamespace\fR.
 If \fInamespace\fR is not specified,
 the fully-qualified name of the current namespace's parent is returned.
 .TP
+\fBnamespace path\fR ?\fInamespaceList\fR?
+.\" Should really have the .TP inside the .VS, but that triggers a groff bug
+.VS 8.5
+Returns the command resolution path of the current namespace. If
+\fInamespaceList\fR is specified as a list of named namespaces, the
+current namespace's command resolution path is set to those namespaces
+and returns the empty list. The default command resolution path is
+always empty. See the section \fBNAME RESOLUTION\fR below for an
+explanation of the rules regarding name resolution.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
 \fBnamespace qualifiers\fR \fIstring\fR
 Returns any leading namespace qualifiers for \fIstring\fR.
 Qualifiers are namespace names separated by double colons (\fB::\fR).
@@ -228,6 +267,27 @@ This command is the complement of the \fBnamespace qualifiers\fR command.
 It does not check whether the namespace names are, in fact,
 the names of currently defined namespaces.
 .TP
+\fBnamespace upvar\fR \fInamespace\fR \fIotherVar myVar \fR?\fIotherVar myVar \fR...
+This command arranges for one or more local variables in the current
+procedure to refer to variables in \fInamespace\fR. The namespace name is
+resolved as described in section \fBNAME RESOLUTION\fR.
+The command
+\fBnamespace upvar $ns a b\fR has the same behaviour as
+\fBupvar 0 ${ns}::a b\fR, with the sole exception of the resolution rules
+used for qualified namespace or variable names.
+\fBnamespace upvar\fR returns an empty string.
+.TP
+\fBnamespace unknown\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
+Sets or returns the unknown command handler for the current namespace.
+The handler is invoked when a command called from within the namespace
+cannot be found (in either the current namespace or the global namespace).
+The \fIscript\fR argument, if given, should be a well
+formed list representing a command name and optional arguments. When
+the handler is invoked, the full invocation line will be appended to the
+script and the result evaluated in the context of the namespace. The
+default handler for all namespaces is \fB::unknown\fR. If no argument
+is given, it returns the handler for the current namespace.
+.TP
 \fBnamespace which\fR ?\-\fBcommand\fR? ?\-\fBvariable\fR? \fIname\fR
 Looks up \fIname\fR as either a command or variable
 and returns its fully-qualified name.
@@ -237,7 +297,7 @@ this command returns a fully-qualified name in the global namespace.
 If the command or variable does not exist,
 this command returns an empty string.  If the variable has been
 created but not defined, such as with the \fBvariable\fR command
-or through a \fBtrace\fR on the variable, this command will return the 
+or through a \fBtrace\fR on the variable, this command will return the
 fully-qualified name of the variable.
 If no flag is given, \fIname\fR is treated as a command name.
 See the section \fBNAME RESOLUTION\fR below for an explanation of
@@ -246,7 +306,7 @@ the rules regarding name resolution.
 .PP
 A namespace is a collection of commands and variables.
 It encapsulates the commands and variables to ensure that they
-won't interfere with the commands and variables of other namespaces.
+will not interfere with the commands and variables of other namespaces.
 Tcl has always had one such collection,
 which we refer to as the \fIglobal namespace\fR.
 The global namespace holds all global variables and commands.
@@ -317,8 +377,9 @@ Qualified names are similar to the hierarchical path names for
 Unix files or Tk widgets,
 except that \fB::\fR is used as the separator
 instead of \fB/\fR or \fB.\fR.
-The topmost or global namespace has the name ``'' (i.e., an empty string),
-although \fB::\fR is a synonym.
+The topmost or global namespace has the name
+.MT
+(i.e., an empty string), although \fB::\fR is a synonym.
 As an example, the name \fB::safe::interp::create\fR
 refers to the command \fBcreate\fR in the namespace \fBinterp\fR
 that is a child of namespace \fB::safe\fR,
@@ -377,11 +438,19 @@ If you provide a fully-qualified name that starts with a \fB::\fR,
 there is no question about what command, variable, or namespace
 you mean.
 However, if the name does not start with a \fB::\fR
-(i.e., is \fIrelative\fR), 
-Tcl follows a fixed rule for looking it up:
-Command and variable names are always resolved
+(i.e., is \fIrelative\fR),
+Tcl follows basic rules for looking it up:
+Variable names are always resolved
 by looking first in the current namespace,
 and then in the global namespace.
+.VS 8.5
+Command names are also always resolved by looking in the current
+namespace first. If not found there, they are searched for in every
+namespace on the current namespace's command path (which is empty by
+default). If not found there, command names are looked up in the
+global namespace (or, failing that, are processed by the \fBunknown\fR
+command.)
+.VE 8.5
 Namespace names, on the other hand, are always resolved
 by looking in only the current namespace.
 .PP
@@ -409,7 +478,7 @@ set traceLevel 0
 }
 .CE
 Here Tcl looks for \fBtraceLevel\fR first in the namespace \fBFoo::Debug\fR.
-Since it is not found there, Tcl then looks for it 
+Since it is not found there, Tcl then looks for it
 in the global namespace.
 The variable \fBFoo::traceLevel\fR is completely ignored
 during the name resolution process.
@@ -484,7 +553,7 @@ from a namespace that that namespace exported
 with a \fBnamespace export\fR command.
 .PP
 Importing \fIevery\fR command from a namespace is generally
-a bad idea since you don't know what you will get.
+a bad idea since you do not know what you will get.
 It is better to import just the specific commands you need.
 For example, the command
 .CS
@@ -561,12 +630,14 @@ may be imported by other namespaces.
 If a \fBnamespace import\fR command specifies a command
 that is not exported, the command is not imported.
 .SH "SCOPED SCRIPTS"
+.PP
 The \fBnamespace code\fR command is the means by which a script may be
 packaged for evaluation in a namespace other than the one in which it
 was created.  It is used most often to create event handlers, Tk bindings,
 and traces for evaluation in the global context.  For instance, the following
-code indicates how to direct a variable trace callback into the current
+code indicates how to direct a variable \fBtrace\fR callback into the current
 namespace:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBnamespace eval\fR a {
    variable b
@@ -575,14 +646,172 @@ namespace:
       puts "the value of $n1 has changed to $var"
       return
    }
-   trace variable b w [\fBnamespace code\fR theTraceCallback]
+   trace add variable b write [\fBnamespace code\fR theTraceCallback]
 }
 set a::b c
 .CE
+.PP
 When executed, it prints the message:
+.PP
 .CS
 the value of a::b has changed to c
 .CE
+.SH ENSEMBLES
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+The \fBnamespace ensemble\fR is used to create and manipulate ensemble
+commands, which are commands formed by grouping subcommands together.
+The commands typically come from the current namespace when the
+ensemble was created, though this is configurable.  Note that there
+may be any number of ensembles associated with any namespace
+(including none, which is true of all namespaces by default), though
+all the ensembles associated with a namespace are deleted when that
+namespace is deleted.  The link between an ensemble command and its
+namespace is maintained however the ensemble is renamed.
+.PP
+Three subcommands of the \fBnamespace ensemble\fR command are defined:
+.TP
+\fBnamespace ensemble create\fR ?\fIoption value ...\fR?
+Creates a new ensemble command linked to the current namespace,
+returning the fully qualified name of the command created.  The
+arguments to \fBnamespace ensemble create\fR allow the configuration
+of the command as if with the \fBnamespace ensemble configure\fR
+command.  If not overridden with the \fB\-command\fR option, this
+command creates an ensemble with exactly the same name as the linked
+namespace.  See the section \fBENSEMBLE OPTIONS\fR below for a full
+list of options supported and their effects.
+.TP
+\fBnamespace ensemble configure \fIcommand\fR ?\fIoption\fR? ?\fIvalue ...\fR?
+Retrieves the value of an option associated with the ensemble command
+named \fIcommand\fR, or updates some options associated with that
+ensemble command.  See the section \fBENSEMBLE OPTIONS\fR below for a
+full list of options supported and their effects.
+.TP
+\fBnamespace ensemble exists\fR \fIcommand\fR
+Returns a boolean value that describes whether the command
+\fIcommand\fR exists and is an ensemble command.  This command only
+ever returns an error if the number of arguments to the command is
+wrong.
+.PP
+When called, an ensemble command takes its first argument and looks it
+up (according to the rules described below) to discover a list of
+words to replace the ensemble command and subcommand with.  The
+resulting list of words is then evaluated (with no further
+substitutions) as if that was what was typed originally (i.e. by
+passing the list of words through \fBTcl_EvalObjv\fR) and returning
+the result of the command.  Note that it is legal to make the target
+of an ensemble rewrite be another (or even the same) ensemble
+command.  The ensemble command will not be visible through the use of
+the \fBuplevel\fR or \fBinfo level\fR commands.
+.SS "ENSEMBLE OPTIONS"
+.PP
+The following options, supported by the \fBnamespace ensemble
+create\fR and \fBnamespace ensemble configure\fR commands, control how
+an ensemble command behaves:
+.TP
+\fB\-map\fR
+When non-empty, this option supplies a dictionary that provides a
+mapping from subcommand names to a list of prefix words to substitute
+in place of the ensemble command and subcommand words (in a manner
+similar to an alias created with \fBinterp alias\fR; the words are not
+reparsed after substitution).  When this option is empty, the mapping
+will be from the local name of the subcommand to its fully-qualified
+name.  Note that when this option is non-empty and the
+\fB\-subcommands\fR option is empty, the ensemble subcommand names
+will be exactly those words that have mappings in the dictionary.
+.TP
+\fB\-prefixes\fR
+This option (which is enabled by default) controls whether the
+ensemble command recognizes unambiguous prefixes of its subcommands.
+When turned off, the ensemble command requires exact matching of
+subcommand names.
+.TP
+\fB\-subcommands\fR
+When non-empty, this option lists exactly what subcommands are in the
+ensemble.  The mapping for each of those commands will be either whatever
+is defined in the \fB\-map\fR option, or to the command with the same
+name in the namespace linked to the ensemble.  If this option is
+empty, the subcommands of the namespace will either be the keys of the
+dictionary listed in the \fB\-map\fR option or the exported commands
+of the linked namespace at the time of the invocation of the ensemble
+command.
+.TP
+\fB\-unknown\fR
+When non-empty, this option provides a partial command (to which all
+the words that are arguments to the ensemble command, including the
+fully-qualified name of the ensemble, are appended) to handle the case
+where an ensemble subcommand is not recognized and would otherwise
+generate an error.  When empty (the default) an error (in the style of
+\fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR) is generated whenever the ensemble is
+unable to determine how to implement a particular subcommand.  See
+\fBUNKNOWN HANDLER BEHAVIOUR\fR for more details.
+.PP
+The following extra option is allowed by \fBnamespace ensemble
+create\fR:
+.TP
+\fB\-command\fR
+This write-only option allows the name of the ensemble created by
+\fBnamespace ensemble create\fR to be anything in any existing
+namespace.  The default value for this option is the fully-qualified
+name of the namespace in which the \fBnamespace ensemble create\fR
+command is invoked.
+.PP
+The following extra option is allowed by \fBnamespace ensemble
+configure\fR:
+.TP
+\fB\-namespace\fR
+This read-only option allows the retrieval of the fully-qualified name
+of the namespace which the ensemble was created within.
+.SS "UNKNOWN HANDLER BEHAVIOUR"
+.PP
+If an unknown handler is specified for an ensemble, that handler is
+called when the ensemble command would otherwise return an error due
+to it being unable to decide which subcommand to invoke. The exact
+conditions under which that occurs are controlled by the
+\fB\-subcommands\fR, \fB\-map\fR and \fB\-prefixes\fR options as
+described above.
+.PP
+To execute the unknown handler, the ensemble mechanism takes the
+specified \fB\-unknown\fR option and appends each argument of the
+attempted ensemble command invocation (including the ensemble command
+itself, expressed as a fully qualified name). It invokes the resulting
+command in the scope of the attempted call. If the execution of the
+unknown handler terminates normally, the ensemble engine reparses the
+subcommand (as described below) and tries to dispatch it again, which
+is ideal for when the ensemble's configuration has been updated by the
+unknown subcommand handler. Any other kind of termination of the
+unknown handler is treated as an error.
+.PP
+The result of the unknown handler is expected to be a list (it is an
+error if it is not). If the list is an empty list, the ensemble
+command attempts to look up the original subcommand again and, if it
+is not found this time, an error will be generated just as if the
+\fB\-unknown\fR handler was not there (i.e. for any particular
+invocation of an ensemble, its unknown handler will be called at most
+once.) This makes it easy for the unknown handler to update the
+ensemble or its backing namespace so as to provide an implementation
+of the desired subcommand and reparse.
+.PP
+When the result is a non-empty list, the words of that list are used
+to replace the ensemble command and subcommand, just as if they had
+been looked up in the \fB\-map\fR. It is up to the unknown handler to
+supply all namespace qualifiers if the implementing subcommand is not
+in the namespace of the caller of the ensemble command. Also note that
+when ensemble commands are chained (e.g. if you make one of the
+commands that implement an ensemble subcommand into an ensemble, in a
+manner similar to the \fBtext\fR widget's tag and mark subcommands) then the
+rewrite happens in the context of the caller of the outermost
+ensemble. That is to say that ensembles do not in themselves place any
+namespace contexts on the Tcl call stack.
+.PP
+Where an empty \fB\-unknown\fR handler is given (the default), the
+ensemble command will generate an error message based on the list of
+commands that the ensemble has defined (formatted similarly to the
+error message from \fBTcl_GetIndexFromObj\fR). This is the error that
+will be thrown when the subcommand is still not recognized during
+reparsing. It is also an error for an \fB\-unknown\fR handler to
+delete its namespace.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Create a namespace containing a variable and an exported command:
 .CS
@@ -599,20 +828,38 @@ Create a namespace containing a variable and an exported command:
 Call the command defined in the previous example in various ways.
 .CS
 # Direct call
-foo::grill
+::foo::grill
+
+# Use the command resolution path to find the name
+\fBnamespace eval\fR boo {
+   \fBnamespace path\fR ::foo
+   grill
+}
 
 # Import into current namespace, then call local alias
-namespace import foo::grill
+\fBnamespace import\fR foo::grill
 grill
+
+# Create two ensembles, one with the default name and one with a
+# specified name.  Then call through the ensembles.
+\fBnamespace eval\fR foo {
+   \fBnamespace ensemble\fR create
+   \fBnamespace ensemble\fR create -command ::foobar
+}
+foo grill
+foobar grill
 .CE
 .PP
 Look up where the command imported in the previous example came from:
 .CS
 puts "grill came from [\fBnamespace origin\fR grill]"
 .CE
-
+.PP
+Remove all imported commands from the current namespace:
+.CS
+namespace forget {*}[namespace import]
+.CE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-variable(n)
-
+interp(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
-exported, internal, variable
+command, ensemble, exported, internal, variable
diff --git a/doc/open.n b/doc/open.n
index 1557ca9..88283bb 100644
--- a/doc/open.n
+++ b/doc/open.n
@@ -19,7 +19,6 @@ open \- Open a file-based or command pipeline channel
 .br
 \fBopen \fIfileName access permissions\fR
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command opens a file, serial port, or command pipeline and returns a
@@ -43,22 +42,30 @@ Open the file for both reading and writing; the file must
 already exist.
 .TP 15
 \fBw\fR
-Open the file for writing only.  Truncate it if it exists.  If it doesn't
+Open the file for writing only.  Truncate it if it exists.  If it does not
 exist, create a new file.
 .TP 15
 \fBw+\fR
 Open the file for reading and writing.  Truncate it if it exists.
-If it doesn't exist, create a new file.
+If it does not exist, create a new file.
 .TP 15
 \fBa\fR
-Open the file for writing only.  If the file doesn't exist,
+Open the file for writing only.  If the file does not exist,
 create a new empty file.
 Set the file pointer to the end of the file prior to each write.
 .TP 15
 \fBa+\fR
-Open the file for reading and writing.  If the file doesn't exist,
+Open the file for reading and writing.  If the file does not exist,
 create a new empty file.
 Set the initial access position  to the end of the file.
+.VS 8.5
+.PP
+All of the legal \fIaccess\fR values above may have the character
+\fBb\fR added as the second or third character in the value to
+indicate that the opened channel should be configured with the
+\fB\-translation binary\fR option, making the channel suitable for 
+reading or writing of binary data.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 In the second form, \fIaccess\fR consists of a list of any of the
 following flags, all of which have the standard POSIX meanings.
@@ -75,9 +82,14 @@ Open the file for both reading and writing.
 .TP 15
 \fBAPPEND\fR
 Set the file pointer to the end of the file prior to each write.
+.VS 8.5
+.TP 15
+\fBBINARY\fR
+Configure the opened channel with the \fB\-translation binary\fR option.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP 15
 \fBCREAT\fR
-Create the file if it doesn't already exist (without this flag it
+Create the file if it does not already exist (without this flag it
 is an error for the file not to exist).
 .TP 15
 \fBEXCL\fR
@@ -104,18 +116,11 @@ If a new file is created as part of opening it, \fIpermissions\fR
 (an integer) is used to set the permissions for the new file in
 conjunction with the process's file mode creation mask.
 \fIPermissions\fR defaults to 0666.
-.PP
-Note that if you are going to be reading or writing binary data from
-the channel created by this command, you should use the
-\fBfconfigure\fR command to change the \fB-translation\fR option of
-the channel to \fBbinary\fR before transferring any binary data.  This
-is in contrast to the ``b'' character passed as part of the equivalent
-of the \fIaccess\fR parameter to some versions of the C library
-\fIfopen()\fR function.
-
 .SH "COMMAND PIPELINES"
 .PP
-If the first character of \fIfileName\fR is ``|'' then the
+If the first character of \fIfileName\fR is
+.QW |
+then the
 remaining characters of \fIfileName\fR are treated as a list of arguments
 that describe a command pipeline to invoke, in the same style as the
 arguments for \fBexec\fR.
@@ -140,7 +145,6 @@ returned (a silent \fBclose\fR with -blocking 0).
 It is often useful to use the \fBfileevent\fR command with pipelines
 so other processing may happen at the same time as running the command
 in the background.
-.VS 8.4
 .SH "SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS"
 .PP
 If \fIfileName\fR refers to a serial port, then the specified serial port
@@ -156,8 +160,14 @@ This option is a set of 4 comma-separated values: the baud rate, parity,
 number of data bits, and number of stop bits for this serial port.  The
 \fIbaud\fR rate is a simple integer that specifies the connection speed.
 \fIParity\fR is one of the following letters: \fBn\fR, \fBo\fR, \fBe\fR,
-\fBm\fR, \fBs\fR; respectively signifying the parity options of ``none'',
-``odd'', ``even'', ``mark'', or ``space''.  \fIData\fR is the number of
+\fBm\fR, \fBs\fR; respectively signifying the parity options of
+.QW none ,
+.QW odd ,
+.QW even ,
+.QW mark ,
+or
+.QW space .
+\fIData\fR is the number of
 data bits and should be an integer from 5 to 8, while \fIstop\fR is the
 number of stop bits and should be the integer 1 or 2.
 .TP
@@ -165,19 +175,21 @@ number of stop bits and should be the integer 1 or 2.
 (Windows and Unix). This option is used to setup automatic handshake
 control. Note that not all handshake types maybe supported by your operating
 system. The \fItype\fR parameter is case-independent.
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 If \fItype\fR is \fBnone\fR then any handshake is switched off.
 \fBrtscts\fR activates hardware handshake. Hardware handshake signals
 are described below.
 For software handshake \fBxonxoff\fR the handshake characters can be redefined
-with \fB-xchar\fR.
+with \fB\-xchar\fR.
 An additional hardware handshake \fBdtrdsr\fR is available only under Windows.
 There is no default handshake configuration, the initial value depends
 on your operating system settings.
-The \fB-handshake\fR option cannot be queried.
+The \fB\-handshake\fR option cannot be queried.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fB\-queue\fR
-(Windows and Unix). The \fB-queue\fR option can only be queried.
+(Windows and Unix). The \fB\-queue\fR option can only be queried.
 It returns a list of two integers representing the current number
 of bytes in the input and output queue respectively.
 .TP
@@ -186,7 +198,7 @@ of bytes in the input and output queue respectively.
 read operations. It specifies the maximum interval between the
 reception of two bytes in milliseconds.
 For Unix systems the granularity is 100 milliseconds.
-The \fB-timeout\fR option does not affect write operations or
+The \fB\-timeout\fR option does not affect write operations or
 nonblocking reads.
 This option cannot be queried.
 .TP
@@ -197,13 +209,13 @@ The \fIsignal\fR names are case-independent.
 \fB{RTS 1 DTR 0}\fR sets the RTS output to high and the DTR output to low.
 The BREAK condition (see below) is enabled and disabled with \fB{BREAK 1}\fR and
 \fB{BREAK 0}\fR respectively.
-It's not a good idea to change the \fBRTS\fR (or \fBDTR\fR) signal
+It is not a good idea to change the \fBRTS\fR (or \fBDTR\fR) signal
 with active hardware handshake \fBrtscts\fR (or \fBdtrdsr\fR).
 The result is unpredictable.
-The \fB-ttycontrol\fR option cannot be queried.
+The \fB\-ttycontrol\fR option cannot be queried.
 .TP
 \fB\-ttystatus\fR
-(Windows and Unix). The \fB-ttystatus\fR option can only be
+(Windows and Unix). The \fB\-ttystatus\fR option can only be
 queried.  It returns the current modem status and handshake input signals
 (see below).
 The result is a list of signal,value pairs with a fixed order,
@@ -239,7 +251,6 @@ In case of a serial communication error, \fBread\fR or \fBputs\fR
 returns a general Tcl file I/O error.
 \fBfconfigure -lasterror\fR can be called to get a list of error details.
 See below for an explanation of the various error codes.
-
 .SH "SERIAL PORT SIGNALS"
 .PP
 RS-232 is the most commonly used standard electrical interface for serial
@@ -250,7 +261,6 @@ lines and handshaking. Here we are using the terms \fIworkstation\fR for
 your computer and \fImodem\fR for the external device, because some signal
 names (DCD, RI) come from modems. Of course your external device may use
 these signal lines for other purposes.
-
 .IP \fBTXD(output)\fR
 \fBTransmitted Data:\fR Outgoing serial data.
 .IP \fBRXD(input)\fR
@@ -270,8 +280,9 @@ serial port is opened.
 \fBData Set Ready:\fR The complement to DTR. Tells the workstation that the
 modem is ready to establish a link.
 .IP \fBDCD(input)\fR
-\fBData Carrier Detect:\fR This line becomes active when a modem detects
-a "Carrier" signal.
+\fBData Carrier Detect:\fR This line becomes active when a modem detects a
+.QW Carrier
+signal.
 .IP \fBRI(input)\fR
 \fBRing Indicator:\fR Goes active when the modem detects an incoming call.
 .IP \fBBREAK\fR
@@ -281,17 +292,15 @@ milliseconds.  Normally a receive or transmit data signal stays at the mark
 (on=1) voltage until the next character is transferred. A BREAK is sometimes
 used to reset the communications line or change the operating mode of
 communications hardware.
-
 .SH "ERROR CODES (Windows only)"
 .PP
 A lot of different errors may occur during serial read operations or during
 event polling in background. The external device may have been switched
 off, the data lines may be noisy, system buffers may overrun or your mode
-settings may be wrong.  That's why a reliable software should always
+settings may be wrong.  That is why a reliable software should always
 \fBcatch\fR serial read operations.  In cases of an error Tcl returns a
 general file I/O error.  Then \fBfconfigure -lasterror\fR may help to
 locate the problem.  The following error codes may be returned.
-
 .TP 10
 \fBRXOVER\fR
 Windows input buffer overrun. The data comes faster than your scripts reads
@@ -320,8 +329,6 @@ may cause this error.
 .TP 10
 \fBBREAK\fR
 A BREAK condition has been detected by your UART (see above).
-.VE
-
 .SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
 .TP
 \fBWindows \fR(all versions)
@@ -356,7 +363,8 @@ standard input from a pipe and send standard output to a pipe run
 synchronously.  Command pipelines that do not execute 16-bit DOS
 applications run asynchronously and can be opened for both reading and
 writing.  
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 When running Tcl interactively, there may be some strange interactions
 between the real console, if one is present, and a command pipeline that uses
 standard input or output.  If a command pipeline is opened for reading from
@@ -369,7 +377,7 @@ console at the same time.  If the command pipeline is started from a script,
 so that Tcl is not accessing the console, or if the command pipeline does
 not use standard input or output, but is redirected from or to a file, then
 the above problems do not occur.  
-.sp
+.PP
 Whether or not Tcl is running interactively, if a command pipeline is opened
 for reading from a 16-bit DOS application, the call to \fBopen\fR will not
 return until end-of-file has been received from the command pipeline's
@@ -377,22 +385,16 @@ standard output.  If a command pipeline is opened for writing to a 16-bit DOS
 application, no data will be sent to the command pipeline's standard output
 until the pipe is actually closed.  This problem occurs because 16-bit DOS
 applications are run synchronously, as described above.  
-.TP
-\fBMacintosh\fR
-Opening a serial port is not currently implemented under Macintosh.
-.sp
-Opening a command pipeline is not supported under Macintosh, since 
-applications do not support the concept of standard input or output.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBUnix\fR\0\0\0\0\0\0\0
 Valid values for \fIfileName\fR to open a serial port are generally of the
 form \fB/dev/tty\fIX\fR, where \fIX\fR is \fBa\fR or \fBb\fR, but the name
 of any pseudo-file that maps to a serial port may be used.
-.VS 8.4
 Advanced configuration options are only supported for serial ports
 when Tcl is built to use the POSIX serial interface.
-.VE 8.4
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 When running Tcl interactively, there may be some strange interactions
 between the console, if one is present, and a command pipeline that uses
 standard input.  If a command pipeline is opened for reading, some
@@ -402,9 +404,10 @@ both Tcl and the child application are competing for the console at the
 same time.  If the command pipeline is started from a script, so that Tcl is
 not accessing the console, or if the command pipeline does not use standard
 input, but is redirected from a file, then the above problem does not occur.  
-.LP
-See the PORTABILITY ISSUES section of the \fBexec\fR command for additional
-information not specific to command pipelines about executing
+.RE
+.PP
+See the \fBPORTABILITY ISSUES\fR section of the \fBexec\fR command for
+additional information not specific to command pipelines about executing
 applications on the various platforms
 .SH "EXAMPLE"
 Open a command pipeline and catch any errors:
@@ -415,11 +418,9 @@ if {[catch {close $fl} err]} {
     puts "ls command failed: $err"
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 file(n), close(n), filename(n), fconfigure(n), gets(n), read(n),
 puts(n), exec(n), pid(n), fopen(3)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 access mode, append, create, file, non-blocking, open, permissions,
 pipeline, process, serial
diff --git a/doc/package.n b/doc/package.n
index 60be18b..d4fe657 100644
--- a/doc/package.n
+++ b/doc/package.n
@@ -15,13 +15,16 @@ package \- Facilities for package loading and version control
 \fBpackage forget ?\fIpackage package ...\fR?
 \fBpackage ifneeded \fIpackage version\fR ?\fIscript\fR?
 \fBpackage names\fR
-\fBpackage present \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
+\fBpackage present \fIpackage \fR?\fIrequirement...\fR?
+\fBpackage present \-exact \fIpackage version\fR
 \fBpackage provide \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
-\fBpackage require \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
+\fBpackage require \fIpackage \fR?\fIrequirement...\fR?
+\fBpackage require \-exact \fIpackage version\fR
 \fBpackage unknown \fR?\fIcommand\fR?
 \fBpackage vcompare \fIversion1 version2\fR
 \fBpackage versions \fIpackage\fR
-\fBpackage vsatisfies \fIversion1 version2\fR
+\fBpackage vsatisfies \fIversion requirement...\fR
+\fBpackage prefer \fR?\fBlatest\fR|\fBstable\fR?
 .fi
 .BE
 
@@ -74,7 +77,8 @@ interpreter for which a version has been provided (via
 script is available.
 The order of elements in the list is arbitrary.
 .TP
-\fBpackage present \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
+\fBpackage present\fR ?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage\fR ?\fIrequirement...\fR?
+.
 This command is equivalent to \fBpackage require\fR except that it
 does not try and load the package if it is not already loaded.
 .TP
@@ -90,25 +94,34 @@ returns the version number that is currently provided, or an
 empty string if no \fBpackage provide\fR command has been
 invoked for \fIpackage\fR in this interpreter.  
 .TP
-\fBpackage require \fR?\fB\-exact\fR? \fIpackage \fR?\fIversion\fR?
+\fBpackage require\fR \fIpackage \fR?\fIrequirement...\fR?
 This command is typically invoked by Tcl code that wishes to use
 a particular version of a particular package.  The arguments
 indicate which package is wanted, and the command ensures that
 a suitable version of the package is loaded into the interpreter.
 If the command succeeds, it returns the version number that is
 loaded;  otherwise it generates an error.
-If both the \fB\-exact\fR
-switch and the \fIversion\fR argument are specified then only the
-given version is acceptable.  If \fB\-exact\fR is omitted but
-\fIversion\fR is specified, then versions later than \fIversion\fR
-are also acceptable as long as they have the same major version
-number as \fIversion\fR.
-If both \fB\-exact\fR and \fIversion\fR are omitted then any
-version whatsoever is acceptable.
+.RS
+.PP
+A suitable version of the package is any version which satisfies at
+least one of the requirements, per the rules of \fBpackage
+vsatisfies\fR. If multiple versions are suitable the implementation
+with the highest version is chosen. This last part is additionally
+influenced by the selection mode set with \fBpackage prefer\fR.
+.PP
+In the
+.QW stable
+selection mode the command will select the highest
+stable version satisfying the requirements, if any. If no stable
+version satisfies the requirements, the highest unstable version
+satisfying the requirements will be selected.  In the
+.QW latest
+selection mode the command will accept the highest version satisfying
+all the requirements, regardless of its stableness.
+.PP
 If a version of \fIpackage\fR has already been provided (by invoking
 the \fBpackage provide\fR command), then its version number must
-satisfy the criteria given by \fB\-exact\fR and \fIversion\fR and
-the command returns immediately.
+satisfy the \fIrequirement\fRs and the command returns immediately.
 Otherwise, the command searches the database of information provided by
 previous \fBpackage ifneeded\fR commands to see if an acceptable
 version of the package is available.
@@ -124,20 +137,28 @@ it completes, Tcl checks again to see if the package is now provided
 or if there is a \fBpackage ifneeded\fR script for it.
 If all of these steps fail to provide an acceptable version of the
 package, then the command returns an error.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBpackage require \-exact \fIpackage version\fR
+This form of the command is used when only the given \fIversion\fR
+of \fIpackage\fR is acceptable to the caller.  This command is
+equivalent to \fBpackage require \fIpackage version\fR-\fIversion\fR.
 .TP
 \fBpackage unknown \fR?\fIcommand\fR?
-This command supplies a ``last resort'' command to invoke during
+This command supplies a
+.QW "last resort"
+command to invoke during
 \fBpackage require\fR if no suitable version of a package can be found
 in the \fBpackage ifneeded\fR database.
 If the \fIcommand\fR argument is supplied, it contains the first part
 of a command;  when the command is invoked during a \fBpackage require\fR
-command, Tcl appends two additional arguments giving the desired package
-name and version.
+command, Tcl appends one or more additional arguments giving the desired
+package name and requirements.
 For example, if \fIcommand\fR is \fBfoo bar\fR and later the command
 \fBpackage require test 2.4\fR is invoked, then Tcl will execute
 the command \fBfoo bar test 2.4\fR to load the package.
-If no version number is supplied to the \fBpackage require\fR command,
-then the version argument for the invoked command will be an empty string.
+If no requirements are supplied to the \fBpackage require\fR command,
+then only the name will be added to invoked command.
 If the \fBpackage unknown\fR command is invoked without a \fIcommand\fR
 argument, then the current \fBpackage unknown\fR script is returned,
 or an empty string if there is none.
@@ -154,11 +175,107 @@ Returns a list of all the version numbers of \fIpackage\fR
 for which information has been provided by \fBpackage ifneeded\fR
 commands.
 .TP
-\fBpackage vsatisfies \fIversion1 version2\fR
-Returns 1 if scripts written for \fIversion2\fR will work unchanged
-with \fIversion1\fR (i.e. \fIversion1\fR is equal to or greater
-than \fIversion2\fR and they both have the same major version
-number), 0 otherwise.
+\fBpackage vsatisfies \fIversion requirement...\fR
+Returns 1 if the \fIversion\fR satisfies at least one of the given
+requirements, and 0 otherwise. Each \fIrequirement\fR is allowed to
+have any of the forms:
+.RS
+.TP
+min
+This form is called
+.QW min-bounded .
+.TP
+min-
+This form is called
+.QW min-unbound .
+.TP
+min-max
+This form is called
+.QW bounded .
+.RE
+.RS
+.PP
+where
+.QW min
+and
+.QW max
+are valid version numbers. The legacy syntax is
+a special case of the extended syntax, keeping backward
+compatibility. Regarding satisfaction the rules are:
+.RE
+.RS
+.IP [1]
+The \fIversion\fR has to pass at least one of the listed
+\fIrequirement\fRs to be satisfactory.
+.IP [2]
+A version satisfies a
+.QW bounded
+requirement when
+.RS
+.IP [a]
+For \fImin\fR equal to the \fImax\fR if, and only if the \fIversion\fR
+is equal to the \fImin\fR.
+.IP [b]
+Otherwise if, and only if the \fIversion\fR is greater than or equal
+to the \fImin\fR, and less than the \fImax\fR, where both \fImin\fR
+and \fImax\fR have been padded internally with
+.QW a0 .
+Note that while the comparison to \fImin\fR is inclusive, the
+comparison to \fImax\fR is exclusive.
+.RE
+.IP [3]
+A
+.QW min-bounded
+requirement is a
+.QW bounded
+requirement in disguise,
+with the \fImax\fR part implicitly specified as the next higher major
+version number of the \fImin\fR part. A version satisfies it per the
+rules above.
+.IP [4]
+A \fIversion\fR satisfies a
+.QW min-unbound
+requirement if, and only if it is greater than or equal to the
+\fImin\fR, where the \fImin\fR has been padded internally with
+.QW a0 .
+There is no constraint to a maximum.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBpackage prefer \fR?\fBlatest\fR|\fBstable\fR?
+With no arguments, the commands returns either
+.QW latest
+or
+.QW stable ,
+whichever describes the current mode of selection logic used by
+\fBpackage require\fR.
+.RS
+.PP
+When passed the argument
+.QW latest ,
+it sets the selection logic mode to
+.QW latest .
+.PP
+When passed the argument
+.QW stable ,
+if the mode is already
+.QW stable ,
+that value is kept.  If the mode is already
+.QW latest ,
+then the attempt to set it back to
+.QW stable
+is ineffective and the mode value remains
+.QW latest .
+.PP
+When passed any other value as an argument, raise an invalid argument
+error.
+.PP
+When an interpreter is created, its initial selection mode value is set to
+.QW stable
+unless the environment variable \fBTCL_PKG_PREFER_LATEST\fR
+is set.  If that environment variable is defined (with any value) then
+the initial (and permanent) selection mode value is set to
+.QW latest .
+.RE
 .SH "VERSION NUMBERS"
 .PP
 Version numbers consist of one or more decimal numbers separated
@@ -170,6 +287,30 @@ For example, version 2.1 is later than 1.3 and version
 3.4.6 is later than 3.3.5.
 Missing fields are equivalent to zeroes:  version 1.3 is the
 same as version 1.3.0 and 1.3.0.0, so it is earlier than 1.3.1 or 1.3.0.2.
+In addition, the letters
+.QW a
+(alpha) and/or
+.QW b
+(beta) may appear
+exactly once to replace a dot for separation. These letters
+semantically add a negative specifier into the version, where
+.QW a
+is \-2, and
+.QW b
+is \-1. Each may be specified only once, and
+.QW a
+or
+.QW b
+are mutually exclusive in a specifier. Thus 1.3a1 becomes (semantically)
+1.3.\-2.1, 1.3b1 is 1.3.\-1.1. Negative numbers are not directly allowed
+in version specifiers.
+A version number not containing the letters
+.QW a
+or
+.QW b
+as specified
+above is called a \fBstable\fR version, whereas presence of the letters
+causes the version to be called is \fBunstable\fR.
 A later version number is assumed to be upwards compatible with
 an earlier version number as long as both versions have the same
 major version number.
@@ -183,7 +324,7 @@ to work unmodified with either version 1.7.3 or version 3.1.
 The recommended way to use packages in Tcl is to invoke \fBpackage require\fR
 and \fBpackage provide\fR commands in scripts, and use the procedure
 \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR to create package index files.
-Once you've done this, packages will be loaded automatically
+Once you have done this, packages will be loaded automatically
 in response to \fBpackage require\fR commands.
 See the documentation for \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR for details.
 .SH EXAMPLES
@@ -205,9 +346,7 @@ if {[catch {\fBpackage require\fR Snack}]} {
    # We have the package, configure the app to use it
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 msgcat(n), packagens(n), pkgMkIndex(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 package, version
diff --git a/doc/packagens.n b/doc/packagens.n
index a0386f2..1220b20 100644
--- a/doc/packagens.n
+++ b/doc/packagens.n
@@ -7,8 +7,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-pkg::create \- Construct an appropriate \fBpackage ifneeded\fR
-command for a given package specification
+pkg::create \- Construct an appropriate 'package ifneeded' command for a given package specification
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fB::pkg::create \fI\-name packageName\fR \fI\-version packageVersion\fR ?\fI\-load filespec\fR? ... ?\fI\-source filespec\fR? ...
 .BE
@@ -45,9 +44,7 @@ specifies a Tcl library that must be loaded with the
 specified.
 .PP
 At least one \fB\-load\fR or \fB\-source\fR parameter must be given.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 package(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 auto-load, index, package, version
diff --git a/doc/pid.n b/doc/pid.n
index 1001ddc..97a42a7 100644
--- a/doc/pid.n
+++ b/doc/pid.n
@@ -23,7 +23,7 @@ In this case the \fBpid\fR command will return a list whose elements
 are the process identifiers of all the processes in the pipeline,
 in order.
 The list will be empty if \fIfileId\fR refers to an open file
-that isn't a process pipeline.
+that is not a process pipeline.
 If no \fIfileId\fR argument is given then \fBpid\fR returns the process
 identifier of the current process.
 All process identifiers are returned as decimal strings.
diff --git a/doc/pkgMkIndex.n b/doc/pkgMkIndex.n
index d0ea771..5895407 100644
--- a/doc/pkgMkIndex.n
+++ b/doc/pkgMkIndex.n
@@ -12,12 +12,9 @@
 pkg_mkIndex \- Build an index for automatic loading of packages
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
-.VS 8.3.0
 \fBpkg_mkIndex ?\fI\-direct\fR?  ?\fI\-lazy\fR?  ?\fI\-load pkgPat\fR? ?\fI\-verbose\fR? \fIdir\fR ?\fIpattern pattern ...\fR?
-.VE
 .fi
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 \fBPkg_mkIndex\fR is a utility procedure that is part of the standard
@@ -39,10 +36,9 @@ Create the index by invoking \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR.
 The \fIdir\fR argument gives the name of a directory and each
 \fIpattern\fR argument is a \fBglob\fR-style pattern that selects
 script or binary files in \fIdir\fR.
-.VS 8.0.3
 The default pattern is \fB*.tcl\fR and \fB*.[info sharedlibextension]\fR.
-.VE
-.br
+.RS
+.PP
 \fBPkg_mkIndex\fR will create a file \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR in \fIdir\fR
 with package information about all the files given by the \fIpattern\fR
 arguments.
@@ -53,10 +49,10 @@ and new commands appear (this is why it is essential to have
 in the files, as described above).
 If you have a package split among scripts and binary files, 
 or if you have dependencies among files,
-you may have to use the \fB\-load\fP option
+you may have to use the \fB\-load\fR option
 or adjust the order in which \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR processes
-the files.  See COMPLEX CASES below.
-
+the files.  See \fBCOMPLEX CASES\fR below.
+.RE
 .IP [3]
 Install the package as a subdirectory of one of the directories given by
 the \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR variable.  If \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR contains more
@@ -70,7 +66,8 @@ the package's script and/or binary files as well as the \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR
 file.  As long as the package is installed as a subdirectory of a
 directory in \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR it will automatically be found during
 \fBpackage require\fR commands.
-.br
+.RS
+.PP
 If you install the package anywhere else, then you must ensure that
 the directory containing the package is in the \fBauto_path\fR global variable
 or an immediate subdirectory of one of the directories in \fBauto_path\fR.
@@ -83,6 +80,7 @@ You can add a directory to \fBauto_path\fR explicitly in your
 application, or you can add the directory to your \fBTCLLIBPATH\fR
 environment variable:  if this environment variable is present,
 Tcl initializes \fBauto_path\fR from it during application startup.
+.RE
 .IP [4]
 Once the above steps have been taken, all you need to do to use a
 package is to invoke \fBpackage require\fR.
@@ -96,7 +94,6 @@ in \fBauto_path\fR, but only one will actually be loaded in a given
 interpreter, based on the first call to \fBpackage require\fR.
 Different versions of a package may be loaded in different
 interpreters.
-
 .SH OPTIONS
 The optional switches are:
 .TP 15
@@ -107,22 +104,22 @@ upon \fBpackage require\fR.  This is the default.
 \fB\-lazy\fR
 The generated index will manage to delay loading the package until the
 use of one of the commands provided by the package, instead of loading
-it immediately upon \fBpackage require\fR.
+it immediately upon \fBpackage require\fR.  This is not compatible with
+the use of \fIauto_reset\fR, and therefore its use is discouraged.
 .TP 15
 \fB\-load \fIpkgPat\fR
 The index process will pre-load any packages that exist in the
-current interpreter and match \fIpkgPat\fP into the slave interpreter used to
+current interpreter and match \fIpkgPat\fR into the slave interpreter used to
 generate the index.  The pattern match uses string match rules, but without
 making case distinctions.
 See COMPLEX CASES below.
 .TP 15
 \fB\-verbose\fR
 Generate output during the indexing process.  Output is via
-the \fBtclLog\fP procedure, which by default prints to stderr.
+the \fBtclLog\fR procedure, which by default prints to stderr.
 .TP 15
 \fB\-\-\fR
-End of the flags, in case \fIdir\fP begins with a dash.
-
+End of the flags, in case \fIdir\fR begins with a dash.
 .SH "PACKAGES AND THE AUTO-LOADER"
 .PP
 The package management facilities overlap somewhat with the auto-loader,
@@ -142,7 +139,6 @@ If you use \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR to index a package, its commands cannot
 be invoked until \fBpackage require\fR has been used to select a
 version;  in contrast, packages indexed with \fBauto_mkindex\fR
 can be used immediately since there is no version control.
-
 .SH "HOW IT WORKS"
 .PP
 \fBPkg_mkIndex\fR depends on the \fBpackage unknown\fR command,
@@ -157,18 +153,14 @@ commands for each version of each available package;  these commands
 invoke \fBpackage provide\fR commands to announce the
 availability of the package, and they setup auto-loader
 information to load the files of the package.
-.VS 8.3
 If the \fI\-lazy\fR flag was provided when the \fBpkgIndex.tcl\fR
 was generated,
-.VE
-a given file of a given version of a given package isn't
+a given file of a given version of a given package is not
 actually loaded until the first time one of its commands
 is invoked.
 Thus, after invoking \fBpackage require\fR you may
 not see the package's commands in the interpreter, but you will be able
 to invoke the commands and they will be auto-loaded.
-
-.VS 8.3
 .SH "DIRECT LOADING"
 .PP
 Some packages, for instance packages which use namespaces and export
@@ -177,8 +169,6 @@ that their package files be loaded immediately upon \fBpackage require\fR
 instead of delaying the actual loading to the first use of one of the
 package's command. This is the default mode when generating the package
 index.  It can be overridden by specifying the \fI\-lazy\fR argument.
-.VE
-
 .SH "COMPLEX CASES"
 Most complex cases of dependencies among scripts
 and binary files, and packages being split among scripts and
@@ -193,28 +183,28 @@ with some glob patterns.
 .PP
 In general, it is OK for scripts to have dependencies on other
 packages.
-If scripts contain \fBpackage require\fP commands, these are
+If scripts contain \fBpackage require\fR commands, these are
 stubbed out in the interpreter used to process the scripts,
 so these do not cause problems.
 If scripts call into other packages in global code,
-these calls are handled by a stub \fBunknown\fP command.
+these calls are handled by a stub \fBunknown\fR command.
 However, if scripts make variable references to other package's
 variables in global code, these will cause errors.  That is
 also bad coding style.
 .PP
 If binary files have dependencies on other packages, things
 can become tricky because it is not possible to stub out
-C-level APIs such as \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fP API
+C-level APIs such as \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fR API
 when loading a binary file.
 For example, suppose the BLT package requires Tk, and expresses
-this with a call to \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fP in its \fBBlt_Init\fP routine.
+this with a call to \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fR in its \fBBlt_Init\fR routine.
 To support this, you must run \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR in an interpreter that
 has Tk loaded.  You can achieve this with the
 \fB\-load \fIpkgPat\fR option.  If you specify this option,
 \fBpkg_mkIndex\fR will load any packages listed by
-\fBinfo loaded\fP and that match \fIpkgPat\fP
+\fBinfo loaded\fR and that match \fIpkgPat\fR
 into the interpreter used to process files.
-In most cases this will satisfy the \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fP calls
+In most cases this will satisfy the \fBTcl_PkgRequire\fR calls
 made by binary files.
 .PP
 If you are indexing two binary files and one depends on the other,
@@ -224,19 +214,17 @@ and then the package it provides
 will be available when the second file is processed.
 You may also need to load the first package into the
 temporary interpreter used to create the index by using
-the \fB\-load\fP flag;
-it won't hurt to specify package patterns that are not yet loaded.
+the \fB\-load\fR flag;
+it will not hurt to specify package patterns that are not yet loaded.
 .PP
 If you have a package that is split across scripts and a binary file,
-then you should avoid the \fB\-load\fP flag. The problem is that
+then you should avoid the \fB\-load\fR flag. The problem is that
 if you load a package before computing the index it masks any
 other files that provide part of the same package.
-If you must use \fB\-load\fP,
+If you must use \fB\-load\fR,
 then you must specify the scripts first; otherwise the package loaded from
 the binary file may mask the package defined by the scripts.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 package(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 auto-load, index, package, version
diff --git a/doc/platform.n b/doc/platform.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..053448d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/platform.n
@@ -0,0 +1,66 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2006 ActiveState Software Inc
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH "platform" n 1.0.4 platform "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+platform \- System identification support code and utilities
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fBpackage require platform ?1.0.4?\fR
+.sp
+\fBplatform::generic\fR
+\fBplatform::identify\fR
+\fBplatform::patterns \fIidentifier\fR
+.fi
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The \fBplatform\fR package provides several utility commands useful
+for the identification of the architecture of a machine running Tcl.
+.PP
+Whilst Tcl provides the \fBtcl_platform\fR array for identifying the
+current architecture (in particular, the platform and machine
+elements) this is not always sufficient. This is because (on Unix
+machines) \fBtcl_platform\fR reflects the values returned by the
+\fBuname\fR command and these are not standardized across platforms and
+architectures. In addition, on at least one platform (AIX) the
+\fBtcl_platform(machine)\fR contains the CPU serial number.
+.PP
+Consequently, individual applications need to manipulate the values in
+\fBtcl_platform\fR (along with the output of system specific
+utilities) - which is both inconvenient for developers, and introduces
+the potential for inconsistencies in identifying architectures and in
+naming conventions.
+.PP
+The \fBplatform\fR package prevents such fragmentation - i.e., it
+establishes a standard naming convention for architectures running Tcl
+and makes it more convenient for developers to identify the current
+architecture a Tcl program is running on.
+.SH COMMANDS
+.TP
+\fBplatform::identify\fR
+This command returns an identifier describing the platform the Tcl
+core is running on. The returned identifier has the general format
+\fIOS\fR-\fICPU\fR. The \fIOS\fR part of the identifier may contain
+details like kernel version, libc version, etc., and this information
+may contain dashes as well.  The \fICPU\fR part will not contain
+dashes, making the preceding dash the last dash in the result.
+.TP
+\fBplatform::generic\fR
+This command returns a simplified identifier describing the platform
+the Tcl core is running on. In contrast to \fBplatform::identify\fR it
+leaves out details like kernel version, libc version, etc. The
+returned identifier has the general format \fIOS\fR-\fICPU\fR.
+.TP
+\fBplatform::patterns 	\fIidentifier\fR
+This command takes an identifier as returned by
+\fBplatform::identify\fR and returns a list of identifiers describing
+compatible architectures.
+.SH KEYWORDS
+operating system, cpu architecture, platform, architecture
diff --git a/doc/platform_shell.n b/doc/platform_shell.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..eef4d4e
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/platform_shell.n
@@ -0,0 +1,57 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2006-2008 ActiveState Software Inc
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH "platform::shell" n 1.1.4 platform::shell "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+platform::shell \- System identification support code and utilities
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fBpackage require platform::shell ?1.1.4?\fR
+.sp
+\fBplatform::shell::generic \fIshell\fR
+\fBplatform::shell::identify \fIshell\fR
+\fBplatform::shell::platform \fIshell\fR
+.fi
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The \fBplatform::shell\fR package provides several utility commands useful
+for the identification of the architecture of a specific Tcl shell.
+.PP
+This package allows the identification of the architecture of a
+specific Tcl shell different from the shell running the package. The
+only requirement is that the other shell (identified by its path), is
+actually executable on the current machine.
+.PP
+While for most platform this means that the architecture of the
+interrogated shell is identical to the architecture of the running
+shell this is not generally true. A counter example are all platforms
+which have 32 and 64 bit variants and where a 64bit system is able to
+run 32bit code. For these running and interrogated shell may have
+different 32/64 bit settings and thus different identifiers.
+.PP
+For applications like a code repository it is important to identify
+the architecture of the shell which will actually run the installed
+packages, versus the architecture of the shell running the repository
+software.
+.SH COMMANDS
+.TP
+\fBplatform::shell::identify \fIshell\fR
+This command does the same identification as \fBplatform::identify\fR,
+for the specified Tcl shell, in contrast to the running shell.
+.TP
+\fBplatform::shell::generic \fIshell\fR
+This command does the same identification as \fBplatform::generic\fR,
+for the specified Tcl shell, in contrast to the running shell.
+.TP
+\fBplatform::shell::platform \fIshell\fR
+This command returns the contents of \fBtcl_platform(platform)\fR for
+the specified Tcl shell.
+.SH KEYWORDS
+operating system, cpu architecture, platform, architecture
diff --git a/doc/proc.n b/doc/proc.n
index c335b3e..4525207 100644
--- a/doc/proc.n
+++ b/doc/proc.n
@@ -33,17 +33,25 @@ elements specifies
 one argument.  Each argument specifier is also a list with either
 one or two fields.  If there is only a single field in the specifier
 then it is the name of the argument; if there are two fields, then
-the first is the argument name and the second is its default value.
+the first is the argument name and the second is its default value. 
+Arguments with default values that are followed by non-defaulted
+arguments become required arguments.  In 8.6 this will be considered an 
+error. 
 .PP
 When \fIname\fR is invoked a local variable
 will be created for each of the formal arguments to the procedure; its
 value will be the value of corresponding argument in the invoking command
 or the argument's default value.
+Actual arguments are assigned to formal arguments strictly in order.
 Arguments with default values need not be
 specified in a procedure invocation.  However, there must be enough
 actual arguments for all the
-formal arguments that don't have defaults, and there must not be any extra
-actual arguments.  There is one special case to permit procedures with
+formal arguments that do not have defaults, and there must not be any extra
+actual arguments.  
+Arguments with default values that are followed by non-defaulted
+arguments become required arguments (in 8.6 it will be considered an 
+error).
+There is one special case to permit procedures with
 variable numbers of arguments.  If the last formal argument has the name
 \fBargs\fR, then a call to the procedure may contain more actual arguments
 than the procedure has formals.  In this case, all of the actual arguments
@@ -55,14 +63,12 @@ When \fIbody\fR is being executed, variable names normally refer to
 local variables, which are created automatically when referenced and
 deleted when the procedure returns.  One local variable is automatically
 created for each of the procedure's arguments.
-Global variables can only be accessed by invoking
-the \fBglobal\fR command or the \fBupvar\fR command.
-Namespace variables can only be accessed by invoking
-the \fBvariable\fR command or the \fBupvar\fR command.
+Other variables can only be accessed by invoking one of the \fBglobal\fR, 
+\fBvariable\fR, \fBupvar\fR or \fBnamespace upvar\fR commands.
 .PP
 The \fBproc\fR command returns an empty string.  When a procedure is
 invoked, the procedure's return value is the value specified in a
-\fBreturn\fR command.  If the procedure doesn't execute an explicit
+\fBreturn\fR command.  If the procedure does not execute an explicit
 \fBreturn\fR, then its return value is the value of the last command
 executed in the procedure's body.
 If an error occurs while executing the procedure
diff --git a/doc/puts.n b/doc/puts.n
index 9fa5f15..5cd8721 100644
--- a/doc/puts.n
+++ b/doc/puts.n
@@ -20,13 +20,11 @@ puts \- Write to a channel
 Writes the characters given by \fIstring\fR to the channel given
 by \fIchannelId\fR.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as a
 Tcl standard channel (\fBstdout\fR or \fBstderr\fR), the return
 value from an invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or the result
 of a channel creation command provided by a Tcl extension. The channel
 must have been opened for output.
-.VE
 .PP
 If no \fIchannelId\fR is specified then it defaults to
 \fBstdout\fR. \fBPuts\fR normally outputs a newline character after
@@ -37,8 +35,7 @@ Newline characters in the output are translated by \fBputs\fR to
 platform-specific end-of-line sequences according to the current
 value of the \fB\-translation\fR option for the channel (for example,
 on PCs newlines are normally replaced with carriage-return-linefeed
-sequences;  on Macintoshes newlines are normally replaced with
-carriage-returns).
+sequences.
 See the \fBfconfigure\fR manual entry for a discussion on ways in
 which \fBfconfigure\fR will alter output.
 .PP
@@ -64,7 +61,7 @@ buffered for a channel in nonblocking mode, which could consume a
 large amount of memory.
 To avoid wasting memory, nonblocking I/O should normally
 be used in an event-driven fashion with the \fBfileevent\fR command
-(don't invoke \fBputs\fR unless you have recently been notified
+(do not invoke \fBputs\fR unless you have recently been notified
 via a file event that the channel is ready for more output data).
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Write a short message to the console (or wherever \fBstdout\fR is
diff --git a/doc/pwd.n b/doc/pwd.n
index 99a438f..e63b815 100644
--- a/doc/pwd.n
+++ b/doc/pwd.n
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ Returns the absolute path name of the current working directory.
 Sometimes it is useful to change to a known directory when running
 some external command using \fBexec\fR, but it is important to keep
 the application usually running in the directory that it was started
-in (unless the user specifies otherwise) since that minimises user
+in (unless the user specifies otherwise) since that minimizes user
 confusion. The way to do this is to save the current directory while
 the external command is being run:
 .CS
@@ -32,7 +32,6 @@ cd /tmp
 exec tar -xf $tarFile
 cd $savedDir
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 file(n), cd(n), glob(n), filename(n)
 
diff --git a/doc/re_syntax.n b/doc/re_syntax.n
index 3a47e25..8701641 100644
--- a/doc/re_syntax.n
+++ b/doc/re_syntax.n
@@ -9,922 +9,820 @@
 .TH re_syntax n "8.1" Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 .SH NAME
-re_syntax \- Syntax of Tcl regular expressions.
+re_syntax \- Syntax of Tcl regular expressions
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 A \fIregular expression\fR describes strings of characters.
-It's a pattern that matches certain strings and doesn't match others.
-
+It's a pattern that matches certain strings and does not match others.
 .SH "DIFFERENT FLAVORS OF REs"
-Regular expressions (``RE''s), as defined by POSIX, come in two
-flavors: \fIextended\fR REs (``EREs'') and \fIbasic\fR REs (``BREs'').
+Regular expressions
+.PQ RE s ,
+as defined by POSIX, come in two flavors: \fIextended\fR REs
+.PQ ERE s
+and \fIbasic\fR REs
+.PQ BRE s .
 EREs are roughly those of the traditional \fIegrep\fR, while BREs are
-roughly those of the traditional \fIed\fR.  This implementation adds
-a third flavor, \fIadvanced\fR REs (``AREs''), basically EREs with
-some significant extensions.
+roughly those of the traditional \fIed\fR. This implementation adds
+a third flavor, \fIadvanced\fR REs
+.PQ ARE s ,
+basically EREs with some significant extensions.
 .PP
-This manual page primarily describes AREs.  BREs mostly exist for
+This manual page primarily describes AREs. BREs mostly exist for
 backward compatibility in some old programs; they will be discussed at
-the end.  POSIX EREs are almost an exact subset of AREs.  Features of
+the end. POSIX EREs are almost an exact subset of AREs. Features of
 AREs that are not present in EREs will be indicated.
-
 .SH "REGULAR EXPRESSION SYNTAX"
 .PP
 Tcl regular expressions are implemented using the package written by
 Henry Spencer, based on the 1003.2 spec and some (not quite all) of
-the Perl5 extensions (thanks, Henry!).  Much of the description of
+the Perl5 extensions (thanks, Henry!). Much of the description of
 regular expressions below is copied verbatim from his manual entry.
 .PP
 An ARE is one or more \fIbranches\fR,
-separated by `\fB|\fR',
+separated by
+.QW \fB|\fR ,
 matching anything that matches any of the branches.
 .PP
 A branch is zero or more \fIconstraints\fR or \fIquantified atoms\fR,
 concatenated.
 It matches a match for the first, followed by a match for the second, etc;
 an empty branch matches the empty string.
-.PP
+.SS QUANTIFIERS
 A quantified atom is an \fIatom\fR possibly followed
 by a single \fIquantifier\fR.
-Without a quantifier, it matches a match for the atom.
+Without a quantifier, it matches a single match for the atom.
 The quantifiers,
 and what a so-quantified atom matches, are:
 .RS 2
 .TP 6
 \fB*\fR
+.
 a sequence of 0 or more matches of the atom
 .TP
 \fB+\fR
+.
 a sequence of 1 or more matches of the atom
 .TP
 \fB?\fR
+.
 a sequence of 0 or 1 matches of the atom
 .TP
 \fB{\fIm\fB}\fR
+.
 a sequence of exactly \fIm\fR matches of the atom
 .TP
 \fB{\fIm\fB,}\fR
+.
 a sequence of \fIm\fR or more matches of the atom
 .TP
 \fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}\fR
+.
 a sequence of \fIm\fR through \fIn\fR (inclusive) matches of the atom;
 \fIm\fR may not exceed \fIn\fR
 .TP
 \fB*?  +?  ??  {\fIm\fB}?  {\fIm\fB,}?  {\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}?\fR
-\fInon-greedy\fR quantifiers,
-which match the same possibilities,
+.
+\fInon-greedy\fR quantifiers, which match the same possibilities,
 but prefer the smallest number rather than the largest number
-of matches (see MATCHING)
+of matches (see \fBMATCHING\fR)
 .RE
 .PP
-The forms using
-\fB{\fR and \fB}\fR
-are known as \fIbound\fRs.
-The numbers
-\fIm\fR and \fIn\fR are unsigned decimal integers
-with permissible values from 0 to 255 inclusive.
-.PP
+The forms using \fB{\fR and \fB}\fR are known as \fIbound\fRs. The
+numbers \fIm\fR and \fIn\fR are unsigned decimal integers with
+permissible values from 0 to 255 inclusive.
+.SS ATOMS
 An atom is one of:
 .RS 2
-.TP 6
-\fB(\fIre\fB)\fR
-(where \fIre\fR is any regular expression)
-matches a match for
-\fIre\fR, with the match noted for possible reporting
-.TP
-\fB(?:\fIre\fB)\fR
-as previous,
-but does no reporting
-(a ``non-capturing'' set of parentheses)
-.TP
-\fB()\fR
-matches an empty string,
-noted for possible reporting
-.TP
-\fB(?:)\fR
-matches an empty string,
-without reporting
-.TP
-\fB[\fIchars\fB]\fR
-a \fIbracket expression\fR,
-matching any one of the \fIchars\fR (see BRACKET EXPRESSIONS for more detail)
-.TP
- \fB.\fR
+.IP \fB(\fIre\fB)\fR 6
+matches a match for \fIre\fR (\fIre\fR is any regular expression) with
+the match noted for possible reporting
+.IP \fB(?:\fIre\fB)\fR
+as previous, but does no reporting (a
+.QW non-capturing
+set of parentheses)
+.IP \fB()\fR
+matches an empty string, noted for possible reporting
+.IP \fB(?:)\fR
+matches an empty string, without reporting
+.IP \fB[\fIchars\fB]\fR
+a \fIbracket expression\fR, matching any one of the \fIchars\fR (see
+\fBBRACKET EXPRESSIONS\fR for more detail)
+.IP \fB.\fR
 matches any single character
-.TP
-\fB\e\fIk\fR
-(where \fIk\fR is a non-alphanumeric character)
-matches that character taken as an ordinary character,
-e.g. \e\e matches a backslash character
-.TP
-\fB\e\fIc\fR
-where \fIc\fR is alphanumeric
-(possibly followed by other characters),
-an \fIescape\fR (AREs only),
-see ESCAPES below
-.TP
-\fB{\fR
-when followed by a character other than a digit,
-matches the left-brace character `\fB{\fR';
-when followed by a digit, it is the beginning of a
-\fIbound\fR (see above)
-.TP
-\fIx\fR
-where \fIx\fR is
-a single character with no other significance, matches that character.
+.IP \fB\e\fIk\fR
+matches the non-alphanumeric character \fIk\fR
+taken as an ordinary character, e.g. \fB\e\e\fR matches a backslash
+character
+.IP \fB\e\fIc\fR
+where \fIc\fR is alphanumeric (possibly followed by other characters),
+an \fIescape\fR (AREs only), see \fBESCAPES\fR below
+.IP \fB{\fR
+when followed by a character other than a digit, matches the
+left-brace character
+.QW \fB{\fR ;
+when followed by a digit, it is the beginning of a \fIbound\fR (see above)
+.IP \fIx\fR
+where \fIx\fR is a single character with no other significance,
+matches that character.
 .RE
-.PP
+.SS CONSTRAINTS
 A \fIconstraint\fR matches an empty string when specific conditions
-are met.
-A constraint may not be followed by a quantifier.
-The simple constraints are as follows; some more constraints are
-described later, under ESCAPES.
+are met. A constraint may not be followed by a quantifier. The
+simple constraints are as follows; some more constraints are described
+later, under \fBESCAPES\fR.
 .RS 2
 .TP 8
 \fB^\fR
+.
 matches at the beginning of a line
 .TP
 \fB$\fR
+.
 matches at the end of a line
 .TP
 \fB(?=\fIre\fB)\fR
-\fIpositive lookahead\fR (AREs only), matches at any point
-where a substring matching \fIre\fR begins
+.
+\fIpositive lookahead\fR (AREs only), matches at any point where a
+substring matching \fIre\fR begins
 .TP
 \fB(?!\fIre\fB)\fR
-\fInegative lookahead\fR (AREs only), matches at any point
-where no substring matching \fIre\fR begins
+.
+\fInegative lookahead\fR (AREs only), matches at any point where no
+substring matching \fIre\fR begins
 .RE
 .PP
 The lookahead constraints may not contain back references (see later),
 and all parentheses within them are considered non-capturing.
 .PP
-An RE may not end with `\fB\e\fR'.
-
+An RE may not end with
+.QW \fB\e\fR .
 .SH "BRACKET EXPRESSIONS"
-A \fIbracket expression\fR is a list of characters enclosed in `\fB[\|]\fR'.
-It normally matches any single character from the list (but see below).
-If the list begins with `\fB^\fR',
-it matches any single character
-(but see below) \fInot\fR from the rest of the list.
-.PP
-If two characters in the list are separated by `\fB\-\fR',
-this is shorthand
-for the full \fIrange\fR of characters between those two (inclusive) in the
-collating sequence,
-e.g.
-\fB[0\-9]\fR
-in ASCII matches any decimal digit.
-Two ranges may not share an
+A \fIbracket expression\fR is a list of characters enclosed in
+.QW \fB[\|]\fR .
+It normally matches any single character from the list
+(but see below). If the list begins with
+.QW \fB^\fR ,
+it matches any single character (but see below) \fInot\fR from the
+rest of the list.
+.PP
+If two characters in the list are separated by
+.QW \fB\-\fR ,
+this is shorthand for the full \fIrange\fR of characters between those two
+(inclusive) in the collating sequence, e.g.
+.QW \fB[0\-9]\fR
+in Unicode matches any conventional decimal digit. Two ranges may not share an
 endpoint, so e.g.
-\fBa\-c\-e\fR
-is illegal.
-Ranges are very collating-sequence-dependent,
-and portable programs should avoid relying on them.
-.PP
-To include a literal
-\fB]\fR
-or
-\fB\-\fR
-in the list,
-the simplest method is to
-enclose it in
-\fB[.\fR and \fB.]\fR
-to make it a collating element (see below).
-Alternatively,
-make it the first character
-(following a possible `\fB^\fR'),
-or (AREs only) precede it with `\fB\e\fR'.
-Alternatively, for `\fB\-\fR',
-make it the last character,
-or the second endpoint of a range.
-To use a literal
-\fB\-\fR
-as the first endpoint of a range,
-make it a collating element
-or (AREs only) precede it with `\fB\e\fR'.
-With the exception of these, some combinations using
-\fB[\fR
-(see next
-paragraphs), and escapes,
-all other special characters lose their
-special significance within a bracket expression.
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, a collating element (a character,
-a multi-character sequence that collates as if it were a single character,
-or a collating-sequence name for either)
-enclosed in
-\fB[.\fR and \fB.]\fR
-stands for the
-sequence of characters of that collating element.
-The sequence is a single element of the bracket expression's list.
-A bracket expression in a locale that has
-multi-character collating elements
-can thus match more than one character.
-.VS 8.2
-So (insidiously), a bracket expression that starts with \fB^\fR
-can match multi-character collating elements even if none of them
-appear in the bracket expression!
-(\fINote:\fR Tcl currently has no multi-character collating elements.
-This information is only for illustration.)
-.PP
-For example, assume the collating sequence includes a \fBch\fR
-multi-character collating element.
-Then the RE \fB[[.ch.]]*c\fR (zero or more \fBch\fP's followed by \fBc\fP)
-matches the first five characters of `\fBchchcc\fR'.
-Also, the RE \fB[^c]b\fR matches all of `\fBchb\fR'
-(because \fB[^c]\fR matches the multi-character \fBch\fR).
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, a collating element enclosed in
-\fB[=\fR
-and
-\fB=]\fR
-is an equivalence class, standing for the sequences of characters
-of all collating elements equivalent to that one, including itself.
-(If there are no other equivalent collating elements,
-the treatment is as if the enclosing delimiters were `\fB[.\fR'\&
-and `\fB.]\fR'.)
-For example, if
-\fBo\fR
-and
-\fB\o'o^'\fR
-are the members of an equivalence class,
-then `\fB[[=o=]]\fR', `\fB[[=\o'o^'=]]\fR',
-and `\fB[o\o'o^']\fR'\&
-are all synonymous.
-An equivalence class may not be an endpoint
-of a range.
-.VS 8.2
-(\fINote:\fR 
-Tcl currently implements only the Unicode locale.
-It doesn't define any equivalence classes.
-The examples above are just illustrations.)
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-Within a bracket expression, the name of a \fIcharacter class\fR enclosed
-in
-\fB[:\fR
-and
-\fB:]\fR
-stands for the list of all characters
-(not all collating elements!)
-belonging to that
-class.
+.QW \fBa\-c\-e\fR
+is illegal. Ranges in Tcl always use the
+Unicode collating sequence, but other programs may use other collating
+sequences and this can be a source of incompatability between programs.
+.PP
+To include a literal \fB]\fR or \fB\-\fR in the list, the simplest
+method is to enclose it in \fB[.\fR and \fB.]\fR to make it a
+collating element (see below). Alternatively, make it the first
+character (following a possible
+.QW \fB^\fR ),
+or (AREs only) precede it with
+.QW \fB\e\fR .
+Alternatively, for
+.QW \fB\-\fR ,
+make it the last character, or the second endpoint of a range. To use
+a literal \fB\-\fR as the first endpoint of a range, make it a
+collating element or (AREs only) precede it with
+.QW \fB\e\fR .
+With the exception of
+these, some combinations using \fB[\fR (see next paragraphs), and
+escapes, all other special characters lose their special significance
+within a bracket expression.
+.SS "CHARACTER CLASSES"
+Within a bracket expression, the name of a \fIcharacter class\fR
+enclosed in \fB[:\fR and \fB:]\fR stands for the list of all
+characters (not all collating elements!) belonging to that class.
 Standard character classes are:
-.PP
+.IP \fBalpha\fR 8
+A letter.
+.IP \fBupper\fR 8
+An upper-case letter.
+.IP \fBlower\fR 8
+A lower-case letter.
+.IP \fBdigit\fR 8
+A decimal digit.
+.IP \fBxdigit\fR 8
+A hexadecimal digit.
+.IP \fBalnum\fR 8
+An alphanumeric (letter or digit).
+.IP \fBprint\fR 8
+A "printable" (same as graph, except also including space).
+.IP \fBblank\fR 8
+A space or tab character.
+.IP \fBspace\fR 8
+A character producing white space in displayed text.
+.IP \fBpunct\fR 8
+A punctuation character.
+.IP \fBgraph\fR 8
+A character with a visible representation (includes both alnum and punct).
+.IP \fBcntrl\fR 8
+A control character.
+.PP
+A locale may provide others. A character class may not be used as an endpoint
+of a range.
 .RS
-.ne 5
-.ta 3c
-.nf
-\fBalpha\fR	A letter. 
-\fBupper\fR	An upper-case letter. 
-\fBlower\fR	A lower-case letter. 
-\fBdigit\fR	A decimal digit. 
-\fBxdigit\fR	A hexadecimal digit. 
-\fBalnum\fR	An alphanumeric (letter or digit). 
-\fBprint\fR	An alphanumeric (same as alnum).
-\fBblank\fR	A space or tab character.
-\fBspace\fR	A character producing white space in displayed text. 
-\fBpunct\fR	A punctuation character. 
-\fBgraph\fR	A character with a visible representation. 
-\fBcntrl\fR	A control character. 
-.fi
+.PP
+(\fINote:\fR the current Tcl implementation has only one locale, the Unicode
+locale, which supports exactly the above classes.)
 .RE
+.SS "BRACKETED CONSTRAINTS"
+There are two special cases of bracket expressions: the bracket
+expressions
+.QW \fB[[:<:]]\fR
+and
+.QW \fB[[:>:]]\fR
+are constraints, matching empty strings at the beginning and end of a word
+respectively.
+.\" note, discussion of escapes below references this definition of word
+A word is defined as a sequence of word characters that is neither preceded
+nor followed by word characters. A word character is an \fIalnum\fR character
+or an underscore
+.PQ \fB_\fR "" .
+These special bracket expressions are deprecated; users of AREs should use
+constraint escapes instead (see below).
+.SS "COLLATING ELEMENTS"
+Within a bracket expression, a collating element (a character, a
+multi-character sequence that collates as if it were a single
+character, or a collating-sequence name for either) enclosed in
+\fB[.\fR and \fB.]\fR stands for the sequence of characters of that
+collating element. The sequence is a single element of the bracket
+expression's list. A bracket expression in a locale that has
+multi-character collating elements can thus match more than one
+character. So (insidiously), a bracket expression that starts with
+\fB^\fR can match multi-character collating elements even if none of
+them appear in the bracket expression!
+.RS
 .PP
-A locale may provide others.
-.VS 8.2
-(Note that the current Tcl implementation has only one locale:
-the Unicode locale.)
-.VE 8.2
-A character class may not be used as an endpoint of a range.
+(\fINote:\fR Tcl has no multi-character collating elements. This information
+is only for illustration.)
+.RE
 .PP
-There are two special cases of bracket expressions:
-the bracket expressions
-\fB[[:<:]]\fR
+For example, assume the collating sequence includes a \fBch\fR multi-character
+collating element. Then the RE
+.QW \fB[[.ch.]]*c\fR
+(zero or more
+.QW \fBch\fRs
+followed by
+.QW \fBc\fR )
+matches the first five characters of
+.QW \fBchchcc\fR .
+Also, the RE
+.QW \fB[^c]b\fR
+matches all of
+.QW \fBchb\fR
+(because
+.QW \fB[^c]\fR
+matches the multi-character
+.QW \fBch\fR ).
+.SS "EQUIVALENCE CLASSES"
+Within a bracket expression, a collating element enclosed in \fB[=\fR
+and \fB=]\fR is an equivalence class, standing for the sequences of
+characters of all collating elements equivalent to that one, including
+itself. (If there are no other equivalent collating elements, the
+treatment is as if the enclosing delimiters were
+.QW \fB[.\fR \&
 and
-\fB[[:>:]]\fR
-are constraints, matching empty strings at
-the beginning and end of a word respectively.
-'\" note, discussion of escapes below references this definition of word
-A word is defined as a sequence of
-word characters
-that is neither preceded nor followed by
-word characters.
-A word character is an
-\fIalnum\fR
-character
-or an underscore
-(\fB_\fR).
-These special bracket expressions are deprecated;
-users of AREs should use constraint escapes instead (see below).
-.SH ESCAPES
-Escapes (AREs only), which begin with a
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character,
-come in several varieties:
-character entry, class shorthands, constraint escapes, and back references.
-A
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character but not constituting
-a valid escape is illegal in AREs.
-In EREs, there are no escapes:
-outside a bracket expression,
-a
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character merely stands for that
-character as an ordinary character,
-and inside a bracket expression,
-\fB\e\fR
-is an ordinary character.
-(The latter is the one actual incompatibility between EREs and AREs.)
+.QW \fB.]\fR .)
+For example, if \fBo\fR and \fB\N'244'\fR are the members of an
+equivalence class, then
+.QW \fB[[=o=]]\fR ,
+.QW \fB[[=\N'244'=]]\fR ,
+and
+.QW \fB[o\N'244']\fR \&
+are all synonymous. An equivalence class may not be an endpoint of a range.
+.RS
 .PP
+(\fINote:\fR Tcl implements only the Unicode locale. It does not define any
+equivalence classes. The examples above are just illustrations.)
+.RE
+.SH ESCAPES
+Escapes (AREs only), which begin with a \fB\e\fR followed by an
+alphanumeric character, come in several varieties: character entry,
+class shorthands, constraint escapes, and back references. A \fB\e\fR
+followed by an alphanumeric character but not constituting a valid
+escape is illegal in AREs. In EREs, there are no escapes: outside a
+bracket expression, a \fB\e\fR followed by an alphanumeric character
+merely stands for that character as an ordinary character, and inside
+a bracket expression, \fB\e\fR is an ordinary character. (The latter
+is the one actual incompatibility between EREs and AREs.)
+.SS "CHARACTER-ENTRY ESCAPES"
 Character-entry escapes (AREs only) exist to make it easier to specify
 non-printing and otherwise inconvenient characters in REs:
 .RS 2
 .TP 5
 \fB\ea\fR
+.
 alert (bell) character, as in C
 .TP
 \fB\eb\fR
+.
 backspace, as in C
 .TP
 \fB\eB\fR
-synonym for
-\fB\e\fR
-to help reduce backslash doubling in some
+.
+synonym for \fB\e\fR to help reduce backslash doubling in some
 applications where there are multiple levels of backslash processing
 .TP
 \fB\ec\fIX\fR
-(where X is any character) the character whose
-low-order 5 bits are the same as those of
-\fIX\fR,
-and whose other bits are all zero
+.
+(where \fIX\fR is any character) the character whose low-order 5 bits
+are the same as those of \fIX\fR, and whose other bits are all zero
 .TP
 \fB\ee\fR
-the character whose collating-sequence name
-is `\fBESC\fR',
+.
+the character whose collating-sequence name is
+.QW \fBESC\fR ,
 or failing that, the character with octal value 033
 .TP
 \fB\ef\fR
+.
 formfeed, as in C
 .TP
 \fB\en\fR
+.
 newline, as in C
 .TP
 \fB\er\fR
+.
 carriage return, as in C
 .TP
 \fB\et\fR
+.
 horizontal tab, as in C
 .TP
 \fB\eu\fIwxyz\fR
-(where
-\fIwxyz\fR
-is exactly four hexadecimal digits)
-the Unicode character
-\fBU+\fIwxyz\fR
-in the local byte ordering
+.
+(where \fIwxyz\fR is exactly four hexadecimal digits) the Unicode
+character \fBU+\fIwxyz\fR in the local byte ordering
 .TP
 \fB\eU\fIstuvwxyz\fR
-(where
-\fIstuvwxyz\fR
-is exactly eight hexadecimal digits)
-reserved for a somewhat-hypothetical Unicode extension to 32 bits
+.
+(where \fIstuvwxyz\fR is exactly eight hexadecimal digits) reserved
+for a somewhat-hypothetical Unicode extension to 32 bits
 .TP
 \fB\ev\fR
-vertical tab, as in C
-are all available.
+.
+vertical tab, as in C are all available.
 .TP
 \fB\ex\fIhhh\fR
-(where
-\fIhhh\fR
-is any sequence of hexadecimal digits)
-the character whose hexadecimal value is
-\fB0x\fIhhh\fR
-(a single character no matter how many hexadecimal digits are used).
+.
+(where \fIhhh\fR is any sequence of hexadecimal digits) the character
+whose hexadecimal value is \fB0x\fIhhh\fR (a single character no
+matter how many hexadecimal digits are used).
 .TP
 \fB\e0\fR
-the character whose value is
-\fB0\fR
+.
+the character whose value is \fB0\fR
 .TP
 \fB\e\fIxy\fR
-(where
-\fIxy\fR
-is exactly two octal digits,
-and is not a
-\fIback reference\fR (see below))
-the character whose octal value is
+.
+(where \fIxy\fR is exactly two octal digits, and is not a \fIback
+reference\fR (see below)) the character whose octal value is
 \fB0\fIxy\fR
 .TP
 \fB\e\fIxyz\fR
-(where
-\fIxyz\fR
-is exactly three octal digits,
-and is not a
-back reference (see below))
-the character whose octal value is
+.
+(where \fIxyz\fR is exactly three octal digits, and is not a back
+reference (see below)) the character whose octal value is
 \fB0\fIxyz\fR
 .RE
 .PP
-Hexadecimal digits are `\fB0\fR'-`\fB9\fR', `\fBa\fR'-`\fBf\fR',
-and `\fBA\fR'-`\fBF\fR'.
-Octal digits are `\fB0\fR'-`\fB7\fR'.
+Hexadecimal digits are
+.QR \fB0\fR \fB9\fR ,
+.QR \fBa\fR \fBf\fR ,
+and
+.QR \fBA\fR \fBF\fR .
+Octal digits are
+.QR \fB0\fR \fB7\fR .
 .PP
 The character-entry escapes are always taken as ordinary characters.
-For example,
-\fB\e135\fR
-is
-\fB]\fR
-in ASCII,
-but
-\fB\e135\fR
-does not terminate a bracket expression.
-Beware, however, that some applications (e.g., C compilers) interpret 
-such sequences themselves before the regular-expression package
-gets to see them, which may require doubling (quadrupling, etc.) the `\fB\e\fR'.
-.PP
-Class-shorthand escapes (AREs only) provide shorthands for certain commonly-used
-character classes:
+For example, \fB\e135\fR is \fB]\fR in Unicode, but \fB\e135\fR does
+not terminate a bracket expression. Beware, however, that some
+applications (e.g., C compilers and the Tcl interpreter if the regular
+expression is not quoted with braces) interpret such sequences
+themselves before the regular-expression package gets to see them,
+which may require doubling (quadrupling, etc.) the
+.QW \fB\e\fR .
+.SS "CLASS-SHORTHAND ESCAPES"
+Class-shorthand escapes (AREs only) provide shorthands for certain
+commonly-used character classes:
 .RS 2
 .TP 10
 \fB\ed\fR
+.
 \fB[[:digit:]]\fR
 .TP
 \fB\es\fR
+.
 \fB[[:space:]]\fR
 .TP
 \fB\ew\fR
-\fB[[:alnum:]_]\fR
-(note underscore)
+.
+\fB[[:alnum:]_]\fR (note underscore)
 .TP
 \fB\eD\fR
+.
 \fB[^[:digit:]]\fR
 .TP
 \fB\eS\fR
+.
 \fB[^[:space:]]\fR
 .TP
 \fB\eW\fR
-\fB[^[:alnum:]_]\fR
-(note underscore)
+.
+\fB[^[:alnum:]_]\fR (note underscore)
 .RE
 .PP
-Within bracket expressions, `\fB\ed\fR', `\fB\es\fR',
-and `\fB\ew\fR'\&
-lose their outer brackets,
-and `\fB\eD\fR', `\fB\eS\fR',
-and `\fB\eW\fR'\&
-are illegal.
-.VS 8.2
-(So, for example, \fB[a-c\ed]\fR is equivalent to \fB[a-c[:digit:]]\fR.
-Also, \fB[a-c\eD]\fR, which is equivalent to \fB[a-c^[:digit:]]\fR, is illegal.)
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-A constraint escape (AREs only) is a constraint,
-matching the empty string if specific conditions are met,
-written as an escape:
+Within bracket expressions,
+.QW \fB\ed\fR ,
+.QW \fB\es\fR ,
+and
+.QW \fB\ew\fR \&
+lose their outer brackets, and
+.QW \fB\eD\fR ,
+.QW \fB\eS\fR ,
+and
+.QW \fB\eW\fR \&
+are illegal. (So, for example,
+.QW \fB[a-c\ed]\fR
+is equivalent to
+.QW \fB[a-c[:digit:]]\fR .
+Also,
+.QW \fB[a-c\eD]\fR ,
+which is equivalent to
+.QW \fB[a-c^[:digit:]]\fR ,
+is illegal.)
+.SS "CONSTRAINT ESCAPES"
+A constraint escape (AREs only) is a constraint, matching the empty
+string if specific conditions are met, written as an escape:
 .RS 2
 .TP 6
 \fB\eA\fR
-matches only at the beginning of the string
-(see MATCHING, below, for how this differs from `\fB^\fR')
+.
+matches only at the beginning of the string (see \fBMATCHING\fR,
+below, for how this differs from
+.QW \fB^\fR )
 .TP
 \fB\em\fR
+.
 matches only at the beginning of a word
 .TP
 \fB\eM\fR
+.
 matches only at the end of a word
 .TP
 \fB\ey\fR
+.
 matches only at the beginning or end of a word
 .TP
 \fB\eY\fR
+.
 matches only at a point that is not the beginning or end of a word
 .TP
 \fB\eZ\fR
-matches only at the end of the string
-(see MATCHING, below, for how this differs from `\fB$\fR')
+.
+matches only at the end of the string (see \fBMATCHING\fR, below, for
+how this differs from
+.QW \fB$\fR )
 .TP
 \fB\e\fIm\fR
-(where
-\fIm\fR
-is a nonzero digit) a \fIback reference\fR, see below
+.
+(where \fIm\fR is a nonzero digit) a \fIback reference\fR, see below
 .TP
 \fB\e\fImnn\fR
-(where
-\fIm\fR
-is a nonzero digit, and
-\fInn\fR
-is some more digits,
-and the decimal value
-\fImnn\fR
-is not greater than the number of closing capturing parentheses seen so far)
-a \fIback reference\fR, see below
+.
+(where \fIm\fR is a nonzero digit, and \fInn\fR is some more digits,
+and the decimal value \fImnn\fR is not greater than the number of
+closing capturing parentheses seen so far) a \fIback reference\fR, see
+below
 .RE
 .PP
 A word is defined as in the specification of
-\fB[[:<:]]\fR
+.QW \fB[[:<:]]\fR
 and
-\fB[[:>:]]\fR
-above.
-Constraint escapes are illegal within bracket expressions.
-.PP
-A back reference (AREs only) matches the same string matched by the parenthesized
-subexpression specified by the number,
-so that (e.g.)
-\fB([bc])\e1\fR
+.QW \fB[[:>:]]\fR
+above. Constraint escapes are illegal within bracket expressions.
+.SS "BACK REFERENCES"
+A back reference (AREs only) matches the same string matched by the
+parenthesized subexpression specified by the number, so that (e.g.)
+.QW \fB([bc])\e1\fR
 matches
-\fBbb\fR
+.QW \fBbb\fR
 or
-\fBcc\fR
-but not `\fBbc\fR'.
+.QW \fBcc\fR
+but not
+.QW \fBbc\fR .
 The subexpression must entirely precede the back reference in the RE.
 Subexpressions are numbered in the order of their leading parentheses.
 Non-capturing parentheses do not define subexpressions.
 .PP
-There is an inherent historical ambiguity between octal character-entry 
-escapes and back references, which is resolved by heuristics,
-as hinted at above.
-A leading zero always indicates an octal escape.
-A single non-zero digit, not followed by another digit,
-is always taken as a back reference.
-A multi-digit sequence not starting with a zero is taken as a back 
-reference if it comes after a suitable subexpression
-(i.e. the number is in the legal range for a back reference),
-and otherwise is taken as octal.
+There is an inherent historical ambiguity between octal
+character-entry escapes and back references, which is resolved by
+heuristics, as hinted at above. A leading zero always indicates an
+octal escape. A single non-zero digit, not followed by another digit,
+is always taken as a back reference. A multi-digit sequence not
+starting with a zero is taken as a back reference if it comes after a
+suitable subexpression (i.e. the number is in the legal range for a
+back reference), and otherwise is taken as octal.
 .SH "METASYNTAX"
 In addition to the main syntax described above, there are some special
 forms and miscellaneous syntactic facilities available.
 .PP
 Normally the flavor of RE being used is specified by
-application-dependent means.
-However, this can be overridden by a \fIdirector\fR.
-If an RE of any flavor begins with `\fB***:\fR',
-the rest of the RE is an ARE.
-If an RE of any flavor begins with `\fB***=\fR',
-the rest of the RE is taken to be a literal string,
-with all characters considered ordinary characters.
-.PP
-An ARE may begin with \fIembedded options\fR:
-a sequence
-\fB(?\fIxyz\fB)\fR
-(where
-\fIxyz\fR
-is one or more alphabetic characters)
-specifies options affecting the rest of the RE.
-These supplement, and can override,
-any options specified by the application.
-The available option letters are:
+application-dependent means. However, this can be overridden by a
+\fIdirector\fR. If an RE of any flavor begins with
+.QW \fB***:\fR ,
+the rest of the RE is an ARE. If an RE of any flavor begins with
+.QW \fB***=\fR ,
+the rest of the RE is taken to be a literal string, with
+all characters considered ordinary characters.
+.PP
+An ARE may begin with \fIembedded options\fR: a sequence
+\fB(?\fIxyz\fB)\fR (where \fIxyz\fR is one or more alphabetic
+characters) specifies options affecting the rest of the RE. These
+supplement, and can override, any options specified by the
+application. The available option letters are:
 .RS 2
 .TP 3
 \fBb\fR
+.
 rest of RE is a BRE
 .TP 3
 \fBc\fR
+.
 case-sensitive matching (usual default)
 .TP 3
 \fBe\fR
+.
 rest of RE is an ERE
 .TP 3
 \fBi\fR
-case-insensitive matching (see MATCHING, below)
+.
+case-insensitive matching (see \fBMATCHING\fR, below)
 .TP 3
 \fBm\fR
-historical synonym for
-\fBn\fR
+.
+historical synonym for \fBn\fR
 .TP 3
 \fBn\fR
-newline-sensitive matching (see MATCHING, below)
+.
+newline-sensitive matching (see \fBMATCHING\fR, below)
 .TP 3
 \fBp\fR
-partial newline-sensitive matching (see MATCHING, below)
+.
+partial newline-sensitive matching (see \fBMATCHING\fR, below)
 .TP 3
 \fBq\fR
-rest of RE is a literal (``quoted'') string, all ordinary characters
+.
+rest of RE is a literal
+.PQ quoted
+string, all ordinary characters
 .TP 3
 \fBs\fR
+.
 non-newline-sensitive matching (usual default)
 .TP 3
 \fBt\fR
+.
 tight syntax (usual default; see below)
 .TP 3
 \fBw\fR
-inverse partial newline-sensitive (``weird'') matching (see MATCHING, below)
+.
+inverse partial newline-sensitive
+.PQ weird
+matching (see \fBMATCHING\fR, below)
 .TP 3
 \fBx\fR
+.
 expanded syntax (see below)
 .RE
 .PP
-Embedded options take effect at the
-\fB)\fR
-terminating the sequence.
-They are available only at the start of an ARE,
-and may not be used later within it.
-.PP
-In addition to the usual (\fItight\fR) RE syntax, in which all characters are
-significant, there is an \fIexpanded\fR syntax,
-available in all flavors of RE
-with the \fB-expanded\fR switch, or in AREs with the embedded x option.
-In the expanded syntax,
-white-space characters are ignored
-and all characters between a
-\fB#\fR
-and the following newline (or the end of the RE) are ignored,
-permitting paragraphing and commenting a complex RE.
-There are three exceptions to that basic rule:
-.RS 2
-.PP
-a white-space character or `\fB#\fR' preceded by `\fB\e\fR' is retained
-.PP
-white space or `\fB#\fR' within a bracket expression is retained
-.PP
+Embedded options take effect at the \fB)\fR terminating the sequence.
+They are available only at the start of an ARE, and may not be used
+later within it.
+.PP
+In addition to the usual (\fItight\fR) RE syntax, in which all
+characters are significant, there is an \fIexpanded\fR syntax,
+available in all flavors of RE with the \fB\-expanded\fR switch, or in
+AREs with the embedded x option. In the expanded syntax, white-space
+characters are ignored and all characters between a \fB#\fR and the
+following newline (or the end of the RE) are ignored, permitting
+paragraphing and commenting a complex RE. There are three exceptions
+to that basic rule:
+.IP \(bu 3
+a white-space character or
+.QW \fB#\fR
+preceded by
+.QW \fB\e\fR
+is retained
+.IP \(bu 3
+white space or
+.QW \fB#\fR
+within a bracket expression is retained
+.IP \(bu 3
 white space and comments are illegal within multi-character symbols
-like the ARE `\fB(?:\fR' or the BRE `\fB\e(\fR'
-.RE
+like the ARE
+.QW \fB(?:\fR
+or the BRE
+.QW \fB\e(\fR
 .PP
 Expanded-syntax white-space characters are blank, tab, newline, and
-.VS 8.2
 any character that belongs to the \fIspace\fR character class.
-.VE 8.2
-.PP
-Finally, in an ARE,
-outside bracket expressions, the sequence `\fB(?#\fIttt\fB)\fR'
-(where
-\fIttt\fR
-is any text not containing a `\fB)\fR')
-is a comment,
-completely ignored.
-Again, this is not allowed between the characters of
-multi-character symbols like `\fB(?:\fR'.
+.PP
+Finally, in an ARE, outside bracket expressions, the sequence
+.QW \fB(?#\fIttt\fB)\fR
+(where \fIttt\fR is any text not containing a
+.QW \fB)\fR )
+is a comment, completely ignored. Again, this is not
+allowed between the characters of multi-character symbols like
+.QW \fB(?:\fR .
 Such comments are more a historical artifact than a useful facility,
-and their use is deprecated;
-use the expanded syntax instead.
-.PP
-\fINone\fR of these metasyntax extensions is available if the application
-(or an initial
-\fB***=\fR
-director)
-has specified that the user's input be treated as a literal string
-rather than as an RE.
+and their use is deprecated; use the expanded syntax instead.
+.PP
+\fINone\fR of these metasyntax extensions is available if the
+application (or an initial
+.QW \fB***=\fR
+director) has specified that the
+user's input be treated as a literal string rather than as an RE.
 .SH MATCHING
 In the event that an RE could match more than one substring of a given
-string,
-the RE matches the one starting earliest in the string.
-If the RE could match more than one substring starting at that point,
-its choice is determined by its \fIpreference\fR:
-either the longest substring, or the shortest.
-.PP
-Most atoms, and all constraints, have no preference.
-A parenthesized RE has the same preference (possibly none) as the RE.
-A quantified atom with quantifier
-\fB{\fIm\fB}\fR
-or
-\fB{\fIm\fB}?\fR
-has the same preference (possibly none) as the atom itself.
-A quantified atom with other normal quantifiers (including
-\fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}\fR
-with
-\fIm\fR
-equal to
-\fIn\fR)
-prefers longest match.
-A quantified atom with other non-greedy quantifiers (including
-\fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}?\fR
-with
-\fIm\fR
-equal to
-\fIn\fR)
-prefers shortest match.
-A branch has the same preference as the first quantified atom in it
-which has a preference.
-An RE consisting of two or more branches connected by the
-\fB|\fR
-operator prefers longest match.
-.PP
-Subject to the constraints imposed by the rules for matching the whole RE,
-subexpressions also match the longest or shortest possible substrings,
-based on their preferences,
-with subexpressions starting earlier in the RE taking priority over
-ones starting later.
-Note that outer subexpressions thus take priority over
-their component subexpressions.
-.PP
-Note that the quantifiers
-\fB{1,1}\fR
-and
-\fB{1,1}?\fR
-can be used to force longest and shortest preference, respectively,
-on a subexpression or a whole RE.
-.PP
-Match lengths are measured in characters, not collating elements.
-An empty string is considered longer than no match at all.
-For example,
-\fBbb*\fR
-matches the three middle characters of `\fBabbbc\fR',
-\fB(week|wee)(night|knights)\fR
-matches all ten characters of `\fBweeknights\fR',
+string, the RE matches the one starting earliest in the string. If
+the RE could match more than one substring starting at that point, its
+choice is determined by its \fIpreference\fR: either the longest
+substring, or the shortest.
+.PP
+Most atoms, and all constraints, have no preference. A parenthesized
+RE has the same preference (possibly none) as the RE. A quantified
+atom with quantifier \fB{\fIm\fB}\fR or \fB{\fIm\fB}?\fR has the same
+preference (possibly none) as the atom itself. A quantified atom with
+other normal quantifiers (including \fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}\fR with
+\fIm\fR equal to \fIn\fR) prefers longest match. A quantified atom
+with other non-greedy quantifiers (including \fB{\fIm\fB,\fIn\fB}?\fR
+with \fIm\fR equal to \fIn\fR) prefers shortest match. A branch has
+the same preference as the first quantified atom in it which has a
+preference. An RE consisting of two or more branches connected by the
+\fB|\fR operator prefers longest match.
+.PP
+Subject to the constraints imposed by the rules for matching the whole
+RE, subexpressions also match the longest or shortest possible
+substrings, based on their preferences, with subexpressions starting
+earlier in the RE taking priority over ones starting later. Note that
+outer subexpressions thus take priority over their component
+subexpressions.
+.PP
+Note that the quantifiers \fB{1,1}\fR and \fB{1,1}?\fR can be used to
+force longest and shortest preference, respectively, on a
+subexpression or a whole RE.
+.PP
+Match lengths are measured in characters, not collating elements. An
+empty string is considered longer than no match at all. For example,
+.QW \fBbb*\fR
+matches the three middle characters of
+.QW \fBabbbc\fR ,
+.QW \fB(week|wee)(night|knights)\fR
+matches all ten characters of
+.QW \fBweeknights\fR ,
 when
-\fB(.*).*\fR
+.QW \fB(.*).*\fR
 is matched against
-\fBabc\fR
-the parenthesized subexpression
-matches all three characters, and
-when
-\fB(a*)*\fR
+.QW \fBabc\fR
+the parenthesized subexpression matches all three characters, and when
+.QW \fB(a*)*\fR
 is matched against
-\fBbc\fR
-both the whole RE and the parenthesized
-subexpression match an empty string.
-.PP
-If case-independent matching is specified,
-the effect is much as if all case distinctions had vanished from the
-alphabet.
-When an alphabetic that exists in multiple cases appears as an
-ordinary character outside a bracket expression, it is effectively
-transformed into a bracket expression containing both cases,
-so that
-\fBx\fR
-becomes `\fB[xX]\fR'.
-When it appears inside a bracket expression, all case counterparts
-of it are added to the bracket expression, so that
-\fB[x]\fR
+.QW \fBbc\fR
+both the whole RE and the parenthesized subexpression match an empty string.
+.PP
+If case-independent matching is specified, the effect is much as if
+all case distinctions had vanished from the alphabet. When an
+alphabetic that exists in multiple cases appears as an ordinary
+character outside a bracket expression, it is effectively transformed
+into a bracket expression containing both cases, so that \fBx\fR
 becomes
-\fB[xX]\fR
-and
-\fB[^x]\fR
-becomes `\fB[^xX]\fR'.
-.PP
-If newline-sensitive matching is specified, \fB.\fR
-and bracket expressions using
-\fB^\fR
-will never match the newline character
-(so that matches will never cross newlines unless the RE
-explicitly arranges it)
-and
-\fB^\fR
-and
-\fB$\fR
-will match the empty string after and before a newline
-respectively, in addition to matching at beginning and end of string
-respectively.
-ARE
-\fB\eA\fR
+.QW \fB[xX]\fR .
+When it appears inside a bracket expression,
+all case counterparts of it are added to the bracket expression, so
+that
+.QW \fB[x]\fR
+becomes
+.QW \fB[xX]\fR
 and
-\fB\eZ\fR
+.QW \fB[^x]\fR
+becomes
+.QW \fB[^xX]\fR .
+.PP
+If newline-sensitive matching is specified, \fB.\fR and bracket
+expressions using \fB^\fR will never match the newline character (so
+that matches will never cross newlines unless the RE explicitly
+arranges it) and \fB^\fR and \fB$\fR will match the empty string after
+and before a newline respectively, in addition to matching at
+beginning and end of string respectively. ARE \fB\eA\fR and \fB\eZ\fR
 continue to match beginning or end of string \fIonly\fR.
 .PP
-If partial newline-sensitive matching is specified,
-this affects \fB.\fR
-and bracket expressions
-as with newline-sensitive matching, but not
-\fB^\fR
-and `\fB$\fR'.
+If partial newline-sensitive matching is specified, this affects
+\fB.\fR and bracket expressions as with newline-sensitive matching,
+but not \fB^\fR and \fB$\fR.
 .PP
-If inverse partial newline-sensitive matching is specified,
-this affects
-\fB^\fR
-and
-\fB$\fR
-as with
-newline-sensitive matching,
-but not \fB.\fR
-and bracket expressions.
-This isn't very useful but is provided for symmetry.
+If inverse partial newline-sensitive matching is specified, this
+affects \fB^\fR and \fB$\fR as with newline-sensitive matching, but
+not \fB.\fR and bracket expressions. This is not very useful but is
+provided for symmetry.
 .SH "LIMITS AND COMPATIBILITY"
-No particular limit is imposed on the length of REs.
-Programs intended to be highly portable should not employ REs longer
-than 256 bytes,
-as a POSIX-compliant implementation can refuse to accept such REs.
-.PP
-The only feature of AREs that is actually incompatible with
-POSIX EREs is that
-\fB\e\fR
-does not lose its special
-significance inside bracket expressions.
-All other ARE features use syntax which is illegal or has
-undefined or unspecified effects in POSIX EREs;
-the
-\fB***\fR
-syntax of directors likewise is outside the POSIX
-syntax for both BREs and EREs.
-.PP
-Many of the ARE extensions are borrowed from Perl, but some have
-been changed to clean them up, and a few Perl extensions are not present.
-Incompatibilities of note include `\fB\eb\fR', `\fB\eB\fR',
-the lack of special treatment for a trailing newline,
-the addition of complemented bracket expressions to the things
-affected by newline-sensitive matching,
-the restrictions on parentheses and back references in lookahead constraints,
-and the longest/shortest-match (rather than first-match) matching semantics.
-.PP
-The matching rules for REs containing both normal and non-greedy quantifiers
-have changed since early beta-test versions of this package.
-(The new rules are much simpler and cleaner,
-but don't work as hard at guessing the user's real intentions.)
-.PP
-Henry Spencer's original 1986 \fIregexp\fR package,
-still in widespread use (e.g., in pre-8.1 releases of Tcl),
-implemented an early version of today's EREs.
-There are four incompatibilities between \fIregexp\fR's near-EREs
-(`RREs' for short) and AREs.
-In roughly increasing order of significance:
-.PP
-.RS
-In AREs,
-\fB\e\fR
-followed by an alphanumeric character is either an
-escape or an error,
-while in RREs, it was just another way of writing the 
-alphanumeric.
-This should not be a problem because there was no reason to write
-such a sequence in RREs.
-.PP
-\fB{\fR
-followed by a digit in an ARE is the beginning of a bound,
-while in RREs,
-\fB{\fR
-was always an ordinary character.
-Such sequences should be rare,
-and will often result in an error because following characters
-will not look like a valid bound.
-.PP
-In AREs,
-\fB\e\fR
-remains a special character within `\fB[\|]\fR',
-so a literal
-\fB\e\fR
-within
-\fB[\|]\fR
-must be written `\fB\e\e\fR'.
-\fB\e\e\fR
-also gives a literal
-\fB\e\fR
-within
-\fB[\|]\fR
-in RREs,
+No particular limit is imposed on the length of REs. Programs
+intended to be highly portable should not employ REs longer than 256
+bytes, as a POSIX-compliant implementation can refuse to accept such
+REs.
+.PP
+The only feature of AREs that is actually incompatible with POSIX EREs
+is that \fB\e\fR does not lose its special significance inside bracket
+expressions. All other ARE features use syntax which is illegal or
+has undefined or unspecified effects in POSIX EREs; the \fB***\fR
+syntax of directors likewise is outside the POSIX syntax for both BREs
+and EREs.
+.PP
+Many of the ARE extensions are borrowed from Perl, but some have been
+changed to clean them up, and a few Perl extensions are not present.
+Incompatibilities of note include
+.QW \fB\eb\fR ,
+.QW \fB\eB\fR ,
+the lack of special treatment for a trailing newline, the addition of
+complemented bracket expressions to the things affected by
+newline-sensitive matching, the restrictions on parentheses and back
+references in lookahead constraints, and the longest/shortest-match
+(rather than first-match) matching semantics.
+.PP
+The matching rules for REs containing both normal and non-greedy
+quantifiers have changed since early beta-test versions of this
+package. (The new rules are much simpler and cleaner, but do not work
+as hard at guessing the user's real intentions.)
+.PP
+Henry Spencer's original 1986 \fIregexp\fR package, still in
+widespread use (e.g., in pre-8.1 releases of Tcl), implemented an
+early version of today's EREs. There are four incompatibilities
+between \fIregexp\fR's near-EREs
+.PQ RREs " for short"
+and AREs. In roughly increasing order of significance:
+.IP \(bu 3
+In AREs, \fB\e\fR followed by an alphanumeric character is either an
+escape or an error, while in RREs, it was just another way of writing
+the alphanumeric. This should not be a problem because there was no
+reason to write such a sequence in RREs.
+.IP \(bu 3
+\fB{\fR followed by a digit in an ARE is the beginning of a bound,
+while in RREs, \fB{\fR was always an ordinary character. Such
+sequences should be rare, and will often result in an error because
+following characters will not look like a valid bound.
+.IP \(bu 3
+In AREs, \fB\e\fR remains a special character within
+.QW \fB[\|]\fR ,
+so a literal \fB\e\fR within \fB[\|]\fR must be written
+.QW \fB\e\e\fR .
+\fB\e\e\fR also gives a literal \fB\e\fR within \fB[\|]\fR in RREs,
 but only truly paranoid programmers routinely doubled the backslash.
-.PP
-AREs report the longest/shortest match for the RE,
-rather than the first found in a specified search order.
-This may affect some RREs which were written in the expectation that
-the first match would be reported.
-(The careful crafting of RREs to optimize the search order for fast
-matching is obsolete (AREs examine all possible matches
-in parallel, and their performance is largely insensitive to their
-complexity) but cases where the search order was exploited to deliberately 
-find a match which was \fInot\fR the longest/shortest will need rewriting.)
-.RE
-
+.IP \(bu 3
+AREs report the longest/shortest match for the RE, rather than the
+first found in a specified search order. This may affect some RREs
+which were written in the expectation that the first match would be
+reported. (The careful crafting of RREs to optimize the search order
+for fast matching is obsolete (AREs examine all possible matches in
+parallel, and their performance is largely insensitive to their
+complexity) but cases where the search order was exploited to
+deliberately find a match which was \fInot\fR the longest/shortest
+will need rewriting.)
 .SH "BASIC REGULAR EXPRESSIONS"
-BREs differ from EREs in several respects.  `\fB|\fR', `\fB+\fR',
-and
-\fB?\fR
-are ordinary characters and there is no equivalent
-for their functionality.
-The delimiters for bounds are
-\fB\e{\fR
-and `\fB\e}\fR',
-with
-\fB{\fR
-and
-\fB}\fR
-by themselves ordinary characters.
-The parentheses for nested subexpressions are
-\fB\e(\fR
-and `\fB\e)\fR',
-with
-\fB(\fR
-and
-\fB)\fR
-by themselves ordinary characters.
-\fB^\fR
-is an ordinary character except at the beginning of the
-RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression,
-\fB$\fR
-is an ordinary character except at the end of the
-RE or the end of a parenthesized subexpression,
-and
-\fB*\fR
-is an ordinary character if it appears at the beginning of the
-RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression
-(after a possible leading `\fB^\fR').
-Finally,
-single-digit back references are available,
-and
-\fB\e<\fR
-and
-\fB\e>\fR
-are synonyms for
-\fB[[:<:]]\fR
+BREs differ from EREs in several respects.
+.QW \fB|\fR ,
+.QW \fB+\fR ,
+and \fB?\fR are ordinary characters and there is no equivalent for their
+functionality. The delimiters for bounds are \fB\e{\fR and
+.QW \fB\e}\fR ,
+with \fB{\fR and \fB}\fR by themselves ordinary characters. The
+parentheses for nested subexpressions are \fB\e(\fR and
+.QW \fB\e)\fR ,
+with \fB(\fR and \fB)\fR by themselves ordinary
+characters. \fB^\fR is an ordinary character except at the beginning
+of the RE or the beginning of a parenthesized subexpression, \fB$\fR
+is an ordinary character except at the end of the RE or the end of a
+parenthesized subexpression, and \fB*\fR is an ordinary character if
+it appears at the beginning of the RE or the beginning of a
+parenthesized subexpression (after a possible leading
+.QW \fB^\fR ).
+Finally, single-digit back references are available, and \fB\e<\fR and
+\fB\e>\fR are synonyms for
+.QW \fB[[:<:]]\fR
 and
-\fB[[:>:]]\fR
-respectively;
-no other escapes are available.
-
+.QW \fB[[:>:]]\fR
+respectively; no other escapes are available.
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 RegExp(3), regexp(n), regsub(n), lsearch(n), switch(n), text(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 match, regular expression, string
+.\" Local Variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" End:
diff --git a/doc/read.n b/doc/read.n
index 9584756..5398b08 100644
--- a/doc/read.n
+++ b/doc/read.n
@@ -30,13 +30,11 @@ the channel is configured to use a multi-byte encoding, then the
 number of characters read may not be the same as the number of bytes
 read.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as the
 Tcl standard input channel (\fBstdin\fR), the return value from an
 invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or the result of a channel
 creation command provided by a Tcl extension. The channel must have
 been opened for input.
-.VE
 .PP
 If \fIchannelId\fR is in nonblocking mode, the command may not read as
 many characters as requested: once all available input has been read,
@@ -78,7 +76,7 @@ with each line in the file corresponding to an element in the list:
 set fl [open /proc/meminfo]
 set data [\fBread\fR $fl]
 close $fl
-set lines [split $data \\n]
+set lines [split $data \en]
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
diff --git a/doc/refchan.n b/doc/refchan.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..577c78a
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/refchan.n
@@ -0,0 +1,340 @@
+'\" 
+'\" Copyright (c) 2006 Andreas Kupries <andreas_kupries@users.sourceforge.net>
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\"
+.so man.macros
+.TH refchan n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+.\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+refchan \- Command handler API of reflected channels, version 1
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBcmdPrefix \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+The Tcl-level handler for a reflected channel has to be a command with
+subcommands (termed an \fIensemble\fR, as it is a command such as that
+created by \fBnamespace ensemble create\fR, though the implementation
+of handlers for reflected channel \fIis not\fR tied to \fBnamespace
+ensemble\fRs in any way). Note that \fIcmdPrefix\fR is whatever was
+specified in the call to \fBchan create\fR, and may consist of
+multiple arguments; this will be expanded to multiple words in place
+of the prefix.
+.PP
+Of all the possible subcommands, the handler \fImust\fR support
+\fBinitialize\fR, \fBfinalize\fR, and \fBwatch\fR. Support for the
+other subcommands is optional.
+.SS "MANDATORY SUBCOMMANDS"
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBinitialize \fIchannelId mode\fR
+.
+An invocation of this subcommand will be the first call the
+\fIcmdPrefix\fR will receive for the specified new \fIchannelId\fR. It
+is the responsibility of this subcommand to set up any internal data
+structures required to keep track of the channel and its state.
+.RS
+.PP
+The return value of the method has to be a list containing the names
+of all subcommands supported by the \fIcmdPrefix\fR. This also tells
+the Tcl core which version of the API for reflected channels is used by
+this command handler.
+.PP
+Any error thrown by the method will abort the creation of the channel
+and no channel will be created. The thrown error will appear as error
+thrown by \fBchan create\fR. Any exception other than an \fBerror\fR
+(e.g. \fBbreak\fR, etc.) is treated as (and converted to) an error.
+.PP
+\fBNote:\fR If the creation of the channel was aborted due to failures
+here, then the \fBfinalize\fR subcommand will not be called.
+.PP
+The \fImode\fR argument tells the handler whether the channel was
+opened for reading, writing, or both. It is a list containing any of
+the strings \fBread\fR or \fBwrite\fR. The list will always
+contain at least one element.
+.PP
+The subcommand must throw an error if the chosen mode is not
+supported by the \fIcmdPrefix\fR.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBfinalize \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+An invocation of this subcommand will be the last call the
+\fIcmdPrefix\fR will receive for the specified \fIchannelId\fR. It will
+be generated just before the destruction of the data structures of the
+channel held by the Tcl core. The command handler \fImust not\fR
+access the \fIchannelId\fR anymore in no way. Upon this subcommand being
+called, any internal resources allocated to this channel must be
+cleaned up.
+.RS
+.PP
+The return value of this subcommand is ignored.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws an error the command which caused its
+invocation (usually \fBclose\fR) will appear to have thrown this
+error. Any exception beyond \fIerror\fR (e.g. \fIbreak\fR, etc.) is
+treated as (and converted to) an error.
+.PP
+This subcommand is not invoked if the creation of the channel was
+aborted during \fBinitialize\fR (See above).
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBwatch \fIchannelId eventspec\fR
+.
+This subcommand notifies the \fIcmdPrefix\fR that the specified
+\fIchannelId\fR is interested in the events listed in the
+\fIeventspec\fR. This argument is a list containing any of \fBread\fR
+and \fBwrite\fR. The list may be empty, which signals that the
+channel does not wish to be notified of any events. In that situation,
+the handler should disable event generation completely.
+.RS
+.PP
+\fBWarning:\fR Any return value of the subcommand is ignored. This
+includes all errors thrown by the subcommand, break, continue, and
+custom return codes.
+.PP
+This subcommand interacts with \fBchan postevent\fR. Trying to post an
+event which was not listed in the last call to \fBwatch\fR will cause
+\fBchan postevent\fR to throw an error.
+.RE
+.SS "OPTIONAL SUBCOMMANDS"
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBread \fIchannelId count\fR
+.
+This \fIoptional\fR subcommand is called when the user requests data from the
+channel \fIchannelId\fR. \fIcount\fR specifies how many \fBbytes\fR have been
+requested. If the subcommand is not supported then it is not possible to read
+from the channel handled by the command.
+.RS
+.PP
+The return value of this subcommand is taken as the requested data
+\fIbytes\fR. If the returned data contains more bytes than requested,
+an error will be signaled and later thrown by the command which
+performed the read (usually \fBgets\fR or \fBread\fR). However,
+returning fewer bytes than requested is acceptable.
+.PP
+Note that returning nothing (0 bytes) is a signal to the higher layers
+that \fBEOF\fR has been reached on the channel. To signal that the
+channel is out of data right now, but has not yet reached \fBEOF\fR,
+it is necessary to throw the error "EAGAIN", i.e. to either
+.PP
+.CS
+return -code error EAGAIN
+.CE
+or
+.CS
+error EAGAIN
+.CE
+.PP
+For extensibility any error whose value is a negative integer number
+will cause the higher layers to set the C-level variable "\fBerrno\fR"
+to the absolute value of this number, signaling a system error. This
+means that both
+.PP
+.CS
+return -code error -11
+.CE
+and
+.CS
+error -11
+.CE
+.PP
+are equivalent to the examples above, using the more readable string "EAGAIN".
+No other error value has such a mapping to a symbolic string.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws any other error, the command which caused its
+invocation (usually \fBgets\fR, or \fBread\fR) will appear to have
+thrown this error. Any exception beyond \fIerror\fR, (e.g.
+\fIbreak\fR, etc.) is treated as and converted to an error.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBwrite \fIchannelId data\fR
+.
+This \fIoptional\fR subcommand is called when the user writes data to
+the channel \fIchannelId\fR. The \fIdata\fR argument contains \fIbytes\fR, not
+characters. Any type of transformation (EOL, encoding) configured for
+the channel has already been applied at this point. If this subcommand
+is not supported then it is not possible to write to the channel
+handled by the command.
+.RS
+.PP
+The return value of the subcommand is taken as the number of bytes
+written by the channel. Anything non-numeric will cause an error to be
+signaled and later thrown by the command which performed the write. A
+negative value implies that the write failed. Returning a value
+greater than the number of bytes given to the handler, or zero, is
+forbidden and will cause the Tcl core to throw an error.
+.PP
+To signal that the channel is not able to accept data for writing
+right now, it is necessary to throw the error "EAGAIN", i.e. to either
+.PP
+.CS
+return -code error EAGAIN
+.CE
+or
+.CS
+error EAGAIN
+.CE
+.PP
+For extensibility any error whose value is a negative integer number
+will cause the higher layers to set the C-level variable "\fBerrno\fR"
+to the absolute value of this number, signaling a system error.
+However, note that the exact mapping between these error numbers and
+their meanings is operating system dependent.
+.PP
+For example, while on Linux both
+.PP
+.CS
+return -code error -11
+.CE
+and
+.CS
+error -11
+.CE
+.PP
+are equivalent to the examples above, using the more readable string "EAGAIN",
+this is not true for BSD, where the equivalent number is -35.
+.PP
+The symbolic string however is the same across systems, and internally
+translated to the correct number. No other error value has such a mapping
+to a symbolic string.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws any other error the command which caused its
+invocation (usually \fBputs\fR) will appear to have thrown this error.
+Any exception beyond \fIerror\fR (e.g.\ \fIbreak\fR, etc.) is treated
+as and converted to an error.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBseek \fIchannelId offset base\fR
+.
+This \fIoptional\fR subcommand is responsible for the handling of
+\fBseek\fR and \fBtell\fR requests on the channel \fIchannelId\fR. If it is not
+supported then seeking will not be possible for the channel.
+.RS
+.PP
+The \fIbase\fR argument is one of
+.TP 10
+\fBstart\fR
+.
+Seeking is relative to the beginning of the channel.
+.TP 10
+\fBcurrent\fR
+.
+Seeking is relative to the current seek position.
+.TP 10
+\fBend\fR
+.
+Seeking is relative to the end of the channel.
+.PP
+The \fIbase\fR argument of the builtin \fBchan seek\fR command takes
+the same names.
+.PP
+The \fIoffset\fR is an integer number specifying the amount of
+\fBbytes\fR to seek forward or backward. A positive number should seek
+forward, and a negative number should seek backward.
+.PP
+A channel may provide only limited seeking. For example sockets can
+seek forward, but not backward.
+.PP
+The return value of the subcommand is taken as the (new) location of
+the channel, counted from the start. This has to be an integer number
+greater than or equal to zero.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws an error the command which caused its
+invocation (usually \fBseek\fR, or \fBtell\fR) will appear to have
+thrown this error. Any exception beyond \fIerror\fR (e.g. \fIbreak\fR,
+etc.) is treated as and converted to an error.
+.PP
+The offset/base combination of 0/\fBcurrent\fR signals a \fBtell\fR
+request, i.e. seek nothing relative to the current location, making
+the new location identical to the current one, which is then returned.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBconfigure \fIchannelId option value\fR
+.
+This \fIoptional\fR subcommand is for setting the type-specific options of
+channel \fIchannelId\fR. The \fIoption\fR argument indicates the option to be
+written, and the \fIvalue\fR argument indicates the value to set the option to.
+.RS
+.PP
+This subcommand will never try to update more than one option at a
+time; that is behavior implemented in the Tcl channel core.
+.PP
+The return value of the subcommand is ignored.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws an error the command which performed the
+(re)configuration or query (usually \fBfconfigure\fR or \fBchan
+configure\fR) will appear to have thrown this error. Any exception
+beyond \fIerror\fR (e.g. \fIbreak\fR, etc.) is treated as and
+converted to an error.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBcget \fIchannelId option\fR
+.
+This \fIoptional\fR subcommand is used when reading a single type-specific
+option of channel \fIchannelId\fR. If this subcommand is supported then the
+subcommand \fBcgetall\fR must be supported as well.
+.RS
+.PP
+The subcommand should return the value of the specified \fIoption\fR.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws an error, the command which performed the
+(re)configuration or query (usually \fBfconfigure\fR) will appear to
+have thrown this error. Any exception beyond \fIerror\fR (e.g.
+\fIbreak\fR, etc.) is treated as and converted to an error.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBcgetall \fIchannelId\fR
+.
+This \fIoptional\fR subcommand is used for reading all type-specific options
+of channel \fIchannelId\fR. If this subcommand is supported then the
+subcommand \fBcget\fR has to be supported as well.
+.RS
+.PP
+The subcommand should return a list of all options and their values.
+This list must have an even number of elements.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws an error the command which performed the
+(re)configuration or query (usually \fBfconfigure\fR) will appear to
+have thrown this error. Any exception beyond \fIerror\fR (e.g.
+\fIbreak\fR, etc.) is treated as and converted to an error.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fIcmdPrefix \fBblocking \fIchannelId mode\fR
+.
+This \fIoptional\fR subcommand handles changes to the blocking mode of the
+channel \fIchannelId\fR. The \fImode\fR is a boolean flag. A true value means
+that the channel has to be set to blocking, and a false value means that the
+channel should be non-blocking.
+.RS
+.PP
+The return value of the subcommand is ignored.
+.PP
+If the subcommand throws an error the command which caused its
+invocation (usually \fBfconfigure\fR) will appear to have thrown this
+error. Any exception beyond \fIerror\fR (e.g. \fIbreak\fR, etc.) is
+treated as and converted to an error.
+.RE
+.SH NOTES
+Some of the functions supported in channels defined in Tcl's C
+interface are not available to channels reflected to the Tcl level.
+.PP
+The function \fBTcl_DriverGetHandleProc\fR is not supported; i.e.
+reflected channels do not have OS specific handles.
+.PP
+The function \fBTcl_DriverHandlerProc\fR is not supported. This driver
+function is relevant only for stacked channels, i.e. transformations.
+Reflected channels are always base channels, not transformations.
+.PP
+The function \fBTcl_DriverFlushProc\fR is not supported. This is
+because the current generic I/O layer of Tcl does not use this
+function anywhere at all. Therefore support at the Tcl level makes no
+sense either. This may be altered in the future (through extending the
+API defined here and changing its version number) should the function
+be used at some time in the future.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+chan(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+channel, reflection
diff --git a/doc/regexp.n b/doc/regexp.n
index a1692bd..100f0d8 100644
--- a/doc/regexp.n
+++ b/doc/regexp.n
@@ -18,8 +18,8 @@ regexp \- Match a regular expression against a string
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 Determines whether the regular expression \fIexp\fR matches part or
-all of \fIstring\fR and returns 1 if it does, 0 if it doesn't, unless
-\fB-inline\fR is specified (see below).
+all of \fIstring\fR and returns 1 if it does, 0 if it does not, unless
+\fB\-inline\fR is specified (see below).
 (Regular expression matching is described in the \fBre_syntax\fR
 reference page.)
 .LP
@@ -60,20 +60,37 @@ range of characters.
 \fB\-line\fR
 Enables newline-sensitive matching.  By default, newline is a
 completely ordinary character with no special meaning.  With this
-flag, `[^' bracket expressions and `.' never match newline, `^'
+flag,
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW .
+never match newline,
+.QW ^
 matches an empty string after any newline in addition to its normal
-function, and `$' matches an empty string before any newline in
+function, and
+.QW $
+matches an empty string before any newline in
 addition to its normal function.  This flag is equivalent to
 specifying both \fB\-linestop\fR and \fB\-lineanchor\fR, or the
 \fB(?n)\fR embedded option (see the \fBre_syntax\fR manual page).
 .TP 15
 \fB\-linestop\fR
-Changes the behavior of `[^' bracket expressions and `.' so that they
+Changes the behavior of
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW .
+so that they
 stop at newlines.  This is the same as specifying the \fB(?p)\fR
 embedded option (see the \fBre_syntax\fR manual page).
 .TP 15
 \fB\-lineanchor\fR
-Changes the behavior of `^' and `$' (the ``anchors'') so they match the
+Changes the behavior of
+.QW ^
+and
+.QW $
+(the
+.QW anchors )
+so they match the
 beginning and end of a line respectively.  This is the same as
 specifying the \fB(?w)\fR embedded option (see the \fBre_syntax\fR
 manual page).
@@ -81,7 +98,6 @@ manual page).
 \fB\-nocase\fR
 Causes upper-case characters in \fIstring\fR to be treated as
 lower case during the matching process.
-.VS 8.3
 .TP 15
 \fB\-all\fR
 Causes the regular expression to be matched as many times as possible
@@ -91,69 +107,85 @@ the last match only.
 .TP 15
 \fB\-inline\fR
 Causes the command to return, as a list, the data that would otherwise
-be placed in match variables.  When using \fB-inline\fR,
-match variables may not be specified.  If used with \fB-all\fR, the
+be placed in match variables.  When using \fB\-inline\fR,
+match variables may not be specified.  If used with \fB\-all\fR, the
 list will be concatenated at each iteration, such that a flat list is
 always returned.  For each match iteration, the command will append the
 overall match data, plus one element for each subexpression in the
 regular expression.  Examples are:
 .CS
-    regexp -inline -- {\\w(\\w)} " inlined "
- => {in n}
-    regexp -all -inline -- {\\w(\\w)} " inlined "
- => {in n li i ne e}
+\fBregexp\fR -inline -- {\ew(\ew)} " inlined "
+      \fI\(-> in n\fR
+\fBregexp\fR -all -inline -- {\ew(\ew)} " inlined "
+      \fI\(-> in n li i ne e\fR
 .CE
 .TP 15
 \fB\-start\fR \fIindex\fR
 Specifies a character index offset into the string to start
-matching the regular expression at.  When using this switch, `^'
-will not match the beginning of the line, and \\A will still
+matching the regular expression at.  
+.VS 8.5
+The \fIindex\fR value is interpreted in the same manner
+as the \fIindex\fR argument to \fBstring index\fR.
+.VE 8.5
+When using this switch,
+.QW ^
+will not match the beginning of the line, and \eA will still
 match the start of the string at \fIindex\fR.  If \fB\-indices\fR
 is specified, the indices will be indexed starting from the
 absolute beginning of the input string.
 \fIindex\fR will be constrained to the bounds of the input string.
-.VE 8.3
 .TP 15
 \fB\-\|\-\fR
 Marks the end of switches.  The argument following this one will
 be treated as \fIexp\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
 .PP
-If there are more \fIsubMatchVar\fR's than parenthesized
+If there are more \fIsubMatchVar\fRs than parenthesized
 subexpressions within \fIexp\fR, or if a particular subexpression
-in \fIexp\fR doesn't match the string (e.g. because it was in a
-portion of the expression that wasn't matched), then the corresponding
-\fIsubMatchVar\fR will be set to ``\fB\-1 \-1\fR'' if \fB\-indices\fR
-has been specified or to an empty string otherwise.
+in \fIexp\fR does not match the string (e.g. because it was in a
+portion of the expression that was not matched), then the corresponding
+\fIsubMatchVar\fR will be set to
+.QW "\fB\-1 \-1\fR"
+if \fB\-indices\fR has been specified or to an empty string otherwise.
 .SH EXAMPLES
+.PP
 Find the first occurrence of a word starting with \fBfoo\fR in a
 string that is not actually an instance of \fBfoobar\fR, and get the
 letters following it up to the end of the word into a variable:
 .CS
-\fBregexp\fR {\\<foo(?!bar\\>)(\\w*)} $string \-> restOfWord
+\fBregexp\fR {\emfoo(?!bar\eM)(\ew*)} $string \-> restOfWord
 .CE
 Note that the whole matched substring has been placed in the variable
-\fB\->\fR which is a name chosen to look nice given that we are not
+.QW \fB\->\fR ,
+which is a name chosen to look nice given that we are not
 actually interested in its contents.
 .PP
 Find the index of the word \fBbadger\fR (in any case) within a string
 and store that in the variable \fBlocation\fR:
 .CS
-\fBregexp\fR \-indices {(?i)\\<badger\\>} $string location
+\fBregexp\fR \-indices {(?i)\embadger\eM} $string location
+.CE
+This could also be written as a \fIbasic\fR regular expression (as opposed
+to using the default syntax of \fIadvanced\fR regular expressions) match by
+prefixing the expression with a suitable flag:
+.CS
+\fBregexp\fR \-indices {(?ib)\e<badger\e>} $string location
 .CE
 .PP
-Count the number of octal digits in a string:
+This counts the number of octal digits in a string:
 .CS
 \fBregexp\fR \-all {[0\-7]} $string
 .CE
 .PP
-List all words (consisting of all sequences of non-whitespace
-characters) in a string:
+This lists all words (consisting of all sequences of non-whitespace
+characters) in a string, and is useful as a more powerful version of the
+\fBsplit\fR command:
 .CS
-\fBregexp\fR \-all \-inline {\\S+} $string
+\fBregexp\fR \-all \-inline {\eS+} $string
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-re_syntax(n), regsub(n)
-
+re_syntax(n), regsub(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
+.VE
 .SH KEYWORDS
-match, regular expression, string
+match, parsing, pattern, regular expression, splitting, string
diff --git a/doc/registry.n b/doc/registry.n
index 6809cb7..e4371e6 100644
--- a/doc/registry.n
+++ b/doc/registry.n
@@ -17,7 +17,6 @@ registry \- Manipulate the Windows registry
 .sp
 \fBregistry \fIoption\fR \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The \fBregistry\fR package provides a general set of operations for
@@ -28,29 +27,28 @@ as a corrupted registry can leave your system in an unusable state.
 .PP
 \fIKeyName\fR is the name of a registry key.  Registry keys must be
 one of the following forms:
-.IP
+.RS
+.PP
 \fB\e\e\fIhostname\fB\e\fIrootname\fB\e\fIkeypath\fR
-.IP
+.PP
 \fIrootname\fB\e\fIkeypath\fR
-.IP
+.PP
 \fIrootname\fR
+.RE
 .PP
 \fIHostname\fR specifies the name of any valid Windows
 host that exports its registry.  The \fIrootname\fR component must be
 one of \fBHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\fR, \fBHKEY_USERS\fR,
-.VS
 \fBHKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\fR, \fBHKEY_CURRENT_USER\fR,
 \fBHKEY_CURRENT_CONFIG\fR, \fBHKEY_PERFORMANCE_DATA\fR, or
 \fBHKEY_DYN_DATA\fR.  The \fIkeypath\fR can be one or more
-.VE
 registry key names separated by backslash (\fB\e\fR) characters.
 .PP
 \fIOption\fR indicates what to do with the registry key name.  Any
 unique abbreviation for \fIoption\fR is acceptable.  The valid options
 are:
-.VS 8.4
 .TP
-\fBregistry broadcast \fIkeyName\fR ?\fI-timeout milliseconds\fR?
+\fBregistry broadcast \fIkeyName\fR ?\fB\-timeout \fImilliseconds\fR?
 .
 Sends a broadcast message to the system and running programs to notify them
 of certain updates.  This is necessary to propagate changes to key registry
@@ -59,13 +57,22 @@ milliseconds, to wait for applications to respond to the broadcast message.
 It defaults to 3000.  The following example demonstrates how to add a path
 to the global Environment and notify applications of the change without
 requiring a logoff/logon step (assumes admin privileges):
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
-set regPath {HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\\SYSTEM\\CurrentControlSet\\Control\\Session Manager\\Environment}
-set curPath [registry get $regPath "Path"]
-registry set $regPath "Path" "$curPath;$addPath"
-registry broadcast "Environment"
+set regPath [join {
+    HKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE
+    SYSTEM
+    CurrentControlSet
+    Control
+    {Session Manager}
+    Environment
+} "\e\e"]
+set curPath [\fBregistry get\fR $regPath "Path"]
+\fBregistry set\fR $regPath "Path" "$curPath;$addPath"
+\fBregistry broadcast\fR "Environment"
 .CE
-.VE 8.4
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBregistry delete \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIvalueName\fR?
 .
@@ -81,11 +88,11 @@ did not exist, the command has no effect.
 Returns the data associated with the value \fIvalueName\fR under the key
 \fIkeyName\fR.  If either the key or the value does not exist, then an
 error is generated.  For more details on the format of the returned
-data, see SUPPORTED TYPES, below.
+data, see \fBSUPPORTED TYPES\fR, below.
 .TP
 \fBregistry keys \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
 .
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of names of all the
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, returns a list of names of all the
 subkeys of \fIkeyName\fR.  If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those
 names matching \fIpattern\fR are returned.  Matching is determined
 using the same rules as for \fBstring\fR \fBmatch\fR.  If the
@@ -93,27 +100,26 @@ specified \fIkeyName\fR does not exist, then an error is generated.
 .TP
 \fBregistry set \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIvalueName data \fR?\fItype\fR??
 .
-If \fIvalueName\fR isn't specified, creates the key \fIkeyName\fR if
-it doesn't already exist.  If \fIvalueName\fR is specified, creates
+If \fIvalueName\fR is not specified, creates the key \fIkeyName\fR if
+it does not already exist.  If \fIvalueName\fR is specified, creates
 the key \fIkeyName\fR and value \fIvalueName\fR if necessary.  The
 contents of \fIvalueName\fR are set to \fIdata\fR with the type
-indicated by \fItype\fR.  If \fItype\fR isn't specified, the type
+indicated by \fItype\fR.  If \fItype\fR is not specified, the type
 \fBsz\fR is assumed.  For more details on the data and type arguments,
-see SUPPORTED TYPES below.
+see \fBSUPPORTED TYPES\fR below.
 .TP
 \fBregistry type \fIkeyName valueName\fR
 .
 Returns the type of the value \fIvalueName\fR in the key
 \fIkeyName\fR.  For more information on the possible types, see
-SUPPORTED TYPES, below.
+\fBSUPPORTED TYPES\fR, below.
 .TP
 \fBregistry values \fIkeyName\fR ?\fIpattern\fR?
 .
-If \fIpattern\fR isn't specified, returns a list of names of all the
+If \fIpattern\fR is not specified, returns a list of names of all the
 values of \fIkeyName\fR.  If \fIpattern\fR is specified, only those
 names matching \fIpattern\fR are returned.  Matching is determined
 using the same rules as for \fBstring\fR \fBmatch\fR.
-
 .SH "SUPPORTED TYPES"
 Each value under a key in the registry contains some data of a
 particular type in a type-specific representation.  The \fBregistry\fR
@@ -145,8 +151,9 @@ represented in Tcl as a string.
 .
 The registry value contains a null-terminated string that contains
 unexpanded references to environment variables in the normal Windows
-style (for example, "%PATH%").  The data is represented in Tcl as a
-string.
+style (for example,
+.QW %PATH% ).
+The data is represented in Tcl as a string.
 .TP
 \fBdword\fR
 .
@@ -182,6 +189,7 @@ The registry command is only available on Windows.
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Print out how double-clicking on a Tcl script file will invoke a Tcl
 interpreter:
+.PP
 .CS
 package require registry
 set ext .tcl
@@ -195,6 +203,5 @@ set command [\fBregistry get\fR $path {}]
 
 puts "$ext opens with $command"
 .CE
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 registry
diff --git a/doc/regsub.n b/doc/regsub.n
index 4e5e88d..5adfd61 100644
--- a/doc/regsub.n
+++ b/doc/regsub.n
@@ -13,40 +13,41 @@
 .SH NAME
 regsub \- Perform substitutions based on regular expression pattern matching
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-.VS 8.4
 \fBregsub \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIexp string subSpec \fR?\fIvarName\fR?
-.VE 8.4
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command matches the regular expression \fIexp\fR against
 \fIstring\fR,
-.VS 8.4
 and either copies \fIstring\fR to the variable whose name is
 given by \fIvarName\fR or returns \fIstring\fR if \fIvarName\fR is not
 present.
-.VE 8.4
 (Regular expression matching is described in the \fBre_syntax\fR
 reference page.)
 If there is a match, then while copying \fIstring\fR to \fIvarName\fR
-.VS 8.4
 (or to the result of this command if \fIvarName\fR is not present)
-.VE 8.4
 the portion of \fIstring\fR that
 matched \fIexp\fR is replaced with \fIsubSpec\fR.
-If \fIsubSpec\fR contains a ``&'' or ``\e0'', then it is replaced
-in the substitution with the portion of \fIstring\fR that
-matched \fIexp\fR.
-If \fIsubSpec\fR contains a ``\e\fIn\fR'', where \fIn\fR is a digit
+If \fIsubSpec\fR contains a
+.QW &
+or
+.QW \e0 ,
+then it is replaced in the substitution with the portion of
+\fIstring\fR that matched \fIexp\fR.
+If \fIsubSpec\fR contains a
+.QW \e\fIn\fR ,
+where \fIn\fR is a digit
 between 1 and 9, then it is replaced in the substitution with
-the portion of \fIstring\fR that matched the \fIn\fR-th
+the portion of \fIstring\fR that matched the \fIn\fR'th
 parenthesized subexpression of \fIexp\fR.
 Additional backslashes may be used in \fIsubSpec\fR to prevent special
-interpretation of ``&'' or ``\e0'' or ``\e\fIn\fR'' or
-backslash.
+interpretation of
+.QW & ,
+.QW \e0 ,
+.QW \e\fIn\fR
+and backslashes.
 The use of backslashes in \fIsubSpec\fR tends to interact badly
-with the Tcl parser's use of backslashes, so it's generally
+with the Tcl parser's use of backslashes, so it is generally
 safest to enclose \fIsubSpec\fR in braces if it includes
 backslashes.
 .LP
@@ -59,7 +60,10 @@ All ranges in \fIstring\fR that match \fIexp\fR are found and
 substitution is performed for each of these ranges.
 Without this switch only the first
 matching range is found and substituted.
-If \fB\-all\fR is specified, then ``&'' and ``\e\fIn\fR''
+If \fB\-all\fR is specified, then
+.QW &
+and
+.QW \e\fIn\fR
 sequences are handled for each substitution using the information
 from the corresponding match.
 .TP 15
@@ -70,21 +74,37 @@ the \fB(?x)\fR embedded option (see the \fBre_syntax\fR manual page).
 .TP 15
 \fB\-line\fR
 Enables newline-sensitive matching.  By default, newline is a
-completely ordinary character with no special meaning.  With this
-flag, `[^' bracket expressions and `.' never match newline, `^'
+completely ordinary character with no special meaning.  With this flag,
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW .
+never match newline,
+.QW ^
 matches an empty string after any newline in addition to its normal
-function, and `$' matches an empty string before any newline in
+function, and
+.QW $
+matches an empty string before any newline in
 addition to its normal function.  This flag is equivalent to
 specifying both \fB\-linestop\fR and \fB\-lineanchor\fR, or the
 \fB(?n)\fR embedded option (see the \fBre_syntax\fR manual page).
 .TP 15
 \fB\-linestop\fR
-Changes the behavior of `[^' bracket expressions and `.' so that they
+Changes the behavior of
+.QW [^
+bracket expressions and
+.QW .
+so that they
 stop at newlines.  This is the same as specifying the \fB(?p)\fR
 embedded option (see the \fBre_syntax\fR manual page).
 .TP 15
 \fB\-lineanchor\fR
-Changes the behavior of `^' and `$' (the ``anchors'') so they match the
+Changes the behavior of
+.QW ^
+and
+.QW $
+(the
+.QW anchors )
+so they match the
 beginning and end of a line respectively.  This is the same as
 specifying the \fB(?w)\fR embedded option (see the \fBre_syntax\fR
 manual page).
@@ -96,8 +116,14 @@ by \fIsubSpec\fR use the original unconverted form of \fIstring\fR.
 .TP 10
 \fB\-start\fR \fIindex\fR
 Specifies a character index offset into the string to start
-matching the regular expression at.  When using this switch, `^'
-will not match the beginning of the line, and \\A will still
+matching the regular expression at.  
+.VS 8.5
+The \fIindex\fR value is interpreted in the same manner
+as the \fIindex\fR argument to \fBstring index\fR.
+.VE 8.5
+When using this switch,
+.QW ^
+will not match the beginning of the line, and \eA will still
 match the start of the string at \fIindex\fR.
 \fIindex\fR will be constrained to the bounds of the input string.
 .TP 10
@@ -105,42 +131,51 @@ match the start of the string at \fIindex\fR.
 Marks the end of switches.  The argument following this one will
 be treated as \fIexp\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 If \fIvarName\fR is supplied, the command returns a count of the
 number of matching ranges that were found and replaced, otherwise the
 string after replacement is returned.
-.VE 8.4
 See the manual entry for \fBregexp\fR for details on the interpretation
 of regular expressions.
 .SH EXAMPLES
+.PP
 Replace (in the string in variable \fIstring\fR) every instance of
 \fBfoo\fR which is a word by itself with \fBbar\fR:
 .CS
-\fBregsub\fR -all {\e<foo\e>} $string bar string
+\fBregsub\fR -all {\emfoo\eM} $string bar string
+.CE
+or (using the
+.QW "basic regular expression"
+syntax):
+.CS
+\fBregsub\fR -all {(?b)\e<foo\e>} $string bar string
 .CE
 .PP
 Insert double-quotes around the first instance of the word
-\fBinteresting\fR, however it is capitalised.
+\fBinteresting\fR, however it is capitalized.
 .CS
-\fBregsub\fR -nocase {\e<interesting\e>} $string {"&"} string
+\fBregsub\fR -nocase {\eyinteresting\ey} $string {"&"} string
 .CE
 .PP
 Convert all non-ASCII and Tcl-significant characters into \eu escape
 sequences by using \fBregsub\fR and \fBsubst\fR in combination:
 .CS
-# This RE is just a character class for everything "bad"
-set RE {[][{}\e$\es\eu0100-\euffff]}
+# This RE is just a character class for almost everything "bad"
+set RE {[][{};#\e\e\e$ \er\et\eu0080-\euffff]}
 
 # We will substitute with a fragment of Tcl script in brackets
 set substitution {[format \e\e\e\eu%04x [scan "\e\e&" %c]]}
 
 # Now we apply the substitution to get a subst-string that
-# will perform the computational parts of the conversion.
-set quoted [subst [\fBregsub\fR -all $RE $string $substitution]]
+# will perform the computational parts of the conversion. Note
+# that newline is handled specially through \fBstring map\fR since
+# backslash-newline is a special sequence.
+set quoted [subst [string map {\en {\e\eu000a}} \e
+        [\fBregsub\fR -all $RE $string $substitution]]]
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-regexp(n), re_syntax(n), subst(n)
-
+regexp(n), re_syntax(n), subst(n),
+.VS 8.5
+string(n)
+.VE
 .SH KEYWORDS
-match, pattern, regular expression, substitute
+match, pattern, quoting, regular expression, substitute
diff --git a/doc/resource.n b/doc/resource.n
deleted file mode 100644
index d8d2fbf..0000000
--- a/doc/resource.n
+++ /dev/null
@@ -1,154 +0,0 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1997 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
-.so man.macros
-.TH resource n 8.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
-.BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
-.SH NAME
-resource \- Manipulate Macintosh resources
-.SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBresource \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
-.BE
-
-.SH DESCRIPTION
-.PP
-The \fBresource\fR command provides some generic operations for
-dealing with Macintosh resources.  This command is only supported on
-the Macintosh platform.  Each Macintosh file consists of two
-\fIforks\fR: a \fIdata\fR fork and a \fIresource\fR fork.  You use the
-normal open, puts, close, etc. commands to manipulate the data fork.
-You must use this command, however, to interact with the resource
-fork.  \fIOption\fR indicates what resource command to perform.  Any
-unique abbreviation for \fIoption\fR is acceptable.  The valid options
-are:
-.TP
-\fBresource close \fIrsrcRef\fR
-Closes the given resource reference (obtained from \fBresource
-open\fR).  Resources from that resource file will no longer be
-available.
-.TP
-\fBresource delete\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIresourceType\fR
-This command will delete the resource specified by \fIoptions\fR and
-type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE TYPES below).  The options
-give you several ways to specify the resource to be deleted.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-id\fR \fIresourceId\fR
-If the \fB-id\fR option is given the id \fIresourceId\fR (see RESOURCE
-IDS below) is used to specify the resource to be deleted.  The id must 
-be a number - to specify a name use the \fB\-name\fR option.
-.TP
-\fB\-name\fR \fIresourceName\fR
-If \fB-name\fR is specified, the resource named
-\fIresourceName\fR will be deleted.  If the \fB-id\fR is also
-provided, then there must be a resource with BOTH this name and
-this id.  If no name is provided, then the id will be used regardless
-of the name of the actual resource.
-.TP
-\fB\-file\fR \fIresourceRef\fR
-If the \fB-file\fR option is specified then the resource will be
-deleted from the file pointed to by \fIresourceRef\fR.  Otherwise the
-first resource with the given \fIresourceName\fR and or
-\fIresourceId\fR which is found on the resource file path will be 
-deleted.  To inspect the file path, use the \fIresource files\fR command.
-.RE
-.TP
-\fBresource files ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-If \fIresourceRef\fRis not provided, this command returns a Tcl list
-of the resource references for all the currently open resource files.
-The list is in the normal Macintosh search order for resources.  If 
-\fIresourceRef\fR is specified, the command will
-return the path to the file whose resource fork is represented by that
-token.
-.TP
-\fBresource list \fIresourceType\fR ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-List all of the resources ids of type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE
-TYPES below).  If \fIresourceRef\fR is specified then the command will
-limit the search to that particular resource file.  Otherwise, all
-resource files currently opened by the application will be searched.
-A Tcl list of either the resource name's or resource id's of the found
-resources will be returned.  See the RESOURCE IDS section below for
-more details about what a resource id is.
-.TP
-\fBresource open \fIfileName\fR ?\fIaccess\fR?
-Open the resource for the file \fIfileName\fR.  Standard file access
-permissions may also be specified (see the manual entry for \fBopen\fR
-for details).  A resource reference (\fIresourceRef\fR) is returned
-that can be used by the other resource commands.  An error can occur
-if the file doesn't exist or the file does not have a resource fork.
-However, if you open the file with write permissions the file and/or
-resource fork will be created instead of generating an error.
-.TP
-\fBresource read \fIresourceType\fR \fIresourceId\fR ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-Read the entire resource of type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE
-TYPES below) and the name or id of \fIresourceId\fR (see RESOURCE IDS
-below) into memory and return the result.  If \fIresourceRef\fR is
-specified we limit our search to that resource file, otherwise we
-search all open resource forks in the application.  It is important to
-note that most Macintosh resource use a binary format and the data
-returned from this command may have embedded NULLs or other non-ASCII
-data.
-.TP
-\fBresource types ?\fIresourceRef\fR?
-This command returns a Tcl list of all resource types (see RESOURCE
-TYPES below) found in the resource file pointed to by
-\fIresourceRef\fR.  If \fIresourceRef\fR is not specified it will
-return all the resource types found in every resource file currently
-opened by the application.
-.TP
-\fBresource write\fR ?\fIoptions\fR? \fIresourceType\fR \fIdata\fR
-This command will write the passed in \fIdata\fR as a new resource of
-type \fIresourceType\fR (see RESOURCE TYPES below).  Several options
-are available that describe where and how the resource is stored.
-.RS
-.TP
-\fB\-id\fR \fIresourceId\fR
-If the \fB-id\fR option is given the id \fIresourceId\fR (see RESOURCE
-IDS below) is used for the new resource, otherwise a unique id will be
-generated that will not conflict with any existing resource.  However,
-the id must be a number - to specify a name use the \fB\-name\fR option.
-.TP
-\fB\-name\fR \fIresourceName\fR
-If \fB-name\fR is specified the resource will be named
-\fIresourceName\fR, otherwise it will have the empty string as the
-name.
-.TP
-\fB\-file\fR \fIresourceRef\fR
-If the \fB-file\fR option is specified then the resource will be
-written in the file pointed to by \fIresourceRef\fR, otherwise the
-most recently open resource will be used.
-.TP
-\fB\-force\fR
-If the target resource already exists, then by default Tcl will not
-overwrite it, but raise an error instead.  Use the -force flag to
-force overwriting the extant resource.
-.RE
-
-.SH "RESOURCE TYPES"
-Resource types are defined as a four character string that is then
-mapped to an underlying id.  For example, \fBTEXT\fR refers to the
-Macintosh resource type for text.  The type \fBSTR#\fR is a list of
-counted strings.  All Macintosh resources must be of some type.  See
-Macintosh documentation for a more complete list of resource types
-that are commonly used.
-
-.SH "RESOURCE IDS"
-For this command the notion of a resource id actually refers to two
-ideas in Macintosh resources.  Every place you can use a resource Id
-you can use either the resource name or a resource number.  Names are
-always searched or returned in preference to numbers.  For example,
-the \fBresource list\fR command will return names if they exist or
-numbers if the name is NULL.
-
-.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
-The resource command is only available on Macintosh.
-
-.SH "SEE ALSO"
-open(n)
-
-.SH KEYWORDS
-open, resource
diff --git a/doc/return.n b/doc/return.n
index 25cf8b4..b08de4a 100644
--- a/doc/return.n
+++ b/doc/return.n
@@ -1,32 +1,45 @@
 '\"
 '\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
 '\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+'\" Contributions from Don Porter, NIST, 2003.  (not subject to US copyright)
 '\"
 '\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH return n 7.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH return n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-return \- Return from a procedure
+return \- Return from a procedure, or set return code of a script
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBreturn \fR?\fB\-code \fIcode\fR? ?\fB\-errorinfo \fIinfo\fR? ?\fB\-errorcode\fI code\fR? ?\fIstring\fR?
+\fBreturn \fR?\fIresult\fR?
+.sp
+\fBreturn \fR?\fB\-code \fIcode\fR? ?\fIresult\fR?
+.sp
+\fBreturn \fR?\fIoption value \fR...? ?\fIresult\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-Return immediately from the current procedure
-(or top-level command or \fBsource\fR command),
-with \fIstring\fR as the return value.  If \fIstring\fR is not specified then
-an empty string will be returned as result.
+In its simplest usage, the \fBreturn\fR command is used without options
+in the body of a procedure to immediately return control to the caller
+of the procedure.  If a \fIresult\fR argument is provided, its value
+becomes the result of the procedure passed back to the caller.  
+If \fIresult\fR is not specified then an empty string will be returned
+to the caller as the result of the procedure.
+.PP
+The \fBreturn\fR command serves a similar function within script
+files that are evaluated by the \fBsource\fR command.  When \fBsource\fR
+evaluates the contents of a file as a script, an invocation of
+the \fBreturn\fR command will cause script evaluation
+to immediately cease, and the value \fIresult\fR (or an empty string)
+will be returned as the result of the \fBsource\fR command.
 .SH "EXCEPTIONAL RETURN CODES"
 .PP
 In addition to the result of a procedure, the return
 code of a procedure may also be set by \fBreturn\fR
-through use of the \fB-code\fR option.
-In the usual case where the \fB\-code\fR option isn't
+through use of the \fB\-code\fR option.
+In the usual case where the \fB\-code\fR option is not
 specified the procedure will return normally.
 However, the \fB\-code\fR option may be used to generate an
 exceptional return from the procedure.
@@ -61,29 +74,135 @@ were the command \fBcontinue\fR.
 \fIValue\fR must be an integer;  it will be returned as the
 return code for the current procedure.
 .LP
-The \fB\-code\fR option is rarely used.
-It is provided so that procedures that implement
-new control structures can reflect exceptional conditions back to
-their callers.
-.PP
-Two additional options, \fB\-errorinfo\fR and \fB\-errorcode\fR,
-may be used to provide additional information during error
-returns.
-These options are ignored unless \fIcode\fR is \fBerror\fR.
-.PP
-The \fB\-errorinfo\fR option specifies an initial stack
-trace for the \fBerrorInfo\fR variable;  if it is not specified then
-the stack trace left in \fBerrorInfo\fR will include the call to
-the procedure and higher levels on the stack but it will not include
-any information about the context of the error within the procedure.
-Typically the \fIinfo\fR value is supplied from the value left
-in \fBerrorInfo\fR after a \fBcatch\fR command trapped an error within
-the procedure.
-.PP
-If the \fB\-errorcode\fR option is specified then \fIcode\fR provides
-a value for the \fBerrorCode\fR variable.
-If the option is not specified then \fBerrorCode\fR will
-default to \fBNONE\fR.
+When a procedure wants to signal that it has received invalid
+arguments from its caller, it may use \fBreturn -code error\fR
+with \fIresult\fR set to a suitable error message.  Otherwise
+usage of the \fBreturn -code\fR option is mostly limited to
+procedures that implement a new control structure.
+.PP
+The \fBreturn \-code\fR command acts similarly within script
+files that are evaluated by the \fBsource\fR command.  During the
+evaluation of the contents of a file as a script by \fBsource\fR,
+an invocation of the \fBreturn \-code \fIcode\fR command will cause
+the return code of \fBsource\fR to be \fIcode\fR.
+.SH "RETURN OPTIONS"
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+In addition to a result and a return code, evaluation of a command
+in Tcl also produces a dictionary of return options.  In general
+usage, all \fIoption value\fR pairs given as arguments to \fBreturn\fR
+become entries in the return options dictionary, and any values at all
+are acceptable except as noted below.  The \fBcatch\fR command may be
+used to capture all of this information \(em the return code, the result,
+and the return options dictionary \(em that arise from evaluation of a
+script.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
+As documented above, the \fB\-code\fR entry in the return options dictionary
+receives special treatment by Tcl.  There are other return options also
+recognized and treated specially by Tcl.  They are:
+.TP
+\fB\-errorcode \fIlist\fR
+The \fB\-errorcode\fR option receives special treatment only when the value
+of the \fB\-code\fR option is \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  Then the \fIlist\fR value
+is meant to be additional information about the error,
+presented as a Tcl list for further processing by programs.
+If no \fB\-errorcode\fR option is provided to \fBreturn\fR when
+the \fB\-code error\fR option is provided, Tcl will set the value
+of the \fB\-errorcode\fR entry in the return options dictionary 
+to the default value of \fBNONE\fR.  The \fB\-errorcode\fR return
+option will also be stored in the global variable \fBerrorCode\fR.
+.TP
+\fB\-errorinfo \fIinfo\fR
+The \fB\-errorinfo\fR option receives special treatment only when the value
+of the \fB\-code\fR option is \fBTCL_ERROR\fR.  Then \fIinfo\fR is the initial
+stack trace, meant to provide to a human reader additional information
+about the context in which the error occurred.  The stack trace will
+also be stored in the global variable \fBerrorInfo\fR.  
+If no \fB\-errorinfo\fR option is provided to \fBreturn\fR when
+the \fB\-code error\fR option is provided, Tcl will provide its own
+initial stack trace value in the entry for \fB\-errorinfo\fR.  Tcl's
+initial stack trace will include only the call to the procedure, and
+stack unwinding will append information about higher stack levels, but
+there will be no information about the context of the error within
+the procedure.  Typically the \fIinfo\fR value is supplied from
+the value of \fB\-errorinfo\fR in a return options dictionary captured
+by the \fBcatch\fR command (or from the copy of that information
+stored in the global variable \fBerrorInfo\fR).
+.TP
+\fB\-level \fIlevel\fR
+.VS 8.5
+The \fB\-level\fR and \fB\-code\fR options work together to set the return
+code to be returned by one of the commands currently being evaluated.
+The \fIlevel\fR value must be a non-negative integer representing a number
+of levels on the call stack.  It defines the number of levels up the stack
+at which the return code of a command currently being evaluated should
+be \fIcode\fR.  If no \fB\-level\fR option is provided, the default value
+of \fIlevel\fR is 1, so that \fBreturn\fR sets the return code that the
+current procedure returns to its caller, 1 level up the call stack.  The
+mechanism by which these options work is described in more detail below.
+.VE 8.5
+.TP
+\fB\-options \fIoptions\fR
+.VS 8.5
+The value \fIoptions\fR must be a valid dictionary.  The entries of that
+dictionary are treated as additional \fIoption value\fR pairs for the
+\fBreturn\fR command.
+.VE 8.5
+.SH "RETURN CODE HANDLING MECHANISMS"
+.PP
+Return codes are used in Tcl to control program flow.  A Tcl script
+is a sequence of Tcl commands.  So long as each command evaluation
+returns a return code of \fBTCL_OK\fR, evaluation will continue to the next
+command in the script.  Any exceptional return code (non-\fBTCL_OK\fR)
+returned by a command evaluation causes the flow on to the next
+command to be interrupted.  Script evaluation ceases, and the
+exceptional return code from the command becomes the return code
+of the full script evaluation.  This is the mechanism by which
+errors during script evaluation cause an interruption and unwinding
+of the call stack.  It is also the mechanism by which commands
+like \fBbreak\fR, \fBcontinue\fR, and \fBreturn\fR cause script
+evaluation to terminate without evaluating all commands in sequence.
+.PP
+Some of Tcl's built-in commands evaluate scripts as part of their
+functioning.  These commands can make use of exceptional return
+codes to enable special features.  For example, the built-in
+Tcl commands that provide loops \(em such as \fBwhile\fR, \fBfor\fR,
+and \fBforeach\fR \(em evaluate a script that is the body of the
+loop.  If evaluation of the loop body returns the return code
+of \fBTCL_BREAK\fR or \fBTCL_CONTINUE\fR, the loop command can react in such
+a way as to give the \fBbreak\fR and \fBcontinue\fR commands
+their documented interpretation in loops.
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+Procedure invocation also involves evaluation of a script, the body
+of the procedure.  Procedure invocation provides special treatment
+when evaluation of the procedure body returns the return code 
+\fBTCL_RETURN\fR.  In that circumstance, the \fB\-level\fR entry in the
+return options dictionary is decremented.  If after decrementing,
+the value of the \fB\-level\fR entry is 0, then the value of
+the \fB\-code\fR entry becomes the return code of the procedure.
+If after decrementing, the value of the \fB\-level\fR entry is
+greater than zero, then the return code of the procedure is
+\fBTCL_RETURN\fR.  If the procedure invocation occurred during the
+evaluation of the body of another procedure, the process will
+repeat itself up the call stack, decrementing the value of the
+\fB\-level\fR entry at each level, so that the \fIcode\fR will
+be the return code of the current command \fIlevel\fR levels
+up the call stack.  The \fBsource\fR command performs the
+same handling of the \fBTCL_RETURN\fR return code, which explains
+the similarity of \fBreturn\fR invocation during a \fBsource\fR
+to \fBreturn\fR invocation within a procedure.
+.PP
+The return code of the \fBreturn\fR command itself triggers this
+special handling by procedure invocation.  If \fBreturn\fR
+is provided the option \fB\-level 0\fR, then the return code
+of the \fBreturn\fR command itself will be the value \fIcode\fR
+of the \fB\-code\fR option (or \fBTCL_OK\fR by default).  Any other value
+for the \fB\-level\fR option (including the default value of 1)
+will cause the return code of the \fBreturn\fR command itself
+to be \fBTCL_RETURN\fR, triggering a return from the enclosing procedure.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH EXAMPLES
 First, a simple example of using \fBreturn\fR to return from a
 procedure, interrupting the procedure body.
@@ -107,9 +226,9 @@ to report invalid arguments.
 .CS
 proc factorial {n} {
    if {![string is integer $n] || ($n < 0)} {
-      \fBreturn\fR -code error \\
-            "expected non-negative integer,\\
-             but got \\"$n\\""
+      \fBreturn\fR -code error \e
+            "expected non-negative integer,\e
+             but got \e"$n\e""
    }
    if {$n < 2} {
       \fBreturn\fR 1
@@ -121,7 +240,7 @@ proc factorial {n} {
    }
    set product [expr {$n * $factor}]
    if {$product < 0} {
-      \fBreturn\fR -code error \\
+      \fBreturn\fR -code error \e
             "overflow computing factorial of $n"
    }
    \fBreturn\fR $product
@@ -134,9 +253,44 @@ proc myBreak {} {
    \fBreturn\fR -code break
 }
 .CE
-
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+With the \fB\-level 0\fR option, \fBreturn\fR itself can serve
+as a replacement for \fBbreak\fR.
+.CS
+interp alias {} Break {} \fBreturn\fR -level 0 -code break
+.CE
+.PP
+An example of using \fBcatch\fR and \fBreturn -options\fR to
+re-raise a caught error:
+.CS
+proc doSomething {} {
+   set resource [allocate]
+   catch {
+      # Long script of operations
+      # that might raise an error
+   } result options
+   deallocate $resource
+   \fBreturn\fR -options $options $result
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+Finally an example of advanced use of the \fBreturn\fR options
+to create a procedure replacement for \fBreturn\fR itself:
+.CS
+proc myReturn {args} {
+   set result ""
+   if {[llength $args] % 2} {
+      set result [lindex $args end]
+      set args [lrange $args 0 end-1]
+   }
+   set options [dict merge {-level 1} $args]
+   dict incr options -level
+   \fBreturn\fR -options $options $result
+}
+.CE
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-break(n), catch(n), continue(n), error(n), proc(n), source(n), tclvars(n)
-
+break(n), catch(n), continue(n), dict(n), error(n), proc(n), source(n), tclvars(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 break, catch, continue, error, procedure, return
diff --git a/doc/safe.n b/doc/safe.n
index 6eabd79..78fa6ad 100644
--- a/doc/safe.n
+++ b/doc/safe.n
@@ -9,7 +9,7 @@
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
-Safe\ Base \- A mechanism for creating and manipulating safe interpreters.
+Safe\ Base \- A mechanism for creating and manipulating safe interpreters
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fB::safe::interpCreate\fR ?\fIslave\fR? ?\fIoptions...\fR?
 .sp
@@ -24,14 +24,13 @@ Safe\ Base \- A mechanism for creating and manipulating safe interpreters.
 \fB::safe::interpFindInAccessPath\fR \fIslave\fR \fIdirectory\fR
 .sp
 \fB::safe::setLogCmd\fR ?\fIcmd arg...\fR?
-.SH OPTIONS
+.SS OPTIONS
 .PP
 ?\fB\-accessPath\fR \fIpathList\fR?
 ?\fB\-statics\fR \fIboolean\fR? ?\fB\-noStatics\fR?
 ?\fB\-nested\fR \fIboolean\fR? ?\fB\-nestedLoadOk\fR?
 ?\fB\-deleteHook\fR \fIscript\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 Safe Tcl is a mechanism for executing untrusted Tcl scripts
 safely and for providing mediated access by such scripts to
@@ -61,8 +60,7 @@ Different levels of security can be selected by using the optional flags
 of the commands described below.
 .PP
 All commands provided in the master interpreter by the Safe Base reside in
-the \fBsafe\fR namespace:
-
+the \fBsafe\fR namespace.
 .SH COMMANDS
 The following commands are provided in the master interpreter:
 .TP
@@ -93,14 +91,17 @@ safe interpreter and change each and only the provided options.
 See the section on \fBOPTIONS\fR below for options description.
 Example of use:
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
-# Create a new interp with the same configuration as "$i0" :
-set i1 [eval safe::interpCreate [safe::interpConfigure $i0]]
+# Create new interp with the same configuration as "$i0":
+set i1 [safe::interpCreate {*}[safe::interpConfigure $i0]]
+
 # Get the current deleteHook
 set dh [safe::interpConfigure $i0  \-del]
-# Change (only) the statics loading ok attribute of an interp
-# and its deleteHook (leaving the rest unchanged) :
-safe::interpConfigure $i0  \-delete {foo bar} \-statics 0 ;
+
+# Change (only) the statics loading ok attribute of an
+# interp and its deleteHook (leaving the rest unchanged):
+safe::interpConfigure $i0  \-delete {foo bar} \-statics 0
 .CE
 .RE
 .TP
@@ -117,8 +118,10 @@ This command finds and returns the token for the real directory
 It generates an error if the directory is not found.
 Example of use:
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
-$slave eval [list set tk_library [::safe::interpFindInAccessPath $name $tk_library]]
+$slave eval [list set tk_library \e
+      [::safe::interpFindInAccessPath $name $tk_library]]
 .CE
 .RE
 .TP
@@ -130,8 +133,10 @@ If the directory is already in the virtual path, it only returns the token
 without adding the directory to the virtual path again.
 Example of use:
 .RS
+.PP
 .CS
-$slave eval [list set tk_library [::safe::interpAddToAccessPath $name $tk_library]]
+$slave eval [list set tk_library \e
+      [::safe::interpAddToAccessPath $name $tk_library]]
 .CE
 .RE
 .TP
@@ -150,14 +155,18 @@ This prevents a safe interpreter from seeing messages about failures
 and other events that might contain sensitive information such as real
 directory names.
 .RS
+.PP
 Example of use:
+.PP
 .CS
 ::safe::setLogCmd puts stderr
 .CE
+.PP
 Below is the output of a sample session in which a safe interpreter
 attempted to source a file not found in its virtual access path.
 Note that the safe interpreter only received an error message saying that
 the file was not found:
+.PP
 .CS
 NOTICE for slave interp10 : Created
 NOTICE for slave interp10 : Setting accessPath=(/foo/bar) staticsok=1 nestedok=0 deletehook=()
@@ -165,8 +174,7 @@ NOTICE for slave interp10 : auto_path in interp10 has been set to {$p(:0:)}
 ERROR for slave interp10 : /foo/bar/init.tcl: no such file or directory
 .CE
 .RE
-
-.SH OPTIONS
+.SS OPTIONS
 The following options are common to 
 \fB::safe::interpCreate\fR, \fB::safe::interpInit\fR, 
 and \fB::safe::interpConfigure\fR.
@@ -190,7 +198,7 @@ The default value is \fBtrue\fR :
 safe interpreters are allowed to load statically linked packages.
 .TP
 \fB\-noStatics\fR
-This option is a convenience shortcut for \fB-statics false\fR and
+This option is a convenience shortcut for \fB\-statics false\fR and
 thus specifies that the safe interpreter will not be allowed
 to load statically linked packages.
 .TP
@@ -202,7 +210,7 @@ safe interpreters are not allowed to load packages into
 their own sub-interpreters.
 .TP
 \fB\-nestedLoadOk\fR
-This option is a convenience shortcut for \fB-nested true\fR and
+This option is a convenience shortcut for \fB\-nested true\fR and
 thus specifies the safe interpreter will be allowed
 to load packages into its own sub-interpreters.
 .TP 
@@ -252,7 +260,6 @@ the system encoding, but allows all other subcommands including
 \fBexit\fR
 The calling interpreter is deleted and its computation is stopped, but the
 Tcl process in which this interpreter exists is not terminated.
-
 .SH SECURITY
 The Safe Base does not attempt to completely prevent annoyance and
 denial of service attacks. These forms of attack prevent the
@@ -288,8 +295,7 @@ for the \fBsource\fR and \fBload\fR aliases provided to the slave
 are path in the form of 
 \fB[file join \fR\fItoken filename\fR\fB]\fR (i.e. when using the
 native file path formats: \fItoken\fR\fB/\fR\fIfilename\fR
-on Unix, \fItoken\fR\fB\\\fIfilename\fR on Windows, 
-and \fItoken\fR\fB:\fR\fIfilename\fR on the Mac),
+on Unix and \fItoken\fR\fB\e\fIfilename\fR on Windows),
 where \fItoken\fR is representing one of the directories 
 of the \fIaccessPath\fR list and \fIfilename\fR is
 one file in that directory (no sub directories access are allowed).
@@ -305,8 +311,12 @@ To further prevent potential information leakage from sensitive files that
 are accidentally included in the set of files that can be sourced by a safe
 interpreter, the \fBsource\fR alias restricts access to files
 meeting the following constraints: the file name must
-fourteen characters or shorter, must not contain more than one dot ("\fB.\fR"),
-must end up with the extension \fB.tcl\fR or be called \fBtclIndex\fR.
+fourteen characters or shorter, must not contain more than one dot
+.PQ \fB.\fR "" ,
+must end up with the extension
+.PQ \fB.tcl\fR
+or be called
+.PQ \fBtclIndex\fR .
 .PP
 Each element of the initial access path
 list will be assigned a token that will be set in
@@ -316,9 +326,9 @@ the \fBtcl_library\fR for that slave.
 If the access path argument is not given or is the empty list, 
 the default behavior is to let the slave access the same packages
 as the master has access to (Or to be more precise: 
-only packages written in Tcl (which by definition can't be dangerous
+only packages written in Tcl (which by definition cannot be dangerous
 as they run in the slave interpreter) and C extensions that
-provides a Safe_Init entry point). For that purpose, the master's 
+provides a _SafeInit entry point). For that purpose, the master's 
 \fBauto_path\fR will be used to construct the slave access path. 
 In order that the slave successfully loads the Tcl library files
 (which includes the auto-loading mechanism itself) the \fBtcl_library\fR will be
@@ -339,10 +349,8 @@ When the \fIaccessPath\fR is changed after the first creation or
 initialization (i.e. through \fBinterpConfigure -accessPath \fR\fIlist\fR),
 an \fBauto_reset\fR is automatically evaluated in the safe interpreter
 to synchronize its \fBauto_index\fR with the new token list.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 interp(n), library(n), load(n), package(n), source(n), unknown(n)
- 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 alias, auto\-loading, auto_mkindex, load, master interpreter, safe
 interpreter, slave interpreter, source
diff --git a/doc/scan.n b/doc/scan.n
index 320280a..ca096da 100644
--- a/doc/scan.n
+++ b/doc/scan.n
@@ -15,17 +15,17 @@ scan \- Parse string using conversion specifiers in the style of sscanf
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBscan \fIstring format \fR?\fIvarName varName ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH INTRODUCTION
 .PP
-This command parses fields from an input string in the same fashion as the
-ANSI C \fBsscanf\fR procedure and returns a count of the number of
+This command parses substrings from an input string in a fashion similar
+to the ANSI C \fBsscanf\fR procedure and returns a count of the number of
 conversions performed, or -1 if the end of the input string is reached
 before any conversions have been performed.  \fIString\fR gives the input
 to be parsed and \fIformat\fR indicates how to parse it, using \fB%\fR
 conversion specifiers as in \fBsscanf\fR.  Each \fIvarName\fR gives the
-name of a variable; when a field is scanned from \fIstring\fR the result is
-converted back into a string and assigned to the corresponding variable.
+name of a variable; when a substring is scanned from \fIstring\fR that
+matches a conversion specifier, the substring is assigned to the
+corresponding variable.
 If no \fIvarName\fR variables are specified, then \fBscan\fR works in an
 inline manner, returning the data that would otherwise be stored in the
 variables as a list.  In the inline case, an empty string is returned when
@@ -37,29 +37,28 @@ performed.
 If the next character in \fIformat\fR is a blank or tab then it
 matches any number of white space characters in \fIstring\fR (including
 zero).
-Otherwise, if it isn't a \fB%\fR character then it 
+Otherwise, if it is not a \fB%\fR character then it 
 must match the next character of \fIstring\fR.
 When a \fB%\fR is encountered in \fIformat\fR, it indicates
 the start of a conversion specifier.
-.VS 8.4
 A conversion specifier contains up to four fields after the \fB%\fR:
-a \fB*\fR, which indicates that the converted value is to be discarded 
-instead of assigned to a variable; a XPG3 position specifier; a number
-indicating a maximum field width; a field size modifier; and a
+a XPG3 position specifier (or a \fB*\fR to indicate the converted
+value is to be discarded instead of assigned to any variable); a number
+indicating a maximum substring width; a size modifier; and a
 conversion character.
-.VE 8.4
 All of these fields are optional except for the conversion character.
 The fields that are present must appear in the order given above.
 .PP
 When \fBscan\fR finds a conversion specifier in \fIformat\fR, it
 first skips any white-space characters in \fIstring\fR (unless the
-specifier is \fB[\fR or \fBc\fR).
+conversion character is \fB[\fR or \fBc\fR).
 Then it converts the next input characters according to the 
 conversion specifier and stores the result in the variable given
 by the next argument to \fBscan\fR.
 .PP
 If the \fB%\fR is followed by a decimal number and a \fB$\fR, as in
-``\fB%2$d\fR'', then the variable to use is not taken from the next
+.QW \fB%2$d\fR ,
+then the variable to use is not taken from the next
 sequential argument.  Instead, it is taken from the argument indicated
 by the number, where 1 corresponds to the first \fIvarName\fR.  If
 there are any positional specifiers in \fIformat\fR then all of the
@@ -68,86 +67,75 @@ list must correspond to exactly one conversion specifier or an error
 is generated, or in the inline case, any position can be specified
 at most once and the empty positions will be filled in with empty strings.
 .PP
+.VS 8.5
+The size modifier field is used only when scanning a substring into
+one of Tcl's integer values.  The size modifier field dictates the
+integer range acceptable to be stored in a variable, or, for the inline
+case, in a position in the result list.
+The syntactically valid values for the size modifier are \fBh\fR, \fBL\fR,
+\fBl\fR, and \fBll\fR.  The \fBh\fR size modifier value is equivalent
+to the absence of a size modifier in the the conversion specifier.
+Either one indicates the integer range to be stored is limited to
+the same range produced by the \fBint()\fR function of the \fBexpr\fR
+command.  The \fBL\fR size modifier is equivalent to the \fBl\fR size
+modifier. Either one indicates the integer range to be stored is
+limited to the same range produced by the \fBwide()\fR function of
+the \fBexpr\fR command.  The \fBll\fR size modifier indicates that
+the integer range to be stored is unlimited.
+.VE 8.5
+.PP
 The following conversion characters are supported:
 .TP 10
 \fBd\fR
-The input field must be a decimal integer.
-It is read in and the value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.VS 8.4
-If the \fBl\fR or \fBL\fR field size modifier is given, the scanned
-value will have an internal representation that is at least 64-bits in
-size.
-.VE 8.4
+The input substring must be a decimal integer.
+It is read in and the integer value is stored in the variable,
+truncated as required by the size modifier value.
 .TP 10
 \fBo\fR
-The input field must be an octal integer. It is read in and the 
-value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.VS 8.4
-If the \fBl\fR or \fBL\fR field size modifier is given, the scanned
-value will have an internal representation that is at least 64-bits in
-size.
-If the value exceeds MAX_INT (017777777777 on platforms using 32-bit
-integers when the \fBl\fR and \fBL\fR modifiers are not given), it
-will be truncated to a signed integer.  Hence, 037777777777 will
-appear as -1 on a 32-bit machine by default.
-.VE 8.4
+The input substring must be an octal integer. It is read in and the 
+integer value is stored in the variable,
+truncated as required by the size modifier value.
 .TP 10
 \fBx\fR
-The input field must be a hexadecimal integer. It is read in 
-and the value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.VS 8.4
-If the \fBl\fR or \fBL\fR field size modifier is given, the scanned
-value will have an internal representation that is at least 64-bits in
-size.
-If the value exceeds MAX_INT (0x7FFFFFFF on platforms using 32-bit
-integers when the \fBl\fR and \fBL\fR modifiers are not given), it
-will be truncated to a signed integer.  Hence, 0xFFFFFFFF will appear
-as -1 on a 32-bit machine.
-.VE 8.4
+The input substring must be a hexadecimal integer.
+It is read in and the integer value is stored in the variable,
+truncated as required by the size modifier value.
 .TP 10
 \fBu\fR
-The input field must be a decimal integer.  The value is stored in the
-variable as an unsigned decimal integer string.
-.VS 8.4
-If the \fBl\fR or \fBL\fR field size modifier is given, the scanned
-value will have an internal representation that is at least 64-bits in
-size.
-.VE 8.4
+The input substring must be a decimal integer.
+The integer value is truncated as required by the size modifier
+value, and the corresponding unsigned value for that truncated
+range is computed and stored in the variable as a decimal string.
+The conversion makes no sense without reference to a truncation range,
+so the size modifier \fBll\fR is not permitted in combination
+with conversion character \fBu\fR.
 .TP 10
 \fBi\fR 
-The input field must be an integer.  The base (i.e. decimal, octal, or
-hexadecimal) is determined in the same fashion as described in
-\fBexpr\fR.  The value is stored in the variable as a decimal string.
-.VS 8.4
-If the \fBl\fR or \fBL\fR field size modifier is given, the scanned
-value will have an internal representation that is at least 64-bits in
-size.
-.VE 8.4
+The input substring must be an integer.  The base (i.e. decimal, binary,
+octal, or hexadecimal) is determined in the same fashion as described in
+\fBexpr\fR.  The integer value is stored in the variable,
+truncated as required by the size modifier value.
 .TP 10
 \fBc\fR
-A single character is read in and its binary value is stored in 
-the variable as a decimal string.
+A single character is read in and its Unicode value is stored in 
+the variable as an integer value.
 Initial white space is not skipped in this case, so the input
-field may be a white-space character.
-This conversion is different from the ANSI standard in that the
-input field always consists of a single character and no field
-width may be specified.
+substring may be a white-space character.
 .TP 10
 \fBs\fR
-The input field consists of all the characters up to the next 
+The input substring consists of all the characters up to the next 
 white-space character; the characters are copied to the variable.
 .TP 10
 \fBe\fR or \fBf\fR or \fBg\fR
-The input field must be a floating-point number consisting 
+The input substring must be a floating-point number consisting 
 of an optional sign, a string of decimal digits possibly
 containing a decimal point, and an optional exponent consisting 
 of an \fBe\fR or \fBE\fR followed by an optional sign and a string of 
 decimal digits.
-It is read in and stored in the variable as a floating-point string.
+It is read in and stored in the variable as a floating-point value.
 .TP 10
 \fB[\fIchars\fB]\fR
-The input field consists of any number of characters in 
-\fIchars\fR.
+The input substring consists of one or more characters in \fIchars\fR.
 The matching string is stored in the variable.
 If the first character between the brackets is a \fB]\fR then
 it is treated as part of \fIchars\fR rather than the closing
@@ -159,8 +147,7 @@ If the first or last character between the brackets is a \fB\-\fR, then
 it is treated as part of \fIchars\fR rather than indicating a range.
 .TP 10
 \fB[^\fIchars\fB]\fR
-The input field consists of any number of characters not in 
-\fIchars\fR.
+The input substring consists of one or more characters not in \fIchars\fR.
 The matching string is stored in the variable.
 If the character immediately following the \fB^\fR is a \fB]\fR then it is 
 treated as part of the set rather than the closing bracket for 
@@ -170,7 +157,7 @@ contains a sequence of the form \fIa\fB\-\fIb\fR then any
 character between \fIa\fR and \fIb\fR (inclusive) will be excluded
 from the set.
 If the first or last character between the brackets is a \fB\-\fR, then
-it is treated as part of \fIchars\fR rather than indicating a range.
+it is treated as part of \fIchars\fR rather than indicating a range value.
 .TP 10
 \fBn\fR
 No input is consumed from the input string.  Instead, the total number
@@ -180,8 +167,8 @@ The number of characters read from the input for a conversion is the
 largest number that makes sense for that particular conversion (e.g.
 as many decimal digits as possible for \fB%d\fR, as 
 many octal digits as possible for \fB%o\fR, and so on).
-The input field for a given conversion terminates either when a
-white-space character is encountered or when the maximum field 
+The input substring for a given conversion terminates either when a
+white-space character is encountered or when the maximum substring 
 width has been reached, whichever comes first.
 If a \fB*\fR is present in the conversion specifier 
 then no variable is assigned and the next scan argument is not consumed.
@@ -190,24 +177,29 @@ then no variable is assigned and the next scan argument is not consumed.
 The behavior of the \fBscan\fR command is the same as the behavior of
 the ANSI C \fBsscanf\fR procedure except for the following differences:
 .IP [1]
-\fB%p\fR conversion specifier is not currently supported.
+\fB%p\fR conversion specifier is not supported.
 .IP [2]
 For \fB%c\fR conversions a single character value is
 converted to a decimal string, which is then assigned to the
 corresponding \fIvarName\fR;
-no field width may be specified for this conversion.
+no substring width may be specified for this conversion.
 .IP [3]
-.VS 8.4
 The \fBh\fR modifier is always ignored and the \fBl\fR and \fBL\fR
 modifiers are ignored when converting real values (i.e. type
-\fBdouble\fR is used for the internal representation).
-.VE 8.4
+\fBdouble\fR is used for the internal representation).  The \fBll\fR
+modifier has no \fBsscanf\fR counterpart.
 .IP [4]
 If the end of the input string is reached before any conversions have been
 performed and no variables are given, an empty string is returned.
 .SH EXAMPLES
+Convert a UNICODE character to its numeric value:
+.CS
+set char "x"
+set value [\fBscan\fR $char %c]
+.CE
+.PP
 Parse a simple color specification of the form \fI#RRGGBB\fR using
-hexadecimal conversions with field sizes:
+hexadecimal conversions with substring sizes:
 .CS
 set string "#08D03F"
 \fBscan\fR $string "#%2x%2x%2x" r g b
@@ -245,7 +237,7 @@ looking for the terminating character explicitly:
 set string "(5.2,-4e-2)"
 # Note that the spaces before the literal parts of
 # the scan pattern are significant, and that ")" is
-# the Unicode character \\u0029
+# the Unicode character \eu0029
 if {
    [\fBscan\fR $string " (%f ,%f %c" x y last] != 3
    || $last != 0x0029
@@ -254,9 +246,22 @@ if {
 }
 puts "X=$x, Y=$y"
 .CE
-
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+An interactive session demonstrating the truncation of integer
+values determined by size modifiers:
+.CS
+% set tcl_platform(wordSize)
+4
+% scan 20000000000000000000 %d
+2147483647
+% scan 20000000000000000000 %ld
+9223372036854775807
+% scan 20000000000000000000 %lld
+20000000000000000000
+.CE
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 format(n), sscanf(3)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 conversion specifier, parse, scan
diff --git a/doc/seek.n b/doc/seek.n
index bbc586f..d4ce9b7 100644
--- a/doc/seek.n
+++ b/doc/seek.n
@@ -19,12 +19,10 @@ seek \- Change the access position for an open channel
 .PP
 Changes the current access position for \fIchannelId\fR.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as a
 Tcl standard channel (\fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR, or \fBstderr\fR),
 the return value from an invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or
 the result of a channel creation command provided by a Tcl extension.
-.VE
 .PP
 The \fIoffset\fR and \fIorigin\fR
 arguments specify the position at which the next read or write will occur
@@ -55,11 +53,9 @@ This command returns an empty string.
 An error occurs if this command is applied to channels whose underlying
 file or device does not support seeking.
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 Note that \fIoffset\fR values are byte offsets, not character
 offsets.  Both \fBseek\fR and \fBtell\fR operate in terms of bytes,
 not characters, unlike \fBread\fR.
-.VE 8.1
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Read a file twice:
 .CS
diff --git a/doc/set.n b/doc/set.n
index 3233475..fb8dfac 100644
--- a/doc/set.n
+++ b/doc/set.n
@@ -14,13 +14,12 @@ set \- Read and write variables
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBset \fIvarName \fR?\fIvalue\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 Returns the value of variable \fIvarName\fR.
 If \fIvalue\fR is specified, then set
 the value of \fIvarName\fR to \fIvalue\fR, creating a new variable
-if one doesn't already exist, and return its value.
+if one does not already exist, and return its value.
 If \fIvarName\fR contains an open parenthesis and ends with a
 close parenthesis, then it refers to an array element:  the characters
 before the first open parenthesis are the name of the array,
@@ -42,7 +41,7 @@ unless \fIvarName\fR was declared to resolve differently through one of the
 .SH EXAMPLES
 Store a random number in the variable \fIr\fR:
 .CS
-\fBset\fR r [expr rand()]
+\fBset\fR r [expr {rand()}]
 .CE
 .PP
 Store a short message in an array element:
@@ -65,9 +64,7 @@ practice instead of doing double-dereferencing):
 \fBset\fR vbl in[expr {rand() >= 0.5}]
 \fBset\fR out [\fBset\fR $vbl]
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 expr(n), global(n), namespace(n), proc(n), trace(n), unset(n), upvar(n), variable(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 read, write, variable
diff --git a/doc/socket.n b/doc/socket.n
index a4dda4a..bd307b7 100644
--- a/doc/socket.n
+++ b/doc/socket.n
@@ -75,7 +75,16 @@ connection attempt succeeds or fails, if the socket is in blocking mode, the
 operation will wait until the connection is completed or fails. If the
 socket is in nonblocking mode and a \fBgets\fR or \fBflush\fR is done on
 the socket before the connection attempt succeeds or fails, the operation
-returns immediately and \fBfblocked\fR on the socket returns 1.
+returns immediately and \fBfblocked\fR on the socket returns 1. Synchronous
+client sockets may be switched (after they have connected) to operating in
+asynchronous mode using:
+.RS
+.CS
+\fBfconfigure \fIchan \fB\-blocking 0\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+See the \fBfconfigure\fR command for more details.
+.RE
 .SH "SERVER SOCKETS"
 .PP
 If the \fB\-server\fR option is specified then the new socket
@@ -91,7 +100,7 @@ with three additional arguments: the name of the new channel, the
 address, in network address notation, of the client's host, and
 the client's port number.
 .PP
-The following additional option may also be specified before \fIhost\fR:
+The following additional option may also be specified before \fIport\fR:
 .TP
 \fB\-myaddr\fI addr\fR
 \fIAddr\fR gives the domain-style name or numerical IP address of
@@ -108,7 +117,7 @@ channel shuts down the server so that no new connections will be
 accepted;  however, existing connections will be unaffected.
 .PP
 Server sockets depend on the Tcl event mechanism to find out when
-new connections are opened.  If the application doesn't enter the
+new connections are opened.  If the application does not enter the
 event loop, for example by invoking the \fBvwait\fR command or
 calling the C procedure \fBTcl_DoOneEvent\fR, then no connections
 will be accepted.
diff --git a/doc/source.n b/doc/source.n
index 18004a8..69d383e 100644
--- a/doc/source.n
+++ b/doc/source.n
@@ -15,11 +15,10 @@ source \- Evaluate a file or resource as a Tcl script
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBsource \fIfileName\fR
 .sp
-\fBsource\fR \fB\-rsrc \fIresourceName \fR?\fIfileName\fR?
-.sp
-\fBsource\fR \fB\-rsrcid \fIresourceId \fR?\fIfileName\fR?
+.VS 8.5
+\fBsource\fR \fB\-encoding \fIencodingName fileName\fR
+.VE 8.5
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command takes the contents of the specified file or resource
@@ -31,23 +30,26 @@ If a \fBreturn\fR command is invoked from within the script then the
 remainder of the file will be skipped and the \fBsource\fR command
 will return normally with the result from the \fBreturn\fR command.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
-The end-of-file character for files is '\\32' (^Z) for all platforms.
+The end-of-file character for files is
+.QW \e32
+(^Z) for all platforms.
 The source command will read files up to this character.  This
 restriction does not exist for the \fBread\fR or \fBgets\fR commands,
 allowing for files containing code and data segments (scripted documents).
-If you require a ``^Z'' in code for string comparison, you can use
-``\\032'' or ``\\u001a'', which will be safely substituted by the Tcl
-interpreter into ``^Z''.
-.VE 8.4
+If you require a
+.QW ^Z
+in code for string comparison, you can use
+.QW \e032
+or
+.QW \eu001a ,
+which will be safely substituted by the Tcl interpreter into
+.QW ^Z .
 .PP
-The \fI\-rsrc\fR and \fI\-rsrcid\fR forms of this command are only
-available on Macintosh computers.  These versions of the command
-allow you to source a script from a \fBTEXT\fR resource.  You may specify
-what \fBTEXT\fR resource to source by either name or id.  By default Tcl
-searches all open resource files, which include the current
-application and any loaded C extensions.  Alternatively, you may
-specify the \fIfileName\fR where the \fBTEXT\fR resource can be found.
+.VS 8.5
+The \fB\-encoding\fR option is used to specify the encoding of
+the data stored in \fIfileName\fR.  When the \fB\-encoding\fR option
+is omitted, the system encoding is assumed.
+.VE 8.5
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Run the script in the file \fBfoo.tcl\fR and then the script in the
 file \fBbar.tcl\fR:
@@ -61,9 +63,7 @@ foreach scriptFile {foo.tcl bar.tcl} {
    \fBsource\fR $scriptFile
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-file(n), cd(n), info(n)
-
+file(n), cd(n), encoding(n), info(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 file, script
diff --git a/doc/split.n b/doc/split.n
index 11e4013..c289be0 100644
--- a/doc/split.n
+++ b/doc/split.n
@@ -32,7 +32,7 @@ If \fIsplitChars\fR is an empty string then each character of
 Divide up a USENET group name into its hierarchical components:
 .CS
 \fBsplit\fR "comp.lang.tcl.announce" .
-     \fI=> comp lang tcl announce\fR
+      \fI\(-> comp lang tcl announce\fR
 .CE
 .PP
 See how the \fBsplit\fR command splits on \fIevery\fR character in
@@ -40,21 +40,21 @@ See how the \fBsplit\fR command splits on \fIevery\fR character in
 careful:
 .CS
 \fBsplit\fR "alpha beta gamma" "temp"
-     \fI=> al {ha b} {} {a ga} {} a\fR
+      \fI\(-> al {ha b} {} {a ga} {} a\fR
 .CE
 .PP
 Extract the list words from a string that is not a well-formed list:
 .CS
 \fBsplit\fR "Example with {unbalanced brace character"
-     \fI=> Example with \\{unbalanced brace character\fR
+      \fI\(-> Example with \e{unbalanced brace character\fR
 .CE
 .PP
 Split a string into its constituent characters
 .CS
 \fBsplit\fR "Hello world" {}
-     \fI=> H e l l o { } w o r l d\fR
+      \fI\(-> H e l l o { } w o r l d\fR
 .CE
-.SH "PARSING RECORD-ORIENTED FILES"
+.SS "PARSING RECORD-ORIENTED FILES"
 Parse a Unix /etc/passwd file, which consists of one entry per line,
 with each line consisting of a colon-separated list of fields:
 .CS
@@ -64,7 +64,7 @@ set content [read $fid]
 close $fid
 
 ## Split into records on newlines
-set records [\fBsplit\fR $content "\\n"]
+set records [\fBsplit\fR $content "\en"]
 
 ## Iterate over the records
 foreach rec $records {
@@ -73,7 +73,7 @@ foreach rec $records {
    set fields [\fBsplit\fR $rec ":"]
 
    ## Assign fields to variables and print some out...
-   lassign $fields \\
+   lassign $fields \e
          userName password uid grp longName homeDir shell
    puts "$longName uses [file tail $shell] for a login shell"
 }
diff --git a/doc/string.n b/doc/string.n
index ef49f15..dfb5a90 100644
--- a/doc/string.n
+++ b/doc/string.n
@@ -1,14 +1,14 @@
-'\"
-'\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
-'\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
-'\"
-'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
-'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
-'\" 
+.\"
+.\" Copyright (c) 1993 The Regents of the University of California.
+.\" Copyright (c) 1994-1996 Sun Microsystems, Inc.
+.\"
+.\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+.\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+.\" 
 .so man.macros
 .TH string n 8.1 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
-'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
 string \- Manipulate strings
 .SH SYNOPSIS
@@ -39,7 +39,7 @@ first \fIlength\fR characters are used in the comparison.  If
 \fB\-length\fR is negative, it is ignored.  If \fB\-nocase\fR is
 specified, then the strings are compared in a case-insensitive manner.
 .TP
-\fBstring equal\fR ?\fB\-nocase\fR? ?\fB-length int\fR? \fIstring1 string2\fR
+\fBstring equal\fR ?\fB\-nocase\fR? ?\fB\-length int\fR? \fIstring1 string2\fR
 Perform a character-by-character comparison of strings \fIstring1\fR
 and \fIstring2\fR.  Returns 1 if \fIstring1\fR and \fIstring2\fR are
 identical, or 0 when not.  If \fB\-length\fR is specified, then only
@@ -47,13 +47,13 @@ the first \fIlength\fR characters are used in the comparison.  If
 \fB\-length\fR is negative, it is ignored.  If \fB\-nocase\fR is
 specified, then the strings are compared in a case-insensitive manner.
 .TP
-\fBstring first \fIstring1 string2\fR ?\fIstartIndex\fR?
-Search \fIstring2\fR for a sequence of characters that exactly match
-the characters in \fIstring1\fR.  If found, return the index of the
-first character in the first such match within \fIstring2\fR.  If not
+\fBstring first \fIneedleString haystackString\fR ?\fIstartIndex\fR?
+Search \fIhaystackString\fR for a sequence of characters that exactly match
+the characters in \fIneedleString\fR.  If found, return the index of the
+first character in the first such match within \fIhaystackString\fR.  If not
 found, return \-1.  If \fIstartIndex\fR is specified (in any of the
 forms accepted by the \fBindex\fR method), then the search is
-constrained to start with the character in \fIstring2\fR specified by
+constrained to start with the character in \fIhaystackString\fR specified by
 the index.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
@@ -70,23 +70,61 @@ will return \fB\-1\fR.
 Returns the \fIcharIndex\fR'th character of the \fIstring\fR argument.
 A \fIcharIndex\fR of 0 corresponds to the first character of the
 string.  \fIcharIndex\fR may be specified as follows:
+.VS 8.5
 .RS
 .IP \fIinteger\fR 10
-The char specified at this integral index.
+For any index value that passes \fBstring is integer -strict\fR,
+the char specified at this integral index
+(e.g. \fB2\fR would refer to the
+.QW c
+in
+.QW abcd ).
 .IP \fBend\fR 10
-The last char of the string.
-.IP \fBend\-\fIinteger\fR 10
-The last char of the string minus the specified integer offset
-(e.g. \fBend\-1\fR would refer to the "c" in "abcd").
+The last char of the string
+(e.g. \fBend\fR would refer to the
+.QW d
+in
+.QW abcd ).
+.IP \fBend\fR\-\fIN\fR 10
+The last char of the string minus the specified integer offset \fIN\fR
+(e.g. \fBend\fR\-1 would refer to the
+.QW c
+in
+.QW abcd ).
+.IP \fBend\fR+\fIN\fR 10
+The last char of the string plus the specified integer offset \fIN\fR
+(e.g. \fBend\fR+\-1 would refer to the
+.QW c
+in
+.QW abcd ).
+.IP \fIM\fR+\fIN\fR 10
+The char specified at the integral index that is the sum of 
+integer values \fIM\fR and \fIN\fR
+(e.g. \fB1+1\fR would refer to the
+.QW c
+in
+.QW abcd ).
+.IP \fIM\fR\-\fIN\fR 10
+The char specified at the integral index that is the difference of 
+integer values \fIM\fR and \fIN\fR
+(e.g. \fB2\-1\fR would refer to the
+.QW b
+in
+.QW abcd ).
+.PP
+In the specifications above, the integer value \fIM\fR contains no
+trailing whitespace and the integer value \fIN\fR contains no
+leading whitespace.
 .PP
 If \fIcharIndex\fR is less than 0 or greater than or equal to the
-length of the string then an empty string is returned.
+length of the string then this command returns an empty string.
 .RE
+.VE
 .TP
 \fBstring is \fIclass\fR ?\fB\-strict\fR? ?\fB\-failindex \fIvarname\fR? \fIstring\fR
 Returns 1 if \fIstring\fR is a valid member of the specified character
 class, otherwise returns 0.  If \fB\-strict\fR is specified, then an
-empty string returns 0, otherwise and empty string will return 1 on
+empty string returns 0, otherwise an empty string will return 1 on
 any class.  If \fB\-failindex\fR is specified, then if the function
 returns 0, the index in the string where the class was no longer valid
 will be stored in the variable named \fIvarname\fR.  The \fIvarname\fR
@@ -98,7 +136,7 @@ Any Unicode alphabet or digit character.
 .IP \fBalpha\fR 12
 Any Unicode alphabet character.
 .IP \fBascii\fR 12
-Any character with a value less than \\u0080 (those that are in the
+Any character with a value less than \eu0080 (those that are in the
 7\-bit ascii range).
 .IP \fBboolean\fR 12
 Any of the forms allowed to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR.
@@ -117,9 +155,15 @@ false.
 .IP \fBgraph\fR 12
 Any Unicode printing character, except space.
 .IP \fBinteger\fR 12
-Any of the valid forms for an ordinary integer in Tcl, with optional
-surrounding whitespace.  In case of under/overflow in the value, 0 is
-returned and the \fIvarname\fR will contain \-1.
+Any of the valid string formats for a 32-bit integer value in Tcl,
+with optional surrounding whitespace.  In case of under/overflow in
+the value, 0 is returned and the \fIvarname\fR will contain \-1.
+.IP \fBlist\fR 12
+Any proper list structure, with optional surrounding whitespace. In
+case of improper list structure, 0 is returned and the \fIvarname\fR
+will contain the index of the
+.QW element
+where the list parsing fails, or \-1 if this cannot be determined.
 .IP \fBlower\fR 12
 Any Unicode lower case alphabet character.
 .IP \fBprint\fR 12
@@ -133,6 +177,12 @@ Any of the forms allowed to \fBTcl_GetBoolean\fR where the value is
 true.
 .IP \fBupper\fR 12
 Any upper case alphabet character in the Unicode character set.
+.VS 8.5
+.IP \fBwideinteger\fR 12
+Any of the valid forms for a wide integer in Tcl, with optional
+surrounding whitespace.  In case of under/overflow in the value, 0 is
+returned and the \fIvarname\fR will contain \-1.
+.VE 8.5
 .IP \fBwordchar\fR 12
 Any Unicode word character.  That is any alphanumeric character, and
 any Unicode connector punctuation characters (e.g. underscore).
@@ -144,13 +194,13 @@ function will return 0, then the \fIvarname\fR will always be set to
 0, due to the varied nature of a valid boolean value.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBstring last \fIstring1 string2\fR ?\fIlastIndex\fR?
-Search \fIstring2\fR for a sequence of characters that exactly match
-the characters in \fIstring1\fR.  If found, return the index of the
-first character in the last such match within \fIstring2\fR.  If there
+\fBstring last \fIneedleString haystackString\fR ?\fIlastIndex\fR?
+Search \fIhaystackString\fR for a sequence of characters that exactly match
+the characters in \fIneedleString\fR.  If found, return the index of the
+first character in the last such match within \fIhaystackString\fR.  If there
 is no match, then return \-1.  If \fIlastIndex\fR is specified (in any
 of the forms accepted by the \fBindex\fR method), then only the
-characters in \fIstring2\fR at or before the specified \fIlastIndex\fR
+characters in \fIhaystackString\fR at or before the specified \fIlastIndex\fR
 will be considered by the search.  For example,
 .RS
 .CS
@@ -198,7 +248,7 @@ it will return the string \fB02c322c222c\fR.
 .TP
 \fBstring match\fR ?\fB\-nocase\fR? \fIpattern\fR \fIstring\fR
 See if \fIpattern\fR matches \fIstring\fR; return 1 if it does, 0 if
-it doesn't.  If \fB\-nocase\fR is specified, then the pattern attempts
+it does not.  If \fB\-nocase\fR is specified, then the pattern attempts
 to match against the string in a case insensitive manner.  For the two
 strings to match, their contents must be identical except that the
 following special sequences may appear in \fIpattern\fR:
@@ -213,10 +263,16 @@ Matches any character in the set given by \fIchars\fR.  If a sequence
 of the form \fIx\fB\-\fIy\fR appears in \fIchars\fR, then any
 character between \fIx\fR and \fIy\fR, inclusive, will match.  When
 used with \fB\-nocase\fR, the end points of the range are converted to
-lower case first.  Whereas {[A\-z]} matches '_' when matching
-case-sensitively ('_' falls between the 'Z' and 'a'), with
-\fB\-nocase\fR this is considered like {[A\-Za\-z]} (and probably what
-was meant in the first place).
+lower case first.  Whereas {[A\-z]} matches
+.QW _
+when matching case-sensitively (since
+.QW _
+falls between the
+.QW Z
+and
+.QW a ),
+with \fB\-nocase\fR this is considered like {[A\-Za\-z]} (and
+probably what was meant in the first place).
 .IP \fB\e\fIx\fR 10
 Matches the single character \fIx\fR.  This provides a way of avoiding
 the special interpretation of the characters \fB*?[]\e\fR in
@@ -249,6 +305,12 @@ and if \fIlast\fR is greater than or equal to the length of the string
 then it is treated as if it were \fBend\fR.  If \fIfirst\fR is greater
 than \fIlast\fR or the length of the initial string, or \fIlast\fR is
 less than 0, then the initial string is returned untouched.
+.VS 8.5
+.TP
+\fBstring reverse \fIstring\fR
+Returns a string that is the same length as \fIstring\fR but with its
+characters in the reverse order.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP
 \fBstring tolower \fIstring\fR ?\fIfirst\fR? ?\fIlast\fR?
 Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that all upper (or title)
@@ -278,19 +340,19 @@ specified as for the \fBindex\fR method.
 .TP
 \fBstring trim \fIstring\fR ?\fIchars\fR?
 Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that any leading or
-trailing characters from the set given by \fIchars\fR are removed.  If
+trailing characters present in the string given by \fIchars\fR are removed.  If
 \fIchars\fR is not specified then white space is removed (spaces,
 tabs, newlines, and carriage returns).
 .TP
 \fBstring trimleft \fIstring\fR ?\fIchars\fR?
 Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that any leading
-characters from the set given by \fIchars\fR are removed.  If
+characters present in the string given by \fIchars\fR are removed.  If
 \fIchars\fR is not specified then white space is removed (spaces,
 tabs, newlines, and carriage returns).
 .TP
 \fBstring trimright \fIstring\fR ?\fIchars\fR?
 Returns a value equal to \fIstring\fR except that any trailing
-characters from the set given by \fIchars\fR are removed.  If
+characters present in the string given by \fIchars\fR are removed.  If
 \fIchars\fR is not specified then white space is removed (spaces,
 tabs, newlines, and carriage returns).
 .TP
@@ -325,4 +387,9 @@ if {$length == 0} {
 expr(n), list(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
-case conversion, compare, index, match, pattern, string, word, equal, ctype
+case conversion, compare, index, match, pattern, string, word, equal,
+ctype, character, reverse
+
+.\" Local Variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" End:
diff --git a/doc/subst.n b/doc/subst.n
index b161de6..5a162c4 100644
--- a/doc/subst.n
+++ b/doc/subst.n
@@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ subst \- Perform backslash, command, and variable substitutions
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBsubst \fR?\fB\-nobackslashes\fR? ?\fB\-nocommands\fR? ?\fB\-novariables\fR? \fIstring\fR
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command performs variable substitutions, command substitutions,
@@ -34,15 +33,14 @@ For example, if \fB\-nocommands\fR is specified, command substitution
 is not performed:  open and close brackets are treated as ordinary characters
 with no special interpretation.
 .PP
-.VS 8.4
 Note that the substitution of one kind can include substitution of 
-other kinds.  For example, even when the \fB-novariables\fR option
+other kinds.  For example, even when the \fB\-novariables\fR option
 is specified, command substitution is performed without restriction.
 This means that any variable substitution necessary to complete the
 command substitution will still take place.  Likewise, any command
 substitution necessary to complete a variable substitution will
-take place, even when \fB-nocommands\fR is specified.  See the
-EXAMPLES below.
+take place, even when \fB\-nocommands\fR is specified.  See the
+\fBEXAMPLES\fR below.
 .PP
 If an error occurs during substitution, then \fBsubst\fR will return
 that error.  If a break exception occurs during command or variable
@@ -54,10 +52,11 @@ will be substituted for that entire command or variable substitution
 (as long as it is well-formed Tcl.)  If a return exception occurs,
 or any other return code is returned during command or variable
 substitution, then the returned value is substituted for that
-substitution.  See the EXAMPLES below.  In this way, all exceptional
-return codes are ``caught'' by \fBsubst\fR.  The \fBsubst\fR command
+substitution.  See the \fBEXAMPLES\fR below.  In this way, all exceptional
+return codes are
+.QW caught
+by \fBsubst\fR.  The \fBsubst\fR command
 itself will either return an error, or will complete successfully.
-.VE
 .SH EXAMPLES
 .PP
 When it performs its substitutions, \fIsubst\fR does not give any
@@ -67,22 +66,31 @@ command substitutions) so the script
 set a 44
 \fBsubst\fR {xyz {$a}}
 .CE
-returns ``\fBxyz {44}\fR'', not ``\fBxyz {$a}\fR''
-.VS 8.4
+returns
+.QW "\fBxyz {44}\fR" ,
+not
+.QW "\fBxyz {$a}\fR"
 and the script
 .CS
-set a "p\\} q \\{r"
+set a "p\e} q \e{r"
 \fBsubst\fR {xyz {$a}}
 .CE
-return ``\fBxyz {p} q {r}\fR'', not ``\fBxyz {p\\} q \\{r}\fR''.
+returns
+.QW "\fBxyz {p} q {r}\fR" ,
+not
+.QW "\fBxyz {p\e} q \e{r}\fR".
 .PP
 When command substitution is performed, it includes any variable
-substitution necessary to evaluate the script.  
+substitution necessary to evaluate the script.
 .CS
 set a 44
 \fBsubst\fR -novariables {$a [format $a]}
 .CE
-returns ``\fB$a 44\fR'', not ``\fB$a $a\fR''.  Similarly, when
+returns
+.QW "\fB$a 44\fR" ,
+not
+.QW "\fB$a $a\fR" .
+Similarly, when
 variable substitution is performed, it includes any command
 substitution necessary to retrieve the value of the variable.
 .CS
@@ -90,7 +98,10 @@ proc b {} {return c}
 array set a {c c [b] tricky}
 \fBsubst\fR -nocommands {[b] $a([b])}
 .CE
-returns ``\fB[b] c\fR'', not ``\fB[b] tricky\fR''.
+returns
+.QW "\fB[b] c\fR" ,
+not
+.QW "\fB[b] tricky\fR" .
 .PP
 The continue and break exceptions allow command substitutions to
 prevent substitution of the rest of the command substitution and the
@@ -99,25 +110,36 @@ when processing text using \fIsubst\fR.  For example, the script
 .CS
 \fBsubst\fR {abc,[break],def}
 .CE
-returns ``\fBabc,\fR'', not ``\fBabc,,def\fR'' and the script
+returns
+.QW \fBabc,\fR ,
+not
+.QW \fBabc,,def\fR
+and the script
 .CS
-\fBsubst\fR {abc,[continue;expr 1+2],def}
+\fBsubst\fR {abc,[continue;expr {1+2}],def}
 .CE
-returns ``\fBabc,,def\fR'', not ``\fBabc,3,def\fR''.
+returns
+.QW \fBabc,,def\fR ,
+not
+.QW \fBabc,3,def\fR .
 .PP
 Other exceptional return codes substitute the returned value
 .CS
-\fBsubst\fR {abc,[return foo;expr 1+2],def}
+\fBsubst\fR {abc,[return foo;expr {1+2}],def}
 .CE
-returns ``\fBabc,foo,def\fR'', not ``\fBabc,3,def\fR'' and
+returns
+.QW \fBabc,foo,def\fR ,
+not
+.QW \fBabc,3,def\fR
+and
 .CS
-\fBsubst\fR {abc,[return -code 10 foo;expr 1+2],def}
+\fBsubst\fR {abc,[return -code 10 foo;expr {1+2}],def}
 .CE
-also returns ``\fBabc,foo,def\fR'', not ``\fBabc,3,def\fR''.
-.VE
-
+also returns
+.QW \fBabc,foo,def\fR ,
+not
+.QW \fBabc,3,def\fR .
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 Tcl(n), eval(n), break(n), continue(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 backslash substitution, command substitution, variable substitution
diff --git a/doc/switch.n b/doc/switch.n
index 32da66c..defa849 100644
--- a/doc/switch.n
+++ b/doc/switch.n
@@ -6,7 +6,7 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH switch n 7.0 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.TH switch n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
@@ -16,7 +16,6 @@ switch \- Evaluate one of several scripts, depending on a given value
 .sp
 \fBswitch \fR?\fIoptions\fR?\fI string \fR{\fIpattern body \fR?\fIpattern body \fR...?}
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The \fBswitch\fR command matches its \fIstring\fR argument against each of
@@ -31,8 +30,13 @@ matches \fIstring\fR and no default is given, then the \fBswitch\fR
 command returns an empty string.
 .PP
 If the initial arguments to \fBswitch\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
-they are treated as options.  The following options are
-currently supported:
+they are treated as options
+.VS 8.5
+unless there are exactly two arguments to \fBswitch\fR (in which case the
+first must the \fIstring\fR and the second must be the
+\fIpattern\fR/\fIbody\fR list).
+.VE 8.5
+The following options are currently supported:
 .TP 10
 \fB\-exact\fR
 Use exact matching when comparing \fIstring\fR to a pattern.  This
@@ -46,10 +50,48 @@ When matching \fIstring\fR to the patterns, use glob-style matching
 When matching \fIstring\fR to the patterns, use regular
 expression matching
 (as described in the \fBre_syntax\fR reference page).
+'\" Options defined by TIP#75
+.VS 8.5
+.TP 10
+\fB\-nocase\fR
+Causes comparisons to be handled in a case-insensitive manner.
+.TP 10
+\fB\-matchvar\fR \fIvarName\fR
+This option (only legal when \fB\-regexp\fR is also specified)
+specifies the name of a variable into which the list of matches
+found by the regular expression engine will be written.  The first
+element of the list written will be the overall substring of the input
+string (i.e. the \fIstring\fR argument to \fBswitch\fR) matched, the
+second element of the list will be the substring matched by the first
+capturing parenthesis in the regular expression that matched, and so
+on.  When a \fBdefault\fR branch is taken, the variable will have the
+empty list written to it.  This option may be specified at the same
+time as the \fB\-indexvar\fR option.
+.TP 10
+\fB\-indexvar\fR \fIvarName\fR
+This option (only legal when \fB\-regexp\fR is also specified)
+specifies the name of a variable into which the list of indices
+referring to matching substrings
+found by the regular expression engine will be written.  The first
+element of the list written will be a two-element list specifying the
+index of the start and index of the first character after the end of
+the overall substring of the input
+string (i.e. the \fIstring\fR argument to \fBswitch\fR) matched, in a
+similar way to the \fB\-indices\fR option to the \fBregexp\fR can
+obtain.  Similarly, the second element of the list refers to the first
+capturing parenthesis in the regular expression that matched, and so
+on.  When a \fBdefault\fR branch is taken, the variable will have the
+empty list written to it.  This option may be specified at the same
+time as the \fB\-matchvar\fR option.
+.VE 8.5
 .TP 10
 \fB\-\|\-\fR
 Marks the end of options.  The argument following this one will
 be treated as \fIstring\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
+.VS 8.5
+This is not required when the matching patterns and bodies are grouped
+together in a single argument.
+.VE 8.5
 .PP
 Two syntaxes are provided for the \fIpattern\fR and \fIbody\fR arguments.
 The first uses a separate argument for each of the patterns and commands;
@@ -66,9 +108,12 @@ no command or variable substitutions are performed on them;  this makes
 the behavior of the second form different than the first form in some
 cases.
 .PP
-If a \fIbody\fR is specified as ``\fB\-\fR'' it means that the \fIbody\fR
+If a \fIbody\fR is specified as
+.QW \fB\-\fR
+it means that the \fIbody\fR
 for the next pattern should also be used as the body for this
-pattern (if the next pattern also has a body of ``\fB\-\fR''
+pattern (if the next pattern also has a body of
+.QW \fB\-\fR
 then the body after that is used, and so on).
 This feature makes it possible to share a single \fIbody\fR among
 several patterns.
@@ -81,7 +126,7 @@ The \fBswitch\fR command can match against variables and not just
 literals, as shown here (the result is \fI2\fR):
 .CS
 set foo "abc"
-\fBswitch\fR abc a \- b {expr 1} $foo {expr 2} default {expr 3}
+\fBswitch\fR abc a \- b {expr {1}} $foo {expr {2}} default {expr {3}}
 .CE
 .PP
 Using glob matching and the fall-through body is an alternative to
@@ -90,9 +135,9 @@ writing regular expressions with alternations, as can be seen here
 .CS
 \fBswitch\fR \-glob aaab {
    a*b     \-
-   b       {expr 1}
-   a*      {expr 2}
-   default {expr 3}
+   b       {expr {1}}
+   a*      {expr {2}}
+   default {expr {3}}
 }
 .CE
 .PP
@@ -100,22 +145,39 @@ Whenever nothing matches, the \fBdefault\fR clause (which must be
 last) is taken.  This example has a result of \fI3\fR:
 .CS
 \fBswitch\fR xyz {
-   a  \-
+   a \-
    b {
       # Correct Comment Placement
-      expr 1
+      expr {1}
    }
    c {
-      expr 2
+      expr {2}
    }
    default {
-      expr 3
+      expr {3}
+   }
+}
+.CE
+.PP
+.VS 8.5
+When matching against regular expressions, information about what
+exactly matched is easily obtained using the \fB\-matchvar\fR option:
+.CS
+\fBswitch\fR \-regexp \-matchvar foo \-\- $bar {
+   a(b*)c {
+      puts "Found [string length [lindex $foo 1]] 'b's"
+   }
+   d(e*)f(g*)h {
+      puts "Found [string length [lindex $foo 1]] 'e's and\e
+            [string length [lindex $foo 2]] 'g's"
    }
 }
 .CE
-
+.VE 8.5
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 for(n), if(n), regexp(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 switch, match, regular expression
+.\" Local Variables:
+.\" mode: nroff
+.\" End:
diff --git a/doc/tclsh.1 b/doc/tclsh.1
index 76323f1..f604c2e 100644
--- a/doc/tclsh.1
+++ b/doc/tclsh.1
@@ -12,7 +12,7 @@
 .SH NAME
 tclsh \- Simple shell containing Tcl interpreter
 .SH SYNOPSIS
-\fBtclsh\fR ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR?
+\fBtclsh\fR ?-encoding \fIname\fR? ?\fIfileName arg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
@@ -26,26 +26,33 @@ It runs until the \fBexit\fR command is invoked or until it
 reaches end-of-file on its standard input.
 If there exists a file \fB.tclshrc\fR (or \fBtclshrc.tcl\fR on
 the Windows platforms) in the home directory of
-the user, \fBtclsh\fR evaluates the file as a Tcl script
+the user, interactive \fBtclsh\fR evaluates the file as a Tcl script
 just before reading the first command from standard input.
 
 .SH "SCRIPT FILES"
 .PP
-If \fBtclsh\fR is invoked with arguments then the first argument
-is the name of a script file and any additional arguments
+.VS 8.5
+If \fBtclsh\fR is invoked with arguments then the first few arguments
+specify the name of a script file, and, optionally, the encoding of
+the text data stored in that script file. 
+.VE 8.5
+Any additional arguments
 are made available to the script as variables (see below).
 Instead of reading commands from standard input \fBtclsh\fR will
 read Tcl commands from the named file;  \fBtclsh\fR will exit
 when it reaches the end of the file.
-.VS 8.4
 The end of the file may be marked either by the physical end of
-the medium, or by the character, '\\032' ('\\u001a', control-Z).
+the medium, or by the character,
+.QW \e032
+.PQ \eu001a ", control-Z" .
 If this character is present in the file, the \fBtclsh\fR application
 will read text up to but not including the character.  An application
 that requires this character in the file may safely encode it as
-``\\032'', ``\\x1a'', or ``\\u001a''; or may generate it by use of commands 
-such as \fBformat\fR or \fBbinary\fR.
-.VE
+.QW \e032 ,
+.QW \ex1a ,
+or
+.QW \eu001a ;
+or may generate it by use of commands such as \fBformat\fR or \fBbinary\fR.
 There is no automatic evaluation of \fB.tclshrc\fR when the name
 of a script file is presented on the \fBtclsh\fR command
 line, but the script file can always \fBsource\fR it if desired.
@@ -57,8 +64,8 @@ If you create a Tcl script in a file whose first line is
 then you can invoke the script file directly from your shell if
 you mark the file as executable.
 This assumes that \fBtclsh\fR has been installed in the default
-location in /usr/local/bin;  if it's installed somewhere else
-then you'll have to modify the above line to match.
+location in /usr/local/bin;  if it is installed somewhere else
+then you will have to modify the above line to match.
 Many UNIX systems do not allow the \fB#!\fR line to exceed about
 30 characters in length, so be sure that the \fBtclsh\fR
 executable can be accessed with a short file name.
@@ -71,7 +78,7 @@ following three lines:
 exec tclsh "$0" "$@"\fR
 .CE
 This approach has three advantages over the approach in the previous
-paragraph.  First, the location of the \fBtclsh\fR binary doesn't have
+paragraph.  First, the location of the \fBtclsh\fR binary does not have
 to be hard-wired into the script:  it can be anywhere in your shell
 search path.  Second, it gets around the 30-character file name limit
 in the previous approach.
@@ -89,13 +96,11 @@ When \fBtclsh\fR starts up, it treats all three lines as comments,
 since the backslash at the end of the second line causes the third
 line to be treated as part of the comment on the second line.
 .PP
-.VS
-You should note that it is also common practise to install tclsh with
+You should note that it is also common practice to install tclsh with
 its version number as part of the name.  This has the advantage of
 allowing multiple versions of Tcl to exist on the same system at once,
 but also the disadvantage of making it harder to write scripts that
 start up uniformly across different versions of Tcl.
-.VE
 
 .SH "VARIABLES"
 .PP
@@ -121,14 +126,16 @@ device), 0 otherwise.
 .SH PROMPTS
 .PP
 When \fBtclsh\fR is invoked interactively it normally prompts for each
-command with ``\fB% \fR''.  You can change the prompt by setting the
+command with
+.QW "\fB% \fR" .
+You can change the prompt by setting the
 variables \fBtcl_prompt1\fR and \fBtcl_prompt2\fR.  If variable
 \fBtcl_prompt1\fR exists then it must consist of a Tcl script
 to output a prompt;  instead of outputting a prompt \fBtclsh\fR
 will evaluate the script in \fBtcl_prompt1\fR.
 The variable \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is used in a similar way when
-a newline is typed but the current command isn't yet complete;
-if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR isn't set then no prompt is output for
+a newline is typed but the current command is not yet complete;
+if \fBtcl_prompt2\fR is not set then no prompt is output for
 incomplete commands.
 
 .SH "STANDARD CHANNELS"
@@ -136,7 +143,7 @@ incomplete commands.
 See \fBTcl_StandardChannels\fR for more explanations.
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-fconfigure(n), tclvars(n)
+encoding(n), fconfigure(n), tclvars(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 argument, interpreter, prompt, script file, shell
diff --git a/doc/tcltest.n b/doc/tcltest.n
index 497afe7..9ac8f66 100644
--- a/doc/tcltest.n
+++ b/doc/tcltest.n
@@ -9,14 +9,14 @@
 '\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
 '\" 
 .so man.macros
-.TH "tcltest" n 2.2 tcltest "Tcl Bundled Packages"
+.TH "tcltest" n 2.3 tcltest "Tcl Bundled Packages"
 .BS
 '\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
 .SH NAME
 tcltest \- Test harness support code and utilities
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 .nf
-\fBpackage require tcltest ?2.2.5?\fR
+\fBpackage require tcltest ?2.3?\fR
 .sp
 \fBtcltest::test \fIname description ?option value ...?\fR
 \fBtcltest::test \fIname description ?constraints? body result\fR
@@ -77,12 +77,12 @@ in and exported from the \fB::tcltest\fR namespace, as indicated in
 the \fBSYNOPSIS\fR above.  In the following sections, all commands
 will be described by their simple names, in the interest of brevity.
 .PP
-The central command of \fBtcltest\fR is [\fBtest\fR] that defines
-and runs a test.  Testing with [\fBtest\fR] involves evaluation
+The central command of \fBtcltest\fR is \fBtest\fR that defines
+and runs a test.  Testing with \fBtest\fR involves evaluation
 of a Tcl script and comparing the result to an expected result, as
 configured and controlled by a number of options.  Several other
 commands provided by \fBtcltest\fR govern the configuration of
-[\fBtest\fR] and the collection of many [\fBtest\fR] commands into
+\fBtest\fR and the collection of many \fBtest\fR commands into
 test suites.
 .PP
 See \fBCREATING TEST SUITES WITH TCLTEST\fR below for an extended example
@@ -93,29 +93,30 @@ for your Tcl-enabled code.
 \fBtest\fR \fIname description ?option value ...?\fR
 Defines and possibly runs a test with the name \fIname\fR and
 description \fIdescription\fR.  The name and description of a test
-are used in messages reported by [\fBtest\fR] during the
+are used in messages reported by \fBtest\fR during the
 test, as configured by the options of \fBtcltest\fR.  The
-remaining \fIoption value\fR arguments to [\fBtest\fR]
+remaining \fIoption value\fR arguments to \fBtest\fR
 define the test, including the scripts to run, the conditions
 under which to run them, the expected result, and the means
 by which the expected and actual results should be compared.
 See \fBTESTS\fR below for a complete description of the valid
-options and how they define a test.  The [\fBtest\fR] command
-returns an empty string.  
+options and how they define a test.  The \fBtest\fR command
+returns an empty string.
 .TP
 \fBtest\fR \fIname description ?constraints? body result\fR
-This form of [\fBtest\fR] is provided to support test suites written
+This form of \fBtest\fR is provided to support test suites written
 for version 1 of the \fBtcltest\fR package, and also a simpler
 interface for a common usage.  It is the same as
-[\fBtest\fR \fIname description\fB -constraints \fIconstraints\fB -body
-\fIbody\fB -result \fIresult\fR].  All other options to [\fBtest\fR]
+.QW "\fBtest\fR \fIname description\fB \-constraints \fIconstraints\fB \-body \fIbody\fB \-result \fIresult\fR" .
+All other options to \fBtest\fR
 take their default values.  When \fIconstraints\fR is omitted, this
-form of [\fBtest\fR] can be distinguished from the first because
-all \fIoption\fRs begin with ``-''.
+form of \fBtest\fR can be distinguished from the first because
+all \fIoption\fRs begin with
+.QW \- .
 .TP
 \fBloadTestedCommands\fR
 Evaluates in the caller's context the script specified by 
-[\fBconfigure -load\fR] or [\fBconfigure -loadfile\fR].
+\fBconfigure \-load\fR or \fBconfigure \-loadfile\fR.
 Returns the result of that script evaluation, including any error
 raised by the script.  Use this command and the related
 configuration options to provide the commands to be tested to
@@ -124,31 +125,31 @@ the interpreter running the test suite.
 \fBmakeFile\fR \fIcontents name ?directory?\fR
 Creates a file named \fIname\fR relative to
 directory \fIdirectory\fR and write \fIcontents\fR
-to that file using the encoding [\fBencoding system\fR].
+to that file using the encoding \fBencoding system\fR.
 If \fIcontents\fR does not end with a newline, a newline
 will be appended so that the file named \fIname\fR
 does end with a newline.  Because the system encoding is used,
 this command is only suitable for making text files.
 The file will be removed by the next evaluation
-of [\fBcleanupTests\fR], unless it is removed by
-[\fBremoveFile\fR] first.  The default value of
-\fIdirectory\fR is the directory [\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR].
+of \fBcleanupTests\fR, unless it is removed by
+\fBremoveFile\fR first.  The default value of
+\fIdirectory\fR is the directory \fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR.
 Returns the full path of the file created.  Use this command
 to create any text file required by a test with contents as needed.
 .TP
 \fBremoveFile\fR \fIname ?directory?\fR
 Forces the file referenced by \fIname\fR to be removed.  This file name
 should be relative to \fIdirectory\fR.   The default value of
-\fIdirectory\fR is the directory [\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR].
+\fIdirectory\fR is the directory \fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR.
 Returns an empty string.  Use this command to delete files
-created by [\fBmakeFile\fR].  
+created by \fBmakeFile\fR.
 .TP
 \fBmakeDirectory\fR \fIname ?directory?\fR
 Creates a directory named \fIname\fR relative to directory \fIdirectory\fR.
-The directory will be removed by the next evaluation of [\fBcleanupTests\fR],
-unless it is removed by [\fBremoveDirectory\fR] first.
+The directory will be removed by the next evaluation of \fBcleanupTests\fR,
+unless it is removed by \fBremoveDirectory\fR first.
 The default value of \fIdirectory\fR is the directory
-[\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR].
+\fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR.
 Returns the full path of the directory created.  Use this command
 to create any directories that are required to exist by a test.
 .TP
@@ -156,16 +157,16 @@ to create any directories that are required to exist by a test.
 Forces the directory referenced by \fIname\fR to be removed. This
 directory should be relative to \fIdirectory\fR.
 The default value of \fIdirectory\fR is the directory
-[\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR].
+\fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR.
 Returns an empty string.  Use this command to delete any directories
-created by [\fBmakeDirectory\fR].  
+created by \fBmakeDirectory\fR.
 .TP
 \fBviewFile\fR \fIfile ?directory?\fR
 Returns the contents of \fIfile\fR, except for any
-final newline, just as [\fBread -nonewline\fR] would return.
-This file name should be relative to \fIdirectory\fR.   
+final newline, just as \fBread \-nonewline\fR would return.
+This file name should be relative to \fIdirectory\fR.
 The default value of \fIdirectory\fR is the directory
-[\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR].  Use this command
+\fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR.  Use this command
 as a convenient way to turn the contents of a file generated
 by a test into the result of that test for matching against
 an expected result.  The contents of the file are read using
@@ -176,25 +177,27 @@ files.
 Intended to clean up and summarize after several tests have been
 run.  Typically called once per test file, at the end of the file
 after all tests have been completed.  For best effectiveness, be
-sure that the [\fBcleanupTests\fR] is evaluated even if an error
-occurs earlier in the test file evaluation.  
-.sp
+sure that the \fBcleanupTests\fR is evaluated even if an error
+occurs earlier in the test file evaluation.
+.RS
+.PP
 Prints statistics about the tests run and removes files that were
-created by [\fBmakeDirectory\fR] and [\fBmakeFile\fR] since the
-last [\fBcleanupTests\fR].  Names of files and directories 
-in the directory [\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR] created since
-the last [\fBcleanupTests\fR], but not created by
-[\fBmakeFile\fR] or [\fBmakeDirectory\fR] are printed
-to [\fBoutputChannel\fR].  This command also restores the original
-shell environment, as described by the ::env
+created by \fBmakeDirectory\fR and \fBmakeFile\fR since the
+last \fBcleanupTests\fR.  Names of files and directories
+in the directory \fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR created since
+the last \fBcleanupTests\fR, but not created by
+\fBmakeFile\fR or \fBmakeDirectory\fR are printed
+to \fBoutputChannel\fR.  This command also restores the original
+shell environment, as described by the \fB::env\fR
 array. Returns an empty string.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBrunAllTests\fR
 This is a master command meant to run an entire suite of tests,
 spanning multiple files and/or directories, as governed by
 the configurable options of \fBtcltest\fR.  See \fBRUNNING ALL TESTS\fR
 below for a complete description of the many variations possible
-with [\fBrunAllTests\fR].
+with \fBrunAllTests\fR.
 .SH "CONFIGURATION COMMANDS"
 .TP
 \fBconfigure\fR
@@ -212,19 +215,21 @@ corresponding value \fIvalue\fR, in order.  Raises an error if
 an \fIoption\fR is not a supported configurable option, or if
 \fIvalue\fR is not a valid value for the corresponding \fIoption\fR,
 or if a \fIvalue\fR is not provided.  When an error is raised, the
-operation of [\fBconfigure\fR] is halted, and subsequent \fIoption value\fR
+operation of \fBconfigure\fR is halted, and subsequent \fIoption value\fR
 arguments are not processed.
-.sp
+.RS
+.PP
 If the environment variable \fB::env(TCLTEST_OPTIONS)\fR exists when
-the \fBtcltest\fR package is loaded (by [\fBpackage require tcltest\fR])
-then its value is taken as a list of arguments to pass to [\fBconfigure\fR].
+the \fBtcltest\fR package is loaded (by \fBpackage require tcltest\fR)
+then its value is taken as a list of arguments to pass to \fBconfigure\fR.
 This allows the default values of the configuration options to be
 set by the environment.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBcustomMatch \fImode script\fR
-Registers \fImode\fR as a new legal value of the \fB-match\fR option
-to [\fBtest\fR].  When the \fB-match \fImode\fR option is
-passed to [\fBtest\fR], the script \fIscript\fR will be evaluated
+Registers \fImode\fR as a new legal value of the \fB\-match\fR option
+to \fBtest\fR.  When the \fB\-match \fImode\fR option is
+passed to \fBtest\fR, the script \fIscript\fR will be evaluated
 to compare the actual result of evaluating the body of the test
 to the expected result.
 To perform the match, the \fIscript\fR is completed with two additional
@@ -232,82 +237,82 @@ words, the expected result, and the actual result, and the completed script
 is evaluated in the global namespace.
 The completed script is expected to return a boolean value indicating
 whether or not the results match.  The built-in matching modes of
-[\fBtest\fR] are \fBexact\fR, \fBglob\fR, and \fBregexp\fR.
+\fBtest\fR are \fBexact\fR, \fBglob\fR, and \fBregexp\fR.
 .TP
 \fBtestConstraint \fIconstraint ?boolean?\fR
 Sets or returns the boolean value associated with the named \fIconstraint\fR.
 See \fBTEST CONSTRAINTS\fR below for more information.
 .TP
 \fBinterpreter\fR \fI?executableName?\fR
-Sets or returns the name of the executable to be [\fBexec\fR]ed by
-[\fBrunAllTests\fR] to run each test file when
-[\fBconfigure -singleproc\fR] is false.
-The default value for [\fBinterpreter\fR] is the name of the
-currently running program as returned by [\fBinfo nameofexecutable\fR].
+Sets or returns the name of the executable to be \fBexec\fRed by
+\fBrunAllTests\fR to run each test file when
+\fBconfigure \-singleproc\fR is false.
+The default value for \fBinterpreter\fR is the name of the
+currently running program as returned by \fBinfo nameofexecutable\fR.
 .TP
 \fBoutputChannel\fR \fI?channelID?\fR
 Sets or returns the output channel ID.  This defaults to stdout.
 Any test that prints test related output should send
-that output to [\fBoutputChannel\fR] rather than letting
+that output to \fBoutputChannel\fR rather than letting
 that output default to stdout.
 .TP
 \fBerrorChannel\fR \fI?channelID?\fR
 Sets or returns the error channel ID.  This defaults to stderr.
 Any test that prints error messages should send
-that output to [\fBerrorChannel\fR] rather than printing
+that output to \fBerrorChannel\fR rather than printing
 directly to stderr.
 .SH "SHORTCUT COMMANDS"
 .TP
 \fBdebug \fI?level?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -debug \fI?level?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-debug \fI?level?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBerrorFile \fI?filename?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -errfile \fI?filename?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-errfile \fI?filename?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBlimitConstraints \fI?boolean?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -limitconstraints \fI?boolean?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-limitconstraints \fI?boolean?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBloadFile \fI?filename?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -loadfile \fI?filename?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-loadfile \fI?filename?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBloadScript \fI?script?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -load \fI?script?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-load \fI?script?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBmatch \fI?patternList?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -match \fI?patternList?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-match \fI?patternList?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBmatchDirectories \fI?patternList?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -relateddir \fI?patternList?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-relateddir \fI?patternList?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBmatchFiles \fI?patternList?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -file \fI?patternList?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-file \fI?patternList?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBoutputFile \fI?filename?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -outfile \fI?filename?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-outfile \fI?filename?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBpreserveCore \fI?level?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -preservecore \fI?level?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-preservecore \fI?level?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBsingleProcess \fI?boolean?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -singleproc \fI?boolean?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-singleproc \fI?boolean?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBskip \fI?patternList?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -skip \fI?patternList?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-skip \fI?patternList?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBskipDirectories \fI?patternList?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -asidefromdir \fI?patternList?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-asidefromdir \fI?patternList?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBskipFiles \fI?patternList?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -notfile \fI?patternList?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-notfile \fI?patternList?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBtemporaryDirectory \fI?directory?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -tmpdir \fI?directory?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-tmpdir \fI?directory?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBtestsDirectory \fI?directory?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -testdir \fI?directory?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-testdir \fI?directory?\fR.
 .TP
 \fBverbose \fI?level?\fR
-Same as [\fBconfigure -verbose \fI?level?\fR].
+Same as \fBconfigure \-verbose \fI?level?\fR.
 .SH "OTHER COMMANDS"
 .PP
 The remaining commands provided by \fBtcltest\fR have better
@@ -316,43 +321,49 @@ are retained to support existing test suites, but should be avoided
 in new code.
 .TP
 \fBtest\fR \fIname description optionList\fR
-This form of [\fBtest\fR] was provided to enable passing many
-options spanning several lines to [\fBtest\fR] as a single
+This form of \fBtest\fR was provided to enable passing many
+options spanning several lines to \fBtest\fR as a single
 argument quoted by braces, rather than needing to backslash quote
-the newlines between arguments to [\fBtest\fR].  The \fIoptionList\fR
+the newlines between arguments to \fBtest\fR.  The \fIoptionList\fR
 argument is expected to be a list with an even number of elements
 representing \fIoption\fR and \fIvalue\fR arguments to pass
-to [\fBtest\fR].  However, these values are not passed directly, as
-in the alternate forms of [\fBswitch\fR].  Instead, this form makes
+to \fBtest\fR.  However, these values are not passed directly, as
+in the alternate forms of \fBswitch\fR.  Instead, this form makes
 an unfortunate attempt to overthrow Tcl's substitution rules by
 performing substitutions on some of the list elements as an attempt to
-implement a ``do what I mean'' interpretation of a brace-enclosed
-``block''.  The result is nearly impossible to document clearly, and
+implement a
+.QW "do what I mean"
+interpretation of a brace-enclosed
+.QW block .
+The result is nearly impossible to document clearly, and
 for that reason this form is not recommended.  See the examples in
 \fBCREATING TEST SUITES WITH TCLTEST\fR below to see that this
 form is really not necessary to avoid backslash-quoted newlines.
 If you insist on using this form, examine
 the source code of \fBtcltest\fR if you want to know the substitution
 details, or just enclose the third through last argument
-to [\fBtest\fR] in braces and hope for the best.
+to \fBtest\fR in braces and hope for the best.
 .TP
 \fBworkingDirectory\fR \fI?directoryName?\fR
 Sets or returns the current working directory when the test suite is
 running.  The default value for workingDirectory is the directory in
-which the test suite was launched.  The Tcl commands [\fBcd\fR] and
-[\fBpwd\fR] are sufficient replacements.
+which the test suite was launched.  The Tcl commands \fBcd\fR and
+\fBpwd\fR are sufficient replacements.
 .TP
 \fBnormalizeMsg\fR \fImsg\fR
-Returns the result of removing the ``extra'' newlines from \fImsg\fR,
-where ``extra'' is rather imprecise.  Tcl offers plenty of string
+Returns the result of removing the
+.QW extra
+newlines from \fImsg\fR, where
+.QW extra
+is rather imprecise.  Tcl offers plenty of string
 processing commands to modify strings as you wish, and
-[\fBcustomMatch\fR] allows flexible matching of actual and expected
+\fBcustomMatch\fR allows flexible matching of actual and expected
 results.
 .TP
 \fBnormalizePath\fR \fIpathVar\fR
 Resolves symlinks in a path, thus creating a path without internal
 redirection.  It is assumed that \fIpathVar\fR is absolute.
-\fIpathVar\fR is modified in place.  The Tcl command [\fBfile normalize\fR]
+\fIpathVar\fR is modified in place.  The Tcl command \fBfile normalize\fR
 is a sufficient replacement.
 .TP
 \fBbytestring\fR \fIstring\fR
@@ -362,52 +373,54 @@ value supplied in \fIstring\fR.  This allows the tester to create
 denormalized or improperly formed strings to pass to C procedures that
 are supposed to accept strings with embedded NULL types and confirm
 that a string result has a certain pattern of bytes.  This is
-exactly equivalent to the Tcl command [\fBencoding convertfrom identity\fR].
+exactly equivalent to the Tcl command \fBencoding convertfrom identity\fR.
 .SH TESTS
 .PP
-The [\fBtest\fR] command is the heart of the \fBtcltest\fR package.
+The \fBtest\fR command is the heart of the \fBtcltest\fR package.
 Its essential function is to evaluate a Tcl script and compare
-the result with an expected result.  The options of [\fBtest\fR]
+the result with an expected result.  The options of \fBtest\fR
 define the test script, the environment in which to evaluate it,
 the expected result, and how the compare the actual result to
 the expected result.  Some configuration options of \fBtcltest\fR
-also influence how [\fBtest\fR] operates.
+also influence how \fBtest\fR operates.
+.PP
+The valid options for \fBtest\fR are summarized:
 .PP
-The valid options for [\fBtest\fR] are summarized:
 .CS
-.ta 0.8i
 \fBtest\fR \fIname\fR \fIdescription\fR
-	?-constraints \fIkeywordList|expression\fR?
-	?-setup \fIsetupScript\fR?
-	?-body \fItestScript\fR?
-	?-cleanup \fIcleanupScript\fR?
-	?-result \fIexpectedAnswer\fR?
-	?-output \fIexpectedOutput\fR?
-	?-errorOutput \fIexpectedError\fR?
-	?-returnCodes \fIcodeList\fR?
-	?-match \fImode\fR?
+        ?-constraints \fIkeywordList|expression\fR?
+        ?-setup \fIsetupScript\fR?
+        ?-body \fItestScript\fR?
+        ?-cleanup \fIcleanupScript\fR?
+        ?-result \fIexpectedAnswer\fR?
+        ?-output \fIexpectedOutput\fR?
+        ?-errorOutput \fIexpectedError\fR?
+        ?-returnCodes \fIcodeList\fR?
+        ?-match \fImode\fR?
 .CE
+.PP
 The \fIname\fR may be any string.  It is conventional to choose
 a \fIname\fR according to the pattern:
+.PP
 .CS
 \fItarget\fR-\fImajorNum\fR.\fIminorNum\fR
 .CE
+.PP
 For white-box (regression) tests, the target should be the name of the
 C function or Tcl procedure being tested.  For black-box tests, the
 target should be the name of the feature being tested.  Some conventions
 call for the names of black-box tests to have the suffix \fB_bb\fR.
 Related tests should share a major number.  As a test suite evolves,
 it is best to have the same test name continue to correspond to the
-same test, so that it remains meaningful to say things like ``Test
-foo-1.3 passed in all releases up to 3.4, but began failing in
-release 3.5.''
+same test, so that it remains meaningful to say things like
+.QW "Test foo-1.3 passed in all releases up to 3.4, but began failing in release 3.5."
 .PP
-During evaluation of [\fBtest\fR], the \fIname\fR will be compared
+During evaluation of \fBtest\fR, the \fIname\fR will be compared
 to the lists of string matching patterns returned by
-[\fBconfigure -match\fR], and [\fBconfigure -skip\fR].  The test
+\fBconfigure \-match\fR, and \fBconfigure \-skip\fR.  The test
 will be run only if \fIname\fR matches any of the patterns from
-[\fBconfigure -match\fR] and matches none of the patterns
-from [\fBconfigure -skip\fR].
+\fBconfigure \-match\fR and matches none of the patterns
+from \fBconfigure \-skip\fR.
 .PP
 The \fIdescription\fR should be a short textual description of the
 test.  The \fIdescription\fR is included in output produced by the
@@ -419,124 +432,125 @@ a bug, include the bug ID in the description.
 .PP
 Valid attributes and associated values are:
 .TP
-\fB-constraints \fIkeywordList|expression\fR
-The optional \fB-constraints\fR attribute can be list of one or more
-keywords or an expression.  If the \fB-constraints\fR value is a list of
+\fB\-constraints \fIkeywordList|expression\fR
+The optional \fB\-constraints\fR attribute can be list of one or more
+keywords or an expression.  If the \fB\-constraints\fR value is a list of
 keywords, each of these keywords should be the name of a constraint
-defined by a call to [\fBtestConstraint\fR].  If any of the listed
+defined by a call to \fBtestConstraint\fR.  If any of the listed
 constraints is false or does not exist, the test is skipped.  If the
-\fB-constraints\fR value is an expression, that expression
+\fB\-constraints\fR value is an expression, that expression
 is evaluated. If the expression evaluates to true, then the test is run.
-Note that the expression form of \fB-constraints\fR may interfere with the
-operation of [\fBconfigure -constraints\fR] and
-[\fBconfigure -limitconstraints\fR], and is not recommended.
+Note that the expression form of \fB\-constraints\fR may interfere with the
+operation of \fBconfigure \-constraints\fR and
+\fBconfigure \-limitconstraints\fR, and is not recommended.
 Appropriate constraints should be added to any tests that should
 not always be run.  That is, conditional evaluation of a test
-should be accomplished by the \fB-constraints\fR option, not by
-conditional evaluation of [\fBtest\fR].  In that way, the same
+should be accomplished by the \fB\-constraints\fR option, not by
+conditional evaluation of \fBtest\fR.  In that way, the same
 number of tests are always reported by the test suite, though
 the number skipped may change based on the testing environment.
 The default value is an empty list.  
 See \fBTEST CONSTRAINTS\fR below for a list of built-in constraints 
 and information on how to add your own constraints.
 .TP
-\fB-setup \fIscript\fR
-The optional \fB-setup\fR attribute indicates a \fIscript\fR that will be run
-before the script indicated by the \fB-body\fR attribute.  If evaluation
+\fB\-setup \fIscript\fR
+The optional \fB\-setup\fR attribute indicates a \fIscript\fR that will be run
+before the script indicated by the \fB\-body\fR attribute.  If evaluation
 of \fIscript\fR raises an error, the test will fail.  The default value
 is an empty script.
 .TP
-\fB-body \fIscript\fR
-The \fB-body\fR attribute indicates the \fIscript\fR to run to carry out the 
+\fB\-body \fIscript\fR
+The \fB\-body\fR attribute indicates the \fIscript\fR to run to carry out the 
 test.  It must return a result that can be checked for correctness.
 If evaluation of \fIscript\fR raises an error, the test will fail.
 The default value is an empty script.
 .TP
-\fB-cleanup \fIscript\fR
-The optional \fB-cleanup\fR attribute indicates a \fIscript\fR that will be
-run after the script indicated by the \fB-body\fR attribute.
+\fB\-cleanup \fIscript\fR
+The optional \fB\-cleanup\fR attribute indicates a \fIscript\fR that will be
+run after the script indicated by the \fB\-body\fR attribute.
 If evaluation of \fIscript\fR raises an error, the test will fail.
 The default value is an empty script.
 .TP
-\fB-match \fImode\fR
-The \fB-match\fR attribute determines how expected answers supplied by
-\fB-result\fR, \fB-output\fR, and \fB-errorOutput\fR are compared.  Valid
+\fB\-match \fImode\fR
+The \fB\-match\fR attribute determines how expected answers supplied by
+\fB\-result\fR, \fB\-output\fR, and \fB\-errorOutput\fR are compared.  Valid
 values for \fImode\fR are \fBregexp\fR, \fBglob\fR, \fBexact\fR, and
-any value registered by a prior call to [\fBcustomMatch\fR].  The default
+any value registered by a prior call to \fBcustomMatch\fR.  The default
 value is \fBexact\fR.
 .TP
-\fB-result \fIexpectedValue\fR
-The \fB-result\fR attribute supplies the \fIexpectedValue\fR against which
+\fB\-result \fIexpectedValue\fR
+The \fB\-result\fR attribute supplies the \fIexpectedValue\fR against which
 the return value from script will be compared. The default value is
 an empty string.
 .TP
-\fB-output \fIexpectedValue\fR
-The \fB-output\fR attribute supplies the \fIexpectedValue\fR against which
-any output sent to \fBstdout\fR or [\fBoutputChannel\fR] during evaluation
+\fB\-output \fIexpectedValue\fR
+The \fB\-output\fR attribute supplies the \fIexpectedValue\fR against which
+any output sent to \fBstdout\fR or \fBoutputChannel\fR during evaluation
 of the script(s) will be compared.  Note that only output printed using
-[\fB::puts\fR] is used for comparison.  If \fB-output\fR is not specified,
-output sent to \fBstdout\fR and [\fBoutputChannel\fR] is not processed for
+\fB::puts\fR is used for comparison.  If \fB\-output\fR is not specified,
+output sent to \fBstdout\fR and \fBoutputChannel\fR is not processed for
 comparison.
 .TP
-\fB-errorOutput \fIexpectedValue\fR
-The \fB-errorOutput\fR attribute supplies the \fIexpectedValue\fR against
-which any output sent to \fBstderr\fR or [\fBerrorChannel\fR] during 
+\fB\-errorOutput \fIexpectedValue\fR
+The \fB\-errorOutput\fR attribute supplies the \fIexpectedValue\fR against
+which any output sent to \fBstderr\fR or \fBerrorChannel\fR during 
 evaluation of the script(s) will be compared. Note that only output
-printed using [\fB::puts\fR] is used for comparison.  If \fB-errorOutput\fR
-is not specified, output sent to \fBstderr\fR and [\fBerrorChannel\fR] is
+printed using \fB::puts\fR is used for comparison.  If \fB\-errorOutput\fR
+is not specified, output sent to \fBstderr\fR and \fBerrorChannel\fR is
 not processed for comparison.
 .TP
-\fB-returnCodes \fIexpectedCodeList\fR
-The optional \fB-returnCodes\fR attribute supplies \fIexpectedCodeList\fR,
+\fB\-returnCodes \fIexpectedCodeList\fR
+The optional \fB\-returnCodes\fR attribute supplies \fIexpectedCodeList\fR,
 a list of return codes that may be accepted from evaluation of the
-\fB-body\fR script.  If evaluation of the \fB-body\fR script returns
+\fB\-body\fR script.  If evaluation of the \fB\-body\fR script returns
 a code not in the \fIexpectedCodeList\fR, the test fails.  All
-return codes known to [\fBreturn\fR], in both numeric and symbolic
+return codes known to \fBreturn\fR, in both numeric and symbolic
 form, including extended return codes, are acceptable elements in
-the \fIexpectedCodeList\fR.  Default value is \fB{ok return}\fR.
+the \fIexpectedCodeList\fR.  Default value is
+.QW \fBok return\fR.
 .PP
-To pass, a test must successfully evaluate its \fB-setup\fR, \fB-body\fR,
-and \fB-cleanup\fR scripts.  The return code of the \fB-body\fR script and
+To pass, a test must successfully evaluate its \fB\-setup\fR, \fB\-body\fR,
+and \fB\-cleanup\fR scripts.  The return code of the \fB\-body\fR script and
 its result must match expected values, and if specified, output and error
-data from the test must match expected \fB-output\fR and \fB-errorOutput\fR
+data from the test must match expected \fB\-output\fR and \fB\-errorOutput\fR
 values.  If any of these conditions are not met, then the test fails.
 Note that all scripts are evaluated in the context of the caller
-of [\fBtest\fR].
+of \fBtest\fR.
 .PP
-As long as [\fBtest\fR] is called with valid syntax and legal
+As long as \fBtest\fR is called with valid syntax and legal
 values for all attributes, it will not raise an error.  Test
-failures are instead reported as output written to [\fBoutputChannel\fR].
+failures are instead reported as output written to \fBoutputChannel\fR.
 In default operation, a successful test produces no output.  The output
-messages produced by [\fBtest\fR] are controlled by the
-[\fBconfigure -verbose\fR] option as described in \fBCONFIGURABLE OPTIONS\fR
+messages produced by \fBtest\fR are controlled by the
+\fBconfigure \-verbose\fR option as described in \fBCONFIGURABLE OPTIONS\fR
 below.  Any output produced by the test scripts themselves should be
-produced using [\fB::puts\fR] to [\fBoutputChannel\fR] or
-[\fBerrorChannel\fR], so that users of the test suite may
-easily capture output with the [\fBconfigure -outfile\fR] and
-[\fBconfigure -errfile\fR] options, and so that the \fB-output\fR
-and \fB-errorOutput\fR attributes work properly.
+produced using \fB::puts\fR to \fBoutputChannel\fR or
+\fBerrorChannel\fR, so that users of the test suite may
+easily capture output with the \fBconfigure \-outfile\fR and
+\fBconfigure \-errfile\fR options, and so that the \fB\-output\fR
+and \fB\-errorOutput\fR attributes work properly.
 .SH "TEST CONSTRAINTS"
 .PP
 Constraints are used to determine whether or not a test should be skipped.
 Each constraint has a name, which may be any string, and a boolean
-value.  Each [\fBtest\fR] has a \fB-constraints\fR value which is a
+value.  Each \fBtest\fR has a \fB\-constraints\fR value which is a
 list of constraint names.  There are two modes of constraint control.
 Most frequently, the default mode is used, indicated by a setting
-of [\fBconfigure -limitconstraints\fR] to false.  The test will run
+of \fBconfigure \-limitconstraints\fR to false.  The test will run
 only if all constraints in the list are true-valued.  Thus,
-the \fB-constraints\fR option of [\fBtest\fR] is a convenient, symbolic
+the \fB\-constraints\fR option of \fBtest\fR is a convenient, symbolic
 way to define any conditions required for the test to be possible or
-meaningful.  For example, a [\fBtest\fR] with \fB-constraints unix\fR
+meaningful.  For example, a \fBtest\fR with \fB\-constraints unix\fR
 will only be run if the constraint \fBunix\fR is true, which indicates
 the test suite is being run on a Unix platform.
 .PP
-Each [\fBtest\fR] should include whatever \fB-constraints\fR are
+Each \fBtest\fR should include whatever \fB\-constraints\fR are
 required to constrain it to run only where appropriate.  Several
 constraints are pre-defined in the \fBtcltest\fR package, listed
 below.  The registration of user-defined constraints is performed
-by the [\fBtestConstraint\fR] command.  User-defined constraints
+by the \fBtestConstraint\fR command.  User-defined constraints
 may appear within a test file, or within the script specified
-by the [\fBconfigure -load\fR] or [\fBconfigure -loadfile\fR]
+by the \fBconfigure \-load\fR or \fBconfigure \-loadfile\fR
 options.
 .PP
 The following is a list of constraints pre-defined by the
@@ -581,15 +595,15 @@ test can not be run on a Mac.  This flag is used
 to temporarily disable a test.
 .TP
 \fIunixCrash\fR
-test crashes if it's run on Unix.  This flag is used to temporarily
+test crashes if it is run on Unix.  This flag is used to temporarily
 disable a test. 
 .TP
 \fIwinCrash\fR
-test crashes if it's run on Windows.  This flag is used to temporarily
+test crashes if it is run on Windows.  This flag is used to temporarily
 disable a test. 
 .TP
 \fImacCrash\fR
-test crashes if it's run on a Mac.  This flag is used to temporarily
+test crashes if it is run on a Mac.  This flag is used to temporarily
 disable a test. 
 .TP
 \fIemptyTest\fR
@@ -643,46 +657,50 @@ test can only run if Unix user is not root
 .TP
 \fIeformat\fR
 test can only run if app has a working version of sprintf with respect
-to the "e" format of floating-point numbers.
+to the
+.QW e
+format of floating-point numbers.
 .TP
 \fIstdio\fR
-test can only be run if [\fBinterpreter\fR] can be [\fBopen\fR]ed
+test can only be run if \fBinterpreter\fR can be \fBopen\fRed
 as a pipe.
 .PP
 The alternative mode of constraint control is enabled by setting
-[\fBconfigure -limitconstraints\fR] to true.  With that configuration
+\fBconfigure \-limitconstraints\fR to true.  With that configuration
 setting, all existing constraints other than those in the constraint
-list returned by [\fBconfigure -constraints\fR] are set to false.
-When the value of [\fBconfigure -constraints\fR]
+list returned by \fBconfigure \-constraints\fR are set to false.
+When the value of \fBconfigure \-constraints\fR
 is set, all those constraints are set to true.  The effect is that
-when both options [\fBconfigure -constraints\fR] and
-[\fBconfigure -limitconstraints\fR] are in use, only those tests including
-only constraints from the [\fBconfigure -constraints\fR] list
+when both options \fBconfigure \-constraints\fR and
+\fBconfigure \-limitconstraints\fR are in use, only those tests including
+only constraints from the \fBconfigure \-constraints\fR list
 are run; all others are skipped.  For example, one might set
 up a configuration with
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBconfigure\fR -constraints knownBug \e
           -limitconstraints true \e
           -verbose pass
 .CE
+.PP
 to run exactly those tests that exercise known bugs, and discover
-whether any of them pass, indicating the bug had been fixed.  
+whether any of them pass, indicating the bug had been fixed.
 .SH "RUNNING ALL TESTS"
 .PP
-The single command [\fBrunAllTests\fR] is evaluated to run an entire
+The single command \fBrunAllTests\fR is evaluated to run an entire
 test suite, spanning many files and directories.  The configuration
 options of \fBtcltest\fR control the precise operations.  The
-[\fBrunAllTests\fR] command begins by printing a summary of its
-configuration to [\fBoutputChannel\fR].
+\fBrunAllTests\fR command begins by printing a summary of its
+configuration to \fBoutputChannel\fR.
 .PP
 Test files to be evaluated are sought in the directory
-[\fBconfigure -testdir\fR].  The list of files in that directory
-that match any of the patterns in [\fBconfigure -file\fR] and
-match none of the patterns in [\fBconfigure -notfile\fR] is generated
+\fBconfigure \-testdir\fR.  The list of files in that directory
+that match any of the patterns in \fBconfigure \-file\fR and
+match none of the patterns in \fBconfigure \-notfile\fR is generated
 and sorted.  Then each file will be evaluated in turn.  If
-[\fBconfigure -singleproc\fR] is true, then each file will
-be [\fBsource\fR]d in the caller's context.  If it is false,
-then a copy of [\fBinterpreter\fR] will be [\fBexec\fR]d to
+\fBconfigure \-singleproc\fR is true, then each file will
+be \fBsource\fRd in the caller's context.  If it is false,
+then a copy of \fBinterpreter\fR will be \fBexec\fR'd to
 evaluate each file.  The multi-process operation is useful
 when testing can cause errors so severe that a process 
 terminates.  Although such an error may terminate a child
@@ -690,17 +708,17 @@ process evaluating one file, the master process can continue
 with the rest of the test suite.  In multi-process operation,
 the configuration of \fBtcltest\fR in the master process is
 passed to the child processes as command line arguments,
-with the exception of [\fBconfigure -outfile\fR].  The
-[\fBrunAllTests\fR] command in the
+with the exception of \fBconfigure \-outfile\fR.  The
+\fBrunAllTests\fR command in the
 master process collects all output from the child processes
 and collates their results into one master report.  Any
 reports of individual test failures, or messages requested
-by a [\fBconfigure -verbose\fR] setting are passed directly
-on to [\fBoutputChannel\fR] by the master process.
+by a \fBconfigure \-verbose\fR setting are passed directly
+on to \fBoutputChannel\fR by the master process.
 .PP
 After evaluating all selected test files, a summary of the
-results is printed to [\fBoutputChannel\fR].  The summary
-includes the total number of [\fBtest\fR]s evaluated, broken
+results is printed to \fBoutputChannel\fR.  The summary
+includes the total number of \fBtest\fRs evaluated, broken
 down into those skipped, those passed, and those failed.
 The summary also notes the number of files evaluated, and the names
 of any files with failing tests or errors.  A list of
@@ -708,45 +726,45 @@ the constraints that caused tests to be skipped, and the
 number of tests skipped for each is also printed.  Also,
 messages are printed if it appears that evaluation of
 a test file has caused any temporary files to be left
-behind in [\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR].
+behind in \fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR.
 .PP
 Having completed and summarized all selected test files,
-[\fBrunAllTests\fR] then recursively acts on subdirectories
-of [\fBconfigure -testdir\fR].  All subdirectories that
-match any of the patterns in [\fBconfigure -relateddir\fR]
+\fBrunAllTests\fR then recursively acts on subdirectories
+of \fBconfigure \-testdir\fR.  All subdirectories that
+match any of the patterns in \fBconfigure \-relateddir\fR
 and do not match any of the patterns in
-[\fBconfigure -asidefromdir\fR] are examined.  If
+\fBconfigure \-asidefromdir\fR are examined.  If
 a file named \fBall.tcl\fR is found in such a directory,
-it will be [\fBsource\fR]d in the caller's context.
+it will be \fBsource\fRd in the caller's context.
 Whether or not an examined directory contains an
 \fBall.tcl\fR file, its subdirectories are also scanned
-against the [\fBconfigure -relateddir\fR] and
-[\fBconfigure -asidefromdir\fR] patterns.  In this way,
+against the \fBconfigure \-relateddir\fR and
+\fBconfigure \-asidefromdir\fR patterns.  In this way,
 many directories in a directory tree can have all their
-test files evaluated by a single [\fBrunAllTests\fR]
+test files evaluated by a single \fBrunAllTests\fR
 command.
 .SH "CONFIGURABLE OPTIONS"
-The [\fBconfigure\fR] command is used to set and query the configurable
+The \fBconfigure\fR command is used to set and query the configurable
 options of \fBtcltest\fR.  The valid options are:
 .TP
-\fB-singleproc \fIboolean\fR
-Controls whether or not [\fBrunAllTests\fR] spawns a child process for
+\fB\-singleproc \fIboolean\fR
+Controls whether or not \fBrunAllTests\fR spawns a child process for
 each test file.  No spawning when \fIboolean\fR is true.  Default
 value is false.
 .TP
-\fB-debug \fIlevel\fR
+\fB\-debug \fIlevel\fR
 Sets the debug level to \fIlevel\fR, an integer value indicating how
 much debugging information should be printed to stdout.  Note that
 debug messages always go to stdout, independent of the value of
-[\fBconfigure -outfile\fR].  Default value is 0.  Levels are defined as:
+\fBconfigure \-outfile\fR.  Default value is 0.  Levels are defined as:
 .RS
 .IP 0
 Do not display any debug information.
 .IP 1
 Display information regarding whether a test is skipped because it
-doesn't match any of the tests that were specified using by
-[\fBconfigure -match\fR] (userSpecifiedNonMatch) or matches any of
-the tests specified by [\fBconfigure -skip\fR] (userSpecifiedSkip).  Also
+does not match any of the tests that were specified using by
+\fBconfigure \-match\fR (userSpecifiedNonMatch) or matches any of
+the tests specified by \fBconfigure \-skip\fR (userSpecifiedSkip).  Also
 print warnings about possible lack of cleanup or balance in test files.
 Also print warnings about any re-use of test names.
 .IP 2
@@ -758,10 +776,10 @@ Display information regarding what individual procs in the test
 harness are doing.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB-verbose \fIlevel\fR
+\fB\-verbose \fIlevel\fR
 Sets the type of output verbosity desired to \fIlevel\fR,
 a list of zero or more of the elements \fBbody\fR, \fBpass\fR,
-\fBskip\fR, \fBstart\fR, and \fBerror\fR.  Default value
+\fBskip\fR, \fBstart\fR, \fBerror\fR and \fBline\fR.  Default value
 is \fB{body error}\fR.
 Levels are defined as: 
 .RS
@@ -776,108 +794,121 @@ Print output whenever a test starts
 .IP "error (e)"
 Print errorInfo and errorCode, if they exist, when a test return code
 does not match its expected return code
+.IP "line (l)"
+Print source file line information of failed tests
 .RE
 The single letter abbreviations noted above are also recognized
-so that [\fBconfigure -verbose pt\fR] is the same as
-[\fBconfigure -verbose  {pass start}\fR].
+so that
+.QW "\fBconfigure \-verbose pt\fR"
+is the same as
+.QW "\fBconfigure \-verbose {pass start}\fR" .
 .TP
-\fB-preservecore \fIlevel\fR
+\fB\-preservecore \fIlevel\fR
 Sets the core preservation level to \fIlevel\fR.  This level
 determines how stringent checks for core files are.  Default
 value is 0.  Levels are defined as:
 .RS
 .IP 0
-No checking - do not check for core files at the end of each test
-command, but do check for them in [\fBrunAllTests\fR] after all
+No checking \(em do not check for core files at the end of each test
+command, but do check for them in \fBrunAllTests\fR after all
 test files have been evaluated.
 .IP 1
-Also check for core files at the end of each [\fBtest\fR] command.
+Also check for core files at the end of each \fBtest\fR command.
 .IP 2
 Check for core files at all times described above, and save a 
-copy of each core file produced in [\fBconfigure -tmpdir\fR].
+copy of each core file produced in \fBconfigure \-tmpdir\fR.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fB-limitconstraints \fIboolean\fR
-Sets the mode by which [\fBtest\fR] honors constraints as described
+\fB\-limitconstraints \fIboolean\fR
+Sets the mode by which \fBtest\fR honors constraints as described
 in \fBTESTS\fR above.  Default value is false.
 .TP
-\fB-constraints \fIlist\fR
+\fB\-constraints \fIlist\fR
 Sets all the constraints in \fIlist\fR to true.  Also used in
-combination with [\fBconfigure -limitconstraints true\fR] to control an
+combination with \fBconfigure \-limitconstraints true\fR to control an
 alternative constraint mode as described in \fBTESTS\fR above.
 Default value is an empty list.
 .TP
-\fB-tmpdir \fIdirectory\fR
-Sets the temporary directory to be used by [\fBmakeFile\fR],
-[\fBmakeDirectory\fR], [\fBviewFile\fR], [\fBremoveFile\fR], 
-and [\fBremoveDirectory\fR] as the default directory where
+\fB\-tmpdir \fIdirectory\fR
+Sets the temporary directory to be used by \fBmakeFile\fR,
+\fBmakeDirectory\fR, \fBviewFile\fR, \fBremoveFile\fR,
+and \fBremoveDirectory\fR as the default directory where
 temporary files and directories created by test files should
-be created.  Default value is [\fBworkingDirectory\fR].
+be created.  Default value is \fBworkingDirectory\fR.
 .TP
-\fB-testdir \fIdirectory\fR
-Sets the directory searched by [\fBrunAllTests\fR] for test files
-and subdirectories.  Default value is [\fBworkingDirectory\fR].
+\fB\-testdir \fIdirectory\fR
+Sets the directory searched by \fBrunAllTests\fR for test files
+and subdirectories.  Default value is \fBworkingDirectory\fR.
 .TP
-\fB-file \fIpatternList\fR
-Sets the list of patterns used by [\fBrunAllTests\fR] to determine
-what test files to evaluate.  Default value is \fB*.test\fR.
+\fB\-file \fIpatternList\fR
+Sets the list of patterns used by \fBrunAllTests\fR to determine
+what test files to evaluate.  Default value is
+.QW \fB*.test\fR .
 .TP
-\fB-notfile \fIpatternList\fR
-Sets the list of patterns used by [\fBrunAllTests\fR] to determine
-what test files to skip.  Default value is \fBl.*.test\fR, so
-that any SCCS lock files are skipped.
+\fB\-notfile \fIpatternList\fR
+Sets the list of patterns used by \fBrunAllTests\fR to determine
+what test files to skip.  Default value is
+.QW \fBl.*.test\fR ,
+so that any SCCS lock files are skipped.
 .TP
-\fB-relateddir \fIpatternList\fR
-Sets the list of patterns used by [\fBrunAllTests\fR] to determine
+\fB\-relateddir \fIpatternList\fR
+Sets the list of patterns used by \fBrunAllTests\fR to determine
 what subdirectories to search for an \fBall.tcl\fR file.  Default
-value is \fB*\fR.
+value is
+.QW \fB*\fR .
 .TP
-\fB-asidefromdir \fIpatternList\fR
-Sets the list of patterns used by [\fBrunAllTests\fR] to determine
+\fB\-asidefromdir \fIpatternList\fR
+Sets the list of patterns used by \fBrunAllTests\fR to determine
 what subdirectories to skip when searching for an \fBall.tcl\fR file.
 Default value is an empty list.
 .TP
-\fB-match \fIpatternList\fR
-Set the list of patterns used by [\fBtest\fR] to determine whether
-a test should be run.  Default value is \fB*\fR.
+\fB\-match \fIpatternList\fR
+Set the list of patterns used by \fBtest\fR to determine whether
+a test should be run.  Default value is
+.QW \fB*\fR .
 .TP
-\fB-skip \fIpatternList\fR
-Set the list of patterns used by [\fBtest\fR] to determine whether
+\fB\-skip \fIpatternList\fR
+Set the list of patterns used by \fBtest\fR to determine whether
 a test should be skipped.  Default value is an empty list.
 .TP
-\fB-load \fIscript\fR
-Sets a script to be evaluated by [\fBloadTestedCommands\fR].
+\fB\-load \fIscript\fR
+Sets a script to be evaluated by \fBloadTestedCommands\fR.
 Default value is an empty script.
 .TP
-\fB-loadfile \fIfilename\fR
+\fB\-loadfile \fIfilename\fR
 Sets the filename from which to read a script to be evaluated
-by [\fBloadTestedCommands\fR].  This is an alternative to
-\fB-load\fR.  They cannot be used together.
+by \fBloadTestedCommands\fR.  This is an alternative to
+\fB\-load\fR.  They cannot be used together.
 .TP
-\fB-outfile \fIfilename\fR 
+\fB\-outfile \fIfilename\fR 
 Sets the file to which all output produced by tcltest should be
-written.  A file named \fIfilename\fR will be [\fBopen\fR]ed for writing,
-and the resulting channel will be set as the value of [\fBoutputChannel\fR].
+written.  A file named \fIfilename\fR will be \fBopen\fRed for writing,
+and the resulting channel will be set as the value of \fBoutputChannel\fR.
 .TP
-\fB-errfile \fIfilename\fR
+\fB\-errfile \fIfilename\fR
 Sets the file to which all error output produced by tcltest
-should be written.  A file named \fIfilename\fR will be [\fBopen\fR]ed
+should be written.  A file named \fIfilename\fR will be \fBopen\fRed
 for writing, and the resulting channel will be set as the value
-of [\fBerrorChannel\fR].
+of \fBerrorChannel\fR.
 .SH "CREATING TEST SUITES WITH TCLTEST"
 .PP
-The fundamental element of a test suite is the individual [\fBtest\fR]
+The fundamental element of a test suite is the individual \fBtest\fR
 command.  We begin with several examples.
 .IP [1]
 Test of a script that returns normally.
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBtest\fR example-1.0 {normal return} {
     format %s value
 } value
 .CE
+.RE
 .IP [2]
 Test of a script that requires context setup and cleanup.  Note the
 bracing and indenting style that avoids any need for line continuation.
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBtest\fR example-1.1 {test file existence} -setup {
     set file [makeFile {} test]
@@ -887,15 +918,21 @@ bracing and indenting style that avoids any need for line continuation.
     removeFile test
 } -result 1
 .CE
+.RE
 .IP [3]
 Test of a script that raises an error.
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBtest\fR example-1.2 {error return} -body {
     error message
 } -returnCodes error -result message
 .CE
+.RE
 .IP [4]
 Test with a constraint.
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBtest\fR example-1.3 {user owns created files} -constraints {
     unix
@@ -907,47 +944,57 @@ Test with a constraint.
     removeFile test
 } -result $::tcl_platform(user)
 .CE
+.RE
 .PP
-At the next higher layer of organization, several [\fBtest\fR] commands
+At the next higher layer of organization, several \fBtest\fR commands
 are gathered together into a single test file.  Test files should have
 names with the \fB.test\fR extension, because that is the default pattern
-used by [\fBrunAllTests\fR] to find test files.  It is a good rule of
+used by \fBrunAllTests\fR to find test files.  It is a good rule of
 thumb to have one test file for each source code file of your project.
 It is good practice to edit the test file and the source code file
 together, keeping tests synchronized with code changes.
 .PP 
-Most of the code in the test file should be the [\fBtest\fR] commands.
+Most of the code in the test file should be the \fBtest\fR commands.
 Use constraints to skip tests, rather than conditional evaluation
-of [\fBtest\fR].  That is, do this:
+of \fBtest\fR.
 .IP [5]
+Recommended system for writing conditional tests, using constraints to
+guard:
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBtestConstraint\fR X [expr $myRequirement]
 \fBtest\fR goodConditionalTest {} X {
     # body
 } result
 .CE
-and do not do this:
+.RE
 .IP [6]
+Discouraged system for writing conditional tests, using \fBif\fR to
+guard:
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 if $myRequirement {
     test badConditionalTest {} {
-	#body
+        #body
     } result
 }
 .CE
+.RE
 .PP
-Use the \fB-setup\fR and \fB-cleanup\fR options to establish and release
+Use the \fB\-setup\fR and \fB\-cleanup\fR options to establish and release
 all context requirements of the test body.  Do not make tests depend on
 prior tests in the file.  Those prior tests might be skipped.  If several
 consecutive tests require the same context, the appropriate setup
 and cleanup scripts may be stored in variable for passing to each tests
-\fB-setup\fR and \fB-cleanup\fR options.  This is a better solution than
-performing setup outside of [\fBtest\fR] commands, because the setup will
+\fB\-setup\fR and \fB\-cleanup\fR options.  This is a better solution than
+performing setup outside of \fBtest\fR commands, because the setup will
 only be done if necessary, and any errors during setup will be reported,
 and not cause the test file to abort.
 .PP
 A test file should be able to be combined with other test files and not
-interfere with them, even when [\fBconfigure -singleproc 1\fR] causes
+interfere with them, even when \fBconfigure \-singleproc 1\fR causes
 all files to be evaluated in a common interpreter.  A simple way to
 achieve this is to have your tests define all their commands and variables
 in a namespace that is deleted when the test file evaluation is complete.
@@ -955,14 +1002,16 @@ A good namespace to use is a child namespace \fBtest\fR of the namespace
 of the module you are testing.
 .PP
 A test file should also be able to be evaluated directly as a script,
-not depending on being called by a master [\fBrunAllTests\fR].  This
+not depending on being called by a master \fBrunAllTests\fR.  This
 means that each test file should process command line arguments to give
 the tester all the configuration control that \fBtcltest\fR provides.
 .PP
-After all [\fBtest\fR]s in a test file, the command [\fBcleanupTests\fR]
+After all \fBtest\fRs in a test file, the command \fBcleanupTests\fR
 should be called.
 .IP [7]
 Here is a sketch of a sample test file illustrating those points:
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 package require tcltest 2.2
 eval \fB::tcltest::configure\fR $argv
@@ -973,36 +1022,40 @@ namespace eval ::example::test {
     variable SETUP {#common setup code}
     variable CLEANUP {#common cleanup code}
     \fBtest\fR example-1 {} -setup $SETUP -body {
-	# First test
+        # First test
     } -cleanup $CLEANUP -result {...}
     \fBtest\fR example-2 {} -constraints X -setup $SETUP -body {
-	# Second test; constrained
+        # Second test; constrained
     } -cleanup $CLEANUP -result {...}
     \fBtest\fR example-3 {} {
-	# Third test; no context required
+        # Third test; no context required
     } {...}
     \fBcleanupTests\fR
 }
 namespace delete ::example::test
 .CE
+.RE
 .PP
 The next level of organization is a full test suite, made up of several
 test files.  One script is used to control the entire suite.  The
-basic function of this script is to call [\fBrunAllTests\fR] after
+basic function of this script is to call \fBrunAllTests\fR after
 doing any necessary setup.  This script is usually named \fBall.tcl\fR
-because that's the default name used by [\fBrunAllTests\fR] when combining
+because that is the default name used by \fBrunAllTests\fR when combining
 multiple test suites into one testing run.
 .IP [8]
 Here is a sketch of a sample test suite master script:
+.RS
+.PP
 .CS
 package require Tcl 8.4
 package require tcltest 2.2
 package require example
-\fB::tcltest::configure\fR -testdir \
+\fB::tcltest::configure\fR -testdir \e
         [file dirname [file normalize [info script]]]
 eval \fB::tcltest::configure\fR $argv
 \fB::tcltest::runAllTests\fR
 .CE
+.RE
 .SH COMPATIBILITY
 .PP
 A number of commands and variables in the \fB::tcltest\fR namespace
@@ -1012,21 +1065,24 @@ here.  They are no longer part of the supported public interface of
 to continue to support existing test suites written to the older
 interface specifications, many of those deprecated commands and
 variables still work as before.  For example, in many circumstances,
-[\fBconfigure\fR] will be automatically called shortly after
-[\fBpackage require tcltest 2.1\fR] succeeds with arguments
+\fBconfigure\fR will be automatically called shortly after
+\fBpackage require tcltest 2.1\fR succeeds with arguments
 from the variable \fB::argv\fR.  This is to support test suites
 that depend on the old behavior that \fBtcltest\fR was automatically
 configured from command line arguments.  New test files should not
 depend on this, but should explicitly include
+.PP
 .CS
 eval \fB::tcltest::configure\fR $::argv
 .CE
+.PP
 to establish a configuration from command line arguments.
 .SH "KNOWN ISSUES"
-There are two known issues related to nested evaluations of [\fBtest\fR].  
+There are two known issues related to nested evaluations of \fBtest\fR.
 The first issue relates to the stack level in which test scripts are
 executed.  Tests nested within other tests may be executed at the same
 stack level as the outermost test.  For example, in the following code: 
+.PP
 .CS
 \fBtest\fR level-1.1 {level 1} {
     -body {
@@ -1035,27 +1091,38 @@ stack level as the outermost test.  For example, in the following code:
     }
 }
 .CE
+.PP
 any script executed in level-2.1 may be executed at the same stack
 level as the script defined for level-1.1.  
 .PP
-In addition, while two [\fBtest\fR]s have been run, results will only
-be reported by [\fBcleanupTests\fR] for tests at the same level as
+In addition, while two \fBtest\fRs have been run, results will only
+be reported by \fBcleanupTests\fR for tests at the same level as
 test level-1.1.  However, test results for all tests run prior to
 level-1.1 will be available when test level-2.1 runs.  What this
 means is that if you try to access the test results for test level-2.1,
-it will may say that 'm' tests have run, 'n' tests have
-been skipped, 'o' tests have passed and 'p' tests have failed,
-where 'm', 'n', 'o', and 'p' refer to tests that were run at the
-same test level as test level-1.1. 
+it will may say that
+.QW m
+tests have run,
+.QW n
+tests have been skipped,
+.QW o
+tests have passed and
+.QW p
+tests have failed, where
+.QW m ,
+.QW n ,
+.QW o ,
+and
+.QW p
+refer to tests that were run at the same test level as test level-1.1.
 .PP
 Implementation of output and error comparison in the test command
 depends on usage of ::puts in your application code.  Output is
 intercepted by redefining the ::puts command while the defined test
 script is being run.  Errors thrown by C procedures or printed
 directly from C applications will not be caught by the test command.
-Therefore, usage of the \fB-output\fR and \fB-errorOutput\fR
-options to [\fBtest\fR] is useful only for pure Tcl applications
-that use [\fB::puts\fR] to produce output. 
-
+Therefore, usage of the \fB\-output\fR and \fB\-errorOutput\fR
+options to \fBtest\fR is useful only for pure Tcl applications
+that use \fB::puts\fR to produce output. 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 test, test harness, test suite
diff --git a/doc/tclvars.n b/doc/tclvars.n
index d097a92..885de34 100644
--- a/doc/tclvars.n
+++ b/doc/tclvars.n
@@ -12,7 +12,6 @@
 .SH NAME
 tclvars \- Variables used by Tcl
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 The following global variables are created and managed automatically
@@ -25,7 +24,7 @@ whose elements are the environment variables for the process.
 Reading an element will return the value of the corresponding
 environment variable.
 Setting an element of the array will modify the corresponding
-environment variable or create a new one if it doesn't already
+environment variable or create a new one if it does not already
 exist.
 Unsetting an element of \fBenv\fR will remove the corresponding
 environment variable.
@@ -35,90 +34,74 @@ If the entire \fBenv\fR array is unset then Tcl will stop
 monitoring \fBenv\fR accesses and will not update environment
 variables.
 .RS
-.VS 8.0 
+.PP
 Under Windows, the environment variables PATH and COMSPEC in any
 capitalization are converted automatically to upper case.  For instance, the
-PATH variable could be exported by the operating system as ``path'',
-``Path'', ``PaTh'', etc., causing otherwise simple Tcl code to have to
+PATH variable could be exported by the operating system as
+.QW path ,
+.QW Path ,
+.QW PaTh ,
+etc., causing otherwise simple Tcl code to have to
 support many special cases.  All other environment variables inherited by
 Tcl are left unmodified.  Setting an env array variable to blank is the
 same as unsetting it as this is the behavior of the underlying Windows OS.
 It should be noted that relying on an existing and empty environment variable
-won't work on windows and is discouraged for cross-platform usage.
-.VE
-.RE
-.RS
-On the Macintosh, the environment variable is constructed by Tcl as no
-global environment variable exists.  The environment variables that
-are created for Tcl include:
-.TP
-\fBLOGIN\fR
-This holds the Chooser name of the Macintosh.
-.TP
-\fBUSER\fR
-This also holds the Chooser name of the Macintosh.
-.TP
-\fBSYS_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the system directory.
-.TP
-\fBAPPLE_M_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the Apple Menu directory.
-.TP
-\fBCP_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the control panels directory.
-.TP
-\fBDESK_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the desk top directory.
-.TP
-\fBEXT_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the system extensions directory.
-.TP
-\fBPREF_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the preferences directory.
-.TP
-\fBPRINT_MON_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the print monitor directory.
-.TP
-\fBSHARED_TRASH_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the network trash directory.
-.TP
-\fBTRASH_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the trash directory.
-.TP
-\fBSTART_UP_FOLDER\fR
-The path to the start up directory.
-.TP
-\fBHOME\fR
-The path to the application's default directory.
+will not work on Windows and is discouraged for cross-platform usage.
 .PP
-You can also create your own environment variables for the Macintosh.
-A file named  \fITcl Environment Variables\fR may be placed in the
-preferences folder in the Mac system folder.  Each line of this file
-should be of the form \fIVAR_NAME=var_data\fR.
+The following elements of \fBenv\fR are special to Tcl:
+.TP
+\fBenv(HOME)\fR
+.
+This environment variable, if set, gives the location of the directory
+considered to be the current user's home directory, and to which a
+call of \fBcd\fR without arguments or with just
+.QW ~
+as an argument will change into. Most platforms set this correctly by
+default; it does not normally need to be set by user code.
+.TP
+\fBenv(TCL_LIBRARY)\fR
+.
+If set, then it specifies the location of the directory containing
+library scripts (the value of this variable will be
+assigned to the \fBtcl_library\fR variable and therefore returned by
+the command \fBinfo library\fR).  If this variable is not set then
+a default value is used.
+.RS
 .PP
-The last alternative is to place environment variables in a 'STR#' 
-resource named \fITcl Environment Variables\fR of the application.  This
-is considered a little more ``Mac like'' than a Unix style Environment
-Variable file.  Each entry in the 'STR#' resource has the same format
-as above.  The source code file \fItclMacEnv.c\fR contains the
-implementation of the env mechanisms.  This file contains many
-#define's that allow customization of the env mechanisms to fit your
-applications needs.
+Note that this environment variable should \fInot\fR normally be set.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBenv(TCLLIBPATH)\fR
+.
+If set, then it must contain a valid Tcl list giving directories to
+search during auto-load operations.  Directories must be specified in 
+Tcl format, using
+.QW /
+as the path separator, regardless of platform.
+This variable is only used when initializing the \fBauto_path\fR variable.
+.TP
+\fBenv(TCL_INTERP_DEBUG_FRAME)\fR
+.
+If existing, it has the same effect as running \fBinterp debug {} -frame 1\fR
+as the very first command of each new Tcl interpreter.
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBerrorCode\fR
-After an error has occurred, this variable will be set to hold
-a list value representing additional information about the error
+This variable holds the value of the \fB\-errorcode\fR return option
+set by the most recent error that occurred in this interpreter.
+This list value represents additional information about the error
 in a form that is easy to process with programs.
 The first element of the list identifies a general class of
 errors, and determines the format of the rest of the list.
-The following formats for \fBerrorCode\fR are used by the
-Tcl core; individual applications may define additional formats.
+The following formats for \fB\-errorcode\fR return options
+are used by the Tcl core; individual applications may define
+additional formats.
 .RS
 .TP
 \fBARITH\fI code msg\fR
+.
 This format is used when an arithmetic error occurs (e.g. an attempt
-to divide by zero in the \fBexpr\fR command).
+to divide zero by zero in the \fBexpr\fR command).
 \fICode\fR identifies the precise error and \fImsg\fR provides a
 human-readable description of the error.  \fICode\fR will be either
 DIVZERO (for an attempt to divide by zero),
@@ -126,62 +109,77 @@ DOMAIN (if an argument is outside the domain of a function, such as acos(\-3)),
 IOVERFLOW (for integer overflow),
 OVERFLOW (for a floating-point overflow),
 or UNKNOWN (if the cause of the error cannot be determined).
+.RS
+.PP
+Detection of these errors depends in part on the underlying hardware
+and system libraries.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBCHILDKILLED\fI pid sigName msg\fR
 This format is used when a child process has been killed because of
-a signal.  The second element of \fBerrorCode\fR will be the
-process's identifier (in decimal).
-The third element will be the symbolic name of the signal that caused
+a signal.  The \fIpid\fR element will be the process's identifier (in decimal).
+The \fIsigName\fR element will be the symbolic name of the signal that caused
 the process to terminate; it will be one of the names from the
 include file signal.h, such as \fBSIGPIPE\fR.
-The fourth element will be a short human-readable message
-describing the signal, such as ``write on pipe with no readers''
+The \fImsg\fR element will be a short human-readable message
+describing the signal, such as
+.QW "write on pipe with no readers"
 for \fBSIGPIPE\fR.
 .TP
 \fBCHILDSTATUS\fI pid code\fR
 This format is used when a child process has exited with a non-zero
-exit status.  The second element of \fBerrorCode\fR will be the
-process's identifier (in decimal) and the third element will be the exit
+exit status.  The \fIpid\fR element will be the
+process's identifier (in decimal) and the \fIcode\fR element will be the exit
 code returned by the process (also in decimal).
 .TP
 \fBCHILDSUSP\fI pid sigName msg\fR
 This format is used when a child process has been suspended because
 of a signal.
-The second element of \fBerrorCode\fR will be the process's identifier,
-in decimal.
-The third element will be the symbolic name of the signal that caused
+The \fIpid\fR element will be the process's identifier, in decimal.
+The \fIsigName\fR element will be the symbolic name of the signal that caused
 the process to suspend; this will be one of the names from the
 include file signal.h, such as \fBSIGTTIN\fR.
-The fourth element will be a short human-readable message
-describing the signal, such as ``background tty read''
+The \fImsg\fR element will be a short human-readable message
+describing the signal, such as
+.QW "background tty read"
 for \fBSIGTTIN\fR.
 .TP
 \fBNONE\fR
 This format is used for errors where no additional information is
 available for an error besides the message returned with the
-error.  In these cases \fBerrorCode\fR will consist of a list
-containing a single element whose contents are \fBNONE\fR.
+error.  In these cases the \fB\-errorcode\fR return option
+will consist of a list containing a single element whose
+contents are \fBNONE\fR.
 .TP
 \fBPOSIX \fIerrName msg\fR
-If the first element of \fBerrorCode\fR is \fBPOSIX\fR, then
+If the first element is \fBPOSIX\fR, then
 the error occurred during a POSIX kernel call.
-The second element of the list will contain the symbolic name
+The \fIerrName\fR element will contain the symbolic name
 of the error that occurred, such as \fBENOENT\fR; this will
 be one of the values defined in the include file errno.h.
-The third element of the list will be a human-readable
+The \fImsg\fR element will be a human-readable
 message corresponding to \fIerrName\fR, such as
-``no such file or directory'' for the \fBENOENT\fR case.
+.QW "no such file or directory"
+for the \fBENOENT\fR case.
 .PP
-To set \fBerrorCode\fR, applications should use library
-procedures such as \fBTcl_SetErrorCode\fR and \fBTcl_PosixError\fR,
-or they may invoke the \fBerror\fR command.
-If one of these methods hasn't been used, then the Tcl
-interpreter will reset the variable to \fBNONE\fR after
+To set the \fB\-errorcode\fR return option, applications should use library
+procedures such as \fBTcl_SetObjErrorCode\fR, \fBTcl_SetReturnOptions\fR,
+and \fBTcl_PosixError\fR, or they may invoke the \fB\-errorcode\fR
+option of the \fBreturn\fR command.
+If none of these methods for setting the error code has been used,
+the Tcl interpreter will reset the variable to \fBNONE\fR after
 the next error.
 .RE
+.\" .TP
+.\" \fBTCL\fR ...
+.\" .
+.\" Indicates some sort of problem generated in relation to Tcl itself,
+.\" e.g. a failure to look up a channel or variable.
 .TP
 \fBerrorInfo\fR
-After an error has occurred, this string will contain one or more lines
+This variable holds the value of the \fB\-errorinfo\fR return option
+set by the most recent error that occurred in this interpreter.
+This string value will contain one or more lines
 identifying the Tcl commands and procedures that were being executed
 when the most recent error occurred.
 Its contents take the form of a stack trace showing the various
@@ -203,19 +201,19 @@ is created by searching several different directories until one is
 found that contains an appropriate Tcl startup script.
 If the \fBTCL_LIBRARY\fR environment variable exists, then
 the directory it names is checked first.
-If \fBTCL_LIBRARY\fR isn't set or doesn't refer to an appropriate
+If \fBTCL_LIBRARY\fR is not set or doesn't refer to an appropriate
 directory, then Tcl checks several other directories based on a
 compiled-in default location, the location of the binary containing
 the application, and the current working directory.
 .TP
 \fBtcl_patchLevel\fR
+.
 When an interpreter is created Tcl initializes this variable to
 hold a string giving the current patch level for Tcl, such as
-\fB7.3p2\fR for Tcl 7.3 with the first two official patches, or
-\fB7.4b4\fR for the fourth beta release of Tcl 7.4.
+\fB8.4.16\fR for Tcl 8.4 with the first sixteen official patches, or
+\fB8.5b3\fR for the third beta release of Tcl 8.5.
 The value of this variable is returned by the \fBinfo patchlevel\fR
 command.
-.VS 8.0 br
 .TP
 \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR
 This variable holds a list of directories indicating where packages are
@@ -228,29 +226,26 @@ subdirectory of one of the entries in \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR. The directories
 in \fB$tcl_pkgPath\fR are included by default in the \fBauto_path\fR
 variable, so they and their immediate subdirectories are automatically
 searched for packages during \fBpackage require\fR commands.  Note:
-\fBtcl_pkgPath\fR it not intended to be modified by the application.  Its
+\fBtcl_pkgPath\fR is not intended to be modified by the application.  Its
 value is added to \fBauto_path\fR at startup; changes to \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR
 are not reflected in \fBauto_path\fR.  If you want Tcl to search additional
 directories for packages you should add the names of those directories to
 \fBauto_path\fR, not \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR.
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBtcl_platform\fR
 This is an associative array whose elements contain information about
 the platform on which the application is running, such as the name of
 the operating system, its current release number, and the machine's
 instruction set.  The elements listed below will always
-be defined, but they may have empty strings as values if Tcl couldn't
+be defined, but they may have empty strings as values if Tcl could not
 retrieve any relevant information.  In addition, extensions
 and applications may add additional values to the array.  The
 predefined elements are:
 .RS
-.VS
 .TP
 \fBbyteOrder\fR
 The native byte order of this machine: either \fBlittleEndian\fR or
 \fBbigEndian\fR. 
-.VE
 .TP
 \fBdebug\fR
 If this variable exists, then the interpreter was compiled with and linked
@@ -266,7 +261,7 @@ is the value returned by \fBuname -m\fR.
 .TP
 \fBos\fR 
 The name of the operating system running on this machine,
-such as \fBWindows 95\fR, \fBWindows NT\fR, \fBMacOS\fR, or \fBSunOS\fR.
+such as \fBWindows 95\fR, \fBWindows NT\fR, or \fBSunOS\fR.
 On UNIX machines, this is the value returned by \fBuname -s\fR.
 On Windows 95 and Windows 98, the value returned will be \fBWindows
 95\fR to provide better backwards compatibility to Windows 95; to
@@ -279,7 +274,7 @@ Windows 95, the version will be 4.0; on Windows 98, the version will
 be 4.10.
 .TP
 \fBplatform\fR
-Either \fBwindows\fR, \fBmacintosh\fR, or \fBunix\fR.  This identifies the
+Either \fBwindows\fR, or \fBunix\fR.  This identifies the
 general operating environment of the machine.
 .TP
 \fBthreaded\fR
@@ -290,33 +285,71 @@ was compiled with threads enabled.
 This identifies the
 current user based on the login information available on the platform.
 This comes from the USER or LOGNAME environment variable on Unix,
-and the value from GetUserName on Windows and Macintosh.
+and the value from GetUserName on Windows.
 .TP
 \fBwordSize\fR
-.VS 8.4
 This gives the size of the native-machine word in bytes (strictly, it
 is same as the result of evaluating \fIsizeof(long)\fR in C.)
-.VE 8.4
+.TP
+\fBpointerSize\fR
+This gives the size of the native-machine pointer in bytes (strictly, it
+is same as the result of evaluating \fIsizeof(void*)\fR in C.)
 .RE
 .TP
 \fBtcl_precision\fR
-.VS
+.
 This variable controls the number of digits to generate
 when converting floating-point values to strings.  It defaults
-to 12.
-17 digits is ``perfect'' for IEEE floating-point in that it allows
+to 0.  \fIApplications should not change this value;\fR it is
+provided for compatibility with legacy code.
+.PP
+.RS
+The default value of 0 is special, meaning that Tcl should
+convert numbers using as few digits as possible while still
+distinguishing any floating point number from its nearest
+neighbours.  It differs from using an arbitrarily high value
+for \fItcl_precision\fR in that an inexact number like \fI1.4\fR
+will convert as \fI1.4\fR rather than \fI1.3999999999999999\fR
+even though the latter is nearer to the exact value of the
+binary number.
+.RE
+.PP
+.RS
+If \fBtcl_precision\fR is not zero, then when Tcl converts a floating
+point number, it creates a decimal representation of at most 
+\fBtcl_precision\fR significant digits; the result may be shorter if
+the shorter result represents the original number exactly. If no
+result of at most \fBtcl_precision\fR digits is an exact representation
+of the original number, the one that is closest to the original
+number is chosen.
+If the original number lies precisely between two equally accurate
+decimal representations, then the one with an even value for the least
+significant digit is chosen; for instance, if \fBtcl_precision\fR is 3, then
+0.3125 will convert to 0.312, not 0.313, while 0.6875 will convert to
+0.688, not 0.687. Any string of trailing zeroes that remains is trimmed.
+.RE
+.PP
+.RS
+a \fBtcl_precision\fR value of 17 digits is
+.QW perfect
+for IEEE floating-point in that it allows
 double-precision values to be converted to strings and back to
-binary with no loss of information.  However, using 17 digits prevents
-any rounding, which produces longer, less intuitive results.  For example,
-\fBexpr 1.4\fR returns 1.3999999999999999 with \fBtcl_precision\fR
-set to 17, vs. 1.4 if \fBtcl_precision\fR is 12.
+binary with no loss of information. For this reason, you will often
+see it as a value in legacy code that must run on Tcl versions before
+8.5. It is no longer recommended; as noted above, a zero value is the
+preferred method.
+.RE
+.PP
 .RS
-All interpreters in a process share a single \fBtcl_precision\fR value:
+All interpreters in a thread share a single \fBtcl_precision\fR value:
 changing it in one interpreter will affect all other interpreters as
-well.  However, safe interpreters are not allowed to modify the
+well.  Safe interpreters are not allowed to modify the
 variable.
 .RE
-.VE
+.PP
+.RS
+Valid values for \fBtcl_precision\fR range from 0 to 17.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBtcl_rcFileName\fR
 This variable is used during initialization to indicate the name of a
@@ -326,15 +359,6 @@ of this file and \fBsource\fR it if it exists.  For example, for \fBwish\fR
 the variable is set to \fB~/.wishrc\fR for Unix and \fB~/wishrc.tcl\fR
 for Windows.
 .TP
-\fBtcl_rcRsrcName\fR
-This variable is only used on Macintosh systems.  The variable is used
-during initialization to indicate the name of a user-specific
-\fBTEXT\fR resource located in the application or extension resource
-forks.  If it is set by application-specific initialization, then the
-Tcl startup code will check for the existence of this resource and
-\fBsource\fR it if it exists.  For example, the Macintosh \fBwish\fR
-application has the variable is set to \fBtclshrc\fR.
-.TP
 \fBtcl_traceCompile\fR
 The value of this variable can be set to control
 how much tracing information
@@ -346,11 +370,11 @@ Setting it to 2 generates a detailed listing in stdout of the
 bytecode instructions emitted during every compilation.
 This variable is useful in
 tracking down suspected problems with the Tcl compiler.
-It is also occasionally useful when converting
-existing code to use Tcl8.0.
 .PP
+.RS
 This variable and functionality only exist if
 \fBTCL_COMPILE_DEBUG\fR was defined during Tcl's compilation.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBtcl_traceExec\fR
 The value of this variable can be set to control
@@ -371,26 +395,30 @@ of bytecode instructions are not shown.
 Setting this variable is useful in
 tracking down suspected problems with the bytecode compiler
 and interpreter.
-It is also occasionally useful when converting
-code to use Tcl8.0.
 .PP
+.RS
 This variable and functionality only exist if
 \fBTCL_COMPILE_DEBUG\fR was defined during Tcl's compilation.
+.RE
 .TP
 \fBtcl_wordchars\fR
 The value of this variable is a regular expression that can be set to
-control what are considered ``word'' characters, for instances like
+control what are considered
+.QW word
+characters, for instances like
 selecting a word by double-clicking in text in Tk.  It is platform
-dependent.  On Windows, it defaults to \fB\\S\fR, meaning anything
-but a Unicode space character.  Otherwise it defaults to \fB\\w\fR,
+dependent.  On Windows, it defaults to \fB\eS\fR, meaning anything
+but a Unicode space character.  Otherwise it defaults to \fB\ew\fR,
 which is any Unicode word character (number, letter, or underscore).
 .TP
 \fBtcl_nonwordchars\fR
 The value of this variable is a regular expression that can be set to
-control what are considered ``non-word'' characters, for instances like
+control what are considered
+.QW non-word
+characters, for instances like
 selecting a word by double-clicking in text in Tk.  It is platform
-dependent.  On Windows, it defaults to \fB\\s\fR, meaning any Unicode space
-character.  Otherwise it defaults to \fB\\W\fR, which is anything but a
+dependent.  On Windows, it defaults to \fB\es\fR, meaning any Unicode space
+character.  Otherwise it defaults to \fB\eW\fR, which is anything but a
 Unicode word character (number, letter, or underscore).
 .TP
 \fBtcl_version\fR
@@ -422,15 +450,13 @@ Contains 1 if \fBtclsh\fR or \fBwish\fR is running interactively (no
 script was specified and standard input is a terminal-like device), 0
 otherwise.
 .PP
-The \fBwish\fR executably additionally specifies the following global
+The \fBwish\fR executable additionally specifies the following global
 variable:
 .TP 6
 \fBgeometry\fR
 If set, contains the user-supplied geometry specification to use for
 the main Tk window.
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 eval(n), tclsh(1), wish(1)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 arithmetic, bytecode, compiler, error, environment, POSIX, precision, subprocess, variables
diff --git a/doc/tell.n b/doc/tell.n
index 559f709..282cae5 100644
--- a/doc/tell.n
+++ b/doc/tell.n
@@ -17,21 +17,17 @@ tell \- Return current access position for an open channel
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-.VS 8.1
 Returns an integer string giving the current access position in
 \fIchannelId\fR.  This value returned is a byte offset that can be passed to
 \fBseek\fR in order to set the channel to a particular position.  Note
 that this value is in terms of bytes, not characters like \fBread\fR.
-.VE 8.1
 The value returned is -1 for channels that do not support
 seeking.
 .PP
-.VS
 \fIChannelId\fR must be an identifier for an open channel such as a
 Tcl standard channel (\fBstdin\fR, \fBstdout\fR, or \fBstderr\fR),
 the return value from an invocation of \fBopen\fR or \fBsocket\fR, or
 the result of a channel creation command provided by a Tcl extension.
-.VE
 .SH EXAMPLE
 Read a line from a file channel only if it starts with \fBfoobar\fR:
 .CS
diff --git a/doc/time.n b/doc/time.n
index 38ae49a..bdd0786 100644
--- a/doc/time.n
+++ b/doc/time.n
@@ -18,7 +18,7 @@ time \- Time the execution of a script
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command will call the Tcl interpreter \fIcount\fR
-times to evaluate \fIscript\fR (or once if \fIcount\fR isn't
+times to evaluate \fIscript\fR (or once if \fIcount\fR is not
 specified).  It will then return a string of the form
 .CS
 \fB503 microseconds per iteration\fR
diff --git a/doc/tm.n b/doc/tm.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..aef06dd
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/tm.n
@@ -0,0 +1,293 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2004-2010 Andreas Kupries <andreas_kupries@users.sourceforge.net>
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH tm n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+tm \- Facilities for locating and loading of Tcl Modules
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+.nf
+\fB::tcl::tm::path add \fR?\fIpath\fR...?
+\fB::tcl::tm::path remove \fR?\fIpath\fR...?
+\fB::tcl::tm::path list\fR
+\fB::tcl::tm::roots \fR?\fIpath\fR...?
+.fi
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+This document describes the facilities for locating and loading Tcl
+Modules (see \fBMODULE DEFINITION\fR for the definition of a Tcl Module).
+The following commands are supported:
+.TP
+\fB::tcl::tm::path add \fR?\fIpath\fR...?
+.
+The paths are added at the head to the list of module paths, in order
+of appearance. This means that the last argument ends up as the new
+head of the list.
+.RS
+.PP
+The command enforces the restriction that no path may be an ancestor
+directory of any other path on the list. If any of the new paths
+violates this restriction an error will be raised, before any of the
+paths have been added. In other words, if only one path argument
+violates the restriction then none will be added.
+.PP
+If a path is already present as is, no error will be raised and no
+action will be taken.
+.PP
+Paths are searched later in the order of their appearance in the
+list. As they are added to the front of the list they are searched in
+reverse order of addition. In other words, the paths added last are
+looked at first.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fB::tcl::tm::path remove \fR?\fIpath\fR...?
+.
+Removes the paths from the list of module paths. The command silently
+ignores all paths which are not on the list.
+.TP
+\fB::tcl::tm::path list\fR
+.
+Returns a list containing all registered module paths, in the order
+that they are searched for modules.
+.TP
+\fB::tcl::tm::roots \fR?\fIpath\fR...?
+.
+Similar to \fBpath add\fR, and layered on top of it. This command
+takes a list of paths, extends each with
+.QW "\fBtcl\fIX\fB/site-tcl\fR" ,
+and
+.QW "\fBtcl\fIX\fB/\fIX\fB.\fIy\fR" ,
+for major version \fIX\fR of the
+Tcl interpreter and minor version \fIy\fR less than or equal to the
+minor version of the interpreter, and adds the resulting set of paths
+to the list of paths to search.
+.RS
+.PP
+This command is used internally by the system to set up the
+system-specific default paths.
+.PP
+The command has been exposed to allow a build system to define
+additional root paths beyond those described by this document.
+.RE
+.SH "MODULE DEFINITION"
+A Tcl Module is a Tcl Package contained in a single file, and no other
+files required by it. This file has to be \fBsource\fRable. In other
+words, a Tcl Module is always imported via:
+.CS
+source module_file
+.CE
+.PP
+The \fBload\fR command is not directly used. This restriction is not
+an actual limitation, as some may believe.
+Ever since 8.4 the Tcl \fBsource\fR command reads only until the first
+^Z character. This allows us to combine an arbitrary Tcl script with
+arbitrary binary data into one file, where the script processes the
+attached data in any it chooses to fully import and activate the
+package.
+.PP
+The name of a module file has to match the regular expression:
+.CS
+([_[:alpha:]][:_[:alnum:]]*)-([[:digit:]].*)\e.tm
+.CE
+.PP
+The first capturing parentheses provides the name of the package, the
+second clause its version. In addition to matching the pattern, the
+extracted version number must not raise an error when used in the
+command:
+.CS
+package vcompare $version 0
+.CE
+.PP
+.SH "FINDING MODULES"
+The directory tree for storing Tcl modules is separate from other
+parts of the filesystem and independent of \fBauto_path\fR.
+.PP
+Tcl Modules are searched for in all directories listed in the result
+of the command \fB::tcl::tm::path list\fR.
+This is called the \fIModule path\fR. Neither the \fBauto_path\fR nor
+the \fBtcl_pkgPath\fR variables are used.
+All directories on the module path have to obey one restriction:
+.RS
+.PP
+For any two directories, neither is an ancestor directory of the
+other.
+.RE
+.PP
+This is required to avoid ambiguities in package naming. If for
+example the two directories
+.QW "\fIfoo/\fR"
+and
+.QW "\fIfoo/cool\fR"
+were on
+the path a package named \fBcool::ice\fR could be found via the
+names \fBcool::ice\fR or \fBice\fR, the latter potentially
+obscuring a package named \fBice\fR, unqualified.
+.PP
+Before the search is started, the name of the requested package is
+translated into a partial path, using the following algorithm:
+.RS
+.PP
+All occurrences of
+.QW "\fB::\fR"
+in the package name are replaced by
+the appropriate directory separator character for the platform we are
+on. On Unix, for example, this is
+.QW "\fB/\fR" .
+.RE
+.PP
+Example:
+.RS
+.PP
+The requested package is \fBencoding::base64\fR. The generated
+partial path is
+.QW "\fIencoding/base64\fR" .
+.RE
+.PP
+After this translation the package is looked for in all module paths,
+by combining them one-by-one, first to last with the partial path to
+form a complete search pattern. Note that the search algorithm rejects
+all files where the filename does not match the regular expression
+given in the section \fBMODULE DEFINITION\fR. For the remaining
+files \fIprovide scripts\fR are generated and added to the package
+ifneeded database.
+.PP
+The algorithm falls back to the previous unknown handler when none of
+the found module files satisfy the request. If the request was
+satisfied the fall-back is ignored.
+.PP
+Note that packages in module form have \fIno\fR control over the
+\fIindex\fR and \fIprovide script\fRs entered into the package
+database for them.
+For a module file \fBMF\fR the \fIindex script\fR is always:
+.CS
+package ifneeded \fBPNAME PVERSION\fR [list source \fBMF\fR]
+.CE
+and the \fIprovide script\fR embedded in the above is:
+.CS
+source \fBMF\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+Both package name \fBPNAME\fR and package version \fBPVERSION\fR are
+extracted from the filename \fBMF\fR according to the definition
+below:
+.CS
+\fBMF\fR = /module_path/\fBPNAME\(fm\fR-\fBPVERSION\fR.tm
+.CE
+.PP
+Where \fBPNAME\(fm\fR is the partial path of the module as defined in
+section \fBFINDING MODULES\fR, and translated into \fBPNAME\fR by
+changing all directory separators to
+.QW "\fB::\fR" ,
+and \fBmodule_path\fR is the path (from the list of paths to search)
+that we found the module file under.
+.PP
+Note also that we are here creating a connection between package names
+and paths. Tcl is case-sensitive when it comes to comparing package
+names, but there are filesystems which are not, like NTFS. Luckily
+these filesystems do store the case of the name, despite not using the
+information when comparing.
+.PP
+Given the above we allow the names for packages in Tcl modules to have
+mixed-case, but also require that there are no collisions when
+comparing names in a case-insensitive manner. In other words, if a
+package \fBFoo\fR is deployed in the form of a Tcl Module,
+packages like \fBfoo\fR, \fBfOo\fR, etc. are not allowed
+anymore.
+.SH "DEFAULT PATHS"
+The default list of paths on the module path is computed by a
+\fBtclsh\fR as follows, where \fIX\fR is the major version of the Tcl
+interpreter and \fIy\fR is less than or equal to the minor version of
+the Tcl interpreter.
+.PP
+All the default paths are added to the module path, even those paths
+which do not exist. Non-existent paths are filtered out during actual
+searches. This enables a user to create one of the paths searched when
+needed and all running applications will automatically pick up any
+modules placed in them.
+.PP
+The paths are added in the order as they are listed below, and for
+lists of paths defined by an environment variable in the order they
+are found in the variable.
+.SS "SYSTEM SPECIFIC PATHS"
+.TP
+\fBfile normalize [info library]/../tcl\fIX\fB/\fIX\fB.\fIy\fR
+.
+In other words, the interpreter will look into a directory specified
+by its major version and whose minor versions are less than or equal
+to the minor version of the interpreter.
+.RS
+.PP
+For example for Tcl 8.4 the paths searched are:
+.CS
+\fB[info library]/../tcl8/8.4\fR
+\fB[info library]/../tcl8/8.3\fR
+\fB[info library]/../tcl8/8.2\fR
+\fB[info library]/../tcl8/8.1\fR
+\fB[info library]/../tcl8/8.0\fR
+.CE
+.PP
+This definition assumes that a package defined for Tcl \fIX\fB.\fIy\fR
+can also be used by all interpreters which have the same major number
+\fIX\fR and a minor number greater than \fIy\fR.
+.RE
+.TP
+\fBfile normalize EXEC/tcl\fIX\fB/\fIX\fB.\fIy\fR
+.
+Where \fBEXEC\fR is \fBfile normalize [info nameofexecutable]/../lib\fR
+or \fBfile normalize [::tcl::pkgconfig get libdir,runtime]\fR
+.RS
+.PP
+This sets of paths is handled equivalently to the set coming before,
+except that it is anchored in \fBEXEC_PREFIX\fR.
+For a build with \fBPREFIX\fR = \fBEXEC_PREFIX\fR the two sets are
+identical.
+.RE
+.SS "SITE SPECIFIC PATHS"
+.TP
+\fBfile normalize [info library]/../tcl\fIX\fB/site-tcl\fR
+.
+Note that this is always a single entry because \fIX\fR is always a
+specific value (the current major version of Tcl).
+.SS "USER SPECIFIC PATHS"
+.TP
+\fB$::env(TCL\fIX\fB_\fIy\fB_TM_PATH)\fR
+.
+A list of paths, separated by either \fB:\fR (Unix) or \fB;\fR
+(Windows). This is user and site specific as this environment variable
+can be set not only by the user's profile, but by system configuration
+scripts as well.
+.TP
+\fB$::env(TCL\fIX\fB.\fIy\fB_TM_PATH)\fR
+.
+Same meaning and content as the previous variable. However the use of
+dot '.' to separate major and minor version number makes this name
+less to non-portable and its use is discouraged. Support of this
+variable has been kept only for backward compatibility with the
+original specification, i.e. TIP 189.
+.PP
+These paths are seen and therefore shared by all Tcl shells in the
+\fB$::env(PATH)\fR of the user.
+.PP
+Note that \fIX\fR and \fIy\fR follow the general rules set out
+above. In other words, Tcl 8.4, for example, will look at these 5
+environment variables:
+.CS
+\fB$::env(TCL8.4_TM_PATH)\fR  \fB$::env(TCL8_4_TM_PATH)\fR
+\fB$::env(TCL8.3_TM_PATH)\fR  \fB$::env(TCL8_3_TM_PATH)\fR
+\fB$::env(TCL8.2_TM_PATH)\fR  \fB$::env(TCL8_2_TM_PATH)\fR
+\fB$::env(TCL8.1_TM_PATH)\fR  \fB$::env(TCL8_1_TM_PATH)\fR
+\fB$::env(TCL8.0_TM_PATH)\fR  \fB$::env(TCL8_0_TM_PATH)\fR
+.CE
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+package(n), Tcl Improvement Proposal #189
+.QW "\fITcl Modules\fR"
+(online at http://tip.tcl.tk/189.html), Tcl Improvement Proposal #190
+.QW "\fIImplementation Choices for Tcl Modules\fR"
+(online at http://tip.tcl.tk/190.html)
+.SH "KEYWORDS"
+modules, package
diff --git a/doc/trace.n b/doc/trace.n
index 552b269..9d40123 100644
--- a/doc/trace.n
+++ b/doc/trace.n
@@ -15,52 +15,57 @@ trace \- Monitor variable accesses, command usages and command executions
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBtrace \fIoption\fR ?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command causes Tcl commands to be executed whenever certain operations are
-invoked.  The legal \fIoption\fR's (which may be abbreviated) are:
+invoked.  The legal \fIoption\fRs (which may be abbreviated) are:
 .TP
 \fBtrace add \fItype name ops ?args?\fR
 Where \fItype\fR is \fBcommand\fR, \fBexecution\fR, or \fBvariable\fR.
 .RS
 .TP
-\fBtrace add command\fR \fIname ops command\fR
-Arrange for \fIcommand\fR to be executed whenever command \fIname\fR
-is modified in one of the ways given by the list \fIops\fR.  \fIName\fR will be
-resolved using the usual namespace resolution rules used by
-procedures.  If the command does not exist, an error will be thrown.
+\fBtrace add command\fR \fIname ops commandPrefix\fR
+.
+Arrange for \fIcommandPrefix\fR to be executed (with additional arguments)
+whenever command \fIname\fR is modified in one of the ways given by the list
+\fIops\fR. \fIName\fR will be resolved using the usual namespace resolution
+rules used by commands. If the command does not exist, an error will be
+thrown.
 .RS
 .PP
 \fIOps\fR indicates which operations are of interest, and is a list of
 one or more of the following items:
 .TP
 \fBrename\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the command is renamed.  Note that
-renaming to the empty string is considered deletion, and will not
-be traced with '\fBrename\fR'.
+.
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR whenever the traced command is renamed.  Note that
+renaming to the empty string is considered deletion, and will not be traced
+with
+.QW \fBrename\fR .
 .TP
 \fBdelete\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR when the command is deleted.  Commands can be
-deleted explicitly by using the \fBrename\fR command to rename the
-command to an empty string.  Commands are also deleted when the
-interpreter is deleted, but traces will not be invoked because there is no
-interpreter in which to execute them.
+.
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR when the traced command is deleted. Commands can be
+deleted explicitly by using the \fBrename\fR command to rename the command to
+an empty string. Commands are also deleted when the interpreter is deleted,
+but traces will not be invoked because there is no interpreter in which to
+execute them.
 .PP
-When the trace triggers, depending on the operations being traced, a 
-number of arguments are appended to \fIcommand\fR so that the actual 
-command is as follows:
+When the trace triggers, depending on the operations being traced, a number of
+arguments are appended to \fIcommandPrefix\fR so that the actual command is as
+follows:
 .CS
-\fIcommand oldName newName op\fR
+\fIcommandPrefix oldName newName op\fR
 .CE
-\fIOldName\fR and \fInewName\fR give the traced command's current
-(old) name, and the name to which it is being renamed (the empty
-string if this is a 'delete' operation).
+\fIOldName\fR and \fInewName\fR give the traced command's current (old) name,
+and the name to which it is being renamed (the empty string if this is a
+.QW delete
+operation).
 \fIOp\fR indicates what operation is being performed on the
 command, and is one of \fBrename\fR or \fBdelete\fR as
 defined above.  The trace operation cannot be used to stop a command
 from being deleted.  Tcl will always remove the command once the trace
-is complete.  Recursive renaming or deleting will not cause further traces 
+is complete.  Recursive renaming or deleting will not cause further traces
 of the same type to be evaluated, so a delete trace which itself
 deletes the command, or a rename trace which itself renames the
 command will not cause further trace evaluations to occur.
@@ -68,90 +73,100 @@ Both \fIoldName\fR and \fInewName\fR are fully qualified with any namespace(s)
 in which they appear.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBtrace add execution\fR \fIname ops command\fR
-Arrange for \fIcommand\fR to be executed whenever command \fIname\fR
-is executed, with traces occurring at the points indicated by the list
-\fIops\fR.  \fIName\fR will be
-resolved using the usual namespace resolution rules used by
-procedures.  If the command does not exist, an error will be thrown.
+\fBtrace add execution\fR \fIname ops commandPrefix\fR
+.
+Arrange for \fIcommandPrefix\fR to be executed (with additional arguments)
+whenever command \fIname\fR is executed, with traces occurring at the points
+indicated by the list \fIops\fR.  \fIName\fR will be resolved using the usual
+namespace resolution rules used by commands.  If the command does not exist,
+an error will be thrown.
 .RS
 .PP
 \fIOps\fR indicates which operations are of interest, and is a list of
 one or more of the following items:
 .TP
 \fBenter\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the command \fIname\fR is executed,
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR whenever the command \fIname\fR is executed,
 just before the actual execution takes place.
 .TP
 \fBleave\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the command \fIname\fR is executed,
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR whenever the command \fIname\fR is executed,
 just after the actual execution takes place.
 .TP
 \fBenterstep\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR for every Tcl command which is executed 
-inside the procedure \fIname\fR, just before the actual execution
-takes place.  For example if we have 'proc foo {} { puts "hello" }',
-then an \fIenterstep\fR trace would be 
-invoked just before \fIputs "hello"\fR is executed.
-Setting an \fIenterstep\fR trace on a \fIcommand\fR
-will not result in an error and is simply ignored.
+.
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR for every Tcl command which is executed from the
+start of the execution of the procedure \fIname\fR until that
+procedure finishes. \fICommandPrefix\fR is invoked just before the actual
+execution of the Tcl command being reported takes place.  For example
+if we have
+.QW "proc foo {} { puts \N'34'hello\N'34' }" ,
+then an \fIenterstep\fR trace would be invoked just before
+.QW "\fIputs \N'34'hello\N'34'\fR"
+is executed.
+Setting an \fIenterstep\fR trace on a command \fIname\fR that does not refer
+to a procedure will not result in an error and is simply ignored.
 .TP
 \fBleavestep\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR for every Tcl command which is executed 
-inside the procedure \fIname\fR, just after the actual execution
-takes place.
-Setting a \fIleavestep\fR trace on a \fIcommand\fR
-will not result in an error and is simply ignored.
+.
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR for every Tcl command which is executed from the
+start of the execution of the procedure \fIname\fR until that
+procedure finishes. \fICommandPrefix\fR is invoked just after the actual
+execution of the Tcl command being reported takes place.
+Setting a \fIleavestep\fR trace on a command \fIname\fR that does not refer to
+a procedure will not result in an error and is simply ignored.
 .PP
-When the trace triggers, depending on the operations being traced, a 
-number of arguments are appended to \fIcommand\fR so that the actual 
+When the trace triggers, depending on the operations being traced, a
+number of arguments are appended to \fIcommandPrefix\fR so that the actual
 command is as follows:
 .PP
 For \fBenter\fR and \fBenterstep\fR operations:
 .CS
-\fIcommand command-string op\fR
+\fIcommandPrefix command-string op\fR
 .CE
-\fICommand-string\fR gives the complete current command being 
-executed (the traced command for a \fBenter\fR operation, an 
+\fICommand-string\fR gives the complete current command being
+executed (the traced command for a \fBenter\fR operation, an
 arbitrary command for a \fBenterstep\fR operation), including
 all arguments in their fully expanded form.
 \fIOp\fR indicates what operation is being performed on the
 command execution, and is one of \fBenter\fR or \fBenterstep\fR as
 defined above.  The trace operation can be used to stop the
 command from executing, by deleting the command in question.  Of
-course when the command is subsequently executed, an 'invalid command'
+course when the command is subsequently executed, an
+.QW "invalid command"
 error will occur.
 .PP
 For \fBleave\fR and \fBleavestep\fR operations:
 .CS
 \fIcommand command-string code result op\fR
 .CE
-\fICommand-string\fR gives the complete current command being 
-executed (the traced command for a \fBenter\fR operation, an 
+\fICommand-string\fR gives the complete current command being
+executed (the traced command for a \fBenter\fR operation, an
 arbitrary command for a \fBenterstep\fR operation), including
 all arguments in their fully expanded form.
 \fICode\fR gives the result code of that execution, and \fIresult\fR
 the result string.
 \fIOp\fR indicates what operation is being performed on the
 command execution, and is one of \fBleave\fR or \fBleavestep\fR as
-defined above.  
+defined above.
 Note that the creation of many \fBenterstep\fR or
 \fBleavestep\fR traces can lead to unintuitive results, since the
 invoked commands from one trace can themselves lead to further
 command invocations for other traces.
 .PP
-\fICommand\fR executes in the same context as the code that invoked
-the traced operation: thus the \fIcommand\fR, if invoked from a procedure,
-will have access to the same local variables as code in the procedure.
-This context may be different than the context in which the trace was
-created. If \fIcommand\fR invokes a procedure (which it normally does)
-then the procedure will have to use upvar or uplevel commands if it wishes
-to access the local variables of the code which invoked the trace operation.
+\fICommandPrefix\fR executes in the same context as the code that invoked
+the traced operation: thus the \fIcommandPrefix\fR, if invoked from a
+procedure, will have access to the same local variables as code in the
+procedure. This context may be different than the context in which the trace
+was created. If \fIcommandPrefix\fR invokes a procedure (which it normally
+does) then the procedure will have to use \fBupvar\fR or \fBuplevel\fR
+commands if it wishes to access the local variables of the code which invoked
+the trace operation.
 .PP
-While \fIcommand\fR is executing during an execution trace, traces
-on \fIname\fR are temporarily disabled. This allows the \fIcommand\fR
+While \fIcommandPrefix\fR is executing during an execution trace, traces
+on \fIname\fR are temporarily disabled. This allows the \fIcommandPrefix\fR
 to execute \fIname\fR in its body without invoking any other traces again.
-If an error occurs while executing the \fIcommand\fR body, then the
+If an error occurs while executing the \fIcommandPrefix\fR, then the
 command \fIname\fR as a whole will return that same error.
 .PP
 When multiple traces are set on \fIname\fR, then for \fIenter\fR
@@ -160,17 +175,17 @@ in the reverse order of how the traces were originally created;
 and for \fIleave\fR and \fIleavestep\fR operations, the traced
 commands are invoked in the original order of creation.
 .PP
-The behavior of execution traces is currently undefined for a command 
+The behavior of execution traces is currently undefined for a command
 \fIname\fR imported into another namespace.
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBtrace add variable\fI name ops command\fR
-Arrange for \fIcommand\fR to be executed whenever variable \fIname\fR
+\fBtrace add variable\fI name ops commandPrefix\fR
+Arrange for \fIcommandPrefix\fR to be executed whenever variable \fIname\fR
 is accessed in one of the ways given by the list \fIops\fR.  \fIName\fR may
 refer to a normal variable, an element of an array, or to an array
 as a whole (i.e. \fIname\fR may be just the name of an array, with no
 parenthesized index).  If \fIname\fR refers to a whole array, then
-\fIcommand\fR is invoked whenever any element of the array is
+\fIcommandPrefix\fR is invoked whenever any element of the array is
 manipulated.  If the variable does not exist, it will be created but
 will not be given a value, so it will be visible to \fBnamespace which\fR
 queries, but not to \fBinfo exists\fR queries.
@@ -180,20 +195,20 @@ queries, but not to \fBinfo exists\fR queries.
 one or more of the following items:
 .TP
 \fBarray\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the variable is accessed or modified via
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR whenever the variable is accessed or modified via
 the \fBarray\fR command, provided that \fIname\fR is not a scalar
 variable at the time that the \fBarray\fR command is invoked.  If
 \fIname\fR is a scalar variable, the access via the \fBarray\fR
 command will not trigger the trace.
 .TP
 \fBread\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the variable is read.
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR whenever the variable is read.
 .TP
 \fBwrite\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the variable is written.
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR whenever the variable is written.
 .TP
 \fBunset\fR
-Invoke \fIcommand\fR whenever the variable is unset.  Variables
+Invoke \fIcommandPrefix\fR whenever the variable is unset.  Variables
 can be unset explicitly with the \fBunset\fR command, or
 implicitly when procedures return (all of their local variables
 are unset).  Variables are also unset when interpreters are
@@ -201,9 +216,9 @@ deleted, but traces will not be invoked because there is no
 interpreter in which to execute them.
 .PP
 When the trace triggers, three arguments are appended to
-\fIcommand\fR so that the actual command is as follows:
+\fIcommandPrefix\fR so that the actual command is as follows:
 .CS
-\fIcommand name1 name2 op\fR
+\fIcommandPrefix name1 name2 op\fR
 .CE
 \fIName1\fR and \fIname2\fR give the name(s) for the variable
 being accessed:  if the variable is a scalar then \fIname1\fR
@@ -221,11 +236,11 @@ different name.
 variable, and is one of \fBread\fR, \fBwrite\fR, or \fBunset\fR as
 defined above.
 .PP
-\fICommand\fR executes in the same context as the code that invoked
+\fICommandPrefix\fR executes in the same context as the code that invoked
 the traced operation:  if the variable was accessed as part of a Tcl
-procedure, then \fIcommand\fR will have access to the same local
+procedure, then \fIcommandPrefix\fR will have access to the same local
 variables as code in the procedure.  This context may be different
-than the context in which the trace was created. If \fIcommand\fR
+than the context in which the trace was created. If \fIcommandPrefix\fR
 invokes a procedure (which it normally does) then the procedure will
 have to use \fBupvar\fR or \fBuplevel\fR if it wishes to access the
 traced variable.  Note also that \fIname1\fR may not necessarily be
@@ -233,25 +248,25 @@ the same as the name used to set the trace on the variable;
 differences can occur if the access is made through a variable defined
 with the \fBupvar\fR command.
 .PP
-For read and write traces, \fIcommand\fR can modify the variable to
-affect the result of the traced operation.  If \fIcommand\fR modifies
+For read and write traces, \fIcommandPrefix\fR can modify the variable to
+affect the result of the traced operation.  If \fIcommandPrefix\fR modifies
 the value of a variable during a read or write trace, then the new
 value will be returned as the result of the traced operation.  The
-return value from  \fIcommand\fR is ignored except that if it returns
+return value from  \fIcommandPrefix\fR is ignored except that if it returns
 an error of any sort then the traced operation also returns an error
 with the same error message returned by the trace command (this
 mechanism can be used to implement read-only variables, for example).
-For write traces, \fIcommand\fR is invoked after the variable's value
+For write traces, \fIcommandPrefix\fR is invoked after the variable's value
 has been changed; it can write a new value into the variable to
 override the original value specified in the write operation.  To
-implement read-only variables, \fIcommand\fR will have to restore the
+implement read-only variables, \fIcommandPrefix\fR will have to restore the
 old value of the variable.
 .PP
-While \fIcommand\fR is executing during a read or write trace, traces
+While \fIcommandPrefix\fR is executing during a read or write trace, traces
 on the variable are temporarily disabled.  This means that reads and
-writes invoked by \fIcommand\fR will occur directly, without invoking
-\fIcommand\fR (or any other traces) again.  However, if \fIcommand\fR
-unsets the variable then unset traces will be invoked.
+writes invoked by \fIcommandPrefix\fR will occur directly, without invoking
+\fIcommandPrefix\fR (or any other traces) again.  However, if
+\fIcommandPrefix\fR unsets the variable then unset traces will be invoked.
 .PP
 When an unset trace is invoked, the variable has already been deleted:
 it will appear to be undefined with no traces.  If an unset occurs
@@ -279,28 +294,28 @@ This command returns an empty string.
 .RE
 .RE
 .TP
-\fBtrace remove \fItype name opList command\fR
+\fBtrace remove \fItype name opList commandPrefix\fR
 Where \fItype\fR is either \fBcommand\fR, \fBexecution\fR or \fBvariable\fR.
 .RS
 .TP
-\fBtrace remove command\fI name opList command\fR
+\fBtrace remove command\fI name opList commandPrefix\fR
 If there is a trace set on command \fIname\fR with the operations and
-command given by \fIopList\fR and \fIcommand\fR, then the trace is
-removed, so that \fIcommand\fR will never again be invoked.  Returns
-an empty string.   If \fIname\fR doesn't exist, the command will throw
+command given by \fIopList\fR and \fIcommandPrefix\fR, then the trace is
+removed, so that \fIcommandPrefix\fR will never again be invoked.  Returns
+an empty string.   If \fIname\fR does not exist, the command will throw
 an error.
 .TP
-\fBtrace remove execution\fI name opList command\fR
+\fBtrace remove execution\fI name opList commandPrefix\fR
 If there is a trace set on command \fIname\fR with the operations and
-command given by \fIopList\fR and \fIcommand\fR, then the trace is
-removed, so that \fIcommand\fR will never again be invoked.  Returns
-an empty string.   If \fIname\fR doesn't exist, the command will throw
+command given by \fIopList\fR and \fIcommandPrefix\fR, then the trace is
+removed, so that \fIcommandPrefix\fR will never again be invoked.  Returns
+an empty string.   If \fIname\fR does not exist, the command will throw
 an error.
 .TP
-\fBtrace remove variable\fI name opList command\fR
+\fBtrace remove variable\fI name opList commandPrefix\fR
 If there is a trace set on variable \fIname\fR with the operations and
-command given by \fIopList\fR and \fIcommand\fR, then the trace is
-removed, so that \fIcommand\fR will never again be invoked.  Returns
+command given by \fIopList\fR and \fIcommandPrefix\fR, then the trace is
+removed, so that \fIcommandPrefix\fR will never again be invoked.  Returns
 an empty string.
 .RE
 .TP
@@ -311,24 +326,24 @@ Where \fItype\fR is either \fBcommand\fR, \fBexecution\fR or \fBvariable\fR.
 \fBtrace info command\fI name\fR
 Returns a list containing one element for each trace currently set on
 command \fIname\fR. Each element of the list is itself a list
-containing two elements, which are the \fIopList\fR and \fIcommand\fR
-associated with the trace.  If \fIname\fR doesn't have any traces set,
+containing two elements, which are the \fIopList\fR and \fIcommandPrefix\fR
+associated with the trace.  If \fIname\fR does not have any traces set,
 then the result of the command will be an empty string.  If \fIname\fR
-doesn't exist, the command will throw an error.
+does not exist, the command will throw an error.
 .TP
 \fBtrace info execution\fI name\fR
 Returns a list containing one element for each trace currently set on
 command \fIname\fR. Each element of the list is itself a list
-containing two elements, which are the \fIopList\fR and \fIcommand\fR
-associated with the trace.  If \fIname\fR doesn't have any traces set,
+containing two elements, which are the \fIopList\fR and \fIcommandPrefix\fR
+associated with the trace.  If \fIname\fR does not have any traces set,
 then the result of the command will be an empty string.  If \fIname\fR
-doesn't exist, the command will throw an error.
+does not exist, the command will throw an error.
 .TP
 \fBtrace info variable\fI name\fR
 Returns a list containing one element for each trace currently set on
 variable \fIname\fR.  Each element of the list is itself a list
-containing two elements, which are the \fIopList\fR and \fIcommand\fR
-associated with the trace.  If \fIname\fR doesn't exist or doesn't
+containing two elements, which are the \fIopList\fR and \fIcommandPrefix\fR
+associated with the trace.  If \fIname\fR does not exist or does not
 have any traces set, then the result of the command will be an empty
 string.
 .RE
@@ -341,8 +356,8 @@ This is equivalent to \fBtrace add variable \fIname ops command\fR.
 .TP
 \fBtrace vdelete \fIname ops command\fR
 This is equivalent to \fBtrace remove variable \fIname ops command\fR
-.TP 
-\fBtrace vinfo \fIname\fR 
+.TP
+\fBtrace vinfo \fIname\fR
 This is equivalent to \fBtrace info variable \fIname\fR
 .RE
 .PP
@@ -375,9 +390,22 @@ proc doMult args {
 \fBtrace add\fR variable foo write doMult
 \fBtrace add\fR variable bar write doMult
 .CE
-
+.PP
+Print a trace of what commands are executed during the processing of a Tcl
+procedure:
+.CS
+proc x {} { y }
+proc y {} { z }
+proc z {} { puts hello }
+proc report args {puts [info level 0]}
+\fBtrace add\fR execution x enterstep report
+x
+  \(-> \fIreport y enterstep\fR
+    \fIreport z enterstep\fR
+    \fIreport {puts hello} enterstep\fR
+    \fIhello\fR
+.CE
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 set(n), unset(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 read, command, rename, variable, write, trace, unset
diff --git a/doc/unknown.n b/doc/unknown.n
index a5cbe6f..c258daa 100644
--- a/doc/unknown.n
+++ b/doc/unknown.n
@@ -14,22 +14,24 @@ unknown \- Handle attempts to use non-existent commands
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBunknown \fIcmdName \fR?\fIarg arg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command is invoked by the Tcl interpreter whenever a script
-tries to invoke a command that doesn't exist.  The default implementation
+tries to invoke a command that does not exist.  The default implementation
 of \fBunknown\fR is a library procedure defined when Tcl initializes an
 interpreter.  You can override the default \fBunknown\fR to change its
-functionality.  Note that there is no default implementation of
-\fBunknown\fR in a safe interpreter.
+functionality, or you can register a new handler for individual namespaces
+using the \fBnamespace unknown\fR command.  Note that there is no default 
+implementation of \fBunknown\fR in a safe interpreter.
 .PP
 If the Tcl interpreter encounters a command name for which there
-is not a defined command, then Tcl checks for the existence of
-a command named \fBunknown\fR.
-If there is no such command, then the interpreter returns an
-error.
-If the \fBunknown\fR command exists, then it is invoked with
+is not a defined command (in either the current namespace, or the 
+global namespace), then Tcl checks for the existence of
+an unknown handler for the current namespace. By default, this
+handler is a command named \fB::unknown\fR.  If there is no such 
+command, then the interpreter returns an error.
+If the \fBunknown\fR command exists (or a new handler has been
+registered for the current namespace), then it is invoked with
 arguments consisting of the fully-substituted name and arguments
 for the original non-existent command.
 The \fBunknown\fR command typically does things like searching
@@ -49,7 +51,7 @@ If the auto-load fails then \fBunknown\fR calls \fBauto_execok\fR
 to see if there is an executable file by the name \fIcmd\fR.
 If so, it invokes the Tcl \fBexec\fR command
 with \fIcmd\fR and all the \fIargs\fR as arguments.
-If \fIcmd\fR can't be auto-executed, \fBunknown\fR checks to
+If \fIcmd\fR cannot be auto-executed, \fBunknown\fR checks to
 see if the command was invoked at top-level and outside of any
 script.  If so, then \fBunknown\fR takes two additional steps.
 First, it sees if \fIcmd\fR has one of the following three forms:
@@ -80,12 +82,10 @@ rename \fBunknown\fR _original_unknown
 # Provide our own implementation
 proc \fBunknown\fR args {
     puts stderr "WARNING: unknown command: $args"
-    uplevel 1 [list _original_unknown {expand}$args]
+    uplevel 1 [list _original_unknown {*}$args]
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-info(n), proc(n), interp(n), library(n)
-
+info(n), proc(n), interp(n), library(n), namespace(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 error, non-existent command
diff --git a/doc/unload.n b/doc/unload.n
new file mode 100644
index 0000000..f060cd6
--- /dev/null
+++ b/doc/unload.n
@@ -0,0 +1,162 @@
+'\"
+'\" Copyright (c) 2003 George Petasis <petasis@iit.demokritos.gr>.
+'\"
+'\" See the file "license.terms" for information on usage and redistribution
+'\" of this file, and for a DISCLAIMER OF ALL WARRANTIES.
+'\" 
+.so man.macros
+.TH unload n 8.5 Tcl "Tcl Built-In Commands"
+.BS
+'\" Note:  do not modify the .SH NAME line immediately below!
+.SH NAME
+unload \- Unload machine code
+.SH SYNOPSIS
+\fBunload \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIfileName\fR
+.br
+\fBunload \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIfileName packageName\fR
+.br
+\fBunload \fR?\fIswitches\fR? \fIfileName packageName interp\fR
+.BE
+.SH DESCRIPTION
+.PP
+This command tries to unload shared libraries previously loaded
+with \fBload\fR from the application's address space.  \fIfileName\fR
+is the name of the file containing the library file to be unload;  it
+must be the same as the filename provided to \fBload\fR for
+loading the library.
+The \fIpackageName\fR argument is the name of the package (as
+determined by or passed to \fBload\fR), and is used to
+compute the name of the unload procedure; if not supplied, it is
+computed from \fIfileName\fR in the same manner as \fBload\fR.
+The \fIinterp\fR argument is the path name of the interpreter from
+which to unload the package (see the \fBinterp\fR manual entry for
+details); if \fIinterp\fR is omitted, it defaults to the
+interpreter in which the \fBunload\fR command was invoked.
+.PP
+If the initial arguments to \fBunload\fR start with \fB\-\fR then
+they are treated as switches.  The following switches are
+currently supported:
+.TP
+\fB\-nocomplain\fR
+.
+Suppresses all error messages. If this switch is given, \fBunload\fR will
+never report an error.
+.TP
+\fB\-keeplibrary\fR
+.
+This switch will prevent \fBunload\fR from issuing the operating system call
+that will unload the library from the process. 
+.TP
+\fB\-\|\-\fR
+.
+Marks the end of switches.  The argument following this one will
+be treated as a \fIfileName\fR even if it starts with a \fB\-\fR.
+.SS "UNLOAD OPERATION"
+.PP
+When a file containing a shared library is loaded through the
+\fBload\fR command, Tcl associates two reference counts to the library
+file. The first counter shows how many times the library has been
+loaded into normal (trusted) interpreters while the second describes how many
+times the library has been loaded into safe interpreters. As a file containing
+a shared library can be loaded only once by Tcl (with the first \fBload\fR
+call on the file), these counters track how many interpreters use the library.
+Each subsequent call to \fBload\fR after the first simply increments the
+proper reference count.
+.PP
+\fBunload\fR works in the opposite direction. As a first step, \fBunload\fR
+will check whether the library is unloadable: an unloadable library exports
+a special unload procedure. The name of the unload procedure is determined by
+\fIpackageName\fR and whether or not the target interpreter
+is a safe one.  For normal interpreters the name of the initialization
+procedure will have the form \fIpkg\fB_Unload\fR, where \fIpkg\fR
+is the same as \fIpackageName\fR except that the first letter is
+converted to upper case and all other letters
+are converted to lower case.  For example, if \fIpackageName\fR is
+\fBfoo\fR or \fBFOo\fR, the initialization procedure's name will
+be \fBFoo_Unload\fR.
+If the target interpreter is a safe interpreter, then the name
+of the initialization procedure will be \fIpkg\fB_SafeUnload\fR
+instead of \fIpkg\fB_Unload\fR.
+.PP
+If \fBunload\fR determines that a library is not unloadable (or unload
+functionality has been disabled during compilation), an error will be returned.
+If the library is unloadable, then \fBunload\fR will call the unload
+procedure. If the unload procedure returns \fBTCL_OK\fR, \fBunload\fR will proceed
+and decrease the proper reference count (depending on the target interpreter
+type). When both reference counts have reached 0, the library will be
+detached from the process.
+.SS "UNLOAD HOOK PROTOTYPE"
+.PP
+The unload procedure must match the following prototype:
+.CS
+typedef int Tcl_PackageUnloadProc(Tcl_Interp *\fIinterp\fR, int \fIflags\fR);
+.CE
+.PP
+The \fIinterp\fR argument identifies the interpreter from which the
+library is to be unloaded.  The unload procedure must return
+\fBTCL_OK\fR or \fBTCL_ERROR\fR to indicate whether or not it completed
+successfully;  in the event of an error it should set the interpreter's result
+to point to an error message.  In this case, the result of the
+\fBunload\fR command will be the result returned by the unload procedure.
+.PP
+The \fIflags\fR argument can be either \fBTCL_UNLOAD_DETACH_FROM_INTERPRETER\fR
+or \fBTCL_UNLOAD_DETACH_FROM_PROCESS\fR. In case the library will remain
+attached to the process after the unload procedure returns (i.e. because
+the library is used by other interpreters),
+\fBTCL_UNLOAD_DETACH_FROM_INTERPRETER\fR will be defined. However, if the
+library is used only by the target interpreter and the library will be
+detached from the application as soon as the unload procedure returns,
+the \fIflags\fR argument will be set to \fBTCL_UNLOAD_DETACH_FROM_PROCESS\fR. 
+.SS NOTES
+.PP
+The \fBunload\fR command cannot unload libraries that are statically
+linked with the application.
+If \fIfileName\fR is an empty string, then the \fIpackageName\fR argument must
+be specified.
+.PP
+If \fIpackageName\fR is omitted or specified as an empty string,
+Tcl tries to guess the name of the package.
+This may be done differently on different platforms.
+The default guess, which is used on most UNIX platforms, is to
+take the last element of \fIfileName\fR, strip off the first
+three characters if they are \fBlib\fR, and use any following
+alphabetic and underline characters as the module name.
+For example, the command \fBunload libxyz4.2.so\fR uses the module
+name \fBxyz\fR and the command \fBunload bin/last.so {}\fR uses the
+module name \fBlast\fR.
+.SH "PORTABILITY ISSUES"
+.TP
+\fBUnix\fR\0\0\0\0\0
+.
+Not all unix operating systems support library unloading. Under such
+an operating system \fBunload\fR returns an error (unless \fB\-nocomplain\fR
+has been specified).
+.SH BUGS
+.PP
+If the same file is \fBload\fRed by different \fIfileName\fRs, it will
+be loaded into the process's address space multiple times.  The
+behavior of this varies from system to system (some systems may
+detect the redundant loads, others may not). In case a library has been
+silently detached by the operating system (and as a result Tcl thinks the
+library is still loaded), it may be dangerous to use
+\fBunload\fR on such a library (as the library will be completely detached
+from the application while some interpreters will continue to use it).
+.SH EXAMPLE
+If an unloadable module in the file \fBfoobar.dll\fR had been loaded
+using the \fBload\fR command like this (on Windows):
+.CS
+load c:/some/dir/foobar.dll
+.CE
+then it would be unloaded like this:
+.CS
+\fBunload\fR c:/some/dir/foobar.dll
+.CE
+.PP
+This allows a C code module to be installed temporarily into a
+long-running Tcl program and then removed again (either because it is
+no longer needed or because it is being updated with a new version)
+without having to shut down the overall Tcl process.
+.SH "SEE ALSO"
+info sharedlibextension, load(n), safe(n)
+.SH KEYWORDS
+binary code, unloading, safe interpreter, shared library
diff --git a/doc/unset.n b/doc/unset.n
index 2bde1e2..29d7e7c 100644
--- a/doc/unset.n
+++ b/doc/unset.n
@@ -15,7 +15,6 @@ unset \- Delete variables
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBunset \fR?\fI\-nocomplain\fR? ?\fI\-\-\fR? ?\fIname name name ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 This command removes one or more variables.
@@ -26,16 +25,14 @@ element is removed without affecting the rest of the array.
 If a \fIname\fR consists of an array name with no parenthesized
 index, then the entire array is deleted.
 The \fBunset\fR command returns an empty string as result.
-.VS 8.4
 If \fI\-nocomplain\fR is specified as the first argument, any possible
 errors are suppressed.  The option may not be abbreviated, in order to
 disambiguate it from possible variable names.  The option \fI\-\-\fR
 indicates the end of the options, and should be used if you wish to
 remove a variable with the same name as any of the options.
-.VE 8.4
 If an error occurs, any variables after the named one causing the error
 are not
-deleted.  An error can occur when the named variable doesn't exist, or the
+deleted.  An error can occur when the named variable does not exist, or the
 name refers to an array element but the variable is a scalar, or the name
 refers to a variable in a non-existent namespace.
 .SH EXAMPLE
@@ -59,9 +56,7 @@ parray squares
 puts "The prime squares are:"
 parray squares
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
 set(n), trace(n), upvar(n)
-
 .SH KEYWORDS
 remove, variable
diff --git a/doc/update.n b/doc/update.n
index 41a50f8..555766c 100644
--- a/doc/update.n
+++ b/doc/update.n
@@ -17,7 +17,8 @@ update \- Process pending events and idle callbacks
 
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
-This command is used to bring the application ``up to date''
+This command is used to bring the application
+.QW "up to date"
 by entering the event loop repeatedly until all pending events
 (including idle callbacks) have been processed.
 .PP
@@ -59,7 +60,7 @@ while {!$done} {
 .CE
 
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-after(n), bgerror(n)
+after(n), interp(n)
 
 .SH KEYWORDS
 event, flush, handler, idle, update
diff --git a/doc/uplevel.n b/doc/uplevel.n
index d34716c..c8ef0ff 100644
--- a/doc/uplevel.n
+++ b/doc/uplevel.n
@@ -14,7 +14,6 @@ uplevel \- Execute a script in a different stack frame
 .SH SYNOPSIS
 \fBuplevel \fR?\fIlevel\fR?\fI arg \fR?\fIarg ...\fR?
 .BE
-
 .SH DESCRIPTION
 .PP
 All of the \fIarg\fR arguments are concatenated as if they had
@@ -53,16 +52,16 @@ the command
 .CE
 then the \fBset\fR command will modify the same variable \fBx\fR in \fBb\fR's
 context:  the procedure \fBc\fR does not appear to be on the call stack
-when \fBd\fR is executing.  The command ``\fBinfo level\fR'' may
+when \fBd\fR is executing.  The \fBinfo level\fR command may
 be used to obtain the level of the current procedure.
 .PP
 \fBUplevel\fR makes it possible to implement new control
 constructs as Tcl procedures (for example, \fBuplevel\fR could
 be used to implement the \fBwhile\fR construct as a Tcl procedure).
 .PP
-\fBnamespace eval\fR is another way (besides procedure calls)
-that the Tcl naming context can change.
-It adds a call frame to the stack to represent the namespace context.
+The \fBnamespace eval\fR and \fBapply\fR commands offer other ways
+(besides procedure calls) that the Tcl naming context can change.
+They add a call frame to the stack to represent the namespace context.
 This means each \fBnamespace eval\fR command
 counts as another call level for \fBuplevel\fR and \fBupvar\fR commands.
 For example, \fBinfo level 1\fR will return a list
@@ -90,9 +89,7 @@ proc do {body while condition} {
     }
 }
 .CE
-
 .SH "SEE ALSO"
-namespace(n), upvar(n)
-
+apply(n), namespace(n), upvar(n)
 .SH KEYWORDS
 context, level, namespace, stack frame, variables
diff --git a/doc/upvar.n b/doc/upvar.n
index 03f4cd9..a255485 100644
--- a/doc/upvar.n
+++ b/doc/upvar.n
@@ -22,7 +22,7 @@ procedure to refer to variables in an enclosing procedure call or
 to global variables.
 \fILevel\fR may have any of the forms permitted for the \fBuplevel\fR
 command, and may be omitted if the first letter of the first \fIotherVar\fR
-isn't \fB#\fR or a digit (it defaults to \fB1\fR).
+is not \fB#\fR or a digit (it defaults to \fB1\fR).
 For each \fIotherVar\fR argument, \fBupvar\fR makes the variable
 by that name in the procedure frame given by \fIlevel\fR (or at
 global level, if \fIlevel\fR is \fB#0\fR) accessible
@@ -33,8 +33,8 @@ call;  it will be created the first time \fImyVar\fR is referenced, just like
 an ordinary variable.  There must not exist a variable by the
 name \fImyVar\fR at the time \fBupvar\fR is invoked.
 \fIMyVar\fR is always treated as the name of a variable, not an
-array element.  Even if the name looks like an array element,
-such as \fBa(b)\fR, a regular variable is created.
+array element.  An error is returned if the name looks like an array element,
+such as \fBa(b)\fR.
 \fIOtherVar\fR may refer to a scalar variable, an array,
 or an array element.
 \fBUpvar\fR returns an empty string.
@@ -44,14 +44,14 @@ procedure calling and also makes it easier to build new control constructs
 as Tcl procedures.
 For example, consider the following procedure:
 .CS
-proc add2 name {
+proc \fIadd2\fR name {
    \fBupvar\fR $name x
-   set x [expr $x+2]
+   set x [expr {$x + 2}]
 }
 .CE
-\fBadd2\fR is invoked with an argument giving the name of a variable,
-and it adds two to the value of that variable.
-Although \fBadd2\fR could have been implemented using \fBuplevel\fR
+If \fIadd2\fR is invoked with an argument giving the name of a variable,
+it adds two to the value of that variable.
+Although \fIadd2\fR could have been implemented using \fBuplevel\fR
 instead of \fBupvar\fR, \fBupvar\fR makes it simpler for \fBadd2\fR
 to access the variable in the caller's procedure frame.
 .PP
@@ -66,7 +66,6 @@ the outermost procedure call or the outermost \fBnamespace eval\fR command.
 Also, \fBuplevel #0\fR evaluates a script
 at top-level in the outermost namespace (the global namespace).
 .PP
-.VS
 If an upvar variable is unset (e.g. \fBx\fR in \fBadd2\fR above), the
 \fBunset\fR operation affects the variable it is linked to, not the
 upvar variable.  There is no way to unset an upvar variable except
@@ -80,19 +79,21 @@ unexpected manner.  If a variable trace is defined on \fIotherVar\fR, that
 trace will be triggered by actions involving \fImyVar\fR.  However,
 the trace procedure will be passed the name of \fImyVar\fR, rather
 than the name of \fIotherVar\fR.  Thus, the output of the following code
-will be \fBlocalVar\fR rather than \fBoriginalVar\fR:
+will be
+.QW "\fIlocalVar\fR"
+rather than
+.QW "\fIoriginalVar\fR" :
 .CS
-proc \fBtraceproc\fR { name index op } {
+proc \fItraceproc\fR { name index op } {
    puts $name
 }
-proc \fBsetByUpvar\fR { name value } {
+proc \fIsetByUpvar\fR { name value } {
    \fBupvar\fR $name localVar
    set localVar $value
 }
 set originalVar 1
-trace variable originalVar w \fBtraceproc\fR
-\fBsetByUpvar\fR originalVar 2
-}
+trace variable originalVar w \fItraceproc\fR
+\fIsetByUpvar\fR originalVar 2
 .CE
 .PP
 If \fIotherVar\fR refers to an element of an array, then variable
@@ -100,7 +101,6 @@ traces set for the entire array will not be invoked when \fImyVar\fR
 is accessed (but traces on the particular element will still be
 invoked).  In particular, if the array is \fBenv\fR, then changes
 made to \fImyVar\fR will not be passed to subprocesses correctly.
-.VE
 .SH EXAMPLE
 A \fBdecr\fR command that works like \fBincr\fR except it subtracts
 the value from the variable instead of adding it:
diff --git a/doc/vwait.n b/doc/vwait.n
index d1cdcbc..e7289e1 100644
--- a/doc/vwait.n
+++ b/doc/vwait.n
@@ -21,7 +21,7 @@ the application if no events are ready.  It continues processing
 events until some event handler sets the value of variable
 \fIvarName\fR.  Once \fIvarName\fR has been set, the \fBvwait\fR
 command will return as soon as the event handler that modified
-\fIvarName\fR completes.  \fIvarName\fR must globally scoped
+\fIvarName\fR completes.  \fIvarName\fR must be globally scoped
 (either with a call to \fBglobal\fR for the \fIvarName\fR, or with
 the full namespace path specification).
 .PP